Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
U.S. Treasuries represent a significant holding in many pension portfolios. You decide to analyze the yield curve for U.S. Treasury notes.
a. Using the data in the table below, calculate the 5 year spot and forward rates assuming annual compounding. Show your calculations.
U.S. Treasury Note Yield Curve Data
|
Years to Maturity
|
Par Coupon Yield to Maturity
|
Calculated Spot Rates
|
Calculated Forward Rates
|
|
1
|
5.00
|
5.00
|
5.00
|
|
2
|
5.20
|
5.21
|
5.42
|
|
3
|
6.00
|
6.05
|
7.75
|
|
4
|
7.00
|
7.16
|
10.56
|
|
5
|
7.00
|
?
|
?
|
b. Define and describe each of the following three concepts:
i. Yield to maturity.
ii. Spot rate.
iii. Forward rate.
Explain how these concepts are related.
c. You are considering the purchase of a zero coupon U.S. Treasury note with 4 years to maturity. Based on the above yield curve analysis, calculate both the expected yield to maturity and the price for the security. Show your calculations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose that the prices of zero coupon bonds with various maturities are given in the following table. The face value of each bond is $1,000.
|
Maturity (Years)
|
Price
|
|
1
|
$925.93
|
|
2
|
853.39
|
|
3
|
782.92
|
|
4
|
715.00
|
|
5
|
650.00
|
a. Calculate the forward rate of interest for each year.
b. How could you construct a 1 year forward loan beginning in year 3? Confirm that the rate on that loan equals the forward rate.
c. Repeat (b) for a 1 year forward loan beginning in year 4.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The spot rates of interest for five U.S. Treasury Securities are shown in the following exhibit. Assume all securities pay interest annually.
|
Spot Rates of Interest
|
|
Term to Maturity (years)
|
Spot Rate of Interest
|
|
1
|
13.00%
|
|
2
|
12.00
|
|
3
|
11.00
|
|
4
|
10.00
|
|
5
|
9.00
|
a. i. Compute the 2 year implied forward rate for a deferred loan beginning in 3 years.
ii. Explain your answer by using the expectations theory.
b. Compute the price of a 5 year annual pay Treasury security with a coupon rate of 9% by using the information in the exhibit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
More Annualized Returns
Suppose you buy some stock in Johnson & Johnson (JNJ) at a price of $50 per share. Three years later, you sell it for $62.50. No dividends were paid. What is your annualized return on this investment?
The situation here is a bit different because your holding period is now longer than a year, but the calculation is basically the same. For the three year holding period, your return is:
Percentage return = (Pt+1 Pt ) / Pt = ($62.50 $50) / $50 = .25 = 25%
How many three year holding periods are there in a single year? The answer is one third, so m in this case is 1/3. The annualized return is:
1 + EAR = (1 + holding period percentage return)m
= (1 + .25)1/3
= 1.0772
Subtracting the one, we get an annualized return of .0772, or 7.72 percent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Geometric versus Arithmetic Average Returns: 1926–2006
|
Series
|
Geometric Mean
|
Arithmetic Mean
|
Standard Deviation
|
|
Large company stocks
|
10.40%
|
12.30%
|
20.10%
|
|
Small company stocks
|
12.7
|
17.4
|
32.7
|
|
Long term corporate bonds
|
5.9
|
6.2
|
8.5
|
|
Long term government bonds
|
5.4
|
5.8
|
9.2
|
|
Intermediate term government bonds
|
5.3
|
5.4
|
5.7
|
|
U.S. Treasury bills
|
3.7
|
3.8
|
3.1
|
|
Inflation
|
3
|
3.1
|
4.3
|
are expressed in decimals (as opposed to percentages), the geometric average return is approximately equal to the arithmetic average return minus half the variance. For example, looking at the large company stocks, the arithmetic average is .123 and the standard deviation is .201, implying that the variance is .040401. The approximate geometric average is thus .123 .040401/2 = .1028, which is quite close to the actual value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating the Geometric Average Return
Calculate the geometric average return for the large company stocks for the last four years in Table 1.1 , 2003–2006.
First, convert percentages to decimal returns, add one, and then calculate their product.
|
Year
|
Large Company Stocks
|
Product
|
|
2003
|
28.68
|
1.2868
|
|
2004
|
10.88
|
X1.1088
|
|
2005
|
4.91
|
X1.0491
|
|
2006
|
15.79
|
X1.1579
|
| |
|
1.7332
|
Notice that the number 1.7332 is what our investment is worth after five years if we started with a one dollar investment. The geometric average return is then calculated as Geometric average return = 1.73321/4 1 = .1474, or 14.74% Thus the geometric average return is about 14.74 percent in this example. In contrast, in Example 1.4, the average arithmetic return was calculated as 15.07 percent. Here is a tip: If you are using a financial calculator, you can put $1 in as the present value, $1.7332 as the future value, and 4 as the number of periods. Then, solve for the unknown rate. You should get the same answer we did.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Account Balance Sheet
You want to buy 1,000 shares of Pfizer (PFE) at a price of $24 per share. You put up $18,000 and borrow the rest. What does your account balance sheet look like? What is your margin?
The 1,000 shares of Pfizer cost $24,000. You supply $18,000, so you must borrow $6,000. The account balance sheet looks like this:
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities and Account Equity
|
|
|
1,000 shares of Pfizer
|
$24,000
|
Margin loan
|
$6,000
|
| |
|
Account equity
|
18,000
|
|
Total
|
$24,000
|
Total
|
$24,000
|
Your margin is the account equity divided by the value of the stock owned:
Margin = $18,000 / $24,000 = .75 or 75 percent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating Initial Margin
Suppose you have $3,000 in cash in a trading account with a 50 percent initial margin requirement. What is the largest order you can place (ignoring commissions)? If the initial margin were 60 percent, how would your answer change?
When the initial margin is 50 percent, you must supply half of the total (and you borrow the other half). So, $6,000 is the largest order you could place. When the initial margin is 60 percent, your $3,000 must equal 60 percent of the total. In other words, it must be the case that $3,000 = 0.60 X Total order
Total order = $3,000/.60 = $5,000
As this example illustrates, the higher the initial margin required, the less you can borrow. When the margin is 50 percent, you could borrow $3,000. When the margin is 60 percent, you can borrow only $2,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How Low Can It Go?
In our previous example (Example), suppose the maintenance margin was 40 percent. At what price per share would you have been subject to a margin call?
To answer, let P * be the critical price. You own 300 shares, so, at that price, your stock is worth 300 X P *. You borrowed $6,600, so your account equity is equal to the value of your stock less the $6,600 you owe, or 300 X P * $6,600. We can summarize this information as follows:
Amount borrowed = $6,600
Value of stock = 300 X P *
Account equity = 300 X P * $6,600
From our preceding discussion, your percentage margin is your dollar margin (or account equity) divided by the value of the stock:
Margin = Account equity / Value of stock
=300 X P* $6,600 / 300 X P*
To find the critical price, we will set this margin to the maintenance margin and solve for P *:
Maintenance margin = Number of shares X P* Amount borrowed / Number of shares X P *
Solving for P * yields
P * = Amount borrowed / Number of shares 1 Maintenance margin
Finally, setting the maintenance margin equal to 40 percent, we obtain this critical price, P *:
P * = $6,600 /300 1 .40
=$6,600 / 180
=$36.67
At any price below $36.67, your margin will be less than 40 percent, and you will be subject to a margin call. So, $36.67 is the lowest possible price that could be reached before you are subject to a margin call.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Case of The Shorts
You shorted 5,000 shares of a particular stock at a price of $30 per share. The initial margin is 50 percent, and the maintenance margin is 40 percent. What does your account balance sheet look like following the short?
Following the short, your account becomes:
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities and Account Equity
|
|
|
Proceeds from sale
|
$150,000
|
Short position
|
$150,000
|
|
Initial margin deposit
|
75,000
|
Account equity
|
75,000
|
|
Total
|
$225,000
|
Total
|
$225,000
|
Notice that you shorted $150,000 worth of stock, so, with a 50 percent margin requirement, you deposited $75,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Margin Calls
In our previous example (Example 2.6), at what price per share would you be subject to a margin call?
To answer this one, let P * be the critical price. The short liability then is 5,000 shares at a price of P *, or 5,000 X P *. The total account value is $225,000, so the account equity is $225,000 5,000 X P *. We can summarize this information as follows:
Short position = 5,000 X P *
Account equity = $225,000 5,000 X P *
Notice that the total account value, $225,000, is the sum of your initial margin deposit plus the proceeds from the sale, and this amount does not change. Your margin is the account equity relative to the short liability:
Margin = Account equity / Value of stock
=Initial margin deposit + Short proceeds Number of shares X P * / Number of shares X P *
=$150,000+75,000 5,00 0 X P* / 5,000 X P *
To find the critical price, we will set this margin equal to the maintenance margin and solve for P *:
Maintenance margin = Initial margin deposit + Short proceeds Number of shares X P * / Number of shares X P *
Solving for P * yields:
P * = (Initial margin deposit + Short proceeds)/Number of shares
/
1 + Maintenance margin
Finally, setting the maintenance margin equal to 40 percent, we obtain this critical price, P *:
P * = $225,000/5,000 /1.40= $32.14
At any price above $32.14, your margin will be less than 40 percent, so you will be subject to a margin call. So $32.14 is the highest possible price that could be reached before you are subject to a margin call.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Put Returns
In our example for Macron Technology, suppose a put option is also available with a premium of $2.50. Calculate your percentage return for the three month holding period if the stock price declines to $47 per share. What is your annualized return? One put contract costs $250, so you can buy 40 of them. Notice that your 40 contracts give you the right to sell 4,000 shares at $50 per share.
If, in three months, Macron is selling for $47, your put options are worth $50
$47 = $3 each. You control 4,000 shares, so your options are worth 4,000 shares X $3 = $12,000 total. You invested $10,000, so your dollar return is $12,000 $10,000 = $2,000, and your percentage return is $2,000/$10,000 = 20%.
To annualize your return, we need to compute the effective annual return, recognizing that there are 4 three month periods in a year:
1 + EAR = 1.20 4
1 + EAR = 2.0736
EAR = 1.0736 = 107.36 %
Your annualized return is thus about 107 percent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following table, which gives a security analyst’s expected return on two stocks for two particular market returns:
|
Market Return
|
Aggressive Stock
|
Defensive Stock
|
|
5%
|
2%
|
6%
|
|
25
|
38
|
12
|
a. What are the betas of the two stocks?
b. What is the expected rate of return on each stock if the market return is equally likely to be 5% or 25%?
c. If the T bill rate is 6% and the market return is equally likely to be 5% or 25%, draw the SML for this economy.
d. Plot the two securities on the SML graph. What are the alphas of each?
e. What hurdle rate should be used by the management of the aggressive firm for a project with the risk characteristics of the defensive firm’s stock? If the simple CAPM is valid, which of the following situations in problems 6 to 12 are possible? Explain. Consider each situation independently.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table shows risk and return measures for two portfolios.
|
Portfolio
|
Average Annual Rate of Return
|
Standard Deviation
|
Beta
|
|
R
|
11%
|
10%
|
0.5
|
|
S&P 500
|
14%
|
12%
|
1.0
|
When plotting portfolio R on the preceding table relative to the SML, portfolio
R lies:
a. On the SML.
b. Below the SML.
c. Above the SML.
d. Insufficient data given.
When plotting portfolio R relative to the capital market line, portfolio R lies:
a. On the CML.
b. Below the CML.
c. Above the CML.
d. Insufficient data given.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joan McKay is a portfolio manager for a bank trust department. McKay meets with two clients, Kevin Murray and Lisa York, to review their investment objectives. Each client expresses an interest in changing his or her individual investment objectives. Both clients currently hold well diversified portfolios of risky assets.
a. Murray wants to increase the expected return of his portfolio. State what action McKay should take to achieve Murray’s objective. Justify your response in the context of the Capital Market Line.
b. York wants to reduce the risk exposure of her portfolio but does not want to engage in borrowing or lending activities to do so. State what action McKay should take to achieve York’s objective. Justify your response in the context of the Security Market Line.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Briefly explain whether investors should expect a higher return from holding Portfolio A versus Portfolio B under capital asset pricing theory (CAPM). Assume that both portfolios are fully diversified.
Karen Kay, a portfolio manager at Collins Asset Management, is using the capital asset pricing model for making recommendations to her clients. Her research department has developed the information shown in the following exhibit.
Forecast Returns, Standard Deviations, and Betas
| |
Forecast Return
|
Standard Deviation
|
Beta
|
|
Stock X
|
14.0%
|
36%
|
0.8
|
|
Stock Y
|
17.0
|
25
|
1.5
|
|
Market index
|
14.0
|
15
|
1.0
|
|
Risk free rate
|
5.0
|
|
|
a. Calculate expected return and alpha for each stock.
b. Identify and justify which stock would be more appropriate for an investor who wants to
i. add this stock to a well diversified equity portfolio.
ii. hold this stock as a single stock portfolio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The data below describe a three stock financial market that satisfies the single index model.
|
Stock
|
Capitalization
|
Beta
|
Mean Excess Return
|
Standard Deviation
|
|
A
|
$3,000
|
1.0
|
10%
|
40%
|
|
B
|
$1,940
|
0.2
|
2
|
30
|
|
C
|
$1,360
|
1.7
|
17
|
50
|
The single factor in this economy is perfectly correlated with the value weighted index of the stock market. The standard deviation of the market index portfolio is 25%.
a. What is the mean excess return of the index portfolio?
b. What is the covariance between stock B and the index?
c. Break down the variance of stock B into its systematic and firm specific components.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are estimates for two of the stocks in problem 1.
|
Stock
|
Expected Return
|
Beta
|
Firm Specific Standard Deviation
|
|
A
|
13
|
0.8
|
30
|
|
B
|
18
|
1.2
|
40
|
The market index has a standard deviation of 22% and the risk free rate is 8%.
a. What is the standard deviation of stocks A and B?
b. Suppose that we were to construct a portfolio with proportions:
Stock A: .30
Stock B: .45
T bills: .25
Compute the expected return, standard deviation, beta, and nonsystematic standard deviation of the portfolio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rewards for Incremental Performance
Consider an investment management fund currently managing a $5 billion portfolio. Suppose that the fund manager can devise a research program that could increase the portfolio rate of return by one tenth of 1% per year, a seemingly modest amount. This program would increase the dollar return to the portfolio by $5 billion X.001, or $5 million. Therefore, the fund would be willing to spend up to $5 million per year on research to increase stock returns by a mere tenth of 1% per year. With such large rewards for such small increases in investment performance, it should not be surprising that professional portfolio managers are willing to spend large sums on industry analysts, computer support, and research effort, and therefore that price changes are, generally speaking, difficult to predict.
With so many well backed analysts willing to spend considerable resources on research, easy pickings in the market are rare. Moreover, the incremental rates of return on research activity may be so small that only managers of the largest portfolios will find them worth pursuing.
Although it may not literally be true that “all” relevant information will be uncovered, it is virtually certain that there are many investigators hot on the trail of most leads that seem likely to improve investment performance. Competition among these many well backed, highly paid, aggressive analysts ensures that, as a general rule, stock prices ought to reflect available information regarding their proper levels.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using Abnormal Returns to Infer Damages
Suppose the stock of a company with market value of $100 million falls by 4% on the day that news of an accounting scandal surfaces. The rest of the market, however, generally did well that day. The market indexes were up sharply, and based on the usual relationship between the stock and the market, one would have expected a 2% gain on the stock. We would conclude that the impact of the scandal was a 6% drop in value, the difference between the 2% gain that we would have expected and the 4% drop actually observed. One might then infer that the damages sustained from the scandal were $6 million, because the value of the firm (after adjusting for general market movements) fell by 6% of $100 million when investors became aware of the news and reassessed the value of the stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A “random walk” occurs when:
a. Stock price changes are random but predictable.
b. Stock prices respond slowly to both new and old information.
c. Future price changes are uncorrelated with past price changes.
d. Past information is useful in predicting future prices.
Two basic assumptions of technical analysis are that security prices adjust:
a. Gradually to new information, and study of the economic environment provides an indication of future market movements.
b. Rapidly to new information, and study of the economic environment provides an indication of future market movements.
c. Rapidly to new information, and market prices are determined by the interaction between supply and demand.
d. Gradually to new information, and prices are determined by the interaction between supply and demand.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When technical analysts say a stock has good “relative strength,” they mean:
a. The ratio of the price of the stock to a market or industry index has trended upward.
b. The recent trading volume in the stock has exceeded the normal trading volume.
c. The total return on the stock has exceeded the total return on T bills.
d. The stock has performed well recently compared to its past performance.
Which one of the following would be a bullish signal to a technical analyst using contrary opinion rules?
a. The level of credit balances in investor accounts declines.
b. The ratio of bearish investment advisors to the number of advisory services expressing an optimistic opinion is historically quite high.
c. A large proportion of speculators expect the price of stock index futures to rise.
d. The ratio of over the counter (OTC) volume to New York Stock Exchange(NYSE) volume is relatively high.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Growth and value can be defined in several ways. “Growth” usually conveys the idea of a portfolio emphasizing or including only issues believed to possess above average future rates of per share earnings growth. Low current yield, high price to book ratios, and high price to earnings ratios are typical characteristics of such portfolios. “Value” usually conveys the idea of portfolios emphasizing or including only issues currently showing low price to book ratios, low price to earnings ratios, above average levels of dividend yield, and market prices believed to be below the issues’ intrinsic values.
a. Identify and provide reasons why, over an extended period of time, value stock investing might outperform growth stock investing.
b. Explain why the outcome suggested in (a) should not be possible in a market widely regarded as being highly efficient.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Don Sampson begins a meeting with his financial advisor by outlining his investment philosophy as shown below:
|
Statement Number
|
Statement
|
|
1
|
Investments should offer strong return potential but with very limited risk. I prefer to be conservative and to minimize losses, even if I miss out on substantial growth opportunities.
|
|
2
|
All nongovernmental investments should be in industry leading and financially strong companies.
|
|
3
|
Income needs should be met entirely through interest income and cash dividends. All equity securities held should pay cash dividends.
|
|
4
|
Investment decisions should be based primarily on consensus forecasts of general economic conditions and company specific growth.
|
|
5
|
If an investment falls below the purchase price, that security should be retained until it returns to its original cost. Conversely, I prefer to take quick profits on successful investments.
|
|
6
|
I will direct the purchase of investments, including derivative securities, periodically. These aggressive investments result from personal research and may not prove consistent with my investment policy. I have not kept records on the performance of similar past investments, but I have had some “big winners”.
|
Select the statement from the table above that best illustrates each of the following behavioral finance concepts. Justify your selection.
i. Mental accounting.
ii. Overconfidence (illusion of control).
iii. Reference dependence (framing).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Richard Roll, in an article on using the capital asset pricing model (CAPM) to evaluate portfolio performance, indicated that it may not be possible to evaluate portfolio management ability if there is an error in the benchmark used.
a. In evaluating portfolio performance, describe the general procedure, with emphasis on the benchmark employed.
b. Explain what Roll meant by the benchmark error and identify the specific problem with this benchmark.
c. Draw a graph that shows how a portfolio that has been judged as superior relative to a “measured” security market line (SML) can be inferior relative to the “true” SML.
d. Assume that you are informed that a given portfolio manager has been evaluated as superior when compared to the Dow Jones Industrial Average, the S&P 500, and the NYSE Composite Index. Explain whether this consensus would make you feel more comfortable regarding the portfolio manager’s true ability.
e. Although conceding the possible problem with benchmark errors as set forth by Roll, some contend this does not mean the CAPM is incorrect, but only that there is a measurement problem when implementing the theory. Others contend that because of benchmark errors the whole technique should be scrapped. Take and defend one of these positions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose a firm issued a 9% coupon bond 20 years ago. The bond now has 10 years left until its maturity date but the firm is having financial difficulties. Investors believe that the firm will be able to make good on the remaining interest payments, but that at the maturity date, the firm will be forced into bankruptcy, and bondholders will receive only 70% of par value. The bond is selling at $750.
Yield to maturity (YTM) would then be calculated using the following inputs:
| |
Expected YTM
|
Stated YTM
|
|
Coupon payment
|
$45
|
$45
|
|
Number of semiannual periods
|
20 periods
|
20 periods
|
|
Final payment
|
$700
|
$1,000
|
|
Price
|
$750
|
$750
|
The yield to maturity based on promised payments is 13.7%. Based on the expected payment of $700 at maturity, however, the yield to maturity would be only 11.6%. The stated yield to maturity is greater than the yield investors actually expect to receive.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume you have a 1 year investment horizon and are trying to choose among three bonds. All have the same degree of default risk and mature in 10 years. The first is a zero coupon bond that pays $1,000 at maturity. The second has an 8% coupon rate and pays the $80 coupon once per year. The third has a 10% coupon rate and pays the $100 coupon once per year.
a. If all three bonds are now priced to yield 8% to maturity, what are their prices?
b. If you expect their yields to maturity to be 8% at the beginning of next year, what will their prices be then? What is your before tax holding period return on each bond? If your tax bracket is 30% on ordinary income and 20% on capital gains income, what will your after tax rate of return be on each?
c. Recalculate your answer to (b) under the assumption that you expect the yields to maturity on each bond to be 7% at the beginning of next year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fill in the table below for the following zero coupon bonds, all of which have par values of $1,000.
|
Price
|
Maturity (years)
|
Bond Equivalent Yield to Maturity
|
|
$400
|
20
|
___
|
|
$500
|
20
|
___
|
|
$500
|
10
|
___
|
|
____
|
10
|
10%
|
|
____
|
10
|
8%
|
|
$400
|
__
|
8%
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that two firms issue bonds with the following characteristics. Both bonds are issued at par.
| |
ABC Bonds
|
XYZ Bonds
|
|
Issue size
|
$1.2 billion
|
$150 million
|
|
Maturity
|
10 years*
|
20 years
|
|
Coupon
|
9%
|
10%
|
|
Collateral
|
First mortgage
|
General debenture
|
|
Callable
|
Not callable
|
In 10 years
|
|
Call price
|
None
|
110
|
|
Sinking fund
|
None
|
Starting in 5 years
|
Ignoring credit quality, identify four features of these issues that might account for the lower coupon on the ABC debt. Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A large corporation issued both fixed and floating rate notes 5 years ago, with terms given in the following table:
| |
9% Coupon Notes
|
Floating Rate Note
|
|
Issue size
|
$250 million
|
$280 million
|
|
Original Maturity
|
20 years
|
10 years
|
|
Current price (% of par)
|
93
|
98
|
|
Current coupon
|
9%
|
8%
|
|
Coupon adjusts
|
Fixed coupon
|
Every year
|
|
Coupon reset rule
|
—
|
1 year T bill rate 2%
|
|
Callable
|
10 years after issue
|
10 years after issue
|
|
Call price
|
106
|
102.50
|
|
Sinking fund
|
None
|
None
|
|
Yield to maturity
|
9.9%
|
—
|
|
Price range since issued
|
$85–$112
|
$97–$102
|
a. Why is the price range greater for the 9% coupon bond than the float in grate note?
b. What factors could explain why the floating rate note is not always sold at par value?
c. Why is the call price for the floating rate note not of great importance to investors?
d. Is the probability of call for the fixed rate note high or low?
e. If the firm were to issue a fixed rate note with a 15 year maturity, what coupon rate would it need to offer to issue the bond at par value?
f. Why is an entry for yield to maturity for the floating rate note not appropriate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 30, 1999, Janice Kerr is considering one of the newly issued 10 year AAA corporate bonds shown in the following exhibit.
|
Description
|
Coupon
|
Price
|
Callable
|
Call Price
|
|
Sentinal, due May 30, 2009
|
6.00%
|
100
|
Noncallable
|
NA
|
|
Colina, due May 30, 2009
|
6.20%
|
100
|
Currently callable
|
102
|
a. Suppose that market interest rates decline by 100 basis points (i.e., 1%). Contrast the effect of this decline on the price of each bond.
b. Should Kerr prefer the Colina over the Sentinal bond when rates are expected to rise or to fall?
c. What would be the effect, if any, of an increase in the volatility of interest rates on the prices of each bond?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The multiple choice problems following are based on questions that appeared in past CFA examinations.
a. An investment in a coupon bond will provide the investor with a return equal to the bond’s yield to maturity at the time of purchase if:
i. The bond is not called for redemption at a price that exceeds its par value.
ii. All sinking fund payments are made in a prompt and timely fashion over the life of the issue.
iii. The reinvestment rate is the same as the bond’s yield to maturity and the bond is held until maturity.
iv. All of the above.
b. A bond with a call feature:
i. Is attractive because the immediate receipt of principal plus premium produces a high return.
ii. Is more apt to be called when interest rates are high because the interest savings will be greater.
iii. Will usually have a higher yield than a similar non callable bond.
iv. None of the above.
c. The yield to maturity on a bond is:
i. Below the coupon rate when the bond sells at a discount, and above the coupon rate when the bond sells at a premium.
ii. The discount rate that will set the present value of the payments equal to the bond price.
iii. The current yield plus the average annual capital gain rate.
iv. Based on the assumption that any payments received are reinvested at the coupon rate.
d. In which one of the following cases is the bond selling at a discount?
i. Coupon rate is greater than current yield, which is greater than yield to maturity.
ii. Coupon rate, current yield, and yield to maturity are all the same.
iii. Coupon rate is less than current yield, which is less than yield to maturity.
iv. Coupon rate is less than current yield, which is greater than yield to maturity.
e. Consider a 5 year bond with a 10% coupon that has a present yield to maturity of 8%. If interest rates remain constant, 1 year from now the price of this bond will be:
i. Higher
ii. Lower
iii. The same
iv. Par
f. The call feature of a bond means the:
i. Investor can call for payment on demand.
ii. Investor can call only if the firm defaults on an interest payment.
iii. Issuer can call the bond issue before the maturity date.
iv. Issuer can call the issue during the first 3 years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, 2008, Kristy Gomez established an interior decorating business, Ultimate Designs. During the month, Kristy Gomez completed the following transactions related to the business:
Oct. 1. Kristy transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $20,000.
3. Paid rent for period of October 3 to end of month, $1,600.
10. Purchased a truck for $15,000, paying $5,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
13. Purchased equipment on account, $4,500.
14. Purchased supplies for cash, $1,100.
15. Paid annual premiums on property and casualty insurance, $2,800.
15. Received cash for job completed, $6,100.
21. Paid creditor a portion of the amount owed for equipment purchased on October 13, $2,400.
24. Recorded jobs completed on account and sent invoices to customers, $8,600.
26. Received an invoice for truck expenses, to be paid in November, $875.
27. Paid utilities expense, $900.
27. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $315.
29. Received cash from customers on account, $4,100.
30. Paid wages of employees, $2,500.
31. Withdrew cash for personal use, $3,000.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two column journal, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.) Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
|
11
|
Cash
|
31
|
Kristy Gomez, Capital
|
|
12
|
Accounts Receivable
|
32
|
Kristy Gomez, Drawing
|
|
13
|
Supplies
|
41
|
Fees Earned
|
|
14
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
51
|
Wages Expense
|
|
16
|
Equipment
|
53
|
Rent Expense
|
|
18
|
Truck
|
54
|
Utilities Expense
|
|
21
|
Notes Payable
|
55
|
Truck Expense
|
|
22
|
Accounts Payable
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four column accounts, inserting appropriate posting references as each item is posted. Extend the balances to the appropriate balance columns after each transaction is posted.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Ultimate Designs as of October 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Equity Realty acts as an agent in buying, selling, renting, and managing real estate. The unadjusted trial balance on July 31, 2008, is shown at the top of the following page.
The following business transactions were completed by Equity Realty during August 2008:
Aug. 1. Purchased office supplies on account, $1,500.
2. Paid rent on office for month, $2,500.
3. Received cash from clients on account, $28,720.
5. Paid annual insurance premiums, $3,600.
Aug. 9. Returned a portion of the office supplies purchased on August 1, receiving full credit for their cost, $250.
17. Paid advertising expense, $3,450.
23. Paid creditors on account, $2,670.
29. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $500.
30. Paid automobile expense (including rental charges for an automobile), $1,500.
31. Discovered an error in computing a commission; received cash from the salesperson for the overpayment, $1,000.
31. Paid salaries and commissions for the month, $17,400.
31. Recorded revenue earned and billed to clients during the month, $51,900.
31. Purchased land for a future building site for $75,000, paying $10,000 in cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
31. Withdrew cash for personal use, $5,000.
31. Rented land purchased on August 31 to a local university for use as a parking lot during football season (September, October, and November); received advance payment of $2,000.
Instructions
1. Record the August 1 balance of each account in the appropriate balance column of a four column account, write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (??) in the Posting Reference column.
2. Journalize the transactions for August in a two column journal. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
3. Post to the ledger, extending the account balance to the appropriate balance column after each posting.
4. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance of the ledger as of August 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following records of Mainstay TV Repair are presented in the working papers:
- Journal containing entries for the period July 1–31.
- Ledger to which the July entries have been posted.
- Preliminary trial balance as of July 31, which does not balance.
Locate the errors, supply the information requested, and prepare a corrected trial balance according to the following instructions. The balances recorded in the accounts as of July 1 and the entries in the journal are correctly stated. If it is necessary to correct any posted amounts in the ledger, a line should be drawn through the erroneous figure and the correct amount inserted above. Corrections or notations may be inserted on the preliminary trial balance in any manner desired. It is not necessary to complete all of the instructions if equal trial balance totals can be obtained earlier. However, the requirements of instructions (6) and (7) should be completed in any event.
Instructions
1. Verify the totals of the preliminary trial balance, inserting the correct amounts in the schedule provided in the working papers.
2. Compute the difference between the trial balance totals.
3. Compare the listings in the trial balance with the balances appearing in the ledger, and list the errors in the space provided in the working papers.
4. Verify the accuracy of the balance of each account in the ledger, and list the errors in the space provided in the working papers.
5. Trace the postings in the ledger back to the journal, using small check marks to identify items traced. Correct any amounts in the ledger that may be necessitated by errors in posting, and list the errors in the space provided in the working papers.
6. Journalize as of July 31 the payment of $110 for gas and electricity. The bill had been paid on July 31 but was inadvertently omitted from the journal. Post to the ledger. (Revise any amounts necessitated by posting this entry.)
7. Prepare a new unadjusted trial balance.
Epic Video has the following unadjusted trial balance as of July 31, 2008:
|
Epic Video Unadjusted Trial Balance July 31, 2008
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
6,250
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,520
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,232
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
710
|
|
|
Equipment
|
54,000
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
22,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,980
|
|
Carlton Dey, Capital
|
|
30,400
|
|
Carlton Dey, Drawing
|
11,500
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
178,020
|
|
Wages Expense
|
102,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
20,850
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
9,540
|
|
|
Gas, Electricity, and Water Expense
|
5,670
|
|
| |
225,272
|
235,900
|
The debit and credit totals are not equal as a result of the following errors:
a. The balance of cash was overstated by $5,000.
b. A cash receipt of $3,200 was posted as a credit to Cash of $2,300.
c. A debit of $2,780 to Accounts Receivable was not posted.
d. A return of $235 of defective supplies was erroneously posted as a $253 credit to Supplies.
e. An insurance policy acquired at a cost of $500 was posted as a credit to Prepaid Insurance.
f. The balance of Notes Payable was overstated by $4,500.
g. A credit of $600 in Accounts Payable was overlooked when the balance of the account was determined.
h. A debit of $2,000 for a withdrawal by the owner was posted as a debit to Carlton Dey, Capital.
i. The balance of $9,450 in Advertising Expense was entered as $9,540 in the trial balance.
j. Miscellaneous Expense, with a balance of $2,520, was omitted from the trial balance.
Instructions
1. Prepare a corrected unadjusted trial balance as of July 31 of the current year.
2. Does the fact that the unadjusted trial balance in (1) is balanced mean that there are no errors in the accounts? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following excerpt is from a conversation between Shelley Ryan, the president and chief operating officer of Diamond Construction Company, and her neighbor, Miguel Jimenez.
Miguel: Shelley, I’m taking a course in night school, “Intro to Accounting.” I was wondering— could you answer a couple of questions for me?
Shelley: Well, I will if I can.
Miguel: Okay, our instructor says that it’s critical we understand the basic concepts of accounting, or we’ll never get beyond the first test. My problem is with those rules of debit and credit you know, assets increase with debits, decrease with credits, etc.
Shelley: Yes, pretty basic stuff. You just have to memorize the rules. It shouldn’t be too difficult.
Miguel: Sure, I can memorize the rules, but my problem is I want to be sure I understand the basic concepts behind the rules. For example, why can’t assets be increased with credits and decreased with debits like revenue? As long as everyone did it that way, why not? It would seem easier if we had the same rules for all increases and decreases in accounts. Also, why is the left side of an account called the debit side? Why couldn’t it be called something simple . . . like the “LE” for Left Entry? The right side could be called just “RE” for Right Entry. Finally, why are there just two sides to an entry? Why can’t there be three or four sides to an entry?
In a group of four or five, select one person to play the role of Shelley and one person to play the role of Miguel.
1. After listening to the conversation between Shelley and Miguel, help Shelley answer Miguel’s questions.
2. What information (other than just debit and credit journal entries) could the accounting system gather that might be useful to Shelley in managing Diamond Construction Company?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shane Raburn is planning to manage and operate Birdie Caddy Service at Biloxi Golf and Country Club during June through August 2008. Shane will rent a small maintenance building from the country club for $500 per month and will offer caddy services, including cart rentals, to golfers. Shane has had no formal training in record keeping. Shane keeps notes of all receipts and expenses in a shoe box. An examination of Shane’s shoe box records for June revealed the following:
June 1. Withdrew $2,000 from personal bank account to be used to operate the caddy service.
1. Paid rent to Biloxi Golf and Country Club, $500.
2. Paid for golf supplies (practice balls, etc.), $650.
3. Arranged for the rental of 40 regular (pulling) golf carts and 10 gasoline driven carts for $1,500 per month. Paid $750 in advance, with the remaining $750 due June 20.
7. Purchased supplies, including gasoline, for the golf carts on account, $350. Biloxi Golf and Country Club has agreed to allow Shane to store the gasoline in one of its fuel tanks at no cost.
15. Received cash for services from June 1–15, $3,150.
17. Paid cash to creditors on account, $350.
20. Paid remaining rental on golf carts, $750.
22. Purchased supplies, including gasoline, on account, $200.
25. Accepted IOUs from customers on account, $850.
28. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $180.
30. Received cash for services from June 16–30, $3,200.
30. Paid telephone and electricity (utilities) expenses, $160.
30. Paid wages of part time employees, $450.
30. Received cash in payment of IOUs on account, $550.
30. Determined the amount of supplies on hand at the end of June, $390.
Shane has asked you several questions concerning his financial affairs to date, and he has asked you to assist with his record keeping and reporting of financial data.
a. To assist Shane with his record keeping, prepare a chart of accounts that would be appropriate for Birdie Caddy Service.
b. Prepare an income statement for June in order to help Shane assess the profitability of Birdie Caddy Service. For this purpose, the use of T accounts may be helpful in analyzing the effects of each June transaction.
c. Based on Shane’s records of receipts and payments, calculate the amount of cash on hand on June 30. For this purpose, a T account for cash may be useful.
d. A count of the cash on hand on June 30 totaled $4,980. Briefly discuss the possible causes of the difference between the amount of cash computed in (c) and the actual amount of cash on hand.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The increasing complexity of the current business and regulatory environment has created an increased demand for accountants who can analyze business transactions and interpret their effects on the financial statements. In addition, a basic ability to analyze the effects of transactions is necessary to be successful in all fields of business as well as in other disciplines, such as law. To better understand the importance of accounting in today’s environment, search the Internet or your local newspaper for job opportunities. Then do one of the following:
1. Print a listing of at least two ads for accounting jobs. Alternatively, bring to class at least two newspaper ads for accounting jobs.
2. Print a listing of at least two ads for nonaccounting jobs for which some knowledge of accounting is preferred or necessary. Alternatively, bring to class at least two newspaper ads for such jobs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are a consultant to a large manufacturing corporation that is considering a project with the following net after tax cash flows (in millions of dollars):
|
Years from Now
|
After Tax Cash Flow
|
|
0
|
40
|
|
1–10
|
15
|
The project’s beta is 1.8. Assuming that rf = 8% and E(rM) =16%, what is the net present value of the project? What is the highest possible beta estimate for the project before its NPV becomes negative?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is budgeted for McCracken Plumbing Supply Company for next quarter:
|
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
Sales
|
$110,000
|
$130,000
|
$180,000
|
|
Merchandise purchases
|
$85,000
|
$92,000
|
$105,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$50,000
|
$50,000
|
$50,000
|
All sales at McCracken are on credit. Forty percent are collected in the month of sale, 58% in the month following the sale, and the remaining 2% are uncollectible. Merchandise purchases are paid in full the month following the month of purchase. The selling and administrative expenses above include $8,000 of depreciation on display fixtures and warehouse equipment. All other selling and administrative expenses are paid as incurred. McCracken wants to maintain a cash balance of $15,000. Any amount below this can be borrowed from a local bank as needed in increments of $1,000. All borrowings are made at month end.
Required:
Prepare McCracken”s cash budget for the month of May. Use good form. McCracken expects to have $24,000 of cash on hand at the beginning of May.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Fraley Company, a merchandising firm, has planned the following sales for the next four months:
|
|
March
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
Total budgeted sales
|
$50,000
|
$70,000
|
$90,000
|
$60,000
|
Sales are made 40% for cash and 60% on account. From experience, the company has learned that a month’s sales on account are collected according to the following pattern:
|
Month of sale
|
70%
|
|
First month following month of sale
|
20%
|
|
Second month following month of sale
|
8%
|
|
Uncollectible
|
2%
|
The company requires a minimum cash balance of $4,000 to start a month.
Required:
a. Compute the budgeted cash receipts for June.
b. Assume the following budgeted data for June:
|
Purchases
|
$52,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$10,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
$8,000
|
|
Equipment purchases
|
$15,000
|
|
Cash balance, beginning of June
|
$6,000
|
Using this data, along with your answer to part (1) above, prepare a cash budget in good form for June. Clearly show any borrowing needed during the month. The company can borrow in any dollar amount, but will not pay any interest until the following month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bledso Supply Corporation manufactures and sells cotton gauze. Expected sales of gauze (in boxes) for upcoming months are as follows:
|
June
|
36,000
|
|
July
|
40,000
|
|
August
|
50,000
|
|
September
|
38,000
|
|
October
|
30,000
|
|
November
|
24,000
|
|
December
|
35,000
|
Management likes to maintain a finished goods inventory equal to 25% of the next month”s estimated sales.
Required:
Prepare the company”s production budget for the third quarter of this year (the months of July, August and September) in good form. Include a column for each month and a total column for the entire quarter.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Weldon Industrial Gas Corporation supplies acetylene and other compressed gases to industry. Data regarding the store”s operations follow:
• Sales are budgeted at $360,000 for November, $380,000 for December, and $350,000 for January.
• Collections are expected to be 75% in the month of sale, 20% in the month following the sale, and 5% uncollectible.
• The cost of goods sold is 65% of sales.
• The company purchases 60% of its merchandise in the month prior to the month of sale and 40% in the month of sale. Payment for merchandise is made in themonth following the purchase.
• Other monthly expenses to be paid in cash are $21,900.
• Monthly depreciation is $20,000.
• Ignore taxes.
Statement of Financial Position
October 31
|
Assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 16,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
|
(net of allowance for uncollectible accounts)
|
74,000
|
|
Inventory
|
140,400
|
|
Property, plant and equipment
|
|
|
(net of $500,000 accumulated depreciation)
|
1,066,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$1,296,400
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 240,000
|
|
Common stock
|
640,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
416,400
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$1,296,400
|
Required:
a. Prepare a Schedule of Expected Cash Collections for November and December.
b. Prepare a Merchandise Purchases Budget for November and December.
c. Prepare Cash Budgets for November and December.
d. Prepare Budgeted Income Statements for November and December.
e. Prepare a Budgeted Balance Sheet for the end of December.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Caprice Corporation is a wholesaler of industrial goods. Data regarding the store”s operations follow:
Sales are budgeted at $350,000 for November, $320,000 for December, and $300,000 for January.
Collections are expected to be 80% in the month of sale, 16% in the month following the sale, and 4% uncollectible.
The cost of goods sold is 70% of sales.
The company purchases 60% of its merchandise in the month prior to the month of sale and 40% in the month of sale. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase.
The November beginning balance in the accounts receivable account is $78,000.
The November beginning balance in the accounts payable account is $254,000.
Required:
a. Prepare a Schedule of Expected Cash Collections for November and December.
b. Prepare a Merchandise Purchases Budget for November and December.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hannah Knox, an architect, opened an office on July 1, 2008. During the month, she completed the following transactions connected with her professional practice:
a. Transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $25,000.
b. Paid July rent for office and workroom, $2,000.
c. Purchased used automobile for $16,500, paying $1,500 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
d. Purchased office and computer equipment on account, $6,500.
e. Paid cash for supplies, $975.
f. Paid cash for annual insurance policies, $1,200.
g. Received cash from client for plans delivered, $3,750.
h. Paid cash for miscellaneous expenses, $240.
i. Paid cash to creditors on account, $2,500.
j. Paid installment due on note payable, $450.
k. Received invoice for blueprint service, due in August, $750.
l. Recorded fee earned on plans delivered, payment to be received in August, $3,150.
m.Paid salary of assistant, $1,500.
n. Paid gas, oil, and repairs on automobile for July, $280.
Instructions
1. Record the above transactions directly in the following T accounts, without journalizing:Cash; Accounts Receivable; Supplies; Prepaid Insurance; Automobiles; Equipment; Notes Payable; Accounts Payable; Hannah Knox, Capital; Professional Fees; Rent Expense; Salary Expense; Automobile Expense; Blueprint Expense; Miscellaneous Expense. To the left of the amount entered in the accounts, place the appropriate letter to identify the transaction.
2. Determine account balances of the T accounts. Accounts containing a single entry only (such as Prepaid Insurance) do not need a balance.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Hannah Knox, Architect, as of July 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On March 1, 2008, Kara Frantz established Mudcat Realty, which completed the following transactions during the month:
a. Kara Frantz transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $15,000.
b. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $2,500.
c. Purchased supplies on account, $850.
d. Paid creditor on account, $400.
e. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $15,750.
f. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $2,400, and miscellaneous expenses, $600.
g. Paid office salaries, $3,250.
h. Determined that the cost of supplies used was $575.
i. Withdrew cash for personal use, $1,000.
Instructions
1. Journalize entries for transactions (a) through (i), using the following account titles: Cash; Supplies; Accounts Payable; Kara Frantz, Capital; Kara Frantz, Drawing; Sales Commissions; Office Salaries Expense; Rent Expense; Automobile Expense; Supplies Expense; Miscellaneous Expense. Explanations may be omitted.
2. Prepare T accounts, using the account titles in (1). Post the journal entries to these accounts, placing the appropriate letter to the left of each amount to identify the transactions.
Determine the account balances, after all posting is complete. Accounts containing only a single entry do not need a balance.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of March 31, 2008.
4. Determine the following:
a. Amount of total revenue recorded in the ledger.
b. Amount of total expenses recorded in the ledger.
c. Amount of net income for March.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1, 2008, Brooks Dodd established an interior decorating business, Coordinated Designs. During the month, Brooks completed the following transactions related to the business:
June 1. Brooks transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $18,000.
5. Paid rent for period of June 5 to end of month, $2,150.
6. Purchased office equipment on account, $8,500.
8. Purchased a used truck for $18,000, paying $10,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
10. Purchased supplies for cash, $1,200.
12. Received cash for job completed, $10,500.
15. Paid annual premiums on property and casualty insurance, $2,400.
23. Recorded jobs completed on account and sent invoices to customers, $5,950.
24. Received an invoice for truck expenses, to be paid in July, $1,000.
29. Paid utilities expense, $1,200.
29. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $400.
30. Received cash from customers on account, $3,200.
30. Paid wages of employees, $2,900.
30. Paid creditor a portion of the amount owed for equipment purchased on June 6, $2,125.
30. Withdrew cash for personal use, $1,750.
Instructions
1. Journalize each transaction in a two column journal, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited. (Do not insert the account numbers in the journal at this time.) Explanations may be omitted.
|
11
|
Cash
|
31
|
Brooks Dodd, Capital
|
|
12
|
Accounts Receivable
|
32
|
Brooks Dodd, Drawing
|
|
13
|
Supplies
|
41
|
Fees Earned
|
|
14
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
51
|
Wages Expense
|
|
16
|
Equipment
|
53
|
Rent Expense
|
|
18
|
Truck
|
54
|
Utilities Expense
|
|
21
|
Notes Payable
|
55
|
Truck Expense
|
|
22
|
Accounts Payable
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
2. Post the journal to a ledger of four column accounts, inserting appropriate posting references as each item is posted. Extend the balances to the appropriate balance columns after each transaction is posted.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Coordinated Designs as of June 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Passport Realty acts as an agent in buying, selling, renting, and managing real estate. The unadjusted trial balance on October 31, 2008, is shown at the top of the following page.
The following business transactions were completed by Passport Realty during November 2008:
Nov. 1. Paid rent on office for month, $5,000.
2. Purchased office supplies on account, $1,750.
5. Paid annual insurance premiums, $4,800.
10. Received cash from clients on account, $52,000.
15. Purchased land for a future building site for $90,000, paying $10,000 in cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
17. Paid creditors on account, $7,750.
|
Passport Realty Unadjusted Trial Balance October 31, 2008
|
| |
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
11
|
Cash
|
26,300
|
|
|
12
|
Accounts Receivable
|
67,500
|
|
|
13
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,000
|
|
|
14
|
Office Supplies
|
1,800
|
|
|
16
|
Land
|
—
|
|
|
21
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
13,020
|
|
22
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
—
|
|
23
|
Notes Payable
|
|
—
|
|
31
|
Ashley Carnes, Capital
|
|
32,980
|
|
32
|
Ashley Carnes, Drawing
|
2,000
|
|
|
41
|
Fees Earned
|
|
260,000
|
|
51
|
Salary and Commission Expense
|
148,200
|
|
|
52
|
Rent Expense
|
30,000
|
|
|
53
|
Advertising Expense
|
17,800
|
|
|
54
|
Automobile Expense
|
5,500
|
|
|
59
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
3,900
|
|
| |
|
306,000
|
306,000
|
Nov. 20. Returned a portion of the office supplies purchased on November 2, receiving full credit for their cost, $250.
23. Paid advertising expense, $2,100.
27. Discovered an error in computing a commission; received cash from the salesperson for the overpayment, $700.
28. Paid automobile expense (including rental charges for an automobile), $1,500.
29. Paid miscellaneous expenses, $450.
30. Recorded revenue earned and billed to clients during the month, $48,400.
30. Paid salaries and commissions for the month, $25,000.
30. Withdrew cash for personal use, $8,000.
30. Rented land purchased on November 15 to local merchants association for use as a parking lot in December and January, during a street rebuilding program; received advance payment of $2,500.
Instructions
1. Record the November 1, 2008, balance of each account in the appropriate balance column of a four column account, write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (??) in the Posting Reference column.
2. Journalize the transactions for November in a two column journal. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
3. Post to the ledger, extending the account balance to the appropriate balance column after each posting.
4. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance of the ledger as of November 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following records of Mainstay TV Repair are presented in the working papers:
- Journal containing entries for the period July 1–31.
- Ledger to which the July entries have been posted.
- Preliminary trial balance as of July 31, which does not balance.
Locate the errors, supply the information requested, and prepare a corrected trial balance according to the following instructions. The balances recorded in the accounts as of July 1 and the entries in the journal are correctly stated. If it is necessary to correct any posted amounts in the ledger, a line should be drawn through the erroneous figure and the correct amount inserted above. Corrections or notations may be inserted on the preliminary trial balance in any manner desired. It is not necessary to complete all of the instructions if equal trial balance totals can be obtained earlier. However, the requirements of instructions (6) and (7) should be completed in any event.
Instructions
1. Verify the totals of the preliminary trial balance, inserting the correct amounts in the schedule provided in the working papers.
2. Compute the difference between the trial balance totals.
3. Compare the listings in the trial balance with the balances appearing in the ledger, and list the errors in the space provided in the working papers.
4. Verify the accuracy of the balance of each account in the ledger, and list the errors in the space provided in the working papers.
5. Trace the postings in the ledger back to the journal, using small check marks to identify items traced. Correct any amounts in the ledger that may be necessitated by errors in posting, and list the errors in the space provided in the working papers.
6. Journalize as of July 31 the payment of $125 for advertising expense. The bill had been paid on July 31 but was inadvertently omitted from the journal. Post to the ledger. (Revise any amounts necessitated by posting this entry.)
7. Prepare a new unadjusted trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Iberian Carpet has the following unadjusted trial balance as of March 31, 2008.
|
Iberian Carpet Unadjusted Trial Balance March 31, 2008
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
| |
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
4,300
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
11,870
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,320
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
880
|
|
|
Equipment
|
56,000
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
26,100
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
7,900
|
|
Jose Mendrano, Capital
|
|
38,400
|
|
Jose Mendrano, Drawing
|
14,500
|
|
|
Fees Earned
|
|
122,700
|
|
Wages Expense
|
70,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
16,600
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
720
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
1,450
|
|
| |
178,640
|
195,100
|
The debit and credit totals are not equal as a result of the following errors:
a. The balance of cash was understated by $3,000.
b. A cash receipt of $4,500 was posted as a debit to Cash of $5,400.
c. A debit of $1,850 to Accounts Receivable was not posted.
d. A return of $350 of defective supplies was erroneously posted as a $530 credit to Supplies.
e. An insurance policy acquired at a cost of $175 was posted as a credit to Prepaid Insurance.
f. The balance of Notes Payable was understated by $7,500.
g. A credit of $900 in Accounts Payable was overlooked when determining the balance of the account.
h. A debit of $3,500 for a withdrawal by the owner was posted as a credit to Jose Mendrano, Capital.
i. The balance of $7,200 in Advertising Expense was entered as $720 in the trial balance.
j. Gas, Electricity, and Water Expense, with a balance of $6,900, was omitted from the trial balance.
Instructions
1. Prepare a corrected unadjusted trial balance as of March 31, 2008.
2. Does the fact that the unadjusted trial balance in (1) is balanced mean that there are no errors in the accounts? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lynette Moss, an architect, opened an office on April 1, 2008. During the month, she completed the following transactions connected with her professional practice:
a. Transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $22,500.
b. Purchased used automobile for $15,300, paying $4,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder.
c. Paid April rent for office and workroom, $2,500.
d. Paid cash for supplies, $1,200.
e. Purchased office and computer equipment on account, $5,200.
f. Paid cash for annual insurance policies on automobile and equipment, $1,600.
g. Received cash from a client for plans delivered, $6,500.
h. Paid cash to creditors on account, $1,800.
i. Paid cash for miscellaneous expenses, $300.
j. Received invoice for blueprint service, due in May, $800.
k. Recorded fee earned on plans delivered, payment to be received in May, $3,500.
l. Paid salary of assistant, $1,500.
m.Paid cash for miscellaneous expenses, $210.
n. Paid installment due on note payable, $200.
o. Paid gas, oil, and repairs on automobile for April, $250.
Instructions
1. Record the above transactions directly in the following T accounts, without journalizing: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Supplies; Prepaid Insurance; Automobiles; Equipment; Notes Payable; Accounts Payable; Lynette Moss, Capital; Professional Fees; Rent Expense; Salary Expense; Blueprint Expense; Automobile Expense; Miscellaneous Expense. To the left of each amount entered in the accounts, place the appropriate letter to identify the transaction.
2. Determine account balances of the T accounts. Accounts containing a single entry only (such as Prepaid Insurance) do not need a balance.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Lynette Moss, Architect, as of April 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 1, 2008, Bill Bonds established Genesis Realty, which completed the following transactions during the month:
a. Bill Bonds transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $18,000.
b. Purchased supplies on account, $1,000.
c. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $14,600.
d. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $3,000.
e. Paid creditor on account, $600.
f. Withdrew cash for personal use, $1,500.
g. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $2,000, and miscellaneous expenses, $500.
h. Paid office salaries, $2,800.
i. Determined that the cost of supplies used was $725.
Instructions
1. Journalize entries for transactions (a) through (i), using the following account titles: Cash; Supplies; Accounts Payable; Bill Bonds, Capital; Bill Bonds, Drawing; Sales Commissions; Rent Expense; Office Salaries Expense; Automobile Expense; Supplies Expense; Miscellaneous Expense. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
2. Prepare T accounts, using the account titles in (1). Post the journal entries to these accounts, placing the appropriate letter to the left of each amount to identify the transactions. Determine the account balances, after all posting is complete. Accounts containing only a single entry do not need a balance.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of July 31, 2008.
4. Determine the following:
a. Amount of total revenue recorded in the ledger.
b. Amount of total expenses recorded in the ledger.
c. Amount of net income for July.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs
The following report was prepared for evaluating the performance of the plant manager of Nuuman Inc. Evaluate and correct this report.
|
Nuuman Inc. Manufacturing Costs For the Quarter Ended June 30, 2012
|
|
Materials used in production (including $70,000 of indirect materials)
|
$760,000
|
|
Direct labor (including $80,000 maintenance salaries).
|
700,000
|
|
Factory overhead:
|
|
|
Supervisor salaries
|
510,000
|
|
Heat, light, and power
|
135,000
|
|
Sales salaries
|
327,000
|
|
Promotional expenses
|
304,000
|
|
Insurance and property taxes—plant
|
143,000
|
|
Insurance and property taxes—corporate offices
|
208,000
|
|
Depreciation—plant and equipment
|
119,000
|
|
Depreciation—corporate offices
|
92,000
|
|
Total
|
$3,298,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the above information, complete the following:
a. Prepare the January income statement for Air Temp Manufacturing Company.
b. Determine the inventory balances at the end of the first month of operations. Manufacturing company balance sheet Partial balance sheet data for Lawler Company at December 31, 2012, are as follows:
|
Finished goods inventory
|
$23,000
|
Supplies
|
$41,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
23,000
|
Materials inventory
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
60,000
|
Cash
|
64,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
90,000
|
|
|
Prepare the Current Assets section of Lawler Company’s balance sheet at
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
December 31, 2012.
Cost of direct materials used in production for a manufacturing company Saron Manufacturing Company reported the following materials data for the month ending April 30, 2012:
|
Materials purchased
|
$860,000
|
|
Materials inventory, April 1
|
350,000
|
|
Materials inventory, April 30
|
300,000
|
Determine the cost of direct materials used in production by Saron during the month ended April 30, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods manufactured for a manufacturing company
Two items are omitted from each of the following three lists of cost of goods manufactured statement data. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.
|
Work in process inventory, November 1
|
$16,000
|
$36,000
|
(e)
|
|
Total manufacturing costs incurred during November
|
112,000
|
(c)
|
42,000
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
(a)
|
$210,000
|
$49,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, November 30
|
24,000
|
48,000
|
(f )
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
(b)
|
(d)
|
$43,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement for a manufacturing company
Two items are omitted from each of the following three lists of cost of goods sold data from a manufacturing company income statement. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.
|
Finished goods inventory, November 1
|
$44,000
|
$33,000
|
(e)
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
235,000
|
(c)
|
404,000
|
|
Cost of finished goods available for sale
|
(a)
|
$186,000
|
$450,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, November 30
|
52,000
|
44,000
|
(f )
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(b)
|
(d)
|
$428,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cost of goods manufactured for a manufacturing company Cost data for Bedford Manufacturing Company for the month ending May 31, 2012, are as follows:
|
Inventories
|
1 May
|
31 May
|
|
Materials
|
$168,000
|
$139,000
|
|
Work in process
|
240,000
|
260,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
182,000
|
214,200
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
$475,000
|
|
Materials purchased during May
|
|
302,000
|
|
Factory overhead incurred during May:
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
|
57,200
|
|
Machinery depreciation
|
|
36,000
|
|
Heat, light, and power
|
|
13,000
|
|
Supplies
|
|
10,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
|
9,800
|
|
Miscellaneous cost
|
|
18,200
|
a. Prepare a cost of goods manufactured statement for May 2012.
b. Determine the cost of goods sold for May 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods sold, profit margin, and net income for a manufacturing company The following information is available for Vega Manufacturing Company for the month ending July 31, 2012:
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
$270,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
58,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
46,000
|
|
Sales
|
515,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, July 1
|
66,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, July 31
|
62,000
|
For the month ended July 31, 2012, determine Vega’s (a) cost of goods sold, (b) gross profit, and (c) net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost flow relationships
The following information is available for the first month of operations of Enders Company, a manufacturer of mechanical pencils:
|
Sales
|
$630,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
370,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
315,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
84,000
|
|
Factory depreciation
|
22,000
|
|
Materials purchased
|
164,000
|
|
Total manufacturing costs for the period
|
362,000
|
|
Materials inventory
|
22,000
|
Using the above information, determine the following missing amounts:
a. Cost of goods sold
b. Finished goods inventory
c. Direct materials cost
d. Direct labor cost
e. Work in process inventory
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs
The following is a list of costs that were incurred in the production and sale of lawn mowers:
a. Attorney fees for drafting a new lease for headquarters offices.
b. Commissions paid to sales representatives, based on the number of lawn mowers sold.
c. Property taxes on the factory building and equipment.
d. Hourly wages of operators of robotic machinery used in production.
e. Salary of vice president of marketing.
f. Gasoline engines used for lawn mowers.
g. Factory cafeteria cashier’s wages.
h. Electricity used to run the robotic machinery.
i. Maintenance costs for new robotic factory equipment, based on hours of usage.
j. License fees for use of patent for lawn mower blade, based on the number of lawn mowers produced.
k. Salary of factory supervisor.
l. Steel used in producing the lawn mowers.
m. Telephone charges for company controller’s office.
n. Paint used to coat the lawn mowers.
o. Straight line depreciation on the robotic machinery used to manufacture the lawn mowers.
p. Tires for lawn mowers.
q. Engine oil used in mower engines prior to shipment.
r. Cash paid to outside firm for janitorial services for factory.
s. Cost of advertising in a national magazine.
t. Salary of quality control supervisor who inspects each lawn mower before it is shipped.
u. Plastic for outside housing of lawn mowers.
v. Steering wheels for lawn mowers.
w. Filter for spray gun used to paint the lawn mowers.
x. Cost of boxes used in packaging lawn mowers.
y. Premiums on insurance policy for factory buildings.
z. Payroll taxes on hourly assembly line employees.
Instructions
Classify each cost as either a product cost or a period cost. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for your answer, placing an “X” in the appropriate column.
| |
Product Costs
|
Period Costs
|
|
Cost
|
Direct Materials Cost
|
Direct Labor Cost
|
Factory Overhead Cost
|
Selling Expense
|
Administrative Expense
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost classifications—service company
A partial list of Frend Hotel’s costs is provided below.
a. Champagne for guests.
b. Cost to mail a customer survey.
c. Training for hotel restaurant servers.
d. Cost to replace lobby furniture.
e. Cost of soaps and shampoos for rooms.
f. Cost of food.
g. Wages of desk clerks.
h. Cost to paint lobby.
i. Cost of advertising in local newspaper.
j. Cost of laundering towels and bedding.
k. Wages of kitchen employees.
l. Guest room telephone costs for long distance calls.
m. Cost of room mini bar supplies.
n. Utility cost.
o. Cost of valet service.
p. General maintenance supplies.
q. Wages of maids.
r. Salary of the hotel president.
s. Depreciation of the hotel.
t. Cost of new carpeting.
u. Wages of bellhops.
v. Wages of convention setup employees.
w. Pay per view movie rental costs (in rooms).
Instructions
1. What would be Frend’s most logical definition for the final cost object?
2. Identify whether each of the costs is to be classified as direct or indirect. Define direct costs in terms of a hotel guest as the cost object.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manufacturing income statement, statement of cost of goods manufactured Several items are omitted from each of the following income statement and cost of goods manufactured statement data for the month of December 2010:
| |
Grant Company
|
McClellan Company
|
|
Materials inventory, December 1
|
$78,000
|
$102,000
|
|
Materials inventory, December 31
|
(a)
|
115,000
|
|
Materials purchased
|
198,000
|
230,000
|
|
Cost of direct materials used in production
|
209,000
|
(a)
|
|
Direct labor
|
294,000
|
(b)
|
|
Factory overhead
|
91,000
|
114,000
|
|
Total manufacturing costs incurred during December
|
(b)
|
660,000
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
744,000
|
906,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, December 1
|
150,000
|
246,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, December 31
|
126,000
|
(c)
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
(c)
|
654,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, December 1
|
132,000
|
114,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, December 31
|
138,000
|
(d)
|
|
Sales
|
1,150,000
|
1,020,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(d)
|
660,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
(e)
|
(e)
|
|
Operating expenses
|
150,000
|
(f )
|
|
Net income
|
(f )
|
226,000
|
Instructions
1. Determine the amounts of the missing items, identifying them by letter.
2. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for McClellan Company.
3. Prepare an income statement for McClellan Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cost of goods manufactured and income statement for a manufacturing company The following information is available for Deutsch Corporation for 2010:
|
Inventories
|
1 Jan
|
31 Dec
|
|
Materials
|
$225,000
|
$280,000
|
|
Work in process
|
405,000
|
380,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
390,000
|
380,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
$190,000
|
|
Depreciation expense—office equipment
|
27,000
|
|
Depreciation expense—factory equipment
|
36,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
430,000
|
|
Heat, light, and power—factory
|
14,400
|
|
Indirect labor
|
50,400
|
|
Materials purchased
|
423,000
|
|
Office salaries expense
|
147,500
|
|
Property taxes—factory
|
11,700
|
|
Property taxes—office building
|
24,300
|
|
Rent expense—factory
|
19,800
|
|
Sales
|
1,980,000
|
|
Sales salaries expense
|
243,000
|
|
Supplies—factory
|
9,900
|
|
Miscellaneous cost—factory
|
6,120
|
Instructions
1. Prepare the 2010 statement of cost of goods manufactured.
2. Prepare the 2010 income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs
The following is a list of costs that were incurred in the production and sale of boats:
a. Cost of electrical wiring for boats.
b. Commissions to sales representatives, based upon the number of boats sold.
c. Salary of shop supervisor.
d. Salary of president of company.
e. Cost of boat for “grand prize” promotion in local bass tournament.
f. Power used by sanding equipment.
g. Hourly wages of assembly line workers.
h. Boat chairs.
i. Legal department costs for the year.
j. Memberships for key executives in the Bass World Association.
k. Cost of normal scrap from defective hulls.
l. Fiberglass for producing the boat hull.
m. Decals for boat hull.
n. Annual fee to pro fisherman Jim Bo Wilks to promote the boats.
o. Yearly cost maintenance contract for robotic equipment.
p. Annual bonus paid to top executives of the company.
q. Masks for use by sanders in smoothing boat hulls.
r. Special advertising campaign in Bass World.
s. Cost of metal hardware for boats, such as ornaments and tie down grasps.
t. Straight line depreciation on factory equipment.
u. Oil to lubricate factory equipment.
v. Salary of chief financial officer.
w. Canvas top for boats.
x. Wood paneling for use in interior boat trim.
y. Cost of paving the headquarters employee parking lot.
z. Steering wheels.
Instructions
Classify each cost as either a product cost or a period cost. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for your answer, placing an “X” in the appropriate column.
| |
Product Costs
|
Period Costs
|
|
Cost
|
Direct Materials Cost
|
Direct Labor Cost
|
Factory Overhead Cost
|
Selling Expense
|
Administrative Expense
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs
The following is a list of costs incurred by several businesses:
a. Charitable contribution to United Fund.
b. Fees charged by collection agency on past due customer accounts.
c. Maintenance costs for factory equipment.
d. Cost of fabric used by clothing manufacturer.
e. Salary of the vice president of manufacturing logistics.
f. Rent for a warehouse used to store finished products.
g. Wages of a machine operator on the production line.
h. Depreciation of tools used in production.
i. Travel costs of marketing executives to annual sales meeting.
j. Cost of sewing machine needles used by a shirt manufacturer.
k. Depreciation of microcomputers used in the factory to coordinate and monitor the production schedules.
l. Maintenance and repair costs for factory equipment.
m. Wages of production quality control personnel.
n. Depreciation of robot used to assemble a product.
o. Cost of a 30 second television commercial.
p. Pens, paper, and other supplies used by the Accounting Department in preparing various managerial reports.
q. Electricity used to operate factory machinery.
r. Factory janitorial supplies.
s. Oil lubricants for factory plant and equipment.
t. Cost of plastic for a telephone being manufactured.
u. Fees paid to lawn service for office grounds upkeep.
v. Telephone charges by president’s office.
w. Surgeon’s fee for knee replacement.
x. Depreciation of copying machines used by the Marketing Department.
Instructions
Classify each of the preceding costs as a product cost or period cost. Indicate whether each product cost is a direct materials cost, a direct labor cost, or a factory overhead cost. Indicate whether each period cost is a selling expense or an administrative expense. Use the following tabular headings for preparing your answer, placing an “X” in the appropriate column.
| |
Product Costs
|
Period Costs
|
|
Cost
|
Direct Materials Cost
|
Direct Labor Cost
|
Factory Overhead Cost
|
Selling Expense
|
Administrative Expense
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost classifications—service company
A partial list of Gaelic Medical Center’s costs is provided below.
a. Operating room supplies used on patients (catheters, sutures, etc.).
b. Utility costs of the hospital.
c. Training costs for nurses.
d. Cost of maintaining the staff and visitors’ cafeteria.
e. Cost of intravenous solutions.
f. Cost of blood tests.
g. Cost of improvements on the employee parking lot.
h. Salary of the nutritionist.
i. General maintenance of the hospital.
j. Cost of patient meals.
k. Cost of laundry services for operating room personnel.
l. Depreciation on patient rooms.
m. Depreciation of X ray equipment.
n. Cost of drugs used for patients.
o. Doctor’s fee.
p. Nurses’ salaries.
q. Overtime incurred in the Records Department due to a computer failure.
r. Salary of intensive care personnel.
s. Cost of X ray test.
t. Cost of new heart wing.
u. Cost of advertising hospital services on television.
Instructions
1. What would be Gaelic’s most logical definition for the final cost object?
2. Identify whether each of the costs is to be classified as direct or indirect. Define direct costs in terms of a patient as a cost object.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cost of goods manufactured and income statement for a manufacturing company The following information is available for Rosetta Company for 2010:
|
Inventories
|
1 Jan
|
31 Dec
|
|
Materials
|
$59,500
|
$73,500
|
|
Work in process
|
84,000
|
73,500
|
|
Finished goods
|
87,500
|
77,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
$52,500
|
|
Depreciation expense—office equipment
|
17,500
|
|
Depreciation expense—factory equipment
|
11,200
|
|
Direct labor
|
143,500
|
|
Heat, light, and power—factory
|
4,500
|
|
Indirect labor
|
18,200
|
|
Materials purchased
|
95,000
|
|
Office salaries expense
|
59,500
|
|
Property taxes—factory
|
3,150
|
|
Property taxes—headquarters building
|
10,500
|
|
Rent expense—factory
|
5,250
|
|
Sales
|
665,000
|
|
Sales salaries expense
|
105,000
|
|
Supplies—factory
|
2,500
|
|
Miscellaneous cost—factory
|
3,400
|
Instructions
1. Prepare the 2010 statement of cost of goods manufactured.
2. Prepare the 2010 income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics and professional conduct in business
Jarrett Manufacturing Company allows employees to purchase, at cost, manufacturing materials, such as metal and lumber, for personal use. To purchase materials for personal use, an employee must complete a materials requisition form, which must then be approved by the employee’s immediate supervisor. Felix Thecat, an assistant cost accountant, charges the employee an amount based on Jarrett’s net purchase cost. Felix Thecat is in the process of replacing a deck on his home and has requisitioned lumber for personal use, which has been approved in accordance with company policy. In computing the cost of the lumber, Felix reviewed all the purchase invoices for the past year. He then used the lowest price to compute the amount due the company for the lumber. Discuss whether Felix behaved in an ethical manner.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basics Indicate whether the following statements are true or false.
1. Managerial accountants have a single role within an organization, collecting and reporting costs to management.
2. Financial accounting reports are general purpose and intended for external users.
3. Managerial accounting reports are special purpose and issued as frequently as needed.
4. Managers’ activities and responsibilities can be classified into three broad functions: cost accounting, budgeting, and internal control.
5. As a result of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002, managerial accounting reports must now comply with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
6. Top managers must certify that a company maintains an adequate system of internal controls.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mate Boomerang Corporation manufactures and sells plastic boomerangs. Expected boomerang sales (in units) for the upcoming months are as follows:
|
|
July
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Expected unit sales
|
12,000
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
11,000
|
Seven ounces of plastic resin are needed to produce every boomerang. Mate likes to have enough plastic resin on hand at the end of the month to cover 25% of the next month”s production requirements. Mate also likes to maintain a finished goods inventory equal to 10% of the next month”s estimated sales.
Required:
How many ounces of plastic resin should Mate plan on purchasing during the month of October?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
All sales at Meeks Company, a wholesaler, are made on credit. Experience has shown that 70% of the accounts receivable are collected in the month of the sale, 26% are collected in the month following the sale, and the remaining 4% are uncollectible. Actual sales for March and budgeted sales for the following four months are given below:
|
March (actual sales)
|
$200,000
|
|
April
|
$300,000
|
|
May
|
$500,000
|
|
June
|
$700,000
|
|
July
|
$400,000
|
The company”s cost of goods sold is equal to 60% of sales. All purchases of inventory are made on credit. Meeks Company pays for one half of a month”s purchases in the month of purchase, and the other half in the month following purchase. The company requires that end of month inventories be equal to 25% of the cost of goods sold for the next month.
Required:
a. Compute the amount of cash, in total, which the company can expect to collect in May.
b. Compute the budgeted dollar amount of inventory which the company should have on hand at the end of April.
c. Compute the amount of inventory that the company should purchase during the months of May and June.
d. Compute the amount of cash payments that will be made to suppliers during June for purchases of inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The human resources manager of Hodgson Industrial Design estimates that the average labor rate for the coming year for Hodgson”s production staff will be $25/hour. This estimate is based on a standard mix of personnel at different pay rates, as well as a reasonable proportion of overtime hours worked.
During the first month of the new year, Hodgson has difficulty hiring a sufficient number of new employees, and so must have its higher paid existing staff work overtime to complete a number of jobs. The result is an actual labor rate of $30/hour. Hodgson”s production staff worked 10,000 hours during the month. Its labor rate variance for the month is:
($30/hr Actual rate $25/hour Standard rate) x 10,000 hours = $50,000 Labor rate variance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Many assets trade in more than one type of market. In what types of markets do the following trade?
a. Used cars
b. Paintings
c. Rare coins
2. When mortgages are pooled into securities, the pass through agencies (Freddie Mac and Fannie Mae) typically guarantee the underlying mortgage loans.
If the homeowner defaults on the loan, the pass through agency makes good on the loan; the investor in the mortgage backed security does not bear the credit risk.
a. Why does the allocation of default risk to the pass through agency rather than the security holder make economic sense?
b. Why is the allocation of default risk less of an issue for Brady bonds?
3. How can tax motives contribute to the desire for unbundling?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Hewlett Packard/Compaq Proxy Fight When Carly Fiorini, the CEO of Hewlett Packard, proposed a merger with Compaq Computer, Walter Hewlett, son of the company’s founder and member of the HP board of directors, dissented. The merger had to be approved by shareholders, and Hewlett engaged in a proxy fight to block the deal. One estimate is that HP spent $150 million to lobby shareholders to support the merger; even small shareholders of HP reported receiving 20 or more phone calls from the company in support of the deal.1 the merger ultimately was approved in an uncharacteristically close vote. No surprise that less than 1% of public companies face proxy contests in any particular year.
The real takeover threat is from other firms. If one firm observes another underperforming, it can acquire the underperforming business and replace management with its own team. The stock price should rise to reflect the prospects of improved performance, which provides incentive for firms to engage in such takeover activity.
Quotations
Q: What is the broadest definition of derivatives?
Q: What are the most common forms of derivatives?
Q: In business, what are they used for?
Q: How do over the counter derivatives generally originate?
Q: Why are derivatives potentially dangerous?
Q: If they are so dangerous, why are so many businesses using derivatives?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lanni Products is a start up computer software development firm. It currently owns computer equipment worth $30,000 and has cash on hand of $20,000 contributed by Lanni’s owners. For each of the following transactions, identify the real and/or financial assets that trade hands. Are any financial assets created or destroyed in the transaction?
a. Lanni takes out a bank loan. It receives $50,000 in cash and signs a note promising to pay back the loan over 3 years.
b. Lanni uses the cash from the bank plus $20,000 of its own funds to finance the development of new financial planning software.
c. Lanni sells the software product to Microsoft, which will market it to the public under the Microsoft name. Lanni accepts payment in the form of 1,500 shares of Microsoft stock.
d. Lanni sells the shares of stock for $80 per share and uses part of the proceeds to pay off the bank loan.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
a. If you buy 100 shares of IBM stock, to what are you entitled?
b. What is the most money you can make on this investment over the next year?
c. If you pay $50 per share, what is the most money you could lose over the year?
Suppose XYZ in Table 2.3 increases in price to $110, while ABC falls to $20.
Find the percentage change in the price weighted average of these two stocks.
Compare that to the percentage return of a portfolio that holds one share in each company.
Reconsider companies XYZ and ABC from Concept Check 5. Calculate the percentage change in the market value weighted index. Compare that to the rate of return of a portfolio that holds $500 of ABC stock for every $100 of XYZ stock (i.e., an index portfolio).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Price Weighted Average
Consider the data in Table 2.3 for a hypothetical two stock version of the Dow Jones Average.
Stock ABC sells initially at $25 a share, while XYZ sells for $100. Therefore, the initial value of the index would be (25 _ 100)/2 _ 62.5. The final share prices are $30 for stock ABC and $90 for XYZ, so the average falls by 2.5 to (30 _ 90)/2 _ 60. The 2.5 point drop in the index is a 4% decrease: 2.5/62.5 _ .04. Similarly, a portfolio holding one share of each stock would have an initial value of $25 _ $100 _ $125 and a final value of $30 _ $90 _ $120, for an identical 4% decrease.
Notice that price weighted averages give higher priced shares more weight in determining performance of the index. For example, although ABC increased by 20%, while XYZ fell by only 10%, the index dropped in value. This is because the 20% increase in ABC represented a smaller price gain ($5 per share) than the 10% decrease in XYZ ($10 per share). The “Dow portfolio” has four times as much invested in XYZ as in ABC because XYZ’s price is four times that of ABC. Therefore, XYZ dominates the average. You might wonder why the DJIA is now (in mid 2003) at a level of about 9,000 if it is supposed to be the average price of the 30 stocks in the index. The DJIA no longer equals the average price of the 30 stocks because the averaging procedure is adjusted whenever a stock splits or pays a stock dividend of more than 10%, or when one company in the group of 30 industrial firms is replaced by another. When these events occur, the divisor used to compute the “average price” is adjusted so as to leave the index unaffected by the event.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Splits and Price Weighted Averages
Suppose XYZ were to split two for one so that its share price fell to $50. We would not want the average to fall, as that would incorrectly indicate a fall in the general level of market prices. Following a split, the divisor must be reduced to a value that leaves the average unaffected. Table 2.4 illustrates this point. The initial share price of XYZ, which was $100 in Table 2.3, falls to $50 if the stock splits at the beginning of the period. Notice that the number of shares outstanding doubles, leaving the market value of the total shares unaffected. The divisor, d, which originally was 2.0 when the two stock average was initiated, must be reset to a value that leaves the “average” unchanged. Because the sum of the post split stock prices is 75, while the presplit average price was 62.5, we calculate the new value of d by solving 75/d _ 62.5. The value of d, therefore, falls from its original value
of 2.0 to 75/62.5 _ 1.20, and the initial value of the average is unaffected by the split:
75/1.20=62.5.
At period end, ABC will sell for $30, while XYZ will sell for $45, representing the same negative 10% return it was assumed to earn in Table 2.3. The new value of the price weighted average is (30 _ 45)/1.20 _ 62.5. The index is unchanged, so the rate of return is zero, rather than the _4% return that would be calculated in the absence of a split.
This return is greater than that calculated in the absence of a split. The relative weight of XYZ, which is the poorer performing stock, is reduced by a split because its initial price is lower; hence the performance of the average is higher. This example illustrates that the implicit weighting scheme of a price weighted average is somewhat arbitrary, being determined by the prices rather than by the outstanding market values (price per share times number of shares) of the shares in the average.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Turn to Figure 2.9 and look at the listing for General Mills.
a. What was the firm’s closing price yesterday?
b. How many shares could you buy for $5,000?
c. What would be your annual dividend income from those shares?
d. What must be its earnings per share?
2. Consider the three stocks in the following table. Represents price at time t, and Represents shares outstanding at time t. Stock C splits two for one in the last period.
P0 Q0 P1 Q1 P2 Q2
A 90 100 95 100 95 100
B 50 200 45 200 45 200
C 100 200 110 200 55 400
3.a. Calculate the rate of return on a price weighted index of the three stocks for the first period.
b. What must happen to the divisor for the price weighted index in year 2?
c. Calculate the rate of return for the second period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Find the equivalent taxable yield of the municipal bond in the previous problem for tax brackets of zero, 10%, 20%, and 30%.
2. The coupon rate on a tax exempt bond is 5.6%, and the rate on a taxable bond is 8%. Both bonds sell at par. The tax bracket (marginal tax rate) at which an investor would be indifferent between the two bonds is:
a. 30.0%
b. 39.6%
c. 41.7%
d. 42.9%
3. Which security should sell at a greater price?
a. A 10 year Treasury bond with a 9% coupon rate versus a 10 year T bond with a 10% coupon.
b. A 3 month maturity call option with an exercise price of $40 versus a 3 month call on the same stock with an exercise price of $35.
c. A put option on a stock selling at $50, or a put option on another stock selling at
$60 (all other relevant features of the stocks and options may be assumed to be identical).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fees and Net Returns
To see how expenses can affect rate of return, consider a fund with $100 million in assets at the start of the year and with 10 million shares outstanding. The fund invests in a portfolio of stocks that provides no income but increases in value by 10%. The expense ratio, including 12b 1 fees, is 1%. What is the rate of return for an investor in the fund?
The initial NAV equals $100 million/10 million shares _ $10 per share. In the absence of expenses, fund assets would grow to $110 million and NAV would grow to $11 per share, for a 10% rate of return. However, the expense ratio of the fund is 1%. Therefore, $1 million will be deducted from the fund to pay these fees, leaving the portfolio worth only $109 million, and NAV equal to $10.90. The rate of return on the fund is only 9%, which equals the gross return on the underlying portfolio minus the total expense ratio. Fees can have a big effect on performance. Table 4.2 considers an investor who starts with $10,000 and can choose between three funds that all earn an annual 12% return on investment before fees but have different fee structures. The table shows the cumulative amount in each fund after several investment horizons. Fund Ahas total operating expenses of .5%, no load, and no 12b 1 charges. This might represent a low cost producer like Vanguard.
Fund B has no load but has 1% in management expenses and .5% in 12b 1 fees. This level of charges is fairly typical of actively managed equity funds. Finally, Fund C has 1% in management expenses, no 12b 1 charges, but assesses an 8% front end load on purchases. Note the substantial return advantage of low cost Fund A. Moreover, that differential is greater for longer investment horizons.
Although expenses can have a big impact on net investment performance, it is sometimes difficult for the investor in a mutual fund to measure true expenses accurately. This is because of the common practice of paying for some expenses in soft dollars. A portfolio manager earns soft dollar credits with a stockbroker by directing the fund’s trades to that broker. Based on those credits, the broker will pay for some of the mutual fund’s expenses, such as databases, computer hardware, or stock quotation systems. The soft dollar arrangement means that the stockbroker effectively returns part of the trading commission to the
|
Cumulative Proceeds (All Dividends Reinvested)
|
|
Fund A
|
Fund B
|
Fund C
|
|
Initial investment*
|
$10,000
|
$10,000
|
$ 9,200
|
|
5 years
|
17,234
|
16,474
|
15,502
|
|
10 years
|
29,699
|
27,141
|
26,123
|
|
15 years
|
51,183
|
44,713
|
44,018
|
|
20 years
|
88,206
|
73,662
|
74,173
|
fund. The advantage to the mutual fund is that purchases made with soft dollars are not included in the fund’s expenses, so the fund can advertise an unrealistically low expense ratio to the public. Although the fund may have paid the broker needlessly high commissions to obtain the soft dollar “rebate,” trading costs are not included in the fund’s expenses. The impact of the higher trading commission shows up instead in net investment performance. Soft dollar arrangements make it difficult for investors to compare fund expenses, and periodically these arrangements come under attack.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The composition of the Fin group Fund portfolio is as follows:
|
Stock
|
Shares
|
Price
|
|
A
|
200,000
|
$35
|
|
B
|
300,000
|
40
|
|
C
|
400,000
|
20
|
|
D
|
600,000
|
25
|
The fund has not borrowed any funds, but its accrued management fee with the portfolio manager currently totals $30,000. There are 4 million shares outstanding.
What is the net asset value of the fund?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Three phases of the management process are planning, controlling, and improving. Match the following descriptions to the proper phase:
|
Phase of management process
|
Description
|
|
Planning
|
a. Monitoring the operating results of implemented plans and comparing the actual results with expected results.
|
|
Controlling
|
b. Rejects solving individual problems with temporary solutions that fail to address the root cause of the problem.
|
|
Improving
|
c. Used by management to develop the company’s objectives.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Illustrates the reporting of inventory on the balance sheet for a merchandising and a manufacturing business. MusicLand Stores, Inc., a retailer of musical instruments, reports only Merchandise Inventory. In contrast, Legend Guitars, manufacturer of guitars, reports Finished Goods, Work in Process, and Materials inventories. In both balance sheets, inventory is reported in the Current Assets section.
|
MusicLand Stores, Inc. Balance Sheet December 31, 2012
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
Cash
|
$25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
85,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
142,000
|
|
Supplies
|
10,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$262,000
|
|
Legend Guitars Balance Sheet December 31, 2012
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$21,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
|
120,000
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
|
Finished goods
|
$62,500
|
|
|
Work in process
|
24,000
|
|
|
Materials
|
35,000
|
121,500
|
|
Supplies
|
|
2,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
$264,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management process
Three phases of the management process are controlling, planning, and decision making. Match the following descriptions to the proper phase.
|
Phase of management process
|
Description
|
|
Controlling
|
a. Long range courses of action.
|
|
Decision making
|
b. Inherent in planning, directing, controlling, and improving.
|
|
Planning
|
c. Monitoring the operating results of implemented plans and comparing the actual results with expected results.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management process
Three phases of the management process are planning, directing, and controlling. Match the following descriptions to the proper phase.
|
Phase of management process
|
Description
|
|
Directing
|
a. Isolating significant departures from plans for further investigation and possible remedial action. It may lead to a revision of future plans.
|
|
Controlling
|
b. Developing long range courses of action to achieve goals.
|
|
Planning
|
c. Process by which managers, given their assigned levels of responsibilities, run day to day operations.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of goods sold, cost of goods manufactured
Swain Company has the following information for January:
|
Cost of direct materials used in production
|
$12,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
31,000
|
|
Factory overhead
|
20,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, January 1
|
50,000
|
|
Work in process inventory, January 31
|
53,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, January 1
|
21,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory, January 31
|
24,000
|
For January, determine (a) the cost of goods manufactured and (b) the cost of goods sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs as factory overhead
Which of the following items are properly classified as part of factory overhead for Caterpillar, a maker of heavy machinery and equipment?
a. Sales incentive fees to dealers
b. Factory supplies used in the Danville, Kentucky, tractor tread plant
c. Depreciation on Peoria, Illinois, headquarters building
d. Interest expense on debt
e. Amortization of patents on new assembly process
f. Steel plate
g. Vice president of finance’s salary
h. Property taxes on the Aurora, Illinois, manufacturing plant
i. Plant manager’s salary at Aurora, Illinois, manufacturing plant
j. Consultant fees for a study of production line employee productivity
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Concepts and terminology
From the choices presented in parentheses, choose the appropriate term for completing each of the following sentences:
a. The implementation of automatic, robotic factory equipment normally (increases, decreases) the direct labor component of product costs.
b. Payments of cash or the commitment to pay cash in the future for the purpose of generating revenues are (costs, expenses).
c. Feedback is often used to (improve, direct) operations.
d. Advertising costs are usually viewed as (period, product) costs.
e. The balance sheet of a manufacturer would include an account for (cost of goods sold, work in process inventory).
f. A product, sales territory, department, or activity to which costs are traced is called a (direct cost, cost object).
g. Factory overhead costs combined with direct labor costs are called (prime, conversion) costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Concepts and terminology
From the choices presented in parentheses, choose the appropriate term for completing each of the following sentences:
a. An example of factory overhead is (sales office depreciation, plant depreciation).
b. The plant manager’s salary would be considered (direct, indirect) to the product.
c. Materials for use in production are called (supplies, materials inventory).
d. Direct materials costs combined with direct labor costs are called (prime, conversion) costs.
e. The phase of the management process that uses process information to eliminate the source of problems in a process so that the process delivers the correct product in the correct quantities is called (directing, improving).
f. The wages of an assembly worker are normally considered a (period, product) cost.
g. Short term plans are called (strategic, operational) plans.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs in a service company
A partial list of the costs for Wisconsin and Minnesota Railroad, a short hauler of freight, is provided below. Classify each cost as either indirect or direct. For purposes of classifying each cost as direct or indirect, use the train as the cost object.
a. Fuel costs
b. Maintenance costs of right of way, bridges, and buildings
c. Wages of switch and classification yard personnel
d. Cost to lease (rent) train locomotives
e. Wages of train engineers
f. Cost to lease (rent) railroad cars
g. Depreciation of terminal facilities
h. Payroll clerk salaries
i. Safety training costs
j. Cost of track and bed (ballast) replacement
k. Salaries of dispatching and communications
personnel
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Minimum Variance Portfolio Stocks A, B, and C each have the same expected return and standard deviation. The following shows the correlations between returns on these stocks:
| |
Stock A
|
Stock B
|
Stock C
|
|
Stock A
|
+1.0
|
|
|
|
Stock B
|
+0.9
|
+1.0
|
|
|
Stock C
|
+0.1
|
0.4
|
+1.0
|
Given these correlations, which of the following portfolios constructed from these stocks would have the lowest risk?
a. One equally invested in stocks A and B.
b. One equally invested in stocks A and C.
c. One equally invested in stocks B and C.
d. One totally invested in stock C.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Markowitz Efficient Frontier Which of the following portfolios cannot lie on the efficient frontier as described by Markowitz?
| |
Portfolio
|
Expected Return
|
Standard Deviation
|
|
a.
|
W
|
9%
|
21%
|
|
b.
|
X
|
5
|
7
|
|
c.
|
Y
|
15
|
36
|
|
d.
|
Z
|
12
|
15
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Portfolio Volatility True or false: If two stocks have the same standard deviation of 45 percent, then any portfolio of the two stocks will also have a standard deviation of 45 percent.
Diversification You are an investment adviser and a client makes the following statement:
I do not want a diversified portfolio since I will never get the highest possible return. How do you respond to your client?
Investment Opportunity Set You have a portfolio created from two assets. As you add more of the lower risk asset to your portfolio, the risk of your portfolio increases. What do you know about your current portfolio?
Minimum Variance Portfolio Why is the minimum variance portfolio important in regard to the Markowitz efficient frontier?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Expected Returns Use the following information on states of the economy and stock returns to calculate the expected return for Dingaling Telephone:
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Security Return If State Occurs
|
|
Recession
|
0.2
|
8%
|
|
Normal
|
0.6
|
13
|
|
Boom
|
0.2
|
23
|
Standard Deviations Using the information in the previous question, calculate the standard deviation of returns.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| |
Security Returns If State Occurs
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Roll
|
Ross
|
|
Bust
|
0.3
|
10%
|
21%
|
|
Boom
|
0.7
|
28
|
8
|
Expected Returns Calculate the expected returns for Roll and Ross by filling in the following table (verify your answer by expressing returns as percentages as well as decimals):
| |
Roll
|
Ross
|
|
(1) State of Economy
|
(2) Probability of State of Economy
|
(3) Return If State Occurs
|
(4) Product (2)X(3)
|
(5) Return if State Occurs
|
(6) Product (2)X(5)
|
|
Bust
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Boom
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| |
Security Returns If State Occurs
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Roll
|
Ross
|
|
Bust
|
0.3
|
10%
|
21%
|
|
Boom
|
0.7
|
28
|
8
|
Standard Deviations Calculate the standard deviations for Roll and Ross by filling in the following table (verify your answer using returns expressed in percentages as well as decimals):
|
(1) State of Economy
|
(2) Probability of State of Economy
|
(3) Return Deviation from Expected Return
|
(4) Squared Return Deviation
|
(5) Product (2)X(4)
|
|
Roll
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bust
|
|
|
|
|
|
Boom
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ross
|
|
|
|
|
|
Bust
|
|
|
|
|
|
Boom
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| |
Security Returns If State Occurs
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Roll
|
Ross
|
|
Bust
|
0.3
|
10%
|
21%
|
|
Boom
|
0.7
|
28
|
8
|
Portfolio Expected Returns Calculate the expected return on a portfolio of 45 percent Roll and 55 percent Ross by filling in the following table:
|
(1) State of Economy
|
(2) Probability of State of Economy
|
(3) Portfolio Return If State Occurs
|
(4) Product (2)X(3)
|
|
Bust
|
|
|
|
|
Boom
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating Returns and Standard Deviations Based on the following information, calculate the expected return and standard deviation for the two stocks.
| |
Rate of Return If State Occurs
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Stock A
|
Stock B
|
|
Recession
|
0.1
|
0.04
|
.20
|
|
Normal
|
0.65
|
0.09
|
0.13
|
|
Boom
|
0.25
|
0.12
|
0.33
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Returns and Standard Deviations Consider the following information:
| |
|
Rate of Return If State Occurs
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Stock A
|
Stock B
|
Stock C
|
|
Boom
|
0.2
|
0.18
|
0.48
|
0.33
|
|
Good
|
0.4
|
0.11
|
0.18
|
0.15
|
|
Poor
|
0.3
|
0.05
|
.09
|
.05
|
|
Bust
|
0.1
|
.03
|
.32
|
.09
|
a. Your portfolio is invested 25 percent each in A and C, and 50 percent in B. What is the expected return of the portfolio?
b. What is the variance of this portfolio? The standard deviation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Portfolio Returns and Volatilities Fill in the missing information in the following table. Assume that Portfolio AB is 30 percent invested in Stock A.
|
Year
|
Stock A
|
Stock B
|
Portfolio AB
|
|
2003
|
11%
|
21%
|
|
|
2004
|
37
|
38
|
|
|
2005
|
21
|
48
|
|
|
2006
|
26
|
16
|
|
|
2007
|
13
|
24
|
|
|
Average return
|
|
|
|
|
Standard deviation
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Portfolio Returns and Volatilities Given the following information, calculate the expected return and standard deviation for a portfolio that has 45 percent invested in Stock A, 35 percent in Stock B, and the balance in Stock C.
| |
|
|
Returns
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Stock A
|
Stock B
|
Stock C
|
|
Boom
|
0.7
|
15%
|
18%
|
20%
|
|
Bust
|
0.3
|
10
|
0
|
10
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Portfolio Variance Use the following information to calculate the expected return and standard deviation of a portfolio that is 40 percent invested in 3 Doors, Inc., and 60 percent invested in Down Co.:
| |
3 Doors, Inc.
|
|
Down Co.
|
|
Expected return, E ( R )
|
14%
|
|
10%
|
|
Standard deviation,σ
|
42
|
|
31
|
|
Correlation
|
|
0.15
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Minimum Variance Portfolio Consider two stocks, Stock D with an expected return of 13 percent and a standard deviation of 39 percent and Stock I, an international company, with an expected return of 16 percent and a standard deviation of 53 percent. The correlation between the two stocks is _.10. What is the weight of each stock in the minimum variance portfolio?
Minimum Variance Portfolio What are the expected return and standard deviation of the minimum variance portfolio in the previous problem?
Minimum Variance Portfolio Asset K has an expected return of 15 percent and a standard deviation of 41 percent. Asset L has an expected return of 6 percent and a standard deviation of 10 percent. The correlation between the assets is .09. What are the expected return and standard deviation of the minimum variance portfolio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The owner of the Diamondhead restaurant in Honolulu would like to determine the fixed and variable components of the restaurant”s utility expenses. The owner believes that the variable component of the utilities cost is driven by the number of meals served.
|
|
Meals Utilities
|
Utilities
|
|
|
served
|
cost
|
|
January
|
3,000
|
$450
|
|
February
|
4,000
|
$480
|
|
March
|
3,500
|
$490
|
|
April
|
4,500
|
$530
|
|
May
|
5,000
|
$570
|
|
June
|
6,000
|
$620
|
|
July
|
5,500
|
$560
|
Required:
a. Plot the data on the graph below.
b. Using the quick and dirty scattergraph method, derive a cost formula for utilities
cost.
c. c Use your cost formula to predict the utilities cost if 5,200 meals are served.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arlo”s T shirt Shop only has three costs: T shirt cost, rent cost on the shop, and
utilities cost. Arlo”s sells the T shirt for $14.50 each. Management has prepared the
following estimated cost information for next month:
|
|
At 8,000
|
At 10,000
|
|
|
T shirts
|
T shirts
|
|
T shirt cost
|
$48,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Rent cost
|
$3,600
|
$3,600
|
|
Utilities cost
|
$6,800
|
$8,300
|
Assume that all of the activity levels mentioned in this problem are within the relevant
range.
Required:
a. Calculate what Arlo”s should expect for total variable cost if 9,000 T shirts are sold
next month.
b. Prepare Arlo”s contribution approach income statement for a monthly sales volume
level of 10,000 T shirts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Butler Sales Company is a distributor that has an exclusive franchise to sell a particular product made by another company. Butler Sales Company”s income statements for the last two years are given below:
|
|
This Year
|
Last Year
|
|
Units sold
|
200,000
|
160,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,000,000
|
$800,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold
|
700,000
|
560,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
300,000
|
240,000
|
|
Less operating expenses
|
210,000
|
198,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$ 90,000
|
$ 42,000
|
Operating expenses are a mixture of fixed costs and variable and mixed costs that vary with respect to the number of units sold.
Required:
a. Estimate the company”s variable operating expenses per unit, and its total fixed operating expenses per year.
b. Compute the company”s contribution margin for this year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Buff Sports Stadium believes that the number of sporting events each month is a measure of activity for total clean up cost. Shown below are event figures and total clean up costs for the past four months:
|
|
Number of
|
Total
|
|
|
Sporting
|
Clean up
|
|
|
Events
|
Cost
|
|
July
|
28
|
$30,900
|
|
August
|
34
|
$34,200
|
|
September
|
16
|
$20,700
|
|
October
|
22
|
$28,200
|
Required:
a. Estimate Buff”s cost formula for monthly clean up cost using the high low method.
b. Estimate Buff”s cost formula for monthly clean up cost using the least squares regression method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below are cost and activity data for a particular cost over the last four periods. Your boss has asked you to analyze this cost so that management will have a better understanding of how this cost changes in response to changes in activity.
|
|
Activity
|
Cost
|
|
Period 1
|
47
|
$474
|
|
Period 2
|
44
|
$460
|
|
Period 3
|
42
|
$450
|
|
Period 4
|
40
|
$440
|
Required:
Using the least squares regression method, estimate the cost formula for this cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below are cost and activity data for a particular cost over the last four periods. Your boss has asked you to analyze this cost so that management will have a better understanding of how this cost changes in response to changes in activity.
|
|
Activity
|
Cost
|
|
Period 1
|
46
|
$483
|
|
Period 2
|
42
|
$465
|
|
Period 3
|
45
|
$477
|
|
Period 4
|
49
|
$500
|
Required:
Using the least squares regression method, estimate the cost formula for this cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hodgson Industrial Design is using a standard costing system to calculate its inventory balances and cost of goods sold. The company conducts a month end physical inventory count that results in a reasonably accurate set of unit quantities for all inventory items. The cost accountant multiplies each of these unit quantities by their standard costs to derive the ending inventory valuation. This ending balance is $2,500,000.
The beginning inventory account balance is $2,750,000 and purchases during the month were $1,000,000, so the calculation of the cost of goods sold is:
|
Beginning inventory
|
$2,750,000
|
|
+ Purchases
|
1,000,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
(2,500,000)
|
|
= Cost of goods sold
|
$1,250,000
|
To record the correct ending inventory balance and cost of goods sold, Hodgson records the following entry, which clears out the purchases asset account and adjusts the ending inventory balance to $2,500,000:
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1250000
|
|
|
Purchases
|
|
1000000
|
|
Inventory
|
41,000
|
250000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Length: 2000 words
Task:
Referring to the 2012 and 2013 annual reports of Flight Centre
1) Apply two of the interpretive techniques, analyse the financial data contained in the three financial statements and comment on the company’s profitability, liquidity and gearing.
Calculation for the financial statements should be done in Microsoft Excel according to the financial data providing in the annual reports.
2) Critique the usefulness of publicly available financial information contained in the annual report of a company from the perspective of a potential investor.
Structure of the Report
Executive summary
Table of contents
Introduction
Body
Conclusion
References
Appendix of all calculations
Your report must include as an appendix details of all calculations completed as part of the interpretive techniques applied to reach your conclusions.
Note: There shouldn’t be any plagiarism at all, it’s very important. Also there should be at least 10 APA Style references. Lastly please do all the calculation in Microsoft Excel. Please Find Attached 2012 and 2013 Reports. Thanks
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brief Exercise 13 15
Selected data taken from a recent year’s financial statements of trading card company
Topps Company, Inc. are as follows (in millions).
| Net sales |
|
$326.7 |
| Current liabilities, beginning of year |
|
41.1 |
| Current liabilities, end of year |
|
62.4 |
| Net cash provided by operating activities |
|
10.4 |
| Total liabilities, beginning of year |
|
65.2 |
| Total liabilities, end of year |
|
73.2 |
| Capital expenditures |
|
3.7 |
| Cash dividends |
|
6.2 |
Compute these ratios: current cash debt coverage ratio, cash debt coverage ratio, and free cash flow. Provide a brief interpretation of your results.
(Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 0.12.)
| Current cash debt coverage ratio |
|
|
times |
| Cash debt coverage ratio |
|
|
times |
| Free Cash Flow |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schrager Company has two production departments: Cutting and Assembly. July 1 inventories are Raw Materials $4,200, Work in Process—Cutting $2,900, Work in Process—Assembly $10,600, and Finished Goods $31,000. During July, the following transactions occurred.
| 1. |
Purchased $62,500 of raw materials on account. |
| 2. |
Incurred $60,000 of factory labor. (Credit Factory Wages Payable.) |
| 3. |
Incurred $70,000 of manufacturing overhead; $40,000 was paid and the remainder is unpaid. |
| 4. |
Requisitioned materials for Cutting $15,700 and Assembly $8,900. |
| 5. |
Used factory labor for Cutting $33,000 and Assembly $27,000. |
| 6. |
Applied overhead at the rate of $18 per machine hour. Machine hours were Cutting 1,680 and Assembly 1,720. |
| 7. |
Transferred goods costing $67,600 from the Cutting Department to the Assembly Department. |
| 8. |
Transferred goods costing $134,900 from Assembly to Finished Goods. |
| 9. |
Sold goods costing $150,000 for $200,000 on account. |
Journalize the transactions. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
|
No.
|
Account Titles and Explanation
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 3 Discussion QuestionIn working out your responses to the Discussion Question, you should choose examples from your own experience or find appropriate cases on the Web that you can discuss. Credit will be given for references you make to relevant examples from real companies.
Consider the following statement: To maximise profit, you need to sell your output at the highest price. After what you have learned this week with regards to costing systems and pricing of products, analyse the validity of this statement. How should marginal costs be considered when determining prices?
Please submit your initial response through the Turnitin submission link below in addition to posting it to the Discussion Board thread.
Week 3 Hand in Assignment
Managing Finance Week 3 Hand In Assignment
A computer manufacturer produces three types of devices:mobile phones, tablets, and computers. For the production of these three devices you have the following information:
|
|
Phone
|
Tablet
|
Computer
|
|
Material cost per unit
|
£90
|
£140
|
£315
|
|
Direct labor hours per unit
|
2
|
2.5
|
4
|
|
Budgeted units
|
1,500,000
|
900,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Labor cost per hour
|
£8
|
|
Overhead costs per annum
|
|
Utilities
|
£20,000,000
|
|
Rent
|
£15,000,000
|
|
Audit and legal
|
£5,000,000
|
|
Administrative staff
|
£40,000,000
|
|
Total
|
£80,000,000
|
ABC analysis suggested that overhead costs are distributed to the three products according to the table below:
|
Overheads
|
Phone
|
Tablet
|
Computer
|
|
Utilities
|
£8,000,000
|
£5,000,000
|
£7,000,000
|
|
Rent
|
£8,250,000
|
£2,250,000
|
£4,500,000
|
|
Audit and legal
|
£2,900,000
|
£1,250,000
|
£850,000
|
|
Administrative staff
|
£23,200,000
|
£6,000,000
|
£10,800,000
|
For each of the three products, the company aims at a different percentage for profit. Under the full absorption costing method and the targeted profit percentage, the prices of the three products should be:
|
Phone
|
Tablet
|
Computer
|
|
Full costing price
|
£170.69
|
£233.87
|
£435.67
|
- Calculate the aimed profit percentages for the three products and under the full absorption costing method, with overhead costs absorbed on the basis of direct labour hours.
- Use the profit percentages that you derived in (1) and calculate the prices of the three products under the ABC system.
- Recommend a cost system and include any changes that you would suggest to the pricing strategy of the computer company (target length 300 words).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A lump sum purchase or basket purchase involves paying a single price for several assets as a group.
True or False
The double declining balance method is an accelerated method of depreciation.
True or False
The gain or loss on the sale of a plant asset is determined by comparing:
sale value and original cost.
sale value and book value.
sale value and residual value.
book value and residual value.
A company purchased a computer on July 1, 2015 for $50,000. Estimated useful life of the computer was 5 years and it has no residual value. Which of the following methods should be used to best match its expense against the revenue it produces?
the straight line method
the first in, first out method
the units of production method
the double declining balance method
When a plant asset is sold for a price lower than its book value, there will be a gain.
True or False
Which of the following accounting principles requires businesses to record depreciation?
the matching principle
the going concern principle
the cost principle
the revenue recognition principle
Which of the following is included in the cost of a plant asset?
amounts paid to make the asset ready for its intended use
replacement of damaged parts of the asset
regular repair and maintenance cost
wages of workers who work with the asset
Iverycoast Inc. purchased a van on January 1, 2015, for $800,000. Estimated life of the van was 5 years, and its estimated residual value was $90,000. Iverycoast uses the straight line method of depreciation. At the beginning of 2017, the company revised the total estimated life of the asset from 5 years to 4 years. The estimated residual value remained the same as estimated earlier. Calculate the depreciation expense for the year 2017.
$250,000
$220,000
$213,000
$145,000
Which of the following is true of asset turnover ratio?
It measures how efficiently a business uses its sales to finance the assets.
It measures how the ending inventory helps in increasing the value of assets.
It measures how efficiently a business uses its net profit to finance the assets.
It measures how efficiently a business uses its average total assets to generate sales.
Which of the following is an expense resulting from decline in the utility of a natural resource?
depletion
amortization
depreciation
obsolescence
Fred owns a delivery truck. Which of the following costs, associated with the truck, will be treated as a revenue expenditure?
modification for new use
addition to storage capacity
major engine overhaul
oil change and lubrication
If a company uses the contra account, Accumulated Amortization, this account will typically be shown on the balance sheet.
True or False
A company purchased a used machine for $10,000. The machine required installation costs of $1,000 and insurance while in transit of $500. At which of the following amounts would the machine be recorded?
$10,500
$11,000
$10,000
$11,500
Steel Rolling Company purchased a mine on January 1, 2015, for $500,000 and it is estimated to contain 30,000 tons of iron ore. There is no residual value. The company has extracted 2,500 tons of ore in 2015 and 3,800 tons of ore in 2016. What is depletion expense for 2016? (Do not round your intermediate calculations).
$42,667
$63,667
$63,333
$33,333
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
hi.i want u to do my assignment for subject Current development in accounting thougts.plz make sure that all the data u put is write by your own words not a single word copy from internet or some other source because i want to put it on turnition where they show all the work if u copied from internet or from some websites.just give me quality work and plagirism free work.thanks
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment # 1
Value:15%
Task
The assessment is based on two blog entries, Blog 1 and Blog 4 which will be posted on the Resouce section under Assignment.
Assignment Question 1 (7.5%)
Create a PowerPoint Presentation to provide a succinct explanation of how the implementation of cloud computing relates to an organisations strategy and how it could affect a company’s value chain. Use a recent announcement by a company to illustrate your explanation. Your presentation should be a maximum of 10 slides. Please include any accompanying notes (in the note section of your presentation) you would use for a 10 minute presentation. Alternatively you can use Voice over PowerPoint to provide a 10 minute presentation. Ensure you refer to the marking criteria specified in the subject outline.
Assignment Question 2 (7.5%)
Your manager has requested a report explaining how ERP can value add. Include in your report any potential risks that should be avoided when implementing a cloud based ERP solution in an organisation. Use the blog post above as a starting point . Your report, including executive summary should be maximum length 1200 words.
Question 1 should be pasted in word and then uploaded onto Turnitin.
Rationale
This assignment is designed to enable you to demonstrate your ability to:
• understand and apply foundation principles relating to computerised information systems in contemporary organisations
• explain the role of data analysis tools and data mining;
• to illustrate typical network configurations and identify the components of a network, particularly identifying the role that cloud computing has in a network;
• evaluate accounting information system architecture, particularly identifying the role that cloud computing and ERP have as the basis for an accounting information system;
• identify organisational risk and the impact that cloud computing and ERP systems have on that risk
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACCT640 – Managerial Accounting Fall 2013 Case #3 – Performance Drinks A further study of: Regression Analysis Contribution Margin Reporting Cost Volume Profit Analysis Differential Analysis Capital Budgeting Written by: Tim Bergsma, CMA, CFE Assistant Professor – Accounting Davenport University Donald W. Maine – College of Business Email: tbergsma@davenport.edu Background: Performance Drinks, LLC is owned by Dave N. Port. Performance Drinks produces a variety of sports centered drinks. They began operations in 1993 shortly after Mr. Port graduated with his M.B.A. from Davenport University. The company saw early success as sports and fitness nutritional products gained new popularity in the 1990’s. Financially the company is sound and has been wise in controlling their growth over the years. However, within the last 18 months Mr. Port has noticed a drop in overall company profitability. This is especially troubling considering that the company has continued to experience top line growth. Mr. Port and his management team have been considering developing a new product line. However, those plans have been put on hold until they can figure out why their profits are shrinking. Performance Drinks makes four different kinds of sports drinks. Those drinks are as follows: • Basic • Hydration • Intensity • Post Workout Each of these drinks contains a slightly different nutritional profile and is targeted for different users and uses. The Basic drink has the least nutritional benefit and is targeted for general consumption. The Hydration product targets endurance athletes and specializes in hydration replacement. The Intensity product was designed with energy enhancement in mind. It serves the needs of extreme athletes who need long durations of sustained energy. Lastly, the Post Workout product is a nutritional replacement product that is generally used following exertion. Information Related to Case #2 (this section is the same as you received when you were assigned Case #2): You are the Controller for Performance Drinks. You feel as though you have a good handle on the financial reporting and the overall company performance. However, admittedly, your accounting information system has been designed to serve the needs of external users from an aggregate perspective. To that end you utilize absorption costing exclusively within the organization. You recall studying the concept of Activity Based Management (ABM) and Activity Based Costing (ABC) while taking a managerial accounting course. You wonder if applying those ideas to your business would help to uncover the mystery of the disappearing profits. You recall from your Management Accounting class that product costs are comprised of: • Direct Materials • Direct Labor • Manufacturing Overhead You don’t suspect that anything strange is going with your direct costs. You do wonder, however, if a more thorough understanding of your indirect costs may be in order. Over a series of weeks you talk with a variety of employees, representing a multitude of functional areas, from within the company. During those conversations you take careful note on what activities might be consuming resources and how those activities might be measured. You sharpen your pencil and begin to unpack what you’ve learned. You start with reviewing last month’s Product Level Profit Report. That report is following: Since your primary area of focus is on the indirect costs you compile the following report which further details your overhead charges: Overhead Activities: Using traditional costing methods, which support your absorption costing system, you base overhead allocation on direct labor cost. Furthermore, “fringe benefits” are a function of direct labor cost. As a result of your many meetings to discuss company overhead you determine that the majority of your indirect costs are related to four primary activities. Those activities are equipment set ups, production runs, production management and machine hour capacity. “Production Management” refers to a number of items that are correlated to the number of products the company produces. Ultimately you determine that your key activities have the following usage patterns, as they pertain to the monthly overhead costs: Upon reviewing budget data from the last budget cycle you discover that the monthly number of set ups was estimated to be 85. The number of production runs was estimated to be 250. That monthly machine hour capacity is presently at 20,000 machine hours. Lastly, Performance Drinks produces a total of four products. After talking with the Plant Manager you create the following usage data relative to products and activities: New Information Pertaining to Case #3: The financial reporting to date has been done using absorption costing. That is to say that the manufacturing costs included direct materials, direct labor, variable manufacturing overhead and fixed manufacturing overhead. In this sense the Income Statements have historically reported Gross Margin. Following is a Monthly Income Statement, based on absorption costing, for Performance Drinks: You begin to wonder if there would be any value in repackaging the income statement in a way that would report Contribution Margin as opposed to Gross Margin. You know that in order to report Contribution Margin you will need to understand your costs as variable and fixed. Unfortunately the general ledger does not specifically report costs as variable and fixed. You remember learning that regression analysis can be used to generate data that can be used to create a total cost equation. With the total cost equation we can understand our total cost as the sum of fixed costs and variable costs. After doing some research your collect the following data related to overhead and possible causal factors: Requirement #1 Using the data above, which has also been provided electronically in Excel, run the following regression analyses: • Linear regression analyzing total overhead cost and units sold • Linear regression analyzing total overhead cost and machine hours used • Multiple regression analysis analyzing total overhead cost along with both units sold and machine hours used Requirement #2 Based on the results from the three regression analyses determine which correlation provides the best estimate of the total cost equation. Explain why you selected the correlation that you did. Requirement #3 Write out the total cost equation using the results from the multiple regression test. Requirement #4 Create a “Contribution” formatted income statement using the results from the multiple regression test. Your selling price per unit and your direct material cost per unit and your direct labor cost per unit and your fringe benefits all come from the original “Traditional” income statement. Use the following additional information regarding machine hours, used by each product, to compute variable overhead. Reference the following sales volumes, by product, for your cost allocation related to units sold. This data will help you calculate variable overhead. Use the following template as a guide for the format of your “Contribution” Income Statement: Requirement #5 Compute the following: • Break even point in units • Break even point in sales dollars • Targeted profit point in units (use $50,000 as your targeted profit point) • Margin of Safety Requirement #6 A new customer has surfaced. That customer has asked you to consider producing a special one time order for them. This special order would require a modification to the recipe that will slightly increase the variable cost per unit. Furthermore, there would be a small fixed cost addition. The details for the order as follows: Conduct a differential analysis regarding this special order. Would you accept this order under the conditions provided? Explain and defend your position. Requirement #7: Your management team has asked you to consider investing in a new piece of equipment. The details of that investment opportunity are following: The discount rate for this project is 5%. Compute the following: • Net Present Value • Internal Rate of Return Would you recommend investing in this new piece of equipment? Explain and defend your position. Clarification on format and data: Clear communication and professionalism are important. Defending your answer with data is important. • An electronic copy of this Case (this document) is available within Blackboard. Additionally, an Excel file, containing the necessary data for the case will be available within Blackboard. • Create one professional report, in Word, that contains all of answers. In that report you should clearly label all of your answers. Make your answers easy to read and find. Imagine you were giving this report to your boss. Further imagine you have to lead your boss and the executive team through your findings. You will then have one Word document as your final product. You will also have one Excel file. • Grading is based on both accuracy (see rubric) and your ability to communicate your answers professionally and clearly. • Use the following naming structure for your files: last name_first initial_case3.docx. Of course your Excel file will have an .xls suffix. • Double space your report. • Put good thought into how you organize your Excel document. Part of your grade will be based upon the usability and layout of your Excel file. Imagine that have to give the electronic copy of your Excel file to your boss, or a peer, to work with. Imagine that you could not coach them at all on how to use your file. Is your file organized and labeled so clearly that anyone could use it, easily, without instructions from you? You want to strive for that kind of clarity in your work. • Your report should have a title page. Use APA 6th edition for guidance on title pages. • You will physically hand in your report. You will also upload to Blackboard both your Word document and your Excel file. • Due date: Tuesday, October 22nd at 6:00 PM EDT • Late submissions will result in the following: 10% reduction in score for each 24 hour period of being late (up to 3 days). After 3 days late zero credit will be earned. • As always please come to me with learning questions. This project is a learning experience. Rubric: This project is worth 25% (250 points) of your overall course grade. I will convert your scores to a 250 point scale.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1
Value:15%
Task
This assessment task consists of two (2) questions: a newsletter, and a question on financial statement presentation. A total of 50 marks are allocated to the questions below, which will then be converted to a mark out of 15%.
Rationale
This assessment task is designed to assess your understanding of topics 1 and 2 of the subject.
Marking criteria
A detailed marking rubric has been provided in the ‘Requirements’ section below for each question.
Presentation
Physical presentation of assignments
It is essential that presentation of assignments adheres to accepted standards in relation to neatness and layout, as you are practising to present material in a work situation. Correct formatting and referencing procedures of material should be strictly adhered to for essays. You should submit a proper reference list (using APA referencing style)for all essay type assignments. A reference list contains only those works cited or quoted from in your essay. A bibliography is acceptable for practical type assignments.
For practical questions:
- all journal entries must include narrations unless otherwise specified;
- any ledger accounts should preferably be shown in ‘T’ account format and dates and descriptions be included;
- journal entries and ledger accounts must reflect the strict order of sequence of events;
- financial statements (including extracts) should include proper headings and accord with presentation standards.
Penalties will be incurred if material is not correctly referenced and if presentation is not of an acceptable standard.
Please also note the following:
- Journal entries, ledger accounts, worksheets and financial statements should always balance. If you have to submit a piece of work that does not balance because you cannot detect your error please include some comment about the source of your problem so the marker can provide appropriate feedback.
- Include workings where appropriate. Partial marks can be allocated for workings where the final answer is incorrect.
Please also refer to the detailed guidelines provided in the ‘Requirements’ section for the newsletter question.
Requirements
All workings, when appropriate, must be shown to substantiate your answers.
Question 1 [35 marks]
The regulatory environment for financial reporting
You are a member of a large accounting firm which is responsible for preparing financial reports, including statements and notes to the accounts; and for advising staff in client firms who are responsible for preparing financial reports. The firm only deals with large Australian companies listed on the Australian Stock Exchange. One of your key tasks is to monitor the changes and developments in the financial reporting environmentand summarise them in a regularly published newsletter.
Required:
Prepare a
2page
newsletterthat identifies and summarises developments and changes in the financial reporting environmentfor the period24
July 2014 22 August 2014, inclusive.
Detailed guidelines for completing this question:
1. Monitoring of changes and developments
This will involve regular monitoring of a number of sources over the required period. The sources should be varied in range, as you will need to identify and consider developments/changes relating to:
- Technical issues such as issue of new accounting standards, exposure drafts or other pronouncements or interpretations.
- Regulation and monitoring of financial reporting.
- Political influences or other potential developments (such as identification of any reporting failures) that could impact or may be of interest to staff (such as Enron or Parmalat failure). ‘Political’ does not only mean action from politicians – it would also include lobbying/actions by other groups to promote their own interests – for example there may be articles about companies, or particular interest groups such as Group of 100, saying that if certain accounting standards are introduced this will disadvantage or have a negative impact.
You will need to consider both local (Australian) and international sources and developments. A section on ‘international’ items/developments must be included in the newsletter. This should not be restricted to the IASB.
2. Potential sources
Given the scope of the potential influences on financial reporting you will need to monitor a range of sources. Below is a list of sources that may be of interest, note that this list is not exhaustive, students should search for sources outside of these. Students should not rely on any one type of source, but a range of sources from each category, i.e. do not just look at websites, also check journals, newspapers etc. Examples of possible information sources include:
(i) Websites such as those of:
- Australian Accounting Standards Board
- Financial Reporting Council
- Australian Securities and Investment Commission
- Australian Securities Exchange
- International Federation of Accountants
- Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia
- CPA Australia
- International Accounting Standards Board
- Financial Accounting Standards Board
- Websites of large accounting firms.
(ii) Professional publications:
- In the Black (CPA)
- Charter (ICAA)
(iii) Newspapers/journals
3. Contents
The restriction of a
2 page newslettermeans thatyouneed to use your own judgement as to whether to include information about specific changes and developments and how much information to include.It is not intended that you provide complete details of changes/developments (although you may consider in particular cases that more detail is needed). The purpose of the newsletter is to alert staff to changes and developments that may impact on their work and provide enough information about these changes/developments to satisfy the following:
- For staff (the intended audience) to understand the nature of the development/change and its potential impact (so staff can decide whether they need to investigate further given the nature of their own work),
- Provide sufficient information for staff to be able to obtain further information on the development/change if they wish to,
- The newsletter should where possible be inyour own wordswith sources adequately referenced using the appropriate referencing system.
Some examples ofsignificant items to be considered include:
- Revised or reissued accounting standards or interpretation (both national and international),
- ASIC reviews on financial reporting,
- New ASX disclosures for listed companies.
Given the target audience, it would be assumed that they have a working knowledge of common terms and abbreviations (such as AASB, FASB) so abbreviations may be used.Don’t be afraid to be creative. The effectiveness of a newsletter is impacted by how interesting the readers find it.
What not to consider?
Students need to take care that the developments and the changes considered and included in the newsletter are relevant to the objective, in particular the issues/developments that directly relate to the preparation of financial reports for large companies listed on the Australian Stock Exchange. The newsletter SHOULD NOT consider areas only INDIRECTLY related to the preparation of financial reports such as (and this is not an exhaustive list):
- Fraud,
- Auditing,
- Taxation,
- Other disclosures by listed companies such as:
- Industry disclosures required by peak organisations,
- Voluntary disclosures in the area of corporate social responsibility,
- Voluntary Environmental disclosures.
4. Format
The newsletter should be in the following format:
- The top of the newsletter must include the title (you need to decide on what to call your newsletter) and details of the period the newsletter is considering.
- The newsletter should not read as one continuous ‘essay’. It must include headings and sub headings that assist in identifying the nature of changes/developments and help to guide the reader, and also enable the reader to distinguish between items of interest and the relative importance of changes.
- You must refer the reader to specific sources so that they are able to obtain more detailed information of the development/change.
- The newsletter must be printed in minimum font size of11 points(You may wish to use larger fonts etc for headings etc). You may wish to set your newsletter out using columnsbutthis is optional. Apart from minimum font size, there are no specific requirements in relation to line spacing, margins etc. However, you should note that simply reducing line spacings, margins to ‘fit more in’ may impact on the presentation and effectiveness of the newsletter.
- There isnospecific ‘word limit’. The newsletter must beno longer than 2 pages. In cases where the newsletter exceeds the 2 page limit, only the first 2 pages will be marked.
Do
notattach actual articles/printouts of web sources etc to your assessment. You are only required to include details of these in the bibliography.
5. Bibliography and referencing
This assessment must include a bibliography rather than a reference list (this should not be part ofyour newsletter and tobe given on a separate page).A bibliography includes all materials used in the preparation of your assignment, not just those referenced within the paper.The reason a bibliography is required (rather than a reference list) is that this will provide an insight into the range and regularity of your monitoring activities (not just those specifically referenced within your ‘paper’) which is part of the criteria for assessment.It is expected that the bibliography will be quite long.The bibliography needs to include specifics of what you have actually accessed and read that is related to the area not just a general link to a website or newspaper etc. Therefore if you use a source such as the AASB website, please reference every article that you read separately. Assessments without a bibliography will not be accepted or marked.
When citing electronic sources please include the date accessed. If you are unsure how to cite electronic sources check the referencing guides that are available from the library or online at the student services site.APA referencing style should be used forall citing format.
Please be reminded that plagiarism is regarded as a serious issue within the University system with severe consequences for students who have been found to have deliberately plagiarised, the minimum penalty being zero for the assignment. All students should ensure that they are familiar with the plagiarism policy and referencing requirements before commencing assessment.
Rationale
Thepurpose of this assignment is to help you further develop some of the skills and knowledge required and valued by the accountancy profession. The task that you will be required to undertake is similar to the tasks required of a professional accountant working within the financial reporting field. Accounting professionals need to ensure they are aware of current developments and that their knowledge is ‘up to date’. They need to be able to identify changes that have occurred that may impact on their work and to know where they can obtain information about these changes. In this assignment you are asked to provide a summary of recent developments relating to financial reporting.
Assuch this assignment aims to:
- Developthe student’s ability to identify and source changes to financial reporting requirements so as to update professional knowledge required for practice;
- Acquirean awareness of current developments and changes (both locally and internationally) that may impact on current and future financial reporting rules and regulations;
- Developthe student’s ability to provide written material appropriate to the accountancy profession;
- Helpstudents appreciate the limitations of the currency of knowledge in a technical financial reporting area;
- Allowstudents to understand the relationships between technical issues and community attitude to financial reporting.
Assessment criteria
The newsletter will be assessed in relation to the criteria specified in the following marking guide.
| Element |
Criteria |
Exceeds expectation (HD/D) |
Meets expectation (CR/PS) |
Fails to meet expectation (FL) |
| Technical content |
Local reporting news [15%] |
[11 15%] Correctly identify and report most of the news relating to changes in local financial reporting environment. |
[7 10%] Correctly identify and report some of the news relating to changes in local financial reporting environment. |
[0 6%] Identify some of the news relating to changes in local financial reporting environment, some news were incorrectly reported. |
| International reporting news [15%] |
[11 15%] Correctly identify and report most of the news relating to changes in international financial reporting environment. |
[7 10%] Correctly identify and report some of the news relating to changes in international financial reporting environment. |
[0 6%] Identify some of the news relating to changes in international financial reporting environment, some news items were incorrectly reported. |
| Effectiveness |
Detail of discussion [15%] |
[11 15%] provides appropriate level of detail for all news; provides effective summaries and directions to staff to access further information where appropriate for all news; discriminates between significant and minor news. |
[7 10%] provides appropriate level of detail for most of the news; provides effective summaries and directions to staff to access further information where appropriate for most of the news; sufficiently discriminates between significant and minor news. |
[0 6%] level of detail provided for most of the news is inappropriate; summaries provided are not effective for most news and directions to staff to access further information are not provided; does not discriminates between significant and minor news. |
|
Creativity [15%] |
[11 15%] titles/headings provided attract attention; design of newsletter is exemplary. |
[7 10%] titles/headings provided sometimes attract attention; design of newsletter is original. |
[0 6%] titles/headings provided do not attract attention; design of newsletter is sub standard. |
| Presentation |
Grammar and spelling [10%] |
[8 10%] writing is flawless in terms of spelling and grammar. |
[5 7%] While there may be minor errors, the writing follows normal conventions of spelling and grammar throughout and has been carefully proofread. |
[0 4%] Writing contains frequent spelling and grammar errors which interfere with comprehension. |
|
Language used and clarity [10%] |
[8 10%] cohesive discussion and message conveyed is clear all the time; appropriate use of language consistently throughout. |
[5 7%] cohesive discussion and message conveyed is clear most of the time; appropriate use of language most of the time. |
[0 4%] ideas presented are scattered and message conveyed is unclear; inappropriate use of language most of the time. |
|
Referencing system [10%] |
[8 10%] presented a bibliography in accordance with APA referencing system without flaw. |
[5 7%] presented a bibliography in accordance with APA referencing system but contain some errors. |
[0 4%] no bibliography presented ormajority ofthe bibliography presented is not in accordance with APA referencing system. |
| Evidence of readings |
Width of coverage[10%] |
[8 10%] Impressive/very good range of coverage. |
[5 7%] Adequate range of coverage. |
[0 4%] Inadequate range of coverage. |
MarkingSheet
Question 1 Newsletter Content Assessment will consider the adequacy of the range of changes/developments included such as: ·Adequate identification and descriptions of key changes/ developments in period; ·Adequate inclusion of international section/developments; and ·Correctness of outlines of changes/developments. |
/10.5 |
Effectiveness for purpose This considers the effectiveness of the newsletter for the purposes set out in the question and involves consideration of issues such as: ·Appropriate level of detail given intended purpose and audience; ·Facilitates identification of relevant items by intended audience (e.g. attracts attention by titles/headings etc); ·Provides effective summaries, and directions to staff to access further information where appropriate; ·Attempts to maintain interest, including creativity and originality; and ·Discriminates between significant and minor changes and facilitates identification and classification of these by the intended audience. |
/10.5 |
Readability Assessment will include consideration of presentation, explanations, linkages and flow, appropriate grammar, spelling, clarify of expression and layout that facilitates understanding, ease of reading, structure to assist reader, use of headings, correct referencing via appropriate citations in the body of the assignment and correct bibliography. This will also consider the appropriate use of language given the intended audience. |
/10.5 |
Research ·Adequacy of range of sources (such as professional bodies, international and government organisations, press) given purposes of assignment; ·Evidence of adequate frequency of monitoring over period of assignment. |
/3.5 |
| Total |
/35 |
Question 2 [15 marks]
Financial statement presentation
Bogong Ltd, has prepared the following statement of financial position as at 30 June 2014:
Bogong Ltd Statement of financial position as at 30 June 2014 |
|
$000 |
| Assets |
|
| Current assets |
|
| Cash |
24 |
| Receivables and inventory |
140 |
| Raw materials |
20 |
| Deferred tax assets |
34 |
| Other |
390 |
| Non current assets |
|
| Shares in listed companies (at cost) |
57 |
| Plant and equipment (net) |
397 |
| Land and buildings (at fair value) |
560 |
| Intangibles (net) |
145 |
| Research and development expenditure |
84 |
| Total assets |
1 851 |
|
|
| Liabilities |
|
| Current liabilities |
|
| Accounts payable and provisions |
155 |
| Allowance for doubtful debts |
2 |
| Borrowings |
86 |
| Non current liabilities |
|
| Debentures |
400 |
| Unsecured notes |
100 |
| Provisions |
54 |
| Accumulated losses |
100 |
| Total liabilities |
897 |
| Net assets |
954 |
|
|
| Shareholders’ equity |
|
| Ordinary and preference share capital |
700 |
| Reserves |
254 |
| Total shareholders’ equity |
954 |
Required:
List and explain what corrections must be made to the above statement of financial position, or additional note disclosures prepared, to ensure that it complies with the requirements of AASB 101.(Note: you are not required to explain the disclosure requirements contained in accounting standards other than AASB 101 (such as AASB 112 Income Taxes or AASB 116 Property, Plant & Equipment)).
(Source: Adapted fromDagwell, R., Wines, G., Lambert, C. (2012). Corporate Accounting in Australia. (1stedition) Sydney: Pearson Australia.
| Marking Guide Question 2 |
Max. marks awarded |
| List and explain corrections to be made / notes to be added |
12 |
| References |
3 |
| Total |
15 |
Assessment criteria
The assessment rubric for this question is provided below. The detailed allocation of marks has been provided above for your information.
| Criteria |
Exceeds expectation (HD/D) |
Meets expectation (CR/PS) |
Fails to meet expectation (FL) |
Question 2: Financial statement presentation · |
determine corrections and notes to be prepared without flaw/with minor flaws; explanations shown are exemplary and clear; references to AASB 101 are provided. |
determine corrections and notes to be prepared accurately with some errors; explanations shown are adequate; references to AASB 101 are provided. |
fails to accurately determine most of the corrections and notes to be prepared; explanations shown are inadequate; references to AASB 101 are not provided. |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partnership of Hiller and Roundtree, The partnership of Hiller and Roundtree, CPAs, showed revenues of $195,000 and expenses of $52,000 on their year end work sheet. Their capital balances as of January 1, 20 , were $52,000 for B. Hiller and $48,000 for O. Roundtree. No additional investments were made during the year. As stated in their partnership agreement, after withdrawing salary allowances of $60,000 for Hiller and $40,000 for Roundtree, the partners each withdrew 5% interest on their January 1 capital balances. No additional withdrawals were made. Any remaining net income is to be divided on a 45 55 basis.REQUIRED1. Prepare the lower portion of the income statement of the partnership for the year ended December 31, 20 , showing the division of the partnership net income for the year.2. Prepare a statement of partners equity for the year ended December 31, 20 , and the partners equity section of the balance sheet on that date.3. Prepare closing entries for the partnership as of December 31, 20 . (For simplicity, use the account titles
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partnership of Hiller and Roundtree, CPAs, showed revenues of $195,000 and expenses of $52,000 on their year end work sheet. Their capital balances as of January 1, 20 , were $52,000 for B. Hiller and $48,000 for O. Roundtree. No additional investments were made during the year. As stated in their partnership agreement, after withdrawing salary allowances of $60,000 for Hiller and $40,000 for Roundtree, the partners each withdrew 5% interest on their January 1 capital balances. No additional withdrawals were made. Any remaining net income is to be divided on a 45 55 basis.
Required
|
1. Prepare the lower portion of the income statement of the partnership for the year ended December 31, 20 , showing the division of the partnership net income for the year.
| Hiller and Roundtree, CPAs |
|
| Income Statement (Partial) |
|
| For Year Ended December 31, 20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Allocation of net income: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hide Feedback Partially Correct
|
2. Prepare a statement of partners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 20 .
| Hiller and Roundtree, CPAs |
|
| Statement of Partners’ Equity |
|
| For Year Ended December 31, 20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Withdrawals (salary and interest) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hide Feedback Partially Correct
|
Prepare the partners’ equity section of the balance sheet on that date.
| Hiller and Roundtree, CPAs |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hide Feedback Partially Correct
|
3. Prepare closing entries for the partnership as of December 31, 20 : (a.) Close Revenue, (b.) Close Expenses, (c.) Close Net Income/Net Loss, (d.) Close Drawing accounts. (For simplicity, use the account titles “Revenues” for all revenues and “Expenses” for all expenses.) If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.
| GENERAL JOURNAL
|
|
| |
DATE |
ACCOUNT TITLE |
DOC. NO. |
POST. REF. |
DEBIT |
CREDIT |
|
| 1 |
(a.) |
|
|
|
56000 |
|
1 |
| 2 |
|
|
|
|
|
56000 |
2 |
| 3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
3 |
| 4 |
(b.) |
|
|
|
|
|
4 |
| 5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
5 |
| 6 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
6 |
| 7 |
(c.) |
|
|
|
|
|
7 |
| 8 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
8 |
| 9 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
9 |
| 10 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
10 |
| 11 |
(d.) |
|
|
|
|
|
11 |
| 12 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
12 |
| 13 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
13 |
| 14 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
14 |
| 15 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
15 |
| 16 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
16 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hide Feedback
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Janet (taxpayer) residing in Australia is named as the sole beneficiary of aproperty (1.85 hectares) with a large homestead as a result of the deathof a relative on 7/10/2010. The property is not used for commercialpurposes and at the date of death, the property was valued at$1.45million. Settlement took place on 21/12/2010. After moving into thehomestead shortly after taking ownership, she planned to take a one yeartrip which she had been planning for some time in late 2011. The taxpayerfelt that the homestead was far too large for her (she is single), applied tothe ATO for an exemption for ABN registration and some fourteen monthslater (16/2/2012), she obtained council approval to subdivide the propertyinto three, with the intention of building three units, one she will take up asher own residence, the other two will be sold. Work commenced someweeks after approval and on 12th December that same year, thetaxpayer returned and moved into one of the apartments. The other twowere sold in March/April in 2013, one selling for $1.35m (24/3/2013), theother for $1.45m (9/4/2013).You are to consider the CGT implications both from the relevant sections(ITAA), rulings, etc. and from the values (if/where applicable). Assume thatthe blocks are subdivided equally. For each determination that you make,you should clarify. You should also clarify what Capital Gains and CGT is inyour answer (15 marks)Part 2: QuestionExplain using examples and relevant sections of the act, what thedifferences between Ordinary Income and Statutory income are. Use yourown examples (not from MTG or Barkoczy text) (5 marks)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NAV An open end mutual fund has the following stocks:
|
Stock
|
Shares
|
Stock Price
|
|
A
|
9,000
|
$68
|
|
B
|
13,000
|
39
|
|
C
|
8,600
|
49
|
|
D
|
12,500
|
82
|
If there are 50,000 shares of the market fund, what is the NAV?
NAV Suppose the fund in the previous problem has liabilities of $110,000. What is the NA of the fund now?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Taxes and MMMFs In the previous problem, which MMMF offers you the highest yield if you are a resident of Texas, which has no state income tax?
Closed End Funds The Argentina Fund has $410 million in assets and sells at a 13.1 percent discount to NAV. If the quoted share price for this closed end fund is $18.43, how many share are outstanding? If you purchase 1,000 shares of this fund, what will the total shares outstanding be now?
Closed End Fund Discounts Suppose you purchase 5,000 shares of a closed end mutual fun at its initial public offering; the offer price is $28 per share. The offering prospectus disclose that the fund promoter gets an 8 percent fee from the offering. If this fund sells at a 12 percen discount to NAV the day after the initial public offering, what is the value of your investment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forward Rates An analyst gathered the following spot rates:
|
Time (years)
|
Annual Spot Rate
|
|
1
|
15.00%
|
|
2
|
12.5
|
|
3
|
10
|
|
4
|
7.5
|
The one year forward rate two years from now is closest to
a. _4.91 percent
b. 5.17 percent
c. 10.05 percent
d. 7.5 percent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forward Rates An analyst gathers the following information:
|
Years to Maturity
|
Spot Rate
|
|
1
|
5.00%
|
|
2
|
6
|
|
3
|
6.5
|
Based on the data above, the one year implied forward rate two years from now is closest to:
a. 6.25 percent
b. 7.01 percent
c. 7.26 percent
d. 7.51 percent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
U.S. Treasury STRIPS, close of business February 15, 2008:
|
Maturity
|
Price
|
Maturity
|
Price
|
|
9 Feb
|
97.1
|
12 Feb
|
85.184
|
|
10 Feb
|
93.875
|
13 Feb
|
80.358
|
|
11 Feb
|
90.123
|
14 Feb
|
73.981
|
Treasury STRIPS Calculate the quoted yield for each of the STRIPS given in the table above. Does the market expect interest rates to go up or down in the future?
Treasury STRIPS What is the yield of the two year STRIPS expressed as an EAR?
Forward Interest Rates According to the pure expectations theory of interest rates, how much do you expect to pay for a one year STRIPS on February 15, 2009? What is the corresponding implied forward rate? How does your answer compare to the current yield on a one year STRIPS? What does this tell you about the relationship between implied forward rates, the shape of the zero coupon yield curve, and market expectations about future spot interest rates?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forward Interest Rates According to the pure expectations theory of interest rates, how much do you expect to pay for a five year STRIPS on February 15, 2009? How much do you expect to pay for a two year STRIPS on February 15, 2011?
Forward Interest Rates This problem is a little harder. Suppose the term structure is set according to pure expectations and the maturity preference theory. To be specific, investors require no compensation for holding investments with a maturity of one year, but they demand a premium of .30 percent for holding investments with a maturity of two years.
Given this information, how much would you pay for a one year STRIPS on February 15, 2009? What is the corresponding implied forward rate? Compare your answer to the solutions you found in Problem 16. What does this tell you about the effect of a maturity premium on implied forward rates?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following table of states of the economy and stock returns to answer the review problems:
| |
Security Returns If State Occurs
|
|
State of Economy
|
Probability of State of Economy
|
Roten
|
Bradley
|
|
Bust
|
0.4
|
10%
|
30%
|
|
Boom
|
0.6
|
40
|
10
|
| |
1
|
|
|
1. Expected Returns Calculate the expected returns for Roten and Bradley.
2. Standard Deviations Calculate the standard deviations for Roten and Bradley.
3. Portfolio Expected Returns Calculate the expected return on a portfolio of 50 percent Roten and 50 percent Bradley.
4. Portfolio Volatility Calculate the volatility of a portfolio of 50 percent Roten and 50 percent Bradley
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Expected Return An analyst estimates that a stock has the following return probabilities and returns depending on the state of the economy:
|
State of Economy
|
Probability
|
Return
|
|
Good
|
0.1
|
15%
|
|
Normal
|
0.6
|
13
|
|
Poor
|
0.3
|
7
|
What is the expected return of the stock?
a. 7.8 percent
b. 11.4 percent
c. 11.7 percent
d. 13.0 percent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harvest Partners Grows Its Investments
Is it possible to have too much money to spend in too little time? Harvest Partners and other private equity firms have just a few years to invest about $500 billion.
Harvest Partners, based in New York City, is a private equity firm that specializes in leveraged buyouts and growth financing. It focuses on companies in the United States, the rest of North America, and western Europe that have well established sales or operations in the United States. The firm manages funds emphasizing private equity and debt investments. Harvest Partners makes equity investments of anywhere from $30 million to $100 million in companies whose revenues run between $100 million and $750 million. It prefers to be a control investor and become a partner in the companies it finances. Those companies tend to be middle market firms that need investment to adapt to changing times and markets.
Private equity firms usually have three to six years to reinvest funds they have raised from client investors. If they cannot or do not, they must return that money. During the boom years, Harvest Partners raised $815 million from client investors. So far it has reinvested about $293 million. Now the firm is facing a 2012 deadline to reinvest the remaining $522 million.
Not all private equity investments are successful. Harvest Partners had owned the equity of the Natural Products Group, a manufacturer of organic shampoos and soaps. But when NPG went bankrupt, Harvest Partners lost its entire investment.
Recently Harvest Partners joined MTP Energy Management to invest $80 million in Regency Energy Partners, a middle market natural gas company. Michael DeFlorio, a senior managing director of Harvest Partners, said that Regency embodies our investment strategy focused on exceptionally managed . . . midstream service providers participating in the most promising resource plays in the industry.”
Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Describe some of the risks encountered by a firm such as Harvest Partners.
2. Why do you think Harvest Partners and other equity firms are required to invest their clients’ funds within a limited time frame?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ConocoPhillips Divests to Return to Its Core
ConocoPhillips, with headquarters in Houston, Texas, is the third largest American oil company. It has nearly 30,000 employees in offices in 30 countries around the world. But for two years running, Conoco did poorly in the New York Stock Exchange, with its shares losing 40 percent of their value. Conoco more than doubled its debt when it bought Burlington Resources Inc., a natural gas producer, for $36 billion. At the end of a recent year, Conoco debt was three times that of the largest U.S. oil company, ExxonMobil, even though ExxonMobil was almost twice Conoco size in terms of revenue. How could Conoco turn itself around?
At its annual analyst meeting, the company announced plans to enhance its value to its shareholders by increasing dividends by 10 percent and buying back some shares of its stock. Another goal is to raise $10 billion by 2012.
ConocoPhillips will raise these funds through divestiture, selling off some of its noncore assets. The company said that these assets did not fit well strategically with its core operations, they had high operation costs, and they were marketable. The company acknowledged that it would lose from 80,000 to 120,000 barrels of oil production per day and 400 to 600 million barrels of oil equivalent in reserve. But it hoped to emerge leaner and stronger, with a renewed focus on core projects that would bring in a higher return on investment.
Jim Mulva, the chairman and CEO, said, We are focused on creating and delivering value to our shareholders. We are taking decisive action to sell assets, reduce debt, build on our record of shareholder distributions, and improve returns while growing production and reserves per share,”
Some analysts believed that Conoco first priority was to sell its 9 percent stake in Syncrude, which one analyst referred to as one of Conoco crown jewels.” Syncrude Canada Ltd. is located in the province of Alberta, just north of Montana, and is the world largest producer of synthetic crude oil from oil sand deposits. Conoco recently announced that it sold its share in Syncrude to China Sinopec for $4.65 billion, pending approval by the Chinese and Canadian governments. Mulva declared, [W]e are pleased that [Sinopec] has recognized the value of this quality asset.”
Another of Conoco noncore assets was its 20 percent share in Lukoil, Russia biggest oil producer. Conoco had invested heavily in Lukoil in hopes of large profits on some joint projects with Lukoil, but those profits had never materialized. This was in part because of strict Russian regulations concerning foreign companies in important industries. Lukoil CEO, Vagit Alekperov, commented, Initially, we were aiming for a large package of joint projects, but it turned out to be rather narrow, which probably also disappointed [Conoco].” At first, Conoco hoped Lukoil would buy back half of its stake, but Lukoil turned that offer down. Conoco then offered those shares for sale on the open market, keeping a 10 percent share in Lukoil. Conoco hopes to earn about $5 billion from that sale and use those funds to repurchase some of its stock from shareholders.
Conoco 25 percent share in the Rockies Express Pipeline is another of the company crown jewels.” This high speed, natural gas pipeline runs almost 1,700 miles from northwestern Colorado to eastern Ohio. Conoco has offered its stake in the Rockies Express Pipeline for sale. Will ConocoPhillips achieve its goal of raising $10 billion by 2012? Time will tell.
Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Why is it important for ConocoPhillips to increase the value of its shares for its investors?
2. Research ConocoPhillips. How close has it come to raising the desired $10 billion?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Top Hedge Fund Managers Earn Record Paychecks
Along with the rest of the banking and investment industry, hedge fund managers experienced steep drops in income during the recent recession. But as the economy began to revive, the 25 top earning hedge fund managers earned $25.3 billion. That figure shattered even the old record, set in the boom days before the crisis.
One of those managers was David Tepper of Appaloosa Management. Other investors feared that the banking sector would collapse again, but Tepper bet that the federal government would step in to prevent the biggest banks from failing. In late 2008 and early 2009, he invested heavily in preferred shares and bonds of the big banks, among other seemingly losing prospects. Tepper, formerly of Goldman Sachs, won big, earning $4 billion. We bet on the country revival,” he said. Those who keep their heads while others are panicking do well.” The U.S. Treasury Department apparently agreed with him, because it also bought preferred stock in troubled banks to help shore them up. The Treasury has since sold many of those stocks at a handsome profit.
Hedge funds are elite, private investment companies that are open only to highly qualified, large investors. Unlike mutual funds, hedge funds are not regulated by the Securities and Exchange Commission. During the heady days before the financial crisis, hedge funds earned huge profits. Their managers did well, too, because they usually take a significant percentage of a hedge fund annual earnings. When the crisis struck, even these funds experienced losses in the double digits, and their managers saw their income drop by as much as 50 percent. But when the market rallied, hedge funds resurged as well. Of the 25 top hedge fund managers, the lowest earner made $350 million.
As the United States and the rest of the world economies recovered, the news media reported the immense salaries of CEOs and other top corporate executives at banks and large brokerage houses. The stories stirred the critics, especially because ordinary people were losing their jobs, homes, and health insurance. But some analysts believe that hedge fund managers such as David Tepper earned their huge salaries because they dared to take big risks in the hope of big rewards.
Of course, not all hedge funds did well when the stock market revived. The gap between the highest earning hedge funds and the losing ones grew wider. Nadia Papagiannis, a hedge fund analyst at Morningstar Inc., said, The hedge funds that survived 2008 were able to capture the gains on the way up in 2009. This year is not going to be as lucrative as last year. There not enough of room [sic] for another rally as big as we saw in ‘09.” Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Compare hedge funds with mutual funds.
2. Do you agree that the top hedge fund managers deserve their high salaries? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comet Skateboards Rides the Triple Bottom Line
Jason Salfi, co founder and president of Comet Skateboards, is the first to admit he can let the wheels get away from him. Since the inception of Comet Skateboards, he estimates that he has personally tanked the company four times. I started the company with a friend and we would sacrifice everything for quality,” Salfi admits. It easy to see how this could happen. Salfi loves skateboarding and he a fanatic about building the best skateboards on the market with the most sustainable materials available.
During the first years of production—when Comet moved from California to Ithaca, New York in order to source bio composite materials—Salfi and his partner paid top dollar for all the materials they used in building the boards. We weren’t really watching how much money we were making,” Salfi says sheepishly. They were so wrapped up in the excitement of developing and manufacturing an entirely new class of skateboard, they forgot to watch the bank account balance.Salfi recalls that they did all the stereotypical things that small start ups do to obtain financing—maxed out their credit cards, got friends and family to co sign for loans, found angel investors. But Comet Skateboards just seemed to roll through the money without enough return to ensure its survival.
Then the firm hired a manager to specialize in financial details. With a professional in place, Salfi began to understand the real and potential impacts certain buying decisions would have on the bottom line, and the way cash flow would affect getting products to the marketplace. Now, Comet can forecast better how a product release will affect cash flow, and how that in turn will affect the way they as a business can reach customers. Ultimately we trying to create a sustainable business platform to get our sustainable business vision out there in the marketplace,” explains Salfi. But they couldn’t do this without managing the company financial resources.
Comet Skateboards is considered a triple bottom line company, carrying the B Corporation logo. This means that Comet strives to create benefit for the company owners (profit), the community (people), and the environment (planet). Currently there are more than two hundred B Corporations in thirty industries around the nation. Each company has submitted to rigorous evaluation and has put written standards in place addressing social and environmental responsibility. Everything that Comet does, from its closed loop manufacturing process to its community involvement, refers to its triple bottom line commitment.
Jason Salfi insists that managing the finances for a triple bottom line company is pretty much the same as managing the finances for a traditional company. But there are some differences, particularly in the procurement of raw materials, energy use, and waste disposal. Also, triple bottom line companies are held accountable for the way they treat employees and how they are involved in the community. The ‘magic’ is making sure we can afford all that,” observes Salfi. It just a matter of prioritization. We not going on $50,000 golf retreats. We reinvesting the capital we have in the materials we use and the way we interact with people.”
Despite the fact that he says he didn’t pay attention to finances in the company early days, Salfi has a good grasp on Comet role in the larger economic picture. He likes the idea of projecting the impact Comet has on consumers’ buying decisions, particularly young people. Teenagers who choose Comet skateboards are choosing products that are made by a triple bottom line firm. If you look at the way a 14 year old decides to buy things for the rest of his or her life, and you look at the number of decisions that young person is going to make over the span of 50 or 60 years, you could extrapolate that we have impacted 1,000 people in a certain way that could eventually transfer billions of dollars toward socially responsible businesses,” explains Salfi. We influencing the buying decisions of youth.”
Salfi believes that, decades ago, commerce used to be about improving the quality of life, but somewhere along the line, profits skewed motivations.” He likes the idea of the triple bottom line rebalancing the priorities of business. We like to think that as a B Corporation, we are part of a group that wants to bring back the original motivation for business, which was all about creating an improved quality of life for everyone, not just a select few.” It might actually be possible for a few well engineered skateboards to change the world.
Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Hiring a financial manager was a major step for Comet Skateboards. Identify some of the factors the manager would have to consider when creating a plan for risk return trade off.
2. What might be some short term funding options for Comet? Some long term options? Which would be best for this company, and why?
p>3. Suppose a larger firm approached Comet with an offer of acquisition. Create a chart outlining the major pros and cons of such an offer. 4. How might Comet designation as a B Corporation affect the way it answers the three essential questions for building a financial plan?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
So Much to Do, So Little Cash
When Dan Wallach started Greensburg GreenTown, he knew it wouldn’t be easy. A self proclaimed idea guy, he admits that the details of high finance elude him. What he is good at is rallying people around a cause and getting them to write a few big checks. This time, though, Wallach decided to involve the largest number of people possible. Greensburg GreenTown One Million $5.00 Donations campaign was the result.
The money that is raised will be used to cover GreenTown operating expenses, as well as to fund gaps in municipal projects, build model green homes, and educate residents about green building practices. Another aspect of GreenTown work is to provide information and access to media organizations. Shortly after the tornado, the Planet Green cable channel began production on a television series that would chronicle the town rebuilding. Wallach thought the exposure created by that show and others like it would be valuable in his fund raising efforts.
As a not for profit organization, Greensburg GreenTown is heavily regulated by the IRS, because the donations it receives are fully tax deductible. It falls into the same category as religious organizations and educational institutions, which are exempt from federal income taxes but must pay other federal taxes, such as employment taxes. Because working through the red tape required to obtain this IRS status can take time, many organizations, GreenTown included, work through an approved intermediary while their applications are processed.
Although Greensburg GreenTown supports and educates Greensburg residents, the town itself must rely on other sources of funding. All towns have budgets for repairs and improvements, but no one expected to have to rebuild the entire town. After the tornado, Greensburg had no roads, no hospital, no school system, no utilities, or any of the other services one might expect to find in a town. Money was tight even before the tornado, so rebuilding seemed an impossible task.
Luckily, various government and corporate organizations chipped in. The Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) and the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) provided aid in the form of grants. Corporations like Frito Lay donated significant amounts of money to support the town innovative business incubator. With millions of dollars at stake and hundreds of projects under way at once, Assistant Town Administrator and Recovery Coordinator Kim Alderfer says the hardest part is keeping track of it all.
Questions After viewing the video, answer the following questions:
1. What are the key legal and financial distinctions of Greensburg GreenTown?
2. If you were in Kim Alderfer shoes, what kind of financial contingency plan would you put in place for Greensburg future?
3. Should not for profit organizations be required to open their books to donors? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| YEAR |
MONTH |
MFG OHD |
NON MFG OHD |
TOTAL OHD |
UNITS SOLD |
MACH HOUR USED |
| 2011 |
January |
$ 101,147.00 |
$ 20,200.00 |
$ 121,347.00 |
235,000 |
14,000 |
| 2011 |
February |
$ 115,035.00 |
$ 20,100.00 |
$ 135,135.00 |
238,000 |
15,000 |
| 2011 |
March |
$ 104,787.00 |
$ 19,600.00 |
$ 124,387.00 |
240,000 |
14,400 |
| 2011 |
April |
$ 118,541.00 |
$ 19,500.00 |
$ 138,041.00 |
265,000 |
15,680 |
| 2011 |
May |
$ 120,031.00 |
$ 20,000.00 |
$ 140,031.00 |
266,000 |
17,000 |
| 2011 |
June |
$ 125,487.00 |
$ 20,400.00 |
$ 145,887.00 |
274,500 |
19,500 |
| 2011 |
July |
$ 124,555.00 |
$ 20,500.00 |
$ 145,055.00 |
275,000 |
20,000 |
| 2011 |
August |
$ 130,412.00 |
$ 20,350.00 |
$ 150,762.00 |
285,000 |
20,100 |
| 2011 |
September |
$ 145,030.00 |
$ 20,050.00 |
$ 165,080.00 |
287,000 |
24,000 |
| 2011 |
October |
$ 128,115.00 |
$ 19,950.00 |
$ 148,065.00 |
278,000 |
19,801 |
| 2011 |
November |
$ 127,150.00 |
$ 20,600.00 |
$ 147,750.00 |
275,000 |
19,999 |
| 2011 |
December |
$ 126,225.00 |
$ 20,620.00 |
$ 146,845.00 |
271,250 |
19,850 |
| 2012 |
January |
$ 99,450.00 |
$ 20,500.00 |
$ 119,950.00 |
232,000 |
15,000 |
| 2012 |
February |
$ 111,999.00 |
$ 20,280.00 |
$ 132,279.00 |
234,000 |
15,500 |
| 2012 |
March |
$ 112,568.00 |
$ 20,560.00 |
$ 133,128.00 |
233,000 |
15,500 |
| 2012 |
April |
$ 108,787.00 |
$ 20,560.00 |
$ 129,347.00 |
231,000 |
14,850 |
| 2012 |
May |
$ 118,050.00 |
$ 20,158.00 |
$ 138,208.00 |
266,000 |
16,500 |
| 2012 |
June |
$ 124,532.00 |
$ 20,176.00 |
$ 144,708.00 |
269,000 |
19,500 |
| 2012 |
July |
$ 131,254.00 |
$ 20,192.00 |
$ 151,446.00 |
284,000 |
19,999 |
| 2012 |
August |
$ 130,555.00 |
$ 20,490.00 |
$ 151,045.00 |
286,000 |
20,000 |
| 2012 |
September |
$ 149,001.00 |
$ 20,532.00 |
$ 169,533.00 |
290,000 |
25,000 |
| 2012 |
October |
$ 125,633.00 |
$ 20,574.00 |
$ 146,207.00 |
274,500 |
19,850 |
| 2012 |
November |
$ 124,131.00 |
$ 20,490.00 |
$ 144,621.00 |
273,250 |
19,787 |
| 2012 |
December |
$ 124,665.00 |
$ 20,562.00 |
$ 145,227.00 |
271,450 |
19,899 |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Use the Internet to access the home page for the City of Chicago, www.cityofchicago.org. Use the Programs and Initiatives link to access information about various capital projects underway in the city government. When this text went to press, these initiatives included such categories as Environment, Housing, Technology, and Transportation.
Required: Read about one or more of these capital projects, and then discuss how the organization’s managers should go about making significant decisions about expenditures for major capital projects like the one you have explored. (If you prefer, complete a similar requirement for a different city of your choosing.)
2. DYSFUNCTIONAL FOCUS
ON EARLY CASH FLOWS
The timing of cash flows in investment decisions can sometimes create behavioral incentives to make dysfunctional decisions. The following hypothetical scenario presents such a situation.
The Institute for Environmental Studies (IES) is a privately funded, nonprofit scientific organization based in Montreal. The organization’s director of field research is scheduled to retire in two years, and the assistant director, Marie Fenwar, is hoping to be appointed to the post at that time. In her current position, Fenwar has significant administrative responsibilities, including the approval of research proposals and equipment acquisitions. Fenwar has developed a reputation for carefully scrutinizing every proposed project and keeping the institute’s field research branch within its budget. Fenwar has been so successful in her job that she has been quietly assured by several members of the IES board of directors that she is in line for her boss’s job. She knows, however, that her prospects depend on her continued success in keeping the
field research branch in solid financial shape. IES recently signed a contract with the U.S. and
Canadian governments to do a five year study of the effects of global warming on the migration of water fowl. The contract fee is $500,000, payable in equal annual installments over the contract term. Fenwar is now considering two alternative proposals for carrying out the study. Each proposal entails the purchase of equipment and the incurrence of various operating costs throughout the term of the contract. Fenwar’s normal procedure for project evaluation is to calculate each proposal’s NPV, using an 8 percent hurdle rate. The projected costs follow:
Year Type of Cost Research Proposal I Research Proposal II
Time 0 Equipment acquisition* $ 40,000 $70,000
Year 1 Operating costs 150,000 75,000
Year 2 Operating costs 120,000 75,000
Year 3 Operating costs 75,000 95,000
Year 4 Operating costs 40,000 95,000
Year 5 Operating costs 40,000 95,000
* The equipment will be obsolete at the end of the contract term.
Fenwar calculated an NPV of $1,370 for Proposal Iand $(14,375) for Proposal II. After completing her NPV analysis, however, Fenwar was tempted to ignore it. These thoughts ran through her mind as she drove to work: “If I approve Proposal I, the financial picture for the field research branch is going to pieces for the next two years. After a $40,000 initial investment in equipment, I’m going to show losses of $50,000 and $20,000 in the first two years. That’s not going to look very good when the board considers my promotion.” When she arrived at the office, Fenwar wrote a memo approving Proposal II.
Question. Which research proposal should Fenwar have accepted? Why? Comment on the ethical issues in this scenario.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FORWARD CONTRACT
A
- Draft a memo to a client comparing the advantages and disadvantages of using forward contracts and options to hedge foreign exchange risk.
- On December 1, 2009, a U.S. based company entered into a three month forward contract to purchase 1 million Mexican pesos on March 1, 2010.
The following are the purchase rates for US dollar per peso
| Date |
Spot Rate |
Forward Rate (March, 2010) |
| December 1, 2009 |
$0.088 |
$0.084 |
| December 31, 2009 |
$0.080 |
$0.074 |
| March 1, 2010 |
$0.076 |
|
The company’s borrowing rate is 12 percent. The present value factor for two months at an annual interest rate of 12 percent (1 percent per month) is 0.9803.
How will the U.S. company report the forward contract on its December 31, 2009, balance sheet?
PROVIDE YOUR REFERENCE IN APA FORMAT AND PROVIDE YOUR IN TEXT CITATION.
B)
ANALYSIS OF GOVERMENTAL PERFORMANCE
- Should citizens be concerned if the pension plan funding measure decreases over time? Why or why not?
PROVIDE YOUR REFERENCE IN APA FORMAT AND PROVIDE YOUR IN TEXT CITATION.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
To prepare for this Individual Assignment:
Review the Anthony’s Orchard case study in the unit resources.
Consider the following:
§ The company, according to Anthony’s Orchard Strategic Plan, is hoping to purchase an apple press in order to start a new line of prepared apple products—apple juice.
§ The company estimates this new product offering will generate an additional $95,000 net income per year and estimated cash flows of $90,000 per year. The cost of the apple press will be $950,000 and this expenditure, as shown in the budgeted cash flow statement, is expected to take place in the fourth quarter of 2012.
§ The apple press is expected to have a seven year life and no salvage value.
§ The company requires a 10% return on investment for new capital investments and the company uses a cost of capital of 8%.
§ The company’s revenue goal for 2015 is $25 million.
§ Assume a minimum 12% gross margin on revenue.
To complete this Individual Assignment, answer the following:
§ Do you think the company’s revenue goal of $25 million by 2015 is realistic?
§ Explain how purchase of the apple press might affect the company’s revenue goals. Based on this information, explain whether Anthony’s Orchard should invest in the apple press. Support your response with relevant information provided in the case study, the previous year’s financials for 2010, the current year’s financials for 2011 and the budgeted year’s financials for 2012.
§ Draft budgeted financial statements from 2012 to 2015 under both options that provide a realistic assessment of expected revenues and costs, and explain how you have arrived at these budgeted figures.
Notes:
You should fully state and justify any assumptions that you make in relation to the financial data you use. Be sure to include all references as well.
This Individual Assignment forms the basis of Section 2 of your Final Project. You will receive feedback on this work from your Faculty Member, and will be expected to incorporate any suggestions into the Final Project.
Your submission (excluding appendices) should be 1,000 words (+/ 10%) in length. Reference must be according to the Harvard Reference system
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Compute the specified ratios using Hilda Company’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011. |
|
|
|
| Assets |
|
|
| Cash |
$ |
15,000 |
| Marketable securities |
|
8,000 |
| Accounts receivable |
|
13,000 |
| Inventory |
|
11,000 |
| Property and equipment |
|
170,000 |
| Accumulated depreciation |
|
(12,500) |
|
|
|
| Total assets |
$ |
204,500 |
|
|
|
| Equities |
|
|
| Accounts payable |
$ |
8,500 |
| Current notes payable |
|
3,500 |
| Mortgage payable |
|
4,500 |
| Bonds payable |
|
21,500 |
| Common stock |
|
114,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
52,500 |
|
|
|
| Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity |
$ |
204,500 |
|
|
|
|
|
The average number of common stock shares outstanding during 2011 was 880 shares. Net income for the year was $15,000.
|
| Required |
| Compute each of the following: |
| (a) |
Current ratio(Round your answer to 2 decimal places.) |
| (b) |
Earnings per share(Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
| Earnings per share |
$per share |
| (c) |
Quick (acid test) ratio(Round your answer to 2 decimal places.) |
| Quick (acid test) ratio |
: 1 |
| (d) |
Return on investment(Round your answer to 1 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
|
| (e) |
Return on equity(Round your answer to 1 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.) |
| (f) |
Debt to Equity Ratio(Round your answer to 1 decimal places.Omit the “%” sign in your response.) |
check my workeBook Links (4)references
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello, I have this assingment and just i need to get answer for it “according to the requirments” and i need at least five tax issues not just three with explain what issue is and why is it an issue and what is the advice to give for the clint?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost Management 10.38
Jordan, the owner of Unique Sinks, realizes that if he withdraw the full amount of dividend, and if the slump in housing continues into the next year, he may have to borrow more money than he can easily repay. He would like to alter strategies or operating plans during the fourth quarter so that he could pay at least a $50,000 dividend and end the year with $300,000 in cash to cover potential shortfalls in the next year.
B. Return to the original assumptions. Now modify the assumptions and perform sensitivity analyses to determine what changes to volumes, prices, and/or customer collection patterns would provide the desired dividend. Leave all other assumptions unchanged.
1. List the changes in your final sensitivity analysis, and explain why you chose this set of changes.
2. Briefly explain what Jordan would need to do to implement each of these changes.
3. List several factors that could influence whether the company would be able to achieve the desired results
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are to consider the CGT implications both from the relevant sections (ITAA), rulings, etc. and from the values (if/where applicable). Assume that the blocks are subdivided equally. For each determination that you make, you should clarify. You should also clarify what Capital Gains and CGT is in your answer (15 marks) Part 2: Question Explain using examples and relevant sections of the act, what the differences between Ordinary Income and Statutory income are. Use your own examples (not from MTG or Barkoczy text)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are to consider the CGT implications both from the relevant sections (ITAA), rulings, etc. and from the values (if/where applicable). Assume that the blocks are subdivided equally. For each determination that you make, you should clarify. You should also clarify what Capital Gains and CGT is in your answer (15 marks) Part 2: Question Explain using examples and relevant sections of the act, what the differences between Ordinary Income and Statutory income are. Use your own examples (not from MTG or Barkoczy text)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lu Technology, Co., manufactures CDs and DVDs for computer software and entertainment companies. Lu uses job order costing and has a perpetual inventory system. On April 2, Lu began production of 5,900 DVDs, Job 423, for Stick People Pictures for $1.30 sales price per DVD. Lu promised to deliver the DVDs to Stick People by April 5. Lu incurred the following costs: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Date |
Labor Time Record No. |
Description |
Amount |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4/2 |
655 |
10 hours @ $14 |
$140 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4/3 |
656 |
20 hours @ $13 |
260 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Date |
Material Requisition No. |
Description |
Amount |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4/2 |
63 |
31 lbs. polycarbonate plastic @ $11 |
$341 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4/2 |
64 |
25 lbs. acrylic plastic @ $27 |
675 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4/3 |
74 |
3 lbs. refined aluminum @ $42 |
126 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stick People provides the movie file for Lu burn onto the DVDs at a cost of $0.50 per DVD. Lu Technology allocated manufacturing overhead to jobs based on the relation between estimated overhead of $540,000 and estimated direct labor costs of $432,000. Job 423 was completed and shipped on April 3. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Requirements: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. Prepare a job cost record for Job 423. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate; then allocate manufacturing overhead to the job. |
|
|
|
|
| 2. Journalize in summary form the requisition of direct materials (including the movie files) and the assignment of direct labor and manufacturing overhead to Job 423. |
|
| 3. Journalize completion of the job and the sale of the 5,900 DVDs. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Prescott, Inc., manufactures bookcases and uses an activity based costing system. Prescott’s activity areas and related data follows: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Activity |
Budgeted Cost of Activity |
Allocation Base |
Cost Allocation Rate |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Materials handling |
$230,000 |
Number of parts |
$0.50 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Assembly |
3,200,000 |
Direct labor hours |
16.00 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Finishing |
180,000 |
Number of finished units |
4.50 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prescott produced two styles of bookcases in October: the standard bookcase and an unfinished bookcase, which has fewer parts and requires no finishing. The totals for quantities, direct materials costs, and other data follow: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Product |
Total Units Produced |
Total Direct Materials Costs |
Total Direct Labor Costs |
Total Number of Parts |
Total Assembling Direct Labor Hours |
|
|
|
|
|
| Standard bookcase |
3,000 |
$36,000 |
$45,000 |
9,000 |
4,500 |
|
|
|
|
|
| Unfinished bookcase |
3,500 |
35,000 |
35,000 |
7,000 |
3,500 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Requirements: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. Compute the manufacturing product cost per unit of each type of bookcase. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Suppose that pre manufacturing activities, such as product design, were assigned to the standard bookcases at $7 each, and to the unfinished bookcases at $2 each. Similar analyses were conducted of post manufacturing activities such as distribution, marketing, and customer service. The post manufacturing costs were $22 per standard bookcase and $14 per unfinished bookcase. Compute the full product costs per unit. |
| 3. Which product costs are reported in the external financial statements? Which costs are used for management decision making? Explain the difference. |
|
|
|
| 4. What price should Prescott’s managers set for unfinished bookcases to earn $15 per bookcase? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sanchez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can be manufactured by either a capital intensive method or a labor intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows:
Capital Intensive
Direct Materials 5$ per unit
Direct Labor 6$ per unit
Variable Overhead $3 per unit
Fixed Manufacturing Costs $2,508,000
Labor Intensive
Direct Materials 5.5$ per unit
Direct Labor 8$ per unit
Variable Overhead $4.5 per unit
Fixed Manufacturing Costs $1,538,000
The Martinez Company’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 6 Problem 6 6
Allocating Service Department Costs [LO 3] World Airlines has three service departments: (1) ticketing, (2) baggage handling, and (3) engine maintenance. The service department costs are estimated for separate cost pools formed by department and are allocated to two revenue producing departments: (1) domestic flights and (2) international flights. World does not differentiate between fixed and variable costs in making allocations. The following data relate to the allocations:
Budgeted Data
Costs Air Miles
Ticketing $5,000,000
Baggage handling $3,000,000
Engine maintenance $7,000,000
Domestic flights 6,000,000
International flights 24,000,000
Required
a. Allocate the service department costs to the revenue producing departments using air miles as the allocation base.
b. Evaluate the cause and effect relationship resulting from the use of air miles as the allocation base. In which of the cost pools do you think the cause and effect relationship is the strongest? Suggest alternative allocation bases for the two remaining cost pools with the weakest cause and effect relationship.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- What is the concept of current rate method of translation and temporal method of translation? How does balance sheet exposure differ under these two methods?
- The 2010 financial statement of Child Co. Inc (Mexico), a subsidiary of Parent Co. Inc (United States), reveals the following information:
|
Beginning Inventory
|
Peso 100,000
|
|
Purchases
|
Peso 500,000
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
Peso 150,000
|
|
COGS
|
Peso 450,000
|
|
US dollar exchange rate for 1 Peso:
|
|
|
January 1, 2010
|
$0.45
|
|
Average, 2010
|
$0.42
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
$0.38
|
The beginning inventory was acquired when the exchange rate was $0.50 last quarter of 2009; ending inventory was acquired when the exchange rate was $0.40 last quarter of 2010.
Report amounts of ending inventory and cost of goods sold to be included in the consolidated financial statements under (1) Current rate method and (2) Temporal method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Copy and paste
Bad debts
Rachael shock, assistant accountant for Bunbury Instruments Ltd, was finalising the balance sheet of the company as at 30 june 2013 with the accountant of the business, Olle Twist. Although both agreed that everything appeared to be in order , Rachael had notice that a large loan had been taken out by the company with Bunbury Bank and that as part of the loan agreement, Bunbury instrument ltd was to maintain a ratio of current assets(less inventories) to current liabilities of a least 1.25:1. She was concerned that the company would not be able to maintain this ratio given the fact that she had just learned that two of the companys largest customers had gone into liquidation and there was every likelihood that the company would recover no more than 10% of the debts owing. The current allowance for doubtful debts was grossly inadequate and thus the accounts receivable was overstated.
The relevant figures prepared for the balance sheet showed current assets(less inventories) standing at $1250000 and current liabilities stand at $1 000 000. Rachael raised her concerns with olle Twist about the overstatemet of account receivable and not being able to maintain the desired minimum ratio for the purpose of the loan agreemet, if the account receivable figure was updated. Olle replied: Yes, I can appreciate your concerns. However, we don’t know how much will be recovered from the liquidated companies, so lets leave things the way they are. The bank wants only the 30 june figures an as it is, the ratio will be okay as far as the bank is concerned. Olle thought about the problem a little further and then explained: “we wont have to write off the additional bad debts until next year when they occur and are known with certainly, and by then things will have picked up. I am sure the directors of the company will agree with me and happy to leave the accounts as they are, so there is no need for you to worry any more.”
REQUIRED
Identify the stakeholders involved in this situation
your question here…
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CASH BUDGET)
Tina owns and operates Sedap Bakery which sells a wide variety of cupcakes. She has compiled the following data and information in order to prepare a cash budget for September and October.
i. Budgeted sales for September are 65,000 cupcakes and 98,000 cupcakes in October. Each cupcake sells for RM3.50.
ii. On average 60 percent are cash sales and 40 percent are on account.
iii. The company expects to collect 75 percent of credit sales in the month of the sale and 20 percent in the month after the sale.
iv. All necessary raw materials are purchased on account. Purchases are paid 85 percent in the month of the purchase and 15 percent in the following month. Purchases for September are estimated to be RM200,000 and RM290,000 in October.
v. Monthly expenses include:
- Wages RM10,000
- Rent RM4,000
- Utilities RM3,500
- Insurance RM2,500
- Advertising RM2,290
vi. Cash balance on September 1st was RM6,000.
vii. The company has a policy to maintain a minimum cash balance of RM5,000. If necessary the company will borrow to meet its short term needs. All borrowings are done at the beginning of the month and all payments on principal and interest are made at the end of the next month. The annual interest rate is 7%. The company must borrow in multiples of RM1,000.
viii. August sales were 43,000 cupcakes and raw materials purchased were RM230,000.
Required:
a) Prepare a cash budget for September and October.
b) Why is cash information needed by companies?
c) Explain how budget can sometimes be ineffective in changing behaviour.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(SHORT TERM DECISION MAKING)
CW Sdn Bhd manufactures car seats. Several weeks ago, the company received a special order inquiry from Car Sdn Bhd. Car Sdn Bhd desires to market a car seat similar to CWs model no. 55 and has offered to purchase 3,000 units of model no. 55.
The following data are available:
i. Cost data for each CW model no. 55 car seat: direct materials, RM45; direct labour, RM30 (2 hours at RM15 per hour); and manufacturing overhead, RM70 (2 hours at RM35 per hour).
ii. The normal selling price of model no. 55 is RM180; however, Car Sdn Bhd has offered CW only RM115 because of the large quantity it is willing to purchase.
iii. Car SDn Bhd requires a design modification that will allow a RM4 reduction in direct material cost.
iv. CW”s production supervisor notes that the company will incur RM8,700 in additional set up costs and will have to purchase a RM3,300 special device to manufacture these units. The device will be discarded once the special order is completed.
v. Total manufacturing overhead costs are applied to production at the rate of RM35 per labour hour. This figure is based, in part, on budgeted yearly fixed overhead of RM624,000 and planned production activity of 24,000 labor hours.
vi. CW will allocate RM5,000 of existing fixed administrative costs to the order as “part of the cost of doing business.”
Required:
a) One of CW”s staff accountants wants to reject the special order because “financially, it”s a loser.” Do you agree with this conclusion if CW currently has excess capacity? Show calculations to support your answer.
b) If CW currently has no excess capacity, should the order be rejected from a financial perspective? Briefly explain.
c) Assume that CW currently has no excess capacity. Would outsourcing be an option that CW could consider if management truly wanted to do business with Car? Briefly discuss, citing several key considerations for CW in your answer.
d) Is it true that in the long term, all costs will be variable? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Also could you please add 600 word for this below question?
Choose a Manufacturing Company listed in the Australian Stock Market (ASX 200).
Discuss the following:
1. Nature of Business
2. If there are, mention and discuss two (2) subsidiaries of the chosen company.
3. Compare the latest Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) for two years and make some comments whether to invest or not. Explain why yes or not.
4. What kinds of shares are being issued?
5. Who is the external auditor? What is the role of the external auditor?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assessment item 2
Assignment 1
Value:15%
Due date:20 Aug 2014
Length:1500 words
Task
Question 1 5 Marks
In 2002, the audit firm Arthur Andersen (AA) collapsed following charges brought against it in the United States relating to the failure of its client, Enron Corporation, a United States energy company. Enron was one of the biggest clients of AA. The relationship between Enron and AA was said to be ‘cosy’, facilitating both improper accounting and auditing practices. These practices led to extensive legal proceedings and the eventual collapse of AA. Some of AA’s other audit clients announced that they would be dismissing AA as their auditor even before it was clear that AA would not survive.
Required:
Use the three (3) theories outlined in Chapter 1 of Moroney on the demand for audits to illustrate why these clients dismissed Arthur Andersen as their auditor.
Use the following for background to this case:
abcnews.go.com/Business/story
news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/business/2047122.stm
Adapted from Moroney, Campbell & Hamilton (2014)
Question 2 10 Marks
Understanding the structure and composition of the board of directors and its sub committees assists the auditor in documenting and evaluating the governance structure and in identifying potential risks within that structure.
Required:
- Explain why an understanding of the governance of an audit client is important in assessing the client’s business risk.
- Explain why an understanding of business risk is relevant to the final audit judgment and to public expectations of the audit process.
- Access copies of the the 2014annual reportsfor Namoi Cotton Co operative Ltdnamoicotton.com.au/reports/financial reports.aspxand Macquarie Bank Ltdwww.macquarie.com.au/mgl/au/about macquarie group/investor relations/financial disclosure/financial reports/macquarie group limited mqg
- Examine both sets ofannual reportsfor information about the governance structure of these companies.
- Identify whether these companies have an audit committee and/or a risk committee.
- Evaluate the impact that the existence or non existence of these committees may have on the external audit function.
Rationale
Content assessed: Topics 1, 2 and 4
This assignment has been designed to assess your ability to:
- discuss the role of assurance services and providers
- discuss influences on audit and assurance services
- evaluate risk
Marking criteria
Marks will be awarded based on the extent to which you:
- apply theoretical reasons for the demand for audits to a real world scenario
- explain public expectations of the audit process
- identify and evaluate components of business risk within an external audit function.
Question 1 marking criteria
| Criteria |
HD/Distinction 3.75 5 |
Credit 3.25 3.7 |
Pass 2.5 3.2 |
| Description of the three (3) theories of the demand for audits (1 Mark) |
Excellent description of the theories demonstrating a sophisticated level of understanding |
Clear description of the theories demonstrating a good level of understanding |
Basic description of the theories demonstrating a simple level of understanding |
| Application of each of the theories to the Arthur Andersen case showing how each theory can or cannot be used to explain why audit clients of AA dismissed AA as their auditor (3 Marks) |
Lucid explanation of how the three theories can be effectively used to explain the dismissal of AA by other audit clients. AA dismissal used as an example to explain the deman for audits. |
Minor problems with the application of the three theories to explain the AA dismissal by other audit clients |
Clear application of only one theory or muddled application of three theories to explain the AA dismissal by other audit clients |
Professional communication (Note: you are required to space between paragraphs; use Arial 10pt or TNR 12 pt; use 1.5 or double line spacing) (.5 Mark) |
Work contains distinct understandable statements with no errors. Extremely well organised. Content is structured in a manner that facilitates the reader’s understanding. |
Minor spelling, grammar and punctuation errors. Work shows evidence of proofreading. Well structured with one main idea or argument provided per paragraph arguments/ideas. |
Some spelling, grammar and punctuation errors found but the work is readable and structured. Work may include too many ideas in one paragraph. |
Appropriate resources and correct referencing (.5 Mark) |
Used two or more sources in addition to the linked media releases. All work has been referenced correctly as per APA (6th edn) requirements. |
Used one or more sources in addition to the linked media releases. All work has been referenced within the body of the answer and in the reference list, with some omissions or errors in terms |
No additional sources used. Others’ work is not always acknowledged and there are a number of errors or non compliance with the APA (6th edn) |
Question 2 marking criteria
| Criteria |
HD/ Distinction 7.5 10 |
Credit 6.5 7.4 |
Pass 5 6.4 |
Explanation of the relationship between client governance and audit assessment of business risk (1 Mark) |
Sophisticated analysis of the relationship between client governance and audit assessment of business risk |
Explanation of the relationship between client governance and audit assessment of business risk demonstrating a good level of understanding |
Description of the relationship between governance of the client and business risk |
Explanation of the relationship between client business risk and final audit judgement (1 Mark) |
Sophisticated analysis of the relationship between client and final audit judgement |
Explanation of the relationship between client business risk and final audit judgement demonstrating |
Description of the relationship between client business risk and final audit judgement |
Explanation of the relationship between client business risk and public expectations of the audit process (1 Mark) |
Sophisticated analysis of the relationship between client business risk and public expectations of the audit process |
Explanation of the relationship between client business risk and public expectations of the audit process demonstrating a good level of understanding |
Description of the relationship between client business risk and public expectations of the audit process |
Identification of the committee structure of Namoi Cotton Co operative Ltd and Macquarie Bank Ltd (2.5 Marks) |
Clear identification of the committee structure of Namoi Cotton Co operative Ltd and Macquarie Bank Ltd |
A good attempt to identify the committee structure of Namoi Cotton Co operative Ltd and Macquarie Bank Ltd |
Some attempt to identify the committee structure of both companies. Some misinterpretation of the material in the annual reports and/ or only one report used. |
Evaluation of the impact of the committee structure on the external audit function/process (3 Marks) |
A clear evaluation of the impact of the committee structure on the external audit process |
A good attempt at describing what impact of the committee structure has on the external audit process |
Description of the impact of the committee structure on the external audit process |
Professional communication (Note your are required to space between paragraphs; use Arial 10pt or TNR 12 pt; use 1.5 line spacing) (1 Mark) |
Work contains distinct understandable statements with no errors. Extremely well organised. Content is structured in a manner that facilitates the reader’s understanding. |
Minor spelling, grammar and punctuation errors. Work shows evidence of proofreading. Well structured with one main idea or argument provided per paragraph arguments |
Some spelling, grammar and punctuation errors found but the work is readable and structured. Work may include too many ideas in one paragraph. |
Appropriate resources and correct referencing (.5 Mark) |
Used two or more additional sources in addition to the text and annual reports All work has been referenced correctly as per APA (6th edn) requirements |
Used one additional source in addition to the text and annual reports. All work has been referenced within the body of the answer and in the reference list, with some omissions or errors in terms |
No additional sources used other than text and annual reports. Others’ work is not always acknowledged and there are a number of errors or non compliance with the APA (6th edn) |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
he following account balances relate to the stockholders’ equity accounts of Chipo Corp. at year end.
|
|
2012 |
|
2011 |
| Common stock, 10,500 and 10,000 shares, |
|
|
|
|
| respectively, for 2012 and 2011 |
|
$166,580 |
|
$133,420 |
| Preferred stock, 5,000 shares |
|
105,250 |
|
105,250 |
| Retained earnings |
|
304,000 |
|
262,220 |
A small stock dividend was declared and issued in 2012. The market value of the shares was $11,100. Cash dividends were $15,770 in both 2012 and 2011. The common stock has no par or stated value.
(a) What was the amount of net income reported by Chipo Corp. in 2012?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here is the complete assignment by WIley Plus
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the following data from the comparative balance sheet of Goody Company.
|
|
December 31, 2015 |
|
December 31, 2014 |
| Accounts receivable |
|
$520,000 |
|
|
$400,000 |
|
| Inventory |
|
$840,000 |
|
|
$600,000 |
|
| Total assets |
|
$3,000,000 |
|
|
$2,500,000 |
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1W4 Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $300,960 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 125,400 hours. For the year, $322,290 of overhead costs are incurred and 131,900 hours are used. Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.) Manufacturing overhead rate $ per machine hour What is the amount of under or overapplied overhead at December 31? Manufacturing Overhead $ Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or overapplied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit Question 2W4 The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account. Work in Process—Painting 5/1 Balance 4,230 5/31 Transferred out ? 5/31 Materials 6,820 5/31 Labor 3,950 5/31 Overhead 2,100 5/31 Balance ? Production records show that there were 550 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,450 units started, and 1,510 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,520 and conversion costs of $1,710. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process. (a) How many units are in process at May 31? Work in process, May 31 units (b) What is the unit materials cost for May? (Round unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.) The unit materials cost for May $ (c) What is the unit conversion cost for May? (Round unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.) The unit conversion cost for May $ (d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May? (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,225.) The total cost of units…
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) Explain, with appropriate calculations, why neither return on investment nor residual income would motivate Elton to invest in the process showing the higher net present value. To what extent can the use of alternative accounting techniques assist in reconciling the conflict between using accounting based performance measures and discounted cash flow investment appraisal techniques?
(b) Managers tend to use post tax cash flows to evaluate investment opportunities, but to evaluate divisional and managerial performance on the basis of pre tax profits. Explain why this is so and discuss the potential problems that can arise, including suggestions as to how such problems can be overcome.
(c) Discuss what steps can be taken to avoid dysfunctional behaviour which is motivated by accounting based performance targets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Objectives This assessment item relates to the course learning outcomes 1 – 3 as stated on Page 1. Details This assignment can (and should be) worked on each week commencing in Week 1, and submitted when all questions have been completed. Penalties will apply for late submission of assignments. Answer all questions. Copies of the format for General Journal, General Ledger (T Format and 3 column format) and Financial Statements will be available on Moodle. These should be used to record the answers for the assignment. Do not use a computerised accounting program for this assignment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Having successfully operated her business for 3 years using what she learned in the UniSA division core course Accounting, Decisions and Accountability Rita has decided it is time to develop a more productive accounting system. In order to do this Rita has been reviewing the notes she took when studying Financial Accounting 1. In her first week of FA 1 Rita discovered that it is important to establish an accounting system that is best suited to the needs of the business. Rita recalls that it was important to consider a number of factors including the current position of the business and where it may be headed in the future.
After some thorough investigation Rita has decided to establish a manual double entry accounting system which will employ specialised journals and control accounts (these will be discussed in detail in week 3). Rita’s record keeping has not always been the best and as a result all Rita can provide you with is the unadjusted trial balance on the next page and the following additional information.
Additional Information:
The following adjustments were due to be made on balance day
Additional information known at June 30:
- Expecting that she may need some extra cash, Rita arranged a business overdraft facility with the bank manager on June 2.
- All depreciation is calculated by the straight line method. The office equipment is expected to have a useful life of 5 years with no residual. The office furniture is expected to be useful for 10 years, after which it is expected to have a scrap value of $300. The printing equipment is should last 5 years and have a scrap value of $1000.
- $300 of the business’ debtors relates to money owed by Trustus Insurers who are in liquidation after striking financial difficulty. It is unlikely that any of the money will be recovered. Liquidation proceedings are expected to finish in October of the current year.
- The prepaid insurance relates to professional negligence insurance that Rita took out for her own business. It is an annual policy that commenced on 1 May.
- The telephone account for the quarter ended June 30 arrives as you are preparing the worksheet. It reveals that $280 of telephone calls were made by the business that have not yet been paid for.
- The office/stationery supplies on hand at 30 June had cost $80.
- Rita is paid a wage of approximately $500 per month ($125 per week) and four weeks worth have not been paid or recorded as at balance day.
In addition Rita informs you that the amount owing from Trade Debtors is comprised of the following companies
Ian Sure Brokers $400
International Mutual Ltd $800
Peter Payze Insurance $1000
Trustus Insurers $300
Rita’s Trade Creditors are comprised of
Office Stuff $270
Printing Suppliers $630
At present Rita only has one type of inventory.
Required
- You need to complete the adjustment provided in the additional information on the worksheet provided. Then give each account an appropriate chart of accounts number.
- Calculate the profit for the previous period and then calculate the Capital figure as at 1 July (ready for the start of the next year).
- Using the figures from the adjusted trial balance you must complete an opening entry to establish Rita’s new accounting system in the General Journal and then post this entry to the appropriate ledger accounts.
- Enter any required reversing entries in the general journal to prepare the new system for use and post these entries appropriately.
1. PERFECT COVER INSURANCE BROKERS – PARTIAL WORKSHEET
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE (3rd Year of Business)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Empire Restaurant and Lounge has hired you to help them understand the numbers in their income statements. They have a budgeted statement with their budget numbers and they also have the actual figures for a particular month in consideration and for one entire financial year.
The management of the restaurant is finding it hard to understand how there can be differences between the budgeted and the actual statements.
With the financial expertise that you have gained so far, and using the budget worksheet, given in the sidebar, complete the following tasks for the management of the restaurant.
- Calculate the variances in the financial statement and identify the favorable or unfavorable variances.
- Identify possible causes of the significant variances, for example, any variance that is over $500.
- Discuss possible solutions to the significant variances identified.
Save this Microsoft Excel document as W6_A1_lastname_firstname.xls.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
am doing a PeachTree practice set and I am having major problems with the journal entries! I need these numbers to continue on with the excel and access parts of the project so I would be really appreciative if someone could give me their opinion on how I am supposed to journalize these:
1. December 16. Receive a purchase order from California Premium Beverage. Fill and ship the order. Complete Invoice No. 15535. (Don’t worry about the numbers just what would you debit and credit)
2. December 16. Order 18,000 lbs. white grapes at $1.05 per pound from Medocino Vineyards. The item number for the white grapes is WG1003. Complete Purchase order No. 9682.
3. December 16. Purchase a 2004 Ford truck for $30,250.00. The terms includ a $4,750.00 down payment and a 3 year 6% promissory note to Ford Credit for the remaining $25,500.00. Principal and interest on the note are due monthly beginning Janurary 4, 2011. The company expects the truck to have a useful life of 5 years and no salvage value. Prepare Check No. 19257 payable to Potter Valley Ford for the down payment.
4. December 17. Receive a phone complaint from Seaside Distributors about a case of Chenin Blanc that was damaged in shipment. The case was part of Invoice NO. 15175, dated November 5, 2011, in the amount of $20,438.40. Seaside paid the invoice on November 19, 2011 and took advantage of the discount (terms 3/15, net 30). The inventory was NOT returned to the company. Record the transaction.
5. December 19. Receive notification of $850 interest income that was deposited directly into the checking account from a certificate of deposit from State Employees’ Credit Union. Record the cash receipt.
6. December 19. Receive payment in full from Pacific Distribution Co. on Invoice No. 15243 dated November 13 2011, in the amount of $19,576.80.
7. December 19. Receive a purchase order with payment from Sonoma Distributors. Fill and ship the order. Record the sale.
8. December 22 Receive 14,000 lbs. red grapes at $0.99 per pound from Mendocino Vineyards. Also received Invoice No. M7634 from Mendocion vineyards with shipment. Terms on invoice are 2/10, net 30. Record the receipt of inventory. (transaction made on December 20)
9. December 26. Receive utility bill from Pacific Gas and Electric in the amount of $18,887.62 Prepare check No. 19402
10. December 30. Receive Brokerage Advice from Edwards Jones for purchase of 500 shares shares of Microsoft at $49.20 per share plus $400 broker’s commission. Prepare Check No. 19468.
11. December 31. Receive payment in full for December 16 purchase from California Premium Beverage. Record the cash receipt.
12. December 31. Prepare check No. 19473 payable to Mendocino Vineyards for the shipment received on December 22.
13. December 31. Prepare Payroll Checks (Nos. 7111 7114) for Anna Johnson, Jose Rodriquez, Tom Bryan, and Bob Hissom. Prpare Check no 19474 to transfer cash from the general cash account to the payroll account. Record the payroll transactions and all appropriate accruals.
14. December 31. Prepare Cheeck no. 19475 to repay $50,000 of the principal on long term debt to Bank of Huntington.
Any help on any transactions would be greatlyyyyy appreciated!!!
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pet Airways Is a Feel Good” Business
It great to love the business you in, as do Alysa Binder and Dan Wiesel, co founders of Pet Airways. They not only love their business, they also care for their customers, who happen to be furry and four legged. But Pet Airways, the only service devoted entirely to transporting cats and dogs around the country by air, is also a business— which means that Binder and Wiesel must pay attention to the financial aspects of their company. We doing something that a feel good, do good service and it absolutely rewarding,” says Dan Wiesel. But Wiesel knows that, without a thorough accounting of finances, any small business is likely to crash shortly after takeoff.
Binder and Wiesel started Pet Airways based on personal experience—they wanted a better, safer travel option for their Jack Russell terrier than being stashed in the cargo hold. With fluctuating temperatures and dark, cramped quarters, a trip aboard a commercial airline can be unsafe and traumatic for many animals. Binder and Wiesel, both of whom had backgrounds in business, decided they could do a better job than the passenger airlines by offering pet owners a choice.
As soon as they agreed on their business idea, Wiesel jumped into the financial questions. I had to ask, ‘Is this a viable financial enterprise? What would people pay for a service like this?’” recalls Wiesel. He researched such issues as how much it would cost to retrofit the climatecontrolled cabin of a plane to carry animals; how much it would cost to fly a plane from one location to another; and how much it would cost to staff the company. He also researched how much demand there would really be for a pet airline, and how many pets would have to be booked on each flight in order for the trip to be profitable. He put all of these variables—and more—onto a spreadsheet so he could see what he and Binder would need to do for Pet Airways to take off.
Wiesel says that financial modeling, financial spreadsheets, and good research on costs and pricing can make or break the launch of any small business. Accounting itself is an absolute full time, big job,” he admits. He wants to know how much money is coming in, how much is going out, and what the bottom line.” In addition there are taxes, payroll, benefits, and other financial documentation. Wiesel advises that in many cases it a good idea for small businesses to contract out their accounting to professionals. He prefers this because outsourcing actually contains the cost of accounting.
Running a business is a balancing act, observes Wiesel. You have to be able to reconcile how much cash you have with how you are going to spend it.” For example, as Pet Airways looks to expand to more cities, the firm has to consider the cost of adding more flights and more staff as compared to how many more customers it might attract. Binder points out that, while it exciting to think about growing, they have to factor in the expenditures of everything from additional hiring to developing a more sophisticated Web site and online reservation system.
All of this comes back to a sound financial plan, says Wiesel. The financial plan is really the core of it because you can play the ‘what if’ game. You can look at the implications of certain decisions.” For example, if Binder and Wiesel want to fly to a certain city, they can research which passenger airlines already serve that city. If it United Airlines, they know that pet owners will be charged $175 for an animal to fly beneath a passenger seat, or $250 to fly in the cargo hold. They can look at how many flights a day these airlines fly to the city, and probably learn how many pets are booked. And they can find out which terminal Pet Airways would use in addition to any airport taxes and fees. They can plug all this data into the financial plan and see if it works before making the final decision.goals and objectives. Wiesel says it all boils down to one question: What it going to cost you to achieve your plan?” Recently, Pet Airways announced its merger with the firm American Antiquities in a share exchange agreement, a major step toward expansion. We are delighted to complete this transaction . . . and believe this event represents a significant step in implementing our business plan and continued expansion,” stated Wiesel. Questions for Critical Thinking
1. In Pet Airways’ accounting equation, what might be some of the firm liabilities? What might be considered its assets?
2. Identify the types of costs that Pet Airways might list on its income statement.
3. Why is it important for a small company like Pet Airways to prepare a regular budget? 4. If Pet Airways decides to expand its operations overseas, what kinds of accounting issues would the firm have to take into consideration?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Citigroup Spins Off Primerica Inc.
Not long ago, the banking giant Citigroup included not only banking but also insurance, among other interests. Following the recent financial crisis, Citigroup CEO, Vikram Pandit, began to dispose of some of these holdings. He wanted to slim the company down to its original core banking business, focusing on large institutions and wealthy individuals.
Primerica Inc. was one of those holdings. Based in Duluth, Georgia, Primerica sells life insurance, mutual funds, and other financial products door to door. Its middle class clients earn from $30,000 to $100,000 a year. The company never fit well with the rest of Citigroup, and its 100,000 fiercely independent salespeople liked it that way. As the financial crisis worsened, some of them called for cutting ties with the parent company. Citigroup tried to sell Primerica but could not find a buyer willing to pay the asking price. So Citigroup announced that it would spin off Primerica instead. Primerica would issue an initial public offering (IPO), selling shares of stock for the first time. Primerica planned to sell 18 million shares at $12 to $14 a share. Under the terms of the IPO, Citigroup would take all the profits and keep Primerica existing accounts. Primerica would emerge smaller but would keep any new policies. John Addison and Rick Williams, the co CEOs of Primerica, said, We going to be a smaller, faster growing company going forward.”
The IPO exceeded expectations. Primerica sold more than 21 million shares at almost $20 each. Addison and Williams feel that the company focus has contributed to its success. No one else has our business model,” Williams declared. No one else focuses on the middle income, middle market like we do.” Analysts took the IPO success as a sign that both the life insurance industry and the market were recovering from the recession. Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Visit Citibank and Primerica Web sites. Why do you think these two companies did not mesh well together?
2. Although Citibank failed to find a buyer for Primerica, the IPO was very successful. Why do you think this was the case?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How News Lifts—or Sinks—World Stocks
The growth of computerized trading has closely connected all the developed nations and many of the developing nations. A snapshot of the world markets at the end of a recent month illustrates how events in one country influence stock markets everywhere.
In the spring of 2010, Americans grew hopeful that the country was starting to climb out of the worst financial crisis since the Great Depression. The Federal Reserve announced that although American households were not spending as much as before the recession, the U.S. economy was slowly improving. Some companies were making a profit from rising consumer demand. Earlier in the recovery, companies had made money by cutting costs. Prices of stock in U.S. companies such as Apple saw some increases. The computer giant Hewlett Packard announced that it was buying the smart phone maker Palm.
The credit crisis that America seemed to be emerging from struck Greece, which warned that it might not be able to pay off its debts. As a member of the European Union, Greece has adopted the euro as its currency. Other euro countries, like Spain and Portugal, faced financial troubles as well. Standard & Poor reduced the bond rating of all three countries.
As it tried to recover, Greece adopted drastic measures, reducing government spending on social programs despite public protests. Prime Minister George Papandreou said that the public sector was overly grown, overly expensive.” He hoped the austerity program would give us a cushion” that would give us quite a bit of money.” Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Why would a financial crisis on the other side of the world affect the U.S. economy?
2. This Hit & Miss” feature describes events at the end of April 2010. As you read this textbook, what has happened in Greece, Spain, and Portugal? Have they recovered from their economic crisis?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Credit Unions Find a Silver Lining in the Financial Crisis
Like the rest of the United States, mostly rural Meigs County, Tennessee, had suffered during the recent financial crisis and the recession that followed. As the three largest employers in the county heard many times, it was a bad year to try to start a credit union. But the Middle Tennessee Federal Credit Union, now worth $3 million, recently celebrated its first birthday.
The founders of the credit union, originally named the Mid East Tennessee Community Credit Union, had begun seeking a charter before the economic trouble. Their employees were resorting to predatory, high interest payday loans to meet their financial needs, and the founders wanted to help them get small, short term loans on more reasonable terms. The credit union opened for business in the midst of the recession. Jim Pitt, the chairman of the credit union board and the CEO of Polyform Plastics, says, Mostly I am proudest of our loans for the first year.”
Whereas a bank is a for profit institution beholden to its board members and shareholders, a credit union is a nonprofit cooperative owned by its members. Credit unions emphasize the basic finances of everyday life: savings and checking accounts, credit cards, and relatively small loans for homes or cars. Credit unions generally pay more interest on savings accounts and charge less interest on loans. Mark Wolff of the Credit Union National Association (CUNA) says, The credit union channels any excess funds back to its members.” Just as the FDIC does for banks, the federal government National Credit Union Administration insures deposits of up to $250,000.
Credit unions are chartered to serve particular groups. Originally, most were affiliated with employers. For example, BECU (formerly the Boeing Employees’ Credit Union) in Seattle once accepted only employees and their families. About ten years ago, credit unions began to ease their membership requirements. To join the Middle Tennessee Federal Credit Union, a person must simply either work, worship, live, or go to school in the local area. With the big banks pulling or tightening consumer credit, consumers have had trouble getting even the most routine loans, for example, for a used car. Smallbusiness owners have also suffered as banks have cut back. Credit unions have filled the gap. Around the country, credit unions now have 92 million members and have grown rapidly. In Michigan alone, they gained 59,000 new members in one year. Claudia York, the interim president and CEO of Chief Financial Federal Credit Union in Pontiac, Michigan, says, We’ve been getting many more inquiries about [business loans]. We have not tightened up at all—we have money to loan. We trying to be as generous as possible while still adhering to our [lending] guidelines.”
Credit unions don’t perform all the services of traditional banks, however. Only 59 percent of credit unions issue ATM cards. Those cards are usually part of a network of ATM machines at, for example, 7 Eleven, Walgreens, Costco, or even banks. Only 22 percent of credit unions have safe deposit boxes. And most credit unions have only one branch, or even none.
Both the CUNA and NCUA Web sites have online tools to help you find a credit union near you. Allan McMorris, the president and CEO of Michigan Oakland County Credit Union, said, I’m very proud of the fact that in this tough economy, we are going to set a record in the number of loans disbursed. And of course, that all local money on deposit and local loans. In our local economy, we think we helping with the recovery.” Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Why is an organization such as the Credit Union National Association important to the credit union industry?
2. Use either the CUNA or the NCUA credit union locator tool to find a credit union near you. If you are eligible to join, compare the credit union with your current bank. What are the advantages to joining the credit union? What are the advantages to staying with your bank?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
New Harvest Coffee Goes Beyond Fair Trade
Fair Trade has always been part of my legacy in coffee,” says RikKleinfeldt, president and co founder of Rhode Island based New Harvest Coffee Roasters. That where I started with New Harvest.” But in less than a decade, New Harvest business model has evolved beyond Fair Trade to something different.
New Harvest is a small batch coffee roaster specializing in certified organic coffee that is grown and harvested by farms with sustainable practices. RikKleinfeldt notes that he built his company on two pillars: 1) the highest quality coffee, and 2) sustainable sourcing practices. But these two weren’t really gelling at first,” he admits. At the beginning, Kleinfeldt tried to source from Fair Trade cooperatives, but this wasn’t really fulfilling his objective. Fair Trade is based on the commodity system,” Kleinfeldt explains, which creates a floor price at which coffee can’t drop below. But it doesn’t really address the issue of quality.” The groups that work with Fair Trade are large cooperatives, sometimes encompassing several thousand small farms. All the coffee is blended together as a commodity, so it is impossible for a roaster like New Harvest to deal directly with each farm, selecting the specific harvest that it wants to buy.
Kleinfeldt is quick to point out that when Fair Trade began around a decade ago, it was a lifeline to small farmers because coffee prices were at an all time low— these growers were selling their crops for less than it cost to produce them. Without Fair Trade, many of these farms would have gone out of business. With the coffee market somewhat stabilized though, commodity pricing brings its own set of problems. The commodity pricing usually has nothing to do with the coffee itself,” says Kleinfeldt. Prices are set at the New York Stock Exchange, not in the growing fields of Costa Rica or Colombia. He notes that roasters, retailers, and consumers may end up paying way too much or way too little for a particular year crop.
So Kleinfeldt has become part of what he calls the Artisan Coffee movement—growers, roasters, and retailers who prefer to deal directly with each other as individual businesses. We connect directly with our growers and determine price based on quality,” he explains. Kleinfeldt and his staff, along with some of his retailers such as the owner of Blue State Coffee and the owner of Pejamajo Café, travel to the farms in Costa Rica and Colombia where they actually taste the coffee before purchasing a crop. Kleinfeldt believes this is the only way to get the best coffee on the market. These visits help develop strong relationships, find solutions to problems, and develop strategies for surviving and thriving as businesses. Through visiting, he says, we can understand their challenges.” One farm in particular is located in Colombia. The farmer decided he didn’t want to participate in a large Fair Trade cooperative—instead, he wanted to develop a market for his own coffee. So he approached New Harvest with the idea, and the match was ideal. He is now one of New Harvest premier growers.
Sourcing the coffee beans directly from individual farms also helps New Harvest keep close track of organic and sustainability practices. GerraHarrigan, director of business development for New Harvest Coffee Roasters, notes that this is an important part of the firm business. The owners of local coffee shops—and their customers— like the reassurance that New Harvest stands behind all of its claims. Harrigan takes the hands on approach. When we deal direct trade coffee, the coffee has to be cared for a little more,” she explains. Harrigan grades the coffee on several factors before pricing it for New Harvest.
Kleinfeldt wants consumers to know they are getting a great deal when they ask for New Harvest at their local shop. He points out that the price differentiation isn’t as much as people might think. A visit to the supermarket reveals that Starbucks and Green Mountain sell for about $9 to $11 per pound, whereas most New Harvest coffee sells for about $11 to $13 a pound. Because of the richness of New Harvest, most customers actually get more cups of coffee from a pound of New Harvest than they do from the other premium brands.
Kleinfeldt hopes that the Artisan Coffee movement, as he refers to his company practices, will flourish and grow. He believes that if you going to drink a cup of coffee, it should be really fresh and of the highest quality—with beans preferably roasted by New Harvest.
Questions for Critical Thinking
1. What are the benefits and drawbacks of treating coffee as a commodity in the marketplace? What do you predict will be the future of Fair Trade?
2. Should the entire coffee market be regulated in any way? Why or why not? If so, how? 3. How would New Harvest change as a business if it made an initial public offering (IPO)?
4. What is your opinion of the so called Artisan Coffee movement as a business model? Do you think it will be successful in the long run? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Apptio Calculates the Cost of Information Technology
With the growth of software as a service (SaaS), many companies are making the transition to cloud computing to save money and increase efficiency. But is cloud computing really more economical and efficient in all cases? Until recently, there hasn’t been a reliable way to find out.
Apptio, located in Bellevue, Washington, provides hosted Internet technology solutions, among them its Technology Business Management package. Recently, Apptio introduced its new Cost Transparency Template. This template generates the formulas necessary for a company to calculate how much more—or less—it would cost to invest in cloud computing as opposed to other options, including traditional in house hardware and storage. Among Apptio clients are BNP Paribas, Starbucks, Hallmark, and Expedia. Jeff Day, Apptio director of marketing, says, We see that cloud computing is going to change the way IT leaders think about how they manage IT.”
St. Luke Health System of Kansas City has 1,200 doctors among 9,000 total employees in 11 hospitals. The chief information officer, Debe Gash, wanted to eliminate nonessential IT related costs. A spending analytics tool from Apptio allowed Gash and her team to save millions of dollars by highlighting unnecessary or redundant spending. For example, St. Luke had too many desktop software licenses, two full time employees dealt only with spam management, and they were spending a lot of money on electronic storage. Those expenses were reduced or eliminated, and funds are being redirected instead to finance such needed programs as electronic health records. We were surprised at the efficiencies we were able to derive from getting those insights,” Gash said.
In the future, IT managers will need to understand how the cloud works and whether it will actually be more cost effective than other in house or external systems. Day says, The greatest inhibitor of the cloud is a lack of understanding. IT leaders need better systems and tools to perform accurate analysis.”
Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Why have companies recently become so concerned with cost management?
2. Why might it be difficult for very large companies to keep accurate account of spending on such items as computer hardware and software licenses?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intel Invests in U.S. Technology Paul Otellini, the CEO of Intel Corporation, the world largest chip manufacturer, noted that other countries, among them China, India, and Taiwan, have overtaken the United States as centers of innovation in the technology industry. Concerned that the United States faces fierce competition from other countries worldwide, Otellini recently announced a new initiative. The Invest in America Alliance” teams Intel with 17 technology companies—including Google, Microsoft, Dell, and General Electric—and 24 leading venture capital firms. The alliance plans to invest $3.5 billion in start up technology companies in the United States over two years. Intel Capital, Intel own investment sector, plans to invest $200 million. The money will go to businesses in innovative fields such as information technology, clean technology, and biotechnology. But the fund will also invest in newer industries such as molecular diagnostics, electric vehicle ecosystems, and wireless infrastructure.
Among the venture capital firms that have signed on are Advanced Technology Ventures, Kleiner Perkins Caufield & Byars, and Draper Fisher Jurvetson. Arvind Sodhani, the president of Intel Capital and Intel executive vice president, said, Venture capital investments have played an important role in creating jobs at home and keeping America at the leading edge of technology globally.”
The alliance is also seeking commitments from the technology industry to increase their hiring of recent college graduates. Among those who have made the pledge are Google, Microsoft, Yahoo!, Adobe, and Dell. The alliance goal is to create a total of about 10,500 jobs, mostly in computer science and engineering. But jobs will also be available in financial planning, marketing, and sales. Intel has promised to hire more recent graduates as well. It would be a long term mistake to let our future scientists and engineers sit idle after graduation,” Otellini said.
Questions for Critical Thinking
1. Why does going green” make good business sense for venture capitalists?
2. How are jobs in financial planning, marketing, and sales important to the technology industry?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize transactions
|
Dec. 1
|
Barnett received $10,000 cash and issued common stock to stockholders.
|
|
5
|
Paid monthly rent, $1,000.
|
|
9
|
Paid $5,000 cash and signed a $25,000 note payable to purchase for an office site.
|
|
10
|
Purchased supplies on account, $1,200.
|
|
19
|
Paid $600 on account.
|
|
22
|
Borrowed $15,000 from the bank for business use. Signed a note payable to the bank in the name of the business.
|
|
31
|
Service rearnues earned during the month included $6,000 cash and $5,000 on account.
|
|
31
|
Paid employees” salaries ($2,000), advertising expense ($1,500), and utilities expense ($1,100).
|
|
31
|
Declared and paid a cash dividend of $4,000.
|
|
|
Barnett”s Auction Company uses the following accounts:
|
|
|
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Land, Accounts Payable, Notes Payable, Common Stock,
|
|
|
Dividends, Service Revenue, Salary Expense, Rent Expense, Advertising Expense,
|
|
|
and Utilities Expense.
|
Instructions:
1 Journalize each transaction of Barnett Auction Company. Explanations are not required.
2 After these transactions, how much cash does the business have?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The schedule presents the balance for Wei Seng Dance Studio Sdn. Bhd., at the end of the current fiscal year.
|
Wei Seng Dance Studio Sdn. Bhd.
|
|
|
For the Month ended April 30, 2009
|
|
|
|
Balance
|
|
|
RM
|
|
Capital, Wei Seng
|
11,610
|
|
Supplies
|
200
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
400
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
1,800
|
|
Equipment
|
9,600
|
|
Unearned dance fees
|
390
|
The following information is available to assist in the preparation of adjusting entries:
- An inventory of supplies reveals RM92 still on hand.
- The prepaid rent reflects the rent for April 2009.
- Prepaid insurance consists of a one year policy purchased on April 1, 2009.
- Depreciation on equipment is estimated to be RM 800.
- Accrued wages are RM75 on April 30.
- Two third of the unearned dance fees have been earned by April 30.
- Management estimates federal income taxes for the year to be RM 3,000.
Instructions:
a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of April 30, 2009.
b) Prepare an Adjusted Trial Balance as at April 30, 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mr Farid open a company, named Besraya Enterprise. The Trial Balance of BESRAYA ENTERPRISE as at August 31, 2007, is as follows.
|
BESRAYA Enterprise
Trial Balance
August 31, 2007
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
RM
|
RM
|
|
Cash
|
280
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
120
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
80
|
|
|
Supplies
|
100
|
|
|
Office equipment
|
500
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
40
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
200
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
60
|
|
|
Farid, drawing
|
20
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation Equipment
|
|
100
|
|
Account payable
|
|
200
|
|
Farid, capital
|
|
300
|
|
Rent revenue
|
|
800
|
|
|
RM1,400
|
RM1,400
|
Other data:
(a) Prepaid rent expired during August, RM 40.
(b) Depreciation expense on office equipment for the month of August, RM 60.
(c) Supplies on hand on August 31 amounted to RM 70.
(d) Salaries expense incurred at August 31 but not yet paid amounted to RM 140.
Instructions:
Enter the trial balance on a work sheet and complete the work sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of Tumira Service is shown below :
|
Tumira Service
Trial Balance
as at 30 September 2006
|
|
Cash
|
RM3,500
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
3,400
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
1,200
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,300
|
|
|
Equipment
|
32,600
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation equipment
|
|
1,800
|
|
Account payable
|
|
3,600
|
|
Mira, capital
|
|
36,000
|
|
Mira, drawing
|
2,000
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
7,100
|
|
Salary expense
|
1,800
|
|
|
Utility expense
|
700
|
|
|
Total
|
RM48,500
|
RM48,500
|
Additional information at 30 September 2006 :
- Accrued service revenue, RM600.
- Depreciation, RM150.
- Accrued salary expense, RM500.
- Prepaid rent expired, RM800.
- Supplies used, RM1,600.
Instructions:
Enter the trial balance on a work sheet and complete the work sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance columns of the work sheet for Undercover Roofing at March 31, 2005.
|
UNDERCOVER ROOFING
|
|
Work sheet
|
|
For the month ended March 31, 2005
|
|
|
Trial balance
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
RM
|
RM
|
|
Cash
|
2,500
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
1,800
|
|
|
Roofing supplies
|
1,100
|
|
|
Equipment
|
6,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation Equipment
|
|
1,200
|
|
Account payable
|
|
1,400
|
|
Unearned revenue
|
|
300
|
|
I.Spy, capital
|
|
7,000
|
|
I.Spy, drawing
|
600
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
3,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
700
|
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
200
|
|
|
|
12,900
|
12,900
|
Other data :
- A physical count reveals only RM 140 of roofing supplies on hand.
- Depreciation for March is RM 200.
- Unearned revenue amounted to RM 130 after adjustment on March 31.
- Accrued salaries are RM 350.
Instructions
a) Enter the trial balance on a work sheet and complete the work sheet.
b) Journalize the adjusting entries from the adjustments columns of the work sheet.
c) Journalize the closing entries from the financial statement columns of the work sheet.
d) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of March.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance of Lanza Company at the end of its fiscal year is :
|
LANZA COMPANY
|
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
|
July 31, 2005
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
14,840
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
8,780
|
|
|
Equipment
|
15,900
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
5,400
|
|
Account payable
|
|
4,220
|
|
Unearned rent revenue
|
|
1,800
|
|
C.J.Lanza, capital
|
|
45,200
|
|
C.J.Lanza, drawing
|
16,000
|
|
|
Commission revenue
|
|
67,000
|
|
Rent revenue
|
|
6,500
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
55,700
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
14,900
|
|
|
|
RM 130,120
|
RM 130,120
|
Instructions
a) Prepare the closing entries.
b) Prepare a post closing trial balance as at July 31 2005.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At March 31, account balances after adjustments for Marley Cinema are as follows:
|
|
Account Balances
|
|
Accounts
|
(After Adjustment)
|
|
Cash (Asset)
|
RM 6,000
|
|
Concession Supplies (Asset)
|
4,000
|
|
Theatre Equipment (Asset)
|
50,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—
|
|
|
Theatre Equipment(Asset)
|
12,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
5,000
|
|
Marley, Capital (O.Equity)
|
20,000
|
|
Marley, Drawing(O.Equity)
|
12,000
|
|
Admission Ticket Revenues (I/S)
|
60,000
|
|
Popcorn Revenues
|
37,000
|
|
Candy Revenues
|
19,000
|
|
Advertising Expense (I/S)
|
12,000
|
|
Concession Supplies Expense (I/S)
|
19,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense(I/S)
|
4,000
|
|
Film Rental Expense(I/S)
|
16,000
|
|
Rent Expense(I/S)
|
12,000
|
|
Salaries Expense(I/S)
|
13,000
|
|
Utilities Expense(I/S)
|
5,000
|
Instructions
Prepare the closing journal entries for Marley Cinema.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mike Young opened Young’s Carpet Cleaners on March 1. During March, the following transactions were completed.
|
Mar 1
|
Invested RM 10,000 cash in the business.
|
|
1
|
Purchased used truck for RM 6,000 paying RM 3,000 cash and the balance on account.
|
|
3
|
Purchased cleaning supplies for RM 1,200 on account.
|
|
5
|
Paid RM 1,800 cash on one year insurance policy effective March 1.
|
|
14
|
Billed customers RM 2,800 for cleaning services.
|
|
18
|
Paid RM 1,500 cash on amount owed on truck and RM 500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.
|
|
20
|
Paid RM 1,800 cash for employee salaries.
|
|
21
|
Collected RM 1,400 cash from customers billed on March 14.
|
|
28
|
Billed customers RM 2,500 for cleaning services.
|
|
31
|
Paid gas and oil for month on truck RM 200.
|
|
31
|
Withdrew RM 700 cash for personal use.
|
Instructions
a) Journalize and post March transactions to column account.
b) Enter the following adjustments on the work sheet and complete the work sheet.
1. Earned but unbilled revenue at March 31 was RM 700.
2. Depreciation on equipment for the month was RM 250.
3. One twelfth of the insurance expired.
4. An inventory count shows RM 600 of cleaning supplies on hand at March 31.
5. Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were RM 500.
c) Journalize above adjusting entries.
d) Prepare closing entries and consider the closing in column account.
e) Prepare post closing trial balance at March 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance of ABC Sdn. Bhd. as at March 31, 2009, is as follow:
|
ABC Sdn. Bhd.
|
|
|
For the Month ended March 31, 2009
|
|
|
|
Balance
|
|
|
RM
|
|
Cash
|
5,900
|
|
Account receivable
|
2,500
|
|
Supplies
|
1,300
|
|
Equipment
|
8,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation Equipment
|
1,800
|
|
Account payable
|
2,900
|
|
Unearned revenue
|
390
|
|
Tan, capital
|
9,000
|
|
Tan, drawing
|
500
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
3,200
|
|
Service revenue
|
8,210
|
|
Salaries expense
|
800
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
100
|
Other data:
- A physical count reveals only RM 180 of supplies on hand.
- Depreciation for March is RM 300.
- Unearned revenue amounted to RM 250 after adjustment on March 31.
- Accrued salaries are RM 450.
- Prepaid rent expired, RM 800.
Instructions:
a) Enter the trial balance on a work sheet and complete the work sheet.
b) Journalize the adjusting entries from the adjustments columns of the work sheet.
c) Journalize the closing entries from the financial statement columns of the work sheet.
d) Prepare an Income Statement for the month ended 31 March 2009.
e) Prepare a Balance Sheet as at March 31, 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 1, Bintang Supply had an inventory of 20 travel bags at a cost of RM25 each. The company uses a perpetual inventory system. During May, the following transactions and events occurred.
|
May 4
|
Purchased 40 travel bags at RM25 each from Cloud Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
May 6
|
Received credit of RM125 for the return of five travel bags purchased on May 4 that were defective.
|
|
May 9
|
Sold 20 travel bags for RM35 each to Twinkle Store, terms 2/10, n/30.
|
|
May 11
|
Sold 15 travel bags for RM35 each to Bulan Travel Agency, terms n/30.
|
|
May 12
|
Bulan Travel Agency returned two defective travel bags that were purchased on May 11.
|
|
May 13
|
Paid Cloud Company in full, less discount.
|
Instructions
Journalize the May transactions for Bintang Supply
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MRH Book Store entered into the transactions listed below. In the journal provided, prepare MRH’s necessary entries, assuming use of the perpetual inventory system.
|
July 6
|
Purchased RM2,900 of merchandise on credit, terms n/30.
|
|
8
|
Returned RM200 of the items purchased on July 6.
|
|
9
|
Paid freight charges of RM90 on the items purchased July 6.
|
|
19
|
Sold merchandise on credit for RM3,000, terms 1/10, n/30. The merchandise sold had a cost of RM1,700.
|
|
22
|
Of the merchandise sold on July 19, RM200 of it was returned. The items had cost the store RM100.
|
|
28
|
Received payment in full from the customer of July 19.
|
|
31
|
Paid for the merchandise purchased on July 6.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance of Pratt Company contained the following information:
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Sales
|
|
RM550,000
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
RM 20,000
|
|
|
Sales Discounts
|
7,000
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
366,000
|
|
|
Freight out
|
2,000
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
15,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
18,000
|
|
|
Store Salaries Expense
|
50,000
|
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
18,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
25,000
|
Instructions:
Use the above information to prepare a multiple step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gordon Company gathered the following condensed data for the year ended December 31, 2006:
|
Cost of goods sold
|
RM 742,000
|
|
Net sales
|
1,350,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
239,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
58,000
|
|
Dividend revenue
|
38,000
|
|
Loss from employee strike
|
223,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
45,000
|
Instructions:
Prepare a multiple step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2006.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sunrise Distributing Company completed the following merchandising transaction in the month of July:
|
July 2
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Brighton Supply Co. for RM5,100 CIF, terms n/30.
|
|
4
|
Sold merchandise on account for RM6,000 CIF, terms n/30. This merchandise had cost Sunrise
|
|
|
Distributing RM4,500.
|
|
5
|
Paid RM220 freight on July 4 sale.
|
|
6
|
Received credit from Brighton Supply Co. for merchandise returned, RM350.
|
|
14
|
Purchased merchandise for cash, RM4,300.
|
|
15
|
Received refund from supplier on cash purchase of July 14, RM300.
|
|
18
|
Purchased merchandise from Cameo Distributors for RM4,300, FOB Cameo”s warehouse,
|
|
|
terms n/30.
|
|
19
|
Paid freight on July 18 purchase, RM120.
|
|
23
|
Sold merchandise for cash, RM5,900. The cost of this merchandise was RM4,425.
|
|
26
|
Purchased merchandise for cash, RM2,400.
|
|
27
|
Paid Brighton Supply Co. the amount due.
|
|
28
|
Received collections in full from customers billed on July 4.
|
|
29
|
Made refunds to cash customers for defective merchandise, RM100, the cost is RM80.
|
|
30
|
Sold merchandise on account for RM3,900 FOB Sunrise”s warehouse, terms n/30. Sunrise”s cost for this merchandise was RM2,925.
|
Instructions:
Journalize the transactions, using the perpetual inventory system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Necco Company
Balance Sheet
As at December 31
|
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
$ 130,000
|
$ 105,000
|
|
Equipment
|
300,000
|
250,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 430,000
|
$ 355,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
80,000
|
59,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
105,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
230,000
|
164,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock $ 1 par
|
100,000
|
80,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
100,000
|
111,000
|
|
|
200,000
|
191,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 430,000
|
$ 355,000
|
Instructions.
(a) Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2007 using 2006 as the base year.
(b) Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for both years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data for Simba Corporation for the year ended December 31, is presented below.
|
Simba Corporation
Condensed Income Statement
For the year ended December 31
|
|
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
|
Amount
|
Amount
|
|
Sales
|
$ 750,000
|
$ 600,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
450,000
|
390,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
300,000
|
210,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
125,000
|
75,000
|
|
Administration expenses
|
76,000
|
54,000
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
201,000
|
129,000
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
99,000
|
81,000
|
|
Income tax expenses
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
|
Net income
|
69,000
|
61,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2006 using 2005 as the base year.
(b) Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for both years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative income statements for Gardenia Corporation are shown below.
|
Gardenia Corporation
Comparative Income Statement
For the year Ended December 31
|
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Net sales
|
$ 500,000
|
$ 400,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
350,000
|
320,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
150,000
|
80,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
68,300
|
35,000
|
|
Net income
|
81,700
|
45,000
|
Instructions:
a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Gardenia Corporation using 2006 as a base. Show the amounts of increase or decrease.
b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Gardenia Corporation in columnar form for both years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative condensed balance sheets of CACTUS Corporation are presented below.
|
Cactus Corporation
|
|
|
Comparative Condensed Balance Sheets
|
|
|
December 31
|
|
|
Assets
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Current assets
|
RM 72,000
|
RM 80,000
|
|
Property, plant and equipment (net)
|
94,500
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
33,500
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
RM200,000
|
RM210,000
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
RM 40,800
|
RM 48,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
141,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders” equity
|
18,200
|
12,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders” equity
|
RM200,000
|
RM210,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for CACTUS Corporation using 2010 as a base.
(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the balance sheet data for CACTUS Corporation in columnar form for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(RATIO ANALYSIS)
The following information was obtained from the 2012 and 2011 financial statements of Kini, Kemas and Kelas Sdn Bhd:
|
|
|
Kini
|
Kemas
|
Kelas
|
|
|
|
(RM million)
|
(RM million)
|
(RM million)
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
31 December 2012
|
33,000
|
22,000
|
41,500
|
|
|
31 December 2011
|
30,000
|
12,800
|
42,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
31 December 2012
|
22,600
|
12,600
|
54,200
|
|
|
31 December 2011
|
23,900
|
32,800
|
44,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net sales (Credit)
|
2012
|
620,000
|
320,000
|
510,000
|
|
|
2011
|
610,000
|
310,000
|
760,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2012
|
211,000
|
406,000
|
311,000
|
|
|
2011
|
156,000
|
200,000
|
310,000
|
Required:
a) Compare following:
i. Accounts receivable turnover ratio for each company for 2012.
ii. Number of days inventory is held before being sold for each company for 2012.
b) Comment on the performance of the companies in terms of the ratios calculated in (a) above.
c) The use of estimates and alternative accounting methods may limit the usefulness of financial statement analysis. Identify a ratio and explain how one or more of the limiting factors can affect the usefulness of that ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(COST VOLUME PROFIT ANALYSIS)
The Costing Executive of Syarikat Laris Sdn Bhd produced the following information for the year ended 31 December 2012.
|
Sales
|
RM750,000
|
|
Manufacturing Costs:
|
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs
|
RM280,000
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs
|
130,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selling and Administrative Costs:
|
|
|
|
Variable selling and administrative costs
|
RM120,000
|
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative costs
|
80,000
|
The information above was based on sales of 100,000 units. Syarikat Laris Sdn Bhd has the capacity to produce 120,000 units during the year.
Required:
a) Determine the break even point in units.
b) The Sales Manager believes that the company can increase sales by 8,000 units if advertising expenditures were increased by RM22,000. By how much will income increase or decrease if this plan is implemented?
c) What is the maximum amount that the company should be willing to pay for advertising if sales increase by 8,000 units?
d) Why is the cost volume profit analysis a powerful tool for planning and decision making?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Complete Accounting Cycle
Anil Mathew started Mathew Adwaves Ltd to provide advertising services and completed the following transactions during the first two months:
|
July 1
|
Began business by depositing Rs.20,000 in the company’s bank account in exchange for 2,000 shares of RS.10 each.
|
|
1
|
Paid three months’ rent in advance, Rs.3,000
|
|
1
|
Paid the premium on a one year insurance policy, Rs.900
|
|
5
|
Bought office equipment on credit from Kiran Company, Rs.6,000, payable in two equal instalments on July 31 and August 31
|
|
7
|
Brought office supplies for cash, Rs.2,390
|
|
8
|
Bought art supplies on credit from Fairdeal Company, Rs.4,510
|
|
9
|
Billed customers for services provided, Rs.6,800
|
|
18
|
Received cash for services to be provided later, Rs.1,800
|
|
27
|
Received cash from customers billed on July 9, Rs.4,900
|
|
29
|
Paid salaries for July, Rs.2,100
|
|
31
|
Paid Kiran Company Rs.3,000
|
|
Aug. 1
|
Billed customers for services provided, Rs.7,400
|
|
3
|
Received cash from customers billed on July 9, Rs.1,900
|
|
5
|
Provided services for cash received on July 18
|
|
9
|
Paid customers for art supplies, Rs.2,100
|
|
13
|
Bought office supplies for August, Rs.2,300
|
|
17
|
Received cash from customers billed on August 1.
|
|
24
|
Bought office supplies for cash, Rs.1,300
|
|
29
|
Paid salaries for August, Rs.2,300
|
|
30
|
Paid dividend, Rs.120
|
|
31
|
Paid Kiran Company, Rs.3,000
|
Required
a. Prepare journal entries to record the July transactions.
b. Open the necessary ledger accounts and post the July journal entries.
c. Prepare a trial balance for July on a worksheet form, and complete the worksheet using the following information:
-
- One month’s rent has expired, Rs.1,000
- One month’s insurance has expired, Rs.75
- Inventory of unused office supplies, Rs.1,790
- Inventory of unused art supplies, Rs.1,830
- Estimated depreciation on office equipment, Rs.100
- Estimated income tax, Rs.120
d. Prepare the July profit and loss account, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet.
e. Prepare and post the July adjusting and closing entries
f. Prepare the July post closing trial balance
g. Prepare and post journal entries to record the August transactions
h. Prepare a trial balance for August on a worksheet form, and complete the worksheet using the following information:
-
- One month’s rent has expired, Rs.1,000
- One month’s insurance has expired, Rs.75
- Inventory of unused office supplies, Rs.1,990
- Inventory of unused art supplies, Rs.3,240
- Estimated depreciation on office equipment, Rs.100
- Estimated income tax, Rs.915
i. Prepare the August profit and loss account, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet.
j. Prepare and post the August adjusting and closing entries
k. Prepare the August post closing trial balance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Financial Statements from Incomplete Records.
On April 1, 20X6, Manish Mukherjee set up Realtime Consultancy Ltd. With a share capital of Rs.30,000. He did not maintain proper accounts of the company’s transactions although he barely noted some details in his personal diary. Mukherjee’s secretary has kept files containing invoices raised on customers and cash memos and invoices for purchases of office supplies.
With great difficulty you have assembled the following information from Mukherjee’s diary, the files kept by his secretary, and the company’s bank statements:
1. Cash receipts during the Period are as follows:
|
Advances from customers
|
Rs.6,500
|
|
Collections from customers
|
38,400
|
2. Cash disbursements during the period are as follows:
|
Rent advance for 24 months (paid on April 1, 20X6)
|
12,000
|
|
Insurance premium for 12 months (paid on April 1, 20X6)
|
1,200
|
|
Office equipment
|
18,000
|
|
Cash purchases and payments to creditors
|
9,470
|
|
Salaries paid to employees
|
13,200
|
|
Electricity expense paid
|
1,430
|
|
Telephone expense paid
|
2,200
|
|
Dividends paid
|
8,000
|
3. Invoices for consulting services raised during the year totalled Rs.47,300. The amount excludes the value of services of Rs.5,900 provided to customers who had paid advance totalling Rs.6,500
4. Invoices and cash memos for purchase of office supplies totalled Rs.12,190
5. Depreciation on office equipment is Rs.2,000 per year.
6. Unpaid expenses on March 31, 20X7 are as follows:
|
Salaries
|
1,200
|
|
Electricity
|
130
|
|
Telephone
|
200
|
7. Inventory of office supplies on March 31, 20X7 is Rs.7,480
8. Estimated income tax for the year is Rs.10,000
Required
1. Prepare the March trial balance on a worksheet form, and complete the worksheet.
2. Prepare the 20X7 profit and loss account, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet as on March 31, 20X7.
3. Prepare the March post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Complete Accounting Cycle
Raju Designs Ltd. completed the following transactions during the first two months:
|
Nov 1
|
Deposited Rs.50,000 in the bank in the company’s bank account in exchange for 5,000 shares of RS.10 each.
|
|
1
|
Paid one months’ rent, Rs.2,000
|
|
1
|
Paid the premium on a one year insurance policy, Rs.2,400
|
|
3
|
Bought office equipment for cash. Rs.3,000
|
|
5
|
Brought office supplies on credit, Rs.3,460
|
|
9
|
Received cash for services provided, Rs.4,900
|
|
15
|
Paid assistant’s salary for the first fortnight, Rs.700
|
|
18
|
Billed customers for services provided, Rs.4,300
|
|
20
|
Paid creditors for office supplies, Rs.2,300
|
|
28
|
Paid electricity bill for the month, Rs.270
|
|
29
|
Received cash from customers billed on November 18, Rs.3,100
|
|
29
|
Paid assistant’s salary for the second fortnight, Rs.700
|
|
30
|
Paid dividend, Rs.1,000
|
|
Dec. 1
|
Paid monthly rent, Rs.2,000
|
|
7
|
Bought office supplies on credit, Rs.1,900
|
|
9
|
Billed customers for services provided, Rs.7,800
|
|
10
|
Received cash from customers billed on Nov 18, Rs.1,200
|
|
15
|
Paid assistant’s salary for the first fortnight, Rs.700
|
|
18
|
Paid creditors for office supplies, Rs.1,500
|
|
29
|
Paid electricity bill for the month, Rs.310
|
|
30
|
Paid office assistant’s salary for second fortnight, Rs.700
|
|
31
|
Paid dividend, Rs.1,200
|
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the November transactions.
2. Open the necessary ledger accounts and post the November journal entries.
3. Prepare a trial balance for November on a worksheet form, and complete the worksheet using the following information:
- One month’s insurance has expired, Rs.200
- Inventory of unused office supplies, Rs.2,910
- Estimated depreciation on office equipment, Rs.50
- Estimated income tax, Rs.1,500
4. Prepare the November profit and loss account, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet.
5. Prepare and post the November adjusting and closing entries
6. Prepare the November post closing trial balance
7. Prepare and post journal entries to record the December transactions
8. Prepare a trial balance for December on a worksheet form, and complete the worksheet using the following information:
- One month’s insurance has expired, Rs.200
- Inventory of unused office supplies, Rs.4,050
- Estimated depreciation on office equipment, Rs.50
- Estimated income tax, Rs.1,400
8. Prepare the December profit and loss account, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the August adjusting and closing entries
10. Prepare the December post closing trial balance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for Cuci Cuci service Company are listed below.
- Made cash investment to start business.
- Paid monthly rent.
- Purchased equipment on account.
- Billed customers for services performed.
- Withdrew cash for owner’s personal use.
- Received cash from customers billed in (4).
- Incurred advertising expense on account.
- Purchase additional equipment for cash.
- Received cash from customers when service was performed.
Instructions
List the numbers of the above transaction and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. For example, the first answer is : (1) Increase in assets and increase in owner’s equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1, Linda established Anchorage Travel Agency. The following transactions were completed during the month.
(1) Linda invested RM30,000 cash in the business.
(2) Paid RM20,000 cash for land.
(3) Bought RM500 of office supplies on credit.
(4) Received RM5,500 cash from clients for the service revenue earned.
(5) Performed travel service for clients on credit, RM3,000.
(6) Paid cash expenses : computer lease RM600, office rent RM1,100, employee salary
RM 1,200, electricity RM400.
(7) Paid RM300 on the account payable created in transaction 3.
(8) Renovation of Linda’s house RM5,000. This is not a transaction of the business.
(9) Collected RM1,000 on the account receivable created in transaction 5.
(10) Sold land for cash at its cost at RM50,000.
(11) Withdrew RM2,000 cash for personal expenses.
Instructions :
a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings: Cash, Account receivable, Office Supplies, Land, Account payable, Linda capital and Retained earnings.
b) From an analysis of the column Linda, capital, compute the net income or net loss for June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suraya opened a law office, Suraya, Attorney at Law, on April 1, 2007. On July 31, the balance sheet showed Cash RM 4,000; Account receivable RM 1,500; Supplies RM 500; Office Equipment RM 5,000; Account payable RM 4,200 and Suraya, capital RM 6,800. During August the following transactions occurred.
- Collected RM 1,400 of account receivable.
- Paid RM 2,700 cash on account payable.
- Earned revenue of RM 7,500 of which RM 3,000 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.
- Purchased additional office equipment for RM 1,000, paying RM 400 in cash and the balance on account.
- Paid salaries RM 3,000, rent for August RM 900 and advertising expenses RM 350.
- Withdrew RM 550 in cash for personal use.
- Received RM 2,000 from Standard Federal Bank money borrowed on a note payable.
- Incurred utility expenses for month on account RM 250.
Instructions :
a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash + Account receivable + Supplies + Office Equipment = Account payable + Notes payable + Suraya, capital+ Retained earnings.
b) Prepare an income statement for August 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1, Jennifer Garner started Divine Cosmetics Co, a company that provides individual skin care treatment, by investing RM 26,200 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30 and the revenues and expenses for the month of June.
|
Cash
|
RM 10,000
|
Notes payable
|
RM 13,000
|
|
Account receivable
|
4,000
|
Account payable
|
1,200
|
|
Service revenue
|
5,500
|
Supplies expense
|
1,600
|
|
Cosmetics supplies
|
2,000
|
Gas and oil expense
|
800
|
|
Advertising expense
|
500
|
Utilities expense
|
300
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Jennifer made no additional investment in June, but withdrew RM 1,700 in cash for personal use during the month.
Instructions
Prepare an income statement and a balance sheet at June 30, 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing transaction with the (1) accounting equation and (2) preparing the Income Statement and Statement of Retained Earnings.
The following amounts summarize the financial position of Ready Resources, Inc., on May 31, 20X8:
|
Cash:
|
1,200
|
|
Account Receivable:
|
1,500
|
|
Supplies:
|
0
|
|
Land:
|
12,000
|
|
Account Payable:
|
8,000
|
|
Common Stock:
|
4,000
|
|
Retained Earnings:
|
2,700
|
During June, 20X8, Ready Resources completed these transactions:
|
a.
|
The business received cash of $5,000 and issued common stcok.
|
|
b.
|
Performed services for a customer and received cash of $6,700.
|
|
c.
|
Paid $5,000 on accounts payable.
|
|
d.
|
Purchased supplies on account, $1,000.
|
|
e.
|
Collected cash from a customer on account, $500.
|
|
f.
|
Consulted on the design of a computer system and billed the customer for services rendered, $2,400.
|
|
g.
|
Recorded the following business expenses for the month: (1) paid office rent $900; (2) paid advertising $300.
|
|
h.
|
Declared and paid a cash dividend of $1,800.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On 1 July 2007, Johnny opens Johnny’s Research Service. He will be the owner of the proprietorship. During the entity’s month of operations, the business completes these transactions :
- To begin operations, Johnny deposited RM45,000 of personal funds in a bank account entitled “Johnny’s Research Service”. The business receives the cash and gives Johnny capital (owner’s equity).
- He pays RM30,000 cash for a small building to be used as an office for the business.
- He purchases office supplies for RM500 on account.
- He pays cash of RM6,000 for office furniture.
- He pays RM200 on the account payable he created in transaction (c).
- He withdraws RM1,000 cash for personal use.
Instructions:
- Journalize these transactions and post to the accounts. Key the journal entries by letter.
- Show all the accounts(column type) after posting.
- Prepare the trial balance as at July 31,2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize the following business transactions in general journal form. Identify each transaction by number. You may omit explanations of the transactions.
1. Stockholders invest RM20,000 in cash in starting a real estate office operating as a corporation.
2. Purchased RM400 of office supplies on credit.
3. Purchased office equipment for RM7,500, paying RM2,500 in cash and signed a RM5,000 note payable with Maybank Berhad.
4. Real estate commissions billed to clients amount to RM5,000.
5. Paid RM700 in cash for the current month”s rent.
6. Paid RM200 cash on account for office supplies purchased in transaction 2.
7. Received a bill for RM500 for advertising for the current month.
8. Paid RM2,200 cash for office salaries.
9. Paid RM1,200 cash dividends to stockholders.
10. Received a check for RM4,000 from a client in payment on account for commissions billed in transaction 4.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Louise Lane incorporated as a licensed architect. During the first month of the operation of her business, the following events and transactions occurred.
|
April 1
|
Invested RM 25,000 cash in exchange for common stock.
|
|
1
|
Hired a secretary receptionist at a salary of RM 500 per week payable mont
|
|
2
|
Paid office rent for the month RM 1,200.
|
|
3
|
Purchased architectural supplies on account from S.M.U Company RM 2,00
|
|
10
|
Completed blueprints on a carport and billed client RM 900 for services.
|
|
11
|
Received RM 800 cash advance from Jesse Izzo for the design of a new hom
|
|
20
|
Received RM 1,750 cash for services completed and delivered to Clark Ken
|
|
30
|
Paid secretary receptionist for the month RM 2,000.
|
|
30
|
Paid RM 900 to S.M.U. Company on account.
|
Instructions :
Journalize the transactions, post to the ledger accounts and prepare a trial balance on April 30,2006.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- October 1, C.R. Byrd invests RM10,000 cash in an advertising venture to be known as the Pioneer Advertising Agency.
- October 1, office equipment costing RM5,000 is purchased by signing a RM5,000 note payable with Hong Leong Bank Berhad.
- October 2, a RM1,200 cash advance is received from R. Knox, a client, for advertising services that are expected to be completed by December 31.
- October 3, office rent for October is paid in cash, RM900.
- October 4, RM600 is paid for a one year insurance policy that will expire next year on September 30.
- October 5, an estimated 3 month supply of advertising materials is purchased on account from Aero Supply for RM2,500.
- October 9, hire four employees to begin work on October 15. Each employee is to receive a weekly salary of RM500 for a 5 day work week, payable every 2 weeks first payment made on October 26
- October 20, C. R. Byrd withdraws RM500 cash for personal use.
- October 31, received RM10,000 in cash from Copa Company for advertising services rendered in October.
Instructions :
Journalize the transactions, post to the ledger accounts and prepare a trial balance on October 31,2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for Lily, an interior decorator, in her first month of business, are as follows.
|
Jan 2
|
Invested RM 25,000 cash in business.
|
|
|
Purchased used car for RM 6,000 cash for use in business.
|
|
|
Purchased supplies on account for RM 1,000.
|
|
12
|
Billed customer RM 2,000 for service performed.
|
|
16
|
Paid RM 250 cash for advertising expenses.
|
|
18
|
Received RM 1,000 cash from customers billed on January 12.
|
|
24
|
Paid creditor RM 500 cash on balance owed.
|
|
28
|
Withdrew RM 1,500 cash for personal use of owner.
|
|
29
|
Paid salary RM 1,000 cash.
|
|
31
|
Paid RM 200 cash for utilities.
|
Instructions:
1) Journalize the above transactions.
2) Post to ledger.
3) Prepare Income Statement and Balance Sheet for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounts of Custom Pool Service, Inc., follow with their normal balances at June 30, 20X6. The accounts are listed in no particular order.
|
Account
|
Balance
|
Account
|
Balance
|
|
Dividends
|
$ 6,000
|
Common stock
|
$ 8,500
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1,400
|
Account payble
|
4,300
|
|
Account receivable
|
15,500
|
Service revenue
|
22,000
|
|
Delivery expense
|
300
|
Land
|
29,000
|
|
Retained earning
|
21,400
|
note payble
|
13,000
|
|
Salary expense
|
8,000
|
Cash
|
9,000
|
Instructions:
1.Prepare the company’s trial balance as at June 30, 20X6.
2. Prepare the Income Statement for the month ended June 30, 20X6.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Cash
|
$ 4,200
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
13,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
17,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
600
|
|
|
Land
|
55,000
|
|
|
Account payble
|
|
$ 12,000
|
|
Common stock
|
|
47,900
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
32,100
|
|
Salary expense
|
1,700
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
800
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
700
|
|
|
Total
|
$ 93,000
|
$ 92,000
|
The accounting records hold the following errors:
a. Recorded a $1,000 cash revenue transaction by debiting Accounts Receivable. The credit entry was correct.
b. Posted a $1,000 credit to Accounts Payable as $100.
c. Did not record utilities expense or the related account payable in the amount of $200.
d. Understated Common Stock by $1,100.
e. Omitted Insurance Expense of $1,000 from the trial balance.
Instructions:
Prepare the correct trial balance at September 30, 20X3, complete with a heading.
Journal entries are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of Honeybee Hams, Inc., follows:
|
Honeybee Hams, Inc.
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2005
|
|
|
|
Thousands
|
|
|
|
|
Trail Balance
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
3,300
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
1,800
|
|
|
Inventories
|
1,100
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1,900
|
|
|
Property, plant, equipment
|
6,600
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
2,400
|
|
Other assets
|
9,900
|
|
|
Account payable
|
|
7,700
|
|
Income tax payable
|
|
600
|
|
Other liabilities
|
|
2,200
|
|
Common stock
|
|
4,900
|
|
Retained earning (beginning December 31,20X5)
|
|
4,500
|
|
Dividends
|
1,700
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
41,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
25,000
|
|
|
Selling, administrative, and general expense
|
10,000
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
Total
|
63,300
|
63,300
|
The trial balance of Honeybee Hams, Inc., follows:
|
Honeybee Hams, Inc.
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
December 31, 2005
|
|
|
|
Thousands
|
|
|
|
|
Trail Balance
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
3,300
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
1,800
|
|
|
Inventories
|
1,100
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1,900
|
|
|
Property, plant, equipment
|
6,600
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
2,400
|
|
Other assets
|
9,900
|
|
|
Account payable
|
|
7,700
|
|
Income tax payable
|
|
600
|
|
Other liabilities
|
|
2,200
|
|
Common stock
|
|
4,900
|
|
Retained earning (beginning December 31,20X5)
|
|
4,500
|
|
Dividends
|
1,700
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
41,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
25,000
|
|
|
Selling, administrative, and general expense
|
10,000
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
Total
|
63,300
|
63,300
|
Instructions:
Prepare Honeybee Hams, Inc.”s income statement and statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 20X6, and its balance sheet on that date.
Prepare Honeybee Hams, Inc.”s income statement and statement of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 20X6, and its balance sheet on that date.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ah Tong opened a boat hire business; Ah Tong Sdn. Bhd. in August 2009. The following transactions occurred during the first month of the business.
|
August. 1
|
Ah Tong invested RM15,000 in cash in the business.
|
|
3
|
Paid RM590 for August rent of premises.
|
|
4
|
Purchased equipment costing RM7,000 with a cash for RM3,000 and a RM4,000
|
|
|
commercial loan from Hong Leong Bank.
|
|
5
|
Purchased supplies costing RM250 on credit.
|
|
15
|
Recorded revenue for the first half of the month of RM1,530 in cash and
|
|
|
RM70 on credit.
|
|
18
|
Paid for supplies purchased on 5th August 2009, RM250.
|
|
19
|
Paid insurance expense for August of RM190.
|
|
24
|
Received payment from customer on account of RM40.
|
|
29
|
Recorded revenue for the second half of the month of RM1,330 in cash and
|
|
|
RM60 on credit.
|
|
30
|
Paid telephone expense of RM60 in cash.
|
Instructions:
(a) Prepare general journal entries to record the transactions.
(b) Prepare a Trial Balance as at 31 August 2009.
(a) Prepare an Income Statement for the month of August 2009.
(b) Prepare a Balance Sheet as at August 31, 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The schedule below presents the trial balance for the Sigma Consultants Corporation on December 31,2002
|
Sigma Consultants Corporation
Trial Balance
December 31, 2002
|
|
Cash
|
RM 12,786
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
24,840
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
991
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
1,400
|
|
|
Office equipment
|
6,700
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation office equipment
|
|
RM 1,600
|
|
Account payable
|
|
1,820
|
|
Notes payable
|
`
|
10,000
|
|
Unearned fees
|
|
2,860
|
|
Common stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
19,387
|
|
Dividends
|
15,000
|
|
|
Fees revenue
|
|
58,500
|
|
Salaries expenses
|
33,000
|
|
|
Utility expenses
|
1,750
|
|
|
Rent expenses
|
7,700
|
|
|
|
RM104,167
|
RM 104,167
|
The following information is also available:
- Ending inventory of office supplies, RM86
- Prepaid rent expired, RM700
- Depreciation of office equipment for period, RM600
- Interest accrued on note payable, RM600
- Salaries accrued at end of period, RM200
- Fees still unearned at end of period, RM 1,410
- Fees earned but not billed, RM600
- Estimated federal income taxes for the year, RM3,000
Instructions:
- Determine adjusting entries.
- Prepare Column account for each of items listed in trial balance and consider the adjusting entries as made in Part 1.
- Prepare adjusted trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The schedule presents the trial balance for New Wave Dance Studio, Inc at the end of the current fiscal year. The following information is available to assist in the preparation of adjusting entries:
|
New Wave Dance Studio, Inc
Trial Balance
October 31, 2002
|
|
Cash
|
RM 1,028
|
|
|
Account receivable
|
517
|
|
|
Supplies
|
170
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
400
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
360
|
|
|
Equipment
|
9,100
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation equipment
|
|
RM 400
|
|
Account payable
|
|
380
|
|
Unearned dance fees
|
|
900
|
|
Common stock
|
|
1,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
1,000
|
|
Dividends
|
12,000
|
|
|
Dance fees
|
|
25,995
|
|
Wage expenses
|
3,200
|
|
|
Rent expenses
|
2,200
|
|
|
Utility expenses
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
RM 30,175
|
RM 30,175
|
The following information is available to assist in the preparation of adjusting entries:
- An inventory of supplies reveals RM92 still on hand.
- The prepaid rent reflects the rent for October plus the rent for the last month of lease.
- Prepaid insurance consists of a two year policy purchased on May1, 2002.
- Depreciation on equipment is estimated to be RM 800.
- Accrued wages are RM65 on October 31.
- Two third of the unearned dance fees have been earned by October 31.
- Management estimates federal income taxes for the year to be RM 3,000.
Instructions:
- Open the Column account in the trial balance.
- Determine adjusting entries and post them directly to the Column account.
- Prepare adjusted trial balance.
- Prepare Income Statements, statement of Retained Earnings, and Balance Sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize transactions
|
April 1
|
Received 25,000 and issued common stock.
|
|
2
|
Purchased $800 of office supplies on account.
|
|
4
|
Paid $20,000 cash for land to use as a building site.
|
|
6
|
Performed service for customers and received cash of $2,000.
|
|
9
|
Paid $100 on accounts payable.
|
|
17
|
Performed service for FedEx on account totaling $1,200.
|
|
23
|
Collected $900 from FedEx on account.
|
|
30
|
Paid the following expenses: salary, $1,000; rent, $500.
|
Instructions:
Record the transactions in the journal of Double Tree.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Big Ban”s home health care services encounter the following situations:
1. Big Ban purchased $1,500 of supplies in 2008; at the end of the year $500 of supplies remained unused.
2. Big Ban incur utilities expense which is not yet paid in cash or recorded.
3. Big Ban employees worked 3 days in 2008, but will not be paid until 2009.
4. Big Ban earned service revenue but has not yet received cash or recorded the transaction.
5. Received cash for future services to be performed in 2009.
6. Big Ban paid $8,000 rent on October 1 for the 4 months starting October 1.
7. Big Ban collect $2,000 from a customer for services to be performed next year.
8. Big Ban borrowed $20,000 on October 1, 2008, signing a 10% one year note payable.
Required:
Identify what type of adjusting entry (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued expense, and accrued revenue) is needed in each situation, at December 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ryan Stiles Company has the following balance in selected accounts on December 31, 2008.
|
Account receivable
|
0
|
|
Equipment
|
7,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation equipment
|
0
|
|
Interest payable
|
0
|
|
Note payable
|
25,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
2,520
|
|
Salary payable
|
0
|
|
Supplies
|
2,650
|
|
Unearned consulting revenue
|
40,000
|
All the accounts have normal balances. The information below has been gathered at December 31, 2008.
1. Ryan stiles Company borrowed 25,000 by signing a 12%, one year note on October 1, 2008.
2. A count of supplies on December 31, 2008, indicates that supplies of 700 are in hand.
3. Depreciation on the equipment for 2008 is 2,000
4. Ryan stiles Company paid 2,520 for 12 months of insurance coverage on August 1, 2008.
5. On December 1, 2008, Ryan Company collected 50,000 for consulting services to be performed from December 1, 2008 through March 31, 2009.
6. Ryan Performed consulting services for a client in December, 2008. The client will be billed 5,300
7. Ryan Stiles company pays its Employees total salaries of 10, 000 every monday for the preceding 5 day week (Monday through Friday). On Monday December, 30 December, employees were paid for the week ending December 27. All equipment worked the last 2 days of 2008.
Required:
Prepare the adjusting entries for the seven items described above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Vuthy Real Estate agency on March 31 of the current year includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
4,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
30,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation of equipment
|
|
10,500
|
|
Note payable
|
|
25,000
|
|
Unearned rent
|
|
10,800
|
|
Rent revenue
|
|
60,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
0
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
14,000
|
|
Analysis of the accounts shows the following:
1. the equipment depreciate 500 per month.
2. the unearned rent represent 10800collected on December 1 for the period December 1 through March 31.
3. Interest of 750 is accrued on the notes payable.
4. Supplies on hand total 1,100.
5. the company paid 4,200 on January 1 for a 2 year insurance policy.
Required:
Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: depreciation expense; Insurance expense, interest payable and supplies expense.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Phnom Penh dental clinic open on January 1, 2008. During the first month of operations the following transactions occurred.
- Performed services for patients who had dental Plan insurance at January 1, 1,280 of such services was earned but not yet recorded.
- Utilities expenses incurred nut not paid prior to January 31 totaled $365.
- Purchased dental equipment on January 1 for 80,000, paying 20,000 in cash and signing a 60,000, three year note payable. The equipment depreciates 500 per month. Insurance is 600 per month.
- Purchased a one year malpractice insurance policy on January 1 for 9,600.
- Purchased 2,300 of dental supplies. On January 31, determined that 700 of supplies were on hand.
Required:
Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Account title are: Accumulated depreciation of dental equipment, depreciation of expense, services revenue, services revenue, account receivable, insurance expense, interest expense, interest payable, prepaid insurance, supplies, supplies expense, utilities expense and utilities payable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ken Ham started his own consulting firm on April 1, 2008. The trial balance at April 31 is as follows.
|
|
Hambone Consulting
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
April 30, 2008
|
|
|
|
Account
|
|
|
|
|
Number
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Cash
|
$5,700
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$6,000
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$1,900
|
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
$3,600
|
|
|
|
Office furniture
|
$10,200
|
|
|
|
Account payable
|
|
$4,500
|
|
|
Unearned services revenue
|
|
$2,000
|
|
|
Capital
|
|
$17,700
|
|
|
Services revenue
|
|
$7,500
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
$3,400
|
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
$900
|
|
|
|
|
$31,700
|
$31,700
|
Other data:
- $900 of supplies have been use during the month.
- Travel expense incurred but not paid on April 31, 2008, $250.
- Insurance is for two years.
- $400 of the balance in the unearned service revenue account remains unearned at the end of the month.
- April 30, is a Wednesday and employees are paid on Friday. Hambone Consulting has two employees, who are paid $800 each for a five day work week.
- The office furniture has a 5 year life with no salvage value. It is being depreciated at $170 per month for 60 months.
- Invoices representing $1,200 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of April 30.
Required:
- Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of April.
- Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning balance and
Prepare an adjusted trial balance at April 30, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Mound View Motel opened for business on May 1, 2008. Its trial balance befor adjustment on May 31 is as follows.
|
|
Mound View Motel
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
May 31, 2008
|
|
|
|
Account
|
|
|
|
|
Number
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Cash
|
$3,500
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
$2,200
|
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
$2,280
|
|
|
|
Land
|
$12,000
|
|
|
|
Lodge
|
$60,000
|
|
|
|
Furniture
|
$15,000
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$4,800
|
|
|
Unearned rent
|
|
$3,300
|
|
|
Mortgage payable
|
|
$35,000
|
|
|
Capital
|
|
46,380
|
|
|
Rent revenue
|
|
10,300
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
$600
|
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
$3,300
|
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
$900
|
|
|
|
|
99,780
|
|
Other data:
- Prepaid insurance is a 1 year policy starting May 1, 2008.
- A count of supplies shows $750 of unused supplies on May 31.
- Annual depreciation is $3,000 on the lodge and $2,700 on furniture.
- The mortgage interest rate is 12% (the mortgage was taken out on May 1.)
- Two third of the unearned rent has been earned.
- Salaries of $750 are accrued and unpaid at May 31.
Required:
- Journalize the adjusting entries on May 31.
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance on May 31.
- Prepare an income statement and an owner”s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of Transactions on Accounting Equation and Preparation of Financial Statements.
After four months of operations, Channel Video Company had the following account balances on August 31, 20XX: Cash, Rs.5,000; Accounts Receivable, Rs.10,000; Equipment, Rs.11,700; DVDs, Rs.36,000; Creditors, Rs.7,000; Share Capital, Rs.25,000; Retained Earnings, Rs.30,700; The following transactions took place in September:
(a) Collected from customers billed in August, Rs.4,000.
(b) Paid creditors due on August 31.
(c) Took a bank loan, Rs.10,000.
(d) Paid assistant’s salary, Rs.600.
(e) Bought DVDs for cash, Rs.5,000.
(f) Bought equipment of credit, Rs.20,000.
(g) Received DVD hire charges, Rs.15,000.
(h) Paid store rent, Rs.2,000.
(i) Paid creditors, Rs.3,000.
(j) Billed customers for DVD hire charges, Rs.3,500.
(k) Paid dividends, Rs.2,500.
Required
1. Analyze the effect of the transactions on the accounting equation. First enter the beginning balances.
2. Prepare the company’s September profit and loss account, statement of retained earnings, balance sheet and cash flow statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identification of Accounts.
Identify the account(s) to be debited and credited for the following transactions:
|
|
Transaction
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
|
Paid Electricity expense for the current period.
Paid creditors for services received earlier.
Billed customers for services provided.
Took a loan from bank.
Paid rent outstanding for the previous year.
Proprietor made additional investment in the business.
Bought office supplies on credit
Paid insurance premium for the next year.
Provided services for cash.
Bought a computer on credit.
Repaid part of bank loan.
Paid proprietor’s son’s school fees.
Paid interest on bank loan.
Collected cash from customers on account.
|
Electricity Expense
|
Cash
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using T Accounts.
Rakesh set up Mechanotronics Ltd. Record the following transactions by entering debits and credits directly in the company’s accounts using the transaction letters as the key.
|
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
|
Rakesh invested cash in the company’s share capital, ` 10,000.
Paid rent deposit for office premises, ` 5,000.
Provided services for cash, ` 3,500.
Purchased office equipment on credit, ` 2,500.
Paid office rent for the month, ` 750.
Billed customers for services provided, ` 3,300.
Paid creditors, ` 1,500.
Paid assistant’s wages, ` 250.
Paid dividends, ` 1,000.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording Transactions in General Journal.
Shalini Arora set up Ace Marketing Ltd. to provide consultancy. During a short period, the company completed the following transactions:
|
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
|
Shalini invested cash in Ace’s share capital, ` 20,000.
Billed customers for services provided, ` 5,600.
Paid assistant’s salary, ` 600.
Bought computer on credit, ` 4,400.
Received cash from customers billed earlier, ` 1,350.
Took a bank loan, ` 5,000.
Paid creditors, ` 2,000.
Received fee for professional services, ` 8,250.
Paid dividends, ` 1,100.
|
Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Trial Balance
Time Value company provides training on time management. The following are the account balances of the company on September 30, 20xx:
|
Accounts receivables
|
1,200
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
1,400
|
|
Cash
|
15,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
?
|
|
Buildings
|
1,500
|
|
Revenue from Services
|
12,500
|
|
Creditors
|
2,300
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,000
|
|
Dividends
|
750
|
|
Salaries expense
|
1,600
|
|
Electricity Expense
|
500
|
|
Share capital
|
7,500
|
|
Office Equipment
|
3,000
|
|
Telephone Expenses
|
1,050
|
Prepare the trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining Difference in Net Profit under Cash System and Accrual System of Accounting.
Jain Real Estate Company began operations on April 1, 20X2. The following transactions took place in the first month of the company’s operations:
|
April 1
5
7
9
16
19
24
28
30
|
Began business by depositing ` 20,000 in bank in the company’s bank account in exchange for 2,000 shares.
Paid three month’s office rent in advance, ` 3,600.
Bought office supplies for cash, ` 610.
Received fees for services provided, ` 9,200.
Paid assistant’s salary for the first fortnight, ` 1,600.
Billed customers for services provided, ` 9,700.
Paid telephone bill for the month, ` 470.
Received advance payments from customers, ` 2,600.
Received but not paid electricity bill, ` 130.
|
Required
1. Prepare journal entries for the transactions according to the cash system.
2. Prepare journal entries for the transactions according to the accrual system. Prepare adjusting entries for the following items:
- The inventory of supplies on April 30 was `180
- The salary for the second fortnight was ` 1,600.
3. Compute the net profit under the cash system and the accrual system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing Revenue and Expenses from Cash Receipts and Payments.
The following are some of the year end balances of Tyagi Company:
| |
20X1
|
20X0
|
|
Unbilled Revenue
Interest Receivable
Unearned revenue
Prepaid Rent
Salaries Payable
Interest Payable
|
` 1,800
680
1,600
7,900
850
810
|
` 2,100
570
1,100
5,900
1,200
730
|
The cash flow statement for 20X1 has the following information:
|
Fees received
|
21,710
|
|
Interest received
|
2,030
|
|
Rent paid
|
11,600
|
|
Salaries paid
|
6,820
|
|
Interest paid
|
1,840
|
Compute the following for 20X1:
(a) Fee revenue
(b) Interest income
(c) Rent expense
(d) Salaries expense
(e) Interest expense
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting Entries.
Prepare the December 31 adjustment entries from the following information:
- The company’s inventory of office supplies on November 30 was Rs.2,850. The company bough supplies costing Rs.4,710 in December. The inventory of office supplies on December 31 totalled Rs.1,930.
- The company paid rent for 6 months at Rs.2,500 per month in advance on December 1 and charged it to Prepaid Rent.
- The company had not paid the December salary of Rs.4,900 at the month end.
- On December 9, a customer paid an advance of Rs.9,300 for future services. The Company provided services worth Rs.7,100 to the customer in December.
- The company made a 3 year bank deposit of Rs.20,000 on December 1. The deposited carried interest at 12% per annum.
- The company bought equipment costing Rs.13,000 on November 1. The equipment had an estimated useful life of 10 years, at the end of which it was expected to fetch Rs.1,000.
- Income tax payable for the year is estimated at Rs.2,100.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Completion of Worksheet.
The worksheet of Sheetal Company Limited is as follows:
Sheetal Company Limited
Worksheet, March 31, 20X5
|
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Account
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Photocopiers
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation, Photocopiers
|
|
7,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office Supplies
|
2,350
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Debtors
|
4,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
960
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unbilled Revenue
|
650
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Creditors
|
|
2,100
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
1,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
Electricity expense payable
|
|
580
|
|
|
|
|
|
Share Capital
|
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
1,390
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dividends
|
1,300
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue from Services
|
|
19,890
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
8,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
3,740
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Electricity expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
2,160
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total |
47,860 |
47,860 |
–
|
–
|
–
|
–
|
Required
Complete the worksheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Closing Entries from Worksheet.
The profit and Loss Account and the Balance Sheet columns of the worksheet of Manoj Company Limited are as follows:
Manoj Company Limited
Worksheet, March 31, 20XX
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Account
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Office Equipment
|
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation, Office Equipment
|
|
|
|
8,000
|
|
Office Supplies
|
|
|
1,860
|
|
|
Debtors
|
|
|
4,100
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
2,900
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
Creditors
|
|
|
|
3,700
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
|
|
1,300
|
|
Telephone expense payable
|
|
|
|
870
|
|
Income Tax payable
|
|
|
|
800
|
|
Share Capital
|
|
|
|
20,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
|
|
790
|
|
Dividends
|
|
|
1,400
|
|
|
Revenue from Services
|
|
23,720
|
|
|
|
Interest income
|
|
200
|
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
7,800
|
|
|
|
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
2,470
|
|
|
|
|
Electricity Expense
|
1,210
|
|
|
|
|
Telephone expense
|
1,640
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,200
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
800
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
23,120
|
23,920
|
36,260
|
35,460
|
|
Net Profit
|
800
|
|
|
800
|
|
Total
|
23,920
|
23,920
|
36,260
|
35,460
|
Required
Prepare closing entries on December 31, 20XX.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Adjusting Entries from Worksheet.
The Adjustments columns of a worksheet on July 31, 20XX are extracted in the following table:
|
|
Adjustments
|
|
Account
|
Debit
|
|
Credit
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation, Buildings
|
|
|
1,500
|
(a)
|
|
Office Supplies
|
|
|
4,170
|
(b)
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
|
1,600
|
(c)
|
|
Prepaid Advertisement
|
|
|
9,000
|
(d)
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
900
|
(e)
|
|
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
2,100
|
(f)
|
|
|
|
Revenue from Services
|
|
|
2,100
|
(f)
|
|
Interest income
|
|
|
900
|
(e)
|
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
4,170
|
(b)
|
|
|
|
Advertisement Expense
|
9,000
|
(d)
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,600
|
(c)
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
1,500
|
(a)
|
|
|
|
Total
|
19,270
|
|
19,270
|
|
Required
Prepare the adjusting entries on July 31, 20XX from the information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Adjusting Entries.
A review of the accounting records of Jeet Company on March 31, 20X4 reveals the following information relevant to the preparation of year end adjusting entries:
(a) There are five salaries employees on the first day of the following month. Three of them receive a salary of Rs.2,500 per month and the other two Rs.2,200 per month.
(b) The company owns a car and a computer. The car was bought June 1, 20X2 for Rs.70,0000 and was estimated to be useful for ten years. The Computer was acquired on February 1, 20X4 for Rs.12,000 and was estimated to be useful for five years. Neither asset has any salvage value at the end of its useful life.
(c) There are two bills receivable:
(i) The six month bill for Rs.20,000 dated December 1, 20X3 carried interest at 15% per annum.
(ii) The nine month bill for Rs.30,000 dated January 1, 20X4 carries intest at 16% per annum.
Interest is receivable at the time of maturity of the bill.
(d) On October 23, 20X3, the company paid Rs.20,000 for advertisement campaign in two magazines and debited Prepaid Advertisement. One of these is a monthly which was paid Rs.12,0000 to carry the advertisement in the following 12 issues published on the second day of every month. The other is fortnightly that was paid was paid Rs.8,000 and it is agreed to carry the advertisement in the following 20 issues published on the fifth and 20th day every month.
(e) the company pays sales commission of 2% on sales on the fifth day of th month following the sales. From April 20X3 to March 31, 20X4 the company paid sales commission of Rs.17,000. The sales for the year were Rs.875,000. March 20X3 sales were Rs.45,000.
(f) On January 12, 20X4, the company received Rs.28,000 for future services. The company provided services for Rs.11,000 on February 17, 20X4 but did not record it.
Required
Prepare adjusting entries on March 31, 20X4.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Adjusting Entries and Financial Statements.
Leisure Centre Ltd. Was set up on July 1, 20XX. Its trial balance on July 31, 20XX is as follows:
LEISURE CENTRE LIMITED
Trial Balance, July 31, 20XX
|
Account
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Swimming Pool
|
12,000
|
|
|
Tennis Court
|
9,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,280
|
|
|
Debtors
|
2,910
|
|
|
Cash
|
940
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,200
|
|
|
Creditors
|
|
1,290
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
2,100
|
|
Share Capital
|
|
15,000
|
|
Dividends
|
800
|
|
|
Revenue from Services
|
|
15,540
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,910
|
|
|
Telephone Expense
|
290
|
|
|
|
33,930
|
33,930
|
The following additional information is available:
- The swimming pool has an estimated life of five years and the tennis court has an estimated life of 8 years. Neither has any scrap value.
- The inventory of supplies on July 31, Rs.1,190
- Subscription revenue of Rs.1,200 is due from members who have been admitted on a provisional basis.
- Unearned subscription includes an amount of Rs.300 for July.
- Staff salaries for the last week totalling Rs.1,290 have not been paid.
- The local electricity company sent a bill for Rs.280 for July after the close of the month’s transactions.
- Insurance premium of Rs.1,200 was paid on one year policy effective from July 1.
Required
- Prepare adjusting entries and post them to the T accounts
- Prepare an adjusted trial balance, a profit and loss account, a statement of retained earnings and a balance sheet
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of Worksheet, Financial Statements, Adjusting and Closing Entries.
The trial balance of Admark Ltd. Is as follows:
ADMARK LTD.
Trial Balance, March 31, 20X2
|
Account
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Office Equipment
|
10,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation, Office Equipment
|
|
1,000
|
|
Office Supplies
|
2,510
|
|
|
Cash
|
5,600
|
|
|
Creditors
|
|
1,600
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
2,100
|
|
Share Capital
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
2,340
|
|
Dividends
|
2,000
|
|
|
Revenue from Services
|
|
13,810
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
5,940
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4,800
|
|
|
|
30,850
|
30,850
|
Required
1. Enter the trial balance amounts on a worksheet and complete the worksheet using the following information:
(a) Estimated depreciation on office equipment, Rs.1,000
(b) Inventory of office supplies, Rs.930
(c) Services provided to clients paid for in advance but not taken as revenue, Rs.460
(d) Services provided but not yet billed, Rs.370
(e) Unpaid salaries, Rs.490
(f) Unpaid clearing expense, Rs.240
(g) Estimated income tax expense, Rs.300
2. Prepare a profit and loss account, a statement of retained earnings and a balance sheet as on March 31, 20X2.
3. Prepare adjusting and closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fechter Corporation had the following stockholders’ equity accounts on January 1, 2015: Common Stock ($4 par) $419,480, Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock $199,570, and Retained Earnings $117,500. In 2015, the company had the following treasury stock transactions.
| Mar. |
1 |
|
Purchased 6,390 shares at $8 per share. |
| June |
1 |
|
Sold 1,040 shares at $12 per share. |
| Sept. |
1 |
|
Sold 1,900 shares at $10 per share. |
| Dec. |
1 |
|
Sold 1,340 shares at $7 per share. |
Fechter Corporation uses the cost method of accounting for treasury stock. In 2015, the company reported net income of $25,420.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brendol Ltd makes a range of products, many of which require the use of components that are either bought from a sub contractor or made by the business itself.
Three of the business’s products (‘Super’, ‘Basic’ and ‘Component 17’), whose production all require the same facilities, require the use of a raw material ‘XR5’. XR5 is not used on any other of the business’s products. The material is very difficult to work with and requires a high level of a special skill. Both the material and appropriate skilled labour is in limited supply.
All production labour is employed by the business on long term contracts, where workers are not laid off if there are surplus labour hours.
The budgeted per unit cost structures of the three products for the forthcoming year are as follows:
|
|
Super
|
Basic
|
Component 17
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
£
|
|
Raw materials
|
24
|
19
|
16
|
|
Direct labour
|
45
|
26
|
37
|
|
Variable overheads
|
2
|
4
|
2
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
37
|
19
|
29
|
|
|
108
|
68
|
84
|
Included in the raw material costs were the following amounts for XR5, which has a budgeted cost of £4 a gram:
|
|
£
|
|
Super
|
12
|
|
Basic
|
5
|
|
Component 17
|
11
|
Included in the direct labour costs were the following amounts for the special skilled labour (who work on the XR5), which is paid £12 an hour:
|
|
£
|
|
Super
|
22
|
|
Basic
|
19
|
|
Component 17
|
18
|
The Super and Basic are completed products that are sold to external customers at budgeted unit prices of £180 and £110 respectively. Component 17 is used as a component in another of the business’s products (the Deluxe). The final selling price of each Deluxe is £200 per unit, but further variable processing costs of £110 per unit will be incurred and fixed costs of £40 per unit will be absorbed.
The budgeted demand for the forthcoming year for the three products is:
|
|
units
|
|
Super
|
600
|
|
Basic
|
500
|
|
Component 17
|
350
|
The demand for each product is independent of that for the other two.
The supply of XR5 during the forthcoming year is limited to 3,000 grams.
The maximum available amount of the special skilled labour during the forthcoming year is 2,600 hours.
Note that only one of these limitations will have the effect of restricting the business from satisfying the budgeted demand for the forthcoming year.
Required
(a) Show, with clear workings and justification, the optimal amount of each product that the business should produce during the forthcoming year.
(b) State and explain the assumptions which you have made in reaching your conclusion in requirement (a).
(c) State and explain the maximum amount that the business should pay for an additional hour of the special skilled labour and for an extra gram of XR5, should either become available at an appropriate time during the forthcoming year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) Carshine Ltd provides a service to motor car owners. Using a special item of equipment and a special fluid, it treats the external paintwork of cars, which has the effect of making the paintwork seem as new. The current standard costs of treating one car are as follows:
|
Direct labour (30 minutes)
|
£
|
|
Direct materials (2 litres)
|
2.30
|
|
Fixed overheads (based on the budgeted
|
1.50
|
|
monthly output of 20,000 cars treated)
|
3.30
|
|
|
7.10
|
|
Selling price
|
10.50
|
|
Profit
|
£3.40
|
During last month, due to an unexpected fall in demand for the service, only 15,000 cars were treated.
The actual results for last month were as follows:
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
153,900
|
|
Less: Direct labour (8,000 hours)
|
35,040
|
|
|
Direct materials (32,000 litres)
|
23,360
|
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
67,350
|
|
|
|
|
125,750
|
|
Profit
|
|
£28,150
|
Required
Prepare a statement that reconciles the budgeted actual operating profit for the business for last month, going into as much detailed analysis as the above information allows.
(b) You subsequently discovered that normally (that is when the demand is as budgeted), 20% of the direct labour is worked as overtime which is paid at a 25% premium (that is, the normal rate plus 25%). The standard direct labour cost takes this into account.
During last month no overtime was worked. However, the business followed its usual practice of employing its full direct labour force for the basic working hours throughout the month. Of the hours worked 7,300 were devoted to treating cars. The other 700 hours were spent tidying up the premises and doing some non routine maintenance work.
Required
Show how the statement, which you prepared in (a), can be revised so that it more clearly identifies how much of the profit shortfall is the responsibility of various managers. You should clearly explain your revisions to the statement and you should make suggestions as to possible reasons for individual variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Big Builders plc (BB), a civil engineering contractor, has been invited to tender for (give a price for) a new contract. Work on the new contract must start in January 20X8 and be completed by 31 December 20X0. The new contract price will be receivable in three equal annual instalments, on 31 December 20X8, 20X9 and 20X0. BB’s management has reason to believe that the client will probably not accept a tender price in excess of £13.5 million.
It is estimated that the new contract will require non management labour, in each of the two years 20X8 and 20X9, paid a total of £2.5 million each year and hired for the duration of the new contract.
Staff that would be hired only for the duration of the contract would undertake management of the new contract. Employment costs of the management staff (including travel and subsistence) would be £250,000, in each of 20X8 and 20X9.
Materials for the new contract will be bought at an estimated cost of £1.3 million per annum, in each of the two years 20X8 and 20X9.
Were it to be awarded to BB, the contract would follow on from an existing contract that will be completed at the end of 20X7. The new contract requires the use of an item of plant that is being used on the existing contract and could be moved for the contract. This item of plant was bought in May 20X6 for £6 million. It had been depreciated at the rate of 20% on cost per annum (straight line). Were it not to be used in the new contract it would be sold on 31 December 20X7 for an estimated £3.0 million, payable on that date. Transporting the plant to the site of the new contract would cost an estimated £100,000, payable on 31 December 20X7. It is estimated that at the end of the new contract this plant would be disposed of for a zero net realisable value.
BB’s management regards the cost of capital for the new contract to be 15% p.a.
There are not thought to be any other incremental costs associated with the new contract.
Requirements
(a) Recommend, on the basis of the net present value as at 1 January 20X8 and with supporting calculations, whether or not the new contract would be financially advantageous to BB at a tender price of £13.5 million.
(b) Determine, with supporting calculations, the minimum price at which BB should tender for the contract.
(c) Comment briefly on the conclusions of your calculations in (a) and (b).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bruton Ltd is a manufacturer of stylish and high specification computer workstation furniture. The business’s products have rapidly gained market acceptance allowing it to expand rapidly from its start up four years ago. Except during the first few months, the business has never been able to produce all that the market demanded. As a result it dispatches finished products to customers as soon as they are complete.
The directors feel that the business has reached a stage where it needs to make a fairly significant investment in equipment (about £5 million) if it is to move forward in the manner that they would like. They would also like to clear the business’s overdraft.
The following is included in the business’s recent draft financial statements:
|
|
Profit and loss account for last year
|
|
|
|
|
£m
|
£m
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
|
15.6
|
|
Raw materials and components
|
opening stock:
|
(1.1)
|
|
|
|
purchases
|
(5.7)
|
|
|
|
closing stock
|
1.9
|
|
|
|
|
(4.9)
|
|
|
Production labour
|
|
(3.3)
|
|
|
Production overheads
|
|
(2.5)
|
(10.7)
|
|
|
|
|
4.9
|
|
Administration and selling costs
|
|
|
(1.2)
|
|
Operating profit
|
|
|
3.7
|
|
Interest charges
|
|
|
(0.1)
|
|
Profit before tax
|
|
|
3.6
|
|
Tax
|
|
|
(1.3)
|
|
Profit (all retained)
|
|
|
2.3
|
Sales and production are spread fairly evenly over the year
|
Balance sheet as at the end of last year
|
|
|
£m
|
£m
|
|
Non current assets
|
|
|
|
Freehold land and buildings
|
|
3.2
|
|
Machinery and equipment
|
|
1.6
|
|
|
|
4.8
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Stock (all raw materials and components)
|
1.9
|
|
|
Trade debtors
|
4.2
|
|
|
|
6.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Bank overdraft
|
(1.3)
|
|
|
Trade creditors
|
(0.6)
|
|
|
Taxation
|
(1.3)
|
|
|
|
(3.2)
|
|
|
Net current assets
|
|
2.9
|
|
|
|
7.7
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
Ordinary shares
|
|
2.0
|
|
Reserves
|
|
5.7
|
|
|
|
7.7
|
The directors are concerned that a lot of cash seems to be tied up in working capital.
Bruton Ltd is a member of the Office Furniture Manufacturers Association, a trade association. In a recent copy of the Association’s journal, some statistics had been published of the average accounting ratios for the industry. These had been compiled from a recently conducted survey of members. Included in these were the following:
|
settlement period for trade debtors
|
1.5 months
|
|
settlement period for trade creditors
|
1.5 months
|
|
stock turnover period
|
1.0 months
|
Required
(a) Show workings which indicate the amount of cash that it will be necessary to raise for the purposes mentioned by the directors, assuming that Bruton Ltd were able to achieve industry average debtor, creditor and stock periods.
(b) Provide some practical suggestions for managing Bruton Ltd’s working capital elements more effectively.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clancy Van Lines is considering the acquisition of two new trucks. Because of improved mileage, these vehicles are expected to have a lower operating cost per mile than the trucks the company plans to replace. Management is studying whether the firm would be better off keeping the older vehicles or going ahead with the replacement, and has identified the following decision factors to evaluate:
1. Cost and book value of the old trucks
2. Moving revenues, which are not expected to change with the acquisition
3. Operating costs of the new and old vehicles
4. New truck purchase price and related depreciation charges
5. Proceeds from sale of the old vehicles
6. The 8% return on alternative investments that Clancy will forego by tying up cash in the new trucks
7. Drivers” wages and fringe benefits
Required:
Classify the seven decision factors listed into the following categories (note: factors may be used more than once):
A. Relevant costs. 3, 4, 6
B. Opportunity costs. 6
C. Sunk costs. 1
D. Factors to be considered in the decision. 3, 4, 5, 6
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Greg Smithson builds custom homes in Cincinnati. Smithson was approached not too long ago by a client about a potential project, and he submitted a bid of $590,000, derived as follows:
|
Land
|
$90,000
|
|
Construction materials
|
120,000
|
|
Subcontractor labor costs
|
150,000
|
|
|
$360,000
|
|
Consruction overheas: 20% of direct costs
|
72,000
|
|
Allocated corporate overhead
|
40,000
|
|
Total cost
|
$472,000
|
Smithson adds a 25% profit margin to all jobs, computed on the basis of total cost. In this client”s case the profit margin amounted to $118,000 ($472,000 25%), producing a bid price of $590,000. Assume that 60% of construction overhead is fixed.
Required:
A. Suppose that business is presently very slow, and the client countered with an offer on this home of $455,000. Should Smithson accept the client”s offer? Why?
B. If Smithson has more business than he can handle, how much should he be willing to accept for the home? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sophistication Corner sells clothing, shoes, and accessories at a suburban location in Boston. Information for the just concluded calendar year follows.
|
|
Clothing
|
Shoes
|
Accessories
|
|
Sales
|
$ 850,000
|
$ 320,000
|
$ 150,000
|
|
Less: Variable Costs
|
$ 510,000
|
$ 270,000
|
$ 82,500
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
290,000
|
70,000
|
42,000
|
|
Total Costs
|
$ 800,000
|
$ 340,000
|
$ 124,500
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ 50,000
|
$ (20,000)
|
$ 25,500
|
Management is considering closing the shoe operation because of the loss and expanding the space that is currently devoted to accessories sales. A salaried salesperson in the shoe department who earns $45,000 will be terminated; however, all other departmental fixed costs will continue to be incurred. Sophistication Corner will spend $16,000 on remodeling costs and anticipates that accessories sales will increase by $70,000. This additional sales revenue is expected to generate a 35% contribution margin for the firm. Finally, because clothing customers often purchased shoes and feel strongly about “one stop shopping,” clothing sales are expected to fall by 15% if the shoe department is closed.
Required:
Determine whether the shoe department should be closed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fowler Industries produces two bearings: C15 and C19. Data regarding these two bearings follow.
|
|
C15
|
C19
|
|
Machine hour required per unit
|
2.00
|
2.50
|
|
Standard cost per unit:
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$ 2.50
|
$ 4.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
5.00
|
4.00
|
|
Manufacturing overhead:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
3.00
|
2.50
|
|
Fixed
|
4.00
|
5.00
|
|
Total
|
$ 14.50
|
$ 15.50
|
The company requires 8,000 units of C15 and 11,000 units of C19. Recently, management decided to devote additional machine time to other product lines, resulting in only 31,000 machine hours per year that can be dedicated to production of the bearings. An outside company has offered to sell Fowler the bearings at prices of $13.50 for C15 and $13.50 for C19.
Required:
A. Assume that Fowler decided to produce all C15s and purchase C19s only as needed. Determine the number of C19s to be purchased.
B. Compute the net benefit to the company of manufacturing (rather than purchasing) a unit of C15. Repeat the calculation for a unit of C19.
C. Fowler lacks sufficient machine time to produce all of the C15s and C19s needed. Which component (C15 or C19) should Fowler manufacture first with the limited machine hours available? Why? Be sure to show all supporting computations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The right manager of Makks Metro Transport Service, who had no accounting background, prepared the following balance sheet for the company at February 28, 2009. The Rs. Amounts were taken directly from the company’s accounting records and are correct. However, the balance sheet contains a number of errors in its headings, format, and the classification of assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity.
|
Makks Metro Transport Service |
|
|
Manager’s Report |
|
|
8 P.M. Thursday |
|
| Assets |
(Rs.) |
Owners’ Equity |
(Rs.) |
| Capital Stock |
92,000 |
Accounts Receivable |
70,000 |
| Retained Earnings |
62,000 |
Notes Payable |
288,000 |
| Cash |
69,000 |
Supplies |
14,000 |
| Building |
80,000 |
Land |
70,000 |
| Automobiles |
165,000 |
Accounts Payable |
26,000 |
Prepare a corrected balance sheet. Include a proper heading.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A number of business transactions carried out by Smalling Manufacturing Company are as follows:
- Borrowed money from a bank.
- Sold land for cash at a price equal to its cost.
- Paid a liability.
- Returned for credit some of the office equipment previously purchased on credit but not yet paid for. (Treat this the opposite of a transaction in which you purchased office equipment on credit.)
- Sold land for cash at a price in excess of cost. (Hint: The difference between cost and sales price represents a gain that will be in the company’s income statement.)
- Purchased a computer on credit.
- The owner invested cash in the business.
- Purchased office equipment for cash.
- Collected an account receivable.
Indicate the effects of each of these transactions on the total amounts of the company’s assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity. Organize your answer in tabular form, using the following column headings and the code letters I for increase, D for decrease, and NE for no effect.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a Balance Sheet – A Second Problem
Shown below in random order is a list of balance sheet items for Fire Valley Farms at September 30, 2005:
|
(Rs.) |
|
(Rs.) |
| Land |
490,000 |
Fences and Gates |
33,570 |
| Barns and Sheds |
78,300 |
Irrigation System |
20,125 |
| Notes Payable |
330,000 |
Cash |
16,710 |
| Accounts Receivable |
22,365 |
Livestock |
120,780 |
| Citrus Trees |
76,650 |
Farm Machinery |
42,970 |
| Accounts Payable |
77,095 |
Retained Earnings |
? |
| Property Taxes Payable |
9,135 |
Wages Payable |
5,820 |
| Capital Stock |
290,000 |
|
|
Instructions
- Prepare a balance sheet by using these items and computing the amount for retained earnings. Use a sequence of assets similar to that illustrated in Exhibit 2 10. (After “Barns and Sheds” you may list the remaining assets in any order.) Include a proper heading for your balance sheet.
- Assume that on September 30, immediately after this balance sheet was prepared, a tornado completely destroyed one of the barns. This barn had a cost of Rs. 13,700, and was not insured against this type of disaster. Explain what charges would be required in your September 30 balance sheet to reflect the loss of this barn.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a Balance Sheet and Statement of Cash Flow; Effects of Business Transactions
The balance sheet items for The Town Bakery (arranged in alphabetical order) were as follows at August 1, 2005. (You are to compute the missing figure for retained earnings.)
|
(Rs.) |
|
(Rs.) |
| Accounts Payable |
16,200 |
Capital Stock |
80,000 |
| Accounts Receivable |
11,260 |
Land |
67,000 |
| Building |
84,000 |
Notes Payable |
74,900 |
| Cash |
6,940 |
Salaries Payable |
8,900 |
| Equipment and Fixtures |
44,500 |
Supplies |
7,000 |
During the next two days, the following transactions occurred:
Aug. 2 Additional capital stock was sold for Rs. 25,000. The accounts payable were paid in full. (No payment was made on the notes payable or income taxes payable.)
Aug. 3 Equipment was purchased at a cost of Rs. 7,200 to be paid within 10 days. Supplies were purchased for Rs.1,250 cash from a restaurant supply center that was going out of business. These supplies would have cost Rs.1,800 if purchased through normal channels.
Instructions
- Prepare a balance sheet at August 1, 2005.
- Prepare a balance sheet at August 3, 2005, and a statement of cash flows for August 1 3. Classify the payment of accounts payable and the purchase of supplies as operating activities.
- Assume the note payable does not come for several years. Is The Town Bakery in a stronger financial position on August 1 or on August 3? Explain briefly.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing Financial Statements; Effects of Business Transactions
The balance sheet items of The Sweet Soda Shop (arranged in alphabetical order) were as follows at the close of the business on September 30, 2005:
| Accounts Payable |
8,500 |
Furniture and Fixtures |
20,000 |
| Accounts Receivable |
1,250 |
Land |
55,000 |
| Building |
45,500 |
Notes Payable |
? |
| Capital Stock |
50,000 |
Retained Earnings |
4,090 |
| Cash |
7,400 |
Supplies |
3,440 |
The transactions occurring during the first week of October were:
Oct. 3 Additional capital stock was sold for Rs. 30,000. The accounts payable were paid in full. (No payment was made on the notes payable.)
Oct. 6 More furniture was purchased on account at a cost of Rs. 18,000, to be paid within 30 days. Supplies were purchased for Rs. 1,000 cash from a restaurant supply center that was going out of business. These supplies would have cost Rs. 1,875 if purchased under normal circumstances.
Oct. 1 6 Revenues of Rs. 5,500 were earned and paid in cash. Expenses required to earn the revenues of Rs. 4,000 were incurred and paid in cash.
Instructions
- Prepare a balance sheet at September 30, 2005. (You will need to compute the missing figure for Notes Payable.)
- Prepare a balance sheet at October 6, 2005. Also prepare an income statement and a statement of cash flows for the period October 1 6, 2005. In your statement of cash flows, treat the purchase of supplies and the payment of accounts payable as operating activities.
- Assume the note payable does not come due for several years. Is The Soda Shop in a stronger financial position on September 30 or on October 6? Explain briefly.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording seven typical adjusting entries
Bing Ben Variety Store is completing the accounting process for the year just ended, December 31, 2007. The transactions during 2007 have been journalize and posted. The following data with respect to adjusting entries are available:
- Office supplies on hand at January 1, 2007, totaled $290. Office supplies purchased and debited to Office supplies during the year amounted to $665. The year end count showed $250 of supplies on hand.
- Wages earned by employees during December 2007, unpaid and unrecorded at December 31, 2007, amounted to $3070. The last payroll was December 28; the next payroll will be January 6 2008.
- Three fourths of the basement of the store is rented for $1,245 per month to another merchant M. Dittman Inc. On November 1, 2007. The store collected six months” rent in the amount of $7470 in advance from Dittman; it was credited in full to Unearned Rent Revenue when collected.
- The remaining basement space is rented to Kathy”s specialty shop for $680 per month, payable monthly. On December 31, 2007 the rent for November and December 2007 had not been collected or recorded. Collection is expected January 10, 2008.
- The store use delivery equipment that cost $24,900; $4150 was the estimated depreciation for 2007.
- On July 1, 2007, a two year insurance premium amounting to $3485 was paid in cash and debited in full to Prepaid Insurance. Coverage began on July 1, 2007.
- Big Ben”s repair shop to meet its own needs. The shop also does repairs for M. Dittman. At the end of December 31, 2007, Dittman had not paid $625 for completed repairs. This amount has not yet been recorded as repairs Shop Revenue. Collection is expected during January 2008.
Required:
1. Identify each of these transactions as deferred revenue, deferred expense, accrued revenue, or accrued expense.
2. For each situation record the adjusting entries that should be recorded for Big ban”s at December 31, 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording Seven Typical Adjusting Entries
Pablo”s Boat Yard, Inc is completing the accounting process for the year just ended, November 30, 2006. The transactions during 2006 has been Journalize and posted. The following data with respect to adjusting entries are available:
- Pablo”s winterized (cleaned and covered) three boats for customers at the end of November, but did not bill the customers $22,760 for the services until December.
- The Gomez family paid Pablo”s $26,000 on November 1, 2006, to store their sailboat for the winter until May 1, 2007. Pablo”s credited the full amount to unearned storage revenue on november1.
- Wage earned by employees during November 2006, unpaid and unrecorded at November 30, 2006, amounted to $31,430. The next payroll date will be December 5, 2006.
- On october1, 2006 Pablo”s paid $4,500 to the local news paper for advertisement to run every Thursday for 12 weeks. All ads have been run expected for three Thursdays in December to complete the 12 weeks contract.
- Pablo”s used boat lifting equipment that cost $2,493,000; $2,493,000 was the estimated depreciation for 2006.
- Boat repair supplies on hand at December 1, 2005, totaled $169,100. Repair supplies purchased and debited to supplies during the year amounted to $514,900. The year end count showed $132,250 of the supplies on hand.
- Pablo”s borrowed $1,626,000 at a 10 percent annual interest rate on April 1, 2006 to expand its boat storage facility. The loan requires Johnson”s to pay the interest quarterly until the note is repaid in three years. Pablo”s paid quarterly interest on July 1 and October 1.
Required:
1. Identify each of these transactions as deferred revenue, deferred expense, accrued revenue or accrued expense.
2. For each situation record the adjusting entry that should be recorded for Johnson”s at November 30, 2006.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording the adjusting entries
Magasaki Company”s annual accounting year ends on December 31. It is December 31, 2007, and all of the 2007 entries except the following adjusting entries have been made:
- On September 1, 2007, Magasaki collected six months” rent of $810,000 on storage space. At that date, Magasaki debited cash credited unearned revenue for $810,000.
- At December 31, 2007, wages earned by employees totaled $1,608,000. The employees will be paid on the next payroll date, January 15, 2008.
- The company earned service revenues of $225,000 on a special mission job that was completed December 29, 2007. Collected will be made in January 2008. No entry has been recorded.
- On October 1, 2007 Company borrowed $2,249,000 from a local bank and signed a 12 percent note for that amount. The Principle and interest are payable on the maturity date, September 31, 2008.
- On November 1, 2007 Magasaki paid a one year premium for property insurance, $675,000 for coverage stating on that date. Cash was credited and prepaid insurance was debited for this amount.
- Depreciation of $167,000 must be recognized on a services truck purchased on July 1, 2007, at a cost of $1,349,000.
- Cash of $27,000 was collected on November 1, 2007, for services to be rendered evenly over the next year beginning on November1. Unearned services revenue was credit when the cash was received.
- On December 31, 2007, the company estimates it owed $45,000 for 2007 property tax on land. The tax will be paid when the bill is received in January 2008.
Required:
1. Indicate whether each transaction relates to a deferred revenue, deferred expense, accrued revenue or accrued expense.
2. Give the adjusting entry required for each transaction at December 31, 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pedro Towing Company is at the end of its accounting year, December 31, 2008. The following data that must be considered were developed from the company”s record and related documents.
- On July 1, 2008 a three year insurance premium on equipment in the amount of $13,000 was paid and debited in full to prepaid insurance on that date. Coverage began on July 1.
- During 2008, office supplies amounting to $8,700 were purchased for cash and debited in full to supplies. At the end of 2007, the count of supplies remaining on hand was $2,200. The inventory of supplies counted on hand at December 31, 2008, was $3,300.
- On December 31, 2008, HH”s garage completed repairs on one of the company”s trucks at a cost of $8,700 the amount is not yet recorded and by agreement will be paid during January 2009.
- On December 31, 2008, property taxes on land owned during 2008 were estimated at $17,400. The taxes have not been recorded, and will be paid in 2009 when billed.
- On December 31, 2008, the company completed a contract for an out of state company for $87,000 payable by the customer within 30 days. No cash has been collected and no journal entry has been made for this transaction.
- On January 1, 2008, the company purchased a new hauling van at a cash cost of $312,000. Depreciation estimated at $12,000 for the year has not been recorded for 2008.
- On October 1, 2008, the company borrowed $108,400 from a local on a one year, 12 percent note payable. The principle plus interest is payable at the end of 12 months.
- The income before any of the adjustments or income taxes was $325,200. The Company”s federal income tax rate is 30 percent. (Hint: compute adjusted income based on (a) through (g) to determine income tax expense.)
Required:
1. Indicate whether each transaction relates to deferred revenue, deferred expense, accrued revenue, or accrued expense.
2. Give the adjusting entry required for each transaction at December 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording the adjusting entries
Hokkaido Company”s annual accounting year ends on June 30. It is June 30, 2007, and all of the 2007 entries except the following adjusting entries have been made:
- On March 30, 2007, Hokkaido paid a six month premium for property insurance, $360,000, for coverage stating on that date. Cash was credited and prepaid insurance was debited for this amount.
- At June 30, 2007, wage of $ 101,000 were earned by employees but not yet paid. The employees will be paid on the next payroll date, July 15, 2007.
- On June 1, 2007, Hokkaido collected two months” maintenance revenue of $51,000. At that date Hokkaido debited cash and credited unearned revenue for $51,000.
- Depreciation of $337,000 must be recognized on a services truck that cost $1687, 000 when purchased on July 1, 2006.
- Cash of $472,000 was collected on May 1, 2007, for services rendered evenly over the next year beginning on May 1. Unearned revenue was credited when the cash was received.
- On February 1, 2007, the company borrowed $1,799.000 from local bank and signed a 9 percent note for that amount. The principle and interest are payable on maturity date. January 31, 2008.
- On June 30, 2007, the company estimated that it owed $56,000 in property taxes on land it owned in the first half of 2007. The taxes will be paid when billed in August 2007.
- The company earned service revenue of $225,000 on a special job that was completed June 29, 2007. Collection will be made during July 2007; no entry has been recorded.
Required:
1. Indicate whether each transaction relates to a deferred revenue, deferred expense, accrued revenue, or accrued expense.
2. Give the adjustment entry required for each transaction at June 30 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording the adjusting entries
Fergi Catering Company is at its accounting year end, December 31, 2008. The following data that must be considered were developed from the company”s recorded and related documents:
- During 2008, office supplies amounting to $996 were purchased for cash and debited in full to supplies. At the beginning of 2008, the count of supplies on hand was $290 and, at December 31, 2008 was $332.
- On December 31, 2008, the company catered an evening gala for a local celebrity. The $6,225 bill was payable by the end of January 2009. No cash has been collected, and no journal entry has been made for this transaction.
- On December 31, 2008, repairs on one of the company delivery vans were completed at a cost estimate of $500; the amounts is not yet paid or recorded. The repair shop will bill Fergi”s Catering at the beginning of January 2009.
- On October 1, 2008, a one year insurance premium on equipment in the amount of $996 was paid and debited in full to prepaid insurance on that date. Coverage began in November 1.
- In November 2008, Fergi”s signed a lease for a new retail location, providing a down payment of $1,740 for the first three months” rent that was debited in full to prepaid rent. The lease began on December 1, 2008.
- On July 1, 2008, the company Purchased new refrigerated display counters at a cash cost of $15,000. Depreciation of $1,300 has not been recorded for 2008.
- On November 1, 2008, the company loaned $3,320 to one of its employees on a one year, 12 percent note. The principle plus interest is payable by the employees at the end of 12 months.
- The income before any of the adjustments or income taxes was $18,600. The company”s federal income tax rate is 30 percent. Compute adjusted income based on (a) through (g) to determine income tax expense.
Required:
1. Indicated whether each transaction relates t a deferred revenue, deferred expense, accrued revenue or accrued expense.
2. Give the adjusting entry required for each transaction at December 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What If Analysis
In Unit 1, you examined some of the ways organisations use financial and accounting data to make decisions. You examined similarities between the ways that financial data affects you personally and how organisations are affected by financial data. You are no doubt well aware that your own behaviour is often affected by your personal financial data. The amount of disposable income you have available, combined with the credit you can access, has an impact on your expenditures.
Similarly, organisations’ behaviour is guided by financial data. In the short term, such data will help determine operational expenditures; in the long term, historical data may help generate forecasts aimed at determining strategic plans. In both instances, data can assist managers in performing what if analysis (sometimes referred to as ‘sensitivity analysis’), whereby discussions can focus on likely behaviour given changing sets of data.
Suppose that the management of a manufacturing company has approached you as a consultant. You have been asked to analyse financial data and develop alternative budget scenarios to help the company make some pricing decisions with which it is struggling.
The details of this are as follows:
The Blake Manufacturing Corporation manufactures and sells folding umbrellas. The corporation’s condensed income statement for the year at 31 December 2011 follows:
| Sales (200,000 units) |
|
£1,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
600,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
400,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
£150,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
100,000
|
|
|
Net profit (before income taxes)
|
|
£150,000
|
Blake’s budget committee has estimated the following changes for 2012:
30% increase in number of units sold
20% increase in material cost per unit
15% increase in direct labor cost per unit
10% increase in variable indirect cost per unit
5% increase in indirect fixed costs
8% increase in selling expenses, arising solely from increased volume
6% increase in administrative expenses, reflecting anticipated higher wage and supply price levels
Any changes in administrative expenses caused solely by increased sales volume are considered immaterial.
Because inventory qualities remain fairly constant, the budget committee considered that for budget purposes any change in inventory valuation can be ignored. The composition of the cost of a unit of finished product during 2011 for materials, direct labor and manufacturing support, respectively, was in the ratio or 3:2:1. In 2011, £40,000 of manufacturing support was for fixed costs. No changes in production methods or credit policies were contemplated for 2012.
In this Shared Activity, your group will assume this consultancy role. You will review current and historical financial data. You will have the opportunity to discuss the organisation’s behaviour and reactions to your analyses of this data. Your group will make a recommendation based on a what if analysis.
To prepare for this Shared Activity:
Review this unit’s readings and the above scenario.
Blake has established a budgeted target profit of £200,000. There is a debate brewing within the management ranks of Blake regarding which strategies will put the company in best position to reach that objective. Blake CEO would like to adjust prices. The sales manager would like to focus on increasing the number of units sold while maintaining current prices. Your job is to provide an analysis aimed at helping to reach a decision.
To begin this analysis:
- Compute the unit sales price at which Blake must sell its product in the current year in order to earn a budgeted target profit of £200,000.
- Calculate a value in response to the following: Unhappy about the prospect of a price increase, Blake’s sales manager would like data regarding the number of units that must be sold at the former price to earn the £200,000 profit.
- Calculate a value in response to the following: Believing that an estimated increase in sales is overly optimistic, a company director is requesting data predicting annual profit if the selling price calculated above is adopted but the change in sales volume only amounts to a 10% increase.
To complete this Shared Activity:
- Post your opinion regarding the question of whether the company should pursue price adjustments versus a focus on increased sales. Given the data, would you be in favour of a price increase? What other factors would you like to consider in this analysis that have not been addressed yet, and how might they change your opinion?
- Respond to at least two colleagues’ postings who have taken a different side of this debate. Discuss your reasons for recommending that company management should take a particular approach. Within your group, attempt to come to a consensus regarding what you, as a consulting group, would recommend to the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Making business recommendations Submission details
| Candidate’s Name |
|
Student ID |
|
| Assessor’s Name |
|
| Assessment Site |
|
| Assessment Date/s |
|
The assessment task is due on the date specified by your assessor. Any variations to this arrangement must be approved in writing by your assessor.
Submit this document with any required evidence attached. See specifications below for details. Performance objective
- Use conversion and consolidation procedures to compile analysis in accordance with organisational requirements.
- Ensure that recommendations are logically derived and supported by evidence in report.
- Provide recommendations to propose constructive actions to enhance the effectiveness and efficacy of functions and services.
- Ensure recommendations are concise and facilitate direction and control of organisation’s operations.
- Identify and prioritise significant issues in statements including comparative financial performances for review and decision making.
- Ensure structure and format of reports are clear and conform to organisation and statutory requirements.
Assessment description In groups of 2–3 use the following Profit and Loss Statement, Operating Budget and actual results for Packett Packaging Pty Ltd to prepare a report for Packett Packaging Pty Ltd management team that provides analysis of their performance against their budget for 2009/2010 financial year.
Procedure In a PowerPoint document, together, prepare a report (2–3 pages) for the Packett Packaging Pty Ltd management team that provides analysis of their performance against their budget for 2009/2010 financial year.
Your report should include:
- trend analysis of performance versus budget over the 12 month period for:
- sales
- expenses
- Calculate average profit and cost per unit (cardboard box manufactured) for each month
- recommendations, for example; budget modifications, business priority areas for the next 3 months, opportunities to improve performance, etc.
Your group will be required to present your report to the class as part of your assessment. Your facilitator will advise you regarding the date that you will be required to present. Please note all group members must participate in presenting your report.
The following information has been provided to assist you in preparing your report. Please see following pages for completed reports:
- Profit and Loss Statement for 2009/2010 financial year
- Operating Budget for 2009/2010 financial year
- Actual results for 2009/2010 by month for:
- Income
- Expense
- Profit
- Number of units produced.
The following information has been provided to assist you in preparing your report. Please see following pages for completed reports:
- Profit and Loss Statement for 2009/2010 financial year
- Operating Budget for 2009/2010 financial year
- Actual results for 2009/2010 by month for:
- Income
- Expense
- Profit
- Number of units produced.
Specifications
- Please provide completed documents by the date nominated by your assessor.
- Ensure you keep a copy of all work submitted for your records.
and
- Remember – accuracy is essential when working with financial data.
- Reports provided to management teams need to be professional and the analysis completed needs to be relevant and accurate.
Class based learners:
- All group members must participate in the presentation of your report.
- One hard copy report must be submitted to your facilitator detailing the names of all group members.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please give best answers to all questions on the exam with use of Excel, Excel sheets need to be attached when you submit the exam. The exam is open material, but you may not consult in any way with others.
-
Please write the formula you use in excel and also attach the excel answers.
-
With interest rate 8%, calculate the PV of following cash flows.
|
Year
|
Payment
|
PV
|
|
1
|
1,000
|
|
|
2
|
1,000
|
|
|
3
|
1,000
|
|
|
4
|
1,000
|
|
|
5
|
1,000
|
|
-
You borrow $10,000 today with interest rate 7%, and you plan to pay the bank back with 8 equal annual payment. Please fill up the following table.
|
Year
|
Principal beg. year
|
Payment end year
|
Interest
|
Principal
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
|
|
|
|
|
8
|
|
|
|
|
-
a)Please calculate NPV and IRR for both projects, and fill the blank which project you decide to say yes.
|
Discount rate
|
12%
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
0
|
1000
|
800
|
|
1
|
500
|
420
|
|
2
|
500
|
420
|
|
3
|
500
|
420
|
|
4
|
500
|
420
|
|
5
|
500
|
420
|
|
6
|
200
|
300
|
|
7
|
350
|
300
|
|
8
|
360
|
300
|
|
9
|
200
|
450
|
|
10
|
200
|
260
|
|
11
|
200
|
260
|
|
|
|
|
|
NPV
|
|
|
|
IRR
|
|
|
Which project will you make a decision? Project A or Project B?
b)Please calculate the following cash flow and show us your decision about which project should be chosen and why.
|
Date
|
Cash flow A
|
Cash Flow B
|
|
1 Jan 02
|
10,000
|
13000
|
|
1 Jul 02
|
3,000
|
3500
|
|
1 Jul 03
|
3,000
|
4000
|
|
1 Jul 04
|
3,000
|
3500
|
|
1 Jul 05
|
3,000
|
4000
|
|
1 Jul 06
|
3,000
|
4000
|
-
Statistics and Regression Analysis
-
Please calculate average, variance and standard deviation for annual return column.
|
Date
|
Price
|
Dividend
|
Annual return
|
|
31 Dec 98
|
34.13
|
0.92
|
|
|
31 Dec 99
|
30.81
|
0.96
|
8.89%
|
|
29 Dec 00
|
26.25
|
0.99
|
12.59%
|
|
31 Dec 01
|
30.10
|
1.01
|
18.51%
|
|
31 Dec 02
|
34.27
|
1.01
|
17.21%
|
|
31 Dec 03
|
38.08
|
1.01
|
13.06%
|
|
31 Dec 04
|
44.66
|
1.01
|
19.93%
|
|
30 Dec 05
|
43.22
|
1.06
|
0.85%
|
|
29 Dec 06
|
50.06
|
1.14
|
18.46%
|
|
31 Dec 07
|
52.43
|
1.20
|
7.14%
|
|
31 Dec 08
|
42.73
|
1.30
|
16.02%
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Average return, E(rK)
|
|
|
|
|
Variance of return,s2K
|
|
|
|
|
Standard deviation of return,sK
|
|
|
|
-
Please show your regress analysis table and fill form for slope, intercept and R square.
|
|
Return for the month
|
|
Date
|
S&P 500
|
IBM
|
|
3 Jan 07
|
|
|
|
1 Feb 07
|
2.18%
|
6.98%
|
|
1 Mar 07
|
1.00%
|
2.42%
|
|
2 Apr 07
|
4.33%
|
8.44%
|
|
1 May 07
|
3.25%
|
4.70%
|
|
1 Jun 07
|
1.78%
|
1.27%
|
|
2 Jul 07
|
3.20%
|
5.14%
|
|
1 Aug 07
|
1.29%
|
5.83%
|
|
4 Sep 07
|
3.58%
|
1.95%
|
|
1 Oct 07
|
1.48%
|
1.42%
|
|
1 Nov 07
|
4.40%
|
9.10%
|
|
3 Dec 07
|
0.86%
|
2.78%
|
|
2 Jan 08
|
6.12%
|
0.92%
|
|
1 Feb 08
|
3.48%
|
6.71%
|
|
3 Mar 08
|
0.60%
|
1.12%
|
|
1 Apr 08
|
4.75%
|
4.83%
|
|
1 May 08
|
1.07%
|
7.66%
|
|
2 Jun 08
|
8.60%
|
8.42%
|
|
1 Jul 08
|
0.99%
|
7.97%
|
|
1 Aug 08
|
1.22%
|
4.51%
|
|
2 Sep 08
|
9.21%
|
3.92%
|
|
1 Oct 08
|
16.83%
|
20.51%
|
|
3 Nov 08
|
7.48%
|
11.74%
|
|
1 Dec 08
|
0.78%
|
3.13%
|
|
2 Jan 09
|
8.57%
|
8.90%
|
|
Slope
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Intercept
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
R squared
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-
Bond
-
Please calculate YTM.
|
Date
|
Bond cash flow
|
|
15 Dec 09
|
1,000.00
|
|
15 Dec 10
|
80.00
|
|
15 Dec 11
|
80.00
|
|
15 Dec 12
|
80.00
|
|
15 Dec 13
|
80.00
|
|
15 Dec 14
|
80.00
|
|
15 Dec 15
|
80.00
|
|
15 Dec 16
|
1,080.00
|
|
|
|
YTM of bond
|
|
-
Compute the price for following bond with YTM of 5%.
|
Date
|
Payment
|
|
1
|
80
|
|
2
|
80
|
|
3
|
1,080
|
|
Bond price
|
|
-
Stocks Valuation
ABC company’s current FCF is $2,000,000, it will grown at 20% for the first 4 years and back to a steady growth rate 7% after 4 years. The WACC is 10%, outstanding shares is 4,000,000. Please use FCF model to estimate the value of their stock. Show you steps and calculations in Excel. Assume all FCFs happen at the end period.
|
Current FCF
|
2,000,000
|
|
Anticipated growth rate, years 1 4
|
20%
|
|
WACC
|
10%
|
|
Long term growth rate, after year 4
|
7%
|
|
Number of shares outstanding
|
4,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Terry Wade, the new controller of Hellickson Company, has reviewed the expected useful lives and salvage values of selected depreciable assets at the beginning of 2014. His findings are as follows.
|
|
Date |
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation |
|
Useful life in Years |
|
Salvage Value |
| Type of Asset |
|
Acquired |
|
Cost |
|
1/1/14 |
|
Old |
|
Proposed |
|
Old |
|
Proposed |
| Building |
|
1/1/08 |
|
$800,000 |
|
$114,000 |
|
40 |
|
50 |
|
$40,000 |
|
$26,000 |
| Warehouse |
|
1/1/09 |
|
100,000 |
|
19,000 |
|
25 |
|
20 |
|
5,000 |
|
6,000 |
All assets are depreciated by the straight line method. Hellickson Company uses a calendar year in preparing annual financial statements. After discussion, management has agreed to accept Terry’s proposed changes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hercules had a great start and turned in a pretty decent performance during the MikesBikes single player simulation. I was able to increase the shareholder value of my company from $10.85/share to $46.20/share with a profit of $30,000,000 from the year 2012 to the year 2017. Results of Hercules BIKE Company using MikesBikes Single player Simulation The strategies to achieve the results that would help me in the multi player simulation were made during this phase.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Generate financial statements using my MYOB GENERAL JOURNAL WHICH THE FILE (MARGARITA MYOB)
> Analyse financial statements
> Prepare a 1000 words report to the owner of the business. The report must include: Title Page, Introduction, Body, Table of contents, Conclusion, Reference list and appendices.
> ****THE HORIZONTAL ANALYSIS, VERTICAL ANALYSIS AND RATIO ANALYSIS SHOULD BE IN THE APPENDICES, NOT THE BODY OF THE REPORT. ****
> The report should also have recommendations where YOU should identify the strengths and weaknesses of the company and discuss how the company can improve. I have also sent a VERY IMPORTANT download, which is the file *Macleay MYOB Assignment T2 2014* THE YELLOW HIGHLIGHTED WORDS AND PARAGRAPHS ARE IMPORTANT AND THE ONES YOU NEED TO COMPLETE. I have done the MYOB GENERAL JOURNAL, i just need a balance sheet, financial statements and a report.
> Though would like the work to be handed in earlier as I would like to do a run through it and add anything if needed to do so. Sorry about the typing, just want to make sure that its easy to understand. Please also make sure that the grammer, paragraphs, headings, sub headings are correct.
> The report also needs to be in Ariel font 12. 1.15 line space and page numbers included. Thank you so much! 🙂
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 2 1: Recording Transactions, Posting to T Accounts, Preparing Financial Statements, and Commenting on What Financial Statements Tell Potential Investors
Audrey Jhingree opened an ice cream parlor in a university town. The parlor specializes in ice cream combinations named after popular professors in the business department of the university. You have been hired as a manger. Your duties include maintaining the store’s financial records. The following transactions occurred in April 2012, the first month of operations:
- Received cash of $40,000 total ($10,000 each) from four investors. Each investor received 100 shares of common stock. This took place on April 01.
- Paid three months’ rent for the store on April 01 at $2,000 per month (recorded as prepaid expenses).
- Purchased ice cream and cones for $6,000 on account payable, due in 60 days. This took place on April 02.
- Purchased supplies for $1,000 cash on April 02.
- Received a two year $11,000 loan at the bank. The note payable is dated April 02.
- Used the money from (e) to purchase a computer for $3,000 (for record keeping and inventory tracking) and to purchase used $8,000 of furniture and fixtures for the store.
- Placed a grand opening advertisement in the local paper for $600 cash.
- Made sales in the first half of the month totaling $5,000: $4,250 was in cash and the rest was on accounts receivable. The cost of the ice cream sold was $2,000.
- Made a $600 payment on accounts payable on April 18.
- Incurred and paid employee wages of $2000 for the month of April.
- Collected accounts receivable of $700 from customers.
- Made a repair to one of the refrigerators for $300.
- Made sales in the last half of the month for $6,000, all for cash. The cost of the ice cream sold was $2,400.
Using the information provided above, complete the following for Audrey Jhingree’s ice cream parlor. To complete this problem, you may wish to use the Excel template provided in the resources.
- Set up appropriate T accounts for cash, accounts receivable, supplies, inventory, prepaid expenses, equipment, furniture and fixtures, accounts payable, notes payable, contributed capital, sales revenue, cost of goods sold (expense), advertising expense, wage expense, and repair expense. All accounts begin with zero balances.
- Record in the T accounts the effects of each transaction for Audrey’s shop in April, referencing each transaction in the accounts with the transaction letter. Show the ending balances in the T accounts. Note that transactions (h) and (m) require two types of entries, one for sales and one for cost of goods sold. Prepare trial balanaces for 4/30/12.
- Prepare financial statements at the end of the month ended April 30, 2012. Hint: Do the income statement first, followed by the statement of stockholders’ equity, and then the balance sheet. Properly label each statement: Does it cover a period of time or just a point in time?
- Write a short memo to Audrey offering your opinion on the results of operations during the first month of business.
- After three years in business, you are being evaluated for a promotion. One measure is how efficiently you have managed the assets of the business. Using the data in the following table, compute the total asset turnover ratio for 2014 and 2013 and evaluate the results. Also compute the return on invested capital (net Income divided by total stockholders’ equity). Do you think you should be promoted? Why or why not?
Problem 2 1: Audrey’s Ice Cream Parlor
| Account |
2014 |
2013 |
2012 |
| Total assets |
$93,000 |
$78,000 |
$61,000 |
| Total liabilities |
$23,000 |
$23,000 |
$16,500 |
| Total contributed capital plus retained earnings |
$70,000 |
$55,000 |
$44,500 |
| Total sales |
$100,000 |
$82,500 |
$57,250 |
| Net income |
$15,000 |
$10,500 |
$4,500 |
Problem 2 2: Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows
For the transactions listed in Problem 2 1, prepare a statement of cash flows for the month of April 2012. Use textbooks or Internet sources for information on the format and contents of a statement of cash flows. To complete this problem, you may wish to use the Excel template provided in the resources.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 3 1: How are assets, liabilities, and equity shown on the balance sheet?
Jupiter Products is preparing a balance sheet for the year ended June 30, for 2012. The following amounts were correct at June 30, 2012:
- Cash, $68,000.
- Accounts receivable, $81,000.
- Merchandise inventory, $134,000.
- Prepaid insurance, $1,500.
- Investment in stock of Z Corporation (classified as a long term investment), $40,000.
- Store equipment, $87,000.
- Used store equipment held for disposal, $8,000, accumulated depreciation, store equipment, $29,000.
- Accounts payable, $62,500.
- Long term note payable, $42,000.
- Income taxes payable, $10,000.
- Retained earnings, $126,000.
- Common stock, 100,000 shares outstanding, par value $1.00 per share (originally sold and issued at $1.50 per share).
Based on the data provided above, prepare a June 30, 2012, balance sheet. To complete this problem, you may wish to use the Excel template provided in the resources. Use the following major captions, and list the individual items under these captions:
- Assets: Current Assets, Long Term Investments, Fixed Assets, and Other Assets.
- Liabilities: Current Liabilities and Long Term Liabilities.
- Stockholders’ Equity: Contributed Capital and Retained Earnings.
Then, answer the following:
- What is the net book value of the store equipment? Explain what this value means.
Problem 3 2: Reading Published Financial Statements
In Units 1 and 2, you located the 2011 10 K for Lowe’s Companies; you will refer to this information for this assessment. Use the Lowe’s financial statements and your prior knowledge of accounting, supplemented by textbooks or other references of your choosing, to answer the following questions. For each answer, provide the page number references to the Lowe’s 2011 10 K, if applicable.
- How much cash and cash equivalents does the company report at the end of 2011?
- What was the change in accounts receivable and how did it affect net cash provided by operating activities for the year 2011?
- Compute the company’s gross profit percentage for the most recent two years of 2011 and 2012. Has it risen or fallen? Explain the meaning of the change.
- Where does the company disclose its revenue recognition policy? When does the company record revenues for the “sale” of gift cards?
Problem 3 3: Comprehensive Problem 1
In this problem, you will demonstrate your understanding of the various steps of the accounting cycle starting with the recording of transactions through the preparation and analysis of the financial statements. This is the first of two comprehensive problems in this course through which you will demonstrate your mastery of assessment topics. To complete this problem, you may wish to use the Excel template provided in the resources.
Patricia Allison began an engineering consulting business on January 1, 2011, organized as a corporation (PA Engineering, Inc.) under the laws of Delaware. The annual reporting period ends December 31. The trial balance on January 1, 2012, is provided in the following table:
Problem 3 3: PA Engineering Trial Balance, January 1, 2012
| Account Titles |
Debit |
Credit |
| Cash |
$10,000 |
|
| Accounts Receivable |
|
|
| Office Supplies |
$20,000 |
|
| Land |
|
|
| Computers |
$80,000 |
|
| Accumulated depreciation (on computers) |
|
|
| Miscellaneous other assets |
$5,000 |
|
| Accounts payable |
|
|
| Salaries and Wages payable |
|
|
| Interest payable |
|
|
| Income taxes payable |
|
|
| Long term notes payable |
|
|
| Contributed capital (100,000 shares) |
|
$115,000 |
| Retained earnings |
|
|
| Service revenue |
|
|
| Depreciation expense |
|
|
| Supplies expense |
|
|
| Wages expense |
|
|
| Interest expense |
|
|
| Income tax expense |
|
|
| Remaining expenses (not detailed to simplify) |
|
|
| Totals |
$115,000 |
$115,000 |
Transactions during 2012 are as follows:
- Borrowed $20,000 cash on a five year, 10 percent note payable, dated July 1, 2012.
- Purchased land for a future building site; paid cash, $10,000.
- Earned $200,000 in revenues for 2012, including $60,000 on credit and the rest in cash.
- Sold 4,000 additional shares of capital stock for cash at $1.15 market value per share on January 3, 2012.
- Incurred $120,000 in remaining expenses for 2012, including $20,000 on credit and the rest paid in cash.
- Collected accounts receivable, $40,000.
- Purchased other assets for $8,000 cash.
- Paid accounts payable, $18,000.
- Purchased office supplies on account for future use, $25,000.
- Signed a three year, $33,000 service contract to start February 1, 2013.
- Declared and paid cash dividends, $10,000.
Data for adjusting entries:
- Supplies counted on December 31, 2012, $18,000.
- Depreciation for the year on the equipment, $21,000.
- Interest accrued on notes payable (to be computed).
- Wages earned by employees since the December 24 payroll but not yet paid, $15,000.
- Income tax expense, $10,000, payable in 2013.
Complete the following for this problem:
- Set up T accounts for the accounts on the trial balance and enter beginning balances.
- Prepare journal entries for transactions (a) through (k) and post them to the T accounts.
- Journalize and post the adjusting entries (l) through (p).
- Prepare an income statement (including earnings per share), statement of stockholders’ equity , balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.
- Journalize.
- Compute the following ratios for 2012 and explain what the results suggest about the company.
- Current ratio. (Industry average is 2.2 to 1.0.)
- Total asset turnover. (Industry average is 3 times a year.)
- Net profit margin. (Industry average is 5.00%.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following data have been gathered for a capital investment decision.
|
Cash inflows:
Year 1
|
$50,000
|
|
Year 2
|
60,000
|
|
Year 3
|
40,000
|
|
Year 4
|
50,000
|
|
Year 5
|
40,000
|
The minimum rate of return for this investment is 14 percent. The present value factors for a 14 percent discount rate are as follows:
|
End of Period
|
Present Value of $1
|
Present Value of an Annuity of $1
|
|
1
|
.877
|
.877
|
|
2
|
.769
|
1.646
|
|
3
|
.675
|
2.321
|
|
4
|
.592
|
2.913
|
|
5
|
.519
|
3.432
|
|
6
|
.456
|
3.888
|
a. Compute the present value of each of the cash inflows of the investment.
b. What would have been the present value of the cash flows if they were received in equal installments over the five year period at the same discount rate? (Assume the total cash inflows remain same.)
c. If the answers to parts (a) and (b) differ, explain the reason(s) why.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transfer pricing, general guideline, goal congruence. (CMA, adapted). Quest Motors, Inc., operates as a decentralized multidivision company. The Tivo Division of Quest Motors purchases most of its airbags from the Airbag Division. The Airbag Division’s incremental cost for manufacturing the airbags is $90 per unit. The Airbag Division is currently working at 80% of capacity. The current market price of the airbags is $125 per unit1. Using the general guideline presented in the chapter, what is the minimum price at which the Airbag Division would sell airbags to the Tivo Division?2. Suppose that Quest Motors requires that whenever divisions with unused capacity sell products internally, they must do so at the incremental cost. Evaluate this transfer pricing policy using the criteria of goal congruence, evaluating division performance, motivating management effort, and preserving division autonomy.3. If the two divisions were to negotiate a transfer price, what is the range of possible transfer prices? Evaluate this negotiated transfer pricing policy using the criteria of goal congruence, evaluating division performance, motivating management effort, and preserving division autonomy.4.Do you prefer the transfer pricing policy in requirement 2 or requirement 3? Explain your answer briefly.
View less »
Feb 17 2013 04:52 AM
Want an Answer?
Get notified when our experts answer it
Related Questions in Internal Control
Q:
Transfer pricing, goal congruence. The Orsilo Corporation makesFebruary 17, 2013
Johnson’s offer at (a) $38 per CD player or (b) $45 per CD player? 3. What is the minimum transfer price per CD player at which the Compact Disc Division would be willing to transfer…
Q:
Transfer pricing, goal congruence. The Bosh Corporation makes anFebruary 17, 2013
of the head mechanism) is $30 per unit, and any number of CD players can be sold for $45 each in the external market. Required 1. What are the incremental costs minus revenues from sale…
Q:
Transfer pricing methods, goal congruence. British Columbia LumbFebruary 17, 2013
Lumber as a whole? Explain. 3. Assume that internal transfers are made at market prices. Will each division maximize its division operating income contribution by adopting the action
Q:
Transfer pricing, goal congruence, ethics. Whengon ManufacturingFebruary 17, 2013
. If Lasker is correct calculate the benefit to Department A from showing a variable cost of $14 per unit than $12 per unit 2. What cost based transfer price mechanism would you propose…
Q:
Multinational transfer pricing, goal congruence (continuation ofFebruary 16, 2013
.S. market, net of all marketing and distribution costs. Required 1. From the viewpoint of the Mornay Company as a whole, would after tax operating income be maximized if it sold the…
more questions »
Courses Questions
Ask a New Question
Copy and paste your question here…
Cancel
Attach more files
Similar question? edit & resubmit »
Transtutors Study Membership
Unlimited Access to 600,000+ textbook solutions and Classroom Assignments24/7 Study Help from expertsPlans start from $10/mo
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BLC Inc. is a medium sized manufacturing company based in the UK. The company operates mainly in the London area and is based in Peterborough. At a recent board meeting, the company decided to expand its activities, and to lease additional temporary premises in London in order to cope with additional demand.
In this unit, you will analyse data related to anticipated cash flows resulting from BLC’s expansion to either of two potential new premises. Your group will collaborate to make a recommendation.
To prepare for this Shared Activity:
§ Review the financial data below. The company has narrowed the choice to the following two alternatives, with the following cash flow information being available.
§ Use the following data in your analysis:
|
Year
|
Property 1 $(000s)
|
Property 2 $(000s)
|
|
0
|
(2,500)
|
(2,750)
|
|
1
|
1,000
|
900
|
|
2
|
500
|
700
|
|
3
|
600
|
800
|
|
4
|
1,000
|
600
|
|
5
|
900
|
600
|
Note 1: The company’s current cost of capital is 10%.
Note 2: Ignore taxation.
To complete this Shared Activity:
§ Post an explanation of the tools that you believe would help you to reach a decision. If you were a decision maker in this organisation, which calculations and measures would you want at your disposal before making your choice? Are there other, non financial factors that may play a role in your decision? Additionally, include your recommendation to the company which option it should take. Support your decision with an interpretation of any calculations you performed, as well as an explanation of any other factors you considered.
§ Respond to at least two colleagues’ postings who have a different recommendation, or who utilised different financial or non financial factors in reaching a decision. Discuss these differences and argue for or against specific ideas that have been posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wempe Co. sold $3,000,000, 8%, 10 year bonds on January 1, 2014. The bonds were dated January 1, 2014, and pay interest on January 1. The company uses straight line amortization on bond premiums and discounts. Financial statements are prepared annually.
Prepare the journal entries to record the issuance of the bonds assuming they sold at: (1) 103 and (2) 98.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Slocum Corporation manufactures in separate processes refrigerators and freezers for homes. In each process, materials are entered at the beginning and conversion costs are incurred uniformly. Production and cost data for the first process in making two products in two different manufacturing plants are as follows.
?

Instructions
(a) For each plant:
(1) Compute the physical units of production.
(2) Compute equivalent units of production for materials and for conversion costs.
(3) Determine the unit costs of production.
(4) Show the assignment of costs to units transferred out and in process.
(b) Prepare the production cost report for Plant A for June2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For this assessment, complete the Problems 4 1 and 4 2. You may use Word or Excel to complete the assessments throughout this course, but you will find Excel to be most helpful for creating spreadsheets. Tutorials for using Excel are provided in the Supplemental Resources in the left navigation menu. If you use Excel, submit the assessment in one Excel document, using separate tabs for each spreadsheet.
Problem 4 1: Determining and Evaluating the Effects on the Balance Sheet, the Income Statement and the Cash Flow Statement of Four Different Cost Flow Assumptions for Inventory
At the end of January 2012, the records of Shelton and Blair showed the following for a particular item that sold at $20 per unit:
Problem 4 1: Records of Sheldon and Blair
| Transactions |
Units |
Total Amount |
| Inventory, January 1, 2011 |
500 @ $6.00 |
$3,000 |
| Purchase, January 12 |
600 @ $7.00 |
$4,200 |
| Purchase, January 26 |
200 @ $7.10 |
$1,420 |
| Sale |
(400 units sold for $20 each) |
|
| Sale |
(300 units sold for $20 each) |
|
Based on the information provided in the table above, complete the following. To complete this problem, you may wish to use the Excel template provided in the resources.
- Assuming the use of a periodic inventory system, prepare a summarized income statement through gross profit for the month of January under each method of inventory:
- Average cost.
- FIFO.
- LIFO.
- Specific identification. For specific identification, assume that the first sale was selected from the beginning inventory and the second sale was selected from the January 12 purchase. Round the average cost per unit to the nearest cent. Show the inventory computations in detail.
- Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would result in the higher pretax income? Which would result in the higher EPS?
- Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would result in the lower income tax expense? Explain, assuming a 35 percent average tax rate.
- Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would produce the more favorable cash flow? Explain.
Problem 4 2: Reading Publically Available Financial Statements
Refer to the Lowe’s 2011 10 K. You should have located these statements for previous assessment problems. Use these statements and your prior knowledge of accounting, supplemented by textbooks or other references of your choosing, to answer the following questions:
- The company must use the lower of cost or market method to account for its inventory. At the end of the fiscal year 2012, do you expect the company to write its inventory down to replacement cost or net realizable value? Explain your answer. You may need to consult an intermediate accounting textbook or an Internet source.
- What method does the company use to determine the cost of inventory for fiscal year 2012?
- If the company overstated ending inventory by $10 million for the fiscal year ended 2012, what would be the corrected value for income before income taxes for that year?
- Compute the inventory turnover ratio for the fiscal year 2012. Also compute it for the fiscal year 2011. What conclusions can you make?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holiday Entertainment Corporation (HEC), a subsidiary of New Age Industries, manufactures go carts
and other recreational vehicles. Family recreational centers that feature not only go cart tracks but miniature
golf, batting cages, and arcade games as well have increased in popularity. As a result, HEC has
been receiving some pressure from New Age’s management to diversify into some of these other recreational
areas. Recreational Leasing, Inc. (RLI), one of the largest firms that leases arcade games to family
recreational centers, is looking for a friendly buyer. New Age’s top management believes that RLI’s
assets could be acquired for an investment of $3.2 million and has strongly urged Bill Grieco, division
manager of HEC, to consider acquiring RLI.
Grieco has reviewed RLI’s financial statements with his controller, Marie Donnelly, and they
believe the acquisition may not be in the best interest of HEC. “If we decide not to do this, the New
Age people are not going to be happy,” said Grieco. “If we could convince them to base our bonuses
on something other than return on investment, maybe this acquisition would look more attractive. How
would we do if the bonuses were based on residual income, using the company’s 15 percent cost of
capital?”
New Age Industries traditionally has evaluated all of its divisions on the basis of return on investment.
The desired rate of return for each division is 20 percent. The management team of any division
reporting an annual increase in the ROI is automatically eligible for a bonus. The management of divisions
reporting a decline in the ROI must provide convincing explanations for the decline in order to be
eligible for a bonus. Moreover, this bonus is limited to 50 percent of the bonus paid to divisions reporting
an increase in ROI.
In the following table are condensed financial statements for both HEC and RLI for the most recent year.
RLI HEC
Sales revenue ………………………………………………………………………………….. — $9,500,000
Leasing revenue ………………………………………………………………………………. $3,100,000 —
Variable expenses …………………………………………………………………………….. (1,300,000) (6,000,000)
Fixed expenses ………………………………………………………………………………… (1,200,000) (1,500,000)
Operating income …………………………………………………………………………. $ 600,000 $2,000,000
Current assets …………………………………………………………………………………. $1,900,000 $2,300,000
Long lived assets ……………………………………………………………………………… 1,100,000 5,700,000
Total assets …………………………………………………………………………………. $3,000,000 $8,000,000
Current liabilities ………………………………………………………………………………. $ 850,000 $1,400,000
Long term liabilities ………………………………………………………………………….. 1,200,000 3,800,000
Stockholders’ equity ………………………………………………………………………….. 950,000 2,800,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity ……………………………………………… $3,000,000 $8,000,000
Required:
1.If New Age Industries continues to use ROI as the sole measure of divisional performance, explain
why Holiday Entertainment Corporation would be reluctant to acquire Recreational Leasing, Inc.
2.If New Age Industries could be persuaded to use residual income to measure the performance of
HEC, explain why HEC would be more willing to acquire RLI.
3.Discuss how the behavior of division managers is likely to be affected by the use of the following
performance measures: (a) return on investment and (b) residual income.
(CMA, adapted)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Discuss the major differences in the calculation of income between the historical cost model and the current cost model of accounting. Explain the justifications for using each of the aforementioned cost models. Provide your analysis of which method provides for more accurate calculation of income. Provide your source or reference in APA Format and include reference page
- International Financial Reporting Standards
Assume for now that you are against the adoption of International Financial Repoting Standards. Please write an essay to support your assumption.
Your paper should be well written, and in conformity with APA style including in text citation and reference page/. Please cite two outside sources in addition to your textbook. You may also want to explore the following websites:
- www.ifrs.org
- www.fasb.org
- www.aicpa.org
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Content Assessment:The nature, construction and verification theories
Key generic skills:Research, critical thinking and written communication.
Subject Learning Outcome: be able to describe, comprehend and apply the process of theory development
Question 1 short answers to the maximum of 500 words for allparts of (a) and (b)
(a) Define and briefly explain the terms:
i. Theory
ii. Normative theory
iii. Positive theory
(b) How will you evaluate a particular theory before accepting it?
Rationale
This assessment has been designed to assess your ability to:
- define and explainthat there aremany theories of accounting.
- appraisethat theories should be critically evaluated in order to understand theunderlying logic, assumptions and evidence produced before accepting them.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case 2
You have been hired as a consultant for XYZ Research Co. XYZ Research Co. incorporated in 2010. XYZ ‘s business centers on developing new technology for interplanetary exploration. The company has many patents and has historically expensed all of the costs associated with obtaining their patents. The owners of XYZ Labs are unsure whether or not if any or all of its patent costs can be capitalized. They also are unsure if any impairment testing should be done periodically on their patents. You have been asked by the owners to look into these issues and provide the appropriate accounting treatment for patents.
| Week 5 |
Organize and interpret the findings of your research in one to two pages (12 point font, double spaced).
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
RESEARCH ESSAY– SEMESTER 2, 2014
INFORMATION
Your research essay must be submitted onWednesday, 24 September 2014. Penalties will apply for late submission.
The following matters should be given particular attention:
1. Writing assignments must not exceed the word counts indicated. Double space your pages, use a 12 pt Times New Roman font, use2 cm margins on all four sides of your page.
2. Your essay must include an abstract/synopsis, introduction, essay body that clearly addresses the problem areas, a conclusion and a properly referenced bibliography. (refer to the research essay marking rubric for further guidance)
3. Evidence of extensive research beyond the prescribed text is required. Ensure these are referenced appropriately in your bibliography. Refer to the statement regarding plagiarism.
4. NO extensions will be granted unless supported by appropriate documentation prior to the due date.
5. This assignment must be handed in for successful completion of the course and will count 20marks towards the final mark.
6. The word count for the research essay is 3000 words. Please refer to the Research Essay Marking Rubric for the specific allocation of word count for each specific section of your research essay (refer point 2 above).
7. Points (fractional marks) have also been allocated to each specific section of your research essay.
8. The research essay is to be conducted in groups of two. Students do not have the option to extend or reduce the size of the group.If the class has an odd number of students then one student must undertake the assignment on their own.
9. Groups must select a company from the Australian Securities Exchange (ASX) website and download the 2014 annual report. Groups can not do the same company and preferably from different ASXsectors and should discuss their selection prior to commencing their research essay. No banks allowed.
RESEARCH ESSAY TOPIC
“It is surprising and distressing to find so little discussion of the total asset figure in the accounting literature. Since total assets is one of the central concepts of accounting, one would expect to find a good deal of explanation and interpretation.”
Sterling, R. R., 1979, Towards a Science of Accounting, Scholars Book Co, Houston, p. 161.
- With reference to the above statementdescribewhat you understand by the term asset and how they are measured.
- Discussassets and the problem of additivity in the context of the present IASB framework.
- Select a company from the Australian Securities Exchange website and download the 2014annual report. Evaluate the categorisation and treatment of assets in the annual report.
- Comment on the relationship between asset measurementand decision useful information with examples from your selected annual report.
TUTOR ENGAGEMENT
1. Week 5 – Tutor to advise students just before the test that the research essay is available and over the coming week they should think about forming groups of 2.
2. Week 6–EMPHASISE TO STUDENTS TO BEGIN THE WORK EARLY. All students to form groups of two and advise tutor. A discussion of the ASX sectors to take place. Students should discuss the selection of a sector and company that interests them. Tutor to record the groups. No groups are to have the same company. Banks are not allowed as they have particular problems.Over the week groups should select a company.
3. Week 7 – Groups are to advise the tutor of the company selected. Tutor to record the company selected by each group ensuring no group has the same company.
4. Week 8– Tutor should stress the importance to groups of beginning the work early and following the marking rubric.
5. Tutor to discuss problems arising and the differences between sectors and companies.
ESSAY DUE:Wednesday, 24 September 2014
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assessment Instructions
For this assessment, complete the Problems 5 1, 5 2, and 5 3. You may use Word or Excel to complete the assessments throughout this course, but you will find Excel to be most helpful for creating spreadsheets. Tutorials for using Excel are provided in the Supplemental Resources in the left navigation menu. If you use Excel, submit the assessment in one Excel document, using separate tabs for each spreadsheet.
Problem 5 1: Working Capital, Current Ratio, Quick Assets, Acid Test Ratio
The Sanchez Corporation is preparing its 2012 balance sheet. The company records show the following selected amounts at the end of the accounting period, December 31, 2012:
Problem 5 1: Sanchez Corporation Selected Amounts
| Account |
Dollar Amount |
| Total assets |
$600,000 |
| Total noncurrent assets |
$350,000 |
| Liabilities |
Dollar Amount |
| Notes payable (8%, due in 6 years) |
$40,000 |
| Accounts payable |
$60,000 |
| Income taxes currently payable |
$15,000 |
| Liability for withholding taxes |
$4,000 |
| Rent revenue collected in advance by up to four months |
$8,000 |
| Bonds payable (due in 15 years). |
$100,000 |
| Wages payable |
$6,000 |
| Property taxes payable |
$3,000 |
| Note payable (10%, due in 6 months) |
$22,000 |
| Interest payable |
$1,200 |
| Common stock |
$200,000 |
Using the information provided in the table, complete the following:
- Compute (a) working capital and (b) the quick ratio (quick assets are $120,000).
Then, answer the following questions?
- Why is working capital important to management?
- How do financial analysts use the quick ratio?
- Would your computations be different if the company reported $250,000 worth of contingent liabilities in the notes to the statements? Explain. Include in your explanation a definition of contingent liabilities and an example of a contingent liability.
Problem 5 2: Reading Publically Available Financial Statements
Refer to the Lowe’s 2011 10 K. You should have located these statements for previous assessment problems. Use these statements and your prior knowledge of accounting, supplemented by textbooks or other references of your choosing, including the NOTES to the financial statements found in the Lowe’s 2011 10 K, to answer the following questions, which all refer to the fiscal year end 2012. Indicate the source of each answer, including the page number from the Lowe’s 2011 10 K.
- How many shares of common stock are authorized at the end of the current year? How many shares are issued and outstanding at the end of the current year?
- Is there more than one class of common stock? If so, what is the name of each class of common stock.
- Is there any preferred stock? If so, what is the dividend rate on the preferred stock, as a percentage of the par value of the preferred stock?
- Did the company pay dividends on the common stock during the most recent reporting year? If so, what was the total amount of dividends paid and how much were they per share?
- Does the company have any treasury stock? If so how much?
- Has the company issued a stock dividend or a stock split over the past three reporting years? If so, what percentage and in what year or years?
- Does the company’s common stock have par value? If it does, what is the par value?
- Did the common buy back a significant amount of its shares in the current year? You can see this in the Statement of Stockholders’ Equity as a reduction in shares.
Problem 5 3: Comprehensive Problem 2
Throughout the course, you have covered the various forms of financial ratio analysis. In this problem, you will bring together these various financial analysis measures and interpret their meaning in order to draw conclusions about various companies.
Note that each situation provided is to be considered independently of the others.
Situation A: The following tables represent selected data from recent financial statements of Lincoln and Samuelson, Inc. (dollars in thousands of dollars):
Problem 5 3, Table 1: Lincoln and Samuelson, Inc. Selected Items from Balance Sheets
| Assets (in thousands) |
December 31, 2012 |
December 31, 2011 |
| Current assets: Cash and cash equivalents |
$4,000 |
$3,400 |
| Accounts receivable (net of allowances of $32 and $28, respectively) |
$6,500 |
$5,700 |
Selected Income Statement Data for the Year Ended December 31
Problem 5 3, Table 2: Lincoln and Samuelson, Inc. Selected Income Statement Data
| Account |
2012 |
2011 |
2010 |
| Net sales (in millions) |
$6,020 |
$5,425 |
$5,000 |
| Net income (in millions) |
$300 |
$285 |
$220 |
The company also reported bad debt expense of $62,000 in 2012; $55,000 in 2011; and $49,500 in 2010.
Using the data provided, complete the following for Lincoln and Samuelson, Inc.:
- Compute the dollar amount of uncollectible accounts receivable that the company wrote off as uncollectible in 2012 . Show all of your work.
- Assuming all sales were on credit, what amount of cash did the company collect on accounts receivable in 2012? Show all of your work.
- Compute the company’s net profit margin for the three years presented. What does the trend suggest to you about the company?
Situation B: The Israel Manners Entertainment Group uses the allowance approach to estimate bad debt expense, as is required of all companies with significant sales on accounts receivable. At the end of 2012, the Manners Group reported a balance in accounts receivable of $4,350,000 and estimated that $44,000 of its accounts receivable would likely be uncollectible. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a $1,500 debit balance at year end, prior to the adjustment needed to raise it to the $44,000 desired amount. Use this information to answer the following questions:
- How is it possible that the allowance for doubtful accounts has developed a debit balance instead of a credit balance?
- What amount of bad debt expense should be recorded for 2012?
- What amount will be reported on the 2012 balance sheet as the net realizable amount of accounts receivable?
Situation C: At the end of 2012, the unadjusted trial balance of Donovan, Inc. included $6,000,000 in accounts receivable, a credit balance of $50,000 in the allowance for doubtful accounts, and sales revenue (all on credit) of $200,000,000. Based on knowledge that the current economy is in distress, Donovan increased its bad debt rate estimate to 0.4 percent on credit sales. Use this information to answer the following:
- What amount of bad debt expense should be recorded for 2012?
- What amount will be reported on the 2012 balance sheet for the net realizable amount of accounts receivable, after being reduced by the balance in the allowance for uncollectible accounts?
Situation D: BrightStar Company reported the following inventory records for June, 2012:
Problem 5 3, Table 3: BrightStar Company Inventory Records
| Date |
Activity |
# of Units |
Cost/Unit |
| June 1 |
Beginning balance |
200 |
$40 |
| June 5 |
Purchase |
600 |
$42 |
| June 8 |
Sale @ $100 per unit |
500 |
|
| June 17 |
Purchase |
400 |
$45 |
| June 23 |
Sale @ $100 per unit |
500 |
|
Selling, administrative, and depreciation expenses for the month were $20,000. BrightStar’s tax rate is 35 percent. Use this information and the table above to complete the following:
- Calculate the cost of ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under each of the following methods:
- First in, first out.
- Last in, first out.
- Weighted average.
- Using your answers from question 1 above, answer the following:
- What is the gross profit percentage under the FIFO Method?
- What is net income under the LIFO method?
- Which method would you recommend to BrightStar for tax purposes? Explain your recommendation.
- If BrightStar also used the method that you recommended for tax purposes on its balance sheet, would BrightStar’s current ratio suffer, compared to the use of FIFO?
- BrightStar uses the lower of FIFO cost or market method to value its inventory for reporting purposes at the end of the month. If inventory had a market replacement value of $44 per unit, what would BrightStar report in its balance sheet for inventory? Why?
Situation E: BlackBurn Company purchased the following on January 1, 2012:
- Office Equipment at a cost of $100,000 with an estimated useful life to the company of five years and a residual value of $10,000. The company uses the double declining balance method of depreciation for the equipment.
- Factory equipment at an invoice price of $780,000 plus shipping costs of $20,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 100,000 hours and no residual value. The company uses the units of production method of depreciation for the equipment.
- A patent at a cost of $450,000 with an estimated useful life of 15 years. The company uses the straight line method of amortization for intangible assets with no residual value.
Use the information above to complete the following:
- Prepare a partial depreciation schedule for 2012, 2013, and 2014 for the following assets. Round your answers to the nearest dollar.
- Office equipment.
- Factory equipment. The company used the equipment for 8,000 hours in 2012; 9,000 hours in 2013; and 8,500 hours in 2014.
- On January 1, 2014, BlackBurn altered its corporate strategy dramatically. The company sold the factory equipment for $700,000 in cash. Record the entry related to the sale of the factory equipment.
- On January 1, 2014, when the company changed its corporate strategy, its patent had estimated future cash flows of $300,000 and a fair value of $250,000. What would the company report on the income statement (account and amount) regarding the patent on January 2, 2014? Explain your answer. Hint:You may need to research this question using Internet sources.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19 4 Zurich Company reports pretax financial income of $70,000 for 2004. The following items cause taxable income to be different than pretax financial income:
1. Depreciation on the tax return is greater than depreciation on the income statement by $16,000.
2. Rent collected on the tax return is greater than rent earned on the income statement by $22,000.
3. Fines for pollution appear as an expense of $11,000 on the income statement.
Zurich’s tax rate is 30% for all years and the company expects to report taxable income in all future years. There are no deferred taxes at the beginning of 2004.
Instructions
a. Compute taxable income and income taxes payable for 2004.
b. Prepare the journal entry to record income tax expense, deferred income taxes, and income taxes payable for 2004.
c. Illustrate how the journal entry is reflected on the financial statements for 2004.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TWO SHORT ANSWER PROBLEMS
SUPPORTING CALCULATIONS MUST BE PROVIDED
PROBLEM 1
Assume that XYZ Company has no opening inventory. The following purchases of inventory occurred during the year:
Date Purchases (units) Purchase price per unit
Jan. 2 2 $3
Feb. 15 3 $4
March 30 4 $5
July 29 6 $6
Oct. 30 5 $7
Assume XYZ Company sells 8 items on October 31 and uses the FIFO method of inventory valuation. What amount would appear as cost of goods sold on the income statement?
a. $33
b. $53
c. $76
d. $56
e. None of the above. The correct calculation is shown below.
PROBLEM 2
Paul is a day trader. He is interested in the common stock of XYZ Limited. The following data are available for the company:
2012 2013 2014
Dividends paid per share* $4 $3 $2.50
Dividend yield ratio 5.5% 5.5% 5.5%
Dividend payout ratio 40% 40% 40%
Return on total assets 10% 12% 8%
Return on common stockholders’ equity 8% 14.5% 9%
*There were no changes in common stock outstanding over the three year period.
Paul would like answers to the following questions:
1. Is the market price of the company’s stock going up or down?
2. Is the company employing financial leverage to the advantage of the common stockholders?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Accrual and Modified Accrual Basis of Accounting
Submit your responses to the following questions in a 1 2 page summary MSWord document. Label each question clearly. For written answers, please make sure your responses are well written, use APA Formatting and have the proper citation and include in text Citation. Provide your reference.
- How does the modified accrual basis of accounting differ from the accrual basis?
- What are the three sections of a comprehensive annual financial report (CAFR)? What information is contained in each section? How do the minimum requirements for general purpose external financial reporting related in scope to the CAFR?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| P9 8B Due to rapid turnover in the accounting department, a number of transactions involving |
| intangible assets were improperly recorded by Wasp Company in 2011. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. Wasp developed a new manufacturing process, incurring research and development costs of |
| $110,000.The company also purchased a patent for $50,000. In early January,Wasp capitalized |
| $160,000 as the cost of the patents. Patent amortization expense of $8,000 was recorded based |
| on a 20 year useful life. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2. On July 1, 2011, Wasp purchased a small company and as a result acquired goodwill of |
| $200,000.Wasp recorded a half year’s amortization in 2011, based on a 50 year life ($2,000 |
| amortization).The goodwill has an indefinite life. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Instructions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2011. Assume the books |
| have not yet been closed for 2011. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
I am looking for some help with only questions number 3 and 4 of the attached word document:
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brief Exercise 4 5
 |
 |
Your answer is partially correct. Try again. |
|
|
The ledger of Rios Company contains the following balances: Owner’s Capital $30,000; Owner’s Drawings $2,000; Service Revenue $50,000; Salaries and Wages Expense $27,000; and Supplies Expense $7,000.
The closing entries are as follows:
| (1) |
Close revenue accounts. |
|
| (2) |
Close expense accounts. |
|
| (3) |
Close net income/(loss). |
|
| (4) |
Close drawings. |
|
Post the closing entries in the order presented in the problem and use the numbers as a reference.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Blake Manufacturing Corporation manufactures and sells folding umbrellas. The corporation’s condensed income statement for the year at 31 December 2011 follows:
| Sales (200,000 units) |
|
£1,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
600,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
400,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
£150,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
100,000
|
|
|
Net profit (before income taxes)
|
|
£150,000
|
Blake’s budget committee has estimated the following changes for 2012:
30% increase in number of units sold
20% increase in material cost per unit
15% increase in direct labor cost per unit
10% increase in variable indirect cost per unit
5% increase in indirect fixed costs
8% increase in selling expenses, arising solely from increased volume
6% increase in administrative expenses, reflecting anticipated higher wage and supply price levels
Any changes in administrative expenses caused solely by increased sales volume are considered immaterial.
Because inventory qualities remain fairly constant, the budget committee considered that for budget purposes any change in inventory valuation can be ignored. The composition of the cost of a unit of finished product during 2011 for materials, direct labor and manufacturing support, respectively, was in the ratio or 3:2:1. In 2011, £40,000 of manufacturing support was for fixed costs. No changes in production methods or credit policies were contemplated for 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crest Information Technologies manufactures 3 sizes of copiers: light usage, medium usage, and heavy usage. Potential sales include 200 units of light, 240 units of medium, and 200 units of heavy per month. The maximum machine hours available is 12,000 per month. Product information is provided below.<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />
Light Medium Heavy Unit selling price $300 $500 $1,000 Unit Manufacturing costs: Variable (120) (240) (400) Fixed (80) (100) (240) Unit gross profit $100 $160 $360 Machine hours per unit 20 40 100
Variable selling and administrative expenses are $60 per unit for all products. Fixed manufacturing costs of $60,000 are assigned at the rate of $5 per machine hour.
How many of each product should be produced per month using the short run strategy?SHOW ALL WORK!!
Light Medium Heavy a. 0 240 24 b. 200 0 80 c. 200 200 0 d. 200 40 80
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crest Information Technologies manufactures three sizes of copiers: light usage, medium usage, and heavy usage. Potential sales include 200 units of light, 240 units of medium, and 200 units of heavy per month. The maximum machine hours available is 12,000 per month. Product information is provided below.
Light Medium Heavy
Unit selling price $300 $500 $1,000
Unit manufacturing costs:
Variable (120) (240) (400)
Fixed (80) (100) (240)
Unit gross profit $100 $160 $ 360
Machine hours per unit 20 40 100
Variable selling and administrative expenses are $60 per unit for all products. Fixed manufacturing costs of $60,000 are assigned at the rate of $5 per machine hour.
How many of each product should be produced per month using the short run strategy? SHOW ALL WORK!!
Light Medium Heavy
a. 0 240 24
b. 200 0 80
c. 200 200 0
d. 200 40 80
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 23 2 (Algorithmic)
Profit Center Responsibility Reporting
Johnson Products Inc. has three regional divisions organized as profit centers. The chief executive officer (CEO) evaluates divisional performance, using income from operations as a percent of revenues. The following quarterly income and expense accounts were provided from the trial balance as of December 31, 2012:
|
Revenues East
|
$ 1,085,200
|
|
Revenues West
|
1,259,700
|
|
Revenues Central
|
2,337,500
|
|
Operating Expenses East
|
687,700
|
|
Operating Expenses West
|
749,700
|
|
Operating Expenses Central
|
1,413,600
|
|
Corporate Expenses Shareholder Relations
|
165,000
|
|
Corporate Expenses Customer Support
|
621,600
|
|
Corporate Expenses Legal
|
180,000
|
|
General Corporate Officer’s Salaries
|
364,500
|
The company operates three service departments: Shareholder Relations, Customer Support, and Legal. The Shareholder Relations Department conducts a variety of services for shareholders of the company. The Customer Support Department is the company’s point of contact for new service, complaints, and requests for repair. The department believes that the number of customer contacts is an activity base for this work. The Legal Department provides legal services for division management. The department believes that the number of hours billed is an activity base for this work. The following additional information has been gathered:
|
East
|
West
|
Central
|
|
Number of customer contacts
|
5,600
|
|
6,700
|
|
9,900
|
|
|
Number of hours billed
|
900
|
|
1,400
|
|
1,300
|
|
Required:
|
a.Prepare quarterly income statements showing income from operations for the three divisions. Use three column headings: East, West, and Central.
|
|
|
Divisional Income Statements
|
|
|
For the Quarter Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income from operations before service department charges
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less service department charges:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hide FeedbackShow All Feedback
Partially Correct
Check My Work Feedback
a. Determine the customer contact rate by dividing service cost by output. For each division’s customer support, multiply the customer contact rate by the number of customer contacts. Repeat this process for the other service department charges. Subtract the service department charges for a division from that division’s income from operations before such charges.
Post Submission Feedback
Solution
· b. What is the profit margin percentage of each division? Round to one decimal place.
|
Division
|
Profit Margin
|
|
East Division
|
%
|
|
West Division
|
%
|
|
Central Division
|
%
|
Identify the most successful division according to the profit margin percentage.
Select East West Central Correct 4 of Item 2
c.Provide a recommendation to the CEO for a better method for evaluating the performance of the divisions. In your recommendation, identify the major weakness of the present method.
The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.
blank
Correct 5 of Item 2
Hide FeedbackShow All Feedback
Partially Correct
Check My Work Feedback
b. Income from operations divided by revenues equals profit margin.
c. What other performance measure(s) could be used?
Post Submission Feedback
Solution
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 20 6
Yard Tools manufactures lawnmowers, weed trimmers, and chainsaws. Its sales mix and contribution margin per unit are as follows.
|
|
Sales Mix |
|
Contribution Margin per Unit |
| Lawnmowers |
|
20 |
% |
|
$30 |
| Weed trimmers |
|
50 |
% |
|
$20 |
| Chainsaws |
|
30 |
% |
|
$40 |
Yard Tools has fixed costs of $4,200,000.
Compute the number of units of each product that Yard Tools must sell in order to break even under this product mix.
| Lawnmowers |
|
 |
units |
| Weed trimmers |
|
 |
units |
| Chainsaws |
|
 |
units |
Warning
|
Don’t show me this message again for the assignment
|
Ok Cancel
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pringle Corporation has been authorized to issue 20,000 shares of $100 par value, 7%, noncumulative preferred stock and 1,000,000 shares of no par common stock.
The corporation assigned a $5 stated value to the common stock. At December 31, 2014, the ledger contained the following balances pertaining to stockholders’ equity.
|
Preferred Stock
|
|
$150,000
|
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock
|
|
20,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
2,000,000
|
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock
|
|
1,520,000
|
|
Treasury Stock— (4,000 common shares)
|
|
36,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
82,000
|
The preferred stock was issued for $170,000 cash. All common stock issued was for cash. In November 4,000 shares of common stock were purchased for the treasury at a per share cost of $9. No dividends were declared in 2014.
A)Prepare the journal entries for the following. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
|
(1)
|
|
Issuance of preferred stock for cash.
|
|
(2)
|
|
Issuance of common stock for cash.
|
|
(3)
|
|
Purchase of common treasury stock for cash.
|
B)Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2014.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
i have memo to make it. chose the second or third topic on the asigment that i will send it . and the memo should be like the example in the appendix A 6 of the text book. the memo should be 750 words . and it should be have facts, issues, appliccaple law, analysis and conclusion.i need it on sunday at 2:00 pm. thank you.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Richards grocery has the following transactions
April
01
st – Richard invest $90,000 in the business account
02
nd – bought goods for the business from Singh for $8,000 by cheque.
03
rd – bought goods from Adam Ltd on credit for$500
05
th – sell goods to marsha for $7000 cash
10
th – received a cheque of $3000 from a friend as a loan.
16
th – paid rent of $500 by cash
25
th – deposited $5000 cash into the business.
27
th – cash withdrawn for personal use $150.
Prepare the trial balance for Richards grocery as at 30
th april 2014
Journalise, post to ledgers, balance of accounts, prepare trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Total Unit Sales$1,000,000 $50.00 Less variable expenses 600,000 30.00
Contribution margin 400,000 20.00 Less fixed expenses 320,000 16.00
Operating income 80,000 4.00 Less income taxes @ 40% 32,000 1.60
Net operating income$48,000 $2.40
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Givens Corp. is a merchandising company that uses the periodic battery system. Seleczoi mecca balances arc listed below:
Sales Purchases 5500,000 num Inventory (beginning) • 16.000 Inventory: (ending) *000 Operating Expenses 14000 Income Tax Expense 10.003 Retained Ewninc (beginning) 53,C00 Dividends 15,030 1. Refer to information for Givens Corp.
Calculate the cost of goods sold for Givens Corp. a. 5275,000 b. 5259,000 c. 5241,000 d.V11,000
2. Refer to the information for Givens Corp.
Calculate the gross profit. a. 5241,000 b. 5275,000 c. VS9000 d. 5425,000
3. Refer to the information for Givens Corp.
Calculate net income. a. 5289,000 b. 5141,000 c. 5131,000 d. SI 16.009
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Making business recommendations Submission details
| Candidate’s Name |
|
Student ID |
|
| Assessor’s Name |
|
| Assessment Site |
|
| Assessment Date/s |
|
The assessment task is due on the date specified by your assessor. Any variations to this arrangement must be approved in writing by your assessor.
Submit this document with any required evidence attached. See specifications below for details. Performance objective
- Use conversion and consolidation procedures to compile analysis in accordance with organisational requirements.
- Ensure that recommendations are logically derived and supported by evidence in report.
- Provide recommendations to propose constructive actions to enhance the effectiveness and efficacy of functions and services.
- Ensure recommendations are concise and facilitate direction and control of organisation’s operations.
- Identify and prioritise significant issues in statements including comparative financial performances for review and decision making.
- Ensure structure and format of reports are clear and conform to organisation and statutory requirements.
Assessment description In groups of 2–3 use the following Profit and Loss Statement, Operating Budget and actual results for Packett Packaging Pty Ltd to prepare a report for Packett Packaging Pty Ltd management team that provides analysis of their performance against their budget for 2009/2010 financial year.
Procedure In a PowerPoint document, together, prepare a report (2–3 pages) for the Packett Packaging Pty Ltd management team that provides analysis of their performance against their budget for 2009/2010 financial year.
Your report should include:
- trend analysis of performance versus budget over the 12 month period for:
- sales
- expenses
- Calculate average profit and cost per unit (cardboard box manufactured) for each month
- recommendations, for example; budget modifications, business priority areas for the next 3 months, opportunities to improve performance, etc.
Your group will be required to present your report to the class as part of your assessment. Your facilitator will advise you regarding the date that you will be required to present. Please note all group members must participate in presenting your report.
The following information has been provided to assist you in preparing your report. Please see following pages for completed reports:
- trend analysis of performance versus budget over the 12 month period for:
- sales
- expenses
- Calculate average profit and cost per unit (cardboard box manufactured) for each month
- recommendations, for example; budget modifications, business priority areas for the next 3 months, opportunities to improve performance, etc.
Your group will be required to present your report to the class as part of your assessment. Your facilitator will advise you regarding the date that you will be required to present. Please note all group members must participate in presenting your report.
The following information has been provided to assist you in preparing your report. Please see following pages for completed reports:
- Profit and Loss Statement for 2009/2010 financial year
- Operating Budget for 2009/2010 financial year
- Actual results for 2009/2010 by month for:
- Income
- Expense
- Profit
- Number of units produced.
The following information has been provided to assist you in preparing your report. Please see following pages for completed reports:
- Profit and Loss Statement for 2009/2010 financial year
- Operating Budget for 2009/2010 financial year
- Actual results for 2009/2010 by month for:
- Income
- Expense
-
Specifications
- Please provide completed documents by the date nominated by your assessor.
- Ensure you keep a copy of all work submitted for your records.
- and
- Remember – accuracy is essential when working with financial data.
- Reports provided to management teams need to be professional and the analysis completed needs to be relevant and accurate.
-
Class based learners:
- All group members must participate in the presentation of your report.
- One hard copy report must be submitted to your facilitator detailing the names of all group members.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explain why Activity Based Costing (ABC) often reveals existing product cost cross subsidization problems. How can ABC be used to improve profitability? Discuss some of the limitations of ABC.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
he following things I need for my assignment is an Accounting Report, which includes; executive summary, table of contents, introduction, body, conclusion, bibliography and appendix. It’s a 1000 word report 3 4 pages. The information you will refer from will be the MYOB General Journal. The following tasks need to be completed: 1. Prepare a horizontal analysis between the account balances as at 31 May 2014 and the Balance Sheet as at 30 June 2014 2. Prepare a vertical analysis of the balance sheet and profit and loss statement. 3. Calculate the following ratios as at 30 June 2014:a) Profit Marginb) Return on Total Assetsc) Return on Equityd) Current Ratioe) Quick Ratiof) Debt Ratiog) Times Interest Earned Here’s a link to the General Journal and assignment requirements and task.
1000 words
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need help with the trial balance for Gina Balistrieri opened Genie Cleaners on March 1, 2012. During March, the
following transactions were completed.
Mar. 1 Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for $15,000 cash.
1 Purchased used truck for $8,000, paying $3,000 cash and the balance on account.
3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,500 on account.
5 Paid $2,400 cash on a 6 month insurance policy effective March 1.
14 Billed customers $3,700 for cleaning services.
18 Paid $1,500 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.
20 Paid $1,750 cash for employee salaries.
21 Collected $1,600 cash from customers billed on March 14.
28 Billed customers $4,200 for cleaning services.
31 Paid $350 for gas and oil used in truck during month (use Maintenance and Repairs Expense).
31 Declared and paid a $900 cash dividend.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Factory Overhead Rate, Entry for Applying Factory Overhead, and Factory Overhead Account Balance
The chief cost accountant for Mountain Glade Beverage Co. estimated that total factory overhead cost for the Blending Department for the coming fiscal year beginning April 1 would be $515,200, and total direct labor costs would be $448,000. During April, the actual direct labor cost totaled $39,000, and factory overhead cost incurred totaled $46,650.
· Hint(s)
a.What is the predetermined factory overhead rate based on direct labor cost? Enter your answer as a whole percent not in decimals.
%
b.Journalize the entry to apply factory overhead to production for April.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
c.What is the April 30 balance of the account Factory Overhead—Blending Department?
|
Amount:
|
$
|
|
Debit or Credit?
|
|
d.Does the balance in part (c) represent overapplied or underapplied factory overhead?
|
|
|
|
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The May 31, 20XX, post closing trial balance for the L&L Accounting Firm appears below.
During June, the firm engaged in the following transactions:
1 Received an investment of cash from J. Long, $8,000.
3 Purchased office equipment with cash, $2,000.
4 Received office equipment transferred to the firm from J. Long, $1,800
7 Purchased extra office supplies with cash, $190
9 Completed bookkeeping services for Elliott Electric Company that began on May 30 and billed Elliott for the total services performed, including the accrued revenues that had been recognized in an adjusting entry in May, $1,400
10 Paid the receptionist for two weeks’ wages, $1,600
13 Paid the amount due to Office Depot for the office equipment purchased last month, $750
14 Accepted an advance in cash for services to be done for a new client, $2,200
15 Purchased a copier (office equipment) from Office Depot for $2,400, paying $400 in cash and agreeing to pay the rest in equal amounts over the next six months.
16 Performed consulting services and received a cash fee, $1,650.
17 Received payment on account from Sally’s Salon for services performed last month, $3,200.
18 Paid amount due for the telephone bill that was received and recorded at the end of May, $260.
19 Performed consulting services for Sally’s Salon and agreed to accept payment next month, $4,600.
20 Performed bookkeeping services for cash, $780.
23 Received and paid the utility bill for June, $340.
24 Paid the secretary for two weeks’ wages, $1,600.
27 Paid the rent for July in advance, $2,000.
28 Received the telephone bill for June, which is to be paid next month, $220.
30 Paid cash to J. Long as a withdrawal for personal expenses, $1,750.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
| These are the automatically computed results of your exam. Grades for essay questions, and comments from your instructor, are in the “Details” section below. |
| Date Taken: |
7/24/2014 |
| Time Spent: |
2 h , 36 min , 24 secs |
| Points Received: |
40 / 50 (80%) |
|
| Question Type: |
# Of Questions: |
# Correct: |
| Multiple Choice |
4 |
2 |
| Short |
3 |
N/A |
| Essay |
1 |
N/A |
|
| Grade Details All Questions |
| Question 1. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) A statement that reports inflows and outflows of cash during the accounting period in the categories of operations, investing, and financing, is called a(an):
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
Income statement |
|
|
|
Statement of retained earnings |
|
|
|
Balance sheet |
|
|
|
Statement of cash flows |
|
|
|
Report of management |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
Chapter 9 |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
5 of 5 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 2. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) Which method(s) of financial reporting does (do) not recognize the impact of changes in purchasing power?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
HC |
|
|
|
HC GPL |
|
|
|
CV |
|
|
|
CV GPL |
|
|
|
Both A and C |
|
|
|
B and D |
|
|
|
A and B |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
Chapter 10 |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
0 of 5 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 3. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) Which of the following is the BEST example of a financial metric?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
Degree of innovation |
|
|
|
Employee empowerment |
|
|
|
Accreditation by the Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations |
|
|
|
Total margin |
|
|
|
Length of stay |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
Chapter 11 |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
0 of 5 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 4. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) What is/(are) the primary determinant(s) of firm value?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
Profit |
|
|
|
Investment |
|
|
|
Cost of capital |
|
|
|
All of above |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
Chapter 11 |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
5 of 5 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 5. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) How are revenues and expenses defined under accrual accounting?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
Revenues and expenses are defined under accrual accounting as being recorded when revenue is earned and expense incurred, when they happen, not when the money is received or paid out. |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
Under the accrual basis of accounting revenues are the amount earned in providing a good or service, while expenses represent the amount of resources used in earning those revenues. |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
5 of 5 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 6. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) What is an accounting entity?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
An accounting entity is the specific organization for which financial information is recorded and reported. (name of the business) The accounting entity must be clearly defined or the financial information will be rendered useless and misleading. |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
An accounting entity is an organization for which financial data are to be collected (separate and distinct from its owners). |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
5 of 5 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 7. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) What three pieces of information are needed to convert nominal dollars to constant dollars?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
The 3 pieces of information that is needed to convert nominal dollars into constant dollars are the following: 1. unadjusted value of the account in historical or nominal dollars. 2. price index which reflects the purchasing power at the date the count is to be restated. 3. price index which reflects the purchasing power in which the unadjusted value is currently expressed. |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
- the unadjusted value of the account in historical or nominal dollars,
- a price index that reflects the purchasing power in which the unadjusted value is currently expressed, and
- a price index that reflects the purchasing power at the date the account is to be restated.
|
|
|
|
Points Received: |
10 of 10 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
| Question 8. |
Question : |
(TCO 2) What is the basic accounting equation?
|
|
|
Student Answer: |
|
The basic accounting equation is: Assets = Liabilities + Equity which illustrates what resources a company has, owed and what the stakeholder/shareholder has invested in the organization. The value of assets must always equal liabilities and equity. The assets/resources are an organizations available resources that are used to sustain operations. Examples of assets are cash, accounts receivable, land, plants, supplies, buildings, equipment, patents/rights, and an organizations goodwill. Liabilities/obligations are the organizations expenses for operations which are owed to creditors. Examples of liabilities are Accounts Payable, loans, notes, bonds and unearned revenues. Equity (owners interests) is amount of capital or resources that are invested in an organization by the stakeholder/shareholder and represents their stake/claim (investment amount) in a business assets. This is illustrated as Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Net Income, Preferred stock, Net Income/Loss, and capital. |
|
Instructor Explanation: |
The basic accounting equation is based on the idea that the total amount (cost) of all economic resources owned by the entity is equal to the amount of those economic resources provided by creditors plus the amount of those economic resources provided by the owners. The basic accounting equation (for profit: Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity; not for profit: Assets = Liabilities + Net Assets) is often called the balance sheet equation. It is the basis used to record activities of an accounting entity and to report those activities to internal and external parties.). |
|
|
|
Points Received: |
10 of 10 |
|
Comments: |
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct versus indirect costs
Estep Construction Company is composed of two divisions: (1) Home Construction and (2) Commercial Construction. The Home Construction Division is in the process of building 12 houses and the Commercial Construction Division is working on 3 projects. Cost items of the company follow. Cost of building permits Materials used in commercial construction projects Depreciation on home building equipment (small tools such as hammers or saws) Company president’s salary
Depreciation on crane used in commercial construction Depreciation on home office building
Salary of corporate offi ce manager Wages of workers assigned to a specific construction project Supplies used by the Commercial Construction Division Labor on a particular house Salary of the supervisor of commercial construction projects Supplies, such as glue and nails, used by the Home Construction Division
Required
a. Identify each cost as being a direct or indirect cost assuming the cost objects are the individual products (houses or projects).
b. Identify each cost as being a direct or indirect cost, assuming the cost objects are the two divisions.
c. Identify each cost as being a direct or indirect cost assuming the cost object is Estep Construction Company as a whole.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating overhead cost among products
O’Brien Hats Inc. manufactures three different styles of hats: Vogue, Beauty, and Deluxe. O’Brien expects to incur $576,000 of overhead cost during the next fiscal year. Other budget information follows:
|
|
Vogue
|
Beauty
|
Deluxe
|
Total
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
2,400
|
4,200
|
5,400
|
12,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
1,200
|
1,400
|
1,400
|
4,000
|
Required
a. Use direct labor hours as the cost driver to compute the allocation rate and the budgeted overhead cost for each product.
b. Use machine hours as the cost driver to compute the allocation rate and the budgeted overhead cost for each product.
c. Describe a set of circumstances where it would be more appropriate to use direct labor hours as the allocation base.
d. Describe a set of circumstances where it would be more appropriate to use machine hours as the allocation base.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating costs among products
Bryson Construction Company expects to build three new homes during a specific accounting period. The estimated direct materials and labor costs are as follows.
|
Expected Costs
|
Home 1
|
Home 2
|
Home 3
|
|
Direct labor
|
$ 60,000
|
$ 89,000
|
$196,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
182,000
|
247,000
|
380,000
|
Assume Bryson needs to allocate two major overhead costs ($41,400 of employee fringe benefits and $40,450 of indirect materials costs) among the three jobs.
Required
Choose an appropriate cost driver for each of the overhead costs and determine the total cost of each home.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating overhead cost to accomplish smoothing
Anchorage Corporation expects to incur indirect overhead costs of $75,000 per month and direct manufacturing costs of $11 per unit. The expected production activity for the first four months of 2009 is as follows.
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
April
|
|
Estimated production in units
|
4,000
|
7,000
|
3,000
|
6,000
|
Required
a. Calculate a predetermined overhead rate based on the number of units of product expected to be made during the first four months of the year.
b. Allocate overhead costs to each month using the overhead rate computed in Requirement a.
c. Calculate the total cost per unit for each month using the overhead allocated in Requirement b.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pooling overhead costs
Lemiley Manufacturing Company produced 1,200 units of inventory in January 2009. It expects to produce an additional 8,400 units during the remaining 11 months of the year. In other words, total production for 2009 is estimated to be 9,600 units. Direct materials and direct labor costs are $64 and $52 per unit, respectively. Lemiley Company expects to incur the following manufacturing overhead costs during 2009.
|
Production supplies
|
$ 4,800
|
|
Supervisor salary
|
192,000
|
|
Depreciation on equipment
|
144,000
|
|
Utilities
|
36,000
|
|
Rental fee on manufacturing facilities
|
96,000
|
Required
a. Combine the individual overhead costs into a cost pool and calculate a predetermined overhead rate assuming the cost driver is number of units.
b. Determine the cost of the 1,200 units of product made in January.
c. Is the cost computed in Requirement b actual or estimated? Could Lemiley improve accuracy by waiting until December to determine the cost of products?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost accumulation and allocation
Maller Manufacturing Company makes two different products, M and N. The company’s two departments are named after the products; for example, Product M is made in Department M. Maller’s accountant has identified the following annual costs associated with these two products.
|
Financial data
|
|
|
Salary of vice president of production division
|
$180,000
|
|
Salary of supervisor Department M
|
76,000
|
|
Salary of supervisor Department N
|
56,000
|
|
Direct materials cost Department M
|
300,000
|
|
Direct materials cost Department N
|
420,000
|
|
Direct labor cost Department M
|
240,000
|
|
Direct labor cost Department N
|
680,000
|
|
Direct utilities cost Department M
|
120,000
|
|
Direct utilities cost Department N
|
24,000
|
|
General factorywide utilities
|
36,000
|
|
Production supplies
|
36,000
|
|
Fringe benefits
|
138,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
720,000
|
|
Nonfinancial data
|
|
|
Machine hours Department M
|
5,000
|
|
Machine hours Department N
|
1,000
|
Required
a. Identify the costs that are (1) direct costs of Department M, (2) direct costs of Department N, and (3) indirect costs.
b. Select the appropriate cost drivers for the indirect costs and allocate these costs to Departments M and N.
c. Determine the total estimated cost of the products made in Departments M and N. Assume that Maller produced 2,000 units of Product M and 4,000 units of Product N during the year. If Maller prices its products at cost plus 30 percent of cost, what price per unit must it charge for Product M and for Product N?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selecting an appropriate cost driver (What is the base?)
The Brower School of Vocational Technology has organized the school training programs into three departments. Each department provides training in a different area as follows: nursing assistant, dental hygiene, and office technology. The school’s owner, Candice Brower, wants to know how much it costs to operate each of the three departments. To accumulate the total cost for each department, the accountant has identified several indirect costs that must be allocated to each. These costs are $10,080 of telephone expense, $2,016 of supplies expense, $720,000 of office rent, $144,000 of janitorial services, and $150,000 of salary paid to the dean of students. To provide a reasonably accurate allocation of costs, the accountant has identified several possible cost drivers. These drivers and their association with each department follow.
|
Cost Driver
|
Department 1
|
Department 2
|
Department 3
|
|
Number of telephones
|
28
|
16
|
19
|
|
Number of faculty members
|
20
|
16
|
12
|
|
Square footage of office space
|
28,000
|
16,800
|
12,000
|
|
Number of secretaries
|
2
|
2
|
2
|
Required
a. Identify the appropriate cost objects.
b. Identify the appropriate cost driver for each indirect cost and compute the allocation rate for assigning each indirect cost to the cost objects.
c. Determine the amount of telephone expense that should be allocated to each of the three departments.
d. Determine the amount of office expense that should be allocated to Department 3.
e. Determine the amount of office rent that should be allocated to Department 2.
f. Determine the amount of janitorial services cost that should be allocated to Department 1.
g. Identify two cost drivers not listed here that could be used to allocate the cost of the dean’s salary to the three departments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost allocation in a service industry
Jarmon Airlines is a small airline that occasionally carries overload shipments for the overnight delivery company Never Fail Inc. Never Fail is a multimillion dollar company started by Peter Never immediately after he failed to finish his first accounting course. The company’s motto is We Never Fail to Deliver Your Package on Time.” When Never Fail has more freight than it can deliver, it pays Jarmon to carry the excess. Jarmon contracts with independent pilots to fly its planes on a per trip basis. Jarmon recently purchased an airplane that cost the company $24,000,000. The plane has an estimated useful life of 100,000,000 miles and a zero salvage value. During the first week in January, Jarmon flew two trips. The first trip was a round trip flight from Chicago to San Francisco, for which Jarmon paid $500 for the pilot and $350 for fuel. The second flight was a round trip from Chicago to New York. For this trip, it paid $300 for the pilot and $150 for fuel. The round trip between Chicago and San Francisco is approximately 4,400 miles and the round trip between Chicago and New York is 1,600 miles.
Required
a. Identify the direct and indirect costs that Jarmon incurs for each trip.
b. Determine the total cost of each trip.
c. In addition to depreciation, identify three other indirect costs that may need to be allocated to determine the cost of each trip.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost allocation in a manufacturing company
Spring Manufacturing Company makes tents that it sells directly to camping enthusiasts through a mail order marketing program. The company pays a quality control expert $108,000 per year to inspect completed tents before they are shipped to customers. Assume that the company completed 1,600 tents in January and 1,200 tents in February. For the entire year, the company expects to produce 15,000 tents.
Required
a. Explain how changes in the cost driver (number of tents inspected) affect the total amount of fixed inspection cost.
b. Explain how changes in the cost driver (number of tents inspected) affect the amount of fixed inspection cost per unit.
c. If the cost objective is to determine the cost per tent, is the expert’s salary a direct or an indirect cost?
d. How much of the expert’s salary should be allocated to tents produced in January and February?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocation to accomplish smoothing
Teng Corporation estimated its overhead costs would be $30,000 per month except for January when it pays the $90,000 annual insurance premium on the manufacturing facility. Accordingly, the January overhead costs were expected to be $120,000 ($90,000 + $30,000). The company expected to use 7,000 direct labor hours per month except during July, August, and September when the company expected 9,000 hours of direct labor each month to build inventories for high demand that normally occurs during the holiday season. The company’s actual direct labor hours were the same as the estimated hours. The company made 3,500 units of product in each month except July, August, and September in which it produced 4,500 units each month. Direct labor costs were $25 per unit, and direct materials costs were $20 per unit.
Required
a. Calculate a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours.
b. Determine the total allocated overhead cost for January, March, and August.
c. Determine the cost per unit of product for January, March, and August.
d. Determine the selling price for the product, assuming that the company desires to earn a gross margin of $20 per unit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Allocating fixed costs at Porsche
During its fiscal year ending on July 31, 2006, the Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG, commonly known as Porsche,” manufactured 102,602 vehicles. During that same year Porsche recorded depreciation on property, plant, and equipment of €323,958,000. (Porsche’s financial information is reported in euros, and € is the symbol for the euro.) For the purposes of this problem assume that all of the depreciation related to manufacturing activities.
Required
a. Indicate whether the depreciation charge is a
(1) Product cost, or a general, selling, and administrative cost.
(2) Relevant cost with respect to a special order decision.
(3) Fixed or variable cost relative to the volume of production.
(4) Direct or indirect if the cost object is the cost of vehicles made in the 2006 fiscal year.
b. Assume that Porsche incurred depreciation of €27,000,000 during each month of the 2006 fiscal year, but that it produced 7,000 vehicles during February and 10,000 during March. Based on monthly costs and production levels, what was the average amount of depreciation cost per vehicle produced during each of these two months, assuming each vehicle was charged the same amount of depreciation?
c. If Porsche had expected to produce 98,000 vehicles during 2006, and had estimated its annual depreciation costs to be €324,000,000, what would have been its predetermined overhead charge per vehicle for depreciation? Explain the advantage of using this amount to determine the cost of manufacturing a car in February and March versus the amounts you computed in Requirement b.
d. If Porsche’s management had estimated the profit per vehicle based on its budgeted production of 98,000 units, would you expect its actual profit per vehicle to be higher or lower than expected? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Selection of the cost driver
Vulcan College School of Business is divided into three departments, accounting, marketing, and management. Relevant information for each of the departments follows.
|
Cost Driver
|
Accounting
|
Marketing
|
Management
|
|
Number of students
|
1,400
|
800
|
400
|
|
Number of classes per semester
|
64
|
36
|
28
|
|
Number of professors
|
20
|
24
|
10
|
Vulcan is a private school that expects each department to generate a profit. It rewards departments for profitability by assigning 20 percent of each department’s profits back to that department. Departments have free rein as to how to use these funds. Some departments have used them to supply professors with computer technology. Others have expanded their travel budgets. The practice has been highly successful in motivating the faculty to control costs. The revenues and direct costs for the year 2004 follow.
|
|
Accounting
|
Marketing
|
Management
|
|
Revenue
|
$29,600,000
|
$16,600,000
|
$8,300,000
|
|
Direct costs
|
24,600,000
|
13,800,000
|
6,600,000
|
Vulcan allocates to the School of Business $4,492,800 of indirect overhead costs such as administrative salaries and costs of operating the registrar’s office and the bookstore.
Required
a. Divide the class into groups and organize the groups into three sections. Assign each section a department. Assume that the dean of the school is planning to assign an equal amount of the college overhead to each department. Have the students in each group prepare a response to the dean’s plan. Each group should select a spokesperson who is prepared to answer the following questions.
(1) Is your group in favor of or opposed to the allocation plan suggested by the dean?
(2) Does the plan suggested by the dean provide a fair allocation? Why? The instructor should lead a discussion designed to assess the appropriateness of the dean’s proposed allocation plan.
b. Have each group select the cost driver (allocation base) that best serves the self interest of the department it represents.
c. Consensus on Requirement c should be achieved before completing Requirement d. Each group should determine the amount of the indirect cost to be allocated to each department using the cost driver that best serves the self interest of the department it represents. Have a spokesperson from each section go to the board and show the income statement that would result for each department.
d. Discuss the development of a cost driver(s) that would promote fairness rather than selfinterest in allocating the indirect costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Using real world data from Pepsi Bottling Group
Use the 2006 Form 10 K for Pepsi Bottling Group to complete the requirements below. Pepsi Bottling Group (PBG) is a separate company from PepsiCo, so do not confuse them. To obtain the Form 10 K you can use the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A, or it can be found under Investor Relations” link on the company’s corporate. The company includes its Form 10 K as a part of its 2006 Annual Report, or it can be found separately under SEC Filings.” Be sure to read carefully the following sections of the document. Under Item 1. Business” read subsections titled Introduction,” Principal Products,” Raw Materials and Other Supplies,” and Seasonality.” In the footnotes section of the report, under Note 2—Summary of Significant Accounting Policies,” read the subsections titled Advertising and Marketing Costs” and Shipping and Handling Costs.” Note 8—Property, Plant and Equipment, net,” in the footnotes section of the report.
Required
a. Does PBG consider shipping and handling costs and advertising and marketing costs to be direct or indirect costs in relation to the manufacturing of its products? Explain.
b. Assume that when PBG ships orders of bottled drinks each shipment includes several different products such as Pepsi, Lipton tea, and Starbucks Frappuccino. If PBG wanted to allocate the shipping costs among the various products, what would be an appropriate cost driver? Explain the rationale for your choice.
c. Assume that PBG incurs some advertising cost that cannot be directly traced to a single product such as Pepsi or Diet Pepsi. If PBG wanted to allocate the advertising costs among the various products being advertised jointly, what would be an appropriate way of making this allocation? Explain the rationale for your choice.
d. As Note 8 indicates, PBG computes depreciation expense on three separate classes of assets. For which of these classes of assets could its depreciation expense be directly traced to the production of soft drinks? Which class would least likely be traceable to the production of soft drinks? Explain.
e. Based on PBG’s discussion of the seasonality of its business, should the depreciation of production equipment recorded in a given month be based on the volume of drinks produced that month, or should the depreciation be one twelfth of the estimated annual depreciation PBG expects to incur? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Selection of the appropriate cost driver
Bullions Enterprises, Inc. (BEI), makes gold, silver, and bronze medals used to recognize outstanding athletic performance in regional and national sporting events. The per unit direct costs of producing the medals follow.
|
|
Gold
|
Silver
|
Bronze
|
|
Direct materials
|
$300
|
$130
|
$ 35
|
|
Labor
|
120
|
120
|
120
|
During 2008, BEI made 1,200 units of each type of medal for a total of 3,600 (1,200 X 3) medals. All medals are created through the same production process, and they are packaged and shipped in identical containers. Indirect overhead costs amounted to $324,000. BEI currently uses the number of units as the cost driver for the allocation of overhead cost. As a result, BEI allocated $90 ($324,000 ÷ 3,600 units) of overhead cost to each medal produced.
Required
The president of the company has questioned the wisdom of assigning the same amount of overhead to each type of medal. He believes that overhead should be assigned on the basis of the cost to produce the medals. In other words, more overhead should be charged to expensive gold medals, less to silver, and even less to bronze. Assume that you are BEI’s chief financial officer. Write a memo responding to the president’s suggestion.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question ED 15. Performing horizontal analysis Income statement; Question.ED 16. Computing trend analysis; Question ED 20. Computing key ratio; Question ED 21 Analyzing the ability to pay liabilities; and the last Question. Analyzing a company for its investment potential.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Identify and analyze each of the preceding transactions. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepare a list of accounts and their balances for Moonlight Bay at January 31, 2012. Reflect the recurring transactions for the month of January but not the necessary month end adjustments. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Identify and analyze the necessary adjustments for each of the following: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation of the house |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation of the furniture |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest on the promissory note |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepare in good form the following financial statements: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income statement for the month ended January 31, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Balance sheet at January 31, 2012 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ace Maintenance, Inc., repairs heavy construction equipment and vehicles. Recently, the Shanti Construction Company had one of its giant earthmovers overhauled and its tires replaced. Repair work for a vehicle of that size usually takes from one week to ten days. The vehicle must be lifted up so that maintenance workers can gain access to the engine. Parts are normally so large that a crane must be used to put them into place.
The company uses the time and materials pricing system and data from the previous year to compute markup percentages for overhead related to parts and materials and overhead related to direct labor. It adds markups of 130 percent to the cost of materials and parts and 140 percent to the cost of direct labor to cover overhead and profit. The following materials, parts, and direct labor are needed to repair the giant earthmover:
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining fixed cost per unit
Bender Corporation incurs the following annual fixed costs.
|
Item
|
Cost
|
|
Depreciation
|
$ 34,000
|
|
Officers’ salaries
|
120,000
|
|
Long term lease
|
42,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
9,000
|
Required
Determine the total fixed cost per unit of production, assuming that Bender produces 4,000, 4,500, or 5,000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining total variable cost
The following variable production costs apply to goods made by Zell Manufacturing Corporation.
|
Item
|
Cost per Unit
|
|
Materials
|
$6.00
|
|
Labor
|
2.50
|
|
Variable overhead
|
0.20
|
|
Total
|
$8.70
|
Required
Determine the total variable production cost, assuming that Zell makes 5,000, 15,000, or 25,000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fixed versus variable cost behavior
Thompson Company’s cost and production data for two recent months included the following.
|
|
January
|
February
|
|
Production (units)
|
90
|
230
|
|
Rent
|
$1,500
|
$1,500
|
|
Utilities
|
$ 450
|
$1,150
|
Required
a. Separately calculate the rental cost per unit and the utilities cost per unit for both January and February.
b. Identify which cost is variable and which is fixed. Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mixed cost at different levels of activity
Leon Corporation paid one of its sales representatives $5,600 during the month of March. The rep is paid a base salary plus $13 per unit of product sold. During March, the rep sold 200 units.
Required
Calculate the total monthly cost of the sales representative’s salary for each of the following months.
|
Month
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
July
|
|
Number of units sold
|
230
|
180
|
280
|
150
|
|
Total variable cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total fixed cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total salary cost
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using fixed cost as a competitive business strategy
The following income statements illustrate different cost structures for two competing companies.
|
Income Statements
|
|
Company Name
|
|
Vector
|
Sector
|
|
Number of customers (a)
|
70
|
70
|
|
Sales revenue (a x $200)
|
$14,000
|
$14,000
|
|
Variable cost (a x $160)
|
N/A
|
(11,200)
|
|
Variable cost (a x $0)
|
0
|
N/A
|
|
Contribution margin
|
14,000
|
2,800
|
|
Fixed cost
|
(11,200)
|
0
|
|
Net income
|
$2,800
|
$2,800
|
Required
a. Reconstruct Vector’s income statement, assuming that it serves 140 customers when it lures 70 customers away from Sector by lowering the sales price to $120 per customer.
b. Reconstruct Sector’s income statement, assuming that it serves 140 customers when it lures 70 customers away from Vector by lowering the sales price to $120 per customer.
c. Explain why the price cutting strategy increased Vector Company’s profits but caused a net loss for Sector Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using a contribution margin format income statement to measure the magnitude of operating leverage
The following income statement was drawn from the records of Bechem Company, a merchandising firm.
|
BECHEM COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2008
|
|
Sales revenue (3,500 units x $123)
|
$430,500
|
|
Cost of goods sold (3,500 units x $68)
|
(238,000)
|
|
Gross margin
|
192,500
|
|
Sales commissions (10% of sales)
|
(43,050)
|
|
Administrative salaries expense
|
(61,500)
|
|
Advertising expense
|
(22,000)
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
(25,000)
|
|
Shipping and handling expenses (3,500 units x $4.00)
|
(14,000)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 26,950
|
Required
a. Reconstruct the income statement using the contribution margin format.
b. Calculate the magnitude of operating leverage.
c. Use the measure of operating leverage to determine the amount of net income Bechem will earn if sales increase by 10 percent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Margin of safety
Information concerning a product produced by Hinshaw Company appears here.
|
Sales price per unit
|
$159
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
$34
|
|
Total annual fixed manufacturing and operating costs
|
$912,500
|
Required
Determine the following.
a. Contribution margin per unit.
b. Number of units that Hinshaw must sell to break even.
c. Sales level in units that Hinshaw must reach to earn a profit of $325,000.
d. Determine the margin of safety in units, sales dollars, and as a percentage.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying cost behavior
Required
Identify the following costs as fixed or variable. Costs related to plane trips between San Diego, California, and Orlando, Florida, follow. Pilots are paid on a per trip basis.
a. Pilots’ salaries relative to the number of trips flown.
b. Depreciation relative to the number of planes in service.
c. Cost of refreshments relative to the number of passengers.
d. Pilots’ salaries relative to the number of passengers on a particular trip.
e. Cost of a maintenance check relative to the number of passengers on a particular trip.
f. Fuel costs relative to the number of trips. National Union Bank operates several branch offices in grocery stores. Each branch employs a supervisor and two tellers.
g. Tellers’ salaries relative to the number of tellers in a particular district.
h. Supplies cost relative to the number of transactions processed in a particular branch.
i. Tellers’ salaries relative to the number of customers served at a particular branch.
j. Supervisors’ salaries relative to the number of branches operated.
k. Supervisors’ salaries relative to the number of customers served in a particular branch.
l. Facility rental costs relative to the size of customer deposits.
Costs related to operating a fast food restaurant follow.
m. Depreciation of equipment relative to the number of restaurants.
n. Building rental cost relative to the number of customers served in a particular restaurant.
o. Manager’s salary of a particular restaurant relative to the number of employees.
p. Food cost relative to the number of customers.
q. Utility cost relative to the number of restaurants in operation.
r. Company president’s salary relative to the number of restaurants in operation.
s. Land costs relative to the number of hamburgers sold at a particular restaurant.
t. Depreciation of equipment relative to the number of customers served at a particular restaurant.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost behavior and averaging
Shirley Maze has decided to start Shirley Cleaning, a residential housecleaning service company. She is able to rent cleaning equipment at a cost of $570 per month. Labor costs are expected to be $49 per house cleaned and supplies are expected to cost $4 per house.
Required
a. Determine the total expected cost of equipment rental and the expected cost of equipment rental per house cleaned, assuming that Shirley Cleaning cleans 10, 20, or 30 houses during one month. Is the cost of equipment a fixed or a variable cost?
b. Determine the total expected cost of labor and the expected cost of labor per house cleaned, assuming that Shirley Cleaning cleans 10, 20, or 30 houses during one month. Is the cost of labor a fixed or a variable cost?
c. Determine the total expected cost of supplies and the expected cost of supplies per house cleaned, assuming that Shirley Cleaning cleans 10, 20, or 30 houses during one month. Is the cost of supplies a fixed or a variable cost?
d. Determine the total expected cost of cleaning houses, assuming that Shirley Cleaning cleans 10, 20, or 30 houses during one month.
e. Determine the expected cost per house, assuming that Shirley Cleaning cleans 10, 20, or 30 houses during one month. Why does the cost per unit decrease as the number of houses increases?
f. If Ms. Maze tells you that she prices her services at 25% above cost, would you assume that she means average or actual cost? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Context sensitive nature of cost behavior classifications
First Federal Bank’s start up division establishes new branch banks. Each branch opens with three tellers. Total teller cost per branch is $90,000 per year. The three tellers combined can process up to 70,000 customer transactions per year. If a branch does not attain a volume of at least 40,000 transactions during its first year of operations, it is closed. If the demand for services exceeds 70,000 transactions, an additional teller is hired, and the branch is transferred from the start up division to regular operations.
Required
a. What is the relevant range of activity for new branch banks?
b. Determine the amount of teller cost in total and the teller cost per transaction for a branch that processes 40,000, 50,000, 60,000, or 70,000 transactions. In this case (the activity base is the number of transactions for a specific branch), is the teller cost a fixed or a variable cost?
c. Determine the amount of teller cost in total and the teller cost per branch for First Federal Bank, assuming that the start up division operates 15, 20, 25, or 30 branches. In this case (the activity base is the number of branches), is the teller cost a fixed or a variable cost?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of operating leverage on profitability
Cooper Training Services (CTS) provides instruction on the use of computer software for the employees of its corporate clients. It offers courses in the clients’ offices on the clients’ equipment. The only major expense CTS incurs is instructor salaries; it pays instructors $3,600 per course taught. CTS recently agreed to offer a course of instruction to the employees of Akers Incorporated at a price of $340 per student. Akers estimated that 20 students would attend the course. Base your answer on the preceding information.
Part 1:
Required
a. Relative to the number of students in a single course, is the cost of instruction a fixed or a variable cost?
b. Determine the profit, assuming that 20 students attend the course.
c. Determine the profit, assuming a 20 percent increase in enrollment (i.e., enrollment increases to 24 students). What is the percentage change in profitability?
d. Determine the profit, assuming a 20 percent decrease in enrollment (i.e., enrollment decreases to 16 students). What is the percentage change in profitability?
e. Explain why a 20 percent shift in enrollment produces more than a 20 percent shift in profitability. Use the term that identifies this phenomenon.
Part 2:
The instructor has offered to teach the course for a percentage of tuition fees. Specifically, she wants $210 per person attending the class. Assume that the tuition fee remains at $340 per student. Required
f. Is the cost of instruction a fixed or a variable cost?
g. Determine the profit, assuming that 20 students take the course.
h. Determine the profit, assuming a 20 percent increase in enrollment (i.e., enrollment increases to 24 students). What is the percentage change in profitability?
i. Determine the profit, assuming a 20 percent decrease in enrollment (i.e., enrollment decreases to 16 students). What is the percentage change in profitability?
j. Explain why a 20 percent shift in enrollment produces a proportional 20 percent shift in profitability.
Part 3:
CTS sells a workbook with printed material unique to each course to each student who attends the course. Any workbooks that are not sold must be destroyed. Prior to the first class, CTS printed 20 copies of the books based on the client’s estimate of the number of people who would attend the course. Each workbook costs $20 and is sold to course participants for $31. This cost includes a royalty fee paid to the author and the cost of duplication.
Required
k. Calculate the workbook cost in total and per student, assuming that 16, 20, or 24 students attempt to attend the course.
l. Classify the cost of workbooks as fixed or variable relative to the number of students attending the course.
m. Discuss the risk of holding inventory as it applies to the workbooks.
n. Explain how a just in time inventory system can reduce the cost and risk of holding inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of fixed and variable cost behavior on the risk and rewards of business opportunities
Pacific and Atlantic Universities offer executive training courses to corporate clients. Pacific pays its instructors $5,310 per course taught. Atlantic pays its instructors $295 per student enrolled in the class. Both universities charge executives a $340 tuition fee per course attended.
Required
a. Prepare income statements for Pacific and Atlantic, assuming that 18 students attend a course.
b. Pacific University embarks on a strategy to entice students from Atlantic University by lowering its tuition to $220 per course. Prepare an income statement for Pacific, assuming that the university is successful and enrolls 36 students in its course.
c. Atlantic University embarks on a strategy to entice students from Pacific University by lowering its tuition to $220 per course. Prepare an income statement for Atlantic, assuming that the university is successful and enrolls 36 students in its course.
d. Explain why the strategy described in Requirement b produced a profit but the same strategy described in Requirement c produced a loss.
e. Prepare income statements for Pacific and Atlantic Universities, assuming that 15 students attend a course, assuming that both universities charge executives a $340 tuition fee per course attended.
f. It is always better to have fixed than variable cost. Explain why this statement is false.
g. It is always better to have variable than fixed cost. Explain why this statement is false.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing operating leverage
Adam Copeland is a venture capitalist facing two alternative investment opportunities. He intends to invest $1 million in a start up firm. He is nervous, however, about future economic volatility. He asks you to analyze the following financial data for the past year’s operations of the two firms he is considering and give him some business advice.
|
Variable cost per unit (a)
|
$21.00
|
$10.50
|
|
Sales revenue (8,000 units x $28)
|
$224,000
|
$224,000
|
|
Variable cost (8,000 units x a)
|
(168,000)
|
(84,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
56,000
|
140,000
|
|
Fixed cost
|
(25,000)
|
(109,000)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 31,000
|
$ 31,000
|
Required
a. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the operating leverage for each firm.
b. If the economy expands in coming years, Wells and Bells will both enjoy a 10 percent per year increase in sales, assuming that the selling price remains unchanged. Compute the change in net income for each firm in dollar amount and in percentage. (Note: Since the number of units increases, both revenue and variable cost will increase.)
c. If the economy contracts in coming years, Wells and Bells will both suffer a 10 percent decrease in sales volume, assuming that the selling price remains unchanged. Compute the change in net income for each firm in dollar amount and in percentage. (Note: Since the number of units decreases, both total revenue and total variable cost will decrease.)
d. Write a memo to Adam Copeland with your analyses and advice.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Operating leverage Description of Business for Caterpillar, Inc.
Caterpillar is the leader in construction and mining equipment and diesel and natural gas engines and industrial gas turbines in our size range. The company is also a leading services provider through Cat Financial, Caterpillar Logistics Services Inc., and Caterpillar Remanufacturing Services Inc. Annual sales and revenues are $41.517 billion, making Caterpillar the largest manufacturer in our industry. Caterpillar is also a leading U.S. exporter. Through a global network of independent dealers, Caterpillar builds long term relationships with customers around the world. For over 80 years, the Caterpillar name has been associated with the highest level of quality products and services.
|
Caterpillar, Inc.
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Operating revenue
|
$41,517
|
$36,339
|
|
Operating earnings
|
4,921
|
3,784
|
Description of Business for Sonic Corporation
Sonic Corp. (the Company”) operates and franchises the largest chain of drive in restaurants (Sonic Drive Ins”) in the United States. As of August 31, 2006, the Company had 3,188 Sonic Drive Ins in operation, consisting of 623 Partner Drive Ins and 2,565 Franchise Drive Ins, principally in the southern two thirds of the United States. We own a majority interest, typically at least 60%, and the supervisor and manager of the drive in own a minority interest in each Partner Drive In, which are owned and operated as either a limited liability company or general partnership. Franchise Drive Ins are owned and operated by our franchisees. At a typical Sonic Drive In, a customer drives into one of 24 to 36 covered drive in spaces, orders through an intercom speaker system, and has the food delivered by a carhop within an average of four minutes. Most Sonic Drive Ins also include a drive through lane and patio seating.
|
Sonic Corporation
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Operating revenue
|
$693.3
|
$623.1
|
|
Operating earnings
|
131.6
|
117.4
|
Required
a. Determine which company appears to have the higher operating leverage.
b. Write a paragraph or two explaining why the company you identified in Requirement a might be expected to have the higher operating leverage.
c. If revenues for both companies declined, which company do you think would likely experience the greatest decline in operating earnings? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Operating leverage
The Parent Teacher Association (PTA) of Meadow High School is planning a fund raising campaign. The PTA is considering the possibility of hiring Eric Logan, a world renowned investment counselor, to address the public. Tickets would sell for $28 each. The school has agreed to let the PTA use Harville Auditorium at no cost. Mr. Logan is willing to accept one of two compensation arrangements. He will sign an agreement to receive a fixed fee of $10,000 regardless of the number of tickets sold. Alternatively, he will accept payment of $20 per ticket sold. In communities similar to that in which Meadow is located, Mr. Logan has drawn an audience of approximately 500 people.
Required
a. In front of the class, present a statement showing the expected net income assuming 500 people buy tickets.
b. Divide the class into groups and then organize the groups into four sections. Assign one of the following tasks to each section of groups.
Group Tasks
(1) Assume the PTA pays Mr. Logan a fixed fee of $10,000. Determine the amount of net income that the PTA will earn if ticket sales are 10 percent higher than expected. Calculate the percentage change in net income.
(2) Assume that the PTA pays Mr. Logan a fixed fee of $10,000. Determine the amount of net income that the PTA will earn if ticket sales are 10 percent lower than expected. Calculate the percentage change in net income.
(3) Assume that the PTA pays Mr. Logan $20 per ticket sold. Determine the amount of net income that the PTA will earn if ticket sales are 10 percent higher than expected. Calculate the percentage change in net income.
(4) Assume that the PTA pays Mr. Logan $20 per ticket sold. Determine the amount of net income that the PTA will earn if ticket sales are 10 percent lower than expected. Calculate the percentage change in net income.
c. Have each group select a spokesperson. Have one of the spokespersons in each section of groups go to the board and present the results of the analysis conducted in Requirement b. Resolve any discrepancies in the computations presented at the board and those developed by the other groups.
d. Draw conclusions regarding the risks and rewards associated with operating leverage. At a minimum, answer the following questions.
(1) Which type of cost structure (fixed or variable) produces the higher growth potential in profitability for a company?
(2) Which type of cost structure (fixed or variable) produces the higher risk of declining profitability for a company?
(3) Under what circumstances should a company seek to establish a fixed cost structure?
(4) Under what circumstances should a company seek to establish a variable cost structure?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Fixed versus variable cost
Use the 2006 Form 10 K for Black & Decker Corp. (B&D) to complete the requirements below. To obtain the Form 10 K you can use the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A, or it can be found under Investor Relations” on the company’s corporate. Be sure to read carefully the following portions of the document.
- General Development of the Business” on page 1.
- Consolidated Statement of Earnings” on page 32.
Required
a. Calculate the percentage decrease in B&D’s sales and its operating income” from 2005 to 2006.
b. Would fixed costs or variable costs be more likely to explain why B&D’s operating earnings decreased by a bigger percentage than its sales?
c. On page 38 B&D reported that it incurred product development costs of $139.4 million in 2006. If this cost is thought of in the context of the number of units of products sold, should it be considered as primarily fixed or variable in nature?
d. If the product development costs are thought of in the context of the number of new products developed, should it be considered as primarily fixed or variable in nature?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Operating leverage, margin of safety, and cost behavior
The article Up Front: More Condensing at the Digest?” in the October 19, 1998, issue of Business Week reported that Thomas Ryder, CEO of Reader’s Digest Association, was considering a spin off of Reader’s Digest’s direct marketing operations into a joint venture with Time Warner. The article’s author, Robert McNatt, noted that the direct marketing of books, music, and videos is a far larger part of the Reader’s Digest business than is its namesake magazine. Furthermore, the article stated that 1998 direct marketing sales of $1.6 billion were down 11 percent from 1997. The decline in revenue caused the division’s operating profits to decline 58 percent. The article stated that the contemplated alliance with Time Warner could provide some fast help. Gerald Levin, Time Warner chairman, has said that his company’s operations provide customer service and product fulfillment far better than other Web sellers do because of Time Warner’s established 250 websites.
Required
a. Write a memo explaining how an 11 percent decrease in sales could result in a 58 percent decline in operating profits.
b. Explain briefly how the decline in revenue will affect the company’s margin of safety.
c. Explain why a joint venture between Reader’s Digest’s direct marketing division and Time Warner could work to the advantage of both companies.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Dilemma Profitability versus social conscience (effects of cost behavior)
Advances in biological technology have enabled two research companies, Bio Labs Inc. and Scientific Associates, to develop an insect resistant corn seed. Neither company is financially strong enough to develop the distribution channels necessary to bring the product to world markets. World Agra Distributors Inc. has negotiated contracts with both companies for the exclusive right to market their seed. Bio Labs signed an agreement to receive an annual royalty of $1,000,000. In contrast, Scientific Associates chose an agreement that provides for a royalty of $0.50 per pound of seed sold. Both agreements have a 10 year term. During 2010, World Agra sold approximately 1,600,000 pounds of the Bio Labs Inc. seed and 2,400,000 pounds of the Scientific Associates seed. Both types of seed were sold for $1.25 per pound. By the end of 2010, it was apparent that the seed developed by Scientific Associates was superior. Although insect infestation was virtually nonexistent for both types of seed, the seed developed by Scientific Associates produced corn that was sweeter and had consistently higher yields. World Agra Distributors’ chief financial officer, Roger Weatherstone, recently retired. To the astonishment of the annual planning committee, Mr. Weatherstone’s replacement, Ray Borrough, adamantly recommended that the marketing department develop a major advertising campaign to promote the seed developed by Bio Labs Inc. The planning committee reluctantly approved the recommendation. A $100,000 ad campaign was launched; the ads emphasized the ability of the Bio Labs seed to avoid insect infestation. The campaign was silent with respect to taste or crop yield. It did not mention the seed developed by Scientific Associates. World Agra’s sales staff was instructed to push the Bio Labs seed and to sell the Scientific Associates seed only on customer demand. Although total sales remained relatively constant during 2011, sales of the Scientific Associates seed fell to approximately 1,300,000 pounds while sales of the Bio Labs Inc. seed rose to 2,700,000 pounds.
Required
a. Determine the amount of increase or decrease in profitability experienced by World Agra in 2011 as a result of promoting Bio Labs seed. Support your answer with appropriate commentary.
b. Did World Agra’s customers in particular and society in general benefit or suffer from the decision to promote the Bio Labs seed?
c. Review the standards of ethical conduct in Exhibit 10.14 of Chapter 10 and comment on whether Mr. Borrough’s recommendation violated any of the principles in the Statement of Ethical Professional Practice.
d. Comment on your belief regarding the adequacy of the Statement of Ethical Professional Practice for Managerial Accountants to direct the conduct of management accountants.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
New budget constraints have pressured Body Perfect Gym to control costs. The owner of the gym, Mr. Ripple, has notified division managers that their job performance evaluations will be highly influenced by their ability to minimize costs. The gym has three divisions: weight lifting, aerobics, and spinning. The owner has formulated a report showing how much it cost to operate each of the three divisions last year. In preparing the report, Mr. Ripple identified several indirect costs that must be allocated among the divisions. These indirect costs are $4,200 of laundry expense, $48,000 of supplies, $350,000 of office rent, $50,000 of janitorial services, and $120,000 for administrative salaries. To provide a reasonably accurate cost allocation, Mr. Ripple has identified several potential cost drivers. These drivers and their association with each division follow.
|
Cost Driver
|
Weight Lifting
|
Aerobics
|
Spinning
|
Total
|
|
Number of participants
|
26
|
16
|
14
|
56
|
|
Number of instructors
|
10
|
8
|
6
|
24
|
|
Square feet of gym space
|
12,000
|
6,000
|
7,000
|
25,000
|
|
Number of staff
|
2
|
2
|
1
|
5
|
Required
a. Identify the appropriate cost objects.
b. Identify the most appropriate cost driver for each indirect cost, and compute the allocation rate for assigning each indirect cost to the cost objects.
c. Determine the amount of supplies expense that should be allocated to each of the three divisions.
d. The spinning manager wants to use the number of staff rather than the number of instructors as the allocation base for the supplies expense. Explain why the spinning manager would take this position.
e. Identify two cost drivers other than your choice for Requirement b that could be used to allocate the cost of the administrative salaries to the three divisions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Respond to the following statement: The allocation base chosen is unimportant. What is important in product costing is that overhead costs be assigned to production in a specific period by an allocation process.”
2. Larry Kwang insists that the costs of his school’s fundraising project should be determined after the project is complete. He argues that only after the project is complete can its costs be determined accurately and that it is a waste of time to try to estimate future costs. Georgia Sundum counters that waiting until the project is complete will not provide timely information for planning expenditures. How would you arbitrate this discussion? Explain the trade offs between accuracy and timeliness.
3. Define the term cost pool. How are cost pools important in allocating costs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of cash dividends on financial statements
On October 1, 2011, Evans Corporation declared a $50,000 cash dividend to be paid on December 30 to shareholders of record on November 20.
Required
Record the events occurring on October 1, November 20, and December 30 in a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA).
|
Date
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Com. Stock
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for stock dividends
Magee Corporation issued a 4 percent stock dividend on 30,000 shares of its $10 par common stock. At the time of the dividend, the market value of the stock was $30 per share.
Required
a. Compute the amount of the stock dividend.
b. Show the effects of the stock dividend on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Com. Stk
|
+
|
PIC in Excess
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Merck & Company is one of the world’s largest pharmaceutical companies. The following data were taken from the company’s 2007 annual report.
|
Fiscal Years Ending
|
|
|
December 31, 2007
|
December 31, 2006
|
|
Net earnings (in millions)
|
$3,275.4
|
$4,433.8
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$1.51
|
$2.04
|
The following data were taken from public stock price quotes.
|
Stock price per share on March 3, 2008: $44.06
|
|
(Two months after the end of Merck’s 2007 fiscal year.)
|
|
Stock price per share on March 1, 2007: $43.99
|
|
(Two months after the end of Merck’s 2007 fiscal year.)
|
Required
a. Compute Merck’s price earnings ratio for March 3, 2008, and March 1, 2007.
b. Did the financial markets appear to be more optimistic about Merck’s future performance on March 1, 2007, or March 3, 2008?
c. Based on the information provided, estimate approximately how many shares of stock Merck had outstanding as of December 31, 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of business structure on financial statements
Upton Company was started on January 1, 2011, when the owners invested $160,000 cash in the business. During 2011, the company earned cash revenues of $120,000 and incurred cash expenses of $82,000. The company also paid cash distributions of $15,000.
Required
Prepare a 2011 income statement, capital statement (statement of changes in equity), balance sheet, and statement of cash flows using each of the following assumptions. (Consider each assumption separately.)
a. Upton is a sole proprietorship owned by J. Upton.
b. Upton is a partnership with two partners, Dan and Nancy Upton. Dan invested $100,000 and Nancy invested $60,000 of the $160,000 cash that was used to start the business. Nancy was expected to assume the vast majority of the responsibility for operating the business. The partnership agreement called for Nancy to receive 60 percent of the profits and Dan the remaining 40 percent. With regard to the $15,000 distribution, Nancy withdrew $6,000 from the business and Dan withdrew $9,000.
c. Upton is a corporation. The owners were issued 10,000 shares of $10 par common stock when they invested the $160,000 cash in the business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and reporting stock transactions and cash dividends across two accounting cycles
Flesher Corporation was authorized to issue 100,000 shares of $5 par common stock and 50,000 shares of $50 par, 5 percent, cumulative preferred stock. Flesher Corporation completed the following transactions during its first two years of operation.
2010
Jan. 2 Issued 15,000 shares of $5 par common stock for $8 per share.
15 Issued 2,000 shares of $50 par preferred stock for $55 per share.
Feb. 14 Issued 20,000 shares of $5 par common stock for $9 per share.
Dec. 31 During the year, earned $310,000 of cash service revenue and paid $240,000 of cash operating expenses.
31 Declared the cash dividend on outstanding shares of preferred stock for 2010. The dividend will be paid on January 31 to stockholders of record on January 15, 2011.
2011
Jan. 31 Paid the cash dividend declared on December 31, 2010.
Mar. 1 Issued 3,000 shares of $50 par preferred stock for $60 per share.
June 1 Purchased 500 shares of common stock as treasury stock at $9 per share.
Dec. 31 During the year, earned $250,000 of cash service revenue and paid $175,000 of cash operating expenses.
31 Declared the dividend on the preferred stock and a $0.50 per share dividend on the common stock.
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2010.
c. Prepare the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and reporting treasury stock transactions
Millsaps Corp. completed the following transactions in 2010, the first year of operation.
1. Issued 30,000 shares of $10 par common stock at par.
2. Issued 2,000 shares of $30 stated value preferred stock at $33 per share.
3. Purchased 1,000 shares of common stock as treasury stock for $12 per share.
4. Declared a 5 percent dividend on preferred stock.
5. Sold 300 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share.
6. Paid the cash dividend on preferred stock that was declared in Event 4.
7. Earned cash service revenue of $75,000 and incurred cash operating expenses of $42,000.
8. Appropriated $6,000 of retained earnings.
Required
a. Organize the transaction in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet as of December 31, 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and reporting treasury stock transactions
Carter Corporation reports the following information in its January 1, 2010, balance sheet:
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value,
|
|
|
50,000 shares authorized, 30,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$300,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par value
|
150,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
100,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$550,000
|
During 2010, Carter was affected by the following accounting events.
1. Purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock at $20 per share.
2. Reissued 600 shares of treasury stock at $22 per share.
3. Earned $64,000 of cash service revenues.
4. Paid $38,000 of cash operating expenses.
Required
Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the year end balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and reporting stock dividends
Davis Corp. completed the following transactions in 2010, the first year of operation.
1. Issued 30,000 shares of $20 par common stock for $30 per share.
2. Issued 5,000 shares of $50 par, 4 percent, preferred stock at $51 per share.
3. Paid the annual cash dividend to preferred shareholders.
4. Issued a 5 percent stock dividend on the common stock. The market value at the dividend declaration date was $40 per share.
5. Later that year, issued a 2 for 1 split on the 31,500 shares of outstanding common stock.
6. Earned $195,000 of cash service revenues and paid $120,000 of cash operating expenses.
Required
a. Record each of these events in a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). Use NA to indicate that an element is not affected by the event.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
|
|
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
|
|
|
Pfd. Stk.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
PIC in Excess PS
|
+
|
PIC in Excess CS
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at the end of 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet
The stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet for Atkins Company at December 31, 2011, is as follows.
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Paid in capital
|
|
|
|
Preferred stock, ? par value, 6% cumulative,
|
|
|
|
50,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
40,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$400,000
|
|
|
Common stock, $10 stated value,
|
|
|
|
150,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
60,000 shares issued and ? outstanding
|
600,000
|
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par–preferred
|
30,000
|
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par–common
|
200,000
|
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
|
$1,230,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
250,000
|
|
Treasury stock, 2,000 shares
|
|
(50,000)
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
$1,430,000
|
Required
a. What is the par value per share of the preferred stock?
b. What is the dividend per share on the preferred stock?
c. What is the number of common stock shares outstanding?
d. What was the average issue price per share (price for which the stock was issued) of the common stock?
e. Explain the difference between the average issue price and the market price of the common stock.
f. If Atkins declared a 2 for 1 stock split on the common stock, how many shares would be outstanding after the split? What amount would be transferred from the retained earnings account because of the stock split? Theoretically, what would be the market price of the common stock immediately after the stock split?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Different forms of business organization
Brian Walter was working to establish a business enterprise with four of his wealthy friends. Each of the five individuals would receive a 20 percent ownership interest in the company. A primary goal of establishing the enterprise was to minimize the amount of income taxes paid. Assume that the five investors are taxed at the rate of 15% on dividend income received from corporations and that the corporate tax rate is 30 percent. Also assume that the new company is expected to earn $400,000 of cash income before taxes during its first year of operation. All earnings are expected to be immediately distributed to the owners.
Required
Calculate the amount of after tax cash flow available to each investor if the business is established as a partnership versus a corporation. Write a memo explaining the advantages and disadvantages of these two forms of business organization. Explain why a limited liability company may be a better choice than either a partnership or a corporation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of equity transactions on financial statements
The following events were experienced by Baskin, Inc.
1. Issued common stock for cash.
2. Paid cash to purchase treasury stock.
3. Declared a cash dividend.
4. Issued cumulative preferred stock.
5. Issued noncumulative preferred stock.
6. Appropriated retained earnings.
7. Sold treasury stock for an amount of cash that was more than the cost of the treasury stock.
8. Distributed a stock dividend.
9. Declared a 2 for 1 stock split on the common stock.
10. Paid a cash dividend that was previously declared.
Required
Show the effect of each event on the elements of the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the following one. Use + for increase, for decrease, and NA for not affected. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). The first transaction is entered as an example.
|
Event No.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
+
|
|
NA
|
|
+
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
+
|
FA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Google, Inc., operates the world’s largest Internet search engine. International Business Machines Corporation (IBM) is one of the world’s largest computer hardware and software companies. The following data were taken from the companies’ December 31, 2007, annual reports.
|
|
Google, Inc.
|
IBM
|
|
Net earnings (in thousands)
|
$4,203.7
|
$10,418.0
|
|
Earnings per share
|
$5.31
|
$7.32
|
The following data were taken from public stock price quotes.
|
Stock price per share on March 3, 2007:
|
$457.02
|
$114.23
|
|
(Two months after the end of
|
|
|
|
their 2007 fiscal years.)
|
|
|
Required
a. Compute the price earnings ratios for each company as of March 3, 2008.
b. Which company’s future performance did the financial markets appear to be more optimistic about as of March 3, 2008?
c. Provide some reasons why the market may view one company’s future more optimistically than the other’s.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Understanding real world annual reports
Required
Use the Topps Company’s annual report to answer the following questions.
a. Does Topps’ common stock have a par value, and if so how much is it?
b. How many shares of Topps’ common stock were outstanding as of February 25, 2006? Do not forget to consider treasury stock.
c. The dollar value balance in Topps’ Treasury Stock account is larger than the balance in its Common Stock and Additional Paid In Capital accounts. How can this be?
d. How many members of Topps’ Board of Directors are also officers (employees) of the company as of February 25, 2006?
e. What was the highest and lowest price per share that Topps’ common stock sold for during the fiscal year ending on February 25, 2006?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Missing information
Listed here are the stockholders’ equity sections of three public companies for years ending in 2007 and 2006.
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Wendy’s (dollar amounts are presented in thousands)
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock, ?? Stated Value per share, authorized:
|
|
|
|
200,000,000; 130,241,000 in 2007 and 129,548,000 in
|
|
|
|
2006 shares issued, respectively
|
$ 13,024
|
$ 12,955
|
|
Capital in Excess of Stated Value
|
1,110,363
|
1,089,825
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
1,287,963
|
1,241,489
|
|
Acc. Other Comp. Income (Exp.)
|
9,959
|
(13,446)
|
|
Treasury Stock, at cost: (42,844,000 shares in 2007;
|
|
|
|
33,847,000 shares in 2006)
|
(1,617,178)
|
1,319,146
|
|
Coca Cola (amounts are presented in millions)
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common Stock, ?? Par Value per share, authorized:
|
|
|
|
5,600; issued: 3,519 shares in 2007
|
|
|
|
and 3,511 shares in 2006
|
$ 880
|
$ 878
|
|
Capital Surplus
|
7,378
|
5,983
|
|
Reinvested Earnings
|
36,235
|
33,468
|
|
Acc. Other Comp. Inc. (loss)
|
626
|
(1,291)
|
|
Treasury Stock, at cost: (1,201 shares in 2007;
|
|
|
|
1,193 shares in 2006)
|
(23,375)
|
(22,118)
|
|
Harley Davidson (dollar amounts are presented in thousands)
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock, ?? Par Value per share, authorized:
|
|
|
|
800,000,000, issued: 335,211,201 in 2007 and
|
|
|
|
334,328,193 shares in 2006
|
3,352
|
3,343
|
|
Additional Paid in Capital
|
812,224
|
766,382
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
6,117,567
|
5,460,629
|
|
Acc. Other Comp. Inc. (loss)
|
(137,258)
|
(206,662)
|
|
Treasury Stock, at cost: 96,725,399 for 2007 and
|
|
|
|
76,275,837 for 2006
|
(4,420,394)
|
(3,266,955)
|
Required
a. Divide the class in three sections and divide each section into groups of three to five students.
Assign each section one of the companies.
Group Tasks
Based on the company assigned to your group, answer the following questions.
b. What is the per share par or stated value of the common stock in 2006?
c. What was the average issue price of the common stock for each year?
d. How many shares of stock are outstanding at the end of each year?
e. What is the average cost per share of the treasury stock for 2006?
f. Do the data suggest that your company was profitable in 2006?
g. Can you determine the amount of net income from the information given? What is missing?
h. What is the total stockholders’ equity of your company for each year?
Class Discussion
i. Have each group select a representative to present the information about its company.
Compare the share issue price and the par or stated value of the companies.
j. Compare the average issue price to the current market price for each of the companies.
Speculate about what might cause the difference.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Finding stock market information
Use one of the many financial information sites on the Internet, such as CNBC, CNNMoney, Google Finance, or Yahoo Finance, to complete the requirements below. Some of the sites require you to enter a company’s stock trading symbol in order to retrieve information. These sites will provide a function to find a company’s stock symbol based on its name.
Required
For each company listed here, provide the requested information based on the most recent data available.
|
Company Name
|
Closing Price of Stock
|
P/E Ratio
|
Dividend per Share
|
Dividend Yield
|
|
Berkshire Hathaway A ExxonMobil
|
|
|
|
|
|
Johnson & Johnson
|
|
|
|
|
|
Kroger Walgreen
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Dilemma Bad news versus very bad news
Louise Stinson, the chief financial officer of Bostonian Corporation, was on her way to the president’s office. She was carrying the latest round of bad news. There would be no executive bonuses this year. Corporate profits were down. Indeed, if the latest projections held true, the company would report a small loss on the year end income statement. Executive bonuses were tied to corporate profits. The executive compensation plan provided for 10 percent of net earnings to be set aside for bonuses. No profits meant no bonuses. While things looked bleak, Stinson had a plan that might help soften the blow. After informing the company president of the earnings forecast, Stinson made the following suggestion: Since the company was going to report a loss anyway, why not report a big loss? She reasoned that the directors and stockholders would not be much more angry if the company reported a large loss than if it reported a small one. There were several questionable assets that could be written down in the current year. This would increase the current year’s loss but would reduce expenses in subsequent accounting periods. For example, the company was carrying damaged inventory that was estimated to have a value of $2,500,000. If this estimate were revised to $500,000, the company would have to recognize a $2,000,000 loss in the current year. However, next year when the goods were sold, the expense for cost of goods sold would be $2,000,000 less and profits would be higher by that amount. Although the directors would be angry this year, they would certainly be happy next year. The strategy would also have the benefit of adding $200,000 to next year’s executive bonus pool ($2,000,000 X 0.10). Furthermore, it could not hurt this year’s bonus pool because there would be no pool this year since the company is going to report a loss. Some of the other items that Stinson is considering include (1) converting from straight line to accelerated depreciation, (2) increasing the percentage of receivables estimated to be uncollectible in the current year and lowering the percentage in the following year, and (3) raising the percentage of estimated warranty claims in the current period and lowering it in the following period. Finally, Stinson notes that two of the company’s department stores have been experiencing losses. The company could sell these stores this year and thereby improve earnings next year. Stinson admits that the sale would result in significant losses this year, but she smiles as she thinks of next year’s bonus check.
Required
a. Explain how each of the three numbered strategies for increasing the amount of the current year’s loss would affect the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet in the current year. How would the other elements of the balance sheet be affected?
b. If Stinson’s strategy were effectively implemented, how would it affect the stockholders’ equity in subsequent accounting periods?
c. Comment on the ethical implications of running the company for the sake of management (maximization of bonuses) versus the maximization of return to stockholders.
d. Formulate a bonus plan that will motivate managers to maximize the value of the firm instead of motivating them to manipulate the reporting process.
e. How would Stinson’s strategy of overstating the amount of the reported loss in the current year affect the company’s current P/E ratio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Analyzing PepsiCo’s equity structure
Using either PepsiCo’s most current Form 10 K or the company’s annual report, answer the questions below. To obtain the Form 10 K use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A or the company’s website. The company’s annual report is available on its website.
Required
a. What is the book value of PepsiCo’s stockholders’ equity that is shown on the company’s balance sheet?
b. What is the par value of PepsiCo’s common stock?
c. Does PepsiCo have any treasury stock? If so, how many shares of treasury stock does the company hold?
d. Why does the stock of a company such as a PepsiCo have a market value that is higher than its book value?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mensa Mountaineering Company (MMC) provides guided mountain climbing expeditions in the Rocky Mountains. Its only major expense is guide salaries; it pays each guide $4,800 per climbing expedition. MMC charges its customers $1,500 per expedition and expects to take five climbers on each expedition.
Part 1
Base your answers on the preceding information.
Required
a. Determine the total cost of guide salaries and the cost of guide salaries per climber assuming that four, five, or six climbers are included in a trip. Relative to the number of climbers in a single expedition, is the cost of guides a fixed or a variable cost?
b. Relative to the number of expeditions, is the cost of guides a fixed or a variable cost?
c. Determine the profit of an expedition assuming that five climbers are included in the trip.
d. Determine the profit assuming a 20 percent increase (six climbers total) in expedition revenue. What is the percentage change in profitability?
e. Determine the profit assuming a 20 percent decrease (four climbers total) in expedition revenue. What is the percentage change in profitability?
f. Explain why a 20 percent shift in revenue produces more than a 20 percent shift in profitability. What term describes this phenomenon?
Part 2
Assume that the guides offer to make the climbs for a percentage of expedition fees. Specifically, MMC will pay guides $960 per climber on the expedition. Assume also that the expedition fee charged to climbers remains at $1,500 per climber.
Required
g. Determine the total cost of guide salaries and the cost of guide salaries per climber assuming that four, five, or six climbers are included in a trip. Relative to the number of climbers in a single expedition, is the cost of guides a fixed or a variable cost?
h. Relative to the number of expeditions, is the cost of guides a fixed or a variable cost?
i. Determine the profit of an expedition assuming that five climbers are included in the trip.
j. Determine the profit assuming a 20 percent increase (six climbers total) in expedition revenue. What is the percentage change in profitability?
k. Determine the profit assuming a 20 percent decrease (four climbers total) in expedition revenue. What is the percentage change in profitability?
l. Explain why a 20 percent shift in revenue does not produce more than a 20 percent shift in profitability.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying cost behavior
Bluffpark Kitchen, a fast food restaurant company, operates a chain of restaurants across the nation. Each restaurant employs eight people; one is a manager paid a salary plus a bonus equal to 3 percent of sales. Other employees, two cooks, one dishwasher, and four waitresses, are paid salaries. Each manager is budgeted $3,000 per month for advertising cost.
Required
Classify each of the following costs incurred by Bluffpark Kitchen as fixed, variable, or mixed.
a. Advertising costs relative to the number of customers for a particular restaurant.
b. Rental costs relative to the number of restaurants.
c. Cooks’ salaries at a particular location relative to the number of customers.
d. Cost of supplies (cups, plates, spoons, etc.) relative to the number of customers.
e. Manager’s compensation relative to the number of customers.
f. Waitresses’ salaries relative to the number of restaurants.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying cost behavior
At the various activity levels shown, Johnston Company incurred the following costs.
|
|
Units Sold
|
20
|
40
|
60
|
80
|
100
|
|
a.
|
Depreciation cost per unit
|
240.00
|
120.00
|
80.00
|
60.00
|
48.00
|
|
b.
|
Total rent cost
|
3,200.00
|
3,200.00
|
3,200.00
|
3,200.00
|
3,200.00
|
|
c.
|
Total cost of shopping bags
|
2.00
|
4.00
|
6.00
|
8.00
|
10.00
|
|
d.
|
Cost per unit of merchandise sold
|
90.00
|
90.00
|
90.00
|
90.00
|
90.00
|
|
e.
|
Rental cost per unit of merchandise sold
|
36.00
|
18.00
|
12.00
|
9.00
|
7.20
|
|
f.
|
Total phone expense
|
80.00
|
100.00
|
120.00
|
140.00
|
160.00
|
|
g.
|
Cost per unit of supplies
|
1.00
|
1.00
|
1.00
|
1.00
|
1.00
|
|
h.
|
Total insurance cost
|
480.00
|
480.00
|
480.00
|
480.00
|
480.00
|
|
i.
|
Total salary cost
|
$1,200.00
|
$1,600.00
|
$2,000.00
|
$2,400.00
|
$2,800.00
|
|
j.
|
Total cost of goods sold
|
1,800.00
|
3,600.00
|
5,400.00
|
7,200.00
|
9,000.00
|
Required
Identify each of these costs as fixed, variable, or mixed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Current liabilities
The following selected transactions were taken from the books of Chandra Company for 2010.
1. On February 1, 2010, borrowed $60,000 cash from the local bank. The note had a 6 percent interest rate and was due on June 1, 2010.
2. Cash sales for the year amounted to $310,000 plus sales tax at the rate of 7 percent.
3. Chandra provides a 90 day warranty on the merchandise sold. The warranty expense is estimated to be 1 percent of sales.
4. Paid the sales tax to the state sales tax agency on $280,000 of the sales.
5. Paid the note due on June 1 and the related interest.
6. On November 1, 2010, borrowed $50,000 cash from the local bank. The note had a 6 percent interest rate and a one year term to maturity.
7. Paid $2,400 in warranty repairs.
8. A customer has filed a lawsuit against Chandra for $500,000 for breach of contract. The company attorney does not believe the suit has merit.
Required
a. Answer the following questions:
(1) What amount of cash did Chandra pay for interest during the year?
(2) What amount of interest expense is reported on Chandra’s income statement for the year?
(3) What is the amount of warranty expense for the year?
b. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2010.
c. Show the effect of these transactions on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. Use a + to indicate increase, a for decrease, and NA for not affected. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). The first transaction is recorded as an example.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
+
|
FA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Contingent liabilities
Required
How should each of the following situations be reported in the financial statements?
a. It has been determined that one of the company’s products has caused a safety hazard. It is considered probable that liabilities have been incurred and a reasonable estimate of the amount can be made.
b. A company warehouse is located in a section of the city that has routinely flooded in the past. Consequently the company can no longer find a source of insurance for the warehouse. No flood has yet occurred this year.
c. Because of newly passed legislation, a company will have to upgrade its facilities over the next two years. Significant expenditures will occur, but at this time the amount has not been determined.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multistep income statement and classified balance sheet
Required
Use the following information to prepare a multistep income statement and a classified balance sheet for Beamer Equipment Co. for 2010.
|
Salaries expense
|
$ 96,000
|
Beginning retained earnings
|
$ 10,400
|
|
Common stock
|
40,000
|
Warranties payable (short term)
|
1,300
|
|
Notes receivable (short term)
|
12,000
|
Gain on sale of equipment
|
6,400
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
4,000
|
Operating expenses
|
70,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
30,000
|
Cash flow from investing activities
|
80,000
|
|
Notes payable (long term)
|
103,600
|
Prepaid rent
|
9,600
|
|
Salvage value of building
|
4,000
|
Land
|
36,000
|
|
Interest payable (short term)
|
1,800
|
Cash
|
17,800
|
|
Uncollectible accounts expense
|
10,800
|
Inventory
|
122,800
|
|
Supplies
|
1,600
|
Accounts payable
|
46,000
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
Interest expense
|
24,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
4,200
|
Salaries payable
|
9,200
|
|
Sales revenue
|
396,000
|
Unearned revenue
|
52,600
|
|
Dividends
|
8,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
143,000
|
|
Warranty expense
|
3,400
|
Accounts receivable
|
90,000
|
|
Interest receivable (short term)
|
500
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of a term loan on financial statements
On January 1, 2008, Holmes Co. borrowed cash from First City Bank by issuing an $80,000 face value, three year term note that had a 7 percent annual interest rate. The note is to be repaid by making annual payments of $30,484 that include both interest and principal on December 31. Holmes invested the proceeds from the loan in land that generated lease revenues of $40,000 cash per year.
Required
a. Prepare an amortization schedule for the three year period.
b. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.
c. Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for each of the three years.
d. Does cash outflow from operating activities remain constant or change each year? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for a line of credit
Sayles Co. uses a line of credit to help finance its inventory purchases. Sayles sells ski equipment and uses the line of credit to build inventory for its peak sales months, which tend to be clustered in the winter months. Account balances at the beginning of 2010 were as follows.
|
Cash
|
$80,000
|
|
Inventory
|
65,000
|
|
Common stock
|
70,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
75,000
|
Sayles experienced the following transactions for January, February, and March, 2010.
1. January 1, 2010, obtained approval for a line of credit of up to $300,000. Funds are to be obtained or repaid on the first day of each month. The interest rate is the bank prime rate plus 1 percent.
2. January 1, 2010, borrowed $50,000 on the line of credit. The bank’s prime interest rate is 5 percent for January.
3. January 15, purchased inventory on account, $82,000.
4. January 31, paid other operating expenses of $12,000.
5. In January, sold inventory for $90,000 on account. The inventory had cost $62,000.
6. January 31, paid the interest due on the line of credit.
7. February 1, borrowed $80,000 on the line of credit. The bank’s prime rate is 6 percent for February.
8. February 1, paid the accounts payable from transaction 3.
9. February 10, collected $81,000 of the sales on account.
10. February 20, purchased inventory on account, $96,000.
11. February sales on account were $130,000. The inventory had cost $91,000.
12. February 28, paid the interest due on the line of credit.
13. March 1, repaid $25,000 on the line of credit. The bank’s prime rate is 5 percent for March.
14. March 5, paid $70,000 of the accounts payable.
15. March 10, collected $120,000 from accounts receivable.
16. March 20, purchased inventory on account, $78,000.
17. March sales on account were $165,000. The inventory had cost $87,000.
18. March 31, paid the interest due on the line of credit.
Required
a. What is the amount of interest expense for January? February? March?
b. What amount of cash was paid for interest in January? February? March?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of a line of credit on financial statements
Hulse Company has a line of credit with Bay Bank. Hulse can borrow up to $250,000 at any time over the course of the 2010 calendar year. The following table shows the prime rate expressed as an annual percentage along with the amounts borrowed and repaid during 2010. Hulse agreed to pay interest at an annual rate equal to 1 percent above the bank’s prime rate. Funds are borrowed or repaid on the first day of each month. Interest is payable in cash on the last day of the month. The interest rate is applied to the outstanding monthly balance. For example, Hulse pays 6 percent (5 percent + 1 percent) annual interest on $70,000 for the month of January.
|
|
Amount Borrowed
|
Prime Rate for
|
|
Month
|
or (Repaid)
|
the Month, %
|
|
January
|
$70,000
|
5
|
|
February
|
40,000
|
5
|
|
March
|
(20,000)
|
6
|
|
April through October
|
No change
|
No change
|
|
November
|
(30,000)
|
6
|
|
December
|
(20,000)
|
5
|
Hulse earned $22,000 of cash revenue during 2010.
Required
a. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for 2010.
c. Write a memo discussing the advantages to a business of arranging a line of credit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of debt transactions on financial statements
Required
Show the effect of each of the following independent accounting events on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the following one. Use + for increase, for decrease, and NA for not affected. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
Event No.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
a
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
+
|
FA
|
a. Issued a bond at face value.
b. Made an interest payment on a bond that had been issued at face value.
c. Borrowed funds using a line of credit.
d. Made an interest payment for funds that had been borrowed against a line of credit.
e. Made a cash payment on a note payable for both interest and principal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Texas Instruments, Inc., claims to be the world leader in digital signal processing and analog technologies, the semiconductor engines of the Internet age.” Eastman Kodak Company manufactures Kodak film, cameras and related products. The following data were taken from the companies’ December 31, 2007, annual reports. Dollar amounts are in millions.
|
|
Eastman Kodak
|
Texas Instruments
|
|
Current assets
|
$ 6,053
|
$ 6,918
|
|
Current liabilities
|
4,446
|
2,025
|
|
Total assets
|
13,659
|
12,667
|
|
Total liabilities
|
10,630
|
2,692
|
Required
a. Compute the current ratio for each company.
b. Compute the debt to assets ratio for each company.
c. Based on the ratios computed in Requirements a and b, which company had the better liquidity in 2007?
d. Based on the ratios computed in Requirements a and b, which company had the better solvency in 2007?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Using current ratios to make comparisons
The following accounting information pertains to Adams and Hood companies at the end of 2010.
|
Account Title
|
Adams
|
Hood
|
|
Cash
|
$ 12,000
|
$ 15,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
20,000
|
55,000
|
|
Building
|
90,000
|
80,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
22,000
|
25,000
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
|
Land
|
35,000
|
40,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
25,000
|
35,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
220,000
|
250,000
|
|
Expenses
|
190,000
|
230,000
|
Required
a. Organize the class into two sections and divide each section into groups of three to five students. Assign each of the sections one of the companies.
Group Tasks
(1) Identify the current assets and current liabilities, and compute the current ratio for the particular company assigned to the group.
(2) Assuming that all assets and liabilities are listed here, compute the debt to assets ratio for the particular company assigned to the group.
Class Discussion
b. Have a representative from each section report the current ratio and debt to assets ratio for their respective companies.
c. Solicit comments regarding which company has the greater financial risk in both the short and long term.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Case Unusual types of liabilities
In the liabilities section of its 2007 balance sheet, Wachovia Corporation reported noninterest bearing deposits” of over $60 billion. Wachovia is a very large banking company. In the liabilities section of its 2007 balance sheet, Newmont Mining Corporation reported reclamation and remediation liabilities” of more than $623 million. Newmont Mining is involved in gold mining and refining activities. In the accrued liabilities reported on its 2007 balance sheet, Conoco Phillips included $1.1 billion for accrued dismantlement, removal, and environmental costs.”
Required
a. For each of the preceding liabilities, write a brief explanation of what you believe the nature of the liability to be and how the company will pay it off. To develop your answers, think about the nature of the industry in which each of the companies operates.
b. Of the three liabilities described, which do you think poses the most risk for the company? In other words, for which liability are actual costs most likely to exceed the liability reported on the balance sheet? Uncertainty creates risk.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Using the current ratio
The following information was drawn from the balance sheets of the Alberta and Ottawa Companies.
|
|
Alberta Company
|
Ottawa Company
|
|
Current assets
|
$45,000
|
$72,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
28,000
|
54,000
|
Required
a. Compute the current ratio for each company.
b. Which company has the greater likelihood of being able to pay its bills?
c. Assuming that both companies have the same amount of total assets, which company would produce the higher return on assets ratio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Debt versus equity financing
Mack Company plans to invest $50,000 in land that will produce annual rent revenue equal to 15 percent of the investment starting on January 1, 2007. The revenue will be collected in cash at the end of each year, starting December 31, 2007. Mack can obtain the cash necessary to purchase the land from two sources. Funds can be obtained by issuing $50,000 of 10 percent, five year bonds at their face amount. Interest due on the bonds is payable on December 31 of each year with the first payment due on December 31, 2007. Alternatively, the $50,000 needed to invest in land can be obtained from equity financing. In this case, the stockholders (holders of the equity) will be paid a $5,000 annual distribution. Mack Company is in a 30 percent income tax bracket.
Required
a. Prepare an income statement and statement of cash flows for 2007 under the two alternative financing proposals.
b. Write a short memorandum explaining why one financing alternative provides more net income but less cash flow than the other.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporate Governance Sometimes debt is not debt
David Sheridan was a well respected CPA in his mid fifties. After spending 10 years at a national accounting firm, he was hired by Global, Inc., a multinational corporation headquartered in the United States. He patiently worked his way up to the top of Global’s accounting department and in the early 1990s, took over as chief financial officer for the company. As the Internet began to explode, management at Global, Inc., decided to radically change the nature of its business to one of e commerce. Two years after the transition, Internet commerce began to slow down, and Global was in dire need of cash in order to continue operations. Management turned to the accounting department. Global, Inc., needed to borrow a substantial amount of money but couldn’t afford to increase the amount of liabilities on the balance sheet for fear of the stock price dropping and banks becoming nervous and demanding repayment of existing loans. David discovered a way that would allow the company to raise the needed cash to continue operations without having to report the long term notes payable on the balance sheet. Under an obscure rule, companies can set up separate legal organizations that do not have to be reported on the parent company’s financial statements, if a third party contributes just 3 percent of the start up capital. David called a friend, Brian Johnson, and asked him to participate in a business venture with Global. Brian agreed, and created a special purpose entity with Global named BrianCo. For his participation, Brian was awarded a substantial amount of valuable Global stock. Brian then went to a bank and used the stock as collateral to borrow a large sum of money for BrianCo. Then, Global sold some of its poor or underperforming assets to BrianCo for the cash that Brian borrowed. In the end, Global got rid of bad assets, received the proceeds of the long term note payable, and did not have to show the liability on the balance sheet. Only the top executives and the accountants that worked closely with David knew of the scheme, and they planned to use this method only until the e commerce portion of Global became profitable again.
Required
a. How did David’s scheme affect the overall appearance of Global’s financial statements? Why was this important to investors and creditors?
b. Review the AICPA’s Articles of Professional Conduct (see Chapter 1) and comment on any of the standards that have been violated. c. Name the features of the fraud triangle and explain how they materialize in this case.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Analyzing long term debt at Union Pacific Railroad
Many companies have a form of debt called capital leases. A capital lease is created when a company agrees to rent an asset, such as equipment or a building, for such a long time that GAAP treats the lease as if the asset were purchased using borrowed funds. A capital lease creates a liability for the company that acquired the leased asset because it has promised to make payments to another company for several years in the future. If a company has any capital leases, it must disclose them in the footnotes to the financial statements, and will sometimes disclose them in a separate account in the liabilities section of the balance sheet. Using the most current Forms 10 K for Union Pacific Corporation, complete the requirements below. To obtain the 10 Ks use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A, or the company’s website.
Required
a. What was Union Pacific’s debt to assets ratio? (You will need to compute total liabilities by subtracting Common shareholders’ equity” from total assets.)
b. How much interest expense did Union Pacific incur?
c. What amount of liabilities did Union Pacific have as a result of capital leases? Footnote 5 presents information about Union Pacific’s leases.
d. What percentage of Union Pacific’s long term liabilities was the result of capital leases?
e. Many companies try to structure (design) leasing agreements so their leases will not be classified as capital leases. Explain why a company such as Union Pacific might want to avoid reporting capital leases.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Edwards Inc. experienced the following events:
1. Issued common stock for cash.
2. Declared a cash dividend.
3. Issued noncumulative preferred stock for cash.
4. Appropriated retained earnings.
5. Distributed a stock dividend.
6. Paid cash to purchase treasury stock.
7. Distributed a 2 for 1 stock split.
8. Issued cumulative preferred stock for cash.
9. Paid a cash dividend that had previously been declared.
10. Sold treasury stock for cash at a higher amount than the cost of the treasury stock.
Required
Show the effect of each event on the elements of the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. Use + for increase, for decrease, and NA for not affected. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or a financing activity (FA). The first transaction is entered as an example.
|
Event
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
+
|
|
NA
|
|
+
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
+
|
FA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is the difference between contributed capital and retained earnings for a corporation?
2. What are the similarities and differences in the equity structure of a sole proprietorship, a partnership, and a corporation?
3. Why is it easier for a corporation to raise large amounts of capital than it is for a partnership?
4. What is the meaning of each of the following terms with respect to the corporate form of organization? (a) Legal capital
(b) Par value of stock
(c) Stated value of stock
(d) Market value of stock
(e) Book value of stock
(f ) Authorized shares of stock
(g) Issued stock
(h) Outstanding stock
(i) Treasury stock
( j) Common stock
(k) Preferred stock
(l) Dividends
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of issuing common stock on the balance sheet
Newly formed Health First Corporation has 100,000 shares of $5 par common stock authorized. On March 1, 2010, Health First issued 20,000 shares of the stock for $12 per share. On May 2 the company issued an additional 30,000 shares for $15 per share. Health First was not affected by other events during 2010.
Required
a. Record the transactions in a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). Use NA to indicate that an element was not affected by the event.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
=
|
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Paid in Excess
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Determine the amount Health First would report for common stock on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet.
c. Determine the amount Health First would report for paid in capital in excess of par.
d. What is the total amount of capital contributed by the owners?
e. What amount of total assets would Health First report on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of no par common and par preferred stock on the horizontal statements model
Collins Corporation issued 10,000 shares of no par common stock for $20 per share. Collins also issued 2,000 shares of $50 par, 5 percent noncumulative preferred stock at $55 per share.
Required
Record these events in a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the cash flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). Use NA to indicate that an element was not affected by the event.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
=
|
Pfd. Stk.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
PIC in Excess
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock for assets other than cash
Gaines Corporation was formed when it issued shares of common stock to two of its shareholders. Gaines issued 5,000 shares of $10 par common stock to S. Gaines in exchange for $75,000 cash (the issue price was $15 per share). Gaines also issued 2,000 shares of stock to J. Caldwell in exchange for a one year old delivery van on the same day. Caldwell had originally paid $42,000 for the van.
a. What was the market value of the delivery van on the date of the stock issue?
b. Show the effect of the two stock issues on Gaine’s books in a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). Use NA to indicate that an element was not affected by the event.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Van
|
=
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
PIC in Excess
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and reporting treasury stock transactions
The following information pertains to Kwon Corp. at January 1, 2010.
|
Common stock, $10 par, 50,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
2,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$20,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock
|
15,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
65,000
|
Kwon Corp. completed the following transactions during 2010:
1. Issued 2,000 shares of $10 par common stock for $25 per share.
2. Repurchased 200 shares of its own common stock for $22 per share.
3. Resold 50 shares of treasury stock for $26 per share.
Required
a. How many shares of common stock were outstanding at the end of the period?
b. How many shares of common stock had been issued at the end of the period?
c. Organize the transactions data in accounts under the accounting equation.
d. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet reflecting these transactions. Include the number of shares authorized, issued, and outstanding in the description of the common stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining the effect of depreciation expense on financial statements Three different companies each purchased a machine on January 1, 2008, for $42,000. Each machine was expected to last five years or 200,000 hours. Salvage value was estimated to be $2,000. All three machines were operated for 50,000 hours in 2008, 55,000 hours in 2009, 40,000 hours in 2010, 44,000 hours in 2011, and 31,000 hours in 2012. Each of the three companies earned $30,000 of cash revenue during each of the five years. Company A uses straight line depreciation, company B uses double declining balance depreciation, and company C uses units of production depreciation.
Required Answer each of the following questions. Ignore the effects of income taxes.
a. Which company will report the highest amount of net income for 2008?
b. Which company will report the lowest amount of net income for 2010?
c. Which company will report the highest book value on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
d. Which company will report the highest amount of retained earnings on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet?
e. Which company will report the lowest amount of cash flow from operating activities on the 2010 statement of cash flows?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for depletion
Favre Exploration Corporation engages in the exploration and development of many types of natural resources. The company has engaged in the following activities:
Jan. 1, 2010 Purchased a coal mine estimated to contain 200,000 tons of coal for $900,000.
Feb. 1, 2010 Purchased a silver mine estimated to contain 30,000 tons of silver for $750,000.
July 1, 2010 Purchased for $2,500,000 a tract of timber estimated to yield 3,000,000 board feet of lumber and to have a residual land value of $250,000.
Aug. 1, 2010 Purchased for $720,000 oil reserves estimated to contain 380,000 barrels of oil, of which 20,000 would be unprofi table to pump.
Required
a. Determine the amount of depletion expense to recognize on the 2010 income statement for each of the four reserves, assuming 62,000 tons of coal, 1,200,000 board feet of lumber, 9,000 tons of silver, and 80,000 barrels of oil are extracted.
b. Prepare the portion of the December 31, 2010, balance sheet that reports natural resources.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recognizing continuing expenditures for plant assets
Sam’s Outdoor, Inc., recorded the following transactions over the life of a piece of equipment purchased in 2010.
Jan. 1, 2010 Purchased the equipment for $39,000 cash. The equipment is estimated to have a five year life and $4,000 salvage value and was to be depreciated using the straight line method.
Dec. 31, 2010 Recorded depreciation expense for 2010.
May 5, 2011 Undertook routine repairs costing $800.
Dec. 31, 2011 Recorded depreciation expense for 2011.
Jan. 1, 2012 Made an adjustment costing $3,000 to the equipment. It improved the quality of the output but did not affect the life estimate.
Dec. 31, 2012 Recorded depreciation expense for 2012.
Mar. 1, 2013 Incurred $520 cost to oil and clean the equipment.
Dec. 31, 2013 Recorded depreciation expense for 2013.
Jan. 1, 2014 Had the equipment completely overhauled at a cost of $9,000. The overhaul was estimated to extend the total life to seven years and revised the salvage value to $3,000.
Dec. 31, 2014 Recorded depreciation expense for 2014.
July 1, 2015 Sold the equipment for $8,000 cash.
Required
a. Use a horizontal statements model like the following one to show the effects of these transactions on the elements of the financial statements. Use 1 for increase, 2 for decrease, and NA for not affected. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
Date
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Equity
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Jan. 1, 2010
|
+
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
Cash Flow
|
|
IA
|
b. Determine the amount of depreciation expense Sam’s will report on the income statements for the years 2010 through 2014.
c. Determine the book value (cost accumulated depreciation) Sam’s will report on the balance sheets at the end of the years 2010 through 2014.
d. Determine the amount of the gain or loss Sam’s will report on the disposal of the equipment on July 1, 2015.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for continuing expenditures
Shaw Manufacturing paid $62,000 to purchase a computerized assembly machine on January 1, 2008. The machine had an estimated life of eight years and a $2,000 salvage value. Shaw’s financial condition as of January 1, 2011, is shown in the following financial statements model. Shaw uses the straight line method for depreciation.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
|
Equity
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Mach.
|
|
Acc. Dep.
|
=
|
Com. Stk
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
15,000
|
+
|
62,000
|
|
22,500
|
=
|
8,000
|
+
|
46,500
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Shaw Manufacturing made the following expenditures on the computerized assembly machine in 2011.
Jan. 2 Added an overdrive mechanism for $6,000 that would improve the overall quality of the performance of the machine but would not extend its life. The salvage value was revised to $3,000.
Aug. 1 Performed routine maintenance, $1,150.
Oct. 2 Replaced some computer chips (considered routine), $950.
Dec. 31 Recognized 2011 depreciation expense.
Required
Record the 2011 transactions in a statements model like the preceding one.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for intangible assets
Le Gormet Company purchased a fast food restaurant for $1,700,000. The fair market values of the assets purchased were as follows. No liabilities were assumed.
|
Equipment
|
$420,000
|
|
Land
|
300,000
|
|
Building
|
650,000
|
|
Franchise (5 year life)
|
120,000
|
Required
Calculate the amount of goodwill purchased.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Different depreciation methods
Sweet’s Bakery makes cakes, pies, and other pastries that it sells to local grocery stores. The company experienced the following transactions during 2010.
1. Started business by acquiring $60,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased bakery equipment for $46,000.
3. Had sales in 2010 amounting to $42,000.
4. Paid $8,200 of cash for supplies which were all used during the year to make baked goods.
5. Incurred other operating expenses of $12,000 for 2010.
Required
a. Organize the class into two sections and divide each section into groups of three to five students. Assign each section a depreciation method: straight line or double declining balance.
Group Task
Prepare an income statement and balance sheet using the preceding information and the depreciation method assigned to your group.
Class Discussion
b. Have a representative of each section put its income statement on the board. Are there differences in net income? In the amount of income tax paid? How will these differences in the amount of depreciation expense change over the life of the equipment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Case Different numbers for different industries
The following ratios are for four companies in different industries. Some of these ratios have been discussed in the textbook; others have not, but their names explain how the ratio was computed. The four sets of ratios, presented randomly, are
|
Ratio
|
Company 1
|
Company 2
|
Company 3
|
Company 4
|
|
Current assets ÷ total assets
|
12%
|
18%
|
20%
|
72%
|
|
Operating cycle
|
42 days
|
35 days
|
19 days
|
409 days
|
|
Return on assets
|
12%
|
19%
|
5%
|
5%
|
|
Gross margin
|
35%
|
55%
|
46%
|
24%
|
|
Sales ÷ property, plant and equipment
|
1.89 times
|
38.97 times
|
1.97 times
|
6.08 times
|
|
Sales ÷ number of full time employees
|
$540,883
|
$29,942
|
$55,687
|
$413,252
|
The four companies to which these ratios relate, listed in alphabetical order, are
1. Anheuser Bush Companies, Inc., is a company that produces beer and related products. Its fiscal year end was December 31, 2007.
2. Wendy’s International, Inc., operates 1,414 of the 6,645 Wendy’s restaurants in the United States and 19 other countries. Its fiscal year end was December 30, 2007.
3. Deere & Company is a company that manufactures heavy construction equipment. Its fiscal year end was December 31, 2007.
4. Weight Watchers International, Inc., is a company that provides weight loss services and products. Its fiscal year end was December 31, 2007.
Required
Determine which company should be matched with each set of ratios. Write a memorandum explaining the rationale for your decisions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Effect of depreciation on the return on assets ratio
Campus Video Games (CVG) was started on January 1, 2010, when it acquired $62,500 cash from the issue of common stock. The company immediately purchased video games that cost $62,500 cash. The games had an estimated salvage value of $7,500 and an expected useful life of five years. CVG used the games during 2010 to produce $25,000 of cash revenue. Assume that these were the only events affecting CVG during 2010.
Required
a. Compute the return on assets ratio as of December 31, 2010, assuming CVG uses the straight line depreciation method.
b. Recompute the ratio assuming CVG uses the double declining balance method.
c. Which depreciation method makes it appear that CVG is utilizing its assets more effectively?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Impact of historical cost on asset presentation on the balance sheet
Assume that you are examining the balance sheets of two companies and note the following information.
|
|
Company A
|
Company B
|
|
Equipment
|
$1,130,000
|
$900,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
(730,000)
|
(500,000)
|
|
Book Value
|
$ 400,000
|
$400,000
|
Maxie Smith, a student who has had no accounting courses, remarks that Company A and Company B have the same amount of equipment.
Required
In a short paragraph, explain to Maxie that the two companies do not have equal amounts of equipment. You may want to include in your discussion comments regarding the possible age of each company’s equipment, the impact of the historical cost concept on balance sheet information, and the impact of different depreciation methods on book value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Comparing Microsoft’s and Intel’s operational assets
This chapter discussed how companies in different industries often use different proportions of current versus long term assets to accomplish their business objective. The technology revolution resulting from the silicon microchip has often been led by two well known companies: Microsoft and Intel. Although often thought of together, these companies are really very different. Using either the most current Forms 10 K or annual reports for Microsoft Corporation and Intel Corporation, complete the requirements below. To obtain the Forms 10 K, use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A or the company’s website. Microsoft’s annual report is available on its website; Intel’s annual report is its Form 10 K.
Required
a. Fill in the missing data in the following table. The percentages must be computed; they are not included in the companies 10 Ks. (Note: The percentages for current assets and property, plant, and equipment will not sum to 100.)
|
|
Current
|
|
|
Property, Plant,
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
and Equipment
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
Microsoft
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dollar Amount
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
|
% of Total Assets
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
100%
|
|
Intel
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dollar Amount % of
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
100%
|
b. Briefly explain why these two companies have different percentages of their assets in current assets versus property, plant, and equipment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effects of recognizing accrued interest on financial statements
Joe Hughes started Hughes Company on January 1, 2012. The company experienced the following events during its first year of operation.
1. Earned $2,500 of cash revenue for performing services.
2. Borrowed $3,000 cash from the bank.
3. Adjusted the accounting records to recognize accrued interest expense on the bank note. The note, issued on August 1, 2012, had a one year term and a 6 percent annual interest rate.
Required
a. What is the amount of interest expense in 2012?
b. What amount of cash was paid for interest in 2012?
c. Use a horizontal statements model to show how each event affects the balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows. Indicate whether the event increases (I), decreases (D), or does not affect (NA) each element of the financial statements. In the Cash Flows column, designate the cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), or financing activities (FA). The first transaction has been recorded as an example.
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
=
|
Notes Pay.
|
+
|
Int. Pay.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
1
|
I
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
I
|
I
|
|
NA
|
=
|
I
|
I
|
OA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording sales tax expense
The Campus Book Store sells books and other supplies to students in a state where the sales tax rate is 7 percent. The Campus Book Store engaged in the following transactions for 2010. Sales tax of 7 percent is collected on all sales.
1. Book sales, not including sales tax, for 2010 amounted to $315,000 cash.
2. Cash sales of miscellaneous items in 2010 were $175,000, not including tax.
3. Cost of goods sold amounted to $255,000 for the year.
4. Paid $145,000 in operating expenses for the year.
5. Paid the sales tax collected to the state agency.
Required
a. What is the total amount of sales tax the Campus Book Store collected and paid for the year?
b. What is the Campus Book Store’s net income for the year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of warranty obligations and payments on financial statements
The Cycle Company provides a 120 day parts and labor warranty on all merchandise it sells. Cycle estimates the warranty expense for the current period to be $1,400. During the period a customer returned a product that cost $596 to repair.
Required
a. Show the effects of these transactions on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the example shown here. Use a + to indicate increase, a for decrease, and NA for not affected. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA).
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
b. Discuss the advantage of estimating the amount of warranty expense.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Current liabilities
The following transactions apply to Comfort Mattress Sales for 2010.
1. The business was started when the company received $30,000 from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased mattress inventory of $200,000 on account.
3. Sold mattresses for $300,000 cash (not including sales tax). Sales tax of 8 percent is collected when the merchandise is sold. The merchandise had a cost of $150,000.
4. Provided a six month warranty on the mattresses sold. Based on industry estimates, the warranty claims would amount to 2 percent of mattress sales.
5. Paid the sales tax to the state agency on $250,000 of the sales.
6. On September 1, 2010, borrowed $30,000 from the local bank. The note had a 6 percent interest rate and matured on March 1, 2011.
7. Paid $4,600 for warranty repairs during the year.
8. Paid operating expenses of $96,000 for the year.
9. Paid $175,000 of accounts payable.
10. Record accrued interest on the note issued in transaction no. 6.
Required
a. Record the above transactions in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
Event
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
+
|
Equity
|
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statemt. of Cash Flows
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
|
Mdse. Inv.
|
Acct. Pay.
|
+
|
Sales Tax Pay.
|
+
|
War. Pay.
|
+
|
Int. Pay.
|
+
|
Notes Pay.
|
+
|
Com. Stock
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Prepare the income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for 2010.
c. What is the total amount of current liabilities at December 31, 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How credit terms affect financial statements
Cordell Co. is planning to finance an expansion of its operations by borrowing $100,000. City Bank has agreed to loan Cordell the funds. Cordell has two repayment options: (1) to issue a note with the principal due in 10 years and with interest payable annually or (2) to issue a note to repay $10,000 of the principal each year along with the annual interest based on the unpaid principal balance. Assume the interest rate is 8 percent for each option.
Required
a. What amount of interest will Cordell pay in year 1
(1) Under option 1?
(2) Under option 2?
b. What amount of interest will Cordell pay in year 2
(1) Under option 1?
(2) Under option 2?
c. Explain the advantage of each option.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Amortization of a long term loan
A partial amortization schedule for a five year note payable that Puro Co. issued on January 1, 2010, is shown here:
|
Accounting
|
Principal
|
Cash
|
Applied to
|
Applied to
|
|
Period
|
Balance January 1
|
Payment
|
Interest
|
Principal
|
|
2010
|
$100,000
|
$25,046
|
$8,000
|
$17,046
|
|
2011
|
82,954
|
25,046
|
6,636
|
18,410
|
Required
a. What rate of interest is Puro Co. paying on the note?
b. Using a financial statements model like the one shown below, record the appropriate amounts for the following two events.
(1) January 1, 2010, issue of the note payable.
(2) December 31, 2010, payment on the note payable.
|
Event No.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
c. If the company earned $75,000 cash revenue and paid $35,000 in cash expenses in addition to the interest in 2010, what is the amount of each of the following?
(1) Net income for 2010.
(2) Cash flow from operating activities for 2010.
(3) Cash flow from financing activities for 2010.
d. What is the amount of interest expense on this loan for 2012?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for a line of credit
Song Co. uses an approved line of credit not to exceed $250,000 with the local bank to provide short term financing for its business operations. Song either borrows or repays funds on the first day of a month. Interest is payable monthly at the bank’s prime interest rate plus 1 percent. The following table shows the amounts borrowed and repaid for 2010 along with the bank’s prime interest rate.
|
|
Amount Borrowed
|
Prime Rate for
|
|
Month
|
or (Repaid)
|
the Month, %
|
|
January
|
70,000
|
4
|
|
February
|
$40,000
|
4
|
|
March
|
(20,000)
|
4.5
|
|
April
|
(10,000)
|
5
|
|
May
|
(20,000)
|
4
|
|
June
|
(10,000)
|
4.5
|
|
July–October
|
0
|
4.5
|
|
November
|
40,000
|
5.5
|
|
December
|
(20,000)
|
5.25
|
Required
a. Show the effects of these transactions on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. Use a + to indicate increase, a for decrease, and NA for not affected. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA).
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
b. What is the total amount of interest expense paid for 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Tupperware Company claims to be a global direct seller of premium, innovative products across multiple brands and categories through an independent sales force of approximately 2.1 million.” Its goods are sold in almost 100 countries through its eight brands. The following data were taken from the company’s 2007 annual report. Dollar amounts are in millions.
|
Fiscal Years Ending
|
|
|
December 29, 2007
|
December 30, 2006
|
|
Current assets
|
$ 699.5
|
$ 586.6
|
|
Current liabilities
|
450.3
|
359.3
|
|
Total assets
|
1,868.7
|
1,712.1
|
|
Total liabilities
|
1,346.0
|
1,311.6
|
Required
a. Compute Tupperware’s current ratios for 2007 and 2006.
b. Compute Tupperware’s debt to assets ratios for 2007 and 2006.
c. Based on the ratios computed in Requirements a and b, did Tupperware’s liquidity get better or worse from 2006 to 2007?
d. Based on the ratios computed in Requirements a and b, did Tupperware’s solvency get better or worse from 2006 to 2007?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Account for short term debt and sales tax—two accounting cycles
The following transactions apply to Allied Enterprises for 2010, its first year of operations.
1. Received $50,000 cash from the issue of a short term note with a 6 percent interest rate and a one year maturity. The note was made on April 1, 2010.
2. Received $180,000 cash plus applicable sales tax from performing services. The services are subject to a sales tax rate of 6 percent.
3. Paid $90,000 cash for other operating expenses during the year.
4. Paid the sales tax due on $140,000 of the service revenue for the year. Sales tax on the balance of the revenue is not due until 2010.
5. Recognized the accrued interest at December 31, 2010.
The following transactions apply to Allied Enterprises for 2011.
1. Paid the balance of the sales tax due for 2010.
2. Received $215,000 cash plus applicable sales tax from performing services. The services are subject to a sales tax rate of 6 percent.
3. Repaid the principal of the note and applicable interest on April 1, 2011.
4. Paid $125,000 of other operating expenses during the year.
5. Paid the sales tax due on $180,000 of the services revenue. The sales tax on the balance of the revenue is not due until 2012.
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flow for 2010 and 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of accrued interest on financial statements
Magic Enterprises borrowed $18,000 from the local bank on July 1, 2010, when the company was started. The note had an 8 percent annual interest rate and a one year term to maturity. Magic Enterprises recognized $42,500 of revenue on account in 2010 and $45,000 of revenue on account in 2011. Cash collections from accounts receivable were $36,000 in 2010 and $35,000 in 2011. Magic Enterprises paid $24,000 of salaries expense in 2010 and $28,000 of salaries expense in 2011. Repaid loan and interest at maturity date.
Required
a. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. What amount of net cash flow from operating activities would Magic report on the 2010 cash flow statement?
c. What amount of interest expense would Magic report on the 2010 income statement?
d. What amount of total liabilities would Magic report on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
e. What amount of retained earnings would Magic report on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
f. What amount of cash flow from financing activities would Magic report on the 2010 statement of cash flows?
g. What amount of interest expense would Magic report on the 2011 income statement?
h. What amount of cash flows from operating activities would Magic report on the 2011 cash flow statement?
i. What amount of total assets would Magic report on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive accounting cycle problem (uses percent of revenue allowance method)
The following trial balance was prepared for Gifts, Etc., Inc., on December 31, 2010, after the closing entries were posted.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$110,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
136,000
|
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Inventory
|
690,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
98,000
|
|
Common stock
|
|
720,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
108,000
|
|
Totals
|
$936,000
|
$936,000
|
Gifts, Etc. had the following transactions in 2011.
1. Purchased merchandise on account for $360,000.
2. Sold merchandise that cost $250,000 for $465,000 on account.
3. Sold for $240,000 cash merchandise that had cost $144,000.
4. Sold merchandise for $180,000 to credit card customers. The merchandise had cost $108,000.
The credit card company charges a 3 percent fee.
5. Collected $526,000 cash from accounts receivable.
6. Paid $430,000 cash on accounts payable.
7. Paid $134,000 cash for selling and administrative expenses.
8. Collected cash for the full amount due from the credit card company.
9. Issued a $48,000 face value, interest bearing note with an 8 percent interest rate and a one year term to maturity.
10. Wrote off $7,200 of accounts as uncollectible.
11. Made the following adjusting entries:
(a) Recorded uncollectible accounts expense estimated at 1 percent of sales on account.
(b) Recorded seven months of accrued interest on the note at December 31, 2011.
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, a balance sheet, and a statement of cash flows for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
AutoZone, Inc., claims to be the nation’s leading specialty retailer and a leading distributor of automotive replacement parts and accessories.” It sells replacement auto parts directly to the consumer. BorgWarner, Inc., has over 17,000 employees and produces automobile parts, such as transmissions and cooling systems, for the world’s vehicle manufacturers. The following data were taken from these companies’ 2007 annual reports. All dollar amounts are in thousands.
|
|
AutoZone
|
BorgWarner
|
|
|
August 25, 2007
|
December 31, 2007
|
|
Sales
|
$6,169,804
|
$5,328,600
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
59,876
|
802,400
|
Required
a. Before performing any calculations, speculate as to which company will take the longest to collect its accounts receivables. Explain the rationale for your decision.
b. Calculate the accounts receivable turnover ratios for AutoZone and BorgWarner.
c. Calculate the average days to collect accounts receivables for AutoZone and BorgWarner.
d. Do the calculations from Requirements b and c confirm your speculations in Requirement a?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Missing information
The following selected financial information is available for three companies.
|
|
Bell
|
Card
|
Zore
|
|
Total sales
|
$125,000
|
$210,000
|
?
|
|
Cash sales
|
?
|
26,000
|
$120,000
|
|
Sales on account
|
40,000
|
?
|
75,000
|
|
Accounts receivable, January 1, 2012
|
6,200
|
42,000
|
?
|
|
Accounts receivable, December 31, 2012
|
5,600
|
48,000
|
7,500
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts, January 1, 2012
|
?
|
?
|
405
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts, December 31, 2012
|
224
|
1,680
|
?
|
|
Uncollectible accounts expense, 2012
|
242
|
1,200
|
395
|
|
Uncollectible accounts written off
|
204
|
1,360
|
365
|
|
Collections of accounts receivable, 2012
|
?
|
?
|
75,235
|
Required
a. Divide the class into three sections and divide each section into groups of three to five students. Assign one of the companies to each of the sections.
Group Tasks
(1) Determine the missing amounts for your company.
(2) Determine the percentage of accounts receivable estimated to be uncollectible at the end of 2011 and 2012 for your company.
(3) Determine the percentage of total sales that are sales on account for your company.
(4) Determine the accounts receivable turnover for your company.
Class Discussion
b. Have a representative of each section put the missing information on the board and explain how it was determined.
c. Which company has the highest percentage of sales that are on account?
d. Which company is doing the best job of collecting its accounts receivable? What procedures and policies can a company use to better collect its accounts receivable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Cost of charge sales
Paul Smith is opening a plumbing supply store in University City. He plans to sell plumbing parts and materials to both wholesale and retail customers. Since contractors (wholesale customers) prefer to charge parts and materials and pay at the end of the month, Paul expects he will have to offer charge accounts. He plans to offer charge sales to the wholesale customers only and to require retail customers to pay with either cash or credit cards. Paul wondered what expenses his business would incur relative to the charge sales and the credit cards.
Required
a. What issues will Paul need to consider if he allows wholesale customers to buy plumbing supplies on account?
b. Write a memo to Paul Smith outlining the potential cost of accepting charge customers. Discuss the difference between the allowance method for uncollectible accounts and the direct write off method. Also discuss the cost of accepting credit cards.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to a machine purchased by Bakersfield Company on January 1, 2010.
|
Purchase price
|
$ 63,000
|
|
Delivery cost
|
$ 2,000
|
|
Installation charge
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Estimated useful life
|
8 years
|
|
Estimated units the machine will produce
|
130,000
|
|
Estimated salvage value
|
$ 3,000
|
The machine produced 14,400 units during 2010 and 17,000 units during 2011.
Required
Determine the depreciation expense Bakersfield would report for 2010 and 2011 using each of the following methods.
a. Straight line.
b. Double declining balance.
c. Units of production.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining the cost of an asset
Pine Logging Co. purchased an electronic saw to cut various types and sizes of logs. The saw had a list price of $160,000. The seller agreed to allow a 5 percent discount because Pine paid cash. Delivery terms were FOB shipping point. Freight cost amounted to $4,200. Pine had to hire an individual to operate the saw. Pine had to build a special platform to mount the saw. The cost of the platform was $2,500. The saw operator was paid an annual salary of $65,000. The cost of the company’s theft insurance policy increased by $2,000 per year as a result of the acquisition of the saw. The saw had a four year useful life and an expected salvage value of $10,000.
Required
Determine the amount to be capitalized in an asset account for the purchase of the saw.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating costs on the basis of relative market values
Illinois Company purchased a building and the land on which the building is situated for a total cost of $1,200,000 cash. The land was appraised at $600,000 and the building at $1,000,000.
Required
a. What is the accounting term for this type of acquisition?
b. Determine the amount of the purchase cost to allocate to the land and the amount to allocate to the building.
c. Would Illinois Company recognize a gain on the purchase? Why or why not?
d. Record the purchase in a statements model like the following one.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
+
|
Building
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating costs for a basket purchase
Keenum Company purchased a restaurant building, land, and equipment for $900,000. Keenum paid $100,000 in cash and issued a 20 year, 8 percent note to First Bank for the balance. The appraised value of the assets was as follows.
|
Land
|
$ 240,000
|
|
Building
|
600,000
|
|
Equipment
|
360,000
|
|
Total
|
$1,200,000
|
Required
a. Compute the amount to be recorded on the books for each of the assets.
b. Record the purchase in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
+
|
Building
|
+
|
Equip.
|
|
N. Payble
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of depreciation on the accounting equation and financial statements
The following events apply to R&L Logging Company for the 2010 fiscal year.
1. The company started when it acquired $80,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased a new skidder that cost $75,000 cash.
3. Earned $98,000 in cash revenue.
4. Paid $52,000 cash for salaries expense.
5. Paid $12,000 cash for operating expenses.
6. Adjusted the records to reflect the use of the skidder. The skidder, purchased on January 1, 2010, has an expected useful life of five years and an estimated salvage value of $5,000. Use straight line depreciation. The adjusting entry was made as of December 31, 2010.
Required
a. Record the above transactions in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
Event
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
=
|
|
Equity
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statemt. of Cash Flows
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Equip.
|
|
A. Depr.
|
=
|
Com. Stock
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. What amount of depreciation expense would R&L Logging Co. report on the 2011 income statement?
c. What amount of accumulated depreciation would R&L Logging Co. report on the December
31, 2011, balance sheet?
d. Would the cash flow from operating activities be affected by depreciation in 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and recording straight line versus double decliningbalance depreciation
At the beginning of 2009, Expert Manufacturing purchased a new computerized drill press for $65,000. It is expected to have a five year life and a $5,000 salvage value.
Required
a. Compute the depreciation for each of the five years, assuming that the company uses
(1) Straight line depreciation.
(2) Double declining balance depreciation.
b. Record the purchase of the drill press and the depreciation expense for the first year under the straight line and double declining balance methods in a financial statements model like the following one.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Equity
|
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Drill Press
|
|
Acc. Dep.
|
=
|
Ret. Earn
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of gains and losses on the accounting equation and financial statements
On January 1, 2010, Reese Enterprises purchased a parcel of land for $22,000 cash. At the time of purchase, the company planned to use the land for future expansion. In 2011, Reese Enterprises changed its plans and sold the land.
Required
a. Assume that the land was sold for $25,000 in 2010.
(1) Show the effect of the sale on the accounting equation.
(2) What amount would Reese report on the income statement related to the sale of the land?
(3) What amount would Reese report on the statement of cash flows related to the sale of the land?
b. Assume that the land was sold for $21,500 in 2011.
(1) Show the effect of the sale on the accounting equation.
(2) What amount would Reese report on the income statement related to the sale of the land?
(3) What amount would Reese report on the statement of cash flows related to the sale of the land?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Double declining balance and units of production depreciation: gain or loss on disposal
Copy Service Co. purchased a new color copier at the beginning of 2010 for $42,000. The copier is expected to have a five year useful life and a $6,000 salvage value. The expected copy production was estimated at 2,000,000 copies. Actual copy production for the five years was as follows.
|
2010
|
550,000
|
|
2011
|
480,000
|
|
2012
|
380,000
|
|
2013
|
390,000
|
|
2014
|
240,000
|
|
Total
|
2,040,000
|
The copier was sold at the end of 2014 for $5,200.
Required
a. Compute the depreciation expense for each of the five years, using double declining balance depreciation.
b. Compute the depreciation expense for each of the five years, using units of production depreciation. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)
c. Calculate the amount of gain or loss from the sale of the asset under each of the depreciation methods.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of revenue expenditures versus capital expenditures on financial statements
On January 1, 2010, Grayson Construction Company overhauled four cranes resulting in a slight increase in the life of the cranes. Such overhauls occur regularly at two year intervals and have been treated as maintenance expense in the past. Management is considering whether to capitalize this year’s $26,000 cash cost in the Cranes asset account or to expense it as a maintenance expense. Assume that the cranes have a remaining useful life of two years and no expected salvage value. Assume straight line depreciation.
Required
a. Determine the amount of additional depreciation expense Grayson would recognize in 2010 and 2011 if the cost were capitalized in the Cranes account.
b. Determine the amount of expense Grayson would recognize in 2010 and 2011 if the cost were recognized as maintenance expense.
c. Determine the effect of the overhaul on cash flow from operating activities for 2010 and 2011 if the cost were capitalized and expensed through depreciation charges.
d. Determine the effect of the overhaul on cash flow from operating activities for 2010 and 2011 if the cost were recognized as maintenance expense.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and recording depletion expense
Southwest Sand and Gravel paid $800,000 to acquire 1,000,000 cubic yards of sand reserves. The following statements model reflects Southwest’s financial condition just prior to purchasing the sand reserves. The company extracted 420,000 cubic yards of sand in year 1 and 360,000 cubic yards in year 2.
|
Assets
|
|
=
|
|
Equity
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Sand Res.
|
=
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
900,000
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
900,000
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Required
a. Compute the depletion charge per unit.
b. Record the acquisition of the sand reserves and the depletion expense for years 1 and 2 in a financial statements model like the preceding one.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and recording the amortization of intangibles
Nevada’s Manufacturing paid cash to purchase the assets of an existing company. Among the assets purchased were the following items.
|
Patent with 5 remaining years of legal life
|
$32,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
36,000
|
Nevada’s financial condition just prior to the purchase of these assets is shown in the following statements model:
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Patent
|
+
|
Goodwill
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
94,000
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
94,000
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Required
a. Compute the annual amortization expense for these items if applicable.
b. Record the purchase of the intangible assets and the related amortization expense for year 1 in a horizontal statements model like the preceding one.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and recording goodwill
Ben Sands purchased the business Regional Supply Co. for $285,000 cash and assumed all liabilities at the date of purchase. Regional’s books showed assets of $280,000, liabilities of $40,000, and equity of $240,000. An appraiser assessed the fair market value of the tangible assets at $270,000 at the date of purchase. Sands’s financial condition just prior to the purchase is shown in the following statements model.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Assets
|
+
|
Goodwill
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
325,000
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
325,000
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Required
a. Compute the amount of goodwill purchased.
b. Record the purchase in a financial statements model like the preceding one.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
American Greetings Corporation manufactures and sells greeting cards and related items such as gift wrapping paper. CSX Corporation is one of the largest railway networks in the nation. The following data were taken from one of the companies’ December 28, 2007, annual report and from the other’s February 28, 2007, annual report. Revealing which data relate to which company was intentionally omitted. For one company, the dollar amounts are in thousands, while for the other they are in millions.
|
|
Company 1
|
Company 2
|
|
Sales
|
$10,030
|
$1,744,603
|
|
Depreciation costs
|
883
|
46,975
|
|
Net earnings
|
1,336
|
42,378
|
|
Current assets
|
2,491
|
799,281
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
21,780
|
285,072
|
|
Total assets
|
$25,534
|
$1,778,214
|
Required
a. Calculate depreciation costs as a percentage of sales for each company.
b. Calculate property, plant, and equipment as a percentage of total assets for each company.
c. Based on the information now available to you, decide which data relate to which company. Explain the rationale for your decision.
d. Which company appears to be using its assets most efficiently? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for acquisition of assets including a basket purchase
Moon Co., Inc., made several purchases of long term assets in 2010. The details of each purchase are presented here.
New Office Equipment
1. List price: $60,000; terms: 2/10 n/30; paid within discount period.
2. Transportation in: $1,600.
3. Installation: $2,200.
4. Cost to repair damage during unloading: $1,000.
5. Routine maintenance cost after six months: $300.
Basket Purchase of Copier, Computer, and Scanner for $15,000 with Fair Market Values
1. Copier, $10,000.
2. Computer, $6,000.
3. Scanner, $4,000.
Land for New Warehouse with an Old Building Torn Down
1. Purchase price, $200,000.
2. Demolition of building, $10,000.
3. Lumber sold from old building, $7,000.
4. Grading in preparation for new building, $14,000.
5. Construction of new building, $500,000.
Required
In each of these cases, determine the amount of cost to be capitalized in the asset accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for depreciation over multiple accounting cycles: straight line depreciation
NEC Company began operations when it acquired $60,000 cash from the issue of common stock on January 1, 2008. The cash acquired was immediately used to purchase equipment for $60,000 that had a $5,000 salvage value and an expected useful life of four years. The equipment was used to produce the following revenue stream (assume all revenue transactions are for cash). At the beginning of the fifth year, the equipment was sold for $4,500 cash. NEC uses straight line depreciation.
|
|
2008
|
2009
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Revenue
|
$15,000
|
$16,000
|
$16,400
|
$14,000
|
$0
|
Required
Prepare income statements, statements of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheets, and statements of cash flows for each of the five years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of straight line versus double declining balance depreciation on the recognition of expense and gains or losses
One Hour Laundry Services purchased a new steam press machine on January 1, for $45,000. It is expected to have a five year useful life and a $5,000 salvage value. One Hour expects to use the equipment more extensively in the early years.
Required
a. Calculate the depreciation expense for each of the five years, assuming the use of straight line depreciation.
b. Calculate the depreciation expense for each of the five years, assuming the use of double declining balance depreciation.
c. Would the choice of one depreciation method over another produce a different amount of annual cash flow for any year? Why or why not?
d. Assume that One Hour Laundry Services sold the steam press machine at the end of the third year for $26,000. Compute the amount of gain or loss using each depreciation method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing financial statement effects of accounting for uncollectible accounts using the percent of revenue allowance method
Duffy Bros. uses the allowance method to account for bad debts expense. Duffy experienced the following four events in 2008.
1. Recognition of $64,000 of service revenue on account.
2. Collection of $56,000 cash from accounts receivable.
3. Determination that $900 of its accounts were not collectible and wrote off these receivables.
4. Recognition of uncollectible accounts expense for the year. Duffy estimates that bad debts expense will be 2 percent of its sales.
Required
Show the effect of each of these events on the elements of the financial statements, using a horizontal statements model like the following one. Use + for increase, for decrease, and NA for not affected. In the cash flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA).
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
Allow.
|
=
|
|
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing account balances for a company using the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts
The following account balances come from the records of Springfield Company.
|
|
Beginning Balance
|
Ending Balance
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$4,000
|
$4,500
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
550
|
600
|
During the accounting period, Springfield recorded $32,000 of service revenue on account. The company also wrote off a $300 account receivable.
Required
a. Determine the amount of cash collected from receivables.
b. Determine the amount of uncollectible accounts expense recognized during the period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of recovering a receivable previously written off
The accounts receivable balance for T&M Lumber at December 31, 2010, was $96,000. Also on that date, the balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was $3,600. During 2011, $2,400 of accounts receivable were written off as uncollectible. In addition, T&M Lumber unexpectedly collected $250 of receivables that had been written off in a previous accounting period. Sales on account during 2011 were $265,000, and cash collections from receivables were $275,000. Uncollectible accounts expense was estimated to be 1 percent of the sales on account for the period.
Required
a. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Based on the preceding information, compute (after year end adjustment):
(1) Balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31, 2010.
(2) Balance of Accounts Receivable at December 31, 2010.
(3) Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at December 31, 2010.
c. What amount of uncollectible accounts expense will T&M Lumber report for 2010?
d. Explain how the $250 recovery of receivables affected the accounting equation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts: percent of revenue allowance method
Dixie Auto Parts sells new and used auto parts. Although a majority of its sales are cash sales, it makes a significant amount of credit sales. During 2012, its first year of operations, Dixie Auto Parts experienced the following.
|
Sales on account
|
$175,000
|
|
Cash sales
|
550,000
|
|
Collections of accounts receivable
|
168,000
|
|
Uncollectible accounts charged off during the year
|
1,200
|
Required
Assume that Dixie Auto Parts uses the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts and estimates that 1 percent of its sales on account will not be collected. Answer the following questions.
a. What is the Accounts Receivable balance at December 31, 2012?
b. What is the ending balance of the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31, 2012, after all entries and adjusting entries are posted?
c. What is the amount of uncollectible accounts expense for 2012?
d. What is the net realizable value of accounts receivable at December 31, 2012?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining account balances: allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts
During the first year of operation, 2010, Holt Appliance Co. recognized $300,000 of service revenue on account. At the end of 2010, the accounts receivable balance was $58,000. For this first year in business, the owner believes uncollectible accounts expense will be about 1 percent of sales on account.
Required
a. What amount of cash did Holt collect from accounts receivable during 2010?
b. Assuming Holt uses the allowance method to account for uncollectible accounts, what amount should Holt record as uncollectible accounts expense for 2010?
c. What is the net realizable value of receivables at the end of 2010?
d. Show the effects of the above transactions c on the financial statements by recording the appropriate amounts in a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). Use NA for not affected.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
Allow.
|
=
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts: percent of receivables allowance method
Posey Service Co. experienced the following transactions for 2011, its first year of operations:
1. Provided $72,000 of services on account.
2. Collected $56,000 cash from accounts receivable.
3. Paid $30,000 of salaries expense for the year.
4. Posey adjusted the accounts using the following information from an accounts receivable aging schedule.
|
Number of Days
|
|
Percent Likely to
|
Allowance
|
|
Past Due
|
Amount
|
Be Uncollectible
|
Balance
|
|
Current
|
$12,000
|
.01
|
|
|
0–30
|
2,000
|
.05
|
|
|
31–60
|
500
|
.10
|
|
|
61–90
|
500
|
.30
|
|
|
Over 90 days
|
1,000
|
.50
|
|
Required
a. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare the income statement for Posey Service Co. for 2011.
c. What is the net realizable value of the accounts receivable at December 31, 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of recognizing uncollectible accounts on the financial statements: percent of receivables allowance method
Guidry Inc. experienced the following events for the first two years of its operations.
2012:
1. Provided $80,000 of services on account.
2. Provided $35,000 of services and received cash.
3. Collected $65,000 cash from accounts receivable.
4. Paid $21,000 of salaries expense for the year.
5. Adjusted the accounting records to reflect uncollectible accounts expense for the year.
Guidry estimates that 6 percent of the ending accounts receivable balance will be uncollectible.
2013:
1. Wrote off an uncollectible account of $710.
2. Provided $95,000 of services on account.
3. Provided $45,000 of services and collected cash.
4. Collected $90,000 cash from accounts receivable.
5. Paid $35,000 of salaries expense for the year.
6. Adjusted the accounts to reflect uncollectible accounts expense for the year. Guidry estimates that 6 percent of the ending accounts receivable balance will be uncollectible.
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for 2011.
c. What is the net realizable value of the accounts receivable at December 31, 2011?
d. Repeat Requirements a, b, and c for 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of credit card sales on financial statements
Carlos, Incorporated, provided $86,000 of services during 2010. All customers paid for the services with major credit cards. Carlos turned the credit card receipts over to the credit card company immediately. The credit card company paid Carlos cash in the amount of face value less a 2 percent service charge.
Required
a. Record the credit card sales and the subsequent collection of accounts receivable in a horizontal statements model like the one shown below. In the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). Use NA to indicate that an element is not affected by the event.
|
|
Assets
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Answer the following questions:
(1) What is the amount of total assets at the end of the accounting period?
(2) What is the amount of revenue reported on the income statement?
(3) What is the amount of cash flow from operating activities reported on the statement of cash flows?
(4) Why would Carlos, Incorporated, accept credit cards instead of providing credit directly to its customers? In other words, why would Carlos be willing to pay 2 percent of sales to have the credit card company handle its sales on account?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable
Morris Enterprises loaned $60,000 to Faello Co. on October 1, 2012, for one year at 8 percent interest.
Required
Show the effects of the following transactions in a horizontal statements model like the one shown below.
(1) The loan to Faello Co.
(2) The adjusting entry at December 31, 2012.
(3) The adjusting entry and collection of the note on September 1, 2013.
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Date
|
Cash
|
+
|
Notes Rec.
|
+
|
Int. Rec.
|
=
|
|
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive single cycle problem
The following after closing trial balance was drawn from the accounts of Oak Timber Co. as of December 31, 2011.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$26,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,000
|
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
19,200
|
|
Common stock
|
|
20,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
36,800
|
|
Totals
|
$79,000
|
$79,000
|
Transactions for 2012
1. Acquired an additional $20,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased $80,000 of inventory on account.
3. Sold inventory that cost $65,000 for $110,000. Sales were made on account.
4. Wrote off $1,400 of uncollectible accounts.
5. On September 1, Oak loaned $12,000 to Pine Co. The note had a 8 percent interest rate and a one year term.
6. Paid $19,600 cash for salaries expense.
7. Collected $96,000 cash from accounts receivable.
8. Paid $91,000 cash on accounts payable.
9. Paid a $5,000 cash dividend to the stockholders.
10. Estimated uncollectible accounts expense to be 1 percent of sales on account.
11. Recorded the accrued interest at December 31, 2012.
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
The following data were taken from Hershey Foods Corporation’s 2007 annual report. All dollar amounts are in thousands.
|
Fiscal Years Ending
|
|
|
December 31, 2007
|
December 31, 2006
|
|
Sales
|
$4,946,716
|
$4,944,230
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
487,285
|
522,673
|
Required
a. Compute Hershey’s accounts receivable ratios for 2007 and 2006.
b. Compute Hershey’s average days to collect accounts receivables for 2007 and 2006.
c. Based on the ratios computed in Requirements a and b, did Hershey’s performance get better or worse from 2006 to 2007?
d. In 2007 the average interest rate on Hershey’s long term debt was approximately 6.4 percent. Assume it took Hershey 30 days to collect its receivables. Using an interest rate of 6.4 percent, calculate how much it cost Hershey to finance its receivables for 30 days in 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts—two cycles using the percent of revenue allowance method
The following transactions apply to Puretz Consulting for 2010, the first year of operation.
1. Recognized $75,000 of service revenue earned on account.
2. Collected $62,000 from accounts receivable.
3. Adjusted accounts to recognize uncollectible accounts expense. Puretz uses the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts and estimates that uncollectible accounts expense will be 2 percent of sales on account.
The following transactions apply to Puretz Consulting for 2011.
1. Recognized $86,500 of service revenue on account.
2. Collected $85,000 from accounts receivable.
3. Determined that $1,120 of the accounts receivable were uncollectible and wrote them off.
4. Collected $500 of an account that had been previously written off.
5. Paid $52,600 cash for operating expenses.
6. Adjusted accounts to recognize uncollectible accounts expense for 2011. Puretz estimates that uncollectible accounts expense will be 1 percent of sales on account.
Required
Complete all the following requirements for 2010 and 2011. Complete all requirements for 2010 prior to beginning the requirements for 2011.
a. Identify the type of each transaction (asset source, asset use, asset exchange, or claims exchange).
b. Show the effect of each transaction on the elements of the financial statements, using a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. Use + for increase, for decrease, and NA for not affected. Also, in the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). The first transaction is entered as an example.
|
Event No.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
+
|
|
NA
|
|
+
|
+
|
|
NA
|
|
+
|
NA
|
c. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
d. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining account balances: percent of revenue allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts
The following information pertains to Royal Carpet Company’s sales on account and accounts receivable.
|
Accounts receivable balance, January 1, 2010
|
$ 64,500
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts, January 1, 2010
|
2,800
|
|
Sales on account, 2010
|
756,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold, 2010
|
505,000
|
|
Collections of accounts receivable, 2010
|
782,000
|
After several collection attempts, Royal Carpet Company wrote off $2,600 of accounts that could not be collected. Royal estimates that bad debts expense will be 0.5 percent of sales on account.
Required
a. Compute the following amounts.
(1) Using the allowance method, the amount of uncollectible accounts expense for 2010.
(2) Net realizable value of receivables at the end of 2010.
b. Explain why the uncollectible accounts expense amount is different from the amount that was written off as uncollectible.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts: percent of receivables allowance method
Huggins Inc. experienced the following transactions for 2010, its first year of operations.
1. Issued common stock for $60,000 cash.
2. Purchased $210,000 of merchandise on account.
3. Sold merchandise that cost $130,000 for $245,000 on account.
4. Collected $215,000 cash from accounts receivable.
5. Paid $196,000 on accounts payable.
6. Paid $38,000 of salaries expense for the year.
7. Paid other operating expenses of $28,000.
8. Huggins adjusted the accounts using the following information from an accounts receivable aging schedule.
|
Number of Days
|
|
Percent Likely to
|
Allowance
|
|
Past Due
|
Amount
|
Be Uncollectible
|
Balance
|
|
Current
|
$19,000
|
.01
|
|
|
0–30
|
3,000
|
.05
|
|
|
31–60
|
4,500
|
.10
|
|
|
61–90
|
1,500
|
.20
|
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,000
|
.50
|
|
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for Huggins Inc. for 2010.
c. What is the net realizable value of the accounts receivable at December 31, 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determination of account balances—percent of receivables allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts
During the first year of operation, 2012, Steve’s Garage recognized $256,000 of service revenue on account. At the end of 2012, the accounts receivable balance was $62,300. Even though this is his first year in business, the owner believes he will collect all but about 5 percent of the ending balance.
Required
a. What amount of cash was collected by Steve’s during 2012?
b. Assuming the use of an allowance system to account for uncollectible accounts, what amount should Steve record as uncollectible accounts expense in 2012?
c. What is the net realizable value of receivables at the end of 2012?
d. Show the effect of the above transactions c on the financial statements by recording the appropriate amounts in a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. When you record amounts in the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). The letters NA indicate that an element is not affected by the event.
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
Allow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for credit card sales and uncollectible accounts: percent of receivables allowance method
Morris Supply Company had the following transactions in 2010.
1. Acquired $50,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased $210,000 of merchandise for cash in 2010.
3. Sold merchandise that cost $140,000 for $265,000 during the year under the following terms.
|
$ 60,000
|
Cash sales
|
|
175,000
|
Credit card sales (The credit card company charges a 3 percent service fee.)
|
|
30,000
|
Sales on account
|
4. Collected all the amount receivable from the credit card company.
5. Collected $23,000 of accounts receivable.
6. Paid selling and administrative expenses of $76,000.
7. Determined that 5 percent of the ending accounts receivable balance would be uncollectible.
Required
a. Record the above events in a horizontal statements model like the following one. When you record amounts in the Cash Flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), an investing activity (IA), or a financing activity (FA). The letters NA indicate that an element is not affected by the event.
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
Event
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
=
|
|
Equity
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statemt. of Cash Flows
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
Allow
|
+
|
Mdse. Inv.
|
=
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable and uncollectible accounts using the percent of sales allowance method
The following transactions apply to Baker Co. for 2010, its first year of operations.
1. Issued $60,000 of common stock for cash.
2. Provided $128,000 of services on account.
3. Collected $113,200 cash from accounts receivable.
4. Loaned $12,000 to BBC on September 1, 2010. The note had a one year term to maturity and an 8 percent interest rate.
5. Paid $28,000 of salaries expense for the year.
6. Paid a $2,000 dividend to the stockholders.
7. Recorded the accrued interest on December 31, 2010 (see item 4).
8. Uncollectible accounts expense is estimated to be 1 percent of sales on account.
Required
a. Show the effects of the above transactions in a horizontal statements model like the one shown below.
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equity
|
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flows
|
|
Event
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec. 2 Allow. for Doubtful Accts.
|
+
|
Notes Rec.
|
+
|
Int. Rec.
|
=
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Prepare the income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of transactions on the elements of financial statements
Required
Identify each of the following independent transactions as asset source (AS), asset use (AU), asset exchange (AE), or claims exchange (CE). Also explain how each event affects assets, liabilities, stockholders’ equity, net income, and cash flow by placing a + for increase, for decrease, or NA for not affected under each of the categories. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
|
Type of
|
|
|
Common
|
Retained
|
Net
|
Cash
|
|
Event
|
Event
|
Assets
|
Liabilities
|
Stock
|
Earnings
|
Income
|
Flow
|
|
a
|
AE
|
+/
|
NA
|
NA
|
NA
|
NA
|
2
|
a. Paid cash for land.
b. Sold merchandise at a price above cost. Accepted payment by credit card. The credit card company charges a service fee. The receipts have not yet been forwarded to the credit card company.
c. Submitted receipts to the credit card company (see b above) and collected cash.
d. Recovered an uncollectible account that was previously written off (assume direct write off method was used).
e. Provided services for cash.
f. Paid cash for other operating expenses.
g. Paid cash for salaries expense.
h. Loaned Carl Maddox cash. The loan had a 5 percent interest rate and a one year term to maturity.
i. Paid cash to creditors on accounts payable.
j. Provided services on account.
k. Sold land for cash at its cost.
l. Paid cash to satisfy salaries payable.
m. Accrued three months’ interest on the note receivable (see h above).
n. Collected cash from customers paying their accounts.
o. Wrote off an uncollectible account (use allowance method).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multistep income statement and balance sheet
Required
Use the following information to prepare a multistep income statement and a classified balance sheet for Reza Equipment Co. for 2010.
|
Salaries expense
|
$ 96,000
|
Interest receivable (short term)
|
$ 500
|
|
Common stock
|
40,000
|
Beginning retained earnings
|
18,100
|
|
Notes receivable (short term)
|
12,000
|
Operating expenses
|
70,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
4,000
|
Cash flow from investing activities
|
80,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
30,000
|
Prepaid rent
|
9,600
|
|
Notes payable (long term)
|
103,600
|
Land
|
36,000
|
|
Salvage value of building
|
4,000
|
Cash
|
17,800
|
|
Interest payable (short term)
|
1,800
|
Inventory
|
122,800
|
|
Uncollectible accounts expense
|
10,800
|
Accounts payable
|
46,000
|
|
Supplies
|
1,600
|
Interest expense
|
24,000
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
Salaries payable
|
9,200
|
|
Interest revenue
|
4,200
|
Unearned revenue
|
52,600
|
|
Sales revenue
|
396,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
143,000
|
|
Dividends
|
8,000
|
Accounts receivable
|
90,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
3,400
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Missing information
The following information comes from the accounts of Jersey Company.
|
Account Title
|
Beginning Balance
|
Ending Balance
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$30,000
|
$34,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
1,800
|
1,700
|
|
Notes receivable
|
40,000
|
40,000
|
|
Interest receivable
|
1,200
|
3,600
|
Required
a. There were $170,000 in sales on account during the accounting period. Write offs of uncollectible accounts were $1,400. What was the amount of cash collected from accounts receivable? What amount of uncollectible accounts expense was reported on the income statement? What was the net realizable value of receivables at the end of the accounting period?
b. The note has a 6 percent interest rate and 24 months to maturity. What amount of interest revenue was recognized during the period? How much cash was collected for interest?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Treatment of NSF check
The bank statement of Gear Supplies included a $300 NSF check that one of Gear’s customers had written to pay for services that were provided by Gear.
Required
a. Show the effects of recognizing the NSF check on the financial statements by recording the appropriate amounts in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Is the recognition of the NSF check on Gear’s books an asset source, use, or exchange transaction?
c. Suppose the customer redeems the check by giving Gear $325 cash in exchange for the bad check. The additional $25 paid a service fee charged by Gear. Show the effects on the financial statements in the horizontal statements model in Requirement a.
d. Is the receipt of cash referred to in Requirement c an asset source, use, or exchange transaction?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjustments to the balance per books
Required
Identify which of the following items are added to or subtracted from the unadjusted book balance to arrive at the true cash balance. Distinguish the additions from the subtractions by placing a 1 beside the items that are added to the unadjusted book balance and a + beside those that are subtracted from it. The first item is recorded as an example.
|
Reconciling Items
|
Book Balance Adjusted?
|
Added or Subtracted?
|
|
Interest revenue
|
Yes
|
+
|
|
Deposits in transit
|
|
|
|
Debit memo
|
|
|
|
Bank service charge
|
|
|
|
Charge for checks
|
|
|
|
NSF check from customer
|
|
|
|
Note receivable collected by the bank
|
|
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
|
|
|
Credit memo
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Safeway, Inc., operated 1,743 stores as of December 29, 2007. The following data were taken from the company’s annual report. All dollar amounts are in millions.
|
|
Fiscal Years Ending
|
|
|
December 29, 2007
|
December 30, 2006
|
|
Revenue
|
$42,286.0
|
$40,185.0
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
30,133.1
|
28,604.0
|
|
Net Income
|
888.4
|
870.6
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
2,797.8
|
2,642.5
|
Required
a. Compute Safeway’s inventory turnover ratio for 2007 and 2006.
b. Compute Safeway’s average days to sell inventory for 2007 and 2006.
c. Based on your computations in Requirements a and b, did Safeway’s inventory management get better or worse from 2006 to 2007?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of different inventory cost flow methods on financial statements
The accounting records of Brooks Photography, Inc., reflected the following balances as of January 1, 2012:
|
Cash
|
$19,000
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
6,750 (75 units @ $90)
|
|
Common stock
|
7,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
18,250
|
The following five transactions occurred in 2012.
1. First purchase (cash) 100 units @ $92
2. Second purchase (cash) 175 units @ $100
3. Sales (all cash) 300 units @ $170
4. Paid $15,000 cash for operating expenses.
5. Paid cash for income tax at the rate of 30 percent of income before taxes.
Required
a. Compute the cost of goods sold and ending inventory, assuming (1) FIFO cost flow, (2) LIFO cost flow, and (3) weighted average cost flow.
b. Use a vertical model to prepare the 2012 income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows under FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a bank reconciliation
Tom Landry owns a construction business, Landry Supply Co. The following cash information is available for the month of October 2012.
As of October 31, the bank statement shows a balance of $13,800. The October 31 unadjusted
balance in the Cash account of Landry Supply Co. is $12,700. A review of the bank statement revealed the following information.
1. A deposit of $1,600 on October 31, 2012, does not appear on the October 31 bank statement.
2. A debit memo for $250 was included in the bank statement for the purchase of a new supply of checks.
3. When checks written during the month were compared with those paid by the bank, three checks amounting to $4,450 were found to be outstanding.
4. It was discovered that a check to pay for repairs was correctly written and paid by the bank for $3,100 but was recorded on the books as $1,600.
Required
Prepare a bank reconciliation at the end of October showing the true cash balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Missing information in a bank reconciliation
The following data apply to Owens Sports, Inc., for April 2010:
1. Balance per the bank on April 30, $12,250.
2. Deposits in transit not recorded by the bank, $2,700.
3. Bank error; check written by Owens on his personal checking account was drawn on the
Owens Sports, Inc., account, $900.
4. The following checks written and recorded by Owens Sports, Inc., were not included in the bank statement:
|
1901
|
$ 250
|
|
1920
|
580
|
|
1921
|
1,650
|
5. Credit memo for note collected by the bank, $1,100.
6. Service charge for collection of note, $10.
7. The bookkeeper recorded a check written for $560 to pay for April’s office supplies as $650 in the cash disbursements journal.
8. Bank service charge in addition to the note collection fee, $40.
9. NSF checks returned by the bank, $150.
Required
Determine the amount of the unadjusted cash balance per Owens Sports, Inc.’s books.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjustments to the cash account based on the bank reconciliation
Required
Determine whether the following items in Powers Imports’ bank reconciliation require adjusting or correcting entries on Powers Imports’ books.
a. The bank collected $7,000 of Powers Imports’ accounts receivable. Powers Imports had instructed its customers to send their payments directly to the bank.
b. The bank mistakenly gave Imports, Inc., credit for a $500 deposit made by Powers Imports.
c. Deposits in transit were $5,600.
d. Powers Imports’ bank statement contained a $750 NSF check. Powers Imports had received the check from a customer and had included it in one of its bank deposits.
e. The bank statement indicated that Powers Imports earned $80 of interest revenue.
f. Powers Imports’ accountant mistakenly recorded a $230 check that was written to purchase supplies as $370.
g. Bank service charges for the month were $50.
h. The bank reconciliation disclosed the fact that $600 had been stolen from Powers Imports’ business.
i. Outstanding checks amounted to $1,700.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank reconciliation and adjustments to the Cash account
The following information is available for River Bed Hotel for July 2010.
|
Bolta Vista, NV 10001
State Bank
Bank Statement
|
|
River Bed Hotel
10 Main Street
Bolta Vista, NV 10001
|
Account number
12 4567
July 31, 2010
|
|
Bolta Vista, NV 10001
|
|
|
|
Account number
|
|
|
12 4567
|
|
|
July 31, 2010
|
|
Beginning balance 6/30/2010
|
$ 9,031
|
|
Total deposits and other credits
|
28,900
|
|
Total checks and other debits
|
23,902
|
|
Ending balance 7/31/2010
|
14,029
|
|
Checks and Debits
|
Deposits and Credits
|
|
Check No.
|
Amount
|
Date
|
|
Amount
|
|
2350
|
$3,761
|
July
|
1
|
$1,102
|
|
2351
|
1,643
|
July
|
10
|
6,498
|
|
2352
|
8,000
|
July
|
15
|
4,929
|
|
2354
|
2,894
|
July
|
21
|
6,174
|
|
2355
|
1,401
|
July
|
26
|
5,963
|
|
2357
|
6,187
|
July
|
30
|
2,084
|
|
DM
|
16
|
CM
|
|
2,150
|
The following is a list of checks and deposits recorded on the books of the River Bed Hotel for July 2010.
|
Date
|
Check No.
|
Amount of Check
|
Date
|
Amount of Deposit
|
|
July
|
2
|
2351
|
$1,643
|
July
|
8
|
$6,498
|
|
July
|
4
|
2352
|
8,000
|
July
|
14
|
4,929
|
|
July
|
10
|
2353
|
1,700
|
July
|
21
|
6,174
|
|
July
|
10
|
2354
|
2,894
|
July
|
26
|
5,963
|
|
July
|
15
|
2355
|
1,401
|
July
|
29
|
2,084
|
|
July
|
20
|
2356
|
950
|
July
|
30
|
3,550
|
|
July
|
22
|
2357
|
6,187
|
|
|
|
Other Information
1. Check no. 2350 was outstanding from June.
2. Credit memo was for collection of notes receivable.
3. All checks were paid at the correct amount.
4. Debit memo was for printed checks.
5. The June 30 bank reconciliation showed a deposit in transit of $1,102.
6. The unadjusted Cash account balance at July 31 was $12,795.
Required
a. Prepare the bank reconciliation for River Bed Hotel at the end of July.
b. Explain how the adjustments described above affect the cash account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank reconciliation and internal control
Following is a bank reconciliation for Fez’s Sandwich Shop for May 31, 2010.
|
Cash Account
|
Bank Statement
|
|
Balance as of 5/31/10
|
$25,500
|
$23,000
|
|
Deposit in transit
|
|
4,250
|
|
Outstanding checks
|
|
(1,730)
|
|
Note collected by bank
|
1,050
|
|
|
Bank service charge
|
(30)
|
|
|
Automatic payment on loan
|
(1,000)
|
|
|
Adjusted cash balance as of 5/31/10
|
$25,520
|
$25,520
|
Because of limited funds, Fez’s employed only one accountant who was responsible for receiving cash, recording receipts and disbursements, preparing deposits, and preparing the bank reconciliation. The accountant left the company on June 8, 2010, after preparing the preceding statement. His replacement compared the checks returned with the bank statement to the cash disbursements journal and found the total of outstanding checks to be $4,200.
Required
a. Prepare a corrected bank reconciliation.
b. What is the total amount of cash missing, and how was the difference between the true cash” per the bank and the true cash” per the books hidden on the reconciliation prepared by the former employee?
c. What could Fez’s do to avoid cash theft in the future?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Ruby Tuesday’s, Inc., operated 834 casual dining restaurants across the United States as of June 5, 2007. As of July 31, 2007, Zale Corporation operated 1,471 retail jewelry stores and 793 kiosks throughout the United States, Canada, and Puerto Rico. The following data were taken from these companies’ 2007 annual reports. All dollar amounts are in thousands.
|
|
Ruby Tuesday’s
|
Zale Corporation
|
|
|
June 5, 2007
|
July 31, 2007
|
|
Sales
|
$1,395,212*
|
$2,437,075
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
375,836
|
1,187,601
|
|
Net Income
|
91,668
|
59,252
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
11,825
|
1,021,164
|
Required
a. Before performing any calculations, speculate as to which company will take the longest to sell its inventory. Explain the rationale for your decision.
b. Calculate the inventory turnover ratios for Ruby Tuesday’s and Zale Corporation.
c. Calculate the average days to sell inventory for Ruby Tuesday’s and Zale Corporation.
d. Do the calculations from Requirements b and c confirm your speculations in Requirement a?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Inventory cost flow
The accounting records of Robin Co. showed the following balances at January 1, 2008:
|
Cash
|
$30,000
|
|
Beginning inventory (100 units @ $50, 70 units @ $55)
|
8,850
|
|
Common stock
|
20,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
18,850
|
Transactions for 2008 were as follows:
|
Purchased 100 units @ $54 per unit.
|
|
Purchased 250 units @ $58 per unit.
|
|
Sold 220 units @ $80 per unit.
|
|
Sold 200 units @ $90 per unit.
|
|
Paid operating expenses of $3,200.
|
|
Paid income tax expense. The income tax rate is 30%.
|
Required
a. Organize the class into three sections, and divide each section into groups of three to five students. Assign each section one of the cost flow methods, FIFO, LIFO, or weighted average. The company uses the perpetual inventory system.
Group Tasks
Determine the amount of ending inventory, cost of goods sold, gross margin, and net income after income tax for the cost flow method assigned to your section. Also prepare an income statement using that cost flow assumption.
Class Discussion
b. Have a representative of each section put its income statement on the board. Discuss the effect that each cost flow method has on assets (ending inventory), net income, and cash flows. Which method is preferred for tax reporting? For financial reporting? What restrictions are placed on the use of LIFO for tax reporting?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Case Analyzing inventory management issues at Ryland Group, Inc.
In 2005, after years of positive growth in the housing market, sales and prices began to slow down and then decline. By 2007 many large home construction companies were reporting net losses. The data below, for Ryland Group, Inc.’s fiscal years ending on December 31, 2006, and 2005, pertain to analyzing the company’s management of inventory. All dollar amounts are in thousands.
|
|
2006
|
2005
|
|
Sales*
|
$4,653,920
|
$4,725,751
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
3,640,075
|
3,537,603
|
|
Ending inventory**
|
1,735,859
|
1,188,148
|
|
Income before taxes
|
567,108
|
721,051
|
Required
a. Compute Ryland’s gross margin percentage for 2006 and 2005.
b. Compute Ryland average days to sell inventory for 2006 and 2005.
c. Was Ryland’s decline in earnings from 2005 to 2006 affected by either a lower gross margin or lower inventory turnover? Explain.
d. Do you think there may have been a connection between the change in Ryland’s gross margin percentage from 2005 to 2006 and the change in its average days to sell inventory for the same period? Explain.
e. How much higher or lower would Ryland’s earnings before taxes have been in 2006 if its gross margin percentage had been the same as it was in 2005? Show all supporting computations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Using the average days to sell inventory ratio to make a lending decision
Carter’s Produce has applied for a loan and has agreed to use its inventory to collateralize the loan. The company currently has an inventory balance of $289,000. The cost of goods sold for the past year was $7,518,000. The average shelf life for the fruit that Carter sells is 10 days, after which time it begins to spoil and must be sold at drastically reduced prices to dispose of it rapidly. The company maintained steady sales over the past three years and expects to continue at current levels for the foreseeable future.
Required
Based on your knowledge of inventory turnover, write a memo that describes the quality of the inventory as collateral for the loan.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Using ratios to make comparisons
The following accounting information pertains to Clemens Corp. and Twain Inc. at the end of 2009. The only difference between the two companies is that Clemens uses FIFO while Twain uses LIFO.
|
|
Clemens
|
Twain
|
|
Cash
|
$ 75,000
|
$ 75,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
150,000
|
100,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
160,000
|
160,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
600,000
|
650,000
|
|
Building
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,000,000
|
1,000,000
|
Required
a. Compute the gross margin percentage for each company, and identify the company that appears to be charging the higher prices in relation to its costs.
b. For each company, compute the inventory turnover ratio and the average number of days to sell inventory. Identify the company that appears to be incurring the higher inventory financing cost.
c. Explain why the company with the lower gross margin percentage has the higher inventory turnover ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Internal control procedures
Alison Marsh was a trusted employee of Small City State Bank. She was involved in everything. She worked as a teller, she accounted for the cash at the other teller windows, and she recorded many of the transactions in the accounting records. She was so loyal that she never would take a day off, even when she was really too sick to work. She routinely worked late to see that all the day’s work was posted into the accounting records. She would never take even a day’s vacation because they might need her at the bank. Tick and Tack, CPAs, were hired to perform an audit, the first complete audit that had been done in several years. Marsh seemed somewhat upset by the upcoming audit. She said that everything had been properly accounted for and that the audit was a needless expense. When Tick and Tack examined some of the bank’s internal control procedures, it discovered problems. In fact, as the audit progressed, it became apparent that a large amount of cash was missing. Numerous adjustments had been made to customer accounts with credit memorandums, and many of the transactions had been posted several days late. In addition, there were numerous cash payments for office expenses.” When the audit was complete, it was determined that more than $200,000 of funds was missing or improperly accounted for. All fingers pointed to Marsh. The bank’s president, who was a close friend of Marsh, was bewildered. How could this type of thing happen at this bank?
Required
Prepare a written memo to the bank president, outlining the procedures that should be followed to prevent this type of problem in the future.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporate Governance I need just a little extra money
Terry Bailey, an accountant, has worked for the past eight years as a payroll clerk for Fairwell Furniture, a small furniture manufacturing firm in the northeast. Terry recently experienced unfortunate circumstances. Her teenage son required minor surgery and the medical bills not covered by Terry’s insurance have financially strained Terry’s family. Terry works hard and is a model employee. Although she received regular performance raises during her first few years with Fairwell, Terry’s wages have not increased in three years. Terry asked her supervisor, Bill Jameson, for a raise. Bill agreed that Terry deserved a raise, but told her he could not currently approve one because of sluggish sales. A disappointed Terry returned to her duties while the financial pressures in her life continued. Two weeks later, Larry Tyler, an assembly worker at Fairwell, quit over a dispute with management. Terry conceived an idea. Terry’s duties included not only processing employee terminations but also approving time cards before paychecks were issued and then distributing the paychecks to firm personnel. Terry decided to delay processing Mr. Tyler’s termination, to forge timecards for Larry Tyler for the next few weeks, and to cash the checks herself. Since she distributed paychecks, no one would find out, and Terry reasoned that she was really entitled to the extra money anyway. In fact, no one did discover her maneuver and Terry stopped the practice after three weeks.
Required
a. Does Terry’s scheme affect Fairwell’s balance sheet? Explain your answer.
b. Review the AICPA’s Code of Professional Conduct and comment on any of the standards that have been violated.
c. The fraud triangle identifies three common features of unethical and criminal conduct. Name these features and explain how they pertain to this case.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Analyzing inventory at Gap Company
Using either Gap’s most current Form 10 K or the company’s annual report, answer the questions below. To obtain the Form 10 K use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A, or the company’s website. The company’s annual report is available on its website.
Required
a. What was the average amount of inventory per store? Use all stores operated by The Gap, Inc., not just those called The Gap.
b. How many new stores did Gap open during the year?
c. Using the quarterly financial information in the 10 K, complete the following chart.
|
Quarter
|
Sales during Each Quarter
|
|
1
|
$
|
|
2
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
4
|
|
d. Referring to the chart in Requirement c, explain why Gap’s sales vary so widely throughout its fiscal year. Do you believe that Gap’s inventory level varies throughout the year in relation to sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During 2010 Calico Company experienced the following accounting events.
1. Provided $120,000 of services on account.
2. Collected $85,000 cash from accounts receivable.
3. Wrote off $1,800 of accounts receivable that were uncollectible.
4. Loaned $3,000 to an individual, Emma Gardner, in exchange for a note receivable.
5. Paid $90,500 cash for operating expenses.
6. Estimated that uncollectible accounts expense would be 2 percent of credit sales. Recorded the year end adjusting entry.
7. Recorded the year end adjusting entry for accrued interest on the note receivable (see Event 4). Calico made the loan on August 1. It had a six month term and a 6 percent rate of interest.
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
|
Equity
|
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
Allow.
|
+
|
Notes Rec.
|
+
|
Int. Rec.
|
=
|
|
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
Bal.
|
12,000
|
|
18,000
|
|
2,200
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
20,000
|
+
|
7,800
|
Required
a. Record the 2010 events in ledger accounts using the horizontal format shown above.
b. Determine net income for 2010.
c. Determine net cash flow from operating activities for 2010.
d. Determine the net realizable value of accounts receivable at December 31, 2010.
e. What amount of interest revenue will Calico recognize on its note receivable in 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of financial statement effects of accounting for uncollectible accounts under the allowance method
Businesses using the allowance method for the recognition of uncollectible accounts expense commonly experience four accounting events.
1. Recognition of revenue on account.
2. Collection of cash from accounts receivable.
3. Recognition of uncollectible accounts expense through a year end adjusting entry.
4. Write off of uncollectible accounts.
Required
Show the effect of each event on the elements of the financial statements, using a horizontal statements model like the one shown here. Use the following coding scheme to record your answers: increase is +, decrease is , not affected is NA. In the cash flow column, indicate whether the item is an operating activity (OA), investing activity (IA), or financing activity (FA). The first transaction is entered as an example.
|
Event No.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
+
|
|
NA
|
|
+
|
+
|
|
NA
|
=
|
+
|
NA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of recognizing uncollectible accounts expense on financial statements: percent of revenue allowance method
Pete’s Auto Service was started on January 1, 2010. The company experienced the following events during its first year of operation.
Events affecting 2010
1. Provided $50,000 of repair services on account.
2. Collected $35,000 cash from accounts receivable.
3. Adjusted the accounting records to reflect the estimate that uncollectible accounts expense would be 1 percent of the service revenue on account.
Events affecting 2011
1. Wrote off a $350 account receivable that was determined to be uncollectible.
2. Provided $65,000 of repair services on account.
3. Collected $66,000 cash from accounts receivable.
4. Adjusted the accounting records to reflect the estimate that uncollectible accounts expense would be 1 percent of the service revenue on account.
Required
a. Organize the transaction data in accounts under an accounting equation.
b. Determine the following amounts:
(1) Net income for 2010.
(2) Net cash flow from operating activities for 2010.
(3) Balance of accounts receivable at the end of 2010.
(4) Net realizable value of accounts receivable at the end of 2010.
c. Repeat Requirement b for the 2011 accounting period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of cash discounts on financial statements: perpetual system (gross method)
Digital Sales was started in 2011. The company experienced the following accounting events during its first year of operation.
1. Started business when it acquired $80,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased merchandise with a list price of $64,000 on account, terms 2/10, n/30.
3. Paid off one half of the accounts payable balance within the discount period.
4. Sold merchandise on account that had a list price of $52,000. Credit terms were 1/20, n/30. The merchandise had cost Digital $31,000.
5. Collected cash from the account receivable within the discount period.
6. Paid $9,600 cash for operating expenses.
7. Paid the balance due on accounts payable. The payment was not made within the discount period.
Required
a. Record the events in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
+
|
Inv.
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. What is the amount of gross margin for the period? What is the net income for the period?
c. Why would Digital Sales sell merchandise with the terms 1/20, n/30?
d. What do the terms 2/10, n/30 in Event 2 mean to Digital Sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of inventory losses: perpetual system
Cox Sales experienced the following events during 2010, its first year of operation.
1. Started the business when it acquired $50,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Paid $21,000 cash to purchase inventory.
3. Sold inventory costing $12,500 for $26,500 cash.
4. Physically counted inventory showing $7,900 inventory was on hand at the end of the accounting period.
Required
a. Determine the amount of the difference between book balance and the actual amount of inventory as determined by the physical count.
b. Explain how differences between the book balance and the physical count of inventory could arise. Why is being able to determine whether differences exist useful to management?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining the effect of inventory transactions on the horizontal statements model: perpetual system
Ramsey Company experienced the following events.
1. Purchased merchandise inventory on account.
2. Purchased merchandise inventory for cash.
3. Sold merchandise inventory on account. Label the revenue recognition 3a and the expense recognition 3b.
4. Returned merchandise purchased on account.
5. Sold merchandise inventory for cash. Label the revenue recognition 5a and the expense recognition 5b.
6. Paid cash on accounts payable within the discount period.
7. Paid cash for selling and administrative expenses.
8. Collected cash from accounts receivable not within the discount period.
9. Paid cash for transportation out.
10. Paid cash for transportation in.
Required
Identify each event as asset source (AS), asset use (AU), asset exchange (AE), or claims exchange (CE). Also explain how each event affects the financial statements by placing a 1 for increase, 2 for decrease, or NA for not affected under each of the components in the following statements model. Assume the company uses the perpetual inventory system. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
Event No.
|
Event Type
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
AS
|
+
|
=
|
+
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Single step and multistep income statements
The following information was taken from the accounts of Helen’s Groceries, a delicatessen. The accounts are listed in alphabetical order, and each has a normal balance.
|
Accounts payable
|
$600
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
400
|
|
Advertising expense
|
200
|
|
Cash
|
410
|
|
Common stock
|
200
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
600
|
|
Interest expense
|
70
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
450
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
40
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
|
(Beginning balance)
|
635
|
|
Sales revenue
|
1,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
130
|
|
Supplies expense
|
110
|
|
Loss on sale of land
|
25
|
Required
First, prepare an income statement using the single step approach. Then prepare another income statement using the multistep approach.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
The following data were taken from Microsoft Corporation’s 2007 annual report. All dollar amounts are in millions.
|
|
Fiscal Years Ending
|
|
|
June 30, 2007
|
June 30, 2006
|
|
Revenue
|
$51,122
|
$44,282
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
10,693
|
7,650
|
|
Net Income
|
14,065
|
12,599
|
Required
a. Compute Microsoft’s gross margin percentage for 2007 and 2006.
b. Compute Microsoft’s return on sales percentage for 2007 and 2006.
c. Based on the percentages computed in Requirements a and b, did Microsoft’s performance get better or worse from 2006 to 2007?
d. Compare Microsoft’s gross margin percentages and return on sales percentages to those of the other real world companies discussed in this chapter and discuss whether or not it appears to have better than average financial performance or not.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic transactions for three accounting cycles: perpetual system
Ferguson Company was started in 2008 when it acquired $60,000 from the issue of common stock. The following data summarize the company’s first three years’ operating activities. Assume that all transactions were cash transactions.
|
|
2008
|
2009
|
2010
|
|
Purchases of inventory
|
$24,000
|
$12,000
|
$20,500
|
|
Sales
|
26,000
|
30,000
|
36,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
13,400
|
18,500
|
20,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
5,500
|
8,200
|
10,100
|
Required
Prepare an income statement (use the multistep format) and balance sheet for each fiscal year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive cycle problem: perpetual system
At the beginning of 2012, D & L Enterprises had the following balances in its accounts:
|
Cash
|
$8,400
|
|
Inventory
|
2,000
|
|
Common stock
|
8,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,400
|
During 2012, D & L Enterprises experienced the following events:
1. Purchased inventory costing $5,600 on account from Smoot Company under terms 2/10, n/30.
The merchandise was delivered FOB shipping point. Freight costs of $500 were paid in cash.
2. Returned $400 of the inventory that it had purchased because the inventory was damaged in transit. The freight company agreed to pay the return freight cost.
3. Paid the amount due on its account payable to Smoot Company within the cash discount period.
4. Sold inventory that had cost $6,000 for $9,000. The sale was on account under terms 2/10, n/45.
5. Received returned merchandise from a customer. The merchandise had originally cost $520 and had been sold to the customer for $840 cash. The customer was paid $840 cash for the returned merchandise.
6. Delivered goods in Event 4 FOB destination. Freight costs of $600 were paid in cash.
7. Collected the amount due on accounts receivable within the discount period.
8. Took a physical count indicating that $1,800 of inventory was on hand at the end of the accounting period.
Required
a. Identify these events as asset source (AS), asset use (AU), asset exchange (AE), or claims exchange (CE).
b. Record each event in a statements model like the following one.
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
Event
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
=
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
+
|
Mdse. Inv.
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
c. Prepare an income statement, a statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, a balance sheet, and a statement of cash flows.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performing ratio analysis using real world data
Supervalu, Inc., claims to be the largest publicly held food wholesaler in the United States. In addition to being a food wholesaler, it operates extreme value” retail grocery stores under the name Save A Lot. Most of these discount stores are located in inner city areas not served by others. Whole Food Markets claims to be the world’s largest retailer of natural and organic foods. Unlike Save A Lot stores that focuses on low income customers, Whole Foods offers specialty products to customers with sufficient disposal income to spend on such goods. The following data were taken from these companies’ 2007 annual reports. All dollar amounts are in millions.
|
|
Supervalu, Inc.
|
Whole Foods
|
|
|
February 24, 2007
|
September 30, 2007
|
|
Sales
|
$37,406
|
$6,592
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
29,267
|
4,295
|
|
Net Income
|
452
|
183
|
Required
a. Before performing any calculations, speculate as to which company will have the highest gross margin and return on sales percentage. Explain the rationale for your decision.
b. Calculate the gross margin percentages for Supervalu and Whole Foods Market.
c. Calculate the return on sales percentages for Supervalu and Whole Foods Market.
d. Do the calculations from Requirements b and c confirm your speculations in Requirement a?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Case Identifying companies based on financial statement information
Presented here is selected information from the 2005 fiscal year 10 K reports of four companies. The four companies, in alphabetical order, are Caterpillar, Inc., a manufacturer of heavy machinery; Oracle Corporation, a company that develops software; Starbucks, a company that sells coffee products; and Tiffany & Company, a company that operates high end jewelry and department stores. The data for the companies, presented in the order of the amount of their sales in millions of dollars, follow.
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
|
Sales
|
$2,395
|
$6,369
|
$11,799
|
$36,339
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
1,052
|
2,605
|
2,651
|
26,558
|
|
Net Earnings
|
255
|
495
|
2,886
|
2,854
|
|
Inventory
|
1,060
|
546
|
0
|
5,224
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
142
|
191
|
2,900
|
13,968
|
|
Total Assets
|
$2,777
|
$3,514
|
$20,687
|
$47,069
|
Required
Based on these financial data and your knowledge and assumptions about the nature of the businesses that the companies operate, determine which data relate to which companies. Write a memorandum explaining your decisions. Include a discussion of which ratios you used in your analysis, and show the computations of these ratios in your memorandum.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Using ratios to make comparisons
The following income statements were drawn from the annual reports of Design Company and Royal Company.
|
Design
|
Royal
|
|
Net Sales
|
$95,700
|
$52,300
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
68,900
|
31,400
|
|
Gross Margin
|
26,800
|
20,900
|
|
Less: Selling and Admin. Expenses
|
22,000
|
18,800
|
|
Net Income
|
$4,800
|
$2,100
|
Required
a. One of the companies is a high end retailer that operates in exclusive shopping malls. The other operates discount stores located in low cost stand alone buildings. Identify the high end retailer and the discounter. Support your answer with appropriate ratios.
b. If Design and Royal have equity of $40,000 and $21,000, respectively, which company is the more profitable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Written Assignment, Critical Thinking Effect of sales returns on financial statements
Bell Farm and Garden Equipment reported the following information for 2010:
|
Net Sales of Equipment
|
$2,450,567
|
|
Other Income
|
6,786
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
1,425,990
|
|
Selling, General, and Administrative Expense
|
325,965
|
|
Net Operating Income
|
$ 705,398
|
Selected information from the balance sheet as of December 31, 2010, follows.
|
Cash and Marketable Securities
|
$113,545
|
|
Inventory
|
248,600
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
82,462
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment—Net
|
335,890
|
|
Other Assets
|
5,410
|
|
Total Assets
|
$785,907
|
Assume that a major customer returned a large order to Bell on December 31, 2010. The amount of the sale had been $146,800 with a cost of sales of $94,623. The return was recorded in the books on January 1, 2011. The company president does not want to correct the books. He argues that it makes no difference as to whether the return is recorded in 2010 or 2011. Either way, the return has been duly recognized.
Required
a. Assume that you are the CFO for Bell Farm and Garden Equipment Co. Write a memo to the president explaining how omitting the entry on December 31, 2010, could cause the financial statements to be misleading to investors and creditors. Explain how omitting the return from the customer would affect net income and the balance sheet.
b. Why might the president want to record the return on January 1, 2011, instead of December 31, 2010? c. Would the failure to record the customer return violate the AICPA Code of Professional Conduct? (See Exhibit 1.4 in Chapter 1.)
d. If the president of the company refuses to correct the financial statements, what action should you take?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporate Governance Wait until I get mine Ada Fontanez is the chief executive officer (CEO) of a large company that owns a chain of athletic shoe stores. The company was in dire financial condition when she was hired three years ago. To motivate Fontanez, the board of directors included a bonus plan as part of her compensation package. According to her employment contract, on January 15 of each year, Fontanez is paid a cash bonus equal to 5 percent of the amount of net income reported on the preceding December 31 income statement. Fontanez was sufficiently motivated. Through her leadership, the company prospered. Her efforts were recognized throughout the industry, and she received numerous lucrative offers to leave the company. One offer was so enticing that she decided to change jobs. Her decision was made in late December 2010. However, she decided to resign effective February 1, 2011, to ensure the receipt of her January bonus. On December 31, 2010, the chief financial officer (CFO), Walter Smith, advised Fontanez that the company had a sizable quantity of damaged inventory. A warehouse fire had resulted in smoke and water damage to approximately $600,000 of inventory. The warehouse was not insured, and the accountant recommended that the loss be recognized immediately. After examining the inventory, Fontanez argued that it could be sold as damaged goods to customers at reduced prices. She refused to allow the write off the accountant recommended. She stated that so long as she is president, the inventory stays on the books at cost. She told the accountant that he could take up the matter with the new president in February.
Required
a. How would an immediate write off of the damaged inventory affect the December 31, 2010, income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows?
b. How would the write off affect Fontanez’s bonus?
c. If the new president is given the same bonus plan, how will Fontanez’s refusal to recognize the loss affect his or her bonus?
d. Assume Walter Smith (CFO) yields to the pressure exerted by Ada Fontanez (CEO) and certifies the financial statements without requiring the write off. What penalties may he face under the Sarbanes Oxley Act?
e. Assume that Walter Smith is a CPA. Explain how signing off on the financial statements without recognizing the write off violates Article II of the AICPA Code of Professional Conduct (see Chapter 2, Exhibit 2.7).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Analyzing Alcoa’s profit margins
Using either Alcoa’s most current Form 10 K or the company’s annual report, answer the questions below. To obtain the Form 10 K you can use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A, or the company’s website. The company’s annual report is available on its website.
Required
a. What was Alcoa’s gross margin percentage for the most current year?
b. What was Alcoa’s gross margin percentage for the previous year? Has it changed significantly?
c. What was Alcoa’s return on sales percentage for the most current year?
d. What percentage of Alcoa’s total sales for the most current year was from operations in the United States?
e. Comment on the appropriateness of comparing Alcoa’s gross margin with that of Ford Motor Company. If Ford has a higher/lower margin, does that mean that Ford is a better managed company?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Nash Office Supply (NOS) purchased two Model 303 copiers at different times. The first copier purchased cost $400 and the second copier purchased cost $450. NOS sold one of the copiers for $600. Determine the gross margin on the sale and the ending inventory balance assuming NOS accounts for inventory using (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average.
2. The following information was drawn from the inventory records of Fields, Inc.
|
Beginning inventory
|
200 units @ $20
|
|
First purchase
|
400 units @ $22
|
|
Second purchase
|
600 units @ $24
|
Assume that Fields sold 900 units of inventory.
a. Determine the amount of cost of goods sold using FIFO.
b. Would using LIFO produce a higher or lower amount of cost of goods sold? Why?
3. What are nine features of an internal control system?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of inventory cost flow (FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average) on gross margin
The following information pertains to Boone Company for 2009.
|
Beginning inventory
|
70 units @ $26
|
|
Units purchased
|
280 units @ $30
|
Ending inventory consisted of 30 units. Boone sold 320 units at $40 each. All purchases and sales were made with cash.
Required
a. Compute the gross margin for Boone Company using the following cost flow assumptions: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average.
b. What is the dollar amount of difference in net income between using FIFO versus LIFO? (Ignore income tax considerations.)
c. Determine the cash flow from operating activities, using each of the three cost flow assumptions listed in Requirement a. Ignore the effect of income taxes. Explain why these cash flows have no differences.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of inventory cost flow on ending inventory balance and gross margin
Ross Sales had the following transactions for DVDs in 2010, its first year of operations.
|
Jan. 20
|
Purchased 75 units @ $15
|
=
|
$1,125
|
|
Apr. 21
|
Purchased 450 units @ $20
|
=
|
9,000
|
|
July 25
|
Purchased 300 units @ $23
|
=
|
6,900
|
|
Sept. 19
|
Purchased 100 units @ $26
|
=
|
2,600
|
During the year, Ross Sales sold 850 DVDs for $60 each.
Required
a. Compute the amount of ending inventory Ross would report on the balance sheet, assuming the following cost flow assumptions: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average.
b. Compute the difference in gross margin between the FIFO and LIFO cost flow assumptions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income tax effect of shifting from FIFO to LIFO
The following information pertains to the inventory of the Eaton Company.
|
Jan. 1
|
Beginning Inventory
|
600 units @ $22
|
|
Apr. 1
|
Purchased
|
2,500 units @ $25
|
|
Oct. 1
|
Purchased
|
700 units @ $28
|
During the year, Eaton sold 3,300 units of inventory at $40 per unit and incurred $15,000 of operating expenses. Eaton currently uses the FIFO method but is considering a change to LIFO. All transactions are cash transactions. Assume a 30 percent income tax rate.
Required
a. Prepare income statements using FIFO and LIFO.
b. Determine the amount of income taxes Eaton would save if it changed cost flow methods.
c. Determine the cash flow from operating activities under FIFO and LIFO.
d. Explain why cash flow from operating activities is lower under FIFO when that cost flow method produced the higher gross margin.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of FIFO versus LIFO on income tax expense
Beth Porter, Inc., had sales of $225,000 for 2009, its first year of operation. On April 2, the company purchased 200 units of inventory at $210 per unit. On September 1, an additional 150 units were purchased for $230 per unit. The company had 50 units on hand at the end of the year. The company’s income tax rate is 35 percent. All transactions are cash transactions.
Required
a. The preceding paragraph describes five accounting events: (1) a sales transaction, (2) the first purchase of inventory, (3) a second purchase of inventory, (4) the recognition of cost of goods sold expense, and (5) the payment of income tax expense. Record the amounts of each event in horizontal statements models like the following ones, assuming first a FIFO and then a LIFO cost flow.
|
Effect of Events on Financial Statements Panel 1: FIFO Cost Flow
|
|
Event No.
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Inventory
|
=
|
C. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
|
|
Panel 2: LIFO Cost Flow
|
|
Event No.
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Inventory
|
=
|
C. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Compute net income using FIFO.
c. Compute net income using LIFO.
d. Explain the difference, if any, in the amount of income tax expense incurred using the two cost flow assumptions.
e. How does the use of the FIFO versus the LIFO cost flow assumptions affect the statement of cash flows?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internal controls to prevent theft
Sarah Black worked as the parts manager for Country Automobiles, a local automobile dealership. Sarah was very dedicated and never missed a day of work. Since Country was a small operation, she was the only employee in the parts department. Her duties consisted of ordering parts for stock and as needed for repairs, receiving the parts and checking them in, distributing them as needed to the shop or to customers for purchase, and keeping track of and taking the year end inventory of parts. Country decided to expand and needed to secure additional financing. The local bank agreed to a loan contingent on an audit of the dealership. One requirement of the audit was to oversee the inventory count of both automobiles and parts on hand. Sarah was clearly nervous, explaining that she had just inventoried all parts in the parts department and supplied the auditors with a detailed list. The inventory showed parts on hand worth $225,000. This seemed a little excessive, and the accountants decided they needed to verify at least a substantial part of the inventory. When the auditors began their counts, a pattern began to develop. Each type of part seemed to be one or two items short when the actual count was taken. This raised more concern. Although Sarah assured the auditors the parts were just misplaced, the auditors continued the count. After completing the count of parts on hand, the auditors could document only $155,000 of actual parts. Suddenly, Sarah quit her job and moved to another state.
Required
a. What do you suppose caused the discrepancy between the actual count and the count that Sarah had supplied?
b. What procedures could be put into place to prevent this type of problem?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internal control procedures
Dick Haney is opening a new business that will sell sporting goods. It will initially be a small operation, and he is concerned about the security of his assets. He will not be able to be at the business all of the time and will have to rely on his employees and internal control procedures to ensure that transactions are properly accounted for and assets are safeguarded. He will have a store manager and two other employees who will be sales personnel and stock personnel and who will also perform any other duties necessary. Dick will be in the business on a regular basis. He has come to you for advice.
Required
Write a memo to Dick outlining the procedures that he should implement to ensure that his store assets are protected and that the financial transactions are properly recorded.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relation of elements to financial statements
Required
Identify whether each of the following items would appear on the income statement (IS), statement of changes in stockholders’ equity (SE), balance sheet (BS), or statement of cash flows (CF). Some items may appear on more than one statement; if so, identify all applicable statements. If an item would not appear on any financial statement, label it NA.
a. Accounts receivable
b. Accounts payable
c. Unearned revenue
d. Dividends
e. Beginning cash balance
f. Ending retained earnings
g. Rent expense
h. Ending cash balance
i. Prepaid rent
j. Net income
k. Utilities expense
l. Supplies
m. Cash flow from operating activities
n. Service revenue
o. Auditor’s opinion
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of adjusting entries on the accounting equation
Required
Each of the following independent events requires a year end adjusting entry. Show how each event and its related adjusting entry affect the accounting equation. Assume a December 31 closing date. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
Total Assets
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Event/ Adjustment
|
Cash
|
+
|
Other Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Common Stock
|
+
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
a
|
6,000
|
|
+6,000
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
Adj.
|
NA
|
|
4,500
|
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
|
24,500
|
a. Paid $6,000 cash in advance on April 1 for a one year insurance policy.
b. Purchased $1,600 of supplies on account. At year’s end, $100 of supplies remained on hand.
c. Paid $6,000 cash in advance on March 1 for a one year lease on office space.
d. Received a $15,000 cash advance for a contract to provide services in the future. The contract required a one year commitment starting September 1.
e. Paid $12,000 cash in advance on October 1 for a one year lease on office space.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of events on financial statements
Oaks Company had the following balances in its accounting records as of December 31, 2010.
|
Assets
|
|
Claims
|
|
|
Cash
|
$61,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
$25,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
45,000
|
Common Stock
|
90,000
|
|
Land
|
27,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
18,000
|
|
Totals
|
$133,000
|
|
$133,000
|
The following accounting events apply to Oaks’s 2010 fiscal year:
Jan. 1 Acquired an additional $70,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
April 1 Paid $6,600 cash in advance for a one year lease for offi ce space.
June 1 Paid a $3,000 cash dividend to the stockholders.
July 1 Purchased additional land that cost $25,000 cash.
Aug. 1 Made a cash payment on accounts payable of $13,000.
Sept. 1 Received $8,400 cash in advance as a retainer for services to be performed monthly during the next eight months.
Sept. 30 Sold land for $15,000 cash that had originally cost $15,000.
Oct. 1 Purchased $900 of supplies on account.
Dec. 31 Earned $80,000 of service revenue on account during the year.
31 Received $66,000 cash collections from accounts receivable.
31 Incurred $16,000 other operating expenses on account during the year.
31 Recognized accrued salaries expense of $5,000.
31 Had $250 of supplies on hand at the end of the period.
31 The land purchased on July 1 had a market value of $28,000.
Required
Based on the preceding information, answer the following questions. All questions pertain to the 2010 financial statements.
a. What two additional adjusting entries need to be made at the end of the year?
b. What amount would be reported for land on the balance sheet?
c. What amount of net cash flow from operating activities would Oaks report on the statement of cash flows?
d. What amount of rent expense would Oaks report in the income statement?
e. What amount of total liabilities would Oaks report on the balance sheet?
f. What amount of supplies expense would Oaks report on the income statement?
g. What amount of unearned revenue would Oaks report on the balance sheet?
h. What amount of net cash flow from investing activities would Oaks report on the statement of cash flows?
i. What amount of total expenses would Oaks report on the income statement?
j. What total amount of service revenues would Oaks report on the income statement?
k. What amount of cash flows from financing activities would Oaks report on the statement of cash flows?
l. What amount of net income would Oaks report on the income statement?
m. What amount of retained earnings would Oaks report on the balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relationship of accounts to financial statements
Required
Identify whether each of the following items would appear on the income statement (IS), statement of changes in stockholders’ equity (SE), balance sheet (BS), or statement of cash flows (CF). Some items may appear on more than one statement; if so, identify all applicable statements. If an item would not appear on any financial statement, label it NA.
a. Depreciation expense
b. Interest receivable
c. Certificate of deposit
d. Unearned revenue
e. Service revenue
f. Cash flow from investing activities
g. Consulting revenue
h. Interest expense
i. Ending common stock
j. Total liabilities
k. Debt to assets ratio
l. Cash flow from operating activities
m. Operating expenses
n. Supplies expense
o. Beginning retained earnings
p. Beginning common stock
q. Prepaid insurance
r. Salary expense
s. Accumulated depreciation
t. Cash
u. Supplies
v. Cash flow from financing activities
w. Interest revenue
x. Ending retained earnings
y. Net income
z. Dividends
aa. Office equipment
bb. Debt to equity ratio
cc. Land
dd. Interest payable
ee. Rent expense
ff. Notes receivable
gg. Accounts payable
hh. Total assets
ii. Salaries payable
jj. Insurance expense
kk. Notes payable
ll. Accounts receivable
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fraud Triangle
Pete Chalance is an accountant with a shady past. Suffice it to say that he owes some very unsavory characters a lot of money. Despite his past, Pete works hard at keeping up a strong professional image. He is a manager at Smith and Associates, a fast growing CPA firm. Pete is highly regarded around the office because he is a strong producer of client revenue. Indeed, on several occasions he exceeded his authority in establishing prices with clients. This is typically a partner’s job but who could criticize Pete, who is most certainly bringing in the business. Indeed, Pete is so good that he is able to pull off the following scheme. He bills clients at inflated rates and then reports the ordinary rate to his accounting firm. Say, for example, the normal charge for a job is $2,500. Pete will smooth talk the client, then charge him $3,000. He reports the normal charge of $2,500 to his firm and keeps the extra $500 for himself. He knows it isn’t exactly right because his firm gets its regular charges and the client willingly pays for the services rendered. He thinks to himself, as he pockets his ill gotten gains, who is getting hurt anyway?
Required
The text discusses three common features (conditions) that motivate ethical misconduct. Identify and explain each of the three features as they appear in the above scenario.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Missing information
Verizon Communications, Inc., is one of the country’s largest providers of communication services. The following information for 2004 through 2007 was taken from its annual reports. All amounts are in millions.
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
2005
|
2004
|
|
Revenue
|
$93,469
|
$88,182
|
$69,518
|
$65,751
|
|
Operating expense
|
77,891
|
74,809
|
56,937
|
54,881
|
Required
a. Divide the class into groups of four or five students. Organize the groups into three sections.
Assign each section of groups the financial data for one of the preceding accounting periods.
Group Tasks
(1) Determine the amount of net income for the year assigned.
(2) How does the result in item 1 above affect the retained earnings of the company?
(3) Compute the percentage growth rate in net income for each year.
(4) Speculate as to what may have caused Verizon’s revenue growth from 2005 to 2006 to be so much greater than its revenue growth from 2004 to 2005 and 2006 to 2007.
(5) Have representatives from each section put the income statement for their respective year on the board.
Class Discussion
b. Have the class discuss the trend in revenue and net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Case Identifying accruals and deferrals
The following information was drawn from the 2007 annual reports of five real world companies.
Adidas Group, the company that makes athletic apparel, reported trademarks of €1,291 million. [Adidas has its headquarters in Germany and reports results in euros (€).] Trademarks is the name given to the category of assets that includes such things as the company logo.
Laboratory Corporation of America (usually called LabCorp) claims to be the second largest independent clinical laboratory in the United States.” It reported supplies inventories of $80.4 million.
Media General, Inc., owns, among other things, 25 daily newspapers and 23 television stations. It reported unearned revenue of $21,244 thousand.
Motorola, Inc., which makes cell phones and other communication equipment, reported accounts receivables of $5,324 million.
Palm, Inc., the company that makes the Palm Pilot personal digital assistant, reported prepaids and others of $10,222 thousand.
Required
a. Identify each of the accounts shown in italics above as being an accrual or deferral item, and whether it is an asset or liability.
b. Juniper Networks, Inc., designs, develops, and sells high performance network infrastructure for Internet Protocol based networks. In 2007 it reported a liability called accrued compensation of $158.7 million. Write a brief explanation of what you think the company means by accrued compensation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Applications Case Analyzing the cash flow effects of different types of expenses
The following income statements are available for Hopi, Inc., and Zuni, Inc., for 2011.
|
|
Hopi, Inc.
|
Zuni, Inc.
|
|
Revenue
|
$100,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Wages expense
|
70,000
|
55,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
10,000
|
25,000
|
|
Net earnings
|
$ 20,000
|
$ 20,000
|
Required
Assume that neither company had beginning or ending balances in its Accounts Receivable or Wages Payable accounts. Explain which company would have the lowest net cash flows from operating activities for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Effects of accruals and deferrals on real world companies’ financial statements
The following information was drawn from the 2007 annual reports of three real world companies. The 2006 balance sheet of Balder Electric Company reported $0.6 million of accrued interest expense. In 2007 it reported $27.7 million of accrued interest expense. The 2006 balance sheet of The McGraw Hill Companies, Inc., reported senior long term notes payable of $0.3 million. In 2007 it reported $1.2 billion of these notes payables. The 2006 balance sheet of Terra Nitrogen, L. P., reported customer prepayments of $35.3 million. In 2007 it reported $154.6 million of customer prepayments.
Required
For each situation presented above, write a brief explanation of how the company’s 2007 financial statements would have been affected by the item in question, and whether the item is an accrual, deferral, or neither. Be sure to discuss primary and secondary effects. For example, if a company had an increase in its salaries expense, the primary effects would be the increase in expenses and decrease in net income. The secondary effects would include a decrease in retained earnings and a decrease in cash or an increase in salaries payable. Be as specific as possible.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corporate Governance What is a little deceit among friends?
Glenn’s Cleaning Services Company is experiencing cash flow problems and needs a loan. Glenn has a friend who is willing to lend him the money he needs provided she can be convinced that he will be able to repay the debt. Glenn has assured his friend that his business is viable, but his friend has asked to see the company’s financial statements. Glenn’s accountant produced the following financial statements.
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Service Revenue
|
$38,000
|
Assets
|
$85,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
(70,000)
|
Liabilities
|
$35,000
|
|
Net Loss
|
($32,000)
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
82,000
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
(32,000)
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
$85,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Glenn made the following adjustments to these statements before showing them to his friend. He recorded $82,000 of revenue on account from Barrymore Manufacturing Company for a contract to clean its headquarters office building that was still being negotiated for the next month. Barrymore had scheduled a meeting to sign a contract the following week, so Glenn was sure that he would get the job. Barrymore was a reputable company, and Glenn was confident that he could ultimately collect the $82,000. Also, he subtracted $30,000 of accrued salaries expense and the corresponding liability. He reasoned that since he had not paid the employees, he had not incurred any expense.
Required
a. Reconstruct the income statement and balance sheet as they would appear after Glenn’s adjustments. Comment on the accuracy of the adjusted financial statements.
b. Suppose you are Glenn and the $30,000 you owe your employees is due next week. If you are unable to pay them, they will quit and the business will go bankrupt. You are sure you will be able to repay your friend when your employees perform the $82,000 of services for Barrymore and you collect the cash. However, your friend is risk averse and is not likely to make the loan based on the financial statements your accountant prepared. Would you make the changes that Glenn made to get the loan and thereby save your company? Defend your position with a rational explanation.
c. Discuss the components of the fraud triangle as they apply to Glenn’s decision to change the financial statements to reflect more favorable results.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Investigating nonfinancial information in Nike’s annual report
Although most of this course is concerned with the financial statements themselves, all sections of a company’s annual report are important. A company must file various reports with the SEC, and one of these, Form 10 K, is essentially the company’s annual report. The requirements below ask you to investigate sections of Nike’s annual report that explain various nonfinancial aspects of its business operations. To obtain the Form 10 K you can use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A or the company’s website.
Required
a. In what year did Nike begin operations?
b. Other than athletic shoes, what products does Nike sell?
c. Does Nike operate businesses under names other than Nike? If so, what are they?
d. How many employees does Nike have?
e. In how many countries other than the United States does Nike sell its products?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following sales data are from the records of two retail sales companies. All amounts are in thousands.
|
|
Company A
|
Company B
|
|
Sales
|
$21,234
|
$43,465
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(14,864)
|
(34,772)
|
|
Gross margin
|
$ 6,370
|
$ 8,693
|
One company is an upscale department store, and the other is a discount store. Which company is the upscale department store?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Academy Sales Company (ASC) started the 2010 accounting period with the balances given in the financial statements model shown below. During 2010 ASC experienced the following business events.
1. Purchased $16,000 of merchandise inventory on account, terms 2/10, n/30.
2. The goods that were purchased in Event 1 were delivered FOB shipping point. Freight costs of $600 were paid in cash by the responsible party.
3. Returned $500 of goods purchased in Event 1.
4a. Recorded the cash discount on the goods purchased in Event 1.
4b. Paid the balance due on the account payable within the discount period.
5a. Recognized $21,000 of cash revenue from the sale of merchandise.
5b. Recognized $15,000 of cost of goods sold.
6. The merchandise in Event 5a was sold to customers FOB destination. Freight costs of $950 were paid in cash by the responsible party.
7. Paid cash of $4,000 for selling and administrative expenses.
8. Sold the land for $5,600 cash.
Required
a. Record the above transactions in a financial statements model like the one shown below.
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Inventory
|
+
|
Land
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev./ Gain
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Bal.
|
25,000
|
+
|
3,000
|
+
|
5,000
|
=
|
–0–
|
+
|
18,000
|
+
|
15,000
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
b. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold.
c. Prepare a multistep income statement. Include common size percentages on the income statement.
d. ASC’s gross margin percentage in 2009 was 22%. Based on the common size data in the income statement, did ASC raise or lower its prices in 2010?
e. Assuming a 10 percent rate of growth, what is the amount of net income expected for 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparing a merchandising company with a service company
The following information is available for two different types of businesses for the 2010 accounting period. Madison Consulting is a service business that provides consulting services to small businesses. Books For Less is a merchandising business that sells books to college students.
Data for Madison Consulting
1. Borrowed $40,000 from the bank to start the business.
2. Performed services for customers and collected $30,000 cash.
3. Paid salary expense of $19,200.
Data for Books For Less
1. Borrowed $40,000 from the bank to start the business.
2. Purchased $19,000 of inventory for cash.
3. Inventory costing $16,800 was sold for $30,000 cash.
4. Paid $2,400 cash for operating expenses.
Required
a. Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for each of the companies.
b. What is different about the income statements of the two businesses?
c. What is different about the balance sheets of the two businesses?
d. How are the statements of cash flow different for the two businesses?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of inventory transactions on financial statements: perpetual system
Chris Daniels started a small merchandising business in 2010. The business experienced the following events during its first year of operation. Assume that Daniels uses the perpetual inventory system.
1. Acquired $60,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased inventory for $50,000 cash.
3. Sold inventory costing $36,000 for $56,000 cash.
Required
a. Record the events in a statements model like the one shown below.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Inv.
|
=
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Prepare an income statement for 2010 (use the multistep format).
c. What is the amount of total assets at the end of the period?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of inventory transactions on the income statement and statement of cash flows: perpetual system
During 2011, Lang Merchandising Company purchased $20,000 of inventory on account. The company sold inventory on account that cost $15,000 for $22,500. Cash payments on accounts payable were $12,500. There was $20,000 cash collected from accounts receivable. Lang also paid $4,000 cash for operating expenses. Assume that Lang started the accounting period with $18,000 in both cash and common stock.
Required
a. Identify the events described in the preceding paragraph and record them in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
+
|
Inv.
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
18,000
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
18,000
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
b. What is the balance of accounts receivable at the end of 2011?
c. What is the balance of accounts payable at the end of 2011?
d. What are the amounts of gross margin and net income for 2011?
e. Determine the amount of net cash flow from operating activities.
f. Explain any differences between net income and net cash flow from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording inventory transactions in a financial statements model
David’s Paint Supply experienced the following events during 2012, its first year of operation:
1. Acquired $30,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased inventory for $24,000 cash.
3. Sold inventory costing $13,000 for $22,000 cash.
4. Paid $1,600 for advertising expense.
Required
Record the events in a statements model like the one shown below.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Inv.
|
=
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of purchase returns and allowances and freight costs on the journal, ledger, and financial statements: perpetual system
The trial balance for The Photo Hut as of January 1, 2011, was as follows:
|
Account Titles
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$6,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
3,000
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
$7,500
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
1,500
|
|
Total
|
$9,000
|
$9,000
|
The following events affected the company during the 2011 accounting period:
1. Purchased merchandise on account that cost $4,100.
2. Purchased goods in Event 1. FOB shipping point with freight cost of $300 cash.
3. Returned $500 of damaged merchandise for credit on account.
4. Agreed to keep other damaged merchandise for which the company received a $250 allowance.
5. Sold merchandise that cost $2,750 for $4,750 cash.
6. Delivered merchandise to customers under terms FOB destination with freight costs amounting to $200 cash.
7. Paid $3,000 on the merchandise purchased in Event 1.
Required
a. Organize appropriate ledger accounts under an accounting equation. Record the beginning balances and the transaction data in the accounts.
b. Prepare an income statement and statement of cash flows for 2011.
c. Explain why a difference does or does not exist between net income and net cash flow from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of product cost and period cost: horizontal statements model
Nigil Co. experienced the following events for the 2010 accounting period:
1. Acquired $10,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Purchased $18,000 of inventory on account.
3. Received goods purchased in Event 2 FOB shipping point. Freight cost of $500 paid in cash.
4. Returned $4,000 of goods purchased in Event 2 because of poor quality.
5. Sold inventory on account that cost $14,300 for $44,000.
6. Freight cost on the goods sold in Event 5 was $100. The goods were shipped FOB destination.
Cash was paid for the freight cost.
7. Collected $16,500 cash from accounts receivable.
8. Paid $12,000 cash on accounts payable.
9. Paid $2,200 for advertising expense.
10. Paid $4,400 cash for insurance expense.
Required
a. Which of these transactions result in period (selling and administrative) costs? Which result in product costs? If neither, label the transaction NA.
b. Record each event in a horizontal statements model like the following one. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
+
|
Inv.
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10,000
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
10,000
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash discounts and purchase returns
On March 6, 2010, Ed’s Imports purchased merchandise from Watches Inc. with a list price of $31,000, terms 2/10, n/45. On March 10, Ed’s returned merchandise to Watches Inc. for credit. The list price of the returned merchandise was $6,400. Ed’s paid cash to settle the accounts payable on March 15, 2010.
Required
a. What is the amount of the check that Ed’s must write to Watches Inc. on March 15?
b. Record the events in a horizontal statements model like the following one.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
Cash
|
+
|
Inv.
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
C. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
c. How much would Ed’s pay for the merchandise purchased if the payment is not made until March 20, 2010?
d. Record the payment of the merchandise in Event c in a horizontal statements model like the one shown above.
e. Why would Watches Inc. sell merchandise with the terms 2/10, n/45?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Relating titles and accounts to financial statements
Required
Identify the financial statements on which each of the following items (titles, date descriptions, and accounts) appears by placing a check mark in the appropriate column. If an item appears on more than one statement, place a check mark in every applicable column. The first item is completed as an example.
|
Item
|
Income Statement
|
Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity
|
Balance Sheet
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
|
?
|
|
|
Beginning common stock
|
|
|
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utility expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash from stock issue
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating activities
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the period ended (date)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
|
|
Investing activities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net loss
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Consulting revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dividends
|
|
|
|
|
|
Financing activities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ending common stock
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
As of (date)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning cash balance
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing financial statements for two complete accounting cycles and careers in accounting
Susan’s Consulting Services experienced the following transactions for 2010, the first year of operations, and 2011. Assume that all transactions involve the receipt or payment of cash.
Transactions for 2010
1. Acquired $50,000 by issuing common stock.
2. Received $100,000 for providing services to customers.
3. Borrowed $15,000 cash from creditors.
4. Paid expenses amounting to $60,000.
5. Purchased land for $40,000 cash.
Transactions for 2011
Beginning account balances for 2011 are
|
Cash
|
$65,000
|
|
Land
|
40,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
15,000
|
|
Common stock
|
50,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
40,000
|
1. Acquired an additional $20,000 from the issue of common stock.
2. Received $130,000 for providing services in 2011.
3. Paid $10,000 to reduce notes payable.
4. Paid expenses amounting to $75,000.
5. Paid a $15,000 dividend to the stockholders.
6. Determined that the market value of the land is $50,000.
Required
a. Write an accounting equation, and record the effects of each accounting event under the appropriate headings for each year. Record the amounts of revenue, expense, and dividends in the Retained Earnings column. Provide appropriate titles for these accounts in the last column of the table.
b. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, year end balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for each year.
c. Determine the amount of cash that is in the retained earnings account at the end of 2010 and 2011.
d. Compare the information provided by the income statement with the information provided by the statement of cash flows. Point out similarities and differences.
e. Determine the balance in the Retained Earnings account immediately after Event 2 in 2010 and in 2011 are recorded.
f. Would the financial statements for Susan’s Consulting Services be prepared by a public or a private accountant? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interrelationships among financial statements
Crawford Enterprises started the 2009 accounting period with $50,000 of assets (all cash), $18,000 of liabilities, and $4,000 of common stock. During the year, Crawford earned cash revenues of $38,000, paid cash expenses of $32,000, and paid a cash dividend to stockholders of $2,000. Crawford also acquired $15,000 of additional cash from the sale of common stock and paid $10,000 cash to reduce the liability owed to a bank.
Required
a. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, period end balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for the 2009 accounting period.
b. Determine the percentage of total assets that were provided by creditors, investors, and earnings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying events as asset source, use, or exchange
The following unrelated events are typical of those experienced by business entities.
1. Acquire cash by issuing common stock.
2. Borrow cash from the local bank.
3. Pay office supplies expense.
4. Make plans to purchase office equipment.
5. Trade a used car for a computer with the same value.
6. Pay other operating supplies expense.
7. Agree to represent a client in an IRS audit and to receive payment when the audit is complete.
8. Receive cash from customers for services rendered.
9. Pay employee salaries with cash.
10. Pay back a bank loan with cash.
11. Pay interest to a bank with cash.
12. Transfer cash from a checking account to a money market account.
13. Sell land for cash at its original cost.
14. Pay a cash dividend to stockholders.
15. Learn that a financial analyst determined the company’s price earnings ratio to be 26.
Required
Identify each of the events as an asset source, asset use, or asset exchange transaction. If an event would not be recorded under generally accepted accounting principles, identify it as not applicable (NA). Also indicate for each event whether total assets would increase, decrease, or remain unchanged. Organize your answer according to the following table. The first event is shown in the table as an example.
|
Event No.
|
Type of Event
|
Effect on Total Assets
|
|
1
|
Asset source
|
Increase
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording the effect of events in a horizontal statements model
Doyer Corporation experienced the following transactions during 2010.
1. Paid a cash dividend to the stockholders.
2. Acquired cash by issuing additional common stock.
3. Signed a contract to perform services in the future.
4. Performed services for cash.
5. Paid cash expenses.
6. Sold land for cash at an amount equal to its cost.
7. Borrowed cash from a bank.
8. Determined that the market value of the land is higher than its historical cost.
Required
Use a horizontal statements model to show how each event affects the balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows. Indicate whether the event increases (I), decreases (D), or does not affect (NA) each element of the financial statements. Also, in the Cash Flows column, classify the cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), or financing activities (FA). The first transaction is shown as an example.
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
=
|
N. Pay
|
+
|
C. Stock.
|
+
|
Ret. Ear.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
1
|
D
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
D
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
D
|
FA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording events in a horizontal statements model
Madden Company was started on January 1, 2011, and experienced the following events during its first year of operation.
1. Acquired $30,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Borrowed $40,000 cash from National Bank.
3. Earned cash revenues of $48,000 for performing services.
4. Paid cash expenses of $45,000.
5. Paid a $1,000 cash dividend to the stockholders.
6. Acquired an additional $20,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
7. Paid $10,000 cash to reduce the principal balance of the bank note.
8. Paid $53,000 cash to purchase land.
9. Determined that the market value of the land is $75,000.
Required
a. Record the preceding transactions in the horizontal statements model. Also, in the Cash Flows column, classify the cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), or financing activities (FA). The first event is shown as an example.
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
=
|
N. Pay
|
+
|
C. Stock.
|
+
|
Ret. Ear.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
1
|
30,000
|
+
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
30,000
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
30,000
|
FA
|
b. Determine the amount of total assets that Madden would report on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet.
c. Identify the sources of the assets that Madden would report on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet. Determine the amount of each of these sources.
d. Determine the net income that Madden would report on the 2011 income statement. Explain why dividends do not appear on the income statement.
e. Determine the net cash flows from operating activities, financing activities, and investing activities that Madden would report on the 2011 statement of cash flows.
f. Determine the percentage of assets that were provided by investors, creditors, and earnings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Assignment Missing information
The following selected financial information is available for ROC, Inc. Amounts are in millions of dollars.
|
Income Statements
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Revenue
|
$ 860
|
$1,520
|
$ (a)
|
$1,200
|
|
Cost and expenses
|
(a)
|
(a)
|
(2,400)
|
(860)
|
|
Income from continuing operations
|
(b)
|
450
|
320
|
(a)
|
|
Unusual items
|
0
|
175
|
(b)
|
(b)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 20
|
$ (b)
|
$ 175
|
$ 300
|
|
Balance Sheets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and marketable securities
|
$350
|
$1,720
|
$ (c)
|
$940
|
|
Other assets
|
1,900
|
(c)
|
2,500
|
(c)
|
|
Total assets
|
2,250
|
$2,900
|
$ (d)
|
$3,500
|
|
Liabilities
|
$ (c)
|
$ (d)
|
$1,001
|
$ (d)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
600
|
720
|
(e)
|
800
|
|
Retained earnings
|
(d)
|
(e)
|
800
|
(e)
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
1,520
|
1,345
|
(f)
|
2,200
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$2,250
|
$ (f)
|
$3,250
|
$3,500
|
a. Divide the class into groups of four or five students each. Organize the groups into four sections. Assign Task 1 to the first section of groups, Task 2 to the second section, Task 3 to the third section, and Task 4 to the fourth section.
Group Tasks
(1) Fill in the missing information for 2006.
(2) Fill in the missing information for 2007.
(3) Fill in the missing information for 2008.
(4) Fill in the missing information for 2009.
b. Each section should select two representatives. One representative is to put the financial statements assigned to that section on the board, underlining the missing amounts. The second representative is to explain to the class how the missing amounts were determined.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Case Classifying cash flow activities at five companies
The following events occurred at five real world companies.
On March 17, 2008, H&R Block, Inc., announced that it had signed an agreement to sell the mortgage loan servicing business that is a part of its Option One Mortgage Corporation subsidiary for approximately $1 billion. Assume this sale was completed.
On March 19, 2008, Visa, Inc., issued approximately 450 million shares of stock for almost $20 billion.
On February 19, 2008, Chrysler, LLC, announced that it planned to signifi cantly expand existing engineering operations in countries outside the United States. These plans include adding new development centers outside the country. Assume these plans were accomplished.
During 2007, Target Corporation borrowed $6.75 billion using notes payable that were due to be repaid between 2013 and 2038.
During 2007, Levi Strauss & Co. had cash sales of approximately $4.25 billion.
Required
Determine if each of the transactions above should be classified as an operating, investing, or financing activity. Also, identify each cash flow as an inflow or outflow.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Writing Assignment Elements of financial statements defined
Bob and his sister Marsha both attend the state university. As a reward for their successful completion of the past year (Bob had a 3.2 GPA in business, and Marsha had a 3.7 GPA in art), their father gave each of them 100 shares of The Walt Disney Company stock. They have just received their first annual report. Marsha does not understand what the information means and has asked Bob to explain it to her. Bob is currently taking an accounting course, and she knows he will understand the financial statements.
Required
Assume that you are Bob. Write Marsha a memo explaining the following financial statement items to her. In your explanation, describe each of the two financial statements and explain the financial information each contains. Also define each of the elements listed for each financial statement and explain what it means.
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
Revenue
|
|
Expense
|
|
Net Income
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Dilemma Loyalty versus the bottom line
Assume that Jones has been working for you for five years. He has had an excellent work history and has received generous pay raises in response. The raises have been so generous that Jones is quite overpaid for the job he is required to perform. Unfortunately, he is not qualified to take on other, more responsible jobs available within the company. A recent job applicant is willing to accept a salary $5,000 per year less than the amount currently being paid to Jones. The applicant is well qualified to take over Jones’s duties and has a very positive attitude. The following financial statements were reported by your company at the close of its most recent accounting period.
|
Financial Statements
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
$57,000
|
|
|
Expense
|
(45,000)
|
|
|
Net Income
|
$12,000
|
|
|
Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Beginning Common Stock
|
$20,000
|
|
|
Plus: Stock Issued
|
5,000
|
|
|
Ending Common Stock
|
|
$25,000
|
|
Beginning Retained Earnings
|
50,000
|
|
|
Net Income
|
12,000
|
|
|
Dividends
|
(2,000)
|
|
|
Ending Retained Earnings
|
|
60,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
$85,000
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$85,000
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
$25,000
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
60,000
|
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
$85,000
|
|
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
|
|
Operating Activities
|
|
|
|
Inflow from Customers
|
$57,000
|
|
|
Outflow for Expenses
|
(45,000)
|
|
|
Net Inflow from Operating Activities
|
|
$12,000
|
|
Investing Activities
|
|
0
|
|
Financing Activities
|
|
|
|
Inflow from Stock Issue
|
5,000
|
|
|
Outflow for Dividends
|
(2,000)
|
|
|
Net Inflow from Financing Activities
|
|
3,000
|
|
Net Change in Cash
|
|
15,000
|
|
Plus: Beginning Cash Balance
|
|
70,000
|
|
Ending Cash Balance
|
|
$85,000
|
Required
a. Reconstruct the financial statements, assuming that Jones was replaced at the beginning of the most recent accounting period. Both Jones and his replacement are paid in cash. No other changes are to be considered.
b. Would a public or private accountant be more likely to face this type of dilemma?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research Assignment Finding real world accounting information
The Curious Accountant story at the beginning of this chapter referred to the Coca Cola Company and discussed who its stakeholders are. This chapter has introduced the basic structure of the four financial statements used by companies to annually keep their stakeholders informed as to their accomplishments and financial situation. Complete the requirements below using the most recent (20xx) financial statements available on xx Coke’s website. Like many companies, Coke uses the Form 10 K that it files with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) as its annual report. Obtain the statements on the Internet by following the steps below. (The formatting of the company’s website may have changed since these instructions were written.)
- Click on the Investors” link at the top of the page.
- Click on the Financial Information” link at the left side of the page.
- Under the Financial Information” heading, click on xx Annual & Other Reports.”
- Click on 20xx Annual Report on Form 10 K.”
- Use the Table of Contents at the beginning of the Form 10 K to locate the company’s Financial Statements and Supplementary Data” section. Go to the company’s financial statements and complete the requirements below.
Required
a. What was the company’s net income in each of the last three years?
b. What amount of total assets did the company have at the end of the most recent year?
c. How much retained earnings did the company have at the end of the most recent year?
d. For the most recent year, what was the company’s cash flow from operating activities, cash flow from investing activities, and cash flow from financing activities?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gifford Company experienced the following accounting events during 2010.
1. Started operations on January 1 when it acquired $20,000 cash by issuing common stock.
2. Earned $18,000 of revenue on account.
3. On March 1 collected $36,000 cash as an advance for services to be performed in the future.
4. Paid cash operating expenses of $17,000.
5. Paid a $2,700 cash dividend to stockholders.
6. On December 31, 2010, adjusted the books to recognize the revenue earned by providing services related to the advance described in Event 3. The contract required Gifford to provide services for a one year period starting March 1.
7. Collected $15,000 cash from accounts receivable.
Gifford Company experienced the following accounting events during 2011.
1. Recognized $38,000 of cash revenue.
2. On April 1 paid $12,000 cash for an insurance policy that provides coverage for one year beginning immediately.
3. Collected $2,000 cash from accounts receivable.
4. Paid cash operating expenses of $21,000.
5. Paid a $5,000 cash dividend to stockholders.
6. On December 31, 2011, adjusted the books to recognize the remaining revenue earned by providing services related to the advance described in Event 3 of 2010.
7. On December 31, 2011, Gifford adjusted the books to recognize the amount of the insurance policy used during 2011.
Required
a. Record the events in a financial statements model like the following one. The first event is recorded as an example.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Accts. Rec.
|
|
Prep. Ins.
|
=
|
Unearn. Rev.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flow
|
|
1
|
20,000
|
+
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
20,000
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
20,000
|
FA
|
b. What amount of revenue would Gifford report on the 2010 income statement?
c. What amount of cash flow from customers would Gifford report on the 2010 statement of cash flows?
d. What amount of unearned revenue would Gifford report on the 2010 and 2011 year end balance sheets?
e. What are the 2011 opening balances for the revenue and expense accounts?
f. What amount of total assets would Gifford report on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet?
g. What claims on assets would Gifford report on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of accruals on the financial statements
Maddox, Inc., experienced the following events in 2010, in its first year of operation.
1. Received $20,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Performed services on account for $40,000.
3. Paid the utility expense of $3,500.
4. Collected $36,000 of the accounts receivable.
5. Recorded $8,000 of accrued salaries at the end of the year.
6. Paid a $2,000 cash dividend to the shareholders.
Required
a. Record the events in general ledger accounts under an accounting equation. In the last column of the table, provide appropriate account titles for the Retained Earnings amounts. The first transaction has been recorded as an example.
|
Event
|
Assets
|
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
Acct. Titles for RE
|
|
Cash
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
Common Stock
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
|
1
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for the 2010 accounting period.
c. Why is the amount of net income different from the amount of net cash flow from operating activities?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of prepaid rent on the accounting equation and financial statements
The following events apply to 2009, the first year of operations of Howard Services.
1. Acquired $30,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Paid $12,000 cash in advance for one year rental contract for office space.
3. Provided services for $23,000 cash.
4. Adjusted the records to recognize the use of the office space. The one year contract started on May 1, 2009. The adjustment was made as of December 31, 2009.
Required
a. Write an accounting equation and record the effects of each accounting event under the appropriate general ledger account headings.
b. Prepare an income statement and statement of cash flows for the 2009 accounting period.
c. Explain the difference between the amount of net income and amount of net cash flow from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of supplies on the financial statements
Kim’s Copy Service, Inc., started the 2009 accounting period with $9,000 cash, $6,000 of common stock, and $3,000 of retained earnings. Kim’s Copy Service was affected by the following accounting events during 2009.
1. Purchased $11,500 of paper and other supplies on account.
2. Earned and collected $31,000 of cash revenue.
3. Paid $9,000 cash on accounts payable.
4. Adjusted the records to reflect the use of supplies. A physical count indicated that $3,000 of supplies was still on hand on December 31, 2009.
Required
a. Show the effects of the events on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flows column, use OA to designate operating activity, IA for investing activity, FA for financing activity, and NC for net change in cash. Use NA to indicate accounts not affected by the event. The beginning balances are entered in the following example.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flows
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Supplies
|
=
|
Accts. Pay
|
+
|
C. Stock
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beg. Bal.
|
9,000
|
+
|
0
|
=
|
0
|
+
|
6,000
|
+
|
3,000
|
0
|
|
0
|
=
|
0
|
0
|
b. Explain the difference between the amount of net income and amount of net cash flow from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of accounting events on the income statement and statement of cash flows
Required
Explain how each of the following events and the related adjusting entry will affect the amount of net income and the amount of cash flow from operating activities reported on the year end financial statements. Identify the direction of change (increase, decrease, or NA) and the amount of the change. Organize your answers according to the following table. The first event is recorded as an example. If an event does not have a related adjusting entry, record only the effects of the event.
|
Net Income
|
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
|
|
Event No.
|
Direction of Change
|
Amount of Change
|
Direction of Change
|
Amount of Change
|
|
a
|
NA
|
NA
|
NA
|
NA
|
a. Acquired $70,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
b. Earned $15,000 of revenue on account. Collected $12,000 cash from accounts receivable.
c. Paid $3,600 cash on October 1 to purchase a one year insurance policy.
d. Collected $9,600 in advance for services to be performed in the future. The contract called for services to start on September 1 and to continue for one year.
e. Accrued salaries amounting to $6,000.
f. Sold land that had cost $8,000 for $8,000.
g. Provided services for $9,000 cash.
h. Purchased $1,200 of supplies on account. Paid $1,000 cash on accounts payable. The ending balance in the Supplies account, after adjustment, was $400.
i. Paid cash for other operating expenses of $2,600.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of accruals and deferrals on financial statements: the horizontal statements model
G. Gabe, Attorney at Law, experienced the following transactions in 2009, the first year of operations.
1. Purchased $1,500 of office supplies on account.
2. Accepted $24,000 on February 1, 2009, as a retainer for services to be performed evenly over the next 12 months.
3. Performed legal services for cash of $66,000.
4. Paid cash for salaries expense of $22,500.
5. Paid a cash dividend to the stockholders of $5,000.
6. Paid $1,000 of the amount due on accounts payable.
7. Determined that at the end of the accounting period, $125 of office supplies remained on hand.
8. On December 31, 2010, recognized the revenue that had been earned for services performed in accordance with Transaction 2.
Required
Show the effects of the events on the financial statements using a horizontal statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flow column, use the initials OA to designate operating activity, IA for investing activity, FA for financing activity, and NC for net change in cash. Use NA to indicate accounts not affected by the event. The first event has been recorded as an example.
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Stk. Equity
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flows
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Supp.
|
=
|
Accts. Pay.
|
+
|
Unearn. Rev.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
NA
|
+
|
1,500
|
=
|
1,500
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Net income versus changes in cash
In 2010, Puckett Inc. billed its customers $60,000 for services performed. The company collected $42,000 of the amount billed. Puckett incurred $38,000 of other operating expenses on account. Puckett paid $30,000 of the accounts payable. Puckett acquired $35,000 cash from the issue of common stock. The company invested $15,000 cash in the purchase of land.
Required
Use the preceding information to answer the following questions.
a. What amount of revenue will Puckett report on the 2010 income statement?
b. What amount of cash flow from revenue will Puckett report on the statement of cash flows?
c. What is the net income for the period?
d. What is the net cash flow from operating activities for the period?
e. Why is the amount of net income different from the net cash flow from operating activities for the period?
f. What is the amount of net cash flow from investing activities?
g. What is the amount of net cash flow from financing activities?
h. What amounts of total assets, liabilities, and equity will Puckett report on the year end balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting the accounts
Morgan Associates experienced the following accounting events during its 2010 accounting period.
1. Paid cash for an insurance policy that provides coverage during the next year.
2. Collected cash from accounts receivable.
3. Paid cash for operating expenses.
4. Paid cash to settle an account payable.
5. Paid cash to purchase land.
6. Recognized revenue on account.
7. Issued common stock.
8. Paid cash to purchase supplies.
9. Collected a cash advance for services that will be provided during the coming year.
10. Paid a cash dividend to the stockholders.
Required
a. Identify the events that would require a year end adjusting entry.
b. Explain why adjusting entries are made at the end of the accounting period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Closing the accounts
The following information was drawn from the accounting records of Spartan Company as of December 31, 2010, before the temporary accounts had been closed. The Cash balance was $3,000, and Notes Payable amounted to $1,300. The company had revenues of $4,500 and expenses of $2,000. The company’s Land account had a $5,000 balance. Dividends amounted to $300. There was $1,000 of common stock issued.
Required
a. Identify which accounts would be classified as permanent and which accounts would be classified as temporary.
b. Assuming that Spartan’s beginning balance (as of January 1, 2010) in the Retained Earnings account was $3,500, determine its balance after the nominal accounts were closed at the end of 2010.
c. What amount of net income would Spartan Company report on its 2010 income statement?
d. Explain why the amount of net income differs from the amount of the ending Retained Earnings balance.
e. What are the balances in the revenue, expense, and dividend accounts on January 1, 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Planning and flexible budget variances Tang Company’s production performance report for April includes the information shown below. Prepare a flexible budget for the items shown and compute the flexible budget cost variances and planning cost variances for each item. Indicate whether the variances are favorable or unfavorable for each item.
|
|
ACTUAL
|
MASTER BUDGET
|
|
Volume
|
80,000
|
90,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$550,000
|
$630,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
225,000
|
247,500
|
|
Fixed manufacturing support
|
400,000
|
420,000
|
|
Total
|
$1,175,000
|
$1,297,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis The Sudbury, South Carolina, plant of Saldanha Sports Company has the following standards for its soccer ball production:
|
Standards:
|
|
|
Material (leather) per soccer ball
|
0.25 yard
|
|
Material price per yard
|
$16
|
|
Direct labor hours per soccer ball
|
0.20 hour
|
|
Wage rate per direct labor hour
|
$10 per hour
|
|
Variable support cost rate
|
$15 per direct labor hour
|
|
Actual results for October:
|
|
|
Used 13,000 yards of raw material, purchased for $205,150
|
|
|
Paid for 8,240 direct labor hours at $9.50 per hour
|
|
|
Incurred $131,840 of variable support costs
|
|
|
Manufactured 40,000 soccer balls
|
|
Required
Determine the following variances for October:
(a) Total direct material cost variance
(b) Total direct labor cost variance
(c) Total variable support cost variance
(d) Direct material price variance
(e) Direct material quantity variance
(f) Direct labor rate variance
(g) Direct labor efficiency variance
(h) Variable support rate variance
(i) Variable support efficiency variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis The North Point plant of Englehart Electronics Company has the following standards for component C93:
|
Standards:
|
|
|
Material
|
2 units of material B
|
|
Material price
|
$10 per unit of B
|
|
Direct labor
|
1 hour
|
|
Wage rate
|
$10 per direct labor hour
|
|
Variable support cost rate
|
$25 per direct labor hour
|
|
Actual results for May:
|
|
|
Used 4,200 units of B, purchased at $9.75 per unit of B
|
|
|
Paid for 2,000 direct labor hours at $11 per hour
|
|
|
Incurred $48,000 of variable support costs
|
|
|
Manufactured 2,000 units of component C93
|
|
Required
Determine the following variances for May:
(a) Total direct material cost variance
(b) Total direct labor cost variance
(c) Total variable support cost variance
(d) Direct material price variance
(e) Direct material quantity variance
(f) Direct labor rate variance
(g) Direct labor efficiency variance
(h) Variable support rate variance
(i) Variable support efficiency variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard versus actual costs For each of the following two jobs manufacturing two different products, determine the missing amounts for items (a) through (h):
|
ITEM
|
JOB 321
|
JOB 322
|
|
Units produced
|
200
|
(e)
|
|
Standards per unit:
|
|
|
|
Material quantity
|
5 pounds
|
(f)
|
|
Material price
|
$2 per pound
|
$3 per pound
|
|
Labor hours
|
2 hours
|
3 hours
|
|
Labor rate
|
$15 per hour
|
$12 per hour
|
|
Actual consumption:
|
|
|
|
Material quantity
|
(a)
|
1,000 pounds
|
|
Material cost
|
$2,000
|
(g)
|
|
Labor hours
|
(b)
|
(h)
|
|
Labor cost
|
(c)
|
$5,800
|
|
Variance:
|
|
|
|
Material quantity
|
(d)
|
$100 F
|
|
Material price
|
$50 U
|
$500 F
|
|
Labor efficiency
|
$100 F
|
$60 U
|
|
Labor rate
|
$60 U
|
$200 F
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis, material and labor Trieste Toy Company manufactures only one product, Robot Ranger. The company uses a standard cost system and has established the following standards per unit of Robot Ranger:
|
|
STANDARD QUANTITY
|
STANDARD PRICE
|
STANDARD COST
|
|
Direct materials
|
3.0 pounds
|
$12 per pound
|
$36.00 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.2 hours
|
15 per hour
|
18.00 per unit
|
During November, the company recorded the following activity:
- The company produced 6,000 units.
- A total of 21,000 pounds of material were used, purchased at a cost of $241,500.
- The company employs 40 persons to work on the production of Robot Ranger. These employees worked an average of 160 hours at an average rate of $16 per hour.
The company’s management wishes to determine the efficiency of the activities related to the production of Robot Ranger.
Required
(a) For direct materials used in the production of Robot Ranger, compute the direct material price variance and the direct material quantity variance.
(b) The direct materials were purchased from a new supplier who is eager to enter into a long term purchase contract. Would you recommend that Trieste sign the contract? Explain.
(c) For direct labor employed in the production of Robot Ranger, compute the direct labor rate variance and the direct labor efficiency variance.
(d) In the past, the 40 persons employed in the production of Robot Ranger consisted of 16 experienced workers and 24 inexperienced assistants. During November, the company experimented with 20 experienced workers and 20 inexperienced assistants. Would you recommend that Trieste continue the new labor mix? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis, hospital (adapted from CMA, June 1989) Mountain View Hospital has adopted a standard cost accounting system for evaluation and control of nursing labor. Diagnosis related groups (DRGs), instituted by the U.S. government for health insurance reimbursement, are used as the output measure in the standard cost system. A DRG is a patient classification scheme that perceives hospitals to be multiproduct firms where inpatient treatment procedures are related to the numbers and types of patient ailments treated. Mountain View Hospital has developed standard nursing times for the treatment of each DRG classification, and nursing labor hours are assumed to vary with the number of DRGs treated within a time period.
The nursing unit on the fourth floor treats patients with four DRG classifications. The unit is staffed with registered nurses (RNs), licensed practical nurses (LPNs), and aides. Following are the standard nursing hours and salary rates:
FOURTH FLOOR NURSING UNIT STANDARD HOURS
|
DRG CLASSIFICATION
|
RN
|
LPN
|
AIDE
|
|
1
|
6
|
4
|
5
|
|
2
|
26
|
16
|
10
|
|
3
|
10
|
5
|
4
|
|
4
|
12
|
7
|
10
|
|
STANDARD HOURLY RATES
|
|
RN
|
$12
|
|
LPN
|
8
|
|
Aide
|
6
|
Following are the results of operations for the fourth floor nursing unit for the month of May:
|
ACTUAL NUMBER OF PATIENTS
|
|
DRG 1
|
250
|
|
DRG 2
|
90
|
|
DRG 3
|
240
|
|
DRG 4
|
140
|
|
|
720
|
|
|
RN
|
LPN
|
AIDE
|
|
Actual hours
|
8,150
|
4,300
|
4,400
|
|
Actual salary
|
$100,245
|
$35,260
|
$25,300
|
|
Actual hourly rate
|
$12.30
|
$8.20
|
$5.75
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The accountant for Mountain View Hospital calculated the following standard times for the fourth floor nursing unit for May:
|
|
|
STANDARD HOURS/DRG
|
TOTAL STANDARD HOURS
|
|
DRG CLASSIFICATION
|
NO. OF PATIENTS
|
RN
|
LPN
|
AIDE
|
RN
|
LPN
|
AIDE
|
|
1
|
250
|
6
|
4
|
5
|
1,500
|
1,000
|
1,250
|
|
2
|
90
|
26
|
16
|
10
|
2,340
|
1,440
|
900
|
|
3
|
240
|
10
|
5
|
4
|
2,400
|
1,200
|
960
|
|
4
|
140
|
12
|
7
|
10
|
1,680
|
980
|
1,400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7,920
|
4,620
|
4,510
|
The hospital calculates labor variances for each reporting period by labor classification (RN, LPN, aide). The variances are used by nursing supervisors and hospital administration to evaluate the performance of nursing labor.
Required
Calculate the total nursing labor variance for the fourth floor nursing unit of Mountain View Hospital for May, indicating how much of this variance is attributed to the following for each class of hospital worker:
(a) Labor efficiency
(b) Rate differences.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis Asahi USA, Inc., based in Denver, Colorado, is a subsidiary of a Japanese company manufacturing specialty tools. Asahi USA employs a standard cost system. Following are the standards per unit of one of its products, tool KJ79. This tool requires a special chrome steel as a direct material.
|
|
STANDARD QUANTITY
|
STANDARD PRICE
|
STANDARD COST
|
|
Direct materials
|
8 pounds
|
$18 per pound
|
$144
|
|
Direct labor
|
2.5 hours
|
$8 per hour
|
20
|
|
|
|
|
$164
|
During November, Asahi USA started and completed job KJX86 to manufacture 1,900 units of tool KJ79. It purchased and used 14,250 pounds of the special chrome steel for tool KJ79 at a total cost of $270,750. The total direct labor charged to job KJX86 was $37,800. Job KJX86 required 5,000 direct labor hours.
Required
(a) For job KJX86, compute the following and indicate whether the variances are favorable or unfavorable:
(1) Direct material price variance
(2) Direct material quantity variance
(3) Direct labor rate variance
(4) Direct labor efficiency variance.
(b) Provide a plausible explanation for the variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales variance analysis Bakery Extraordinaire sells several types of muffins and scones and also sells carrot bread loaves. Planned prices and sales quantities for February are shown here:
PLANNED SALES FOR FEBRUARY
| |
MUFFINS
|
SCONES
|
CARROT BREAD
|
TOTALS
|
|
Unit price
|
$1.35
|
$1.75
|
$2.75
|
|
|
Unit sales
|
1,600
|
3,400
|
1,000
|
6,000
|
|
Total
|
$2,160
|
$5,950
|
$2,750
|
$10,860
|
The actual results for February are shown here:
ACTUAL SALES FOR FEBRUARY
| |
MUFFINS
|
SCONES
|
CARROT BREAD
|
TOTALS
|
|
Unit price
|
$1.55
|
$1.60
|
$3.25
|
|
|
Unit sales
|
1,400
|
4,500
|
1,300
|
7,200
|
|
Total
|
$2,170
|
$7,200
|
$4,225
|
$13,595
|
The owner would like to know how the price changes and volume changes each contributed to the $2,735 difference between planned and actual sales revenues.
Required
(a) Compute the sales mix variance for each product line and explain the meaning of each variance you computed.
(b) Compute the sales quantity variance for each product line and explain the meaning of each variance you computed.
(c) Compute the sales price variance for each product line and explain the meaning of each variance you computed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budget preparation, breakeven point, what if analysis with multiple products (adapted from CPA, May 1993) The following budget information for the year ending December 31, 2011, pertains to Rust Manufacturing Company”s operations: PRODUCT BUDGET ITEM ACE BELL TOTAL COSTS Budgeted sales in units 200,000 100,000 Selling price per unit $40 $20 Direct materials cost per unit $8 $3 Direct labor hours per unit 2 1 Depreciation $200,000 Rent $130,000 Other manufacturing support costs $500,000 Selling costs $180,000 General and administrative costs $40,000 The following information is also provided: 1. Rust has no beginning inventory. Production is planned so that it will equal the number of units sold. 2. The cost of direct labor is $5 per hour. 3. Depreciation and rent are fixed costs within the relevant range of production. Additional costs would be incurred for extra machinery and factory space if production is increased beyond current available capacity. 4. Rust allocates depreciation proportional to machinery use and rent proportional to factory space. Budgeted usage is as follows: ACE BELL Machinery 70% 30% Factory space 60% 40% 5. Other manufacturing support costs include variable costs equal to 10% of direct labor cost and also include various fixed costs. None of the miscellaneous fixed manufacturing support costs depend on the level of activity, although support costs attributable to a specific product are avoidable if that product”s production ceases. The fixed cost portion of other manufacturing support costs is allocated between Ace and Bell on the basis of a percentage of budgeted direct labor cost. 6. Rust”s selling and general and administrative costs are committed in the intermediate term. 7. Rust allocates selling costs on the basis of number of units sold at Ace and Bell. 8. Rust allocates general and administrative costs on the basis of sales revenue. Required (a) Prepare a schedule, using separate columns for Ace and Bell, showing budgeted sales, variable costs, contribution margin, fixed costs, and pretax operating profit for the year ending December 31, 2011. (b) Calculate the contribution margin per unit and the pretax operating profit per unit for Ace and for Bell. (c) Calculate the effect on pretax operating profit resulting from a 10% decrease in sales and production of each product. (d) What may be a problem with the above analysis?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Commitment and consumption of labor hours Steelmax, Inc., sells office furniture in the Chicago metropolitan area. To better serve its business customers, Steelmax recently introduced a new same day service. Any order placed before 2:00 P.M. is delivered the same day.
Steelmax hires five workers on an eight hour daily shift to deliver the office furniture. Each delivery takes 30 minutes on average. If the number of customer orders exceeds the available capacity on some days, workers are asked to work overtime to ensure that all customer orders are delivered the same day. Regular wages are $12 per hour. Overtime wages include a 50% premium in addition to the regular wages.
Steelmax’s management has noticed considerable fluctuation in the number of customer orders from day to day during the past three months, as shown here:
|
DAY OF THE WEEK
|
AVERAGE NUMBER OF ORDERS
|
|
Monday
|
65
|
|
Tuesday
|
70
|
|
Wednesday
|
80
|
|
Thursday
|
85
|
|
Friday
|
95
|
Steel max has decided to pursue a more variable hiring policy. It will reduce the number of delivery workers to four on Mondays and Tuesdays and increase the number to six on Fridays.
Required
(a) Determine the total and unit delivery cost per day under the old hiring policy when the number of daily customer orders is 70, 80, or 90.
(b) For each day of the week, determine the expected total delivery cost per day and the expected delivery cost per customer order based on both the old and the new hiring policy. What is the expected savings per week with the new variable hiring policy?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance and cost analysis, original activity based costing hierarchy Peterborough Food produces a wide range of breakfast cereal foods. Its granola products are two of its most important product lines.
Because of the complexity of the granola production process, the manufacturing area in the plant that makes these two product lines is separated from the rest of the plant and is treated as a separate cost center. Exhibit 10 34 presents the activity and cost data for this cost center for the most recent quarter. The plan data in Exhibit 10 34 reflect the master budget targets for the quarter.
The factory accountant estimates that, with the increased production in line 1, the labor related product sustaining costs and the other product sustaining costs for line 1 should increase by $20,000 and $100,000, respectively. The factory accountant also indicates that the decreased production in line 2 would require several quarters to be reflected in lower product sustaining costs.
The factory accountant indicated that the labor related business sustaining costs and the other business sustaining costs should increase by $0 and $140,000, respectively, given the net increase in production.
Required
Prepare a second level and third level variance analysis of costs for the granola line cost center. In your analysis, group costs into unit related, batch related, product sustaining, and business sustaining costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During 2011 Rustic Camp Sites experienced the following transactions.
a. RCS acquired $32,000 cash by issuing common stock.
b. RCS received $116,000 cash for providing services to customers (leasing camp sites).
c. RCS paid $13,000 cash for salaries expense.
d. RCS paid a $9,000 cash dividend to the owners.
e. RCS sold land that had cost $100,000 for $100,000 cash.
f. RCS paid $47,000 cash for other operating expenses.
Required
1. Record the transaction data in a horizontal financial statements model like the following one. In the Cash Flow column, classify the cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), or financing activities (FA). The beginning balances have been recorded as an example. They are the ending balances shown on RCS’s December 31, 2010, financial statements illustrated in the chapter. Note that the revenue and expense accounts have a zero beginning balance. Amounts in these accounts apply only to a single accounting period. Revenue and expense account balances are not carried forward from one accounting period to the next.
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
Event
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liab.
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Statement of
|
|
No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
=
|
N. Pay.
|
+
|
Com. Stk.
|
+
|
Ret. Earn.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Cash Flows
|
|
Beg. bal.
|
51,000
|
+
|
500,000
|
=
|
400,000
|
+
|
120,000
|
+
|
31,000
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
NA
|
b. Explain why there are no beginning balances in the Income Statement columns.
c. What amount of net income will RCS report on the 2011 income statement?
d. What amount of total assets will RCS report on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet?
e. What amount of retained earnings will RCS report on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet?
f. What amount of net cash flow from operating activities will RCS report on the 2011 statement of cash flows?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying the reporting entities
Carlos Bueso recently started a business. During the first few days of operation, Mr. Bueso transferred $30,000 from his personal account into a business account for a company he named Bueso Enterprises. Bueso Enterprises borrowed $40,000 from the State Bank of Texas. Mr. Bueso’s father in law, James Bright, invested $64,000 into the business for which he received a 25 percent ownership interest. Bueso Enterprises purchased a building from Leigh Realty Company. The building cost $120,000 cash. Bueso Enterprises earned $28,000 in revenue from the company’s customers and paid its employees $25,000 for salaries expense.
Required
Identify the entities that were mentioned in the scenario and explain what happened to the cash accounts of each entity that you identify.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of events on the accounting equation and careers in accounting
Olive Enterprises experienced the following events during 2010.
1. Acquired cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Paid cash to reduce the principal on a bank note.
3. Sold land for cash at an amount equal to its cost.
4. Provided services to clients for cash.
5. Paid utilities expenses with cash.
6. Paid a cash dividend to the stockholders.
Required
a. Explain how each of the events would affect the accounting equation by writing the letter I for increase, the letter D for decrease, and NA for does not affect under each of the components of the accounting equation. The first event is shown as an example.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Event
|
|
|
|
|
|
Number
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Common
Stock
|
+
|
Retained
Earnings
|
|
1.
|
I
|
|
NA
|
|
I
|
|
NA
|
b. Sarah Culver audited Olive Enterprise’s financial statements and provided assurances that the statements were prepared in accordance with GAAP. Sarah holds only one professional certification. Which certification to you expect Sarah holds? Explain why you chose this certification.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying items for the statement of cash flows
Required
Indicate how each of the following would be classified on the statement of cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), financing activities (FA), or not applicable (NA).
a. Borrowed $8,000 cash from State Bank.
b. Paid $5,000 cash for salary expense.
c. Signed a contract to provide services in the future.
d. Performed services for $25,000 cash.
e. Paid $9,000 cash to purchase land.
f. Paid $1,500 cash for utilities expense.
g. Sold land for $5,000 cash.
h. Paid $4,000 cash on the principal of a bank loan.
i. Paid a $2,000 cash dividend to the stockholders.
j. Received $30,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of transactions on general ledger accounts
At the beginning of 2011, T & M Corp.’s accounting records had the following general ledger accounts and balances.
|
T & M CORP. Accounting Equation
|
|
|
Event
|
Assets
|
=
|
Liabilities
|
+
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
Acct. Titles
for RE
|
|
Cash
|
Land
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
Common Stock
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
|
Balance 1/1/2011
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
|
12,000
|
|
7,000
|
11,000
|
|
T & M Corp. completed the following transactions during 2011.
1. Purchased land for $5,000 cash.
2. Acquired $25,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
3. Received $75,000 cash for providing services to customers.
4. Paid cash operating expenses of $42,000.
5. Borrowed $10,000 cash from the bank.
6. Paid a $5,000 cash dividend to the stockholders.
7. Determined that the market value of the land is $35,000.
Required
a. Record the transactions in the appropriate general ledger accounts. Record the amounts of revenue, expense, and dividends in the Retained Earnings column. Provide the appropriate titles for these accounts in the last column of the table.
b. Determine the amount of net income for the 2011 period.
c. What is the amount of total assets at the end of 2011? What is the amount of stockholders’ equity at the end of 2011?
d. What is the balance in the retained earnings account immediately after Transaction 3 is recorded?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying events as asset source, use, or exchange Vera Company experienced the following events during its first year of operations.
1. Acquired $16,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Paid $3,500 cash for salary expenses.
3. Borrowed $10,000 cash from New South Bank.
4. Paid $6,000 cash to purchase land.
5. Provided boarding services for $10,500 cash.
6. Acquired an additional $1,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
7. Paid $2,400 cash for utilities expense.
8. Paid a $1,500 cash dividend to the stockholders.
9. Provided additional services for $6,000 cash.
10. Purchased additional land for $2,500 cash.
11. The market value of the land was determined to be $24,000 at the end of the accounting period.
Required
Classify each event as an asset source, use, or exchange transaction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of events on a horizontal financial statements model
Tim’s Auto Service experienced the following events during 2011.
1. Purchased land for cash.
2. Issued common stock for cash.
3. Collected cash for providing auto repair services to customers.
4. Paid a cash dividend to the stockholders.
5. Paid cash for operating expenses.
6. Paid cash to reduce the principal balance on a liability.
7. Determined that the market value of the land is higher than its historical cost.
Required
Use a horizontal statements model to show how each event affects the balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows. Indicate whether the event increases (I), decreases (D), or does not affect (NA) each element of the financial statements. Also, in the Cash Flows column, classify the cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), or financing activities (FA). The first transaction is shown as an example.
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
+
|
Land
|
=
|
N. Pay
|
+
|
C. Stock.
|
+
|
Ret. Ear.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
1
|
D
|
+
|
I
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
D
|
IA
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Record events in the horizontal statements model
Arnett Co. was started in 2011. During 2011, the company (1) acquired $11,000 cash from the issue of common stock, (2) earned cash revenue of $18,000, (3) paid cash expenses of $10,500, and (4) paid a $1,000 cash dividend to the stockholders.
Required
a. Record these four events in a horizontal statements model. Also, in the Cash Flows column, classify the cash flows as operating activities (OA), investing activities (IA), or financing activities (FA). The first event is shown as an example.
|
Balance Sheet
|
Income Statement
|
|
Event No.
|
Cash
|
=
|
N. Pay
|
+
|
C. Stock.
|
+
|
Ret. Ear.
|
Rev.
|
|
Exp.
|
=
|
Net Inc.
|
Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
1
|
11,000
|
=
|
NA
|
+
|
11,000
|
+
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
NA
|
=
|
NA
|
11,000
|
FA
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
b. What does the income statement tell you about the assets of this business?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting entities
The following business scenarios are independent from one another.
1. Mary Poort purchased an automobile from Hayney Bros. Auto Sales for $9,000.
2. John Rodman loaned $15,000 to the business in which he is a stockholder.
3. First State Bank paid interest to Caleb Co. on a certificate of deposit that Caleb Co. has invested at First State Bank.
4. Parkside Restaurant paid the current utility bill of $128 to Gulf Utilities.
5. Gatemore, Inc., borrowed $50,000 from City National Bank and used the funds to purchase land from Morgan Realty.
6. Steven Wong purchased $10,000 of common stock of International Sales Corporation from the corporation.
7. Dan Dow loaned $4,000 cash to his daughter.
8. Mega Service Co. earned $5,000 in cash revenue.
9. McCloud Co. paid $1,500 for salaries to each of its four employees.
10. Shim Inc. paid a cash dividend of $3,000 to its sole shareholder, Marcus Shim.
Required
a. For each scenario, create a list of all of the entities that are mentioned in the description.
b. Describe what happens to the cash account of each entity that you identified in Requirement a.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manufacturing firm production and purchases budget Glynn Company is preparing a budget to determine the amount of part G12 to produce for the first quarter of the year, and the amount of resin to purchase for part G12. The company desires to have 25% of the next month’s estimated sales of G12 in inventory at the end of each month. Glynn has a very reliable supplier of resin and therefore desires an ending inventory of only 10% of resin needs for the next month’s production. Each unit of G12 requires half a pound of resin. Projected sales of G12 for January, February, and March are 50,000 units, 60,000 units, and 54,000 units, respectively.
Required
(a) How many units of part G12 will Glynn budget to produce in January and February?
(b) How many pounds of resin will Glynn budget to purchase in January and February?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis, material and labor The following information is available for Mandalay Company:
|
ACTUAL
|
|
|
Materials:
|
12,000 pounds purchased at $2.50 per pound;
|
| |
used 10,500 pounds
|
|
Direct labor:
|
1,800 hours at $12 per hour
|
|
Units produced:
|
500
|
|
STANDARD
|
|
|
Materials:
|
20 pounds per unit at a price of $2.20 per pound
|
|
Direct labor:
|
4 hours per unit at a wage rate of $10 per hour
|
| |
|
Required
(a)Determine the material price variance based on the quantity of materials purchased.
(b)Determine the material quantity variance.
(c)Determine the direct labor rate variance.
(d)Determine the direct labor efficiency variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis, materials and labor Pharout Company uses a standard cost system. Job 822 is for the manufacturing of 500 units of the product P521. The company’s standards for one unit of product P521 are as follows:
|
QUANTITY
|
|
PRICE
|
|
Direct material
|
5 ounces
|
$2 per ounce
|
|
Direct labor
|
2 hours
|
$10 per hour
|
| |
|
|
The job required 2,800 ounces of raw material costing $5,880. An unfavorable labor rate variance of $250 and a favorable labor efficiency variance of $100 also were determined for this job.
Required
(a)Determine the direct material price variance for job 822 based on the actual quantity of materials used.
(b)Determine the direct material quantity variance for job 822 based on the actual quantity of materials used.
(c)Determine the actual quantity of direct labor hours used on job 822.
(d)Determine the actual labor costs incurred for job 822.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variance analysis, material and labor Each unit of job Y703 has standard requirements of 5 pounds of raw material at a price of $100 per pound and 0.5 hour of direct labor at $12 per hour. To produce 9,000 units of this product, job Y703 actually required 40,000 pounds of the raw material costing $97 per pound. The job used a total of 5,000 direct labor hours costing a total of $60,000.
Required
(a)Determine the material price variance for job Y703.
(b)Determine the material quantity variance for job Y703.
(c) Assume that the materials used on this job were purchased from a new supplier. Would you recommend continuing with this new supplier? Why or why not?
(d) Determine the direct labor rate variance for job Y703.
(e) Determine the direct labor efficiency variance for job Y703.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard costs versus actual costs for materials Assembly of product P13 requires one unit of component X, two units of component Y, and three units of component Z. Job J372 produced 220 units of P13. The following information pertains to material variances for this job, analyzed by component:
|
|
COMPONENT
|
|
|
X
|
Y
|
Z
|
|
Price variance
|
160 U
|
120 F
|
192 U
|
|
Quantity variance
|
168 U
|
100 U
|
84 F
|
The actual material prices were $0.30 more, $0.20 less, and $0.50 more per unit for components X, Y, and Z, respectively, than their standard material prices per unit.
Required
(a) Determine the number of materials units consumed of each type of component.
(b) Determine the standard materials price per unit of each type of component.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating budgets: production plan Borders Manufacturing is developing a sales and production plan as part of its master budgeting process. Following are the projected monthly sales, which occur uniformly during each month, for the upcoming year:
|
BORDERS MANUFACTURING
|
|
PROJECTED MONTHLY SALES
|
|
MONTH
|
UNIT SALES
|
| |
|
|
January
|
8,742
|
|
February
|
9,415
|
|
March
|
7,120
|
|
April
|
8,181
|
|
May
|
7,942
|
|
June
|
9,681
|
|
July
|
2,511
|
|
August
|
2,768
|
|
September
|
2,768
|
|
October
|
2,283
|
|
November
|
1,542
|
|
December
|
1,980
|
|
January
|
8,725
|
| |
|
Production for each month equals one half of the current month’s sales plus one half of the next month’s projected sales. Develop the production plan for Borders Manufacturing for the upcoming year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating budgets: labor hiring and production plan Mira Vista Planters provides reforestation services to large paper products companies. It must hire one planter for every 10,000 trees that it has contracted to plant each month. New employees are hired in the month needed, on the first day of the month. An employee must receive one week of evaluation and training before being profitably employed and therefore works three out of four weeks in the month hired. New employees are paid full wages for all four weeks. For every five prospective employees who enter training, three are deemed suitable for employment. When cutbacks occur, employees are laid off on the first day of the month. Every employee laid off receives severance pay equal to one week’s salary, which is on average $400, regardless of how long the layoff will last. Laid off employees inevitably drift away, and new hires must be trained. The organization will have two trained employees on January 1 and wants to have at least one trained employee at the end of each month.
The company has been offered the following contracts for the upcoming year. Each monthly contract is offered on an accept or reject basis; that is, if a monthly contract is accepted, it must be completed in full. Partial completion is not acceptable. The revenue per tree planted is $0.20.
|
MIRA VISTA PLANTERS
|
|
MONTHLY TREE PLANTING CONTRACTS
|
|
MONTH
|
TREES
|
|
January
|
8,692
|
|
February
|
5,765
|
|
March
|
8,134
|
|
April
|
34,400
|
|
May
|
558,729
|
|
June
|
832,251
|
|
July
|
1,286,700
|
|
August
|
895,449
|
|
September
|
733,094
|
|
October
|
203,525
|
|
November
|
29,410
|
|
December
|
9,827
|
| |
|
Required
Prepare a labor plan for the upcoming year, indicating the following for each month:
(a)Whether you feel the company should accept or reject the proposed planting contract.
(b)How many people will be hired for training. (Recall that an employee is not available for planting during the week of training and that only three of the five employees accepted for training can be hired.)
(c)How many people will be laid off.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating budgets: labor hiring plan Strathfield Motel is planning its operations for the upcoming tourist season. The motel has 60 units. The following table presents the average number of daily rentals expected for each of the 12 weeks of the tourist season.
The motel hires housekeeping staff on a weekly basis. Each person can clean 15 rooms per day. Employees must be hired for the entire week at a wage of $400 per employee per week. Because of the motel’s location in a midsize city, trained people are always available to work on short notice.
The motel does not own its linen and towels but rents them from a rental agency in a nearby city. The rental contract must be signed for a 4 week period and for a fixed amount of linen and towels. Therefore, the motel must sign three contracts for the 12 week tourist season. The contract provides the linen required for each room for $3 per night.
STRATHFIELD MOTEL AVERAGE NUMBER OF DAILY RENTALS
|
WEEK
|
AVERAGE UNITS RENTED
|
WEEK
|
AVERAGE UNITS RENTED
|
|
1
|
46
|
7
|
55
|
|
2
|
48
|
8
|
55
|
|
3
|
54
|
9
|
50
|
|
4
|
60
|
10
|
45
|
|
5
|
60
|
11
|
37
|
|
6
|
60
|
12
|
30
|
| |
|
|
|
Required
Prepare a weekly budget for the hotel showing the following:
(a)The number of housekeeping staff to employ
(b)The number of linen and towel units to contract.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial budgets: expense budget During the school year, the Homebush School band arranges concert dates in many communities. Because only part of the school’s travel expenses are covered by the concert admission fees, the band raises money to help defray its operating expenses through events in the local community such as car washes.
To estimate its expenses for the upcoming year, the band’s manager has estimated the number of concert dates for each of the school months, September through May. For each concert, the manager estimates hotel costs of $900, food costs of $480, bus rental costs of $600, and other costs of $200. The following table presents the number of planned concerts during the upcoming year:
HOMEBUSH SCHOOL BAND SCHEDULED CONCERTS
|
MONTH
|
SCHEDULED CONCERTS
|
MONTH
|
SCHEDULED CONCERTS
|
|
September
|
3
|
February
|
4
|
|
October
|
4
|
March
|
2
|
|
November
|
5
|
April
|
5
|
|
December
|
8
|
May
|
7
|
|
January
|
3
|
|
|
Prepare a monthly schedule estimating the band’s travel expenses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating budgets: materials purchasing plan Masefield Dairy is preparing a third quarter budget (July, August, and September) for its ice cream products. It produces five brands of ice cream, and each uses a different mix of ingredients. Its suppliers deliver ingredients just in time, provided that they are given two months’ notice. The following table indicates the units of weight or volume of each type of ingredient required per unit of each product:
|
MASEFIELD DAIRY REQUIRED INGREDIENTS
|
|
|
PRODUCT
|
|
INGREDIENTS
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
E
|
|
Ingredient 1
|
1
|
2
|
1
|
1
|
1
|
|
Ingredient 2
|
2
|
0
|
3
|
1
|
4
|
|
Ingredient 3
|
0
|
1
|
2
|
4
|
0
|
|
Ingredient 4
|
1
|
3
|
0
|
2
|
2
|
|
Ingredient 5
|
0
|
2
|
1
|
0
|
2
|
|
Ingredient 6
|
3
|
1
|
3
|
0
|
1
|
The following table summarizes the estimated unit sales for each product in each of the months in the third quarter:
|
MASEFIELD DAIRY ESTIMATED UNIT SALES
|
|
PRODUCT
|
JULY
|
AUGUST
|
SEPTEMBER
|
|
A
|
194,675
|
162,033
|
129,857
|
|
B
|
104,856
|
98,375
|
76,495
|
|
C
|
209,855
|
194,575
|
170,654
|
|
D
|
97,576
|
75,766
|
55,966
|
|
E
|
47,867
|
39,575
|
20,958
|
Prepare a monthly purchases budget for the ice cream ingredients.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial budgets: wages and expense budgets Nathaniel’s Motor Shop does major repair work on automobile engines. The major cost in the shop is the wages of the mechanics. The shop employs nine mechanics who are paid $750 each for working a 40 hour week. The workweek consists of five days of eight hours each. Employees actually work seven hours each day because they are given one hour of breaks each day. They are highly skilled and valued by their employer, so these mechanics are paid whether or not there is work available for them to do. They are also paid $30 for every overtime hour or partial overtime hour they work. The machine shop industry estimates that for every mechanic hour actually worked in a shop like this, the employee consumes about $25 of variable support items, such as lubricants, tool parts, and electricity. The motor shop estimates that the following work will be available each week during the next 10 weeks:
|
NATHANIEL’SMOTOR SHOP ESTIMATEDWORK
|
|
WEEK
|
HOURS OF WORK
|
WEEK
|
HOURS OF WORK
|
|
1
|
255
|
6
|
280
|
|
2
|
330
|
7
|
260
|
|
3
|
300
|
8
|
300
|
|
4
|
285
|
9
|
340
|
|
5
|
325
|
10
|
355
|
Develop a weekly budget of mechanic wages and variable support costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial budgets: cash outflows Country Club Road Nurseries grows and sells garden plants. The nursery is active between January and October each year. During January, the potting tables and equipment are prepared. The potting and seeding are done in February. In March and April, the plants are cultivated, watered, and fertilized. May and June are the peak selling months. July, August, and September are the peak months for visiting customers in their homes to provide them with advice and help solve their problems. During October, the equipment and buildings are secured for the winter months, and in November and December, full time employees take their paid holidays, and the business is closed.
The nursery employs 15 full time staff and, depending on the season, up to 20 part time staff. The full time staff members are paid an average salary of $2,700 per month and work 160 hours per month.
The part time staff members are paid $10 per hour. Because the nursery relies on local students for part time work, there is no shortage of trained people willing to work the hours that are available. The ratio of full time employee hours worked to part time employee hours worked is as follows: January, 5:1; February, 5:1; March, 3:1; April, 3:1, May, 1:1; June, 1:1; July, 1:1; August, 1:1; September, 2:1; and October, 4:1. Because part time students are used mainly for moving and selling activities, their work creates very little incremental support costs.
Fixed costs, other than wages, associated with this operation are about $55,000 per month. The cost drivers in this operation are the activities that the full time employees undertake. These cost drivers are proportional to the hours worked by the full time employees. The variable costs depend on the season and reflect the common employee activities during that season. Average variable costs per employee hour worked are as follows: January, $15; February, $15; March, $15; April, $15; May, $5; June, $5; July, $20; August, $20; September, $20; and October, $10. These variable costs include both support items such as power and water and direct items such as soil and pots. Assume that all expenses are paid in the month they are incurred.
On the basis of the information provided, determine the cash outflows for the upcoming year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted cash flows and income statement In September, TEE Company, a merchandising firm that sells one product, assembled the following information and estimates to prepare a budget for October. Expected sales are 40,000 units at a price of $32 per unit. The cost of merchandise purchases is expected to be $20 per unit. Selling and administrative expenses are estimated at $350,000, of which $20,000 is depreciation. The October 1 cash balance is expected to be $40,000.
TEE estimates that 70% of each month’s sales are collected in the month of sale and the remaining 30% is collected in the month after sale. Expected sales for September are $1,000,000. The company pays for 20% of its merchandise purchases during the month of purchase, and pays the remaining 80% during the month following purchase. Merchandise purchases for September are estimated to be $880,000 and the purchase cost per unit is $20. All other out of pocket expenses are paid for in cash.
Required:
(a) TEE plans to purchase 38,000 units of merchandise in October. Prepare a cash budget or statement of estimated cash flows for October for the company.
(b) Prepare a budgeted income statement (for external reporting purposes) for the month ended October 31 for TEE Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Master budget Adams Company, a merchandising firm that sells one product, estimates it will sell 12,000 units of its product at $60 per unit in December. In November, the company prepared other information to prepare a budget for December, as shown here:
|
Merchandise inventory, December 1
|
2,000 units
|
|
Desired merchandise inventory for December 31
|
3,000 units
|
|
Cost per unit of merchandise purchases
|
$40
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$200,000
|
|
Cash balance, December 1
|
$30,000
|
|
November sales
|
$600,000
|
- The company estimates that 60% of each month’s sales are collected in the month of sale and that the remaining 40% is collected in the month after sale.
- The $200,000 of selling and administrative expenses includes $40,000 of depreciation.
- The company pays for half of merchandise purchases during the month of purchase and pays the remainder during the month following purchase. Estimated merchandise purchases for November are $340,000.
- All other out of pocket expenses are paid for in cash.
Required
(a) How many units of merchandise will Adams budget to purchase in December? What is the dollar amount of Adams’ budgeted merchandise purchases for December?
(b) Prepare a budgeted income statement for the month ended December for Adams Company.
(c) Prepare a statement of estimated cash flows for the month ended December for Adams Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating budgets: labor hiring plan Shadyside Insurance Company manages a medical insurance program for its clients. Employees of client firms submit claims for reimbursement of medical expenses. Shadyside processes these claims, checks them to ensure that they are covered by the claimant’s policy, notes whether the claimant has reached any limit on coverage, computes any deductible, and issues a check for the claimant’s refund.
Three types of clerks work in the claims processing department: supervisors, senior clerks, and junior clerks. The supervisors are paid $42,000 per year, the senior clerks are paid $37,000 per year, and the junior clerks are paid $32,000 per year. For every 150,000 claims processed per year, Shadyside plans to use one supervisor, six junior clerks, and two senior clerks.
Last year, the company processed 2 million medical claims and employed 14 supervisors, 30 senior clerks, and 83 junior clerks.
Required
(a)Compute the excess costs or cost savings relating to the claims processing staff.
(b)How would you interpret these results? What additional information would you ask for if you were making a determination of the clerical group’s processing efficiencies?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted profit, what if analysis The Monteiro Manufacturing Corporation manufactures and sells folding umbrellas. The corporation’s condensed income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, follows:
|
Sales (200,000 units)
|
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
600,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
400,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$150,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
100,000
|
250,000
|
|
Net profit (before income taxes)
|
|
$150,000
|
Monteiro’s budget committee has estimated the following changes for 2012:
30% increase in number of units sold
20% increase in material cost per unit
15% increase in direct labor cost per unit
10% increase in variable indirect cost per unit
5% increase in indirect fixed costs
8% increase in selling expenses, arising solely from increased volume
6% increase in administrative expenses, reflecting anticipated higher wage and supply price levels
Any changes in administrative expenses caused solely by increased sales volume are considered immaterial.
Because inventory quantities remain fairly constant, the budget committee considered that for budget purposes any change in inventory valuation can be ignored. The composition of the cost of a unit of finished product during 2011 for materials, direct labor, and manufacturing support, respectively, was in the ratio of 3:2:1. In 2011, $40,000 of manufacturing support was for fixed costs. No changes in production methods or credit policies were contemplated for 2012.
Required
(a) Compute the unit sales price at which the Monteiro Manufacturing Corporation must sell its umbrellas in 2012 in order to earn a budgeted profit of $200,000.
(b) Unhappy about the prospect of an increase in selling price, Monteiro’s sales manager wants to know how many units must be sold at the old price to earn the $200,000 budgeted profit. Compute the number of units that must be sold at the old price to earn $200,000.
(c) Believing that the estimated increase in sales is overly optimistic, one of the company’s directors wants to know what annual profit is likely if the selling price determined in part a is adopted but the increase in sales volume is only 10%. Compute the budgeted profit in this case.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven point, what if analysis Premier Products, Inc., is considering replacing its existing machine with a new and faster machine that will produce a more reliable product and will turn around customer orders in a shorter period. This change is expected to increase the sales price and fixed costs but not the variable costs:
|
COST ITEM
|
OLD MACHINE
|
NEW MACHINE
|
|
Monthly fixed costs
|
$120,000
|
$250,000
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
14
|
14
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
18
|
20
|
Required
(a) Determine the breakeven point in units for the two machines.
(b) Determine the sales level in units at which the use of the new machine will achieve a 10% target profit to sales ratio.
(c) Determine the sales level in units at which profits will be the same for either the old or the new machine.
(d) Which machine represents a lower risk of incurring a loss? Explain why.
(e) Determine the sales level in units at which the profit to sales ratio will be equal with either machine.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven point, what if analysis The following information pertains to Torasic Company’s budgeted income statement for the month of June 2011:
|
Sales (1,200 units at $250)
|
$300,000
|
|
Variable cost
|
150,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$150,000
|
|
Fixed cost
|
200,000
|
|
Net loss
|
($50,000)
|
Required
(a) Determine the company’s breakeven point in both units and dollars.
(b) The sales manager believes that a $22,500 increase in the monthly advertising expenses will result in a considerable increase in sales. How much of an increase in sales must result from increased advertising in order to break even on the monthly expenditure?
(c) The sales manager believes that an advertising expenditure increase of $22,500 coupled with a 10% reduction in the selling price will double the sales quantity. Determine the net income (or loss) if these proposed changes are adopted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakeven point, what if analysis Air Peanut Company manufactures and sells roasted peanut packets to commercial airlines. Following are the price and cost data per 100 packets of peanuts:
|
Estimated annual sales volume 11,535,700 packets
|
|
Selling price
|
$35.00
|
|
Variable costs:
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
$16.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
7
|
|
Manufacturing support
|
4
|
|
Selling expenses
|
1.6
|
|
Total variable costs per 100 packets
|
$28.60
|
|
Annual fixed costs:
|
|
|
Manufacturing support
|
$192,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
276,000
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
$468,000
|
Required
(a) Determine Air Peanut’s breakeven point in units.
(b) How many packets does Air Peanut have to sell to earn $156,000?
(c) Air Peanut expects its direct labor costs to increase by 5% next year. How many units will it have to sell next year to break even if the selling price remains unchanged?
(d) If Air Peanut’s direct labor costs increase by 5%, what selling price per 100 packets must it charge to maintain the same contribution margin to sales ratio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparison of two costing systems, original activity based costs, implementing change The Redwood City plant of Crimson Components Company makes two types of rotators for automobile engines: R361 and R572. The old cost accounting system at the plant traced support costs to four cost pools:
|
COST POOL
|
SUPPORT COSTS
|
COST DRIVER
|
|
S1
|
$1,176,000
|
Direct labor cost
|
|
S2
|
1,120,000
|
Machine hours
|
|
P1
|
480,000
|
—
|
|
P2
|
780,000
|
—
|
|
|
$3,556,000
|
|
Pool S1 included service activity costs related to setups, production scheduling, plant administration, janitorial services, materials handling, and shipping. Pool S2 included activity costs related to machine maintenance and repair, rent, insurance, power, and utilities. Pools P1 and P2 included supervisors’ wages, idle time, and indirect materials for the two production departments, casting and machining, respectively. The old accounting system allocated support costs in pools S1 and S2 to the two production departments using direct labor cost and machine hours, respectively, as the cost drivers. Then the accumulated support costs in pools P1 and P2 were applied to the products on the basis of direct labor hours. A separate rate was determined for each of the two production departments. The direct labor wage rate is $15 per hour in casting and $18 per hour in machining.
|
DIRECT LABOR HOURS (DLH)
|
|
DEPARTMENT
|
R361
|
R572
|
TOTAL
|
DIRECT LABOR COSTS
|
|
Casting (P1)
|
60,000
|
20,000
|
80,000
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Machining (P2)
|
72,000
|
48,000
|
120,000
|
2,160,000
|
|
Total
|
132,000
|
68,000
|
200,000
|
$3,360,000
|
|
MACHINE HOURS (MH)
|
|
DEPARTMENT
|
R361
|
R572
|
TOTAL
|
|
Casting (P1)
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Machining (P2)
|
72,000
|
48,000
|
120,000
|
|
Total
|
102,000
|
58,000
|
160,000
|
|
ITEM
|
R361
|
R572
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
$19
|
$20
|
|
Sales and production units
|
500,000
|
400,000
|
|
Number of orders
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Number of setups
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
|
Materials cost per unit
|
$8
|
$10
|
Now the plant has implemented an activity based costing system. The following table presents the amounts from the old cost pools that are traced to each of the new activity cost pools:
|
OLD COST POOLS
|
|
ACTIVITY COST DRIVERS
|
S1
|
S2
|
P1
|
P2
|
TOTAL
|
|
P1 DLH
|
$120,000
|
$0
|
$120,000
|
$0
|
$240,000
|
|
P2 DLH
|
240,000
|
0
|
0
|
120,000
|
360,000
|
|
Setup hours
|
816,000
|
80,000
|
240,000
|
540,000
|
1,676,000
|
|
P1 MH
|
0
|
260,000
|
120,000
|
0
|
380,000
|
|
P2 MH Total
|
0 $1,176,000
|
780,000 $1,120,000
|
0 $480,000
|
120,000 $780,000
|
900,000 $3,556,000
|
Setups for R572 are 50% more complex than those for R361; that is, each R572 setup takes 1.5 times as long as one R361 setup.
Required
(a) Determine the product costs per unit using the old system. Show all intermediate steps for allocations, including departmental cost driver rates and a breakdown of product costs into each of their components.
(b) Determine the product costs per unit using the new system.
(c) Explain the intuitive reason that the product costs differ under the two accounting systems.
(d) What should Crimson Components do to improve the profitability of its Redwood City plant? Include marketing and product related changes among your recommendations.
(e) Describe how experienced production and sales managers are likely to react to the new product costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV, MAKE OR BUY, MACRS, BASIC ANALYSIS
Jonfran Company manufactures three different models of paper shredders including the waste container, which serves as the base. While the shredder heads are different for all three models, the waste container is the same. The number of waste containers that Jonfran will need during the next five years is estimated as follows:
|
2007
|
50,000
|
|
2008
|
50,000
|
|
2009
|
52,000
|
|
2010
|
55,000
|
|
2011
|
55,000
|
The equipment used to manufacture the waste container must be replaced because it is broken and cannot be repaired. The new equipment would have a purchase price of $945,000 with terms of 2/10, n/30; the company’s policy is to take all purchase discounts.
The freight on the equipment would be $11,000, and installation costs would total $22,900. The equipment would be purchased in December 2006 and placed into service on January 1, 2007. It would have a 5 year economic life and would be treated as 3 year property under MACRS. This equipment is expected to have a salvage value of $12,000 at the end of its economic life in 2007. The new equipment would be more efficient than the old equipment, resulting in a 25 percent reduction in both direct material and variable overhead. The savings in direct material would result in an additional 1 time decrease in working capital requirements of $2,500, resulting from a reduction in direct material inventories. This working capital reduction would be recognized at the time of equipment acquisition.
The old equipment is fully depreciated and is not included in the fixed overhead.
The old equipment from the plant can be sold for a salvage amount of $1,500.
Rather than replace the equipment, one of Jonfran’s production managers has suggested that the waste containers be purchased. One supplier has quoted a price of $27 per container. This price is $8 less than Jonfran’s current manufacturing cost, which is as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
|
$10
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
8
|
|
Variable overhead
|
|
6
|
|
Fixed overhead:
|
|
|
|
Supervision
|
$2
|
|
|
Facilities
|
5
|
|
|
General
|
4
|
11
|
|
Total unit cost
|
|
$35
|
Jonfran uses a plant wide fixed overhead rate in its operations. If the waste containers are purchased outside, the salary and benefits of one supervisor, included in fixed overhead at $45,000, would be eliminated. There would be no other changes in the other cash and noncash items included in fixed overhead except depreciation on the new equipment.
Jonfran is subject to a 40 percent tax rate. Management assumes that all cash flows occur at the end of the year and uses a 12 percent after tax discount rate.
Required:
1. Prepare a schedule of cash flows for the make alternative. Calculate the NPV of the make alternative.
2. Prepare a schedule of cash flows for the buy alternative. Calculate the NPV of the buy alternative.
3. Which should Jonfran do—make or buy the containers? What qualitative factors should be considered?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
STRUCTURED PROBLEM SOLVING, CASH FLOWS, NPV, CHOICE OF DISCOUNT RATE, ADVANCED MANUFACTURING ENVIRONMENT
Brindon Thayn, president and owner of Orangeville Metal Works, has just returned from a trip to Europe. While there, he toured several plants that use robotic manufacturing. Seeing the efficiency and success of these companies, Brindon became convinced that robotic manufacturing is essential for Orangeville to maintain its competitive position.
Based on this conviction, Brindon requested an analysis detailing the costs and benefits of robotic manufacturing for the materials handling and merchandising equipment group. This group of products consists of such items as cooler shelving, stocking carts, and bakery racks. The products are sold directly to supermarkets.
A committee, consisting of the controller, the marketing manager, and the production manager, was given the responsibility to prepare the analysis. As a starting point, the controller provided the following information on expected revenues and expenses for the existing manual system:
|
|
|
Percentage of Sales
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
100%
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
228,000
|
57
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$172,000
|
43
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
92,000
|
23
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
$ 80,000
|
20
|
Given the current competitive environment, the marketing manager thought that the preceding level of profitability would not likely change for the next decade.
After some investigation into various robotic equipment, the committee settled on an Aide 900 system, a robot that has the capability to weld stainless steel or aluminum. It is capable of being programmed to adjust the path, angle, and speed of the torch. The production manager was excited about the robotic system because it would eliminate the need to hire welders. This was an attractive possibility because the market for welders seemed perpetually tight. By reducing the dependence on welders, better production scheduling and fewer late deliveries would result. Moreover, the robot’s production rate is four times that of a person. It was also discovered that robotic welding is superior in quality to manual welding.
As a consequence, some of the costs of poor quality could be reduced. By providing better quality products and avoiding late deliveries, the marketing manager was convinced that the company would have such a competitive edge that it would increase sales by 50 percent for the affected product group by the end of the fourth year. The marketing manager provided the following projections for the next 10 years, the useful life of the robotic equipment:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
Years 4–10
|
|
Sales
|
$400,000
|
$450,000
|
$500,000
|
$600,000
|
Currently, the company employs four welders, who work 40 hours per week and 50 weeks per year at an average wage of $10 per hour. If the robot is acquired, it will need one operator, who will be paid $10 per hour. Because of improved quality, the robotic system will also reduce the cost of direct materials by 25 percent, the cost of variable overhead by 33.33 percent, and variable selling expenses by 10 percent. All of these reductions will take place immediately after the robotic system is in place and operating. Fixed costs will be increased by the depreciation associated with the robot. The robot will be depreciated using MACRS. (The manual system uses straight line depreciation without a half year convention and has a current book value of $200,000.) If the robotic system is acquired, the old system will be sold for $40,000.
The robotic system requires the following initial investment:
|
Purchase price
|
$380,000
|
|
Installation
|
70,000
|
|
Training
|
30,000
|
|
Engineering
|
40,000
|
At the end of 10 years, the robot will have a salvage value of $20,000. Assume that the company’s cost of capital is 12 percent. The tax rate is 40 percent.
Required:
1. Prepare a schedule of after tax cash flows for the manual and robotic systems.
2. Using the schedule of cash flows computed in Requirement 1, compute the NPV for each system. Should the company invest in the robotic system?
3. In practice, many financial officers tend to use a higher discount rate than is justified by the firm’s cost of capital. For example, a firm may use a discount rate of 20 percent when its cost of capital is or could be 12 percent. Offer some reasons for this practice. Assume that the annual after tax cash benefit of adopting the robotic system is $80,000 per year more than the manual system. The initial outlay for the robotic system is $340,000. Compute the NPV using 12 percent and 20 percent.
Would the robotic system be acquired if 20 percent is used? Could this conservative approach have a negative impact on a firm’s ability to stay competitive?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYBER RESEARCH CASE ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES, CAPITAL BUDGETING
Capital budgeting for environmental projects offers an interesting area for additional study. The Environmental Protection Agency has partnered with Tellus Institute to further its ongoing interest in environmental cost management. All of the information relating to the U.S. EPA environmental accounting project is now incorporated in the Environmental Management Accounting International Web site.
This new Web site deals with such topics as environmental cost definitions, decisions using environmental costs, and capital budgeting. The focus of the Web site is the use of environmental accounting as a management accounting tool of internal business decisions.
Using this Web site and other sources that you can locate, answer the following questions:
1. What evidence exists that firms use the payback period for screening and evaluating environmental projects? If payback is used, can you find the most common hurdle rate that firms use to justify environmental projects?
2. Are NPV and IRR used for environmental project approval? Can you find out what the hurdle rate is for IRR? Do you think this hurdle rate is the cost of capital? If not, then discuss why a different required rate is used.
3. Do you think the approval thresholds for environmental projects tend to be higher, lower, or the same when compared to nonenvironmental projects? See if you can find any evidence to support your viewpoint. Why might the approval thresholds differ from nonenvironmental projects?
4. See if you can find a discussion on how capital budgeting for environmental projects may differ from that of conventional projects. List these differences.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A person had $2,345 withheld for federal income taxes, and had a tax liability of $2,410. Would this be a refund or an additional amount due for what amount?
2. Based on the following information, what is the amount of taxable income?
|
Gross salary,
|
$57,400
|
Interest earnings,
|
$320
|
|
Dividend income,
|
$160
|
One personal exemption,
|
$3,650
|
|
Itemized deductions,
|
$8,730
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tax Planning Activities
Taxes are a fact of financial planning. However, various actions can be taken to reduce the time and money that go toward taxes.
|
Your Short Term Financial Planning Activities
|
Resources
|
|
1. Develop a system for filing and storing various tax records related to
|
See Exhibit 4 2 (p. 111)
|
|
Income, deductible expenses, and current tax forms.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Using the IRS and other Web sites, identify recent changes in tax laws
|
|
|
That may affect your financial planning decisions.
|
|
|
3. Using current IRS tax forms and tax tables, estimate your tax liability for the current year.
|
PFP Sheet 20
|
|
4. Compare the cost of tax preparation services.
|
PFP Sheet 21
|
|
Your Long Term Financial Planning Activities
|
Resources
|
|
1. Identify saving and investing decisions that would minimize future income taxes.
|
PFP Sheet 22
|
|
2. Develop a plan for actions to take related to your current and future tax situation.
|
Text pages
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Taxes
|
Life Situation
|
Financial Data
|
|
Single
|
Monthly Income $1,750
|
|
Age 21
|
Living Expenses $1,210
|
|
No dependents
|
Personal property $7,300
|
|
College student
|
Savings $2,000
|
|
|
Student loan $3,000
|
|
|
Credit card debt $2,400
|
Shelby Johnson has been working at a local pet store in the grooming department. She has just received her W 2 statement from her employer so that she can prepare her taxes. Her tax withheld from her paycheck is normally greater than the tax owed as calculated on her tax return. In the past, she has used her tax refund to build up her wardrobe with a shopping spree. However, as she gets close to graduating she is reconsidering this behavior and needs help deciding on a better alternative.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revising a time driven activity based cost system, adding products Refer to the Madison Dairy ice cream plant example described in this chapter.
Required
(a) Suppose that production related computer resource expenses of $18,000 per month have been inadvertently overlooked for inclusion in the cost system. Explain how the time driven ABC model should be updated to reflect this cost.
(b) Suppose that energy costs of $4,000 per month to run the machinery have also been inadvertently overlooked for inclusion in the cost system. How should the activity based cost model be updated to include this cost, and what will be the effect on the machine hour rate?
(c) If the company wishes to introduce a new flavor, what information is needed in order to determine the cost of producing this new flavor?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revising a time driven ABC system, cost increases, and process changes Refer to the time driven ABC analysis of the Madison Dairy ice cream plant example in the chapter.
Required
(a) Suppose indirect labor costs have increased by 10% from the original setting but all other information remains the same. Determine the total time driven activity based costs assigned to each of the four products (flavors) after incorporating the 10% increase in indirect labor costs and prepare an income statement similar to that shown in Exhibit 5 5.
(b) Suppose that in addition to the change in part a, the unit time for scheduling a production run decreased from four hours per run to three hours per run. Determine the new total time driven activity based costs assigned to each of the four products (flavors) and prepare an income statement also showing the total cost of unused capacity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assigning activity based costs in manufacturing, unused capacity, income Halifax Brass Company manufactures pumps and valves and uses a time driven activity based cost (TDABC) system. Last year, Halifax recorded the following data for assigning manufacturing overhead costs to its products:
|
|
UNIT COST
|
TOTAL UNIT TIME
|
PRACTICAL CAPACITY
|
|
|
ESTIMATES
|
ESTIMATES (HOURS
|
NOT ASSIGNED TO
|
|
|
(RATES PER
|
ASSIGNED TO
|
PRODUCTS
|
|
|
HOUR)
|
PRODUCTS)
|
(HOURS)
|
|
|
|
PUMPS
|
VALVES
|
|
|
Machine setups and
|
$20.00 per
|
|
|
|
|
run time
|
machine hour
|
1,500
|
1,800
|
300
|
|
Labor for setups, receiving,
|
$30.00 per labor
|
|
|
|
|
and packing
|
hour
|
5,000
|
6,000
|
200
|
|
Engineering (for specializing
|
$80.00 per
|
|
|
|
|
products)
|
engineering hour
|
200
|
400
|
50
|
Halifax also developed the following information on revenues and costs other than manufacturing overhead:
|
Total revenues
|
$890,000
|
|
Total direct labor cost
|
$120,000
|
|
Total direct materials cost
|
$90,000
|
|
SG&A expenses
|
$100,000
|
Required
(a) Using the company’s TDABC system, how much manufacturing overhead cost will be assigned to pumps? How much will be assigned to valves?
(b) What is the company’s net income? (Assume the company sells the entire amount of the products it produces.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assigning corporate support costs, activity based costing Zeta Department Store has developed the following information in order to develop a timedriven ABC model for its Accounts Receivable Department:
|
|
ESTIMATED WORKER TIME
|
|
ACTIVITY
|
TO PERFORM ACTIVITIES
|
|
Manual processing of invoice and cash receipt
|
1.0 hour
|
|
Electronic processing of invoice and electronic funds transfer
|
0.1 hour
|
|
Maintain customer file
|
0.5 hour
|
The time to process payments of customer invoices depends on whether the customer pays the bill manually or electronically, as shown above. The time to maintain each customer file is the same for all customers. The annual cost of the Accounts Receivable Department is $500,000 and the associated practical capacity of accounts receivable labor is 10,000 hours. The Accounts Receivable Department has six employees.
Required
(a) What is the capacity cost rate for the Accounts Receivable Department?
(b) Zeta’s Division 1 has 1,000 small to medium sized customers who annually generate a total of $10 million in sales, resulting in 4,000 invoices. These customers pay all their invoices manually. What is the annual activity based cost associated with Division 1’s customers?
(c) Zeta’s Division 2 has 200 large customers who annually generate a total of $10 million in sales, resulting in 400 invoices. These customers pay all of their invoices electronically. What is the annual activity based cost associated with Division 2’s customers?
(d) Suppose half of Zeta’s Division 1 customers change their method of payment to electronic next year. How many hours of accounts receivable labor will it require for 1,000 customers, 2,000 manual invoices, and 2,000 electronic invoices? How much will Division 1 be charged for the accounts receivable function? Will Zeta’s costs decrease because of the shift to 50% electronic invoicing in Division 1?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forecasting resource capacity using a time driven ABC system Refer to the time driven ABC analysis of forecasting resource capacity for the Madison Dairy ice cream plant example on pages 181–184 of this chapter. Suppose that all the information is the same except for the following:
|
|
VANILLA
|
CHOCOLATE
|
STRAWBERRY
|
MOCHA ALMOND
|
TOTAL
|
|
Sales volume (gallons)
|
15,500
|
13,000
|
1,600
|
1,200
|
31,300
|
|
# production runs
|
18
|
16
|
4
|
3
|
41
|
Required
(a) Assuming that only full time employees can be hired, determine the number of production employees required to meet this production plan. Also, determine the number of machines required for this production plan.
(b) Prepare a pro forma monthly product line income statement
(c) What are the company’s gross profit and the ratio of gross profit to sales after incorporating the cost of unused capacity?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost rates for peak and non–peak hour capacity usage XZ Discount Brokerage is trying to determine the cost of supplying computing resources in order to determine how much to charge for trades. The company’s cost analyst is perplexed because XZ has acquired 80 servers to meet peak capacity needs, which occur between 9 A.M. and 5 P.M. local time, but only needs the capacity of 20 servers during the remaining time. The costs associated with each server are $3,696 per month and each server is available for use for 24 hours per day for an average of 22 days per month.
Required
(a) What cost per hour would you advise for peak hour capacity consumption? Explain why you think this cost rate is appropriate.
(b) What cost per hour would you advise for non–peak hour capacity consumption? Explain why you think this cost rate is appropriate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Original activity based costing and time driven activity based costing Garber Company uses a traditional activity based costing system to assign $600,000 of committed resource costs for customer service on the basis of the following information gathered from interviews with customer service personnel:
|
ACTIVITY
|
TIME PERCENTAGE
|
ESTIMATED COST DRIVER QUANTITY
|
|
Handle customer orders
|
75%
|
8,000 customer orders
|
|
Process customer complaints
|
10%
|
400 customer complaints
|
|
Perform customer credit checks
|
15%
|
450 credit checks
|
|
|
100%
|
|
Required
(a) Compute the activity cost driver rates using this system.
(b) Suppose instead that Garber uses time driven ABC to assign the $600,000 of committed resource costs to the three activities. Compute the time driven activity cost driver rates, assuming 10,000 hours of useful work and the unit time estimates that follow:
|
ACTIVITY
|
UNIT TIME (HOURS)
|
|
Handle customer orders
|
0.75
|
|
Process customer complaints
|
3.50
|
|
Perform customer credit checks
|
3.00
|
(c) Suppose that the quantities of activities this period are 8,000 customer orders, 400 customer complaints, and 450 credit checks. Using the information and activity cost driver rates developed in part b, determine the cost assigned to each of the activities and the estimated hours of unused capacity as well as the associated cost. What actions might managers take after evaluating such information?
(d) Suppose that in the next time period, the quantities of activities change to 8,500 customer orders, 350 customer complaints, and 500 credit checks. Using the information and activity cost driver rates developed in part b, determine the cost assigned to each of the activities and the estimated hours of unused capacity as well as the associated cost.
(e) Explain why the activity cost driver rates computed in part a are different from the rates computed in part b.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manufacturing support cost driver rates (Adapted from CMA, December 1990) Moss Manufacturing has just completed a major change in its quality control (QC) process. Previously, products had been reviewed by QC inspectors at the end of each major process, and the company’s 10 QC inspectors were charged as direct labor to the operation or job. In an effort to improve efficiency and quality, a computer video QC system was purchased for $250,000. The system consists of a minicomputer, 15 video cameras, other peripheral hardware, and software.
The new system uses cameras stationed by QC engineers at key points in the production process. Each time an operation changes or there is a new operation, the cameras are moved, and a new master picture is loaded into the computer by a QC engineer. The camera takes pictures of the units in process, and the computer compares them to the picture of a good unit. Any differences are sent to a QC engineer who removes the bad units and discusses the flaws with the production supervisors. The new system has replaced the 10 QC inspectors with two QC engineers.
The operating costs of the new QC system, including the salaries of the QC engineers, have been included as manufacturing support in calculating the company’s plantwide manufacturing support cost rate, which is based on direct labor dollars.
Josephine Gugliemo, the company’s president, is confused. Her vice president of production has told her how efficient the new system is, yet there is a large increase in the manufacturing support cost driver rate. The computation of the rate before and after automation is shown here:
|
ITEM
|
BEFORE
|
AFTER
|
|
Budgeted support costs
|
$1,900,000
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Budgeted direct labor costs
|
1,000,000
|
700,000
|
|
Budgeted cost driver rate
|
190%
|
300%
|
“Three hundred percent,” lamented the president. “How can we compete with such a high manufacturing support cost driver rate?”
Required
(a) Define manufacturing support costs and cite three examples of typical costs that would be included in this category. Explain why companies develop manufacturing support cost driver rates.
(b) Explain why the increase in the cost driver rate should not have a negative financial impact on Moss Manufacturing.
(c) Explain, in great detail, how Moss Manufacturing could change its accounting system to eliminate confusion over product costs.
(d) Discuss how an activity based costing system may benefit Moss Manufacturing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Original activity based costing for shared services, outsourcing, implementation issues Smithers, Inc., manufactures and sells a wide variety of consumer products. The products are viewed as sufficiently profitable, but recently some product line managers have complained about the charges for the call center that handles phone calls from customers about the products. Product lines are currently charged for call center support costs on the basis of product sales revenues. The manager of product X is particularly upset because he has just obtained a report that includes the following information for last year:
|
|
PRODUCT X
|
PRODUCT Y
|
|
Number of calls for information
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
|
Average length of calls for information
|
3 minutes
|
5 minutes
|
|
Number of calls registering complaints
|
200
|
1,000
|
|
Average length of complaint calls
|
5 minutes
|
10 minutes
|
|
Sales volume
|
$400,000
|
$100,000
|
Product X is simple to use and consumers have little concern about adverse health effects. Product Y is more complex to use and has many health hazard warnings on its label. Smithers currently allocates call center support costs using a rate of 5% of net sales dollars. The manager of product X argues that the current system does not trace call center resource usage to specific products. For example, product X bears four times the call center costs that product Y does, although fewer calls are related to product X, and the calls consume far less time.
Required
(a) What activity cost driver would you recommend to improve the current system of assigning call center support costs to product lines? Why is your method an improvement?
(b) Suppose Smithers announces that it will now assign call center support costs on the basis of an activity based cost system that uses minutes of calls (calls for information and calls for complaints) as the activity cost driver. Suppose also that the rate is 70 cents per minute. Compare the call center cost assignments to product X and product Y under the previous system and the new activity based cost system.
(c) What actions can the product managers take to reduce the center costs assigned to their product lines under the previous system and the new system? What other functional areas might help reduce the number of minutes of calls for product Y?
(d) Who might resist implementation of the new activity based cost system? In your response, discuss possible reactions of the call center staff and other staff who might be affected by efforts to reduce minutes of calls.
(e) From the company’s point of view, how might the activity based costing system help in the assessment of whether to outsource the call center activities?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost distortions, original activity based costs At its manufacturing plant in Duluth, Minnesota, Endo Electronics Company manufactures two products, X21 and Y37. For many years, the company has used a simple plantwide manufacturing support cost rate based on direct labor hours. A new plant accountant suggested that the company may be able to assign support costs to products more accurately by using an activity based costing system that relies on a separate rate for each manufacturing activity that causes support costs.
After studying the plant’s manufacturing activities and costs, the plant accountant has collected the following data for last year:
|
ITEM
|
X21
|
Y37
|
|
Units produced and sold
|
50,000
|
100,000
|
|
Direct labor hours used
|
100,000
|
300,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$1,000,000
|
$4,500,000
|
|
Number of times handled
|
40,000
|
20,000
|
|
Number of parts
|
12,000
|
8,000
|
|
Number of design changes
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Number of product setups
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
The accountant has also determined that actual manufacturing support costs incurred last year were as follows:
|
COST POOL
|
ACTIVITY COSTS
|
|
Handling
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Number of parts
|
2,400,000
|
|
Design changes
|
3,300,000
|
|
Setups
|
2,800,000
|
|
Total
|
$11,500,000
|
The direct materials cost for product X21 is $120 per unit, while for product Y37 it is $140 per unit.
Required
(a) Determine the unit cost of each product using direct labor hours to allocate all manufacturing support costs.
(b) Determine the unit cost of each product using activity based costing.
(c) Which of the two methods from parts a and b produces more accurate estimates of job costs? Explain.
(d) Suppose Endo has been determining its product prices by adding a 25% markup to its reported product cost. Compute the product prices on the basis of the costs computed in parts a and b. What do you recommend to Endo regarding its pricing?
(e) What product level changes do you suggest on the basis of the activity based cost analysis? Who would be involved in bringing about your suggested changes?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product cost distortions with traditional costing, original activity based costing analysis The Manhattan Company manufactures two models of compact disc players: a deluxe model and a regular model. The company has manufactured the regular model for years; the deluxe model was introduced recently to tap a new segment of the market. Since the introduction of the deluxe model, the company’s profits have steadily declined, and management has become increasingly concerned about the accuracy of its costing system. Sales of the deluxe model have been increasing rapidly.
The current cost accounting system allocates manufacturing support costs to the two products on the basis of direct labor hours. The company has estimated that this year it will incur $1 million in manufacturing support costs and will produce 5,000 units of the deluxe model and 40,000 units of the regular model. The deluxe model requires 2 hours of direct labor, and the regular model requires 1 hour. Material and labor costs per unit and selling price per unit are as follows:
|
ITEM
|
DELUXE
|
REGULAR
|
|
Direct materials cost
|
$45
|
$30
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
20
|
10
|
|
Selling price
|
140
|
80
|
Required
(a) Compute the manufacturing support cost driver rate for this year.
(b) Determine the cost to manufacture one unit of each model.
(c) The company has decided to trace manufacturing support costs to four activities. Following are the amount of manufacturing support costs traceable to the four activities this year:
|
|
|
|
COST DRIVER UNITS DEMANDED
|
|
ACTIVITY
|
COST DRIVER
|
COST
|
TOTAL
|
DELUXE
|
REGULAR
|
|
Purchase orders
|
Number of orders
|
$180,000
|
600
|
200
|
400
|
|
Quality control
|
Number of inspections
|
250,000
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Product setups
|
Number of setups
|
220,000
|
200
|
100
|
100
|
|
Machine maintenance
|
Machine hours
|
350,000
|
35,000
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
$1,000,000
|
|
|
|
Compute the total cost to manufacture one unit of each model.
(d) Compare the manufacturing activity resources demanded per unit of the regular model and per unit of the deluxe model. Why did the old costing system undercost the deluxe model?
(e) Is the deluxe model as profitable as the company thinks it is under the old costing system? Explain.
(f) What should the Manhattan Company do to improve its profitability? Consider pricing and product level changes among your suggestions. Who should be involved in implementing your recommendations?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Original activity based costing, activity based management (Adapted from CMA, June 1992) Alaire Corporation manufactures several different types of printed circuit boards; however, two of the boards account for the majority of the company’s sales. The first of these boards, a TV circuit board, has been a standard in the industry for several years. The market for this type of board is competitive and, therefore, price sensitive. Alaire plans to sell 65,000 of the TV boards this year at a price of $150 per unit. The second high volume product, a PC circuit board, is a recent addition to Alaire’s product line. Because the PC board incorporates the latest technology, it can be sold at a premium price; this year’s plans include the sale of 40,000 PC boards at $300 per unit.
Alaire’s management group is meeting to discuss strategies for this year, and the current topic of conversation is how to spend the sales and promotion dollars for next year. The sales manager believes that the market share for the TV board could be expanded by concentrating Alaire’s promotional efforts in this area. In response to this suggestion, the production manager said, “Why don’t you go after a bigger market for the PC board? The cost sheets that I get show that the contribution from the PC board is more than double the contribution from the TV board. I know we get a premium price for the PC board. Selling it should help overall profitability.” Alaire uses a standard cost system, and the following data apply to the TV and PC boards:
|
|
PER UNIT
|
|
ITEM
|
TV BOARD
|
PC BOARD
|
|
Direct materials
|
$80
|
$140
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.5 hours
|
4 hours
|
|
Machine time
|
0.5 hour
|
1.5 hours
|
Direct labor cost is $14 per hour. Variable manufacturing support costs are applied on the basis of direct labor hours. This year’s variable manufacturing support costs are budgeted at $1,120,000, and direct labor hours are estimated at 280,000. Other manufacturing support is applied at $10 per machine hour. Alaire applies a materials handling charge of 10% of materials cost; this materials handling charge is not included in variable manufacturing support costs. Total expenditures for materials this year are budgeted at $10,800,000.
Ed Welch, Alaire’s controller, believes that before the management group proceeds with the discussion about allocating sales and promotional dollars to individual products, it may be worthwhile to look at these products on the basis of the activities involved in their production. Welch has prepared the following schedules for the management group:
|
|
|
|
ANNUAL ACTIVITY
|
|
COSTS
|
BUDGETED COST
|
COST DRIVER
|
FOR COST DRIVER
|
|
Material support costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Procurement
|
$400,000
|
Number of parts
|
4,000,000
|
|
Production scheduling
|
220,000
|
Number of boards
|
110,000
|
|
Packaging and shipping
|
440,000
|
Number of boards
|
110,000
|
|
Total costs
|
$1,060,000
|
|
|
|
Variable support costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Machine setup
|
$446,000
|
Number of setups
|
278,750
|
|
Hazardous waste disposal
|
48,000
|
Pounds of waste
|
16,000
|
|
Quality control
|
560,000
|
Number of inspections
|
160,000
|
|
General supplies
|
66,000
|
Number of boards
|
110,000
|
|
Total costs
|
$1,120,000
|
|
|
|
Other manufacturing
|
|
|
|
|
support costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Machine insertion
|
$1,200,000
|
Number of machine
|
|
|
|
|
insertions
|
3,000,000
|
|
Manual insertion
|
4,000,000
|
Number of manual
|
|
|
|
|
insertions
|
1,000,000
|
|
Wave soldering
|
132,000
|
Number of boards
|
110,000
|
|
Total costs
|
$5,332,000
|
|
|
|
REQUIRED PER UNIT
|
TV BOARD
|
PC BOARD
|
|
Parts
|
25
|
55
|
|
Machine insertions
|
24
|
35
|
|
Manual insertions
|
1
|
20
|
|
Machine setups
|
2
|
3
|
|
Hazardous waste
|
0.02 pound
|
0.35 pound
|
|
Inspections
|
1
|
2
|
“Using this information,” Welch explained, “we can calculate an activitybased cost for each TV board and each PC board and then compare it to the standard cost we have been using. The only cost that remains the same for both cost methods is the cost of direct materials. The cost drivers will replace the direct labor and support costs in the standard cost.”
Required
(a) Identify at least four general advantages that are associated with activity based costing.
(b) On the basis of standard costs, calculate the total contribution expected this year for Alaire Corporation’s products: the TV board and the PC board.
(c) On the basis of activity based costs, calculate the total contribution expected this year for Alaire Corporation’s two products.
(d) Explain how the comparison of the results of the two costing methods may impact the decisions made by Alaire Corporation’s management group.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Role for activity based cost systems in implementing strategy Consider the case of the Cott Corporation, a Canadian private label producer of high quality cola beverages. Cott is attempting to get grocery retailers to stock its cola beverages as a lower price alternative to the more well known brands of Coca Cola and Pepsi Cola. The international brands deliver directly to the retailer’s store and stock their products on the retailer’s shelves. Cott, in contrast, delivers to the retailer’s warehouse or distribution center, leaving the retailer to move the product to the shelves of its various retail outlets. Cott offers substantially lower prices to the retailers and, in addition, is willing to work with the grocery retailer to customize the cola beverage to the retailer’s specification; develop special packaging for the retailer, including labeling the beverage with the retailer’s name (a practice known as retailer branding, such as Safeway Select Cola); offer a full variety of carbonated beverages (diet, caffeine free, multiple flavors, multiple sizes, and packaging options); and develop a marketing and merchandising strategy for the retailer for the private label beverage.
Required
Consider how Cott might measure and manage activities and processes and relationships with suppliers and customers. How can Cott build cost systems to help it implement its strategy successfully?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial versus management accounting: role for activity based cost systems in privatization of government services The mayor of Gotham City is dissatisfied with the rising costs and deteriorating quality of the services provided by the city’s municipal workers, particularly in the transportation department: paving roads, repairing potholes, and cleaning the streets. He is contemplating privatizing these services by outsourcing the business to independent, private contractors. The mayor has demanded that his staff develop an activity based cost system for municipal services before he proceeds with his privatization initiative, declaring, “Introducing competition and privatization to government services requires real cost information. You can’t compete if you are using fake money.” Currently, the accounting and financial systems of Gotham City report only how much is being spent in each department by type of expenditure: payroll, benefits, materials, vehicles, equipment (including computers and telephones), and supplies.
Required
(a) Before outsourcing to the private sector, why does the mayor want to develop activity based cost estimates of the current cost of performing these municipal services?
(b) How should the staff estimate capacity cost rates and time demands that are required for an activity based cost system?
(c) After building activity based cost models, should this information be shared with the municipal workers? Why or why not? How might the workers use the activity based cost information?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SEGMENTED REPORTING AND VARIANCES
Pittsburgh Walsh Company (PWC) is a manufacturing company whose product line consists of lighting fixtures and electronic timing devices. The Lighting Fixtures Division assembles units for the upscale and mid range markets. The Electronic Timing Devices Division manufactures instrument panels that allow electronic systems to be activated and deactivated at scheduled times for both efficiency and safety purposes. Both divisions operate out of the same manufacturing facilities and share production equipment.
PWC’s budget for the year ending December 31, 2007, follows and was prepared on a business segment basis under the following guidelines:
a. Variable expenses are directly assigned to the incurring division.
b. Fixed overhead expenses are directly assigned to the incurring division.
c. The production plan is for 8,000 upscale fixtures, 22,000 mid range fixtures, and 20,000 electronic timing devices. Production equals sales.
PWC established a bonus plan for division management that required meeting the budget’s planned operating income by product line, with a bonus increment if the division exceeds the planned product line operating income by 10 percent or more.
|
PWC Budget
|
|
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31, 2007
|
|
|
|
(in thousands of dollars)
|
|
|
|
‘
|
|
Lighting Fixtures
|
Electronic
|
|
|
|
Upscale
|
Mid Range
|
Timing Devices
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$1,440
|
$ 770
|
$ 800
|
$ 3,010
|
|
Variable expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(720)
|
(439)
|
(320)
|
(1,479)
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
(170)
|
(60)
|
(60)
|
(290)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 550
|
$ 271
|
$ 420
|
$ 1,241
|
|
Fixed overhead expenses
|
140
|
80
|
80
|
300
|
|
Segment margin
|
$ 410
|
$ 191
|
$ 340
|
$ 941
|
Shortly before the year began, the CEO, Jack Parkow, suffered a heart attack and retired. After reviewing the 2007 budget, the new CEO, Joe Kelly, decided to close the lighting fixtures mid range product line by the end of the first quarter and use the available production capacity to grow the remaining two product lines. The marketing staff advised that electronic timing devices could grow by 40 percent with increased direct sales support. Increases above that level and increasing sales of upscale lighting fixtures would require expanded advertising expenditures to increase consumer awareness of PWC as an electronics and upscale lighting fixtures company. Joe approved the increased sales support and advertising expenditures to achieve the revised plan. Joe advised the divisions that for bonus purposes the original product line operating income objectives must be met, but he did allow the Lighting Fixtures Division to combine the operating income objectives for both product lines for bonus purposes.
Prior to the close of the fiscal year, the division controllers were furnished with preliminary actual data for review and adjustment, as appropriate. These preliminary year end data reflect the revised units of production amounting to 12,000 upscale fixtures, 4,000 mid range fixtures, and 30,000 electronic timing devices and are presented as follows:
|
PWC Preliminary Actuals
|
|
|
|
For the Year Ending December 31, 2007
|
|
|
|
(In thousands of dollars)
|
|
|
|
‘
|
|
Lighting Fixtures
|
Electronic
|
|
|
|
Upscale
|
Mid Range
|
Timing Devices
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$ 2,160
|
$140
|
$1,200
|
$ 3,500
|
|
Variable expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(1,080)
|
(80)
|
(480)
|
(1,640)
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
(260)
|
(11)
|
(96)
|
(367)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 820
|
$ 49
|
$ 624
|
$ 1,493
|
|
Fixed overhead expenses
|
140
|
14
|
80
|
234
|
|
Segment margin
|
$ 680
|
$ 35
|
$ 544
|
$ 1,259
|
The controller of the Lighting Fixtures Division, anticipating a similar bonus plan for 2008, is contemplating deferring some revenues to the next year on the pretext that the sales are not yet final and accruing in the current year expenditures that will be applicable to the first quarter of 2008. The corporation would meet its annual plan, and the division would exceed the 10 percent incremental bonus plateau in 2007 despite the deferred revenues and accrued expenses contemplated.
Required:
1. Outline the benefits that an organization realizes from segment reporting. Evaluate segment reporting on a variable costing basis versus an absorption costing basis.
2. Calculate the contribution margin, contribution margin volume, and sales mix variances.
3. Explain why the variances occurred. (CMA adapted)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CAPITAL INVESTMENT WITH COMPETING PROJECTS (WITH TAX EFFECTS)
Weins Postal Service (WPS) has decided to acquire a new delivery truck. The choice has been narrowed to two models. The following information has been gathered for each model:
|
|
Custom
|
Deluxe
|
|
Acquisition cost
|
$20,000
|
$25,000
|
|
Annual operating costs
|
$3,500
|
$2,000
|
|
Depreciation method
|
MACRS
|
MACRS
|
|
Expected salvage value
|
$5,000
|
$8,000
|
WPS’s cost of capital is 14 percent. The company plans to use the truck for five years and then sell it for its salvage value. Assume the combined state and federal tax rate is 40 percent.
Required:
1. Compute the after tax operating cash flows for each model.
2. Compute the NPV for each model, and make a recommendation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PAYBACK AND ARR
Each of the following scenarios is independent. All cash flows are after tax cash flows.
Required:
1. Don Blackburn has purchased a tractor for $62,500. He expects to receive a net cash flow of $15,625 per year from the investment. What is the payback period for Don?
2. Bill Johnson invested $600,000 in a laundromat. The facility has a 10 year life expectancy with no expected salvage value. The laundromat will produce a net cash flow of $180,000 per year. What is the accounting rate of return? Use original investment for the computation.
3. Kathleen Shorts has purchased a business building for $700,000. She expects to receive the following cash flows over a 10 year period:
Year 1: $87,500
Year 2: $122,500
Years 3–10: $175,000
What is the payback period for Kathleen? What is the accounting rate of return (using average investment and assuming straight line depreciation over the 10 years)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV AND IRR
Each of the following scenarios is independent. All cash flows are after tax cash flows.
Required:
1. Jackman Corporation is considering the purchase of a computer aided manufacturing system. The cash benefits will be $1,000,000 per year. The system costs $6,000,000 and will last eight years. Compute the NPV assuming a discount rate of 10 percent. Should the company buy the new system?
2. Lehi Henderson has just invested $1,350,000 in a restaurant specializing in Italian food. He expects to receive $217,350 per year for the next eight years. His cost of capital is 5.5 percent. Compute the internal rate of return. Did Lehi make a good decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BASIC CONCEPTS
Roberts Company is considering an investment in equipment that is capable of producing electronic parts twice as fast as existing technology. The outlay required is $2,340,000. The equipment is expected to last five years and will have no salvage value.
The expected cash flows associated with the project are as follows:
|
Year
|
Cash Revenues
|
Cash Expenses
|
|
1
|
$3,042,000
|
$2,340,000
|
|
2
|
3,042,000
|
2,340,000
|
|
3
|
3,042,000
|
2,340,000
|
|
4
|
3,042,000
|
2,340,000
|
|
5
|
3,042,000
|
2,340,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the project’s payback period.
2. Compute the project’s accounting rate of return on:
a. Initial investment
b. Average investment
3. Compute the project’s net present value, assuming a required rate of return of 10 percent.
4. Compute the project’s internal rate of return.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV
A hospital is considering the possibility of two new purchases: new X ray equipment and new biopsy equipment. Each project would require an investment of $750,000. The expected life for each is five years with no expected salvage value. The net cash inflows associated with the two independent projects are as follows:
|
Year
|
X Ray Equipment
|
Sonogram Equipment
|
|
1
|
$375,000
|
$ 75,000
|
|
2
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
3
|
300,000
|
525,000
|
|
4
|
150,000
|
600,000
|
|
5
|
75,000
|
675,000
|
Required:
Compute the net present value of each project, assuming a required rate of 12 percent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PAYBACK, ACCOUNTING RATE OF RETURN
A hospital is considering the possibility of two new purchases: new X ray equipment and new biopsy equipment. Each project would require an investment of $750,000. The expected life for each is five years with no expected salvage value. The net cash inflows associated with the two independent projects are as follows:
|
Year
|
X Ray Equipment
|
Sonogram Equipment
|
|
1
|
$375,000
|
$ 75,000
|
|
2
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
3
|
300,000
|
525,000
|
|
4
|
150,000
|
600,000
|
|
5
|
75,000
|
675,000
|
1. Compute the payback period for each project. Assume that the manager of the hospital accepts only projects with a payback period of three years or less. Offer some reasons why this may be a rational strategy even though the NPV computed may indicate otherwise.
2. Compute the accounting rate of return for each project using average investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV: BASIC CONCEPTS
Escucha Hearing Clinic is considering an investment that requires an outlay of $370,000 and promises a net cash inflow one year from now of $450,000. Assume the cost of capital is 12 percent.
Required:
1. Break the $450,000 future cash inflow into three components:
a. The return of the original investment
b. The cost of capital
c. The profit earned on the investment
Now, compute the present value of the profit earned on the investment.
2. Compute the NPV of the investment. Compare this with the present value of the profit computed in Requirement 1. What does this tell you about the meaning of NPV?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY, PAYBACK, NPV, IRR, SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
Gina Ripley, president of Dearing Company, is considering the purchase of a computeraided manufacturing system. The annual net cash benefits/savings associated with the system are described as follows:
|
Decreased waste
|
$300,000
|
|
Increased quality
|
400,000
|
|
Decrease in operating costs
|
600,000
|
|
Increase in on time deliveries
|
200,000
|
The system will cost $9,000,000 and last 10 years. The company’s cost of capital is 12 percent.
Required:
1. Calculate the payback period for the system. Assume that the company has a policy of only accepting projects with a payback of five years or less. Would the system be acquired?
2. Calculate the NPV and IRR for the project. Should the system be purchased— even if it does not meet the payback criterion?
3. The project manager reviewed the projected cash flows and pointed out that two items had been missed. First, the system would have a salvage value, net of any tax effects, of $1,000,000 at the end of 10 years. Second, the increased quality and delivery performance would allow the company to increase its market share by 20 percent. This would produce an additional annual net benefit of $300,000. Recalculate the payback period, NPV, and IRR given this new information.
(For the IRR computation, initially ignore salvage value.) Does the decision change? Suppose that the salvage value is only half what is projected. Does this make a difference in the outcome? Does salvage value have any real bearing on the company’s decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NPV VERSUS IRR
Covington Pharmacies has decided to automate its insurance claims process. Two networked computer systems are being considered. The systems have an expected life of two years. The net cash flows associated with the systems are as follows. The cash benefits represent the savings created by switching from a manual to an automated system.
|
Year
|
System I
|
System II
|
|
0
|
$(120,000)
|
$(120,000)
|
|
1
|
—
|
76,628
|
|
2
|
162,708
|
76,628
|
The company’s cost of capital is 10 percent.
Required:
1. Compute the NPV and the IRR for each investment.
2. Show that the project with the larger NPV is the correct choice for the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COMPUTATION OF AFTER TAX CASH FLOWS
Masamora Company is considering two independent projects. One project involves a new product line, and the other involves the acquisition of forklifts for the materials handling department. The projected annual operating revenues and expenses are as follows:
Project I (investment in a new product)
|
Revenues
|
$ 90,000
|
|
Cash expenses
|
(45,000)
|
|
Depreciation
|
(15,000)
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
(12,000)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 18,000
|
Project II (acquisition of two forklifts)
|
Cash expenses
|
$30,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
30,000
|
Required:
Compute the after tax cash flows of each project. The tax rate is 40 percent and includes federal and state assessments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
VARIOUS CASH FLOW COMPUTATIONS
Solve each of the following independent cases:
1. A printing company has decided to purchase a new printing press. Its old press will be sold for $10,000. (It has a book value of $25,000.) The new press will cost $50,000. Assuming that the tax rate is 40 percent, compute the net after tax cash outflow.
2. The maintenance department is purchasing new diagnostic equipment costing $30,000. Additional cash expenses of $2,000 per year are required to operate the equipment. MACRS depreciation will be used (5 year property qualification). Assuming a tax rate of 40 percent, prepare a schedule of after tax cash flows for the first four years.
3. The projected income for a project during its first year of operation is as follows:
|
Cash revenues
|
$120,000
|
|
Less: Cash expenses
|
(50,000)
|
|
Depreciation
|
(20,000)
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Less: Income taxes
|
20,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 30,000
|
Compute the following:
a. After tax cash flow
b. After tax cash flow from revenues
c. After tax cash expenses
d. Cash inflow from the shielding effect of depreciation
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
POLLUTION PREVENTION, P2 INVESTMENT
Lewis Company produces jewelry that requires electroplating with gold, silver, and other valuable metals. Electroplating uses large amounts of water and chemicals, producing wastewater with a number of toxic residuals. Currently, Lewis uses settlement tanks to remove waste; unfortunately, the approach is inefficient, and much of the toxic residue is left in the water that is discharged into a local river. The amount of toxic discharge exceeds the legal, allowable amounts, and the company is faced with substantial, ongoing environmental fines. The environmental violations are also drawing unfavorable public reaction, and sales are being affected. A lawsuit is also impending, which could prove to be quite costly.
Management is now considering the installation of a zero discharge, closed loop system to treat the wastewater. The proposed closed loop system would not only purify the wastewater, but it would also produce cleaner water than that currently being used, increasing plating quality. The closed loop system would produce only four pounds of sludge, and the sludge would be virtually pure metal, with significant market value.
The system requires an investment of $420,000 and will cost $30,000 in increased annual operation plus an annual purchase of $5,000 of filtration medium. However, management projects the following savings:
|
Water usage
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Chemical usage
|
28,000
|
|
Sludge disposal
|
60,000
|
|
Recovered metal sales
|
30,000
|
|
Sampling of discharge
|
80,000
|
|
Total
|
$243,000
|
The equipment qualifies as a 7 year MACRS asset. Management has decided to use straight line depreciation for tax purposes, using the required half year convention. The tax rate is 40 percent. The projected life of the system is 10 years. The hurdle rate is 16 percent for all capital budgeting projects, although the company’s cost of capital is 12 percent.
Required:
1. Based on the financial data provided, prepare a schedule of expected cash flows.
2. What is the payback period?
3. Calculate the NPV of the closed loop system. Should the company invest in the system?
4. The calculation in Requirement 3 ignored several factors that could affect the project’s viability: savings from avoiding the annual fines, positive effect on sales due to favorable environmental publicity, increased plating quality from the new system, and the avoidance of the lawsuit. Can these factors be quantified? If so, should they have been included in the analysis? Suppose, for example, that the annual fines being incurred are $50,000, the sales effect is $40,000 per year, the quality effect is not estimable, and that cancellation of the lawsuit because of the new system would avoid an expected settlement at the end of Year 3 (including legal fees) of $200,000. Assuming these are all after tax amounts, what effect would their inclusion have on the payback period? On the NPV?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DISCOUNT RATES, QUALITY, MARKET SHARE, CONTEMPORARY MANUFACTURING ENVIRONMENT
Sweeney Manufacturing has a plant where the equipment is essentially worn out. The equipment must be replaced, and Sweeney is considering two competing investment alternatives. The first alternative would replace the worn out equipment with traditional production equipment; the second alternative uses contemporary technology and has computer aided design and manufacturing capabilities. The investment and after tax operating cash flows for each alternative are as follows:
|
Year
|
Traditional Equipment
|
Contemporary Technology
|
|
0
|
$(1,000,000)
|
$(4,000,000)
|
|
1
|
600,000
|
200,000
|
|
2
|
400,000
|
400,000
|
|
3
|
200,000
|
600,000
|
|
4
|
200,000
|
800,000
|
|
5
|
200,000
|
800,000
|
|
6
|
200,000
|
800,000
|
|
7
|
200,000
|
1,000,000
|
|
8
|
200,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
9
|
200,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
10
|
200,000
|
2,000,000
|
The company uses a discount rate of 18 percent for all of its investments. The company’s cost of capital is 14 percent.
Required:
1. Calculate the net present value for each investment using a discount rate of 18 percent.
2. Calculate the net present value for each investment using a discount rate of 14 percent.
3. Which rate should the company use to compute the net present value? Explain.
4. Now, assume that if the traditional equipment is purchased, the competitive position of the firm will deteriorate because of lower quality (relative to competitors who did automate). Marketing estimates that the loss in market share will decrease the projected net cash inflows by 50 percent for Years 3–10. Recalculate the NPV of the traditional equipment given this outcome. What is the decision now? Discuss the importance of assessing the effect of intangible and indirect benefits.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COMPETING P2 INVESTMENTS
Ron Booth, the CEO for Sunders Manufacturing, was wondering which of two pollution control systems he should choose. The firm’s current production process produces a gaseous and a liquid residue. A recent state law mandated that emissions of these residues be reduced to levels considerably below current performance. Failure to reduce the emissions would invoke stiff fines and possible closure of the operating plant. Fortunately, the new law provided a transition period, and Ron had used the time wisely. His engineers had developed two separate proposals. The first proposal involved the acquisition of scrubbers for gaseous emissions and a treatment facility to remove the liquid residues. The second proposal was more radical. It entailed the redesign of the manufacturing process and the acquisition of new production equipment to support this new design. The new process would solve the environmental problem by avoiding the production of residues.
Although the equipment for each proposal normally would qualify as 7 year property, the state managed to obtain an agreement with the federal government to allow any pollution abatement equipment to qualify as 5 year property. State tax law follows federal guidelines. Both proposals qualify for the 5 year property benefit. Ron’s vice president of marketing has projected an increase in revenues because of favorable environmental performance publicity. This increase is the result of selling more of Sunders’s products to environmentally conscious customers. However, because the second approach is “greener,” the vice president believes that the revenue increase will be greater. Cost and other data relating to the two proposals are as follows:
|
|
Scrubbers and Treatment
|
Process Redesign
|
|
Initial outlay
|
$50,000,000
|
$100,000,000
|
|
Incremental revenues
|
10,000,000
|
30,000,000
|
|
Incremental cash expenses
|
24,000,000
|
10,000,000
|
The expected life for each investment’s equipment is six years. The expected salvage value is $2,000,000 for scrubbers and treatment equipment and $3,000,000 for process redesign equipment. The combined federal and state tax rate is 40 percent. The cost of capital is 10 percent.
Required:
1. Compute the NPV of each proposal and make a recommendation to Ron Booth.
2. The environmental manager observes that the scrubbers and treatment facility enable the company to just meet state emission standards. She feels that the standards will likely increase within three years. If so, this would entail a modification at the end of three years costing an additional $8,000,000. Also, she is concerned that continued liquid residue releases—even those meeting state standards—could push a local lake into a hazardous state by the end of three years. If so, this could prompt political action requiring the company to clean up the lake. Cleanup costs would range between $40,000,000 and $60,000,000.
Analyze and discuss the effect this new information has on the two alternatives.
If you have read the chapter on environmental cost management, describe how the concept of ecoefficiency applies to this setting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PAYBACK, NPV, MANAGERIAL INCENTIVES, ETHICAL BEHAVIOR
Kent Tessman, manager of a Dairy Products Division , was pleased with his division’s performance over the past three years. Each year, divisional profits had increased, and he had earned a sizable bonus. (Bonuses are a linear function of the division’s reported income.) He had also received considerable attention from higher management. A vice president had told him in confidence that if his performance over the next three years matched his first three, he would be promoted to higher management.
Determined to fulfill these expectations, Kent made sure that he personally reviewed every capital budget request. He wanted to be certain that any funds invested would provide good, solid returns. (The division’s cost of capital is 10 percent.) At the moment, he is reviewing two independent requests. Proposal A involves automating a manufacturing operation that is currently labor intensive. Proposal B centers on developing and marketing a new ice cream product. Proposal A requires an initial outlay of $250,000, and Proposal B requires $312,500. Both projects could be funded, given the status of the division’s capital budget. Both have an expected life of six years and have the following projected after tax cash flows:
|
Year
|
Proposal A
|
Proposal B
|
|
1
|
$150,000
|
$ (37,500)
|
|
2
|
125,000
|
(25,000)
|
|
3
|
75,000
|
(12,500)
|
|
4
|
37,500
|
212,500
|
|
5
|
25,000
|
275,000
|
|
6
|
12,500
|
337,500
|
After careful consideration of each investment, Kent approved funding of Proposal A and rejected Proposal B.
Required:
1. Compute the NPV for each proposal.
2. Compute the payback period for each proposal.
3. According to your analysis, which proposal(s) should be accepted? Explain.
4. Explain why Kent accepted only Proposal A. Considering the possible reasons for rejection, would you judge his behavior to be ethical? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BASIC IRR ANALYSIS
Ireland Company is considering installing a new IT system. The cost of the new system is estimated to be $750,000, but it would produce after tax savings of $150,000 per year in labor costs. The estimated life of the new system is 10 years, with no salvage value expected. Intrigued by the possibility of saving $150,000 per year and having a more reliable information system, the president of Ireland has asked for an analysis of the project’s economic viability. All capital projects are required to earn at least the firm’s cost of capital, which is 12 percent.
Required:
1. Calculate the project’s internal rate of return. Should the company acquire the new IT system?
2. Suppose that savings are less than claimed. Calculate the minimum annual cash savings that must be realized for the project to earn a rate equal to the firm’s cost of capital. Comment on the safety margin that exists, if any.
3. Suppose that the life of the IT system is overestimated by two years. Repeat Requirements 1 and 2 under this assumption. Comment on the usefulness of this information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
REPLACEMENT DECISION, COMPUTING AFTER TAX CASH FLOWS, BASIC NPV ANALYSIS
Okmulgee Hospital (a large metropolitan for profit hospital) is considering replacing its MRI equipment with a new model manufactured by a different company. The old MRI equipment was acquired three years ago, has a remaining life of five years, and will have a salvage value of $100,000. The book value is $2,000,000. Straight line depreciation with a half year convention is being used for tax purposes. The cash operating costs of the existing MRI equipment total $1,000,000 per year.
The new MRI equipment has an initial cost of $5,000,000 and will have cash operating costs of $500,000 per year. The new MRI will have a life of five years and a salvage value of $1,000,000 at the end of the fifth year. MACRS depreciation will be used for tax purposes. If the new MRI equipment is purchased, the old one will be sold for $500,000. The company needs to decide whether to keep the old MRI equipment or buy the new one. The cost of capital is 12 percent. The combined federal and state tax rate is 40 percent.
Required:
Compute the NPV of each alternative. Should the company keep the old MRI equipment or buy the new one?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INFLATION AND CAPITAL BUDGETING
Leo Thayn, manager of the Electronics Manufacturing Division, has been pushing headquarters to grant approval for the installation of a new computer aided design system.
Finally, in the last executive meeting, Leo was told that if he could show the new system would increase the firm’s value, then it would be approved. Leo has collected the following information:
|
|
Old System
|
CAD System
|
|
Initial investment
|
—
|
$1,250,000
|
|
Annual operating costs
|
$300,000
|
$95,000
|
|
Annual depreciation
|
$100,000
|
MACRS
|
|
Effective tax rate
|
34%
|
34%
|
|
Cost of capital
|
12%
|
12%
|
|
Expected life
|
10 years
|
10 years
|
|
Salvage value
|
none
|
none
|
With the exception of the cost of capital, the preceding information ignores the rate of inflation, which has been 4 percent per year and is expected to continue at this level for the next decade.
Required:
1. Compute the NPV for each system.
2. Compute the NPV for each system, adjusting the future cash flows for the rate of inflation.
3. Comment on the importance of adjusting cash flows for inflationary effects.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CAPITAL INVESTMENT, DISCOUNT RATES, INTANGIBLEAND INDIRECT BENEFITS, TIME HORIZON, CONTEMPORARY MANUFACTURING ENVIRONMENT
Mallette Manufacturing, Inc., produces washing machines, dryers, and dishwashers. Because of increasing competition, Mallette is considering investing in an automated manufacturing system. Since competition is most keen for dishwashers, the production process for this line has been selected for initial evaluation. The automated system for the dishwasher line would replace an existing system (purchased one year ago for $6 million).
Although the existing system will be fully depreciated in nine years, it is expected to last another 10 years. The automated system would also have a useful life of 10 years.
The existing system is capable of producing 100,000 dishwashers per year. Sales and production data using the existing system are provided by the accounting department:
|
Sales per year (units)
|
100,000
|
|
Selling price
|
$300
|
|
Costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
80
|
|
Direct labor
|
90
|
|
Volume related overhead
|
20
|
|
Direct fixed overhead
|
40
|
The automated system will cost $34 million to purchase, plus an estimated $20 million in software and implementation. (Assume that all investment outlays occur at the beginning of the first year.) If the automated equipment is purchased, the old equipment can be sold for $3 million.
The automated system will require fewer parts for production and will produce with less waste. Because of this, the direct material cost per unit will be reduced by 25 percent.
Automation will also require fewer support activities, and as a consequence, volume related overhead will be reduced by $4 per unit and direct fixed overhead (other than depreciation) by $17 per unit. Direct labor is reduced by 60 percent. Assume, for simplicity, that the new investment will be depreciated on a pure straight line basis for tax purposes with no salvage value. Ignore the half life convention.
The firm’s cost of capital is 12 percent, but management chooses to use 20 percent as the required rate of return for evaluation of investments. The combined federal and state tax rate is 40 percent.
Required:
1. Compute the net present value for the old system and the automated system. Which system would the company choose?
2. Repeat the net present value analysis of Requirement 1, using 12 percent as the discount rate.
3. Upon seeing the projected sales for the old system, the marketing manager commented:
“Sales of 100,000 units per year cannot be maintained in the current competitive environment for more than one year unless we buy the automated system. The automated system will allow us to compete on the basis of quality and lead time. If we keep the old system, our sales will drop by 10,000 units per year.” Repeat the net present value analysis, using this new information and a 12 percent discount rate.
4. An industrial engineer for Mallette noticed that salvage value for the automated equipment had not been included in the analysis. He estimated that the equipment could be sold for $4 million at the end of 10 years. He also estimated that the equipment of the old system would have no salvage value at the end of 10 years. Repeat the net present value analysis using this information, the information in Requirement 3, and a 12 percent discount rate.
5. Given the outcomes of the previous four requirements, comment on the importance of providing accurate inputs for assessing investments in automated manufacturing systems.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DEMAND CURVE AND CHARACTERISTICS OF MARKET STRUCTURE
Amy Chang wants to start a business supplying florists with field grown flowers. She has located an appropriate acreage and believes she can grow daisies, asters, chrysanthemums, carnations, and other assorted types during a 9 month growing period. By growing the flowers in a field as opposed to a greenhouse, Amy expects to save a considerable amount on herbicide and pesticide. She is considering passing the savings along to her customers by charging $1.25 per standard bunch versus the prevailing price of $1.50 per standard bunch.
Amy has turned to her neighbor, Bob Winters, for help. Bob is an accountant in town who is familiar with general business conditions. Bob gathered the following information for Amy.
a. There are 50 growers within a 1 hour drive of Amy’s acreage.
b. In general, there is little variability in price. Flowers are treated as commodities, and one aster is considered to be pretty much like any other aster.
c. There are numerous florists in the city, and the amount that Amy would supply could be easily absorbed by the florists at the prevailing price.
Required:
1. What type of market structure characterizes the flower growing industry in Amy’s region? Explain.
2. Given your answer to Requirement 1, what price should Amy charge per standard bunch? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MARKUP ON COST, COST BASED PRICING
Walker Construction acts as the general contractor on building projects ranging from $500,000 to $5 million. Each job requires a bid that includes Walker’s direct costs and subcontractor costs as well as an amount referred to as “overhead and profit.” Walker’s bidding policy is to estimate the direct materials cost, direct labor cost, and subcontractors’ costs. These are totaled, and a markup is applied to cover overhead and profit. In the coming year, the company believes it will be the successful bidder on 10 jobs with the following total revenues and costs:
|
Revenue
|
|
$23,580,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
$6,500,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
4,316,000
|
|
|
Subcontractors
|
8,834,000
|
19,650,000
|
|
Overhead and profit
|
|
$ 3,930,000
|
Required:
1. Given the preceding information, what is the markup percentage on total direct costs?
2. Suppose Walker is asked to bid on a job with estimated direct costs of $980,000. What is the bid? If the customer complains that the profit seems pretty high, how might Walker counter that accusation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABSORPTION AND VARIABLE COSTING WITH OVER AND UNDERAPPLIED OVERHEAD
Abruzzi, Inc., has just completed its first year of operations. The unit costs on a normal costing basis are as follows:
|
Manufacturing costs (per unit):
|
|
|
Direct materials (2 lbs. @ $3.50)
|
$ 7.00
|
|
Direct labor (0.5 hr. @ $16)
|
8.00
|
|
Variable overhead (0.5 hr. @ $6)
|
3.00
|
|
Fixed overhead (0.5 hr. @ $9)
|
4.50
|
|
Total
|
$22.50
|
Selling and administrative costs:
|
Variable
|
$3 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$123,000
|
During the year, the company had the following activity:
|
Units produced
|
24,000
|
|
Units sold
|
21,300
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$35
|
|
Direct labor hours worked
|
12,000
|
Actual fixed overhead was $12,000 less than budgeted fixed overhead. Budgeted variable overhead was $5,000 less than the actual variable overhead. The company used an expected actual activity level of 24,000 direct labor hours to compute the predetermined overhead rates. Any overhead variances are closed to Cost of Goods Sold.
Required:
1. Compute the unit cost using:
a. Absorption costing
b. Variable costing
2. Prepare an absorption costing income statement.
3. Prepare a variable costing income statement.
4. Reconcile the difference between the two income statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST BASED PRICING, TARGET PRICING
Carina Franks operates a catering company in Austin, Texas. Carina provides food and servers for parties. She also rents tables, chairs, dinnerware, glassware, and linens. Estefan and Maria Montero have contacted Carina about plans for their soon to be 15 year old daughter’s Quineanera (a festive party thrown by Hispanic parents to celebrate their daughters’ fifteenth birthdays). The Monteros would like a catered affair on the lawn of a rural church. They have requested an open bar, a sit down dinner for 350 people, a large tent, and a dance floor. Of course, they expect Carina to supply serving staff, tables with linens, dinnerware, and glassware. They will handle the flowers, decorations, and hiring the band on their own. Carina put together this bid:
|
Food (350 X $25)
|
$ 8,750
|
|
Beverages (350 X $15)
|
5,250
|
|
Servers (6 X 4 hours X $10)
|
240
|
|
Bartenders (2 X 4 hours X $10)
|
80
|
|
Clean up staff (3 X 3 hours X $10)
|
90
|
|
Rental of:
|
|
|
Dance floor
|
300
|
|
Linens
|
80
|
|
Tables
|
200
|
|
Dinnerware
|
120
|
|
Glassware
|
150
|
|
Total
|
$15,260
|
Required:
1. Explain where costs for Carina’s services and profit are calculated in the preceding bid.
2. Suppose that the Monteros blanch when they see the preceding bid. One of them suggests that they had hoped to spend no more than $10,000 or so on the party. How could Carina work with the Monteros to achieve a target cost of that amount?
3. Estefan Montero protests the cost of dance floor rental. He says, “I’ve seen those for rent at U Rent It for $75.” How would you respond to this remark if you were Carina? (Hint: You want this job so telling him “Go ahead and do it yourself, Cheapskate!” is not an option.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST BASED PRICING
Marcus Fibers, Inc., specializes in the manufacture of synthetic fibers that the company uses in many products such as blankets, coats, and uniforms for police and firefighters. Marcus has been in business since 1975 and has been profitable every year since 1983. The company uses a standard cost system and applies overhead on the basis of direct labor hours. Marcus has recently received a request to bid on the manufacture of 800,000 blankets scheduled for delivery to several military bases. The bid must be stated at full cost per unit plus a return on full cost of no more than 9 percent after income taxes. Full cost has been defined as including all variable costs of manufacturing the product, a reasonable amount of fixed overhead, and reasonable incremental administrative costs associated with the manufacture and sale of the product. The contractor has indicated that bids in excess of $25 per blanket are not likely to be considered.
In order to prepare the bid for the 800,000 blankets, Andrea Lightner, cost accountant, has gathered the following information about the costs associated with the production of the blankets.
|
Direct materials
|
$1.50 per pound of fibers
|
|
Direct labor
|
$7.00 per hour
|
|
Direct machine costs
|
$10.00 per blanket
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$3.00 per direct labor hour
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$8.00 per direct labor hour
|
|
Incremental administrative costs
|
$2,500 per 1,000 blankets
|
|
Special fee
|
$0.50 per blanket
|
|
Materials usage
|
6 pounds per blanket
|
|
Production rate
|
4 blankets per direct labor hour
|
|
Effective tax rate
|
40%
|
Required:
1. Calculate the minimum price per blanket that Marcus Fibers could bid without reducing the company’s operating income.
2. Using the full cost criteria and the maximum allowable return specified, calculate Marcus Fibers’s bid price per blanket.
3. Without prejudice to your answer to Requirement 2, assume that the price per blanket that Marcus Fibers calculated using the cost plus criteria specified is greater than the maximum bid of $25 per blanket allowed. Discuss the factors that Marcus Fibers should consider before deciding whether or not to submit a bid at the maximum acceptable price of $25 per blanket.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFE CYCLE PRICING, SALES PRICE AND PRICE VOLUME VARIANCES
Data for Lorraine Company are as follows:
|
Budgeted price
|
$14.30
|
|
Actual price
|
$13.00
|
|
Budgeted quantity
|
1,450
|
|
Actual quantity sold
|
1,400
|
Required:
1. Calculate the sales price variance.
2. Calculate the price volume variance.
3. Suppose that the product is at the end of the maturity stage of the product life cycle. What information do these two variances provide to Lorraine’s managers?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRICING STRATEGY, SALES VARIANCES
Howerton, Inc., manufactures and sells three products: K, M, and P. In January, Howerton, Inc., budgeted sales of the following:
|
|
Budgeted Volume
|
Budgeted Price
|
|
Product K
|
110,000
|
$50
|
|
Product M
|
165,000
|
20
|
|
Product P
|
20,000
|
20
|
At the end of the year, actual sales for Product K and Product M were $5,600,000 and $3,270,000, respectively. The actual price charged for each was equal to the budgeted price. Product P, however, had revenues of $600,000. While total revenue was higher than expected, the actual price of $10 represented a last minute revision from budget to increase consumer acceptance of the product.
Required:
1. Calculate the sales price and price volume variances for each of the three products based on the original budget.
2. Suppose that Product P is a new product just introduced during the year. What pricing strategy is Howerton, Inc., following for this product?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRICE DISCRIMINATION AND THE ROBINSON PATMAN ACT
For each of the following situations, determine whether or not price discrimination has occurred and whether the Robinson Patman Act has been violated.
a. Albion Shoes manufactures and sells shoes to retail outlets. A popular women’s flat sells for $15 to all customers, FOB shipping from Albion’s factory in Menomenee Falls.
b. Dr. Sidney Ferris, an orthopedic surgeon, charges $1,500 for arthroscopic knee surgery to privately insured patients. He charges a greatly reduced rate to other patients.
c. Castle Cosmetics charges a single price for each of its products to all customers, even though Castle can document that it costs up to three times as much to sell and distribute to certain small boutiques.
d. Paxton, Inc., manufactures toothpaste and mouthwash. Paxton charges a higher price to individual drugstores than to large chains because smaller stores do not have the same purchasing power as larger chains.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRICE DISCRIMINATION
Bernese, Inc., manufactures and distributes a variety of health products, including Velcro fastened wrist stabilizers for people with carpal tunnel syndrome. Annual production of wrist stabilizers averages 200,000 units. A large chain store purchases about 40 percent of Bernese’s production. Several thousand independent retail drugstores and medical supply stores purchase the other 60 percent. Bernese incurs the following costs of production per box:
|
Direct materials
|
$2.20
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.05
|
|
Overhead
|
0.75
|
|
Total
|
$4.00
|
Bernese has one salesperson assigned to the chain store account at a cost of $65,600 per year. Delivery is made in 1,000 unit batches about three times a month at a delivery cost of $600 per batch. Four salespeople service the remaining accounts. They call on the stores and incur salary and mileage expenses of approximately $39,900 each.
Delivery costs vary from store to store, averaging $0.45 per unit.
Bernese charges the chain store $6.25 per box and the independent stores $6.50 per box.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRICE DISCRIMINATION
Bernese, Inc., manufactures and distributes a variety of health products, including Velcro fastened wrist stabilizers for people with carpal tunnel syndrome. Annual production of wrist stabilizers averages 200,000 units. A large chain store purchases about 40 percent of Bernese’s production. Several thousand independent retail drugstores and medical supply stores purchase the other 60 percent. Bernese incurs the following costs of production per box:
|
Direct materials
|
$2.20
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.05
|
|
Overhead
|
0.75
|
|
Total
|
$4.00
|
Bernese has one salesperson assigned to the chain store account at a cost of $65,600 per year. Delivery is made in 1,000 unit batches about three times a month at a delivery cost of $600 per batch. Four salespeople service the remaining accounts. They call on the stores and incur salary and mileage expenses of approximately $39,900 each.
Delivery costs vary from store to store, averaging $0.45 per unit.
Bernese charges the chain store $6.25 per box and the independent stores $6.50 per box.
Required:
Is Bernese’s pricing policy supported by cost differences in serving the two different classes of customer? Support your answer with relevant calculations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
UNIT COSTS, INVENTORY VALUATION, VARIABLE AND ABSORPTION COSTING
Moyer Company produced 80,000 units during its first year of operations and sold 76,000 at $9 per unit. The company chose practical activity—at 80,000 units—to compute its predetermined overhead rate. Manufacturing costs are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$240,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
88,000
|
|
Expected and actual variable overhead
|
72,000
|
|
Expected and actual fixed overhead
|
36,000
|
Required:
1. Calculate the unit cost and the cost of finished goods inventory under absorption costing.
2. Calculate the unit cost and the cost of finished goods inventory under variable costing.
3. What is the dollar amount that would be used to report the cost of finished goods inventory to external parties. Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INCOME STATEMENTS, VARIABLE AND ABSORPTION COSTING
The following information pertains to Caesar, Inc., for last year:
|
Beginning inventory, units
|
—
|
|
Units produced
|
60,000
|
|
Units sold
|
57,400
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$9.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
$6.50
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$3.60
|
|
Variable selling expenses
|
$3.00
|
|
Fixed costs per year:
|
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$234,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
$236,000
|
There are no work in process inventories. Normal activity is 60,000 units. Expected and actual overhead costs are the same.
Required:
1. How many units are in ending inventory?
2. Without preparing an income statement, indicate what the difference will be between variable costing income and absorption costing income.
3. Assume the selling price per unit is $32. Prepare an income statement using:
a. Variable costing
b. Absorption costing
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INCOME STATEMENTS AND FIRM PERFORMANCE: VARIABLE AND ABSORPTION COSTING
Zimmer Company had the following operating data for its first two years of operations:
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 5.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
3.00
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1.50
|
|
Fixed costs per year:
|
|
|
Overhead
|
90,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
17,200
|
Zimmer produced 30,000 units in the first year and sold 25,000. In the second year, it produced 25,000 units and sold 30,000 units. The selling price per unit each year was $15. Zimmer uses an actual costing system for product costing.
Required:
1. Prepare income statements for both years using absorption costing. Has firm performance, as measured by income, improved or declined from Year 1 to Year 2?
2. Prepare income statements for both years using variable costing. Has firm performance, as measured by income, improved or declined from Year 1 to Year 2?
3. Which method do you think most accurately measures firm performance? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABSORPTION AND VARIABLECOSTING INCOME STATEMENTS
Portland Optics, Inc., specializes in manufacturing lenses for large telescopes and cameras used in space exploration. As the specifications for the lenses are determined by the customer and vary considerably, the company uses a job order costing system. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours, utilizing the absorption or full costing method. Portland’s predetermined overhead rates for 2006 and 2007 were based on the following estimates:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
32,500
|
44,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$325,000
|
$462,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$130,000
|
$176,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$162,500
|
$198,000
|
Jim Bradford, Portland’s controller, would like to use variable (direct) costing for internal reporting purposes as he believes statements prepared using variable costing are more appropriate for making product decisions. In order to explain the benefits of variable costing to the other members of Portland’s management team, Jim plans to convert the company’s income statement from absorption costing to variable costing. He has gathered the following information for this purpose, along with a copy of Portland’s 2006–2007 comparative income statement.
|
Portland Optics, Inc.
|
|
|
Comparative Income Statement
|
|
|
For the Years 2006–2007
|
|
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,140,000
|
$1,520,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
Finished goods at January 1
|
$ 16,000
|
$ 25,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
720,000
|
976,000
|
|
Total available
|
$ 736,000
|
$1,001,000
|
|
Less: Finished goods at December 31 Unadjusted cost of goods sold
|
25,000
|
14,000
|
|
$ 711,000
|
$ 987,000
|
|
Overhead adjustment Cost of goods sold
|
12,000
|
7,000
|
|
$ 723,000
|
$ 994,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 417,000
|
$ 526,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
(150,000)
|
(190,000)
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
(160,000)
|
(187,000)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 107,000
|
$ 149,000
|
Portland’s actual manufacturing data for the two years are as follows:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
30,000
|
42,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$300,000
|
$435,000
|
|
Direct materials used
|
$140,000
|
$210,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$132,000
|
$175,000
|
The company’s actual inventory balances were as follows:
|
|
December 31,
|
December 31,
|
December 31,
|
|
|
2005
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Direct materials
|
$32,000
|
$36,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Work in process:
|
|
|
|
|
Costs
|
$44,000
|
$34,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
1,800
|
1,400
|
2,500
|
|
Finished goods:
|
|
|
|
|
Costs
|
$16,000
|
$25,000
|
$14,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
700
|
1,080
|
550
|
For both years, all administrative expenses were fixed, while a portion of the selling expenses resulting from an 8 percent commission on net sales was variable. Portland reports any over or underapplied overhead as an adjustment to the cost of goods sold.
Required:
1. For the year ended December 31, 2007, prepare the revised income statement for Portland Optics, Inc., utilizing the variable costing method. Be sure to include the contribution margin on the revised income statement.
2. Describe two advantages of using variable costing rather than absorption costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CONTRIBUTION MARGIN VARIANCE, CONTRIBUTION MARGIN VOLUME VARIANCE, MARKET SHARE VARIANCE, MARKET SIZE VARIANCE
Patel, Inc., produces and sells gel filled ice packs. Patel’s performance report for April follows:
|
|
Actual
|
Budgeted
|
|
Units sold
|
50,000
|
40,000
|
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
$290,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
225,000
|
190,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$125,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Market size (in units)
|
1,000,000
|
1,000,000
|
Required:
1. Calculate the contribution margin variance and the contribution margin volume variance.
2. Calculate the market share variance and the market size variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ETHICAL ISSUES, ABSORPTION COSTING, PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT
Bill Fremont, division controller and CMA, was upset by a recent memo he received from the divisional manager, Steve Preston. Bill was scheduled to present the division’s financial performance at headquarters in one week. In the memo, Steve had given Bill some instructions for this upcoming report. In particular, Bill had been told to emphasize the significant improvement in the division’s profits over last year. Bill, however, didn’t believe that there was any real underlying improvement in the division’s performance and was reluctant to say otherwise. He knew that the increase in profits was because of Steve’s conscious decision to produce for inventory.
In an earlier meeting, Steve had convinced his plant managers to produce more than they knew they could sell. He argued that by deferring some of this period’s fixed costs, reported profits would jump. He pointed out two significant benefits. First, by increasing profits, the division could exceed the minimum level needed so that all the managers would qualify for the annual bonus. Second, by meeting the budgeted profit level, the division would be better able to compete for much needed capital. Bill objected but had been overruled. The most persuasive counterargument was that the increase in inventory could be liquidated in the coming year as the economy improved.
Bill, however, considered this event unlikely. From past experience, he knew that it would take at least two years of improved market demand before the productive capacity of the division was exceeded.
Required:
1. Discuss the behavior of Steve Preston, the divisional manager. Was the decision to produce for inventory an ethical one?
2. What should Bill Fremont do? Should he comply with the directive to emphasize the increase in profits? If not, what options does he have?
3. Identify any standards that apply in this situation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SEGMENTED INCOME STATEMENTS, ADDING AND DROPPING PRODUCT LINES
Louise Bordner has just been appointed manager of Palmroy’s Glass Products Division. She has two years to make the division profitable. If the division is still showing a loss after two years, it will be eliminated, and Louise will be reassigned as an assistant divisional manager in another division. The divisional income statement for the most recent year is as follows:
|
Sales
|
$5,350,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
4,750,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 600,000
|
|
Less: Direct fixed expenses
|
750,000
|
|
Divisional margin
|
$ (150,000)
|
|
Less: Common fixed expenses (allocated)
|
200,000
|
|
Divisional profit (loss)
|
$ (350,000)
|
Upon arriving at the division, Louise requested the following data on the division’s three products:
|
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Sales (units)
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$150.00
|
$140.00
|
$70.00
|
|
Unit variable cost
|
$100.00
|
$110.00
|
$103.33
|
|
Direct fixed costs
|
$100,000.00
|
$500,000.00
|
$150,000.00
|
She also gathered data on a proposed new product (Product D). If this product is added, it would displace one of the current products; the quantity that could be produced and sold would equal the quantity sold of the product it displaces, although demand limits the maximum quantity that could be sold to 20,000 units. Because of specialized production equipment, it is not possible for the new product to displace part of the production of a second product. The information on Product D is as follows:
|
Unit selling price
|
$ 70
|
|
Unit variable cost
|
30
|
|
Direct fixed costs
|
640,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare segmented income statements for Products A, B, and C.
2. Determine the products that Louise should produce for the coming year. Prepare segmented income statements that prove your combination is the best for the division. By how much will profits improve given the combination that you selected?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OPERATING INCOME FOR SEGMENTS
Jerrell, Inc., manufactures and sells automotive tools through three divisions: Southwest, Midwest, and Northeast. Each division is evaluated as a profit center. Data for each division for last year are as follows (in thousands of dollars):
|
|
Southwest
|
Midwest
|
Northeast
|
|
Sales
|
$2,300
|
$1,100
|
$3,500
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,380
|
840
|
2,100
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
300
|
180
|
620
|
Jerrell, Inc., had corporate administrative expenses equal to $250,000; these were not allocated to the divisions.
Required:
1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Jerrell, Inc., for last year.
2. Comment on the performance of each of the divisions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCT PROFITABILITY
Porter Insurance Company has three lines of insurance: automobile, property, and life. The life insurance segment has been losing money for the past five quarters, and Leah Harper, Porter’s controller, has done an analysis of that segment. She has discovered that the commission paid to the agent for the first year the policy is in place is 55 percent of the first year premium. The second year commission is 20 percent, and all succeeding years a commission equal to 5 percent of premiums is paid. No salaries are paid to agents; however, Porter does advertise on television and in magazines.
Last year, the advertising expense was $500,000. The loss rate (payout on claims) averages 50 percent. Administrative expenses equal $450,000 per year. Revenue last year was $10,000,000 (premiums). The percentage of policies of various lengths is as follows:
|
First year in force
|
65%
|
|
Second year
|
25
|
|
More than two years in force
|
10
|
Experience has shown that if a policy remains in effect for more than two years, it is rarely cancelled.
Leah is considering two alternative plans to turn this segment around. Plan 1 requires spending $250,000 on improved customer claim service in hopes that the percentage of policies in effect will take on the following distribution:
|
First year in force
|
50%
|
|
Second year
|
15
|
|
More than two years in force
|
35
|
Total premiums would remain constant at $10,000,000, and there are no other changes in fixed or variable cost behavior.
Plan 2 involves dropping the independent agent and commission system and having potential policyholders phone in requests for coverage. Leah estimates that revenue would drop to $7,000,000. Commissions would be zero, but administrative expenses would rise by $1,200,000, and advertising (including direct mail solicitation) would increase by $1,000,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a variable costing income statement for last year for the life insurance segment of Porter Insurance Company.
2. What impact would Plan 1 have on income?
3. What impact would Plan 2 have on income?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CUSTOMER PROFITABILITY, LIFE CYCLE REVENUE
Porter Insurance Company has three lines of insurance: automobile, property, and life. The life insurance segment has been losing money for the past five quarters, and Leah Harper, Porter’s controller, has done an analysis of that segment. She has discovered that the commission paid to the agent for the first year the policy is in place is 55 percent of the first year premium. The second year commission is 20 percent, and all succeeding years a commission equal to 5 percent of premiums is paid. No salaries are paid to agents; however, Porter does advertise on television and in magazines.
Last year, the advertising expense was $500,000. The loss rate (payout on claims) averages 50 percent. Administrative expenses equal $450,000 per year. Revenue last year was $10,000,000 (premiums). The percentage of policies of various lengths is as follows:
|
First year in force
|
65%
|
|
Second year
|
25
|
|
More than two years in force
|
10
|
Experience has shown that if a policy remains in effect for more than two years, it is rarely cancelled.
Leah is considering two alternative plans to turn this segment around. Plan 1 requires spending $250,000 on improved customer claim service in hopes that the percentage of policies in effect will take on the following distribution:
|
First year in force
|
50%
|
|
Second year
|
15
|
|
More than two years in force
|
35
|
Total premiums would remain constant at $10,000,000, and there are no other changes in fixed or variable cost behavior.
Plan 2 involves dropping the independent agent and commission system and having potential policyholders phone in requests for coverage. Leah estimates that revenue would drop to $7,000,000. Commissions would be zero, but administrative expenses would rise by $1,200,000, and advertising (including direct mail solicitation) would increase by $1,000,000.
Fred Morton has just purchased a life insurance policy from Porter with premiums equal to $1,500 per year.
Required:
1. Assume Fred holds the policy for one year and then drops it. What is his contribution to Porter’s operating income?
2. Assuming Fred holds the policy for three years, what is his contribution to Porter’s operating income in the second and third years? Over a 3 year period? What implications does this hold for Porter’s efforts to retain policyholders?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DETERMINING RELEVANT COSTS
Six months ago, Kelly O’Connor purchased a fire engine red, used LeBaron convertible for $10,000. Kelly was looking forward to the feel of the sun on her shoulders and the wind whipping through her hair as she zipped along the highways of life. Unfortunately, the wind turned her hair into straw, and she didn’t do much zipping along since the car spent so much of its time in the shop. So far, she has spent $1,200 on repairs, and she’s afraid there is no end in sight. In fact, Kelly anticipates the following costs of restoration:
|
Rebuilt engine
|
$ 700
|
|
New paint job
|
800
|
|
Tires
|
360
|
|
New interior
|
500
|
|
Miscellaneous maintenance
|
340
|
|
Total
|
$2,700
|
On a visit to a used car dealer, Kelly found a 4 year old Toyota RAV4 in excellent condition for $10,000—Kelly thinks she might really be more the sport utility type anyway. Kelly checked the blue book values and found that she can sell the LeBaron for only $3,600. If she buys the RAV4, she will pay cash but would need to sell the LeBaron.
Required:
1. In trying to decide whether to restore the LeBaron or buy the RAV4, Kelly is distressed because she has already spent $11,200 on the LeBaron. The investment seems too much to give up. How would you react to her concern?
2. List all costs that are relevant to Kelly’s decision. What advice would you give her?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SPECIAL ORDER DECISION, FUNCTIONAL BASED ANALYSIS, QUALITATIVE ASPECTS
Boujoaudes, Inc., manufactures croquet sets. A national sporting goods chain recently submitted a special order for 4,000 croquet sets. Boujoaudes was not operating at capacity and could use the extra business. Unfortunately, the order’s offering price of $21 per croquet set was below the cost to produce the sets. The controller was opposed to taking a loss on the deal. However, the personnel manager argued in favor of accepting the order even though a loss would be incurred; it would avoid the problem of layoffs and would help maintain the community image of the company. The full cost to produce a croquet set is as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$ 7.90
|
|
Direct labor
|
5.40
|
|
Variable overhead
|
4.75
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
3.10
|
|
Total
|
$21.15
|
No variable selling or administrative expenses would be associated with the order. Non unit level activity costs are a small percentage of total costs and are therefore not considered.
Required:
1. Assume that the company would accept the order only if it increased total profits. Should the company accept or reject the order? Provide supporting computations.
2. Consider the personnel manager’s concerns. Discuss the merits of accepting the order even if it decreases total profits.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MAKE OR BUY, FUNCTIONAL BASED ANALYSIS
Watanabe Company is currently manufacturing Part NIM 06, producing 15,000 units annually. The part is used in the production of several products made by Watanabe.
The cost per unit for NIM 06 is as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$70.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
20.00
|
|
Variable overhead
|
3.00
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
1.50
|
|
Total
|
$94.50
|
Of the total fixed overhead assigned to NIM 06, $12,000 is direct fixed overhead (the annual lease cost of machinery used to manufacture Part NIM 06), and the remainder is common fixed overhead. An outside supplier has offered to sell the part to Watanabe for $94. There is no alternative use for the facilities currently used to produce the part. No significant non unit based overhead costs are incurred.
Required:
1. Should Watanabe Company make or buy Part NIM 06?
2. What is the maximum amount per unit that Watanabe would be willing to pay to an outside supplier?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MAKE OR BUY, FUNCTIONAL BASED AND ABC ANALYSIS
Golf 2 Go, Inc., a manufacturer of motorized carts for golfers, has just received an offer from a supplier to provide 2,000 units of a component used in its main product. The component is a wheel assembly that is currently produced internally. The supplier has offered to sell the wheel assembly for $115 per unit. Golf 2 Go is currently using a functional, unit based costing system that assigns overhead to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. The estimated functional based full cost of producing the wheel assembly is as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$70
|
|
Direct labor
|
30
|
|
Variable overhead
|
10
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
50
|
Prior to making a decision, the company’s CEO commissioned a special study to see whether there would be any decrease in the fixed overhead costs. The results of the study revealed the following:
2 setups—$1,800 each (The setups would be avoided, and total spending could be reduced by $1,800 per setup.)
One half time inspector is needed. The company already uses part time inspectors hired through a temporary employment agency. The yearly cost of the part time inspectors for the wheel assembly operation is $12,300 and could be totally avoided if the part were purchased.
Engineering work: 615 hours, $20/hr. (Although the work decreases by 615 hours, the engineer assigned to the wheel assembly line also spends time on other products, and there would be no reduction in his salary.)
200 fewer material moves at $40 per move
Required:
1. Ignore the special study, and determine whether the wheel assembly should be produced internally or purchased from the supplier.
2. Now, using the special study data, repeat the analysis.
3. Discuss the qualitative factors that would affect the decision, including strategic implications.
4. After reviewing the special study, the controller made the following remark:
“This study ignores the additional activity demands that purchasing would cause. For example, although the demand for inspecting the part on the production floor decreases, will we not have a need to inspect the incoming parts in the receiving area? Will we actually save any inspection costs?” Is the controller right? Would this problem be avoided if Golf 2 Go had an activity based costing system in place?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
RESOURCE USAGE MODEL, SPECIAL ORDER
Nesbitt, Inc., manufactures display cases for retail stores. Good 4 U Foods, Inc., is a grocery chain that decided to expand into video rental and needs display cases. Good 4 U Foods offered to purchase 14,000 display cases for $35 each. Normally, this type of case sells for $45, but Nesbitt is operating at 80 percent of capacity and wants to make the special order work. Nesbitt’s controller looked into the cost of the display cases using the following information from the activity based accounting system:
|
|
|
|
|
Activity Rate
|
|
|
|
|
Unused
|
Quantity
|
|
|
|
|
Activity Driver
|
Capacity
|
Demanded
|
Fixed
|
Variable
|
|
Direct materials
|
Display cases
|
0
|
14,000
|
—
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
Direct labor hours
|
0
|
10,500
|
—
|
15
|
|
Setups
|
Setup hours
|
60
|
80
|
$175
|
5
|
|
Inspection
|
Inspection hours
|
800
|
400
|
10
|
1
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
6,000
|
7,000
|
20
|
3
|
Expansion of activity capacity for setups, inspection, and machining must be done in steps. For setups, each step provides an additional 25 hours of setup activity and is priced at the fixed activity rate. For inspection, activity capacity is expanded by 2,000 hours per year, and the cost is $20,000 per year (the salary for an additional inspector). Machine capacity can be leased for a year at a rate of $20 per machine hour. Machine capacity must be acquired, however, in steps of 2,500 machine hours.
Required:
1. Compute the change in income for Nesbitt, Inc., if the order is accepted.
2. Suppose that the machining activity has 7,500 hours of unused capacity. How is the analysis affected?
3. Suppose that the setup activity has 80 hours of unused capacity and that the machining activity has 6,500 hours of unused capacity. How is the analysis affected?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SELL OR PROCESS FURTHER, BASIC ANALYSIS
Diehlman, Inc., is a pork processor. Its plants, located in the Midwest, produce several products from a common process: sirloin roasts, chops, spare ribs, and the residual. The roasts, chops, and spare ribs are packaged, branded, and sold to supermarkets. The residual consists of organ meats and leftover pieces that are sold to sausage and hotdog processors. The joint costs for a typical week are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$73,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
26,000
|
|
Overhead
|
39,000
|
The revenues from each product are as follows: sirloin roasts, $50,000; chops, $70,000; spare ribs, $33,000; and residual, $15,000.
Diehlman’s management has learned that certain organ meats are a prized delicacy in Asia. They are considering separating those from the residual and selling them abroad for $50,000. This would bring the value of the residual down to $8,500. In addition, the organ meats would need to be packaged and then air freighted to Asia. Further processing cost per week is estimated to be $30,000 (the cost of renting additional packaging equipment, purchasing materials, and hiring additional direct labor). Transportation cost would be $7,500 per week. Finally, resource spending would need to be expanded for other activities as well (purchasing, receiving, and internal shipping). The increase in resource spending for these activities is estimated to be $2,175 per week.
Required:
1. What is the gross profit earned by the original mix of products for one week?
2. Should the company separate the organ meats for shipment overseas or continue to sell them at split off? What is the effect of the decision on weekly gross profit?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FOREIGN TRADE ZONES
Elmondo, Inc., is considering opening a new warehouse to serve the Southwest region.
Jefferson Moore, controller for Elmondo, has been reading about the advantages of foreign trade zones. He wonders if locating in one would be of benefit to his company, which imports about 90 percent of its merchandise (e.g., chess sets from the Philippines, jewelry from Thailand, pottery from Mexico, etc.). Jefferson estimates that the new warehouse will store imported merchandise costing about $3,450,000 per year.
Inventory shrinkage at the warehouse (due to breakage and mishandling) is about 4 percent of the total. The average tariff rate on these imports is 20 percent.
Required:
1. If Elmondo locates the warehouse in a foreign trade zone, how much will be saved in tariffs? Why?
2. Suppose that, on average, the merchandise stays in an Elmondo warehouse for seven months before shipment to retailers. Carrying cost for Elmondo is 12 percent per year. If Elmondo locates the warehouse in a foreign trade zone, how much will be saved in carrying costs? What will the total tariff related savings be?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
KEEP OR DROP FOR SERVICE FIRM, COMPLEMENTARY EFFECTS, FUNCTIONAL BASED ANALYSIS
Serene Assurance Company provides both automobile and life insurance. The projected income statements for the two products are as follows:
|
|
Automobile
|
Life
|
|
|
Insurance
|
Insurance
|
|
Sales
|
$4,200,000
|
$12,000,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
3,830,000
|
9,600,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 370,000
|
$ 2,400,000
|
|
Less: Direct fixed expenses
|
400,000
|
500,000
|
|
Segment margin
|
$ (30,000)
|
$ 1,900,000
|
|
Less: Common fixed expenses (allocated)
|
100,000
|
200,000
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ (130,000)
|
$ 1,700,000
|
The president of the company is considering dropping the automobile insurance. However, some policyholders prefer having their auto and life insurance with the same company, so if automobile insurance is dropped, sales of life insurance will drop by 15 percent. No significant non unit level activity costs are incurred.
Required:
1. If Serene Assurance Company drops automobile insurance, by how much will income increase or decrease? Provide supporting computations.
2. Assume that increasing the advertising budget by $50,000 will increase sales of automobile insurance by 10 percent and life insurance by 3 percent. Prepare a segmented income statement that reflects the effect of increased advertising. Should advertising be increased?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SPECIAL ORDER, FUNCTIONAL BASED ANALYSIS
Lancaster Company manufactures two types of hair conditioners, Creemy and Shiney, out of a joint process. The joint (common) costs incurred are $840,000 for a standard production run that generates 360,000 gallons of Creemy and 240,000 gallons of Shiney. Additional processing costs beyond the split off point are $2.80 per gallon for Creemy and $1.80 per gallon for Shiney. Creemy sells for $4.80 per gallon, while Shineysells for $7.80 per gallon.
Comida Buena, a supermarket chain, has asked Lancaster to supply it with 480,000 gallons of Shiney at a price of $7.30 per gallon. Comida Buena plans to have the conditioner bottled in 16 ounce bottles with its own Comida Buena label.
If Lancaster accepts the order, it will save $0.10 per gallon in packaging of Shiney. There is sufficient excess capacity for the order. However, the market for Creemy is saturated, and any additional sales of Creemy would take place at a price of $3.20 per gallon. Assume that no significant non unit level activity costs are incurred.
Required:
1. What is the profit normally earned on one production run of Creemy and Shiney?
2. Should Lancaster accept the special order? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
RESOURCE USAGE, SPECIAL ORDER
Perry Medical Center (PMC) has five medical technicians who are responsible for conducting sonogram testing. Each technician is paid a salary of $36,000 and is capable of processing 1,000 tests per year. The sonogram equipment is one year old and was purchased for $150,000. It is expected to last five years. The equipment’s capacity is25,000 tests over its life. Depreciation is computed on a straight line basis, with no salvage value expected. The reading of the sonogram is verified by an outside physician whose fee is $10 per test. The technician’s report with the outside physician’snote of verification is sent to the referring physician. In addition to the salaries and equipment, PMC spends $10,000 for forms, paper, power, and other supplies needed to operate the equipment (assuming 5,000 tests are processed). When PMC purchased the equipment, it fully expected to perform 5,000 tests per year. In fact, during its first year of operation, 5,000 tests were run. However, a larger hospital has established a clinic in Perry and will siphon off some of PMC’s business. During the coming years, PMC is expected to run only 4,200 sonogram tests yearly. PMC has been charging$65 for the test—enough to cover the direct costs of the test plus an assignment of general overhead (e.g., depreciation on the hospital building, lighting and heating, and janitorial services).
At the beginning of the second year, an HMO from a neighboring community approached PMC and offered to send its clients to PMC for sonogram testing provided that the charge per test would be $35. The HMO estimates that it can provide about 500 patients per year. The HMO has indicated that the arrangement is temporary—for one year only. The HMO expects to have its own testing capabilities within one year.
Required:
1. Classify the resources associated with the sonogram activity into one of the following:
(1) committed resources or (2) flexible resources.
2. Calculate the activity rate for the sonogram testing activity. Break the activity rate into fixed and variable components. Now, classify each activity resource as relevant or irrelevant with respect to the following alternatives: (1) accept the HMO offer and (2) reject the HMO offer. Explain your reasoning.
3. Assume that PMC will accept the HMO offer if it reduces the hospital’s operating costs. Should the HMO offer be accepted?
4. Harry Birdwell, PMC’s hospital controller, argued against accepting the HMO’s offer. Instead, he argued that the hospital should be increasing the charge per test rather than accepting business that doesn’t even cover full costs. He also was concerned about local physician reaction if word got out that the HMO was receiving tests for $35. Discuss the merits of Harry’s position. Include in your discussion an assessment of the price increase that would be needed if the objective is to maintain total revenues from sonogram testing experienced in the first year of operation.
5. Elaine Day, PMC’s administrator, has been informed that one of the sonogram technicians is leaving for an opportunity at a larger hospital. She has met with the other technicians, and they have agreed to increase their hours to pick up the slack so that PMC won’t need to hire another technician. By working a couple hours extra every week, each remaining technician can perform 1,050 tests per year. They agreed to do this for an increase in salary of $2,000 per year. How does this outcome affect the analysis of the HMO offer?
6. Assuming that PMC wants to bring in the same revenues earned in the sonogram activity’s first year less the reduction in resource spending attributable to using only four technicians, how much must PMC charge for a sonogram test?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SEGMENTED INCOME STATEMENTS, KEEP OR DROP DECISION, SPECIAL ORDER DECISION, JIT AND ACTIVITYBASED COSTING, STRATEGIC CONSIDERATIONS
Emery Company, a manufacturer of motors for washing machines, has installed a JIT purchasing and manufacturing system. After several years of operation, Emery has succeeded in reducing inventories to insignificant levels. During the coming year, Emery expects to produce 200,000 motors: 150,000 of the Regular Model and 50,000 of the Heavy Duty Model. The motors are produced in manufacturing cells. The expected output represents 80 percent of the capacity for the Regular Model cell and 100 percent of capacity for the Heavy Duty Model cell. (This capacity includes time for cell workers to perform maintenance and materials handling.) The selling price for the Regular Model is $60; for the Heavy Duty Model, $70.
The relevant data for next year’s expected production are as follows:
|
|
Regular Cell
|
Heavy Duty Cell
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3,500,000
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Labor
|
$900,000
|
$315,000
|
|
Power
|
$250,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
$800,000
|
$300,000
|
|
Number of runs
|
100
|
100
|
|
Number of cell workers
|
20
|
5
|
|
Square footage
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
The following overhead costs are common to each cell:
|
Plant depreciation
|
$900,000
|
|
Production scheduling
|
300,000
|
|
Cafeteria
|
100,000
|
|
Personnel
|
150,000
|
These costs are assigned to the cells using cost drivers selected from the cell activity data given above.
In addition to the overhead costs, the company expects the following nonmanufacturing costs:
|
Commissions (2% of sales)
|
$250,000
|
|
Advertising:
|
|
|
Regular Model
|
400,000
|
|
Heavy Duty Model
|
200,000
|
|
Administration (all fixed)
|
500,000
|
Keith Golding, president of Emery Company, is concerned about the profit performance of each model. He wants to know the effect on the company’s profitability if the Heavy Duty Model is dropped. At the same time this request was made, the company was approached by a customer in a market not normally served by the company. This customer offered to buy 30,000 units of the Regular Model at $30 per unit. The order was requested on a direct contact basis, and no commissions will be paid. Keith was inclined to reject the offer, since it was half the model’s normal selling price. However, before making the decision, he wanted to know the effect of accepting the offer on the company’s profits.
To help decide on the two issues, the following additional data have been made available:
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Supply
|
Usage
|
Lumpy Quantity
|
Fixed Rate
|
|
Scheduling
|
Runs
|
250
|
200
|
25
|
$1,200
|
|
Cafeteria
|
Cell workers
|
45
|
25
|
15
|
1,800
|
|
Personnel
|
Cell workers
|
40
|
25
|
20
|
3,750
|
Of the three activities, the cafeteria activity is the only one with a variable activity rate. This rate is $760 per cell worker.
Required:
1. Prepare an ABC segmented income statement for Emery Company using products as segments. Can the unused activity be exploited to increase overall profits? Explain.
2. By how much will profits be affected if the Heavy Duty Model is dropped?
3. Prepare an analysis that shows what the effect on company profitability will be if the special order is accepted. Was the president correct in his feelings concerning the special order?
4. Now, assume that the models are regularly sold to companies that produce medium to high quality washing machines. The special order customer will use the motors in a low end washing machine and plans to advertise the fact that the low end washing machine can be purchased at a lower price with the same quality as a so called higher quality brand. Given this information and the results of Requirement 2, should the order be accepted? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MAKE OR BUY, FUNCTIONAL BASED ANALYSIS, QUALITATIVE CONSIDERATIONS
Gray Dentistry Services is part of an HMO that operates in a large metropolitan area. Currently, Gray has its own dental laboratory to produce porcelain and gold crowns.
The unit costs to produce the crowns are as follows:
|
|
Porcelain
|
Gold
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 60
|
$ 90
|
|
Direct labor
|
20
|
20
|
|
Variable overhead
|
5
|
5
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
22
|
22
|
|
Total
|
$107
|
$137
|
Fixed overhead is detailed as follows:
|
Salary (supervisor)
|
$30,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
5,000
|
|
Rent (lab facility)
|
20,000
|
Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The rates above were computed using 5,500 direct labor hours. No significant non unit level overhead costs are incurred.
A local dental laboratory has offered to supply Gray all the crowns it needs. Its price is $100 for porcelain crowns and $132 for gold crowns; however, the offer is conditional on supplying both types of crowns—it will not supply just one type for the price indicated. If the offer is accepted, the equipment used by Gray’s laboratory would be scrapped (it is old and has no market value), and the lab facility would be closed. Gray uses 1,500 porcelain crowns and 1,000 gold crowns per year.
Required:
1. Should Gray continue to make its own crowns, or should they be purchased from the external supplier? What is the dollar effect of purchasing?
2. What qualitative factors should Gray consider in making this decision?
3. Suppose that the lab facility is owned rather than rented and that the $20,000 is depreciation rather than rent. What effect does this have on the analysis in Requirement 1?
4. Refer to the original data. Assume that the volume of crowns is 3,000 porcelain and 2,000 gold. Should Gray make or buy the crowns? Explain the outcome.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SELL OR PROCESS FURTHER
Chemco Corporation buys three chemicals that are processed to produce two popular ingredients for liquid cough syrups. The three chemicals are in liquid form. The purchased chemicals are blended for two to three hours and then heated for 15 minutes.
he results of the process are two separate ingredients, Suppressant AB2 and Suppressant AB3. For every 2,200 gallons of chemicals used, 1,000 gallons of each suppressant are produced. The suppressants are sold to companies that process them into their final form. The selling prices are $25 per gallon for AB2 and $12 per gallon for AB3.
The costs to produce 1,000 gallons of each chemical are as follows:
|
Chemicals
|
$11,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
9,000
|
|
Catalyst
|
3,600
|
|
Overhead
|
7,000
|
The suppressants are bottled in 5 gallon plastic containers and shipped. The cost of each container is $1.65. The costs of shipping are $0.20 per container.
Chemco Corporation could process Suppressant AB2 further by mixing it with inert powders and flavoring to form cough tablets. The tablets can be sold directly to retail drug stores as a generic brand. If this route is taken, the revenue received per case of tablets would be $8.50, with 10 cases produced by every gallon of Suppressant AB2. The costs of processing into tablets total $5.00 per gallon of AB2. Packaging costs $4.86 per case. Shipping costs $0.40 per case.
Required:
1. Should Chemco sell Suppressant AB2 at split off, or should AB2 be processed and sold as tablets?
2. If Chemco normally sells 360,000 gallons of AB2 per year, what will be the difference in profits if AB2 is processed further?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLANT SHUTDOWN OR CONTINUE OPERATIONS, QUALITATIVE CONSIDERATIONS, FUNCTIONALBASED ANALYSIS
GianAuto Corporation manufactures automobiles, vans, and trucks. Among the various GianAuto plants around the United States is the Denver cover plant, where vinyl covers and upholstery fabric are sewn. These are used to cover interior seating and other surfaces of GianAuto products.
Pam Vosilo is the plant manager for the Denver cover plant—the first GianAuto plant in the region. As other area plants were opened, Pam, in recognition of her management ability, was given the responsibility to manage them. Pam functions as a regional manager, although the budget for her and her staff is charged to the Denver plant.
Pam has just received a report indicating that GianAuto could purchase the entire annual output of the Denver cover plant from outside suppliers for $30 million. Pam was astonished at the low outside price, because the budget for the Denver plant’s operating costs was set at $52 million. Pam believes that the Denver plant will have to close down operations in order to realize the $22 million in annual cost savings.
The budget (in thousands) for the Denver plant’s operating costs for the coming year follows:
|
Materials
|
|
$12,000
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
|
Direct
|
$13,000
|
|
|
Supervision
|
3,000
|
|
|
Indirect plant
|
4,000
|
20,000
|
|
Overhead:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation—Equipment
|
$ 5,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—Building
|
3,000
|
|
|
Pension expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
Plant manager and staff
|
2,000
|
|
|
Corporate allocation
|
6,000
|
20,000
|
|
Total budgeted costs
|
|
$52,000
|
Additional facts regarding the plant’s operations are as follows:
Due to the Denver plant’s commitment to use high quality fabrics in all of its products, the purchasing department was instructed to place blanket orders with major suppliers to ensure the receipt of sufficient materials for the coming year. If these orders are cancelled as a consequence of the plant closing, termination charges would amount to 15 percent of the cost of direct materials.
Approximately 700 plant employees will lose their jobs if the plant is closed. This includes all direct laborers and supervisors as well as the plumbers, electricians, and other skilled workers classified as indirect plant workers. Some would be able to find new jobs, but many others would have difficulty. All employees would have difficulty matching the Denver plant’s base pay of $9.40 per hour, the highest in the area. A clause in the Denver plant’s contract with the union may help some employees; the company must provide employment assistance to its former employees for 12 months after a plant closing.
The estimated cost to administer this service would be $1 million for the year.
Some employees would probably elect early retirement because the company has an excellent pension plan. In fact, $3 million of next year’s pension expense would continue whether or not the plant is open.
Pam and her staff would not be affected by the closing of the Denver plant. They would still be responsible for administering three other area plants.
Equipment depreciation for the plant is considered to be a variable cost and the units of production method is used to depreciate equipment; the Denver plant is the only GianAuto plant to use this depreciation method. However, it uses the customary straight line method to depreciate its building.
Required:
1. Prepare a quantitative analysis to help in deciding whether or not to close the Denver plant. Explain how you would treat the nonrecurring relevant costs.
2. Consider the analysis in Requirement 1, and add to it the qualitative factors that you believe are important to the decision. What is your decision? Would you close the plant? Explain. (CMA adapted)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MAKE OR BUY, FUNCTIONAL BASED ANALYSIS
Morrill Company produces two different types of gauges: a density gauge and a thickness gauge. The segmented income statement for a typical quarter follows.
|
|
Density Gauge
|
Thickness Gauge
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$150,000
|
$80,000
|
$230,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses Contribution margin
|
80,000
|
46,000
|
126,000
|
|
$ 70,000
|
$34,000
|
$104,000
|
|
Less: Direct fixed expenses Segment margin
|
20,000
|
38,000
|
58,000
|
|
$ 50,000
|
$ (4,000)
|
$ 46,000
|
|
Less: Common fixed expenses
|
|
|
30,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
|
$ 16,000
|
The density gauge uses a subassembly that is purchased from an external supplier for $25 per unit. Each quarter, 2,000 subassemblies are purchased. All units produced are sold, and there are no ending inventories of subassemblies. Morrill is considering making the subassembly rather than buying it. Unit level variable manufacturing costs are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$2
|
|
Direct labor
|
3
|
|
Variable overhead
|
2
|
No significant non unit level costs are incurred.
Morrill is considering two alternatives to supply the productive capacity for the subassembly.
a. Lease the needed space and equipment at a cost of $27,000 per quarter for the space and $10,000 per quarter for a supervisor. There are no other fixed expenses.
b. Drop the thickness gauge. The equipment could be adapted with virtually no cost and the existing space utilized to produce the subassembly. The direct fixed expenses, including supervision, would be $38,000, $8,000 of which is depreciation on equipment. If the thickness gauge is dropped, sales of the density gauge will not be affected.
Required:
1. Should Morrill Company make or buy the subassembly? If it makes the subassembly, which alternative should be chosen? Explain and provide supporting computations.
2. Suppose that dropping the thickness gauge will decrease sales of the density gauge by 10 percent. What effect does this have on the decision?
3. Assume that dropping the thickness gauge decreases sales of the density gauge by 10 percent and that 2,800 subassemblies are required per quarter. As before, assume that there are no ending inventories of subassemblies and that all units produced are sold. Assume also that the per unit sales price and variable costs are the same as in Requirement 1. Include the leasing alternative in your consideration. Now, what is the correct decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EXPORTING, MAQUILADORAS, FOREIGN TRADE ZONES
Paladin Company manufactures plain paper fax machines in a small factory in Minnesota. Sales have increased by 50 percent in each of the past three years, as Paladin has expanded its market from the United States to Canada and Mexico. As a result, the Minnesota factory is at capacity. Beryl Adams, president of Paladin, has examined the situation and developed the following alternatives.
a. Add a permanent second shift at the plant. However, the semi skilled workers who assemble the fax machines are in short supply, and the wage rate of $15 per hour would probably have to be increased across the board to $18 per hour in order to attract sufficient workers from out of town. The total wage increase (including fringe benefits) would amount to $125,000. The heavier use of plant facilities would lead to increased plant maintenance and small tool cost.
b. Open a new plant and locate it in Mexico. Wages (including fringe benefits) would average $3.50 per hour. Investment in plant and equipment would amount to $300,000.
c. Open a new plant and locate it in a foreign trade zone, possibly in Dallas. Wages would be somewhat lower than in Minnesota, but higher than in Mexico. The advantages of postponing tariff payments on imported parts could amount to $50,000 per year.
Required:
Advise Beryl of the advantages and disadvantages of each alternative.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MANAGERIAL DECISION CASE: CENTRALIZE VERSUS DECENTRALIZE
Central University, a Midwestern university with approximately 17,400 students, was in the middle of a budget crisis. For the third consecutive year, state appropriations for higher education remained essentially unchanged. (The university is currently in its 2006–2007 academic year.) Yet, utilities, Social Security benefits, insurance, and other operating expenses have increased. Moreover, the faculty were becoming restless, and some members had begun to leave for other, higher paying opportunities.
The president and the academic vice president had announced their intention to eliminate some academic programs and to reduce others. The savings that result would be used to cover the increase in operating expenses and to allow raises for the remaining faculty. Needless to say, the possible dismissal of tenured faculty aroused a great deal of concern throughout the university.
With this background, the president and academic vice president called a meeting of all department heads and deans to discuss the budget for the coming year. As the budget was presented, the academic vice president noted that continuing education, a separate, centralized unit, had accumulated a deficit of $504,000 over the past several years, which must be eliminated during the coming fiscal year. The vice president noted that allocating the deficit equally among the seven colleges would create a hardship on some of the colleges, wiping out all of their operating budgets except for salaries.
After some discussion of alternative ways to allocate the deficit, the head of the accounting department suggested an alternative solution: decentralize continuing education, allowing each college to assume responsibility for its own continuing education programs. In this way, the overhead of a centralized continuing education could be avoided.
The academic vice president responded that the suggestion would be considered, but it was received with little enthusiasm. The vice president observed that continuing education was now generating more revenues than costs—and that the trend was favorable.
A week later, at a meeting of the Deans’ Council, the vice president reviewed the role of continuing education. He pointed out that only the dean of continuing education held tenure. If continuing education were decentralized, her salary ($50,000) would continue. However, she would return to her academic department, and the university would save $20,000 of instructional wages, since fewer adjunct faculty would be needed in her department. All other employees in the unit were classified as staff. Continuing education had responsibility for all noncredit offerings. Additionally, it had nominal responsibility for credit courses offered in the evening on campus and for credit courses offered off campus. However, all scheduling and staffing of these evening and off campus courses were done by the heads of the academic departments. The head of each department had to approve the courses offered and the staffing. According to the vice president, advertising is one of the main contributions of the continuing education department to the evening and off campus programs. He estimated that $30,000 per year is being spent.
After reviewing this information, the vice president made available the following information pertaining to the department’s performance for the past several years (the 2006–2007 data were projections). He once again defended keeping a centralized department, emphasizing the favorable trend revealed by the accounting data. (All numbers are expressed in thousands.)
|
|
2003–2004
|
2004–2005
|
2005–2006
|
2006–2007
|
|
Tuition revenues:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Off campus
|
$ 300
|
$ 400
|
$ 400
|
$ 410
|
|
Evening
|
—
|
525
|
907
|
1,000
|
|
Noncredit
|
135
|
305
|
338
|
375
|
|
Total
|
$ 435
|
$1,230
|
$1,645
|
$1,785
|
|
Operating costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Administration
|
$ 132
|
$ 160
|
$ 112
|
$ 112
|
|
Off campus:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct
|
230
|
270
|
270
|
260
|
|
Indirect
|
350
|
410
|
525
|
440
|
|
Evening
|
—
|
220
|
420
|
525
|
|
Noncredit
|
135
|
305
|
338
|
375
|
|
Total
|
$ 847
|
$1,365
|
$1,665
|
$1,712
|
|
Income (loss)
|
$(412)
|
$ (135)
|
$ (20)
|
$ 73
|
The dean of the College of Business was unimpressed by the favorable trend identified by the academic vice president. The dean maintained that decentralization still would be in the best interests of the university. He argued that although decentralization would not fully solve the deficit, it would provide a sizable contribution each year to the operating budgets for each of the seven colleges.
The academic vice president disagreed vehemently. He was convinced that continuing education was now earning its own way and would continue to produce additional resources for the university.
Required:
You have been asked by the president of Central University to assess which alternative, centralization or decentralization, is in the best interest of the school. The president is willing to decentralize provided that significant savings can be produced and the mission of the continuing education department will still be carried out. Prepare a memo to the president that details your analysis and reasoning and recommends one of the two alternatives. Provide both qualitative and quantitative reasoning in the memo.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COLLABORATIVE LEARNING EXERCISE
Rick Morgan sat at his desk mulling over an important decision. As plant manager for the Salina factory, he was under pressure to reduce costs and improve productivity. He had been approached several weeks before by Lauren Gosnell, the purchasing manager, who told him that a major supplier had offered to supply the plant with Component A56 at a delivered cost that was less than the factory’s full cost to manufacture the component.
Rick was well aware that good deals are sometimes not as good as they sound. So, he had asked Lauren and James Terrant, the plant controller, to prepare full cost analyses of the offer. The results lay on his desk. Lauren’s report was brief and to the point. The factory used 50,000 units of Part A56 each year. The full manufacturing cost was $45 each; the proposed price from the supplier was $39 each. This would result in a $300,000 per year cost savings. Lauren was wholeheartedly in favor of outsourcing this component.
James’s report was also brief. He detailed the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead assigned to Part A56. His analysis supported Lauren’s assertion that the full cost of the component was $45 each. James also recommended outsourcing.
While both reports were in favor of outside purchase, Rick was troubled. He wondered if there were hidden costs of outsourcing. He also wondered about the internal costs—and what would happen to the employees who worked on the A56 line. Were there any costs associated with the layoffs that had not been considered? Rick picked up the phone and called his former business professor, Kate Buchanan, and asked her to meet him for lunch the next day.
RICK: Kate, you’ve had a chance to read these two reports. Tell me, does it seem that anything is missing? Is this as great a deal as it sounds?”
KATE: Well, on the surface, Rick, it certainly looks good. But you may be right— there are some missing factors. For one thing, the outsourcing of this component will lead to the idling of one of your production lines. What are you planning to do with the excess capacity? Are there some costs hidden in overhead that will continue even though you aren’t making the part anymore?
RICK: What do you mean by hidden?
KATE: I mean that some costs are flexible, but others are committed. Basically, flexible costs disappear immediately when you stop making a part—like direct materials.
If you don’t make A56, then you don’t need to buy the sheet metal and solder.
However, other costs are committed. For example, you use welding equipment on that line, what will happen to it? Right now, depreciation on the equipment is included in the overhead assigned to A56. When you stop making the part, will you still have the welding equipment? If so, the depreciation will still be there, but will be spread over other items you manufacture. I think you are right to consider the impact of the layoff, too. We often think of direct labor as being a variable or flexible cost. But any worker layed off will file for unemployment insurance. Your rates on all your remaining workers will skyrocket and will stay high for the next three years.
And that is assuming no further layoffs. Plus, there’s more.
RICK: More? How so?
KATE: Remember activity based costing from our accounting class? Your plant clearly uses a functional based approach to assigning overhead. If it used activity based costing, you might find out that purchasing and receiving costs will go up if the supplier’s offer is accepted. Of course, there could also be a decrease in that the materials used now would no longer be purchased, received, and stored.
RICK: Wow, Kate, how am I going to get all the information I need? I’m afraid I can’t just ask James. He’s been here forever. I tried to get him to look into ABC a year or so ago. He won’t—says it’s a fad that isn’t worth the trouble. And Lauren is really enthusiastic about this possibility. I won’t be getting an objective assessment from her. Would you like to take this on as a project? I’ll pay your consulting rate.
KATE: (shaking her head) I sympathize, Rick. Unfortunately, it looks as if you might have to start making some tough decisions—starting with the Accounting Department.
If James can’t do an appropriate analysis of this one opportunity, he won’t be able to meet your needs for information in the future. I think you need more than a one time analysis. You need ongoing managerial accounting help. I can recommend a couple of recent accounting grads. One in particular has over 10 years of experience in industry and an outstanding academic record in our graduate program. He’s intelligent, flexible, and energetic.
RICK: You may be right. Could you e mail me his name and phone number when you get back to the office? I’d like to consider this. Meanwhile, let’s grab a second cup of coffee and you can bring me up to speed on this flexible versus committed costing idea.
Required:
Form groups of three to five students to discuss the following questions. Choose one representative from your group to present the group’s answers to the class.
1. Suggest some costing features that a controller should consider in evaluating the outsourcing opportunity. How would you go about getting the appropriate information?
2. Why do you think Lauren is so enthusiastic about the outsourcing opportunity? Could there be any reason(s) other than cost savings?
3. Rick is clearly considering a change in the controller. Do you think he should fire James? Where should Rick’s loyalties lie?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABSORPTION AND VARIABLE COSTING, SEGMENTED INCOME STATEMENTS
Acme Novelty Company produces coin purses and key chains. Selected data for the past year are as follows:
|
|
Coin Purse
|
Key Chain
|
|
Production (units)
|
100,000
|
200,000
|
|
Sales (units)
|
90,000
|
210,000
|
|
Selling price
|
$5.50
|
$4.50
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
50,000
|
80,000
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 75,000
|
$100,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
250,000
|
400,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
20,000
|
24,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
50,000
|
80,000
|
|
Nonmanufacturing costs:
|
|
|
|
Variable selling
|
30,000
|
60,000
|
|
Direct fixed selling
|
35,000
|
40,000
|
|
Common fixed selling
|
25,000
|
25,000
|
Budgeted fixed overhead for the year, $130,000, equaled the actual fixed overhead. Fixed overhead is assigned to products using a plant wide rate based on expected direct labor hours, which were 130,000. The company had 10,000 key chains in inventory at the beginning of the year. These key chains had the same unit cost as the key chains produced during the year.
Required:
1. Compute the unit cost for the coin purses and key chains using the variable costing method. Compute the unit cost using absorption costing.
2. Prepare an income statement using absorption costing.
3. Prepare an income statement using variable costing.
4. Explain the reason for any difference between absorption and variable costing operating incomes.
5. Prepare a segmented income statement using products as segments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ELASTICITY OF DEMAND AND MARKET STRUCTURE
Janet Gordon and Phil Hopkins graduated several years ago with M.S. degrees in accounting and set up a full service accounting firm. Janet and Phil have many small business clients and have noticed some pricing trends while compiling annual financial statements. The following data are for five of the pizza parlors which are Janet and Phil’s clients:
|
|
Quantity Sold
|
Average Price
|
|
Mamma Mia’s
|
18,000
|
$10.00
|
|
Happy Time Pizza
|
21,000
|
7.90
|
|
Keg and Pie Pizza
|
22,000
|
8.00
|
|
Fast Freddy’s Pizza
|
30,000
|
7.00
|
|
Pizza pizza
|
24,000
|
7.50
|
Required:
1. Is the demand for pizza relatively more elastic or inelastic?
2. What type of market structure characterizes the pizza industry? How do you suppose that Mamma Mia’s can charge so much more per pizza than Fast Freddy’s does?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYBER RESEARCH CASE
Many companies are now preparing corporate sustainability reports. Many such reports are found. Other reports can be found at the Websites of individual companies. For example, Baxter and 3M voluntarily prepare and publish reports on health, safety, and the environment. In 2000, Baxter expanded its environmental reporting to include a report on sustainability reporting. 3M has indicated that it intends to change its environmental reporting to better reflect the three elements of sustainability: environmental effects, economic effects, and social effects. To this end, 3M gathered data throughout 2001 and issued its first report on sustainability performance in 2003. You can find the reports for these two companies. Find the environmental reports of three companies, where at least one is a U.S. company. Examine the environmental reports of these three companies, including their reports on sustainability performance. Answer the following questions for each firm.
1. How much has been saved due to environmental actions? Which firm has saved the most?
2. Describe each firm’s packaging reduction efforts and the resulting savings. (Savings can be expressed in nonfinancial terms.)
3. Describe each firm’s recycling activities—both for their own products as well as the materials they receive from suppliers.
4. What kinds of environmental performance measures are being used by each firm? Can you relate these to the core strategic objectives discussed in the chapter?
5. Evaluate the sustainability performance of each firm. Which do you think is closer to the concept of sustainable development?
6. What reasons do they offer for providing environmental information?
7. How do the environmental reports compare? Which report did you like best? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP WITH ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
Dory Manufacturing Company produces T shirts that are screen printed with the logos of various sports teams. Each shirt is priced at $10. Costs are as follows:
|
Cost Driver
|
Unit Variable Cost
|
Level of Cost Driver
|
|
Units sold
|
$ 5
|
—
|
|
Setups
|
450
|
80
|
|
Engineering hours
|
20
|
500
|
|
Other data:
|
|
|
|
Total fixed costs (conventional)
|
$96,000
|
|
|
Total fixed costs (ABC)
|
50,000
|
|
Required:
1. Compute the break even point in units using conventional analysis.
2. Compute the break even point in units using activity based analysis.
3. Suppose that Dory could reduce the setup cost by $150 per setup and could reduce the number of engineering hours needed to 425. How many units must be sold to break even in this case?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BREAK EVEN IN SALES DOLLARS, CHANGES IN VARIABLES
Lauterbach Corporation manufactures skateboards and is in the process of preparing next year’s budget. The pro forma income statement for the current year is as follows:
|
Sales
|
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Cost of sales:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$250,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
150,000
|
|
|
Variable overhead
|
80,000
|
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
100,000
|
580,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
$ 920,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses:
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
$300,000
|
|
|
Fixed
|
250,000
|
550,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
$ 370,000
|
Required:
1. What is the break even point (rounded to the nearest dollar) for Lauterbach Corporation for the current year?
2. For the coming year, the management of Lauterbach Corporation anticipates a 10 percent increase in variable costs and a $45,000 increase in fixed expenses. What is the break even point in dollars for next year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CONTRIBUTION MARGIN, CVP, NET INCOME, MARGIN OF SAFETY
Chromatics, Inc., produces novelty nail polishes. Each bottle sells for $3.60. Variable unit costs are as follows:
|
Acrylic base
|
$0.75
|
|
Pigments
|
0.38
|
|
Other ingredients
|
0.35
|
|
Bottle, packing material
|
1.15
|
|
Selling commission
|
0.25
|
Fixed overhead costs are $12,000 per year. Fixed selling and administrative costs are $6,720 per year. Chromatics sold 35,000 bottles last year.
Required:
1. What is the contribution margin per unit for a bottle of nail polish? What is the contribution margin ratio?
2. How many bottles must be sold to break even? What is the break even sales revenue?
3. What was Chromatics’s operating income last year?
4. What was the margin of safety?
5. Suppose that Chromatics, Inc., raises the price to $4.00 per bottle, but anticipated sales will drop to 30,400 bottles. What will the new break even point in units be? Should Chromatics raise the price? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OPERATING LEVERAGE
Income statements for two different companies in the same industry are as follows:
|
|
Trimax, Inc.
|
Quintex, Inc.
|
|
Sales
|
$500,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Less: Variable costs
|
250,000
|
100,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$250,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Less: Fixed costs
|
200,000
|
350,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 50,000
|
$ 50,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the degree of operating leverage for each company.
2. Compute the break even point for each company. Explain why the break even point for Quintex, Inc., is higher.
3. Suppose that both companies experience a 50 percent increase in revenues. Compute the percentage change in profits for each company. Explain why the percentage increase in Quintex’s profits is so much greater than that of Trimax.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP ANALYSIS WITH MULTIPLE PRODUCTS
Reingold Company produces wireless phones. One model is the miniphone—a basic model that is very small and slim. The miniphone fits into a shirt pocket. Another model, the netphone, has a larger display and is Internet ready. For the coming year, Reingold expects to sell 200,000 miniphones and 600,000 netphones. A segmented income statement for the two products is as follows:
|
|
Miniphone
|
Netphone
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$5,000,000
|
$36,000,000
|
$41,000,000
|
|
Less: Variable costs
|
2,400,000
|
30,000,000
|
32,400,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$2,600,000
|
$ 6,000,000
|
$ 8,600,000
|
|
Less: Direct fixed costs
|
1,200,000
|
960,000
|
2,160,000
|
|
Segment margin
|
$1,400,000
|
$ 5,040,000
|
$ 6,440,000
|
|
Less: Common fixed costs
|
|
|
1,280,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
|
$ 5,160,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the number of miniphones and netphones that must be sold to breakeven.
2. Using information only from the total column of the income statement, compute the sales revenue that must be generated for the company to break even.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
AFTER TAX TARGET INCOME, PROFIT ANALYSIS
Siberian Ski Company recently expanded its manufacturing capacity, which will allow it to produce up to 15,000 pairs of cross country skis of the mountaineering model or the touring model. The sales department assures management that it can sell between 9,000 and 13,000 pairs of either product this year. Because the models are very similar, Siberian Ski will produce only one of the two models.
The following information was compiled by the accounting department:
|
|
Per Unit (Pair) Data
|
|
|
Mountaineering
|
Touring
|
|
Selling price
|
$88.00
|
$80.00
|
|
Variable costs
|
52.80
|
52.80
|
Fixed costs will total $369,600 if the mountaineering model is produced but will be only $316,800 if the touring model is produced. Siberian Ski is subject to a 40 percent income tax rate.
Required:
1. If Siberian Ski Company desires an after tax net income of $24,000, how many pairs of touring model skis will the company have to sell?
2. Suppose that Siberian Ski Company decided to produce only one model of skis. What is the total sales revenue at which Siberian Ski Company would make the same profit or loss regardless of the ski model it decided to produce?
3. If the sales department could guarantee the annual sale of 12,000 pairs of either model, which model would the company produce, and why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BREAK EVEN IN UNITS
Don Masters and two of his colleagues are considering opening a law office in a large metropolitan area that would make inexpensive legal services available to those who could not otherwise afford these services. The intent is to provide easy access for their clients by having the office open 360 days per year, 16 hours each day from 7:00 A.M. to 11:00 P.M. The office would be staffed by a lawyer, paralegal, legal secretary, and clerk receptionist for each of the two 8 hour shifts.
In order to determine the feasibility of the project, Don hired a marketing consultant to assist with market projections. The results of this study show that if the firm spends $500,000 on advertising the first year, the number of new clients expected each day would have the following probability distribution.
|
Number of New
|
|
|
Clients per Day
|
Probability
|
|
20
|
0.10
|
|
30
|
0.30
|
|
55
|
0.40
|
|
85
|
0.20
|
Don and his associates believe these numbers are reasonable and are prepared to spend the $500,000 on advertising. Other pertinent information about the operation of the office is as follows.
The only charge to each new client would be $30 for the initial consultation. All cases that warranted further legal work would be accepted on a contingency basis with the firm earning 30 percent of any favorable settlements or judgments. Don estimates that 20 percent of new client consultations will result in favorable settlements or judgments averaging $2,000 each. Repeat clients are not expected during the first year of operations.
The hourly wages of the staff are projected to be $25 for the lawyer, $20 for the paralegal, $15 for the legal secretary, and $10 for the clerk receptionist. Fringe benefit expenses will be 40 percent of the wages paid. A total of 400 hours of overtime is expected for the year; this will be divided equally between the legal secretary and the clerk receptionist positions. Overtime will be paid at one and one half times the regular wage, and the fringe benefit expense will apply to the full wages.
Don has located 6,000 square feet of suitable office space, which rents for $28 per square foot annually. Associated expenses will be $22,000 for property insurance and $32,000 for utilities.
It will be necessary for the group to purchase malpractice insurance, which is expected to cost $180,000 annually.
The initial investment in office equipment will be $60,000; this equipment has an estimated useful life of four years.
The cost of office supplies has been estimated to be $4 per expected new client consultation.
Required:
1. Determine how many new clients must visit the law office being considered by Don Masters and his colleagues in order for the venture to break even during its first year of operations.
2. Using the information provided by the marketing consultant, determine if it is feasible for the law office to achieve break even operations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
USING A COMPUTER SPREADSHEET TO SOLVE MULTIPLEPRODUCT BREAK EVEN, VARYING SALES MIX
The following projected income statement for More Power Company is repeated for your convenience. Recall that the projection is based on sales of 75,000 regular sanders and 30,000 mini sanders.
|
|
Regular
|
|
|
|
|
Sander
|
Mini Sander
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$3,000,000
|
$1,800,000
|
$4,800,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
1,800,000
|
900,000
|
2,700,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$1,200,000
|
$ 900,000
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Less: Direct fixed expenses Product margin
|
250,000
|
450,000
|
700,000
|
|
$ 950,000
|
$ 450,000
|
$1,400,000
|
|
Less: Common fixed expenses
|
|
|
600,000
|
|
Operating income
|
|
|
$ 800,000
|
Required:
1. Set up the given income statement on a spreadsheet (e.g., Excel™). Then, substitute the following sales mixes, and calculate operating income. Be sure to print the results for each sales mix (a through d).
|
|
Regular Sander
|
Mini Sander
|
|
a.
|
75,000
|
37,500
|
|
b.
|
60,000
|
60,000
|
|
c.
|
30,000
|
90,000
|
|
d.
|
30,000
|
60,000
|
2. Calculate the break even units for each product for each of the preceding sales mixes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CONTRIBUTION MARGIN, UNIT AMOUNTS
Consider the following information on four independent companies.
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
|
Sales
|
$10,000
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$9,000
|
|
Less: Variable costs
|
8,000
|
11,700
|
9,750
|
?
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 2,000
|
$ 3,900
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Less: Fixed costs
|
?
|
5,000
|
?
|
750
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 1,000
|
$ ?
|
$ 400
|
$2,850
|
|
Units sold
|
?
|
1,300
|
125
|
90
|
|
Price/Unit
|
$5
|
$?
|
$130
|
$?
|
|
Variable cost/Unit
|
$?
|
$9
|
$?
|
$?
|
|
Contribution margin/Unit
|
$?
|
$3
|
$?
|
$?
|
|
Contribution margin ratio
|
?
|
?
|
40%
|
?
|
|
Break even in units
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
Required:
Calculate the correct amount for each question mark.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CHANGES IN BREAK EVEN POINTS WITH CHANGES IN UNIT PRICES
Belmont produces and sells plastic storage containers. Last year, Belmont sold 125,000 units. The income statement for Belmont, Inc., for last year is as follows:
|
Sales
|
$625,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
343,750
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$281,250
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
180,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$101,250
|
Required:
1. Compute the break even point in units and in revenues. Compute the margin of safety for last year.
2. Suppose that the selling price increases by 10 percent. Will the break even point increase or decrease? Recompute it.
3. Suppose that the variable cost per unit increases by $0.35. Will the break even point increase or decrease? Recompute it.
4. Can you predict whether the break even point increases or decreases if both the selling price and the unit variable cost increase? Recompute the break even point incorporating both of the changes in Requirements 1 and 2.
5. Assume that total fixed costs increase by $50,000. (Assume no other changes from the original data.) Will the break even point increase or decrease? Recompute it.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BREAK EVEN, AFTER TAX TARGET INCOME, MARGIN OF SAFETY, OPERATING LEVERAGE
Coastal Carolina Company produces a single product. The projected income statement for the coming year, based on sales of 100,000 units, is as follows:
|
Sales
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Less: Variable costs
|
1,100,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 900,000
|
|
Less: Fixed costs
|
765,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 135,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the unit contribution margin and the units that must be sold to break even. Suppose that 30,000 units are sold above the break even point. What is the profit?
2. Compute the contribution margin ratio and the break even point in dollars. Suppose that revenues are $200,000 greater than expected. What would the total profit be?
3. Compute the margin of safety.
4. Compute the operating leverage. Compute the new profit level if sales are 20 percent higher than expected.
5. How many units must be sold to earn a profit equal to 10 percent of sales?
6. Assume the income tax rate is 40 percent. How many units must be sold to earn an after tax profit of $180,000?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BASIC CVP CONCEPTS
Devonly Company produces a variety of products. One division makes gas grills for outdoor cooking. The division’s projected income statement for the coming year is as follows:
|
Sales (120,000 units)
|
$7,500,000
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
3,450,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$4,050,000
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
3,375,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 675,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the contribution margin per unit, and calculate the break even point in units. Repeat, using the contribution margin ratio.
2. The divisional manager has decided to increase the advertising budget by $100,000 and cut the average selling price to $58. These actions will increase sales revenues by $1 million. Will the division be made better off?
3. Suppose sales revenues exceed the estimated amount on the income statement by $540,000. Without preparing a new income statement, determine by how much profits are underestimated.
4. How many units must be sold to earn an after tax profit of $1.254 million? Assume a tax rate of 34 percent.
5. Compute the margin of safety in dollars based on the given income statement.
6. Compute the operating leverage based on the given income statement. If sales revenues are 20 percent greater than expected, what is the percentage increase in profits?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP ANALYSIS: SALES REVENUE APPROACH, PRICING, AFTER TAX TARGET INCOME
Kline Consulting is a service organization that specializes in the design, installation, and servicing of mechanical, hydraulic, and pneumatic systems. For example, some manufacturing firms, with machinery that cannot be turned off for servicing, need some type of system to lubricate the machinery during use. To deal with this type of problem for a client, Kline designed a central lubricating system that pumps lubricants intermittently to bearings and other moving parts.
The operating results for the firm for the previous year are as follows:
|
Sales
|
$802,429
|
|
Less: Variable expenses
|
430,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$372,429
|
|
Less: Fixed expenses
|
154,750
|
|
Operating income
|
$217,679
|
In the coming year, Kline expects variable costs to increase by 5 percent and fixed costs by 4 percent.
Required:
1. What is the contribution margin ratio for the previous year?
2. Compute Kline’s break even point for the previous year in dollars.
3. Suppose that Kline would like to see a 6 percent increase in operating income in the coming year. What percent (on average) must Kline raise its bids to cover the expected cost increases and obtain the desired operating income? Assume that Kline expects the same mix and volume of services in both years.
4. In the coming year, how much revenue must be earned for Kline to earn an after tax profit of $175,000? Assume a tax rate of 34 percent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BREAK EVEN IN UNITS AND SALES DOLLARS, MARGIN OF SAFETY
Drake Company produces a single product. Last year’s income statement is as follows:
|
Sales (20,000 units)
|
$1,218,000
|
|
Less: Variable costs
|
812,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 406,000
|
|
Less: Fixed costs
|
300,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 106,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the break even point in units and sales dollars.
2. What was the margin of safety for Drake Company last year?
3. Suppose that Drake Company is considering an investment in new technology that will increase fixed costs by $250,000 per year, but will lower variable costs to 45 percent of sales. Units sold will remain unchanged. Prepare a budgeted income statement assuming Drake makes this investment. What is the new breakeven point in units, assuming the investment is made?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CVP ANALYSIS, IMPACT OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
Salem Electronics currently produces two products: a programmable calculator and a tape recorder. A recent marketing study indicated that consumers would react favorably to a radio with the Salem brand name. Owner Kenneth Booth was interested in the possibility. Before any commitment was made, however, Kenneth wanted to know what the incremental fixed costs would be and how many radios must be sold to cover these costs.
In response, Betty Johnson, the marketing manager, gathered data for the current products to help in projecting overhead costs for the new product. The overhead costs follow. (The high and low production volumes as measured by direct labor hours were used to assess cost behavior.)
|
|
Fixed
|
Variable
|
|
Materials handling
|
$ —
|
$18,000
|
|
Power
|
—
|
22,000
|
|
Engineering
|
100,000
|
—
|
|
Machine costs
|
30,000
|
80,000
|
|
Inspection
|
40,000
|
—
|
|
Setups
|
60,000
|
—
|
The following activity data were also gathered:
|
|
Calculators
|
Recorders
|
|
Units produced
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
|
Material moves
|
120
|
120
|
|
Kilowatt hours
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Engineering hours
|
4,000
|
1,000
|
|
Hours of inspection
|
700
|
1,400
|
|
Number of setups
|
20
|
40
|
Betty was told that a plantwide overhead rate was used to assign overhead costs based on direct labor hours. She was also informed by engineering that if 20,000 radios were produced and sold (her projection based on her marketing study), they would have the same activity data as the recorders (use the same direct labor hours, machine hours, setups, and so on).
Engineering also provided the following additional estimates for the proposed product line:
|
Prime costs per unit
|
$ 18
|
|
Depreciation on new equipment
|
18,000
|
Upon receiving these estimates, Betty did some quick calculations and became quite excited. With a selling price of $26 and just $18,000 of additional fixed costs, only 4,500 units had to be sold to break even. Since Betty was confident that 20,000 units could be sold, she was prepared to strongly recommend the new product line.
Required:
1. Reproduce Betty’s break even calculation using conventional cost assignments. How much additional profit would be expected under this scenario, assuming that 20,000 radios are sold?
2. Use an activity based costing approach, and calculate the break even point and the incremental profit that would be earned on sales of 20,000 units.
3. Explain why the CVP analysis done in Requirement 2 is more accurate than the analysis done in Requirement 1. What recommendation would you make?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC AND CVP ANALYSIS: MULTIPLE PRODUCTS
Good Scent, Inc., produces two colognes: Rose and Violet. Of the two, Rose is more popular. Data concerning the two products follow:
|
|
Rose
|
Violet
|
|
Expected sales (in cases)
|
50,000
|
10,000
|
|
Selling price per case
|
$100
|
$80
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
36,000
|
6,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
10,000
|
3,000
|
|
Receiving orders
|
50
|
25
|
|
Packing orders
|
100
|
50
|
|
Material cost per case
|
$50
|
$43
|
|
Direct labor cost per case
|
$10
|
$7
|
The company uses a conventional costing system and assigns overhead costs to products using direct labor hours. Annual overhead costs follow. They are classified as fixed or variable with respect to direct labor hours.
|
|
Fixed
|
Variable
|
|
Direct labor benefits
|
$ —
|
$200,000
|
|
Machine costs
|
200,000
|
262,000
|
|
Receiving department
|
225,000
|
—
|
|
Packing department Total costs
|
125,000
|
—
|
|
$550,000
|
$462,000
|
Required:
1. Using the conventional approach, compute the number of cases of Rose and the number of cases of Violet that must be sold for the company to break even.
2. Using an activity based approach, compute the number of cases of each product that must be sold for the company to break even.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PART II: MULTIPLE PRODUCT CVP ANALYSIS, ABC
Sorrentino Company, which has been in business for one year, manufactures specialty Italian pastas. The pasta products start in the mixing department, where durum flour, eggs, and water are mixed to form dough. The dough is kneaded, rolled flat, and cut into fettucine or lasagna noodles, then dried and packaged.
Paul Gilchrist, controller for Sorrentino Company, is concerned because the company has yet to make a profit. Sales were slow in the first quarter but really picked up by the end of the year. Over the course of the year, 726,800 boxes were sold. Paul is interested in determining how many boxes must be sold to break even. He has begun to determine relevant fixed and variable costs and has accumulated the following per unit data:
|
Price
|
$0.90
|
|
Direct materials
|
0.35
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.25
|
He has had more difficulty separating overhead into fixed and variable components. In examining overhead related activities, Paul has noticed that machine hours appear to be closely correlated with units in that 100 boxes of pasta can be produced per machine hour. Setups are an important batch level activity. Paul has accumulated the following information on overhead costs, number of setups, and machine hours for the past 12 months:
|
|
Overhead
|
Number of Setups
|
Machine Hours
|
|
January
|
$5,700
|
18
|
595
|
|
February
|
4,500
|
6
|
560
|
|
March
|
4,890
|
12
|
575
|
|
April
|
5,500
|
15
|
615
|
|
May
|
6,200
|
20
|
650
|
|
June
|
5,000
|
10
|
610
|
|
July
|
5,532
|
16
|
630
|
|
August
|
5,409
|
12
|
625
|
|
September
|
5,300
|
11
|
650
|
|
October
|
5,000
|
12
|
550
|
|
November
|
5,350
|
14
|
593
|
|
December
|
5,470
|
14
|
615
|
Selling and administrative expenses, all fixed, amounted to $180,000 last year.
Sorrentino Company has decided to expand into the production of sauces to top its pastas. Sauces are also started in the mixing department, using the same equipment. The sauces are mixed, cooked, and packaged into plastic containers. One jar of sauce is priced at $2 and requires $0.75 of direct materials and $0.50 of direct labor. Fifty jars of sauce can be produced per machine hour. The setup is identical to the setup for pasta and should cost the same amount. The production manager believes that with careful scheduling, he can keep the total number of setups (for both pasta and sauce) to the same number as used last year. The marketing director believes Sorrentino Company can sell two boxes of pasta for every one jar of sauce.
Required:
Maintain the same group that was formed in Part I. One to two members of your group should work Requirement 1, and the remaining members will work Requirement 2.
The group will come together to discuss Requirement 3.
1. Calculate the break even number of boxes of pasta and jars of sauce.
2. Suppose that the production manager is wrong and that the number of setups doubles. Calculate the new break even number of boxes of pasta and jars of sauce.
3. Comment on the effect of uncertainty in the sales mix and in cost estimates and on risk for Sorrentino Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY RESOURCE USAGE MODEL, STRATEGIC ELEMENTS, AND RELEVANT COSTING
Perkins Company has idle capacity. Recently, Perkins received an offer to sell 2,000 units of one of its products to a new customer in a geographic region not normally serviced.
The offering price is $10 per unit. The product normally sells for $14. The activity based accounting system provides the following information:
|
|
|
|
|
Activity Rate
|
|
|
|
Unused
|
Quantity
|
|
|
|
|
Cost Driver
|
Capacity
|
Demanded
|
Fixed
|
Variable
|
|
Direct materials
|
Units
|
0
|
2,000
|
—
|
$3.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
Direct labor hours
|
0
|
400
|
—
|
7.00
|
|
Setups
|
Setup hours
|
0
|
25
|
$50.00
|
8.00
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
4.00
|
1.00
|
Although the fixed activity rate for setups is $50 per hour, any expansion of this resource must be acquired in blocks. The unit of purchase for setups is 100 hours of setup servicing. Thus, any expansion of setup activity must be done 100 hours at a time. The price per hour is the fixed activity rate.
Required:
1. Compute the change in income for Perkins Company if the order is accepted. Comment on whether or not the order should be accepted. (In particular, discuss the strategic issues.)
2. Suppose that the setup activity had 50 hours of unused capacity. How does this affect the analysis?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
IDENTIFYING PROBLEMS AND ALTERNATIVES, RELEVANT COSTS
Norton Products, Inc., manufactures potentiometers. (A potentiometer is a device that adjusts electrical resistance.) Currently, all parts necessary for the assembly of products are produced internally. Norton has a single plant located in Wichita, Kansas. The facilities for the manufacture of potentiometers are leased, with five years remaining on the lease. All equipment is owned by the company. Because of increases in demand, production has been expanded significantly over the five years of operation, straining the capacity of the leased facilities. Currently, the company needs more warehousing and office space, as well as more space for the production of plastic moldings. The current output of these moldings, used to make potentiometers, needs to be expanded to accommodate the increased demand for the main product.
Leo Tidwell, owner and president of Norton Products, has asked his vice president of marketing, John Tidwell, and his vice president of finance, Linda Thayn, to meet and discuss the problem of limited capacity. This is the second meeting the three have had concerning the problem. In the first meeting, Leo rejected Linda’s proposal to build the company’s own plant. He believed it was too risky to invest the capital necessary to build a plant at this stage of the company’s development. The combination of leasing a larger facility and subleasing the current plant was also considered but was rejected; subleasing would be difficult, if not impossible. At the end of the first meeting, Leo asked John to explore the possibility of leasing another facility comparable to the current one. He also assigned Linda the task of identifying other possible solutions. As the second meeting began, Leo asked John to give a report on the leasing alternative.
JOHN: After some careful research, I’m afraid that the idea of leasing an additional plant is not a very good one. Although we have some space problems, our current level of production doesn’t justify another plant. In fact, I expect it will be at least five years before we need to be concerned about expanding into another facility like the one we have now. My market studies reveal a modest growth in sales over the next five years. All this growth can be absorbed by our current production capacity. The large increases in demand that we experienced the past five years are not likely to be repeated. Leasing another plant would be an overkill solution.
LEO: Even modest growth will aggravate our current space problems. As you both know, we are already operating three production shifts. But, John, you are right—except for plastic moldings, we could expand production, particularly during the graveyard shift. Linda, I hope that you have been successful in identifying some other possible solutions. Some fairly quick action is needed.
LINDA: Fortunately, I believe that I have two feasible alternatives. One is to rent an additional building to be used for warehousing. By transferring our warehousing needs to the new building, we will free up internal space for offices and for expanding the production of plastic moldings. I have located a building within two miles of our plant that we could use. It has the capacity to handle our current needs and the modest growth that John mentioned. The second alternative may be even more attractive. We currently produce all the parts that we use to manufacture potentiometers, including shafts and bushings. In the last several months, the market has been flooded with these two parts. Prices have tumbled as a result. It might be better to buy shafts and bushings instead of making them. If we stop internal production of shafts and bushings, this would free up the space we need. Well, Leo, what do you think? Are these alternatives feasible? Or should I continue my search for additional solutions?
LEO: I like both alternatives. In fact, they are exactly the types of solutions we need to consider. All we have to do now is choose the one best for our company.
Required:
1. Define the problem facing Norton Products.
2. Identify all the alternatives that were considered by Norton Products. Which ones were classified as not feasible? Why? Now identify the feasible alternatives.
3. For the feasible alternatives, what are some potential costs and benefits associated with each alternative? Of the costs that you have identified, which do you think are relevant to the decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT, BASICS
Fowler Company produces handcrafted leather purses. Virtually all of the manufacturing cost consists of materials and labor. Over the past several years, profits have been declining because the cost of the two major inputs has been increasing. Wilma Fowler, the president of the company, has indicated that the price of the purses cannot be increased; thus, the only way to improve or at least stabilize profits is to increase overall productivity. At the beginning of 2007, Wilma implemented a new cutting and assembly process that promised less materials waste and a faster production time. At the end of 2007, Wilma wants to know how much profits have changed from the prior year because of the new process. In order to provide this information to Wilma, the controller of the company gathered the following data:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$16
|
$16
|
|
Purses produced and sold
|
18,000
|
24,000
|
|
Materials used
|
36,000
|
40,000
|
|
Labor used
|
9,000
|
10,000
|
|
Unit price of materials
|
$4
|
$4.50
|
|
Unit price of labor
|
$9
|
$10
|
Required:
1. Compute the productivity profile for each year. Comment on the effectiveness of the new production process.
2. Compute the increase in profits attributable to increased productivity.
3. Calculate the price recovery component, and comment on its meaning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT, TECHNICAL AND PRICE EFFICIENCY
In 2006, Fleming Chemicals used the following input combination to produce 55,000 gallons of an industrial solvent:
|
Materials
|
33,000 lbs.
|
|
Labor
|
66,000 hrs.
|
In 2007, Fleming again planned to produce 55,000 gallons of solvent and was considering two different changes in process, both of which would be able to produce the desired output. The following input combinations are associated with each process change:
|
|
Change I
|
Change II
|
|
Materials
|
38,500 lbs.
|
27,500 lbs.
|
|
Labor
|
44,000 hrs.
|
55,000 hrs.
|
The following combination is optimal for an output of 55,000 units. However, this optimal input combination is unknown to Fleming.
|
Materials
|
22,000 lbs.
|
|
Labor
|
44,000 hrs.
|
The cost of materials is $60 per pound, and the cost of labor is $15 per hour. These input prices hold for 2006 and 2007.
Required:
1. Compute the productivity profiles for each of the following:
a. The actual inputs used in 2006
b. The inputs for each proposed 2007 process change
c. The optimal input combination Will productivity increase in 2007, regardless of which change is used? Which process change would you recommend based on the prospective productivity profiles?
2. Compute the cost of 2006’s productive inefficiency relative to the optimal input combination. Repeat for 2007 proposed input changes. Will productivity improve from 2006 to 2007 for each process change? If so, by how much? Explain. Include in your explanation a discussion of changes in technical and allocative efficiency.
3. Since the optimal input combination is not known by Fleming, suggest a way to measure productivity improvement. Use this method to measure the productivity improvement achieved from 2006 to 2007. How does this measure compare with the productivity improvement measure computed using the optimal input combination?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT, PRICE RECOVERY
The Small Motors Division of Polson Company has recently engaged in a vigorous effort to reduce manufacturing costs by increasing productivity (through process innovation). Over the past several years, price competition has become very intense, and recent events called for another significant price decrease. Without the price decrease, the marketing manager estimates that the division’s market share would drop by 30 percent. The marketing manager estimates that a price decrease of $5.00 per unit is needed in 2007 to maintain market share. (Since the market is expanding, maintaining the market share means an increase in units sold.) The small motors sold for $70 each in 2006. However, the divisional manager indicated that the revenues lost by the price decrease must be offset by increased cost efficiency. Any further deterioration in profits could threaten the division’s continued existence. Thus, in 2007, processes were reengineered in an effort to improve productivity. At the end of 2007, the divisional manager wanted an assessment of the effects of the process changes. To assess the changes in productive efficiency, the following data were gathered:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Output
|
50,000
|
60,000
|
|
Input quantities:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
50,000
|
40,000
|
|
Labor
|
200,000
|
100,000
|
|
Capital
|
$2,000,000
|
$5,000,000
|
|
Energy
|
50,000
|
150,000
|
|
Input prices:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
$8
|
$10
|
|
Labor
|
$10
|
$12
|
|
Capital
|
15%
|
10%
|
|
Energy
|
$2
|
$2
|
Required:
1. Calculate the productivity profile for each year. Can you say that productivity has improved? Explain.
2. Calculate the total profit change from 2006 to 2007. How much of this change is attributable to productivity? To price recovery?
3. Calculate the cost per unit for 2006 and 2007. Was the division able to decrease its per unit cost by at least $5.00? Comment on the relationship of competitive advantage and productive efficiency.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT, PRICE RECOVERY
The Small Motors Division of Polson Company has recently engaged in a vigorous effort to reduce manufacturing costs by increasing productivity (through process innovation). Over the past several years, price competition has become very intense, and recent events called for another significant price decrease. Without the price decrease, the marketing manager estimates that the division’s market share would drop by 30 percent. The marketing manager estimates that a price decrease of $5.00 per unit is needed in 2007 to maintain market share. (Since the market is expanding, maintaining the market share means an increase in units sold.) The small motors sold for $70 each in 2006. However, the divisional manager indicated that the revenues lost by the price decrease must be offset by increased cost efficiency. Any further deterioration in profits could threaten the division’s continued existence. Thus, in 2007, processes were reengineered in an effort to improve productivity. At the end of 2007, the divisional manager wanted an assessment of the effects of the process changes. To assess the changes in productive efficiency, the following data were gathered:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Output
|
50,000
|
60,000
|
|
Input quantities:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
50,000
|
40,000
|
|
Labor
|
200,000
|
100,000
|
|
Capital
|
$2,000,000
|
$5,000,000
|
|
Energy
|
50,000
|
150,000
|
|
Input prices:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
$8
|
$10
|
|
Labor
|
$10
|
$12
|
|
Capital
|
15%
|
10%
|
|
Energy
|
$2
|
$2
|
Required:
1. Calculate the productivity profile for each year. Can you say that productivity has improved? Explain.
2. Calculate the total profit change from 2006 to 2007. How much of this change is attributable to productivity? To price recovery?
3. Calculate the cost per unit for 2006 and 2007. Was the division able to decrease its per unit cost by at least $5.00? Comment on the relationship of competitive advantage and productive efficiency.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COLLABORATIVE LEARNING EXERCISE
Kathy Shorts, president of Carbon Industrial Cleaners, had just concluded a meeting with two of her plant managers. She had told each of them that one of their highvolume industrial cleaners was going to have a 50 percent increase in demand—next year—over this year’s output (which is expected to be 50,000 barrels). A major foreign source of the material had been shut down because of a trade embargo. It would be years before the source would be available again. The result was twofold. First, the price
of the material input was expected to quadruple. Second, many of the less efficient competitors would leave the business, creating more demand and higher output prices—in fact, output prices would double.
In discussing the situation with her plant managers, she reminded them that the automated process now allowed them to increase the productivity of the material. By using more machine hours, evaporation could be decreased significantly. (This was a recent development and would be operational by the beginning of the new fiscal year.) There were, however, only two other feasible settings beyond the current setting. The current usage of inputs for the 50,000 barrel output (current setting) and the input usage for the other two settings follow. The input usage for the remaining two settings is for an output of 75,000 barrels. Inputs are measured in barrels for the material and in machine hours for the equipment.
|
|
Current
|
Setting A
|
Setting B
|
|
Input quantities:
|
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
125,000
|
75,000
|
150,000
|
|
Equipment
|
30,000
|
75,000
|
37,500
|
The current prices for this year’s inputs are $3 per barrel for materials and $12 per machine hour for the equipment. The materials price will change for next year as explained, but the $12 rate for machine hours will remain the same. The chemical is currently selling for $20 per barrel. Based on separate productivity analyses, one plant manager chose Setting A and the other chose Setting B.
The manager who chose Setting B justified his decision by noting that it was the only setting that clearly signaled an increase in both partial measures of productivity. The other manager agreed that Setting B was an improvement but that Setting A was even better.
Required:
Work the following requirements before coming to class. Next, form groups of three to four, and compare and contrast the answers within the group. Finally, form modified groups by exchanging one member of your group with a member of another group. The modified groups will compare and contrast each group’s answers to the requirements.
1. Prepare productivity profiles for the current year and for the two settings. Which of the two settings signals an increase in productivity for both inputs?
2. Calculate the profits that will be realized under each setting for the coming year. Which setting provides the greatest profit increase?
3. Calculate the profit change for each setting attributable to productivity changes. Which setting offers the greatest productivity improvement? By how much? Explain why this happened.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYBER RESEARCH CASE
Productivity concepts apply to service settings as well as manufacturing. For example, in the health care industry, increasing productivity is a possible means to control rising medical costs. It is also a means of increasing retention.
Required:
1. Go to, search for articles on productivity using “Productivity Accounting” as the search phrase (or you can try your own search phrase relating to productivity). Find three articles that relate to productivity of services, where at least one is in the health care industry. Read these articles, and provide a brief summary of their content. Now, answer the following questions:
a. Did any of the articles mention partial productivity measures?
b. If so, were the measures operational or financial?
c. Was there any mention of total productivity measurement? If not, speculate on the reasons why.
d. What was the purpose of productivity measurement?
2. Now, do a search at the FindArticles site using “Productivity Plus Award.” Answer the following questions:
a. What is the purpose of the award?
b. Describe two companies that have received the award, and provide a brief summary of why they received it.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENVIRONMENTAL COSTS
At the beginning of 2007, Greener Company initiated a program to improve its environmental performance. Efforts were made to reduce the production and emission of contaminating gaseous, solid, and liquid residues. By the end of the year, in an executive meeting, the environmental manager indicated that the company had made significant improvement in its environmental performance, reducing the emission of contaminating residues of all types. The president of the company was pleased with the reported success but wanted an assessment of the financial consequences of the environmental improvements. To satisfy this request, the following financial data were collected for 2006 and 2007 (all changes in cost are a product of environmental improvements):
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Sales
|
$60,000,000
|
$60,000,000
|
|
Evaluating and selecting suppliers
|
0
|
1,800,000
|
|
Treating and disposing of toxic materials
|
3,600,000
|
2,400,000
|
|
Inspecting processes (environmental objective)
|
600,000
|
900,000
|
|
Land restoration (annual fund contribution)
|
4,800,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Maintaining pollution equipment
|
1,200,000
|
900,000
|
|
Testing for contaminants
|
450,000
|
300,000
|
Required:
1. Classify the costs as prevention, detection, internal failure, or external failure.
2. Prepare an environmental cost report for the most recent year, where costs are expressed as a percentage of sales (instead of operating costs).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ASSIGNING ENVIRONMENTAL COSTS, LIFE CYCLE COST ASSESSMENT, ENVIRONMENTAL COST CONTROL
Searle Company produces two types of fertilizers: Rapidfeed and Timefeed. Searle has recently received significant criticism from environmental groups, local residents, and the federal government concerning its environmental performance. John Taylor, president of Searle, wants to know how the company’s environmental activities affect the cost of each product. He believes that the main source of the environmental problems lies with Rapidfeed, but he would like some evidence to support (or refute) this belief. The controller has assembled the following data to help answer this question:
|
|
Rapidfeed
|
Timefeed
|
|
Pounds of fertilizer produced
|
3,000,000
|
6,000,000
|
|
Engineering hours (process design)
|
4,500
|
13,500
|
|
Pounds of solid residues treated
|
90,000
|
30,000
|
|
Inspection hours (environmental)
|
30,000
|
15,000
|
|
Cleanup hours (local lake)
|
24,000
|
6,000
|
Additionally, the following environmental activity costs were reported:
|
Designing process
|
$ 450,000
|
|
Treating residues
|
1,800,000
|
|
Inspecting processes
|
360,000
|
|
Cleaning up lake
|
600,000
|
Required:
1. Calculate the environmental cost per pound of fertilizer for each product.
2. Based on the calculations in Requirement 1, which product appears to be the most environmentally harmful?
3. Would life cycle cost assessment provide stronger evidence for the environmental suitability of each product? Explain.
4. Explain how a strategic based responsibility accounting system can be used to help improve Searle’s performance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ECOEFFICIENCY AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
Achieving sustainable development will likely require the cooperation of communities, governments, and businesses. The World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WBCSD) claims that ecoefficiency is “the business contribution to sustainable development.”
Required:
1. What is sustainable development?
2. Explain why the WBCSD’s claim about ecoefficiency may be true.
3. WBSCD has recently noted: “the good news is that ecoefficiency is working in the companies that try it. The troubling news is that it is not being tried on a large enough scale, even though it makes good business sense.” Why do you think the ecoefficiency paradigm is not as widely accepted as it perhaps ought to be? What would you suggest to increase the number of companies involved in ecoefficient projects?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ECOEFFICIENCY: OBJECTIVES AND OPPORTUNITIES
Consider the following ecoefficient actions:
a. Improve the performance of a steam system used to generate electricity, reducing the use of energy and water.
b. Install a system that converts a waste product into a salable product.
c. Replaced solvent based additives in a detergent blend with plant extracted essential oils (reducing health and safety concerns).
d. Encoding plastic components to enable easier identification for disassembly and recycling.
e. Installation of a closed loop water treatment plant to prevent the discharge of wastewater into a local river.
f. Redesigning a process reduces toxic releases and decreases energy consumption.
g. Converting sludge from a wastewater treatment facility into commercial compost.
h. Substitution of lower cost, water based solvents for flammable, toxic solvents.
Required:
Identify the objectives and opportunities associated with each of the actions listed above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENVIRONMENTAL COST REPORT
At the end of 2007, Hender Chemicals began to implement an environmental quality management program. As a first step, it identified the following costs in its accounting records as environmentally related for the year just ended:
|
|
2007
|
|
Settling personal injury claims
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Treating and disposing of toxic waste
|
4,800,000
|
|
Cleanup of chemically contaminated soil
|
1,800,000
|
|
Inspecting products and processes
|
600,000
|
|
Operating pollution control equipment
|
840,000
|
|
Licensing facilities for producing contaminants
|
360,000
|
|
Evaluating and selecting suppliers
|
120,000
|
|
Developing performance measures
|
60,000
|
|
Recycling products
|
75,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare an environmental cost report by category. Assume that total operating costs are $60,000,000. 2. Use a pie chart to illustrate the relative distribution percentages for each environmental cost category. Comment on what this distribution communicates to manager.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
REPORTING SOCIAL COSTS
At the end of 2007, Hender Chemicals began to implement an environmental quality management program. As a first step, it identified the following costs in its accounting records as environmentally related for the year just ended:
|
|
2007
|
|
Settling personal injury claims
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Treating and disposing of toxic waste
|
4,800,000
|
|
Cleanup of chemically contaminated soil
|
1,800,000
|
|
Inspecting products and processes
|
600,000
|
|
Operating pollution control equipment
|
840,000
|
|
Licensing facilities for producing contaminants
|
360,000
|
|
Evaluating and selecting suppliers
|
120,000
|
|
Developing performance measures
|
60,000
|
|
Recycling products
|
75,000
|
Suppose that the newly hired environmental manager examines the report and makes the following comment: “This report understates the total environmental costs. It fails to consider the costs we are imposing on the local community. For example, we have polluted the river and lake so much that swimming and fishing are no longer possible. I have heard rumblings from the local citizens, and I’ll bet that we will be facing a big cleanup bill in a few years.”
Subsequent to the comment, environmental engineering estimated that cleanup costs for the river and lake will cost $3,000,000, assuming the cleanup efforts are required within five years. To pay for the cleanup, annual contributions of $525,000 will be invested with the expectation that the fund will grow to $3,000,000 by the end of the fifth year. Assume also that the loss of recreational opportunities is costing the local community $1,200,000 per year.
Required:
1. Current financial reporting standards require that contingent liabilities be disclosed if certain conditions are met. Thus, it is possible that Hender may need to disclose the $3,000,000 cleanup liability. Yet, the opportunity cost for the recreational opportunities need not be disclosed to outside parties. Should Hender voluntarily disclose this cost? Is it likely that it would?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENVIRONMENTAL COST ASSIGNMENT
Coyle Pharmaceuticals produces two organic chemicals (Org AB, and Org XY) used in the production of two of its most wide selling anti cancer drugs. The controller and environmental manager have identified the following environmental activities and costs associated with the two products:
|
Pounds produced
|
7,500,000
|
|
18,750,000
|
|
Packaging materials (pounds)
|
2,250,000
|
|
1,125,000
|
|
Energy usage (kilowatt hours)
|
750,000
|
|
375,000
|
|
Toxic releases (pounds into air)
|
1,875,000
|
|
375,000
|
|
Pollution control (machine hours)
|
300,000
|
|
75,000
|
|
Costs of activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Using packaging materials
|
|
$3,375,000
|
|
|
Using energy
|
|
900,000
|
|
|
Releasing toxins (fines)
|
|
450,000
|
|
|
Operating pollution control equipment
|
|
1,050,000
|
|
Required:
1. Calculate the environmental cost per pound for each product. Which of the two products appears to cause the most degradation to the environment?
2. In which environmental category would you classify excessive use of materials and energy?
3. Suppose that the toxin releases cause health problems for those who live near the chemical plant. The costs, due to missed work and medical treatments, are estimated at $2,025,000 per year. How would assignment of these costs change the unit cost? Should they be assigned?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENVIRONMENTAL COSTING, ECOEFFICIENCY, AND COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE
Coyle Pharmaceuticals produces two organic chemicals (Org AB, and Org XY) used in the production of two of its most wide selling anti cancer drugs. The controller and environmental manager have identified the following environmental activities and costs associated with the two products:
|
Pounds produced
|
7,500,000
|
|
18,750,000
|
|
Packaging materials (pounds)
|
2,250,000
|
|
1,125,000
|
|
Energy usage (kilowatt hours)
|
750,000
|
|
375,000
|
|
Toxic releases (pounds into air)
|
1,875,000
|
|
375,000
|
|
Pollution control (machine hours)
|
300,000
|
|
75,000
|
|
Costs of activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Using packaging materials
|
|
$3,375,000
|
|
|
Using energy
|
|
900,000
|
|
|
Releasing toxins (fines)
|
|
450,000
|
|
|
Operating pollution control equipment
|
|
1,050,000
|
|
Suppose that Coyle’s manager decides to launch an environmental performance improvement program. First, efforts were made to reduce the amount of packaging. The demand for packaging materials was reduced by 10 percent.
Second, a way was found to reuse the packaging materials. Usage of packaging materials changed from one time to two times. Both changes together saved $1,856,250 in packaging costs. Third, the manufacturing processes were redesigned to produce a reduced environmental load. The new processes were able to reduce emissions by 50 percent and private emission costs by 75 percent. The new processes also reduced the demand for energy by one third. Energy costs were also reduced by the same amount. There was no change in the demand or cost of operating pollution control equipment.
The cost of implementing the changes was $753,750 (salaries of $450,000 for hiring six environmental engineers and $303,750 for treating the packaging materials so they can be reused). Engineering hours used for each process are 11,250 for the Org AB process and 3,750 for the Org XY process.
Required:
1. Calculate the new cost per pound for each product. Assume that the environmental reductions for each product are in the same proportions as the total reductions.
2. Calculate the net savings produced by the environmental changes for each product, in total, and on a per unit basis. Does this support the concept of ecoefficiency?
3. Classify the activities as prevention, detection, internal failure, or external failure.
4. Describe how the environmental improvements can contribute to improving the firm’s competitive position.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFE CYCLE COST ASSESSMENT
Jackman Cleanser Division produces surfactants, ingredients used in producing laundry detergents. (Surfactants are the components that help release soil from clothing.) It is possible to make different types of surfactants, depending on the nature of the material input. One possibility, for example, is to use petrochemical stock as the primary material input. Another possibility is the use of beef tallow as the primary material input.
The primary input plus other inputs and energy sources are used to produce the surfactants. An inventory analysis produces the following for the production of surfactants:
|
|
Petrochemical
|
Tallow
|
|
Materials (kg per 1,000 kg of surfactant)
|
900
|
850
|
|
Water usage (kg per 1,000 kg of surfactants used)
|
50
|
500
|
|
Energy usage (kilowatt hours per 1,000 kg of surfactants):
|
|
|
|
For production of materials
|
55
|
30
|
|
Transportation
|
10
|
20
|
|
Processing (production of surfactants)
|
60
|
60
|
|
Residues (emissions per 1,000 kg of surfactants):
|
|
|
|
Particulates (air contaminant)
|
2
|
12
|
|
Hydrocarbons (air contaminant)
|
40
|
30
|
|
Dissolved solids (liquid contaminant)
|
6
|
4
|
|
Land contamination (solid residue)
|
80
|
160
|
The greater water usage for tallow relates to the requirement that water must be used to produce feed for beef. The cost per kilogram of petrochemical stock is $0.40. The cost per kilogram of tallow is $0.60. Water costs $0.50 per kilogram, and energy is $1.20 per kilowatt hour. When air contaminants exceed five per 1,000 kilograms, pollution control equipment must be purchased and installed. The cost of acquiring and operating this equipment is $500 per five units of contaminants. Liquid contaminants are more trouble. If dumped into local streams over the life cycle, the costs are estimated to be $120 per unit of liquid contaminant. If a water treatment system is used, the cost is $60 per unit of contaminant. Finally, soil cleanup is estimated at $20 per unit of solid residue.
Required:
1. Assess the relative environmental impacts of the two approaches to producing surfactants using only operational environmental measures. Which of the two approaches would you recommend? Justify your choice.
2. Use the cost information and calculate an environmental impact cost per 1,000 kg of surfactants. Which of the two approaches would you now recommend? Does the life cycle cost approach have limitations? Explain.
3. Which parts of the life cycle described by the inventory analysis are controlled by the supplier? By the producer? What part of the inventory analysis is missing?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST CLASSIFICATION, ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING
At the beginning of 2004, Limon Company, an international telecommunications company, embarked on an environmental improvement program. The company set a goal to have all its facilities ISO 14001 registered by 2007. (There are 30 facilities worldwide.) It also adopted the Balanced Scorecard with an environmental perspective added as a fifth perspective. To communicate the environmental progress made, management decided to issue, on a voluntary basis, an annual environmental progress report. Internally, the accounting department issued monthly progress reports and developed a number of measures that could be reported even more frequently to assess progress. Limon also asked an international CPA firm to prepare an auditor’s report that would comment on the reasonableness and fairness of Limon’s approach to assessing and measuring environmental performance.
At the end of 2007, the controller had gathered data that would be used in preparing the environmental progress report. A sample of the data collected is as follows:
|
Year
|
Number of ISO 14001 Registrations
|
Energy Consumption (BTUs)
|
Greenhouse Gases
|
|
2004
|
3
|
3,000
|
40,000
|
|
2005
|
9
|
2,950
|
39,000
|
|
2006
|
15
|
2,900
|
38,000
|
|
2007
|
24
|
2,850
|
36,000
|
Required:
1. What is the justification for adding an environmental perspective to the Balanced Scorecard?
2. Limon Company decided to do the following: obtain ISO 14001 registration, prepare an annual environmental progress report, prepare internal environmental progress reports, and request an audit of the external report. How do these decisions fit within the Balanced Scorecard framework? To what environmental cost categories do these activities belong?
3. Using the data, prepare a bar graph for each of the three environmental variables provided (registrations, energy, and greenhouse gases). Comment on the progress made on these three dimensions. To which core objectives do each of the three measures relate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING, COST TRENDS
At the beginning of 2004, Limon Company, an international telecommunications company, embarked on an environmental improvement program. The company set a goal to have all its facilities ISO 14001 registered by 2007. (There are 30 facilities worldwide.) It also adopted the Balanced Scorecard with an environmental perspective added as a fifth perspective. To communicate the environmental progress made, management decided to issue, on a voluntary basis, an annual environmental progress report. Internally, the accounting department issued monthly progress reports and developed a number of measures that could be reported even more frequently to assess progress. Limon also asked an international CPA firm to prepare an auditor’s report that would comment on the reasonableness and fairness of Limon’s approach to assessing and measuring environmental performance.
At the end of 2007, the controller had gathered data that would be used in preparing the environmental progress report. A sample of the data collected is as follows:
|
Year
|
Number of ISO 14001 Registrations
|
Energy Consumption (BTUs)
|
Greenhouse Gases
|
|
2004
|
3
|
3,000
|
40,000
|
|
2005
|
9
|
2,950
|
39,000
|
|
2006
|
15
|
2,900
|
38,000
|
|
2007
|
24
|
2,850
|
36,000
|
As part of its environmental cost reporting system, Limon tracks its total environmental costs. Consider the following cost and sales data:
|
Year
|
Total Environmental Costs
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
2004
|
$30,000,000
|
$250,000,000
|
|
2005
|
25,000,000
|
250,000,000
|
|
2006
|
22,000,000
|
275,000,000
|
|
2007
|
19,250,000
|
275,000,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare a bar graph for environmental costs expressed as a percentage of sales. Assuming that environmental performance has improved, explain why environmental costs have decreased.
2. Normalize energy consumption by expressing it as a percentage of sales. Now, prepare a bar graph for energy. Comment on the progress made in reducing energy consumption. How does this compare with the conclusion that would be reached using a nonnormalized measure of progress? Which is the best approach? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST CLASSIFICATION, ECOEFFICIENCY, STRATEGIC ENVIRONMENTAL OBJECTIVES
The following items are listed in an environmental financial statement (issued as part of an environmental progress report):
Environmental benefits (savings, income, and cost avoidance):
- Ozone depleting substances cost reductions
- Hazardous waste disposal cost reductions
- Hazardous waste material cost reductions
- Nonhazardous waste disposal cost reductions
- Nonhazardous waste material cost reductions
- Recycling income
- Energy conservation cost savings
- Packaging cost reductions
- Environmental costs:
- Corporate level administrative costs
- Auditor fees
- Environmental engineering
- Facility professionals and programs
- Packaging professionals and programs for packaging reductions
- Pollution controls: Operations and maintenance
- Pollution controls: Depreciation
- Attorney fees for cleanup claims, notices of violations (NOVs)
- Settlements of government claims
- Waste disposal
- Environmental taxes for packaging
- Remediation/Cleanup: On site
- Remediation/Cleanup: Off site
Required:
1. Classify each item in the statement as prevention, detection, internal failure, or external failure. In classifying the items listed in the environmental benefits category, first classify the underlying cost item (e.g., the cost of hazardous waste disposal). Next, think of how you would classify the cost of the activities that led to the cost reduction. That is, how would you classify the macro activity: reducing hazardous waste cost disposal?
2. For each item in the environmental benefits category, indicate a possible measure or measures (i.e., pounds, tons, kilowatt hours, etc.) and the core strategic environmental objective that would be associated with the measure. Is it possible that a measure may be associated with more than one objective? Explain.
3. Assuming ecoefficiency, what relationship over time would you expect to observe between the environmental benefits category and the environmental cost category?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT
Thomas Manufacturing produces automobile components used in automobile assembly. One of its divisions manufactures automotive front end pieces. The division is currently considering two different designs: one using galvanized steel and the other using a polymer composite. Both products are considered equally durable. The main issue being considered is the environmental effects of the designs. To help in this assessment, an inventory analysis and associated cost information for the two designs are as follows:
|
|
Polymer
|
Galvanized Steel
|
|
Materials:
|
|
|
|
Virgin materials (pounds)
|
8
|
14
|
|
Reused production scrap (pounds)
|
1
|
6
|
|
Energy:
|
|
|
|
During production (kilowatts/pound)
|
15
|
10
|
|
During product use (pounds of petroleum
|
|
|
|
used per year per unit)
|
66
|
110
|
|
Contaminants:
|
|
|
|
Gaseous residues (pounds per unit)
|
0.4
|
0.2
|
|
Solid residues (pounds per unit)
|
0.6
|
2.0
|
|
Recycle potential:
|
|
|
|
Incineration (pounds)
|
7.0
|
—
|
|
Quantity to landfill (pounds)
|
1.0
|
0.5
|
|
Recycled (pounds)
|
—
|
8.5
|
|
Financial information:
|
|
|
|
Cost per pound of materials
|
$ 30.00
|
$ 15.00
|
|
Cost per kilowatt hour 0.50
|
0.50
|
0.50
|
|
Cost per pound of petroleum
|
0.70
|
0.70
|
|
Cost per pound of gaseous residue
|
100.00
|
100.00
|
|
Cost per pound of solid residue
|
40.00
|
50.00
|
|
Incineration benefits per unit
|
2.00
|
—
|
|
Recycle benefits per unit
|
—
|
20.00
|
Required:
1. Using the operational measures, assess the environmental impact of each design. What other information would be useful?
2. Using the financial information, calculate an environmental life cycle cost per unit. Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of this information.
3. Explain why a manager might wish to include product use and disposal information in the assessment of environmental performance. After all, these costs are not incurred by the company. For example, the petroleum consumption per year is a cost incurred by the end user.
4. Based on all the information, what recommendation would you make?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING, BALANCED SCORECARD
Carol Thayn, president of Milton, Inc., a consumer products firm, has decided to follow an environmental improvement strategy. The goal is to increase profits by increasing revenues and decreasing environmental costs. Carol is convinced that revenues could be increased if she could improve the company’s environmental image. Customers have been demanding cleaner products, and her marketing manager had indicated that producing “greener” products would definitely lead to an increase in market share. Furthermore, Carol had recently returned from an environmental management seminar where she had learned about ecoefficiency. She now believes that costs could be reduced while simultaneously improving environmental performance. She has two objectives in mind: Reduce packaging and reduce production and release of contaminating residues. Carol has decided on the following actions to achieve the desired improvements:
1. Hire two environmental engineers to provide the capabilities needed to improve environmental performance. One engineer would be responsible for a new packaging design and reduction process. The other would be given responsibility to redesign products and processes with the objective of reducing the production of residues. Carol expected the actions to reduce packaging costs and pollution control costs.
2. All employees would be sent to several training seminars to learn about environmental management. They would then be empowered to make improvements in environmental performance (e.g., ways to reduce contaminants and packaging materials).
3. Once the processes and products were redesigned, she would participate in a third party environmental certification program so that customers would be assured that the environmental improvements were valid.
Required:
1. Explain why adding an environmental perspective to the Balanced Scorecard is considered to be legitimate.
2. Express the environmental improvement strategy as a series of cause and effect relationships expressed as if then statements.
3. Illustrate the strategy using a causal flow diagram with one important modification:
add an environmental perspective (the flow diagram should then illustrate five perspectives). Place the environmental perspective in between the customer and process perspectives.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CLASSIFICATION OF QUALITY COSTS
Classify the following quality costs as prevention, appraisal, internal failure, or external failure. Also, label each cost as variable or fixed with respect to sales volume.
1. Quality engineering
2. Scrap
3. Product recalls
4. Returns and allowances because of quality problems
5. Sales data re entered because of keying errors
6. Supervision of in process inspection
7. Quality circles
8. Component inspection and testing
9. Quality training
10. Reinspection of reworked product
11. Product liability
12. Internal audit assessing the effectiveness of quality system
13. Disposal of defective product
14. Downtime attributable to quality problems
15. Quality reporting
16. Proofreading
17. Correction of typing errors
18. In process inspection
19. Process controls
20. Pilot studies
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COST SUMMARY
Wayne Johnson, president of Banshee Company, recently returned from a conference on quality and productivity. At the conference, he was told that many American firms have quality costs totaling 20 to 30 percent of sales. He, however, was skeptical about this statistic. But even if the quality gurus were right, he was sure that his company’s quality costs were much lower—probably less than 5 percent. On the other hand, if he was wrong, he would be passing up an opportunity to improve profits significantly and simultaneously strengthen his competitive position. The possibility was at least worth exploring. He knew that his company produced most of the information needed for quality cost reporting—but there never was a need to bother with any formal quality data gathering and analysis.
This conference, however, had convinced him that a firm’s profitability can increase significantly by improving quality—provided the potential for improvement exists. Thus, before committing the company to a quality improvement program, Wayne requested a preliminary estimate of the total quality costs currently being incurred. He also indicated that the costs should be classified into four categories: prevention, appraisal, internal failure, or external failure. He has asked you to prepare a summary of quality costs and to compare the total costs to sales and profits. To assist you in this task, the following information has been prepared from the past year, 2007:
a. Sales revenue, $15,000,000; net income, $1,500,000.
b. During the year, customers returned 90,000 units needing repair. Repair cost averages $1 per unit.
c. Four inspectors are employed, each earning an annual salary of $60,000. These four inspectors are involved only with final inspection (product acceptance).
d. Total scrap is 150,000 units. Of this total, sixty percent is quality related. The cost of scrap is about $5 per unit.
e. Each year, approximately 750,000 units are rejected in final inspection. Of these units, eighty percent can be recovered through rework. The cost of rework is $0.75 per unit.
f. A customer cancelled an order that would have increased profits by $150,000. The customer’s reason for cancellation was poor product performance.
g. The company employs three full time employees in its complaint department. Each earns $40,500 a year.
h. The company gave sales allowances totaling $45,000 due to substandard products being sent to the customer.
i. The company requires all new employees to take its 3 hour quality training program. The estimated annual cost of the program is $30,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a simple quality cost report classifying costs by category.
2. Compute the quality cost sales ratio. Also, compare the total quality costs with total profits. Should Wayne be concerned with the level of quality costs?
3. Prepare a pie chart for the quality costs. Discuss the distribution of quality costs among the four categories. Are they properly distributed? Explain.
4. Discuss how the company can improve its overall quality and at the same time reduce total quality costs.
5. By how much will profits increase if quality costs are reduced to 2.5 percent of sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COST PERFORMANCE REPORTING: ONE YEAR TREND, LONG RANGE ANALYSIS
In 2007, Major Company initiated a full scale, quality improvement program. At the end of the year, Jack Aldredge, the president, noted with some satisfaction that the defects per unit of product had dropped significantly compared to the prior year. He was also pleased that relationships with suppliers had improved and defective materials had declined. The new quality training program was also well accepted by employees.Of most interest to the president, however, was the impact of the quality improvements on profitability. To help assess the dollar impact of the quality improvements, the actual sales and the actual quality costs for 2006 and 2007 are as follows by quality category:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Sales
|
$8,000,000
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Appraisal costs:
|
|
|
|
Packaging inspection
|
320,000
|
300,000
|
|
Product acceptance
|
40,000
|
28,000
|
|
Prevention costs:
|
|
|
|
Quality circles
|
4,000
|
40,000
|
|
Design reviews
|
2,000
|
20,000
|
|
Quality improvement projects
|
2,000
|
100,000
|
|
Internal failure costs:
|
|
|
|
Scrap
|
280,000
|
240,000
|
|
Rework
|
360,000
|
320,000
|
|
Yield losses
|
160,000
|
100,000
|
|
Retesting
|
200,000
|
160,000
|
|
External failure costs:
|
|
|
|
Returned materials
|
160,000
|
160,000
|
|
Allowances
|
120,000
|
140,000
|
|
Warranty
|
400,000
|
440,000
|
All prevention costs are fixed (by discretion). Assume all other quality costs are unitlevel variable.
Required:
1. Compute the relative distribution of quality costs for each year. Do you believe that the company is moving in the right direction in terms of the balance among the quality cost categories? Explain.
2. Prepare a 1 year trend performance report for 2007 (compare the actual costs of 2007 with those of 2006, adjusted for differences in sales volume). How much have profits increased because of the quality improvements made by Major Company?
3. Estimate the additional improvement in profits if Major Company ultimately reduces its quality costs to 2.5 percent of sales revenues (assume sales of $25 million).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COST PERFORMANCE REPORTING: ONE YEAR TREND, LONG RANGE ANALYSIS
In 2007, Major Company initiated a full scale, quality improvement program. At the end of the year, Jack Aldredge, the president, noted with some satisfaction that the defects per unit of product had dropped significantly compared to the prior year. He was also pleased that relationships with suppliers had improved and defective materials had declined. The new quality training program was also well accepted by employees.Of most interest to the president, however, was the impact of the quality improvements on profitability. To help assess the dollar impact of the quality improvements, the actual sales and the actual quality costs for 2006 and 2007 are as follows by quality category:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Sales
|
$8,000,000
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Appraisal costs:
|
|
|
|
Packaging inspection
|
320,000
|
300,000
|
|
Product acceptance
|
40,000
|
28,000
|
|
Prevention costs:
|
|
|
|
Quality circles
|
4,000
|
40,000
|
|
Design reviews
|
2,000
|
20,000
|
|
Quality improvement projects
|
2,000
|
100,000
|
|
Internal failure costs:
|
|
|
|
Scrap
|
280,000
|
240,000
|
|
Rework
|
360,000
|
320,000
|
|
Yield losses
|
160,000
|
100,000
|
|
Retesting
|
200,000
|
160,000
|
|
External failure costs:
|
|
|
|
Returned materials
|
160,000
|
160,000
|
|
Allowances
|
120,000
|
140,000
|
|
Warranty
|
400,000
|
440,000
|
All prevention costs are fixed (by discretion). Assume all other quality costs are unitlevel variable.
Required:
1. Compute the relative distribution of quality costs for each year. Do you believe that the company is moving in the right direction in terms of the balance among the quality cost categories? Explain.
2. Prepare a 1 year trend performance report for 2007 (compare the actual costs of 2007 with those of 2006, adjusted for differences in sales volume). How much have profits increased because of the quality improvements made by Major Company?
3. Estimate the additional improvement in profits if Major Company ultimately reduces its quality costs to 2.5 percent of sales revenues (assume sales of $25 million).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DISTRIBUTION OF QUALITY COSTS
Paper Products Division produces paper diapers, napkins, and paper towels. The divisional manager has decided that quality costs can be minimized by distributing quality costs evenly among the four quality categories and reducing them to no more than 5 percent of sales. He has just received the following quality cost report:
Paper Products Division
Quality Cost Report
For the Year Ended December 31, 2007
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prevention costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Quality training
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 2,500
|
$ 2,000
|
$ 7,500
|
|
Quality engineering
|
3,500
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
7,000
|
|
Quality audits
|
—
|
500
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
|
Quality reporting
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
5,500
|
|
Total prevention costs
|
$ 9,000
|
$ 6,000
|
$ 6,500
|
$ 21,500
|
|
Appraisal costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Inspection, materials
|
$ 2,000
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Process acceptance
|
4,000
|
2,800
|
1,200
|
8,000
|
|
Product acceptance
|
2,000
|
1,200
|
2,300
|
5,500
|
|
Total appraisal costs
|
$ 8,000
|
$ 7,000
|
$ 6,500
|
$ 21,500
|
|
Internal failure costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Scrap
|
$10,000
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 2,500
|
$ 15,500
|
|
Disposal costs
|
7,000
|
2,000
|
1,500
|
10,500
|
|
Downtime
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
2,500
|
5,000
|
|
Total internal failure costs
|
$18,000
|
$ 6,500
|
$ 6,500
|
$ 31,000
|
|
External failure costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allowances
|
$10,000
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 2,750
|
$ 15,750
|
|
Customer complaints
|
4,000
|
1,500
|
3,750
|
9,250
|
|
Product liability
|
1,000
|
—
|
—
|
1,000
|
|
Total external failure costs
|
$15,000
|
$ 4,500
|
$ 6,500
|
$ 26,000
|
|
Total quality costs
|
$50,000
|
$24,000
|
$26,000
|
$100,000
|
Assume that all prevention costs are fixed and that the remaining quality costs are variable (unit-level).
Required:
1. Assume that the sales revenue for the year totaled $2 million, with sales for each product as follows: diapers, $1 million; napkins, $600,000; paper towels, $400,000. Evaluate the distribution of costs for the division as a whole and for each product line. What recommendations do you have for the divisional manager?
2. Now, assume that total sales are $1 million and have this breakdown: diapers, $500,000; napkins, $300,000; paper towels, $200,000. Evaluate the distribution of costs for the division as a whole and for each product line in this case. Do you think it is possible to reduce the quality costs to 5 percent of sales for each product line and for the division as a whole and, simultaneously, achieve an equal distribution
of the quality costs? What recommendations do you have?
3. Assume total sales of $1 million with this breakdown: diapers, $500,000; napkins, $180,000; paper towels, $320,000. Evaluate the distribution of quality costs. What recommendations do you have for the divisional manager?
4. Discuss the value of having quality costs reported by segment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TREND ANALYSIS, QUALITY COSTS
In 2003, Milton Thayne, president of Carbondale Electronics, received a report indicating that quality costs were 31 percent of sales. Faced with increasing pressures from imported goods, Milton resolved to take measures to improve the overall quality of the company’s products. After hiring a consultant in 2004, the company began an aggressive program of total quality control. At the end of 2007, Milton requested an analysis of the progress the company had made in reducing and controlling quality costs. The accounting department assembled the following data:
|
|
Sales
|
Prevention
|
Appraisal
|
Internal
Failure
|
External
Failure
|
|
2003
|
$500,000
|
$ 5,000
|
$10,000
|
$80,000
|
$60,000
|
|
2004
|
600,000
|
25,000
|
15,000
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
|
2005
|
700,000
|
35,000
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
25,000
|
|
2006
|
600,000
|
40,000
|
15,000
|
25,000
|
20,000
|
|
2007
|
500,000
|
50,000
|
5,000
|
12,000
|
8,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the quality costs as a percentage of sales by category and in total for each year.
2. Prepare a multiple year trend graph for quality costs, both by total costs and by category. Using the graph, assess the progress made in reducing and controlling quality costs. Does the graph provide evidence that quality has improved? Explain.
3. Using the 2003 quality cost relationships (assume all costs are variable), calculate the quality costs that would have prevailed in 2006. By how much did profits increase in 2006 because of the quality improvement program? Repeat for 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE ON QUALITY COST PERFORMANCE REPORTS
Iona Company, a large printing company, is in its fourth year of a 5 year, quality improvement program. The program began in 2003 with an internal study that revealed the quality costs being incurred. In that year, a 5 year plan was developed to lower quality costs to 10 percent of sales by the end of 2007. Sales and quality costs for each year are as follows:
|
|
Sales Revenues
|
Quality Costs
|
|
2003
|
$10,000,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
2004
|
10,000,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
2005
|
11,000,000
|
1,815,000
|
|
2006
|
12,000,000
|
1,680,000
|
|
2007
|
12,000,000
|
1,320,000
|
Quality costs by category are expressed as a percentage of sales as follows:
|
|
Prevention
|
Appraisal
|
Internal Failure
|
External Failure
|
|
2003
|
1.0%
|
3.0%
|
7.0%
|
9.0%
|
|
2004
|
2.0
|
4.0
|
6.0
|
6.0
|
|
2005
|
2.5
|
4.0
|
5.0
|
5.0
|
|
2006
|
3.0
|
3.5
|
4.5
|
3.0
|
|
2007
|
3.5
|
3.5
|
2.0
|
2.0
|
The detail of the 2007 budget for quality costs is also provided.
|
Prevention costs:
|
|
|
Quality planning
|
$ 150,000
|
|
Quality training
|
20,000
|
|
Quality improvement (special project)
|
80,000
|
|
Quality reporting
|
10,000
|
|
Appraisal costs:
|
|
|
Proofreading
|
500,000
|
|
Other inspection
|
50,000
|
|
Failure costs:
|
|
|
Correction of typos
|
150,000
|
|
Rework (because of customer complaints)
|
75,000
|
|
Plate revisions
|
55,000
|
|
Press downtime
|
100,000
|
|
Waste (because of poor work)
|
130,000
|
|
Total quality costs
|
$1,320,000
|
All prevention costs are fixed; all other quality costs are variable. During 2007, the company had $12 million in sales. Actual quality costs for 2006 and 2007 are as follows:
|
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
Quality planning
|
$150,000
|
$140,000
|
|
Quality training
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Special project
|
100,000
|
120,000
|
|
Quality reporting
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
|
Proofreading
|
520,000
|
580,000
|
|
Other inspection
|
60,000
|
80,000
|
|
Correction of typos
|
165,000
|
200,000
|
|
Rework
|
76,000
|
131,000
|
|
Plate revisions
|
58,000
|
83,000
|
|
Press downtime
|
102,000
|
123,000
|
|
Waste
|
136,000
|
191,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare an interim quality cost performance report for 2007 that compares actual quality costs with budgeted quality costs. Comment on the firm’s ability to achieve its quality goals for the year.
2. Prepare a 1 period quality performance report for 2007 that compares the actual quality costs of 2006 with the actual costs of 2007. How much did profits change because of improved quality?
3. Prepare a graph that shows the trend in total quality costs as a percentage of sales since the inception of the quality improvement program.
4. Prepare a graph that shows the trend for all four quality cost categories for 2003 through 2007. How does this graph help management know that the reduction in total quality costs is attributable to quality improvements?
5. Assume that the company is preparing a second 5 year plan to reduce quality costs to 2.5 percent of sales. Prepare a long range quality cost performance report assuming sales of $15 million at the end of five years. Assume that the final planned relative distribution of quality costs is as follows: proofreading, 50 percent; other inspection, 13 percent; quality training, 30 percent; and quality reporting, 7 percent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYBER RESEARCH CASE
The ISO 9000 series and QS 9000 have had a significant impact in industrial practice. Web sites that provide a good starting point for information about these quality standards include. The last address allows you to search for articles that deal with ISO 9000 and QS 9000. Using these sources and others you might locate on the Internet, answer the following questions:
1. What is the International Standards Organization?
2. What standards make up the ISO 9000 family?
3. Describe the revised ISO 9000 standards.
4. What are the differences between ISO 9000 and QS 9000? Be specific.
5. What is the average cost to register and maintain QS 9000? What is the average benefit?
6. Describe the experience of one company that has implemented QS 9000. Include in your description some of the quality improvements that were the result of QS 9000 registration.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY
At the end of 2006, Homer Company implemented a new labor process and redesigned its product with the expectation that input usage efficiency would increase. Now, at the end of 2007, the president of the company wants an assessment of the changes in the company’s productivity. The data needed for the assessment are as follows:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Output
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Output prices
|
$20
|
$20
|
|
Materials (lbs.)
|
8,000
|
8,400
|
|
Materials unit price
|
$6
|
$8
|
|
Labor (hrs.)
|
5,000
|
4,800
|
|
Labor rate per hour
|
$10
|
$10
|
|
Power (kwh)
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
|
Price per kwh
|
$2
|
$3
|
Required:
1. Compute the partial operational measures for each input for both 2006 and 2007. What can be said about productivity improvement?
2. Prepare a partial income statement for each year, and calculate the total change in profits.
3. Calculate the profit linked productivity measure for 2007. What can be said about the productivity program?
4. Calculate the price recovery component. What does this tell you?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TECHNICAL AND PRICE EFFICIENCY
Listed below are several possible input combinations for producing 5,000 units of a pocket PC. Two of the input combinations are technically efficient.
|
|
Materials
|
Labor
|
Labor
|
|
Unit input prices
|
$150
|
$125
|
$50
|
|
Input combinations:
|
|
|
|
|
A
|
250
|
480
|
1,800
|
|
B
|
275
|
450
|
1,350
|
|
C
|
230
|
475
|
1,425
|
|
D
|
375
|
500
|
1,500
|
Required:
1. Identify the technically efficient input combinations. Explain your choices.
2. Which of the two technically efficient input combinations should be used? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT, TECHNICAL AND ALLOCATIVE EFFICIENCY, PARTIAL MEASURES
Gambiano Company produces hand crafted pottery that uses two inputs, materials and labor. During the past quarter, 20,000 units were produced, requiring 80,000 pounds of material and 40,000 hours of labor. An engineering efficiency study commissioned by the local university revealed that Gambiano can produce the same 20,000 units of output using either of the following two combinations of inputs:
|
|
Materials
|
Labor
|
|
Combinations:
|
|
|
|
F1
|
60,000
|
30,000
|
|
F2
|
66,000
|
28,000
|
The cost of materials is $8 per pound; the cost of labor is $12 per hour.
Required:
1. Compute the output input ratio for each input of Combination F1. Does this represent a productivity improvement over the current use of inputs? What is the total dollar value of the improvement? Classify this as a technical or an allocative efficiency improvement.
2. Compute the output input ratio for each input of Combination F2. Does this represent a productivity improvement over the current use of inputs? Now, compare these ratios to those of Combination F1. What has happened?
3. Compute the cost of producing 20,000 units of output using Combination F1. Compare this cost to the cost using Combination F2. Does moving from Combination F1 to Combination F2 represent a productivity improvement? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INTERPERIOD MEASUREMENT OF PRODUCTIVITY, PROFILES
Helena Company needs to increase its profits and so has embarked on a program to increase its overall productivity. After one year of operation, Kent Olson, manager of the Columbus plant, reported the following results for the base period and its most recent year of operations:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Output
|
307,200
|
360,000
|
|
Power (quantity used)
|
38,400
|
18,000
|
|
Materials (quantity used)
|
76,800
|
81,000
|
Required:
Compute the productivity profiles for each year. Did productivity improve? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INTERPERIOD MEASUREMENT OF PRODUCTIVITY, PROFIT LINKED MEASUREMENT
Helena Company needs to increase its profits and so has embarked on a program to increase its overall productivity. After one year of operation, Kent Olson, manager of the Columbus plant, reported the following results for the base period and its most recent year of operations:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Output
|
307,200
|
360,000
|
|
Power (quantity used)
|
38,400
|
18,000
|
|
Materials (quantity used)
|
76,800
|
81,000
|
Suppose the following input prices are provided for each year:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Unit price (power)
|
$ 2
|
$ 3
|
|
Unit price (materials)
|
16
|
15
|
|
Unit selling price
|
6
|
8
|
Required:
1. Compute the profit linked productivity measure. By how much did profits increase due to productivity?
2. Calculate the price recovery component for 2007. Explain its meaning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY PRODUCTIVITY, NON VALUE ADDED ACTIVITY
Rework, a non value added activity, is part of Jorgensen Manufacturing’s assembly process. Testing often revealed that one or more components (almost always sourced from outside suppliers) had failed. At the end of 2006, Jorgensen initiated efforts designed to buy higher quality components. Consequently, the demand for the rework activity was expected to decrease. The following data pertain to the reordering activity for the years 2006 and 2007:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Units assembled
|
300,000
|
300,000
|
|
Units reworked
|
7,500
|
3,600
|
|
Rework components (number)
|
15,000
|
7,200
|
|
Rework labor hours
|
12,000
|
6,000
|
|
Labor cost per hour
|
$12
|
$15
|
|
Cost per component
|
$20
|
$20
|
|
Activity rate
|
$59
|
$64
|
Required:
1. Identify the output measure for the rework activity.
2. Calculate the productivity profile and the profit linked measure for the rework activity. Is reducing the demand for a non value added activity the correct decision? Does this benefit show up in the productivity measure? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROCESS PRODUCTIVITY, NON VALUE ADDED ACTIVITY
Rework, a non value added activity, is part of Jorgensen Manufacturing’s assembly process. Testing often revealed that one or more components (almost always sourced from outside suppliers) had failed. At the end of 2006, Jorgensen initiated efforts designed to buy higher quality components. Consequently, the demand for the rework activity was expected to decrease. The following data pertain to the reordering activity for the years 2006 and 2007:
|
|
2006
|
2007
|
|
Units assembled
|
300,000
|
300,000
|
|
Units reworked
|
7,500
|
3,600
|
|
Rework components (number)
|
15,000
|
7,200
|
|
Rework labor hours
|
12,000
|
6,000
|
|
Labor cost per hour
|
$12
|
$15
|
|
Cost per component
|
$20
|
$20
|
|
Activity rate
|
$59
|
$64
|
Required:
1. Identify the output measure for the assembly process. Calculate the productivity profile and profit linked measure of the assembly process where the output of the rework activity is viewed as a process input. Does this indicate anything about the value of reducing demand for a non value added activity?
2. Calculate the total process productivity change. What does this indicate about the actions taken regarding the non value added activity?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT: TRADE OFFS, PROFILE AND PROFIT LINKED ANALYSES
Bradshaw Company has recently installed a computer aided manufacturing system. The decision to automate was made so that material waste could be reduced. Better quality and a reduction of labor inputs were also expected. After one year of operation, management wants to see if the expected productivity improvements have materialized. The president is particularly interested in knowing whether the trade off between capital, labor, and materials was favorable. Data concerning output, labor, materials, and capital are provided for the year before implementation and the year after.
|
|
Year Before
|
Year After
|
|
Output
|
100,000
|
120,000
|
|
Input quantities:
|
|
|
|
Materials (lbs.)
|
25,000
|
20,000
|
|
Labor (hours)
|
5,000
|
2,000
|
|
Capital (dollars)
|
$10,000
|
$300,000
|
|
Input prices:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
$5
|
$5
|
|
Labor
|
$10
|
$10
|
|
Capital
|
10%
|
10%
|
Required:
1. Prepare a productivity profile for each year. Evaluate the productivity changes.
2. Calculate the change in profits attributable to the change in productivity of the three inputs. Assuming that these are the only three inputs, evaluate the decision to automate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROSPECTIVE PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT, TECHNICAL AND ALLOCATIVE EFFICIENCY, PROFILE AND PROFIT LINKED ANALYSES
The manager of Blakely Company was reviewing two competing projects for the molding department. The projects represented different methods of preparing the molds for one of the company’s more popular product lines. One project changed the way molds were poured and promised a savings in material usage. The second project redesigned the process so that labor was used more efficiently. The fiscal year was coming to a close, and the manager wanted to make a decision concerning the proposed process changes so that they could be used, if beneficial, during the coming year. The process changes would affect the department’s input usage. For the year just ended, the accounting department provided the following information about the inputs used to produce 100,000 units of output:
|
|
Quantity
|
Unit Prices
|
|
Materials
|
200,000 lbs.
|
$ 8
|
|
Labor
|
80,000 hrs.
|
10
|
|
Energy
|
40,000 kwh
|
2
|
Each project offers a different process design from the one currently being used. Neither project would cost anything to implement. Expected input usage for producing 120,000 units (the expected output for the coming year) for each project is as follows:
|
|
Project I
|
Project II
|
|
Materials
|
200,000 lbs.
|
220,000 lbs.
|
|
Labor
|
80,000 hrs.
|
60,000 hrs.
|
|
Energy
|
40,000 kwh
|
40,000 kwh
|
Input prices are expected to remain the same for the coming year.
Required:
1. Prepare a productivity profile analysis for the most recently completed year and each project. Does either proposal improve technical efficiency? Explain. Can you make a recommendation about either project using only the physical measures?
2. Calculate the profit linked productivity measure for each proposal. Which proposal offers the best outcome for the company? How does this relate to the concept of price efficiency? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BASICS OF PRODUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT
Holbrook Company gathered the following data for the past two years:
|
|
Base Year
|
Current Year
|
|
Output
|
900,000
|
1,080,000
|
|
Output prices
|
$15
|
$15
|
|
Input quantities:
|
|
|
|
Materials (lbs.)
|
1,200,000
|
720,000
|
|
Labor (hrs.)
|
300,000
|
540,000
|
|
Input prices:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
$5
|
$6
|
|
Labor
|
$8
|
$8
|
Required:
1. Prepare a productivity profile for each year.
2. Prepare partial income statements for each year. Calculate the total change in income.
3. Calculate the change in profits attributable to productivity changes.
4. Calculate the price recovery component. Explain its meaning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY PRODUCTIVITY
In an effort to become more competitive, Hardy Company has embarked on a program to reduce and eliminate its non value added activities and to improve the efficiency of its value added activities. The activity of paying bills has been classified as value added and in need of improvement. The major inputs for the activity are clerks, personal computers (PCs), and supplies. Activity output is defined as “paid bills” and is measured by the number of checks issued. The materials handling activity, on the other hand, is classified as a non value added activity and is targeted for reduction and possible elimination (at least as a significant activity). The major inputs for materials movement (the output) are labor, forklifts, and supplies. Over a 2 year period, Hardy has made some changes in the way each activity is performed. For example, Hardy has redesigned its plant layout to reduce the demand for materials movement. Process innovation also dramatically changed the way that bills were paid. Data are provided for the two activities for a base year and the most recent year completed. The year just completed was the second year of Hardy’s improvement program.
|
Activity
|
Base Year
|
Most Recent Year
|
|
Paying bills:
|
|
|
|
Output
|
300,000
|
320,000
|
|
Inputs:
|
|
|
|
Clerks (no.)
|
15
|
5
|
|
PCs (no.)
|
15
|
5
|
|
Supplies (lbs.)
|
150,000
|
40,000
|
|
Moving materials:
|
|
|
|
Output
|
20,000
|
5,000
|
|
Inputs:
|
|
|
|
Labor (hrs.)
|
10,000
|
3,000
|
|
Forklifts (no.)
|
5
|
2
|
|
Supplies (lbs.)
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare productivity profiles for both activities. Comment on the usefulness of these profiles for assessing improvement in activity performance.
2. Given the following most recent year’s input prices for the paying bills activity, calculate the activity’s profit linked measure:
|
Clerks
|
$25,000 per person
|
|
PCs
|
$5,000 per system
|
|
Supplies
|
$1 per pound
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTIVITY AND QUALITY, PROSPECTIVE ANALYSIS
Walnut Company is considering the acquisition of a computerized manufacturing system. The new system has a built in quality function that increases the control over product specifications. An alarm sounds whenever the product falls outside the programmed specifications. An operator can then make some adjustments on the spot to restore the desired product quality. The system is expected to decrease the number of units scrapped because of poor quality. The system is also expected to decrease the amount of labor inputs needed. The production manager is pushing for the acquisition because he believes that productivity will be greatly enhanced—particularly when it comes to labor and material inputs. Output and input data follow. The data for the computerized system are projections.
|
|
Current System
|
Computerized System
|
|
Output (units)
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Output selling price
|
$40
|
$40
|
|
Input quantities:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
80,000
|
70,000
|
|
Labor
|
40,000
|
30,000
|
|
Capital (dollars)
|
$40,000
|
$200,000
|
|
Energy
|
20,000
|
50,000
|
|
Input prices:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
$4.00
|
$4.00
|
|
Labor
|
$9.00
|
$9.00
|
|
Capital (percent)
|
10.00%
|
10.00%
|
|
Energy
|
$2.00
|
$2.50
|
Required:
1. Compute the partial operational ratios for materials and labor under each alternative. Is the production manager right in thinking that materials and labor productivity increase with the automated system?
2. Compute the productivity profiles for each system. Does the computerized system improve productivity?
3. Determine the amount by which profits will change if the computerized system is adopted. Are the trade offs among the inputs favorable? Comment on the system’s ability to improve productivity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BALANCED SCORECARD, STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT
Bannister Company, an electronics firm, buys circuit boards and manually inserts various electronic devices into the printed circuit board. Bannister sells its products to original equipment manufacturers. Profits for the last two years have been less than expected. Mandy Confer, owner of Bannister, was convinced that her firm needed to adopt a revenue growth and cost reduction strategy to increase overall profits. After a careful review of her firm’s condition, Mandy realized that the main obstacle for increasing revenues and reducing costs was the high defect rate of her products (a 6 percent reject rate). She was certain that revenues would grow if the defect rate was reduced dramatically. Costs would also decline as there would be fewer rejects and less rework. By decreasing the defect rate, customer satisfaction would increase, causing, in turn, an increase in market share. Mandy also felt that the following actions were needed to help ensure the success of the revenue growth and cost reduction strategy:
a. Improve the soldering capabilities by sending employees to an outside course.
b. Redesign the insertion process to eliminate some of the common mistakes.
c. Improve the procurement process by selecting suppliers that provide higherquality circuit boards.
Suppose that Mandy communicates the following weights to her CEO:
Perspective: Financial, 40%; Customer, 20%; Process, 20%; Learning & growth, 20% Financial objectives: Profits, 50%; Revenues, 25%; Costs, 25% Customer objectives: Customer satisfaction, 60%; Market share, 40% Process objectives: Defects decrease, 40%; Supplier selection, 30%; Redesign process, 30% Learning & growth objective: Training, 100% Mandy next sets up a bonus pool of $100,000 and indicates that the weighting scheme just described will be used to determine the amount of potential bonus for each perspective and each objective.
Required:
1. Calculate the potential bonus for each perspective and objective.
2. Describe how Mandy might award actual bonuses so that her managers will be encouraged to implement the Balanced Scorecard.
3. What are some other ways that Mandy can use to encourage alignment with the company’s strategic objectives (other than incentive compensation)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY BASED RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING VERSUS STRATEGIC BASED RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING
Carson Wellington, president of Mallory Plastics, was considering a report sent to him by Emily Sorensen, vice president of operations. The report was a summary of the progress made by an activity based management system that was implemented three years ago. Significant progress had indeed been realized. At the conclusion of the report, Emily urged Carson to consider the adoption of the Balanced Scorecard as a logical next step in the company’s efforts to establish itself as a leader in its industry. Emily clearly was impressed by the Balanced Scorecard and intrigued by the possibility that the change would enhance the overall competitiveness of Mallory. She requested a meeting of the executive committee to explain the similarities and differences between the two approaches. Carson agreed to schedule the meeting but asked Emily to prepare a memo in advance, listing the most important similarities and differences between the two approaches to responsibility accounting.
Required:
Prepare the memo requested by Carson.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SCORECARD MEASURES, STRATEGY TRANSLATION
At the end of 2005, Activo Company implemented a low cost strategy to improve its competitive position. Its objective was to become the low cost producer in its industry. A Balanced Scorecard was developed to guide the company toward this objective. To lower costs, Activo undertook a number of improvement activities such as JIT production, total quality management, and activity based management. Now, after two years of operation, the president of Activo wants some assessment of the achievements. To help provide this assessment, the following information on one product has been gathered:
|
|
2005
|
2007
|
|
Theoretical annual capacity
|
124,800
|
124,800
|
|
Actual production
|
104,000
|
117,000
|
|
Market size (in units sold)
|
650,000
|
650,000
|
|
Production hours available (20 workers)
|
52,000
|
52,000
|
|
Very satisfied customers
|
41,600
|
70,200
|
|
Actual cost per unit
|
$162.50
|
$130
|
|
Days of inventory
|
7.8
|
3.9
|
|
Number of defective units
|
6,500
|
2,600
|
|
Total worker suggestions
|
52
|
156
|
|
Hours of training
|
130
|
520
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$195
|
$195
|
|
Number of new customers
|
2,600
|
13,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the following measures for 2005 and 2007:
a. Actual velocity and cycle time
b. Percentage of total revenue from new customers (assume one unit per customer)
c. Percentage of very satisfied customers (assume each customer purchases one unit)
d. Market share
e. Percentage change in actual product cost (for 2007 only)
f. Percentage change in days of inventory (for 2007 only)
g. Defective units as a percentage of total units produced
h. Total hours of training
i. Suggestions per production worker
j. Total revenue
k. Number of new customers
2. For the measures listed in Requirement 1, list likely strategic objectives, classified according to the four Balance Scorecard perspectives. Assume there is one measure per objective.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
IF THEN STATEMENTS, STRATEGY MAP
At the end of 2005, Activo Company implemented a low cost strategy to improve its competitive position. Its objective was to become the low cost producer in its industry. A Balanced Scorecard was developed to guide the company toward this objective. To lower costs, Activo undertook a number of improvement activities such as JIT production, total quality management, and activity based management. Now, after two years of operation, the president of Activo wants some assessment of the achievements. To help provide this assessment, the following information on one product has been gathered:
|
|
2005
|
2007
|
|
Theoretical annual capacity
|
124,800
|
124,800
|
|
Actual production
|
104,000
|
117,000
|
|
Market size (in units sold)
|
650,000
|
650,000
|
|
Production hours available (20 workers)
|
52,000
|
52,000
|
|
Very satisfied customers
|
41,600
|
70,200
|
|
Actual cost per unit
|
$162.50
|
$130
|
|
Days of inventory
|
7.8
|
3.9
|
|
Number of defective units
|
6,500
|
2,600
|
|
Total worker suggestions
|
52
|
156
|
|
Hours of training
|
130
|
520
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$195
|
$195
|
|
Number of new customers
|
2,600
|
13,000
|
1. Express Activo’s strategy as a series of if then statements. What does this tell you about Balanced Scorecard measures?
2. Prepare a strategy map that illustrates the relationships among the likely strategic objectives.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES, SCORECARD MEASURES, STRATEGY MAP
The following strategic objectives have been derived from a strategy that seeks to improve asset utilization by more careful development and use of its human assets and internal processes:
a. Increase revenue from new products.
b. Increase implementation of employee suggestions.
c. Decrease operating expenses.
d. Decrease cycle time for the development of new products.
e. Decrease rework.
f. Increase employee morale.
g. Increase customer satisfaction.
h. Increase access of key employees to customer and product information.
i. Increase customer acquisition.
j. Increase return on investment (ROI).
k. Increase employee productivity.
l. Decrease the collection period for accounts receivable.
m. Increase employee skills.
The heart of the strategy is developing the company’s human resources. Management is convinced that empowering employees will lead to an increase in economic returns. Studies have shown that there is a positive relationship between employee morale and customer satisfaction. Furthermore, the more satisfied customers pay their bills more quickly. It was hypothesized that as employees became more involved and more productive their morale would improve. Thus, the strategy incorporated key objectives that would lead to an increase in productivity and involvement.
Required:
1. Classify the objectives by perspective, and suggest a measure for each objective.
2. Prepare a strategy map that illustrates the likely causal relationships among the strategic objectives.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYCLE TIME, CONVERSION COST PER UNIT, MCE
A manufacturing cell has the theoretical capability to produce 150,000 subassemblies per quarter. The conversion cost per quarter is $1,500,000. There are 50,000 production hours available within the cell per quarter.
Required:
1. Compute the theoretical velocity (per hour) and the theoretical cycle time (minutes per unit produced).
2. Compute the ideal amount of conversion cost that will be assigned per subassembly.
3. Suppose the actual time required to produce a subassembly is 30 minutes. Compute the amount of conversion cost actually assigned to each unit produced. What happens to product cost if the time to produce a unit is decreased to 25 minutes? How can a firm encourage managers to reduce cycle time? Finally, discuss how this approach to assigning conversion cost can improve delivery time.
4. Calculate MCE. How much non value added time is being used? How much is it costing per unit?
5. Cycle time, velocity, MCE, conversion cost per unit (theoretical conversion rate × actual conversion time), and non value added costs are all measures of performance for the cell process. Discuss the incentives provided by these measures.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYCLE TIME, VELOCITY, PRODUCT COSTING
Wilton Company has a JIT system in place. Each manufacturing cell is dedicated to the production of a single product or major subassembly. One cell, dedicated to the production of snowmobiles, has four operations: machining, finishing, assembly, and qualifying (testing). The machining process is automated, using computers. In this process, the model’s frame and engine are constructed. In finishing, the frame is sandblasted, buffed, and painted. In assembly, the frame and engine are assembled. Finally, each model is tested to ensure operational capability. For the coming year, the snowmobile cell has the following budgeted costs and cell time (both at theoretical capacity):
|
Budgeted conversion costs
|
$7,750,000
|
|
Budgeted materials
|
$9,300,000
|
|
Cell time
|
12,400 hours
|
|
Theoretical output
|
9,300 models
|
During the year, the following actual results were obtained:
|
Actual conversion costs
|
$7,750,000
|
|
Actual materials
|
$8,060,000
|
|
Actual cell time
|
12,400 hours
|
|
Actual output
|
7,750 models
|
Required:
1. Compute the velocity (number of models per hour) that the cell can theoretically achieve. Now, compute the theoretical cycle time (number of hours or minutes per model) that it takes to produce one model.
2. Compute the actual velocity and the actual cycle time.
3. Compute MCE. Comment on the efficiency of the operation.
4. Compute the budgeted conversion cost per minute. Using this rate, compute the conversion cost per model if theoretical output is achieved. Using this measure, compute the conversion cost per model for actual output. Does this product costing approach provide an incentive for the cell manager to reduce cycle time? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BALANCED SCORECARD, NON VALUE ADDED ACTIVITIES, STRATEGY TRANSLATION, KAIZEN COSTING
At the beginning of the last quarter of 2005, Youngston, Inc., a consumer products firm, hired Maria Carrillo to take over one of its divisions. The division manufactured small home appliances and was struggling to survive in a very competitive market. Maria immediately requested a projected income statement for 2005. In response, the controller provided the following statement:
|
Sales
|
$25,000,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
20,000,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 5,000,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
6,000,000
|
|
Projected loss
|
$ (1,000,000)
|
After some investigation, Maria soon realized that the products being produced had a serious problem with quality. She once again requested a special study by the controller’s office to supply a report on the level of quality costs. By the middle of November, Maria received the following report from the controller:
|
Inspection costs, finished product
|
$ 400,000
|
|
Rework costs
|
2,000,000
|
|
Scrapped units
|
600,000
|
|
Warranty costs
|
3,000,000
|
|
Sales returns (quality related)
|
1,000,000
|
|
Customer complaint department
|
500,000
|
|
Total estimated quality costs
|
$7,500,000
|
Maria was surprised at the level of quality costs. They represented 30 percent of sales, certainly excessive. She knew that the division had to produce high quality products to survive. The number of defective units produced needed to be reduced dramatically. Thus, Maria decided to pursue a quality driven turnaround strategy. Revenue growth and cost reduction could both be achieved if quality could be improved. By growing revenues and decreasing costs, profitability could be increased.
After meeting with the managers of production, marketing, purchasing, and human resources, Maria made the following decisions, effective immediately (end of November 2005):
a. More will be invested in employee training. Workers will be trained to detect quality problems and empowered to make improvements. Workers will be allowed a bonus of 10 percent of any cost savings produced by their suggested improvements.
b. Two design engineers will be hired immediately, with expectations of hiring one or two more within a year. These engineers will be in charge of redesigning processes and products with the objective of improving quality. They will also be given the responsibility of working with selected suppliers to help improve the quality of their products and processes. Design engineers were considered a strategic necessity.
c. Implement a new process: evaluation and selection of suppliers. This new process has the objective of selecting a group of suppliers that are willing and capable of providing nondefective components.
d. Effective immediately, the division will begin inspecting purchased components. According to production, many of the quality problems are caused by defective components purchased from outside suppliers. Incoming inspection is viewed as a transitional activity. Once the division has developed a group of suppliers capable of delivering nondefective components, this activity will be eliminated.
e. Within three years, the goal is to produce products with a defect rate less than 0.10 percent. By reducing the defect rate to this level, marketing is confident that market share will increase by at least 50 percent (as a consequence of increased customer satisfaction). Products with better quality will help establish an improved product image and reputation, allowing the division to capture new customers and increase market share.
f. Accounting will be given the charge to install a quality information reporting system. Daily reports on operational quality data (e.g., percentage of defective units), weekly updates of trend graphs (posted throughout the division), and quarterly cost reports are the types of information required.
g. To help direct the improvements in quality activities, kaizen costing is to be implemented. For example, for the year 2005, a kaizen standard of 6 percent of the selling price per unit was set for rework costs, a 25 percent reduction from the current actual cost.
To ensure that the quality improvements were directed and translated into concrete financial outcomes, Maria also began to implement a Balanced Scorecard for the division. By the end of 2006, progress was being made. Sales had increased to $26,000,000, and the kaizen improvements were meeting or beating expectations. For example, rework costs had dropped to $1,500,000.
At the end of 2007, two years after the turnaround quality strategy was implemented, Maria received the following quality cost report:
|
Quality training
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Supplier evaluation
|
230,000
|
|
Incoming inspection costs
|
400,000
|
|
Inspection costs, finished product
|
300,000
|
|
Rework costs
|
1,000,000
|
|
Scrapped units
|
200,000
|
|
Warranty costs
|
750,000
|
|
Sales returns (quality related)
|
435,000
|
|
Customer complaint department
|
325,000
|
|
Total estimated quality costs
|
$4,140,000
|
Maria also received an income statement for 2007:
|
Sales
|
$30,000,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
22,000,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 8,000,000
|
|
Fixed expenses
|
5,800,000
|
|
Income from operations
|
$ 2,200,000
|
Maria was pleased with the outcomes. Revenues had grown, and costs had been reduced by at least as much as she had projected for the 2 year period. Growth next year should be even greater as she was beginning to observe a favorable effect from the higher quality products. Also, further quality cost reductions should materialize as incoming inspections were showing much higher quality purchased components.
Required:
1. Identify the strategic objectives, classified by Balanced Scorecard perspective. Next, suggest measures for each objective.
2. Using the results from Requirement 1, describe Maria’s strategy using a series of if then statements. Next, prepare a strategy map.
3. Explain how you would evaluate the success of the quality driven turnaround strategy. What additional information would you like to have for this evaluation?
4. Explain why Maria felt that the Balanced Scorecard would increase the likelihood that the turnaround strategy would actually produce good financial outcomes.
5. Advise Maria on how to encourage her employees to align their actions and behavior with the turnaround strategy.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COST CLASSIFICATION, QUALITY IMPROVEMENT, AND PROFITABILITY
At the beginning of the year, Kare Company initiated a quality improvement program. Considerable effort was expended to reduce the number of defective units produced. By the end of the year, reports from the production manager revealed that scrap and rework had both decreased. The president of the company was pleased to hear of the success but wanted some assessment of the financial impact of the improvements. To make this assessment, the following financial data were collected for the current and preceding years:
|
|
Preceding Year (2006)
|
Current Year (2007)
|
|
Sales
|
$10,000,000
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Scrap
|
400,000
|
300,000
|
|
Rework
|
600,000
|
400,000
|
|
Product inspection
|
100,000
|
125,000
|
|
Product warranty
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Quality training
|
40,000
|
80,000
|
|
Materials inspection
|
60,000
|
40,000
|
Required:
1. Classify the costs as prevention, appraisal, internal failure, or external failure.
2. Compute quality cost as a percentage of sales for each of the two years. By how much has profit increased because of quality improvements? Assuming that quality costs can be reduced to 2.5 percent of sales, how much additional profit is available through quality improvements (assume that sales revenues will remain the same)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY DEFINITION AND QUALITY COSTS
Rachel Boyce, president of a company that manufactures electronic components, has a number of questions concerning quality and quality costs. She has heard a few things about quality and has asked you to respond to the following:
Required:
1. What does it mean to have a quality product or service? Explain how product quality and conformance are related.
2. Yesterday, my quality manager told me that we need to redefine what we mean by a defective product. He said that conforming to specifications ignores the cost of product variability and that further reduction of product variability is a veritable gold mine—just waiting to be mined. What did he mean?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
-
TAGUCHI LOSS FUNCTION
Gray Company estimates its hidden external failure costs using the Taguchi loss function. Gray produces plastic sheets that vary in thickness and grade. For one of its largevolume products, it was determined that k= $20,000 and T= 0.20 inches in diameter. A sample of four units produced the following values:
|
Unit No.
|
Actual Diameter (y)
|
|
1
|
0.23
|
|
2
|
0.22
|
|
3
|
0.18
|
|
4
|
0.19
|
Required:
1. Calculate the average loss per unit.
2. Assuming that 30,000 units were produced, what is the total hidden cost?
3. Assume that the multiplier for Gray’s hidden external failure costs is five. What are the measured external costs? Explain the difference between measured costs and hidden costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COST CLASSIFICATION
Classify the following quality costs as prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, or external failure costs:
1. Inspection of reworked units
2. Inspecting and testing a newly developed product (not yet being sold)
3. Retesting a reworked product
4. Repairing a computer still under warranty
5. Discount allowed to customers because products failed to meet customer specifications
6. Goods returned because they failed to meet specifications
7. The cost of evaluating and certifying suppliers
8. Stopping work to correct process malfunction (discovered using statistical process control procedures)
9. Testing products in the field
10. Discarding products that cannot be reworked
11. Lost sales because of recalled products
12. Inspection of incoming materials
13. Redesigning a product to eliminate the need to use an outside component with a high defect rate
14. Purchase order changes
15. Replacing a defective product
16. Inspecting and testing prototypes
17. Repairing products in the field
18. Correcting a design error discovered during product development
19. Engineering resources used to help selected suppliers improve their product quality
20. Packaging inspection
21. Processing and responding to consumer complaints
22. Training production line workers in new quality procedures
23. Sampling a batch of goods to determine if the batch has an acceptable defect rate
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY BASED QUALITY COSTING
Maxwell Company produces two different carburetors and is concerned about their quality. The company has identified the following quality activities and costs associated with the two products:
|
|
Carburetor A
|
Carburetor B
|
|
Units produced
|
170,000
|
340,000
|
|
Warranty work (units)
|
1,700
|
850
|
|
Scrapped units (number)
|
3,400
|
850
|
|
Inspection (hours)
|
3,400
|
1,700
|
|
Quality training (hours)
|
85
|
85
|
|
Activities:
|
|
|
|
Performing warranty work
|
$204,000
|
|
|
Scrapping units
|
153,000
|
|
|
Inspecting
|
76,500
|
|
|
Quality training
|
42,500
|
|
Required:
1. Calculate the quality cost per unit for each product, and break this unit cost into quality cost categories. Which of the two seems to have the lowest quality?
2. How might a manager use the unit quality cost information?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY IMPROVEMENT AND PROFITABILITY
Reading Company reported the following sales and quality costs for the past four years. Assume that all quality costs are variable and that all changes in the quality cost ratios are due to a quality improvement program.
|
Year
|
Sales Revenues
|
Quality Costs as a
Percent of Revenues
|
|
1
|
$10,000,000
|
21%
|
|
2
|
11,000,000
|
18
|
|
3
|
11,000,000
|
14
|
|
4
|
12,000,000
|
10
|
Required:
1. Compute the quality costs for all four years. By how much did net income increase from Year 1 to Year 2 because of quality improvements? From Year 2 to Year 3? From Year 3 to Year 4?
2. The management of Reading Company believes it is possible to reduce quality costs to 2.5 percent of sales. Assuming sales will continue at the Year 4 level, calculate the additional profit potential facing Reading. Is the expectation of improving quality and reducing costs to 2.5 percent of sales realistic? Explain.
3. Assume that Reading produces one type of product, which is sold on a bid basis. In Years 1 and 2, the average bid was $200. In Year 1, total variable costs were $125 per unit. In Year 3, competition forced the bid to drop to $190. Compute the total contribution margin in Year 3 assuming the same quality costs as in Year 1. Now, compute the total contribution margin in Year 3 using the actual quality costs for Year 3. What is the increase in profitability resulting from the quality improvements made from Year 1 to Year 3?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COSTS: PROFIT IMPROVEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION ACROSS CATEGORIES, GAINSHARING
Pawnee Company had sales of $30,000,000 in 2003. In 2007, sales had increased to $37,500,000. A quality improvement program was implemented at the beginning of 2003. Overall conformance quality was targeted for improvement. The quality costs for 2003 and 2007 follow. Assume any changes in quality costs are attributable to improvements in quality.
|
|
2003
|
2007
|
|
Internal failure costs
|
$2,250,000
|
$112,500
|
|
External failure costs
|
3,000,000
|
75,000
|
|
Appraisal costs
|
1,350,000
|
281,250
|
|
Prevention costs
|
900,000
|
468,750
|
|
Total quality costs
|
$7,500,000
|
$937,500
|
Required:
1. Compute the quality cost to sales ratio for each year. Is this type of improvement possible?
2. Calculate the relative distribution of costs by category for 2003. What do you think of the way costs are distributed? (A pie chart or bar graph may be of some help.) How do you think they will be distributed as the company approaches a zero defects state?
3. Calculate the relative distribution of costs by category for 2007. What do you think of the level and distribution of quality costs? (A pie chart or bar graph may be of some help.) Do you think further reductions are possible?
4. The quality manager for Pawnee indicated that the external failure costs reported are only the measured costs. He argued that the 2007 external costs were much higher than those reported and that additional investment ought to be made in control costs. Discuss the validity of his viewpoint.
5. Suppose that the manager of Pawnee received a bonus equal to 10 percent of the quality cost savings each year. Do you think that gainsharing is a good or a bad idea? Discuss the risks of gainsharing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRADE OFFS AMONG QUALITY COST CATEGORIES, TOTAL QUALITY CONTROL, GAINSHARING
Javier Company has sales of $8 million and quality costs of $1,600,000. The company is embarking on a major quality improvement program. During the next three years, Javier intends to attack failure costs by increasing its appraisal and prevention costs. The “right” prevention activities will be selected, and appraisal costs will be reduced according to the results achieved. For the coming year, management is considering six specific activities: quality training, process control, product inspection, supplier evaluation, prototype testing, and redesign of two major products. To encourage managers to focus on reducing non value added quality costs and select the right activities, a bonus pool is established relating to reduction of quality costs. The bonus pool is equal to 10 percent of the total reduction in quality costs.
Current quality costs and the costs of these six activities are given in the following table. Each activity is added sequentially so that its effect on the cost categories can be assessed. For example, after quality training is added, the control costs increase to $320,000, and the failure costs drop to $1,040,000. Even though the activities are presented sequentially, they are totally independent of each other. Thus, only beneficial activities need be selected.
|
|
Control Costs
|
Failure Costs
|
|
Current quality costs
|
$ 160,000
|
$1,440,000
|
|
Quality training
|
320,000
|
1,040,000
|
|
Process control
|
520,000
|
720,000
|
|
Product inspection
|
600,000
|
656,000
|
|
Supplier evaluation
|
720,000
|
200,000
|
|
Prototype testing
|
960,000
|
120,000
|
|
Engineering redesign
|
1,000,000
|
40,000
|
Required:
1. Identify the control activities that should be implemented, and calculate the total quality costs associated with this selection. Assume that an activity is selected only if it increases the bonus pool.
2. Given the activities selected in Requirement 1, calculate the following:
a. The reduction in total quality costs
b. The percentage distribution for control and failure costs
c. The amount for this year’s bonus pool
3. Suppose that a quality engineer complained about the gainsharing incentive system. Basically, he argued that the bonus should be based only on reductions of failure and appraisal costs. In this way, investment in prevention activities would be encouraged, and eventually, failure and appraisal costs would be eliminated. After eliminating the non value added costs, focus could then be placed on thelevel of prevention costs. If this approach were adopted, what activities would be selected? Do you agree or disagree with this approach? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MULTIPLE YEAR TREND REPORTS
The controller of Willson Company has computed quality costs as a percentage of sales for the past five years (2004 was the first year the company implemented a qualityimprovement program). This information is as follows:
|
|
Prevention
|
Appraisal
|
Internal Failure
|
External Failure
|
Total
|
|
2003
|
2%
|
3%
|
8.0%
|
12%
|
25.0%
|
|
2004
|
3
|
4
|
7.0
|
10
|
24.0
|
|
2005
|
4
|
5
|
5.5
|
6
|
20.5
|
|
2006
|
5
|
4
|
3.0
|
5
|
17.0
|
|
2007
|
6
|
3
|
1.0
|
2
|
12.0
|
Required:
1. Prepare a trend graph for total quality costs. Comment on what the graph has to say about the success of the quality improvement program.
2. Prepare a graph that shows the trend for each quality cost category. What does the graph have to say about the success of the quality improvement program? Does this graph supply more insight than the total cost trend graph does?
3. Prepare a graph that compares the trend in relative quality costs. What does this graph tell you?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COST REPORT, TAGUCHI LOSS FUNCTION
Marlene Briggs, president of Shorts Company, was concerned with the trend in sales and profitability. The company had been losing customers at an alarming rate. Furthermore, the company was barely breaking even. Investigation revealed that poor quality was at the root of the problem. At the end of 2007, Marlene decided to begin a quality improvement program. As a first step, she identified the following costs in the accounting records as quality related:
|
|
2007
|
|
Sales (400,000 units @ $100)
|
$40,000,000
|
|
Reinspection
|
1,200,000
|
|
Downtime (due to defects)
|
1,600,000
|
|
Vendor certification
|
480,000
|
|
Consumer complaints
|
800,000
|
|
Warranty
|
1,600,000
|
|
Test labor
|
1,200,000
|
|
Inspection labor
|
1,000,000
|
|
Design reviews
|
120,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare a quality cost report by quality cost category.
2. Calculate the relative distribution percentages for each quality cost category. Comment on the distribution.
3. Using the Taguchi loss function, an average loss per unit is computed to be $15 per unit. What are the hidden costs of external failure? How does this affect the relative distribution?
4. Shorts’s quality manager decided not to bother with the hidden costs. What do you think was his reasoning? Any efforts to reduce measured external failure costs will also reduce the hidden costs. Do you agree or disagree? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TAGUCHI LOSS FUNCTION
Timpanogas Company manufactures a component for small portable DVD players (designed for use on automobile trips). Weight and durability of the component are the two most important quality characteristics for the DVD manufacturers. With respect to the weight dimension, the component has a target value of 240 grams. Specification limits are 240 grams, plus or minus 10 grams. Products produced at the lower specification limit of 230 grams lose $40. A sample of five units produced the following weight measures:
|
Unit No.
|
Measured Weight
|
|
1
|
250
|
|
2
|
260
|
|
3
|
270
|
|
4
|
220
|
|
5
|
225
|
During the first quarter, 100,000 units were produced.
Required:
1. Calculate the loss for each unit. Calculate the average loss for the sample of five.
2. Using the average loss, calculate the hidden quality costs for the first quarter.
3. Durability is another important quality characteristic. The target value is 18,000 hours of operation before failure. The lower specification limit set by engineering and marketing is 17,000 hours. They agreed that there should be no upper specification limit. They also noted that there is a $750 loss at the lower specification limit. Explain why there would be no upper specification limit. Use the lowerlimit and the left half of the Taguchi quadratic loss function to estimate the loss for components with the following lives: 4,500 hours, 9,000 hours, and 13,500 hours. What does this reveal about the importance of durability?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
QUALITY COSTS, PRICING DECISIONS, MARKET SHARE
Gaston Company manufactures furniture. One of its product lines is an economy line kitchen table. During the last year, Gaston produced and sold 100,000 units for $100 per unit. Sales of the table are on a bid basis, but Gaston has always been able to win sufficient bids using the $100 price. This year, however, Gaston was losing more than its share of bids. Concerned, Larry Franklin, owner and president of the company, called a meeting of his executive committee (Megan Johnson, marketing manager; Fred Davis, quality manager; Kevin Jones, production manager; and Helen Jackson, controller).
LARRY: I don’t understand why we’re losing bids. Megan, do you have an explanation?
MEGAN: Yes, as a matter of fact. Two competitors have lowered their price to $92 per unit. That’s too big a difference for most of our buyers to ignore. If we want to keep selling our 100,000 units per year, we will need to lower our price to $92. Otherwise, our sales will drop to about 20,000 to 25,000 per year.
HELEN: The unit contribution margin on the table is $10. Lowering the price to $92 will cost us $8 per unit. Based on a sales volume of 100,000, we’d make $200,000 in contribution margin. If we keep the price at $100, our contribution margin would be $200,000 to $250,000. If we have to lose, let’s just take the lower market share. It’s better than lowering our prices.
MEGAN: Perhaps. But the same thing could happen to some of our other product lines. My sources tell me that these two companies are on the tail end of a major quality improvement program—one that allows them significant savings. We need to rethink our whole competitive strategy—at least if we want to stay in business. Ideally, we should match the price reduction and work to reduce the costs to recapture the lost contribution margin.
FRED: I think I have something to offer. We are about to embark on a new quality improvement program of our own. I have brought the following estimates of the current quality costs for this economy line. As you can see, these costs run about 16 percent of current sales. That’s excessive, and we believe that they can be reduced to about 4 percent of sales over time.
|
Scrap
|
$ 700,000
|
|
Rework
|
300,000
|
|
Rejects (sold as seconds to discount houses)
|
250,000
|
|
Returns (due to poor workmanship)
|
350,000
|
|
|
$1,600,000
|
LARRY: This sounds good. Fred, how long will it take for you to achieve this reduction?
FRED: All these costs vary with sales level, so I’ll express their reduction rate in those terms. Our best guess is that we can reduce these costs by about 1 percent of sales per quarter. So it should take about 12 quarters, or three years, to achieve the full benefit. Keep in mind that this is with an improvement in quality.
MEGAN: This offers us some hope. If we meet the price immediately, we can maintain our market share. Furthermore, if we can ever reach the point of reducing the price below the $92 level, then we can increase our market share. I estimate that we can increase sales by about 10,000 units for every $1 of price reduction beyond the $92 level. Kevin, how much extra capacity for this line do we have?
KEVIN: We can handle an extra 30,000 or 40,000 tables per year.
Required:
1. Assume that Gaston immediately reduces the bid price to $92. How long will it be before the unit contribution margin is restored to $10, assuming that quality costs are reduced as expected and that sales are maintained at 100,000 units per year (25,000 per quarter)?
2. Assume that Gaston holds the price at $92 until the 4 percent target is achieved. At this new level of quality costs, should the price be reduced? If so, by how much should the price be reduced, and what is the increase in contribution margin? Assume that price can be reduced only in $1 increments.
3. Assume that Gaston immediately reduces the price to $92 and begins the quality improvement program. Now, suppose that Gaston does not wait until the end of the 3 year period before reducing prices. Instead, prices will be reduced when profitable to do so. Assume that prices can be reduced only by $1 increments. Identify when the first future price change should occur (if any).
4. Discuss the differences in viewpoints concerning the decision to decrease prices and the short run contribution margin analysis done by Helen, the controller. Did quality cost information play an important role in the strategic decision making illustrated by the problem?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC VERSUS ABM
Timesaver, Inc., produces deluxe and regular microwaves. Recently, Timesaver has been losing market share with its regular microwaves because of competitors offering a product with the same quality and features but at a lower price. A careful market study revealed that if Timesaver could reduce its regular model price by $10 per unit, it would regain its former share of the market. Management, however, is convinced that any price reduction must be accompanied by a cost reduction of $10 so that per unit profitability is not affected. Earlene Day has indicated that poor overhead costing assignments may be distorting management’s view of each product’s cost and, therefore, the ability to know how to set selling prices. Earlene has identified the following overhead activities: machining, testing, and rework. The three activities, their costs, and practical capacities are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Cost
|
Practical Capacity
|
|
Machining
|
$1,800,000
|
150,000 machine hours
|
|
Testing
|
1,200,000
|
40,000 testing hours
|
|
Rework
|
600,000
|
20,000 rework hours
|
The consumption patterns of the two products are as follows:
|
|
Regular
|
Deluxe
|
|
Units
|
100,000
|
10,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
50,000
|
10,000
|
|
Testing hours
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Rework hours
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
Timesaver assigns overhead costs to the two products using a plantwide rate based on machine hours.
Required:
1. Calculate the unit overhead cost of the regular microwave product using machine hours to assign overhead costs. Now, repeat the calculation using ABC to assign overhead costs. Did improving the accuracy of cost assignments solve Timesaver’s competitive problem? What did it reveal?
2. Now, assume that in addition to improving the accuracy of cost assignments, Earlene observes that defective supplier components are the root cause of both the testing and rework activities. Suppose further that Timesaver has found a new supplier that provides higher quality components such that testing and rework costs are reduced by 50 percent. Now, calculate the cost of each product (assuming that testing and rework time are also reduced by 50 percent) using ABC. The relative consumption patterns also remain the same. Comment on the difference between ABC and ABM.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NON VALUE ADDED ACTIVITIES: NON VALUE ADDED COST
Honley Company has 20 clerks that work in its accounts payable department. A study revealed the following activities and the relative time demanded by each activity:
|
Activities
|
Percentage of
Clerical Time
|
|
Comparing purchase orders and receiving orders and invoices
|
15%
|
|
Resolving discrepancies among the three documents
|
70
|
|
Preparing checks for suppliers
|
10
|
|
Making journal entries and mailing checks
|
5
|
The average salary of a clerk is $30,000.
Required:
Classify the four activities as value added or non value added, and calculate the clerical cost of each activity. For non value added activities, indicate why they are non value added.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ROOT CAUSE (DRIVER) ANALYSIS
Honley Company has 20 clerks that work in its accounts payable department. A study revealed the following activities and the relative time demanded by each activity:
|
Activities
|
Percentage of
Clerical Time
|
|
Comparing purchase orders and receiving orders and invoices
|
15%
|
|
Resolving discrepancies among the three documents
|
70
|
|
Preparing checks for suppliers
|
10
|
|
Making journal entries and mailing checks
|
5
|
Required:
Suppose that clerical error—either Honley’s or the supplier’s—is the common root cause of the non value added activities. For each non value added activity, ask a series of “why” questions that identify clerical error as the activity’s root cause.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROCESS IMPROVEMENT/INNOVATION
Honley Company has 20 clerks that work in its accounts payable department. A study revealed the following activities and the relative time demanded by each activity: Suppose that clerical error is the common root cause of the non value added activities. Paying bills is a subprocess that belongs to the procurement process. The procurement process is made up of three subprocesses: purchasing, receiving, and paying bills.
|
Activities
|
Percentage of
Clerical Time
|
|
Comparing purchase orders and receiving orders and invoices
|
15%
|
|
Resolving discrepancies among the three documents
|
70
|
|
Preparing checks for suppliers
|
10
|
|
Making journal entries and mailing checks
|
5
|
The average salary of a clerk is $30,000.
Required:
1. What is the definition of a process? Identify the common objective for the procurement process. Repeat for each subprocess.
2. Now, suppose that Honley decides to attack the root cause of the non valueadded activities of the bill paying process by improving the skills of its purchasing and receiving clerks. As a result, the number of discrepancies found drops by 30 percent. Discuss the potential effect this initiative might have on the bill paying process. Does this initiative represent process improvement or process innovation? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
VALUE AND NON VALUE ADDED COSTS, UNUSED CAPACITY
For Situations 1 through 6, provide the following information:
a. An estimate of the non value added cost caused by each activity.
b. The root causes of the activity cost (such as plant layout, process design, and product design).
c. The appropriate cost reduction measure: activity elimination, activity reduction, activity sharing, or activity selection.
1. It takes 45 minutes and six pounds of material to produce a product using a traditional manufacturing process. A process reengineering study provided a new manufacturing process design (using existing technology) that would take 15 minutes and four pounds of material. The cost per labor hour is $12, and the cost per pound of material is $8.
2. With its original design, a product requires 15 hours of setup time. Redesigning the product could reduce the setup time to an absolute minimum of 30 minutes. The cost per hour of setup time is $200.
3. A product currently requires eight moves. By redesigning the manufacturing layout, the number of moves can be reduced from eight to zero. The cost per move is $10.
4. Inspection time for a plant is 8,000 hours per year. The cost of inspection consists of salaries of four inspectors, totaling $120,000. Inspection also uses supplies costing $2 per inspection hour. A supplier evaluation program, product redesign, and process redesign reduced the need for inspection by creating a zero defect environment.
5. Each unit of a product requires five components. The average number of components is 5.3 due to component failure, requiring rework and extra components. By developing relations with the right suppliers and increasing the quality of the purchased component, the average number of components can be reduced to five components per unit. The cost per component is $600.
6. A plant produces 100 different electronic products. Each product requires an average of eight components that are purchased externally. The components are different for each part. By redesigning the products, it is possible to produce the 100 products so that they all have four components in common. This will reduce the demand for purchasing, receiving, and paying bills. Estimated savings from the reduced demand are $900,000 per year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CALCULATION OF VALUE AND NON VALUEADDED COSTS, ACTIVITY VOLUME AND UNUSED CAPACITY VARIANCES
Calculo produces a variety of pocket PCs. Due to competitive pressures, the company is implementing an activity based management (ABM) system with the objective of reducing costs. ABM focuses attention on processes and activities. Inspecting incoming goods was among the processes (activities) that were carefully studied. The study revealed that the number of inspection hours was a good driver for inspecting goods. During the last year, the company incurred fixed inspection costs of $400,000 (salaries of 10 employees). The fixed costs provide a capacity of 20,000 hours (2,000 per employee at practical capacity). Management decided that inspecting incoming goods is a non value added activity. The number of actual inspection hours used in the most recent period was 18,000.
Required:
1. Calculate the volume and unused capacity variances for inspecting. Explain what each variance means.
2. Prepare a report that presents value added, non value added, and actual costs for inspecting. Explain why highlighting the non value added costs is important.
3. Explain why inspecting should be viewed as a non value added activity. In providing your explanation, consider the following counterargument: “Inspecting incoming goods adds value because it reduces the demand for other unnecessary activities such as rework, reordering, and warranty work.”
4. Assume that management is able to reduce the demand for the inspecting activity so that the actual hours needed drop from 18,000 to 9,000. What actions should now be taken regarding activity capacity management?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TREND REPORT, NON VALUE ADDED COSTS
Zurcher Company has developed value added standards for four activities: purchasing parts, receiving parts, moving parts, and setting up equipment. The activities, the activity drivers, the standard and actual quantities, and the price standards for 2006 are as follows: Suppose that for 2007, Zurcher Company has chosen suppliers that provide higher quality parts and redesigned its plant layout to reduce material movement. Additionally, Zurcher implemented a new setup procedure and provided training for its purchasing agents. As a consequence, less setup time is required and fewer purchasing mistakes are made. At the end of 2007, the following information is provided:
|
Activities
|
Activity Driver
|
SQ
|
AQ
|
SP
|
|
Purchasing parts
|
Purchase orders
|
1,000
|
1,400
|
$150
|
|
Receiving parts
|
Receiving orders
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
100
|
|
Moving parts
|
Number of moves
|
0
|
1,000
|
200
|
|
Setting up equipment
|
Setup hours
|
0
|
4,000
|
60
|
The actual prices paid per unit of each activity driver were equal to the standard prices.
Suppose that for 2007, Zurcher Company has chosen suppliers that provide higher quality parts and redesigned its plant layout to reduce material movement. Additionally, Zurcher implemented a new setup procedure and provided training for its purchasing agents. As a consequence, less setup time is required and fewer purchasing mistakes are made. At the end of 2007, the following information is provided:
|
Activities
|
Activity Driver
|
SQ
|
AQ
|
SP
|
|
Purchasing parts
|
Purchase orders
|
1,000
|
1,200
|
$150
|
|
Receiving parts
|
Receiving orders
|
2,000
|
2,400
|
100
|
|
Moving parts
|
Number of moves
|
0
|
400
|
200
|
|
Setting up equipment
|
Setup hours
|
0
|
1,000
|
60
|
Required:
1. Prepare a report that compares the non value added costs for 2007 with those of 2006.
2. What is the role of activity reduction for non value added activities? For valueadded activities?
3. Comment on the value of a trend report.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
IMPLEMENTATION OF ACTIVITY BASED MANAGEMENT
Jane Erickson, manager of an electronics division, was not pleased with the results that had recently been reported concerning the division’s activity based management implementation project. For one thing, the project had taken eight months longer than projected and had exceeded the budget by nearly 35 percent. But even more vexatious was the fact that after all was said and done, about three fourths of the plants were reporting that the activity based product costs were not much different for most of the products than those of the old costing system. Plant managers were indicating that they were continuing to use the old costs as they were easier to compute and understand. Yet, at the same time, they were complaining that they were having a hard time meeting the bids of competitors. Reliable sources were also revealing that the division’s product costs were higher than many competitors’. This outcome perplexed plant managers because their control system still continued to report favorable materials and labor efficiency variances. They complained that ABM had failed to produce any significant improvement
in cost performance. Jane decided to tour several of the plants and talk with the plant managers. After the tour, she realized that her managers did not understand the concept of non valueadded costs nor did they have a good grasp of the concept of kaizen costing. No efforts were being made to carefully consider the activity information that had been produced. One typical plant manager threw up his hands and said: “This is too much data. Why should I care about all this detail? I do not see how this can help me improve my plant’s performance. They tell me that inspection is not a necessary activity and does not add value. I simply can’t believe that inspecting isn’t value added and necessary. If we did not inspect, we would be making and sending more bad products to customers.”
Required:
Explain why Jane’s division is having problems with its ABM implementation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINANCIAL BASED VERSUS ACTIVITY BASED RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING
For each of the following situations, two scenarios are described, labeled A and B. Choose which scenario is descriptive of a setting corresponding to activity based responsibility accounting and which is descriptive of financial based responsibility accounting. Provide a brief commentary on the differences between the two systems for each situation, addressing the possible advantages of the activity based view over the financial based view.
Situation 1
A: The purchasing manager, receiving manager, and accounts payable manager are given joint responsibility for procurement. The charges given to the group of managers are to reduce costs of acquiring materials, decrease the time required to obtain materials from outside suppliers, and reduce the number of purchasing mistakes (e.g., wrong type of materials or the wrong quantities ordered).
B: The plant manager commended the manager of the grinding department for increasing his department’s machine utilization rates—and doing so without exceeding the department’s budget. The plant manager then asked other department managers to make an effort to obtain similar efficiency improvements.
Situation 2
A: Delivery mistakes had been reduced by 70 percent, saving over $40,000 per year. Furthermore, delivery time to customers had been cut by two days. According to company policy, the team responsible for the savings was given a bonus equal to 25 percent of the savings attributable to improving delivery quality. Company policy also provided a salary increase of 1 percent for every day saved in delivery time.
B: Bill Johnson, manager of the product development department, was pleased with his department’s performance on the last quarter’s projects. They had managed to complete all projects under budget, virtually assuring Bill of a fat bonus, just in time to help with this year’s Christmas purchases.
Situation 3
A: “Harvey, don’t worry about the fact that your department is producing at only 70 percent capacity. Increasing your output would simply pile up inventory in front of the next production department. That would be costly for the organization as a whole. Sometimes, one department must reduce its performance so that the performance of the entire organization can improve.”
B: “Susan, I am concerned about the fact that your department’s performance measures have really dropped over the past quarter. Labor usage variances are unfavorable, and I also see that your machine utilization rates are down. Now, I know you are not a bottleneck department, but I get a lot of flack when my managers’ efficiency ratings drop.”
Situation 4
A: Colby was muttering to himself. He had just received last quarter’s budgetary performance report. Once again, he had managed to spend more than budgeted for both materials and labor. The real question now was how to improve his performance for the next quarter.
B: Great! Cycle time had been reduced and, at the same time, the number of defective products had been cut by 35 percent. Cutting the number of defects reduced production costs by more than planned. Situation 5
A: Cambry was furious. An across the board budget cut! “How can they expect me to provide the computer services required on less money? Management is convinced that costs are out of control, but I would like to know where—at least in my department!”
B: After a careful study of the accounts payable department, it was discovered that 80 percent of an accounts payable clerk’s time was spent resolving discrepancies between the purchase order, receiving document, and the supplier’s invoice. Other activities such as recording and preparing checks consumed only 20 percent of a clerk’s time. A redesign of the procurement process eliminated virtually all discrepancies and produced significant cost savings.
Situation 6
A: Five years ago, the management of Breeann Products commissioned an outside engineering consulting firm to conduct a time and motion study so that labor efficiency standards could be developed and used in production. These labor efficiency standards are still in use today and are viewed by management as an important indicator of productive efficiency.
Trends were favorable for all three performance measures.
B: Janet was quite satisfied with this quarter’s labor performance. When compared with the same quarter of last year, labor productivity had increased by 23 percent. Most of the increase was due to a new assembly approach suggested by production line workers. She was also pleased to see that materials productivity had increased. The increase in materials productivity was attributed to reducing scrap because of improved quality.
Situation 7
A: “The system converts materials into products, not people at work stations. Therefore, process efficiency is more important than labor efficiency—but we also must pay particular attention to those who use the products we produce, whether inside or outside the firm.”
B: “I was quite happy to see a revenue increase of 15 percent over last year, especially when the budget called for a 10 percent increase. However, after reading the recent copy of our trade journal, I now wonder whether we are doing so well. I found out that the market expanded by 30 percent, and our leading competitor increased its sales by 40 percent.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABM IMPLEMENTATION, ACTIVITY ANALYSIS, ACTIVITY DRIVERS, DRIVER ANALYSIS, BEHAVIORAL EFFECTS
Joseph Fox, controller of Thorpe Company, has been in charge of a project to install an activity based cost management system. This new system is designed to support the company’s efforts to become more competitive. For the past six weeks, he and the project committee members have been identifying and defining activities, associating workers with activities, and assessing the time and resources consumed by individual activities. Now, he and the project committee are focusing on three additional implementation issues: (1) identifying activity drivers, (2) assessing value content, and (3) identifying cost drivers (root causes). Joseph has assigned a committee member the responsibilities of assessing the value content of five activities, choosing a suitable activity driver for each activity, and identifying the possible root causes
of the activities. Following are the five activities with possible activity drivers:
|
Activity
|
Possible Activity Drivers
|
|
Setting up equipment
|
Setup time, number of setups
|
|
Performing warranty work
|
Warranty hours, number of defective units
|
|
Welding subassemblies
|
Welding hours, subassemblies welded
|
|
Moving materials
|
Number of moves, distance moved
|
|
Inspecting components
|
Hours of inspection, number of defective components
|
The committee member ran a regression analysis for each potential activity driver, using the method of least squares to estimate the variable and fixed cost components. In all five cases, costs were highly correlated with the potential drivers. Thus, all drivers appeared to be good candidates for assigning costs to products. The company plans to reward production managers for reducing product costs.
Required:
1. What is the difference between an activity driver and a cost driver? In answering the question, describe the purpose of each type of driver.
2. For each activity, assess the value content and classify each activity as value added or non value added (justify the classification). Identify some possible root causes of each activity, and describe how this knowledge can be used to improve activity performance. For purposes of discussion, assume that the value added activities are not performed with perfect efficiency.
3. Describe the behavior that each activity driver will encourage, and evaluate the suitability of that behavior for the company’s objective of becoming more competitive.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABM, KAIZEN COSTING
Daspart, Inc. supplies carburetors for a large automobile manufacturing company. The auto company has recently requested that Daspart decrease its delivery time. Daspart made a commitment to reduce the lead time for delivery from eight days to two days. To help achieve this goal, engineering and production workers had made the commitment to reduce time for the setup activity (other activities such as moving materials and rework were also being examined simultaneously). Current setup times were 12 hours.
Setup cost was $300 per setup hour. For the first quarter, engineering developed a new process design that it believed would reduce the setup time from 12 hours to eight hours. After implementing the design, the actual setup time dropped from 12 hours to nine hours. In the second quarter, production workers suggested a new setup procedure. Engineering gave the suggestion a positive evaluation, and they projected that the new approach would save an additional five hours of setup time. Setup labor was trained to perform the new setup procedures. The actual reduction in setup time based on the suggested changes was six hours.
Required:
1. What kaizen setup standard would be used at the beginning of each quarter?
2. Describe the kaizen subcycle using the two quarters of data provided by Daspart.
3. Describe the maintenance subcycle using the two quarters of data provided by Daspart.
4. How much non value added cost was eliminated by the end of two quarters? Discuss the role of kaizen costing in activity based management.
5. Explain why kaizen costing is compatible with activity based responsibility accounting while standard costing is compatible with financial based responsibility accounting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY FLEXIBLE BUDGETING, PERFORMANCE REPORT, VOLUME VARIANCE
Innovator, Inc., wants to develop an activity flexible budget for the activity of moving materials. Innovator uses eight forklifts to move materials from receiving to stores. The forklifts are also used to move materials from stores to the production area. The forklifts are obtained through an operating lease that costs $12,000 per year per forklift. Innovator employs 25 forklift operators who receive an average salary of $45,000 per year, including benefits. Each move requires the use of a crate. The crates are used to store the parts and are emptied only when used in production. Crates are disposed of after one cycle (two moves), where a cycle is defined as a move from receiving to stores to production. Each crate costs $1.20. Fuel for a forklift costs $1.80 per gallon. A gallon of gas is used every 20 moves. Forklifts can make three moves per hour and are available for 280 days per year, 24 hours per day (the remaining time is downtime for various reasons). Each operator works 40 hours per week and 50 weeks per year.
Required:
1. Prepare a flexible budget for the activity of moving materials, using the number of cycles as the activity driver.
2. Calculate the activity capacity for moving materials. Suppose Innovator works 90 percent of activity capacity and incurs the following costs:
|
Salaries
|
$1,170,000
|
|
Leases
|
96,000
|
|
Crates
|
91,200
|
|
Fuel
|
14,450
|
Prepare the budget for the 90 percent level and then prepare a performance report for the moving materials activity.
3. Calculate and interpret the volume variance for moving materials.
4. Suppose that a redesign of the plant layout reduces the demand for moving materials to one third of the original capacity. What would be the budget formula for this new activity level? What is the budgeted cost for this new activity level? Has activity performance improved? How does this activity performance evaluation differ from that described in Requirement 2? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
VALUE ADDED AND KAIZEN STANDARDS, NON VALUEADDED COSTS, VOLUME VARIANCE, UNUSED CAPACITY
Tom Young, vice president of Dunn Company (a producer of plastic products), has been supervising the implementation of an activity based cost management system. One of Tom’s objectives is to improve process efficiency by improving the activities that has decided to focus on two processes: production and customer service.
Within each process, one activity will be selected for improvement: molding for production and sustaining engineering for customer service. (Sustaining engineers are responsible for redesigning products based on customer needs and feedback.) Valueadded standards are identified for each activity. For molding, the value added standard calls for nine pounds per mold. (Although the products differ in shape and function, their size, as measured by weight, is uniform.) The value added standard is based on the elimination of all waste due to defective molds (materials is by far the major cost for the molding activity). The standard price for molding is $15 per pound. For sustaining engineering, the standard is 60 percent of current practical activity capacity. This standard is based on the fact that about 40 percent of the complaints have to do with design features that could have been avoided or anticipated by the company.
Current practical capacity (at the end of 2006) is defined by the following requirements: 18,000 engineering hours for each product group that has been on the market or in development for five years or less, and 7,200 hours per product group of more than five years. Four product groups have less than five years’ experience, and 10 product groups have more. There are 72 engineers, each paid a salary of $70,000. Each engineer can provide 2,000 hours of service per year. There are no other significant costs for the engineering activity.
For 2006, actual pounds used for molding were 25 percent above the level called for by the value added standard; engineering usage was 138,000 hours. There were 240,000 units of output produced. Tom and the operational managers have selected some improvement measures that promise to reduce non value added activity usage by 30 percent in 2007. Selected actual results achieved for 2007 are as follows:
|
Units produced
|
240,000
|
|
Pounds of material
|
2,600,000
|
|
Engineering hours
|
126,200
|
The actual prices paid per pound and per engineering hour are identical to the standard or budgeted prices.
Required:
1. For 2006, calculate the non value added usage and costs for molding and sustaining engineering. Also, calculate the cost of unused capacity for the engineering activity.
2. Using the targeted reduction, establish kaizen standards for molding and engineering (for 2007).
3. Using the kaizen standards prepared in Requirement 2, compute the 2007 usage variances, expressed in both physical and financial measures, for molding and engineering. (For engineering, explain why it is necessary to compare actual resource usage with the kaizen standard.) Comment on the company’s ability to achieve its targeted reductions. In particular, discuss what measures the company must take to capture any realized reductions in resource usage.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BENCHMARKING AND NON VALUE ADDED COSTS, TARGET COSTING
Karebien, Inc., has two plants that manufacture a line of hospital beds. One is located in St. Louis and the other in Oklahoma City. Each plant is set up as a profit center. During the past year, both plants sold the regular model for $810. Sales volume averages 20,000 units per year in each plant. Recently, the St. Louis plant reduced the price of the regular model to $720. Discussion with the St. Louis manager revealed that the price reduction was possible because the plant had reduced its manufacturing and selling costs by reducing what was called “non value added costs.” The St. Louis plant’s manufacturing and selling costs for the regular model were $630 per unit. The St. Louis manager offered to loan the Oklahoma City plant his cost accounting manager to helpit achieve similar results. The Oklahoma City plant manager readily agreed, knowing that his plant must keep pace—not only with the St. Louis plant but also with competitors. A local competitor had also reduced its price on a similar model, and Oklahoma City’s marketing manager had indicated that the price must be matched or sales would drop dramatically. In fact, the marketing manager suggested that if the price were dropped to $702 by the end of the year, the plant could expand its share of the market by 20 percent. The plant manager agreed but insisted that the current profit per unit must be maintained. He also wants to know if the plant can at least match the $630 per unit cost of the St. Louis plant and if the plant can achieve the cost reduction using the approach of the St. Louis plant.
The plant controller and the St. Louis cost accounting manager have assembled the following data for the most recent year. The actual cost of inputs, their value added (ideal) quantity levels, and the actual quantity levels are provided (for production of 20,000 units). Assume there is no difference between actual prices of activity units and standard prices.
|
|
SQ
|
AQ
|
Actual Cost
|
|
Materials (lbs.)
|
427,500
|
450,000
|
$ 9,450,000
|
|
Labor (hrs.)
|
102,600
|
108,000
|
1,350,000
|
|
Setups (hrs.)
|
—
|
7,200
|
540,000
|
|
Materials handling (moves)
|
—
|
18,000
|
1,260,000
|
|
Warranties (no. repaired)
|
—
|
18,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
Total
|
|
|
$14,400,000
|
Required:
1. Calculate the target cost for expanding the Oklahoma City market share by 20 percent, assuming that the per unit profitability is maintained as requested by the plant manager.
2. Calculate the non value added cost per unit. Assuming that non value added costs can be reduced to zero, can the Oklahoma City plant match the St. Louis plant’s per unit cost? Can the target cost for expanding market share be achieved? What actions would you take if you were the plant manager?
3. Describe the role benchmarking played in the effort of the Oklahoma City plant to protect and improve its competitive position.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYBER RESEARCH CASE
The objective of benchmarking is to improve performance by identifying, understanding, and adopting outstanding best practices from others. If this process is carried out inside the organization, then it is called internal benchmarking. It is not uncommon for one facility within an organization to have better practices than another. Unfortunately, it is unusual for these better practices to naturally spread throughout the organization. The American Productivity & Quality Center (APQC) has conducted a study to understand what prevents the transfer of practices within a company. It also has made some recommendations concerning internal benchmarking.
Required:
Access Internet resources to see if you can answer the following:
1. Why is internal benchmarking an attractive option for an organization?
2. Why do companies want to engage in internal benchmarking?
3. What are some of the organizational obstacles relating to internal benchmarking?
4. Identify some recommendations that will make internal transfers of best practices more effective.
5. Internal benchmarking is a prominent example of what is called knowledge management or knowledge sharing. Use the APQC site and other Internet resources to define knowledge management (or knowledge sharing). Now, go to KnowledgeLeader and Internal Audit and Risk Management Community and describe its external knowledge sharing service. (Alternatively, you may also wish to access and describe Ernst & Young’s knowledge sharing service called “Ernie.”)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYCLE TIME AND CONVERSION COST PER UNIT
The theoretical cycle time for a product is 48 minutes per unit. The budgeted conversion costs for the manufacturing cell dedicated to the product are $4,320,000 per year. The total labor minutes available are 960,000. During the year, the cell was able to produce 0.60 unit of the product per hour. Suppose also that production incentives exist to minimize unit product costs.
Required:
1. Compute the theoretical conversion cost per unit.
2. Compute the applied conversion cost per minute (the amount of conversion cost actually assigned to the product).
3. Discuss how this approach to assigning conversion cost can improve delivery time performance. Explain how conversion cost acts as a performance driver for ontime deliveries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CYCLE TIME AND VELOCITY, MCE
A manufacturing plant has the theoretical capability to produce 54,000 printers per quarter but currently produces 20,250 units. The conversion cost per quarter is $2,430,000. There are 13,500 production hours available within the plant per quarter. In addition to the processing minutes per unit used, the production of printers uses nine minutes of move time, six minutes of wait time, and 10 minutes of rework time. (All work is done by cell workers.)
Required:
1. Compute the theoretical and actual velocities (per hour) and the theoretical and actual cycle times (minutes per unit produced).
2. Compute the ideal and actual amounts of conversion cost assigned per printer.
3. Calculate MCE. How does MCE relate to the conversion cost per printer?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MCE, EXPRESSION OF A TESTABLE STRATEGY, DOUBLE LOOP FEEDBACK
A manufacturing plant has the theoretical capability to produce 54,000 printers per quarter but currently produces 20,250 units. The conversion cost per quarter is $2,430,000. There are 13,500 production hours available within the plant per quarter. In addition to the processing minutes per unit used, the production of printers uses nine minutes of move time, six minutes of wait time, and 10 minutes of rework time. (All work is done by cell workers.). Assume that the company identifies poor plant layout as the root cause of Required:
1. Express an improvement strategy as a series of if then statements that will reduce the conversion cost per printer.
2. Assume that you set an MCE target of 60 percent, based on the improvement strategy described in Requirement 1. What is the expected conversion cost per unit? Explain how you can use these targets to test the viability of your quality improvement strategy. wait time and move time.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TESTABLE STRATEGY, STRATEGY MAP
Consider the following quality improvement strategy as expressed by a series of if then statements:
• If design engineers receive quality training, then they can redesign products to reduce the number of defective units.
• If the number of defective units is reduced, then customer satisfaction will increase.
• If customer satisfaction increases, then market share will increase.
• If market share increases, then sales will increase.
• If sales increase, then profits will increase.
Required:
1. Prepare a strategy map that shows the cause and effect relationships of the quality improvement strategy (see Exhibit 13 11 for an illustrative example).
2. Explain how the quality improvement strategy can be tested.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BALANCED SCORECARD, STRATEGY TRANSLATION, STRATEGY MAP, DOUBLE LOOP FEEDBACK
Bannister Company, an electronics firm, buys circuit boards and manually inserts various electronic devices into the printed circuit board. Bannister sells its products to original equipment manufacturers. Profits for the last two years have been less than expected. Mandy Confer, owner of Bannister, was convinced that her firm needed to adopt a revenue growth and cost reduction strategy to increase overall profits. After a careful review of her firm’s condition, Mandy realized that the main obstacle for increasing revenues and reducing costs was the high defect rate of her products (a 6 percent reject rate). She was certain that revenues would grow if the defect rate was reduced dramatically. Costs would also decline as there would be fewer rejects and less rework. By decreasing the defect rate, customer satisfaction would increase, causing, in turn, an increase in market share. Mandy also felt that the following actions were needed to help ensure the success of the revenue growth and cost reduction strategy:
a. Improve the soldering capabilities by sending employees to an outside course.
b. Redesign the insertion process to eliminate some of the common mistakes.
c. Improve the procurement process by selecting suppliers that provide higherquality circuit boards.
Required:
1. State the revenue growth and cost reduction strategy using a series of cause andeffect relationships expressed as if then statements.
2. Illustrate the strategy using a strategy map.
3. Explain how the revenue growth strategy can be tested. In your explanation, discuss the role of lead and lag measures, targets, and double loop feedback.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE ON ROI AND RESIDUAL INCOME, ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS
Grate Care Company specializes in producing products for personal grooming. The company operates six divisions, including the Hair Products Division. Each division is treated as an investment center. Managers are evaluated and rewarded on the basis of ROI performance. Only those managers who produce the best ROIs are selected to receive bonuses and to fill higher level managerial positions. Fred Olsen, manager of the Hair Products Division, has always been one of the top performers. For the past two years, Fred’s division has produced the largest ROI; last year, the division earned an operating income of $2.56 million and employed average operating assets valued at $16 million. Fred is pleased with his division’s performance and has been told that if the division does well this year, he will be in line for a headquarters position.
For the coming year, Fred’s division has been promised new capital totaling $1.5 million. Any of the capital not invested by the division will be invested to earn the company’s required rate of return (9 percent). After some careful investigation, the marketing and engineering staff recommended that the division invest in equipment that could be used to produce a crimping and waving iron, a product currently not produced by the division. The cost of the equipment was estimated at $1.2 million. The division’s marketing manager estimated operating earnings from the new line to be $156,000 per year.
After receiving the proposal and reviewing the potential effects, Fred turned it down. He then wrote a memo to corporate headquarters, indicating that his division would not be able to employ the capital in any new projects within the next eight to 10 months. He did note, however, that he was confident that his marketing and engineering staff would have a project ready by the end of the year. At that time, he would like to have access to the capital.
Required:
1. Explain why Fred Olsen turned down the proposal to add the capability of producing a crimping and waving iron. Provide computations to support your reasoning.
2. Compute the effect that the new product line would have on the profitability of the firm as a whole. Should the division have produced the crimping and waving iron?
3. Suppose that the firm used residual income as a measure of divisional performance. Do you think Fred’s decision might have been different? Why?
4. Explain why a firm like Grate Care might decide to use both residual income and return on investment as measures of performance.
5. Did Fred display ethical behavior when he turned down the investment? In discussing this issue, consider why he refused to allow the investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COLLABORATIVE LEARNING EXERCISE
Lynsar Corporation started as a single plant that produced the major components assembled into electric motors—the company’s main product. Lynsar later expanded by developing outside markets for some of the components used in its motors. Eventually, Lynsar reorganized into four manufacturing divisions: Bearing, Casing, Switch, and Motor. Each of the four manufacturing divisions operates as an autonomous unit, and divisional performance is the basis for year end bonuses.
Lynsar’s transfer pricing policy permits the manufacturing divisions to sell externally to outside customers as well as internally to the other divisions. The price for goods transferred between divisions is to be negotiated between the buying and selling divisions without any interference from top management.
Lynsar’s profits have dropped for the current year even though sales have increased, and the drop in profits can be traced almost entirely to the Motor Division. Jere Feldon, Lynsar’s chief financial officer, has discovered that the Motor Division has purchased switches for its motors from an outside supplier during the current year rather than buying them from the Switch Division. The Switch Division is at capacity and has refused to sell the switches to the Motor Division because it can sell them to outside customers at a price higher than the actual full (absorption) manufacturing cost that has always been negotiated in the past with the Motor Division. When the Motor Division refused to meet the price the Switch Division was receiving from its outside buyer, the Motor Division had to purchase the switches from an outside supplier at an even higher price.
Jere is reviewing Lynsar’s transfer pricing policy because he believes that suboptimization has occurred. While the Switch Division made the correct decision to maximize its divisional profit by not transferring the switches at actual full manufacturing cost, this decision was not necessarily in the best interest of Lynsar. The Motor Division paid more for the switches than the selling price the Switch Division charged its outside customers. The Motor Division has always been Lynsar’s largest division and has tended to dominate the smaller divisions. Jere has learned that the Casing and Bearing divisions are also resisting the Motor Division’s desires to continue using actual full manufacturing cost as the negotiated price.
Jere has requested that the corporate accounting department study alternative transfer pricing methods that would promote overall goal congruence, motivate divisional management performance, and optimize overall company performance. Three of the transfer pricing methods being considered are listed below. If one of these methods should be selected, it would be applied uniformly across all divisions.
a. Standard full manufacturing costs plus markup
b. Market selling price of the products being transferred
c. Outlay (out of pocket) costs incurred to the point of transfer plus opportunity cost per unit
Required:
Form a group of six students. First, brainstorm answers to the following three requirements. Then, split your group into three pairs; each pair is responsible for writing up the answer to one of the requirements and turning it in as part of a group assignment for the following class period.
1. a. Discuss both the positive and negative behavioral implications that can arise from employing a negotiated transfer pricing system for goods that are exchanged between divisions.
b. Explain the behavioral problems that can arise from using actual full (absorption) manufacturing costs as a transfer price.
2. Discuss the behavioral problems that could arise if Lynsar Corporation decides to change from its current policy covering the transfer of goods between divisions to a revised transfer pricing policy that would apply uniformly to all divisions.
3. Discuss the likely behavior of both “buying” and “selling” divisional managers for each of the following transfer pricing methods being considered by Lynsar Corporation.
a. Standard full manufacturing costs plus markup
b. Market selling price of the products being transferred
c. Outlay (out of pocket) costs incurred to the point of transfer plus opportunity cost per unit
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
STRATEGIC COST MANAGEMENT, TARGET COSTING
Assume that a firm has the following activities and associated cost behaviors:
|
Activities
|
Cost Behavior
|
|
Assembling components
|
$10 per direct labor hour
|
|
Setting up equipment
|
Variable: $100 per setup
|
|
|
Step fixed: $30,000 per step, 1 step = 10 setups
|
|
Receiving goods
|
Step fixed: $40,000 per step, 1 step = 2,000 hours
|
Activities with step cost behavior are being fully utilized by existing products. Thus, any new product demands will increase resource spending on these activities.
Two designs are being considered for a new product: Design I and Design II. The following information is provided about each design (1,000 units of the product will be produced):
|
Activity Driver
|
Design I
|
Design II
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
3,000
|
2,000
|
|
Number of setups
|
10
|
20
|
|
Receiving hours
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
The company has recently developed a cost equation for manufacturing costs using direct labor hours as the driver. The equation has R2 = 0.60 and is as follows:
Y = $150,000 + $20X
Required:
1. Suppose that Design Engineering is told that only direct labor hours drive manufacturing costs (based on the direct labor cost equation). Compute the cost of each design. Which design would be chosen based on this unit based cost assumption?
2. Now compute the cost of each design using all driver and activity information. Which design will now be chosen? Are there any other implications associated with the use of the more complete activity information set?
3. Consider the following statement: “Strategic cost analysis should exploit internal linkages.” What does this mean? Explain, using the results of Requirements 1 and 2.
4. An outside consultant indicated that target costing ought to be used in the design stage. Explain what target costing is, and describe how it requires an understanding of both supplier and customer linkages.
5. What other information would be useful to have concerning the two designs? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BACKFLUSH COSTING
Foster Company has implemented a JIT system and is considering the use of backflush costing. Foster had the following transactions for the first quarter of the current fiscal year. (Conversion cost variances are recognized quarterly.)
1. Purchased raw materials on account for $400,000.
2. Placed all materials received into production.
3. Incurred actual direct labor costs of $60,000.
4. Incurred actual overhead costs of $400,000.
5. Applied conversion costs of $470,000.
6. Completed all work for the month.
7. Sold all completed work.
8. Computed the difference between actual and applied costs.
Required:
Prepare journal entries for Variations 2 and 4 of backflush costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
STRATEGIC POSITIONING
San Jose Goodwill Bank has been experiencing significant competition from nonbanking financial service providers such as mutual funds. As a result, interest rates were lower, and the bank found it more difficult to maintain or increase deposits. Profits had declined for the past two years. Concerned about the situation, the bank’s executive managers commissioned a consulting group to assess the profitability of the bank’s products and customers. The consulting group implemented an ABC system that traced costs to both products and customers. An ABC customer profitability analysis rated the customers on a scale of one to five, with one being the most lucrative. Customers in the number one category earned an average profit of $1,500 per year for the bank, while customers in the fifth category were costing the bank an average of $500 per year. The consulting group also conducted a marketing survey and discovered that the higherend customers were leaving for banks that offered a broader range of financial products.
Armed with the financial and marketing information provided by the consulting group, the banking executives decided to implement the following:
1. Broaden the markets to include investment and insurance products. The goal was to become a complete financial services provider to stop the loss of the higherend customers. The broadening would also reduce the dependence of the bank on interest based revenue. (Investment and insurance products produce fee based revenues.)
2. Alter the customer mix by targeting only the upper three customer segments.
3. Set the bank apart from competitors by offering special, high quality services to targeted customers:13
a. The upper segment of customers will be classfied as “Premier One” and will be issued a gold card. When presenting the card to a concierge at the door, the customer will be taken to a special teller window with no line, or to the desk of a specially trained bank officer.
b. For the highest end customers, no questions asked refunds on fees that they think they shouldn’t pay (categories one and two). Middle end customers can negotiate. Low end customers must pay the fees (categories four and five).
c. Provide secret, toll free “VIP” numbers to customers in the Premier One category. In this way, they will Required:
1. Describe the strategic positioning of San Jose Goodwill Bank in terms of the three general strategies: cost leadership, differentiation, and focusing. Of the three, which one(s) are apparently receiving the most emphasis?
2. Describe the role of cost management in defining the strategic position of the bank. What role do you think cost management will play as the bank attempts to establish and enhance its strategic position? have immediate access to a bank official for any inquiry they may have.
d. Impose a $4 teller fee for lower end customers (categories four and five).
4. Improve operating efficiency by increasing productivity and eliminating costs that produce no revenues.
Required:
1. Describe the strategic positioning of San Jose Goodwill Bank in terms of the three general strategies: cost leadership, differentiation, and focusing. Of the three, which one(s) are apparently receiving the most emphasis?
2. Describe the role of cost management in defining the strategic position of the bank. What role do you think cost management will play as the bank attempts to establish and enhance its strategic position?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EXTERNAL LINKAGES, ACTIVITY BASED SUPPLIER COSTING
Aldredge Company manufactures dental equipment. Aldredge produces all the components necessary for the production of its product except for one. This component is purchased from two local suppliers: Grayson Machining and Lambert, Inc. Grayson sells the component for $144 per unit, while Lambert sells the same component for $129. Because of the lower price, Aldredge purchases 80 percent of its components from Lambert. Aldredge purchases the remaining 20 percent from Grayson to ensure an alternative source. The total annual demand is 1,000,000 components.
Grayson’s sales manager is pushing Aldredge to purchase more of its units, arguing that its component is of much higher quality and so should prove to be less costly than Lambert’s lower quality component. Grayson has sufficient capacity to supply all the components needed and is asking for a long term contract. With a 5 year contract for 800,000 or more units, Grayson will sell the component for $135 per unit with a contractual provision for an annual product specific inflationary adjustment. Aldredge’s purchasing manager is intrigued by the offer and wonders if the higher quality component actually does cost less than the lower quality Lambert component. To help assess the cost effect of the two components, the following data were collected for quality related activities and suppliers:
I. Activity data:
|
Activity
|
Cost
|
|
Inspecting components (sampling only)
|
$ 1,200,000
|
|
Expediting work (due to late delivery)
|
960,000
|
|
Reworking products (due to failed component)
|
6,844,500
|
|
Warranty work (due to failed component)
|
21,600,000
|
II. Supplier data:
|
|
Grayson
|
Lambert
|
|
Unit purchase price
|
$144
|
$129
|
|
Units purchased
|
200,000
|
800,000
|
|
Expediting orders
|
10
|
90
|
|
Sampling hours
|
20
|
980
|
|
Rework hours
|
90
|
1,410
|
|
Warranty hours
|
200
|
3,800
|
| |
|
|
|
Required:
1. Calculate the cost per component for each supplier, taking into consideration the costs of the quality related activities and using the current prices and sales volume. Given this information, what do you think the purchasing manager ought to do? Explain.
2. Suppose the quality control department estimates that the company loses $4,500,000 in sales per year because of the reputation effect of defective units attributable to failed components. What information would you like to have to assign this cost to each supplier? Suppose that you had to assign the cost of lost sales to each supplier using one of the drivers already listed. Which would you choose? Using this driver, calculate the change in the cost of the Lambert component attributable to lost sales.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCT LIFE CYCLE
The following series of statements or phrases are associated with product life cycle viewpoints.
Identify whether each one is associated with the marketing, production, or customer viewpoint. Where possible, identify the particular characteristic being described.
If the statement or phrase fits more than one viewpoint, label it as interactive. Explain the interaction.
a. Sales are increasing at an increasing rate.
b. The cost of maintaining the product after it is purchased.
c. The product is losing market acceptance and sales are beginning to decrease.
d. A design is chosen to minimize post purchase costs.
e. Ninety percent or more of the costs are committed during the development stage.
f. The length of time that the product serves the needs of a customer.
g. All the costs associated with a product for its entire life cycle.
h. The time in which a product generates revenue for a company.
i. Profits tend to reach peak levels during this stage.
j. Customers have the lowest price sensitivity during this stage.
k. Describes the general sales pattern of a product as it passes through distinct lifecycle stages.
l. The concern is with product performance and price.
m. Actions taken so that life cycle profits are maximized.
n. Emphasizes internal activities that are needed to develop, produce, market, and service products.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JIT AND TRACEABILITY OF COSTS
Assume that a company has recently switched to JIT manufacturing. Each manufacturing cell produces a single product or major subassembly. Cell workers have been trained to perform a variety of tasks. Additionally, many services have been decentralized.
Costs are assigned to products using direct tracing, driver tracing, and allocation.
For each cost listed, indicate the most likely product cost assignment method used before JIT and after JIT. Set up a table with three columns: Cost Item, Before JIT, and After JIT. You may assume that direct tracing is used whenever possible, followed by
driver tracing, with allocation being the method of last resort.
a. Inspection costs
b. Power to heat, light, and cool plant
c. Minor repairs on production equipment
d. Salary of production supervisor (department/cell)
e. Oil to lubricate machinery
f. Salary of plant supervisor
g. Costs to set up machinery
h. Salaries of janitors
i. Power to operate production equipment
j. Taxes on plant and equipment
k. Depreciation on production equipment
l. Raw materials
m. Salary of industrial engineer
n. Parts for machinery
o. Pencils and paper clips for production supervisor (department/cell)
p. Insurance on plant and equipment
q. Overtime wages for cell workers
r. Plant depreciation
s. Materials handling
t. Preventive maintenance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JIT FEATURES AND PRODUCT COSTING ACCURACY
Prior to installing a JIT system, Pohlson Company, a producer of bicycle parts, used maintenance hours to assign maintenance costs to its three products (wheels, seats, and handle bars). The maintenance costs totaled $1,960,000 per year. The maintenance ours used by each product and the quantity of each product produced are as follows:
|
|
Maintenance Hours
|
Quantity Produced
|
|
Wheels
|
60,000
|
52,500
|
|
Seats
|
60,000
|
52,500
|
|
Handle bars
|
80,000
|
70,000
|
After installing JIT, three manufacturing cells were created, and cell workers were trained to perform preventive maintenance and minor repairs. A full time maintenance person was also assigned to each cell. Maintenance costs for the three cells still totaled $1,960,000; however, these costs are now traceable to each cell as follows:
|
Cell, wheels
|
$532,000
|
|
Cell, seats
|
588,000
|
|
Cell, handle bars
|
840,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the pre JIT maintenance cost per unit for each product.
2. Compute the maintenance cost per unit for each product after installing JIT.
3. Explain why the JIT maintenance cost per unit is more accurate than the pre JIT cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BACKFLUSH COSTING VERSUS TRADITIONAL: VARIATION 1
Kaylin Company has installed a JIT purchasing and manufacturing system and is using backflush accounting for its cost flows. It currently uses the purchase of materials as the first trigger point and the completion of goods as the second trigger point. During the month of May, Kaylin had the following transactions:
|
Raw materials purchased
|
$810,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
135,000
|
|
Overhead cost
|
675,000
|
|
Conversion cost applied
|
877,500
|
There were no beginning or ending inventories. All goods produced were sold with a 60 percent markup. Any variance is closed to Cost of Goods Sold. (Variances are recognized monthly.)
Required:
1. Prepare the journal entries that would have been made using a traditional accounting approach for cost flows.
2. Prepare the journal entries for the month using backflush costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST ASSIGNMENT AND JIT
Caltor Company produces two types of space heaters (regular and super). Both pass through two producing departments: fabrication and assembly. It also has a materials handling department that is responsible for moving materials and goods to and between departments. Budgeted data for the three departments are as follows:
|
|
Materials Handling
|
Fabrication
|
Assembly
|
|
Overhead
|
$160,000
|
$240,000
|
$68,000
|
|
Number of moves
|
—
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
—
|
24,000
|
12,000
|
In the fabrication department, the regular model requires one hour of direct labor and the super model, two hours. In the assembly department, the regular model requires 0.5 hour of direct labor and the super model, one hour. Expected production: regular model, 8,000 units; super model, 8,000 units.
Immediately after preparing the budgeted data, a consultant suggests that two manufacturing cells be created: one for the manufacture of the regular model and the other for the manufacture of the super model. Raw materials would be delivered to each cell, and goods would be shipped immediately to customers upon completion. The total direct overhead costs estimated for each cell would be $76,000 for the regular cell and $240,000 for the super cell.
Required:
1. Allocate the materials handling costs to each department, and compute the overhead cost per unit for each heater. (Overhead rates use direct labor hours.)
2. Compute the overhead cost per unit if manufacturing cells are created. Which unit overhead cost do you think is more accurate—the one computed with a departmental structure, or the one computed using a cell structure? Explain.
3. Note that the total overhead costs for the cell structure are lower. Explain why.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INTERNAL LINKAGES, COST MANAGEMENT, AND STRATEGIC DECISION MAKING
Evans, Inc., has a functional based costing system. Evans’s Miami plant produces 10 different electronic products. The demand for each product is about the same. Although they differ in complexity, each product uses about the same labor time and materials. The plant has used direct labor hours for years to assign overhead to products. To help design engineers understand the assumed cost relationships, the cost accounting department developed the following cost equation. (The equation describes the relationship between total manufacturing costs and direct labor hours; the equation is supported by a coefficient of determination of 60 percent.)
Y = $5,000,000 + $30X, where X = direct labor hours
The variable rate of $30 is broken down as follows:
|
Direct labor
|
$ 9
|
|
Variable overhead
|
5
|
|
Direct materials
|
16
|
Because of competitive pressures, product engineering was given the charge to redesign products to reduce the total cost of manufacturing. Using the above cost relationships, product engineering adopted the strategy of redesigning to reduce direct labor content. As each design was completed, an engineering change order was cut, triggering a series of events such as design approval, vendor selection, bill of materials update, redrawing of schematic, test runs, changes in setup procedures, development of new inspection procedures, and so on.
After one year of design changes, the normal volume of direct labor was reduced from 250,000 hours to 200,000 hours, with the same number of products being produced. Although each product differs in its labor content, the redesign efforts reduced the labor content for all products. On average, the labor content per unit of product dropped from 1.25 hours per unit to one hour per unit. Fixed overhead, however, increased from $5,000,000 to $6,600,000 per year.
Suppose that a consultant was hired to explain the increase in fixed overhead costs. The consultant’s study revealed that the $30 per hour rate captured the unit level variable costs; however, the cost behavior of other activities was quite different. For example, setting up equipment is a step fixed cost, where each step is 2,000 setup hours, costing $90,000. The study also revealed that the cost of receiving goods is a function of the number of different components. This activity has a variable cost of $2,000 per component type and a by 20 components with a cost of $50,000 per step. Assume also that the consultant indicated that the design adopted by the engineers increased the demand for setups from 20,000 setup hours to 40,000 setup hours and the number of different components from 100 to 250. The demand for other non unit level activities remained unchanged. The consultant also recommended that management take a look at a rejected design for its products. This rejected design increased direct labor content from 250,000 hours to 260,000 hours, decreased the demand for setups from 20,000 hours to 10,000 hours, and decreased the demand for purchasing from 100 component types to 75 component types, while the demand for all other activities remained unchanged.
Required:
1. Using normal volume, compute the manufacturing cost per labor hour before the year of design changes. What is the cost per unit of an “average” product?
2. Using normal volume after the one year of design changes, compute the manufacturing cost per hour. What is the cost per unit of an “average” product?
3. Before considering the consultant’s study, what do you think is the most likely explanation for the failure of the design changes to reduce manufacturing costs? Now use the information from the consultant’s study to explain the increase in the average cost per unit of product. What changes would you suggest to improve Evans’s efforts to reduce costs?
4. Explain why the consultant recommended a second look at a rejected design. Provide computational support. What does this tell you about the strategic importance fixed cost that follows a step cost pattern. The step is defined of cost management?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EXTERNAL LINKAGES, ACTIVITY BASED SUPPLIER COSTING
Amado, Inc., manfactures riding lawn mowers. Amado uses JIT manufacturing and carries insignificant levels of inventory. Amado manufactures everything needed for the riding lawn mowers except for the engines. Several sizes of mowers are produced. The most popular line is the small mower line. The engines for the small mower line are purchased from two sources: Rivera Engines and Bach Machining. The Rivera engine is the more expensive of the two sources and has a price of $300. The Bach engine is $270 per unit. Amado produces and sells 13,200 units of the small mower. Of the 13,200 engines purchased, 2,400 are purchased from Rivera Engines, and 10,800 are purchased from Bach Machining. Although Bill Jackson, production manager, prefers the Rivera engine, Carlos Lopez, purchasing manager, maintains that the price difference is too great to buy more than the 2,400 units currently purchased. Carlos, however, does want to maintain a significant connection with Rivera just in case the less expensive source cannot supply the needed quantities. Even though Bill understands the price argument, he has argued in many meetings that the quality of the Rivera engine is worth the price difference. Carlos remains unconvinced. Sam Miller, controller, has recently overseen the implementation of an activitybased costing system. He has indicated that an ABC analysis would shed some light on the conflict between production and purchasing. To support this position, the following data have been collected:
I. Activity cost data:
|
Testing enginesa
|
$240,000
|
|
Reworking productsb
|
400,000
|
|
Expediting ordersc
|
300,000
|
|
Repairing enginesd
|
540,000
|
aAll units are tested after assembly, and a certain percentage are rejected because of engine failure. bDefective engines are removed, replaced (supplier will replace any failed engine), and retested before being sold to customers.
Engine failure often causes collateral damage, and other parts need to be remanufactured and replaced before the unit is again functional. cDue to late or failed delivery of engines. dRepair work is for units under warranty and almost invariably is due to engine failure. Repair usually means replacing the engine. This cost plus labor, transportation, and other costs make warranty work very expensive.
II. Supplier data:
|
|
Bach
|
Rivera
|
|
Engines replaced by source
|
990
|
10
|
|
Rework hours
|
4,900
|
100
|
|
Late or failed shipments
|
99
|
1
|
|
Warranty repairs (by source)
|
1,220
|
30
|
Upon hearing of the proposed ABC analysis, Bill and Carlos were both supportive. Carlos, however, noted that even if the analysis revealed that the Rivera engine was actually less expensive, it would be unwise to completely abandon Bach. He argued that Rivera may be hard pressed to meet the entire demand. Its productive capacity was not sufficient to handle the kind of increased demand that would be imposed. Additionally, having only one supplier was simply too risky.
Required:
1. Calculate the total supplier cost (acquisition cost plus supplier related activity costs). Convert this to a per engine cost to find out how much the company is paying for the engines. Which of the two suppliers is the low cost supplier? Explain why this is a better measure of engine cost than the usual purchase costs assigned to the engines.
2. Consider the supplier cost information obtained in Requirement 1. Suppose further that Rivera can supply only a total of 6,000 units. What actions would you advise Amado to undertake with its suppliers? Comment on the strategic value of activity based supplier costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EXTERNAL LINKAGES, ACTIVITY BASED CUSTOMER COSTING, AND STRATEGIC DECISION MAKING
Moss Manufacturing produces several types of bolts. The products are produced in batches according to customer order. Although there are a variety of bolts, they can be grouped into three product families. The number of units sold is the same for each family. The selling prices for the three families range from $0.50 to $0.80 per unit.Because the product families are used in different kinds of products, customers also can be grouped into three categories, corresponding to the product family they purchase. Historically, the costs of order entry, processing, and handling were expensed and not traced to individual products. These costs are not trivial and totaled $6,300,000 for the most recent year. Furthermore, these costs had been increasing over time. Recently, the company had begun to emphasize a cost reduction strategy; however, any cost reduction decisions had to contribute to the creation of a competitive advantage.
Because of the magnitude and growth of order filling costs, management decided to explore the causes of these costs. They discovered that order filling costs were driven by the number of customer orders processed. Further investigation revealed the following cost behavior:
Step fixed cost component: $70,000 per step; 2,000 orders define a step
Variable cost component: $28 per order
The expected customer orders for the year total 140,000. The expected usage of the order filling activity and the average size of an order by product family are as follows:
|
|
Family A
|
Family B
|
Family C
|
|
Number of orders
|
70,000
|
42,000
|
28,000
|
|
Average order size
|
600
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
As a result of the cost behavior analysis, the marketing manager recommended the imposition of a charge per customer order. The president of the company concurred. The charge was implemented by adding the cost per order to the price of each order (computed using the projected ordering costs and expected orders). This ordering cost was then reduced as the size of the order increased and eliminated as the order size reached 2,000 units. (The marketing manager indicated that any penalties imposed for orders greater than this size would lose sales from some of the smaller customers.) Within a short period of communicating this new price information to customers, the average order size for all three product families increased to 2,000 units.
Required:
1. Moss traditionally has expensed order filling costs (following GAAP guidelines). Under this approach, how much cost is assigned to customers? Do you agree with this practice? Explain.
2. Consider the following claim: By expensing the order filling costs, all products were undercosted; furthermore, products ordered in small batches are significantly undercosted. Explain, with supporting computations where possible. Explain how this analysis also reveals the costs of various customer categories.
3. Calculate the reduction in order filling costs produced by the change in pricing strategy. (Assume that resource spending is reduced as much as possible and that the total units sold remain unchanged.) Explain how exploiting customer linkages produced this cost reduction. Moss also noticed that other activity costs, such as those for setups, scheduling, and materials handling costs, were reduced significantly as a result of this new policy. Explain this outcome, and discuss its implications.
4. Suppose that one of the customers complains about the new pricing policy. This buyer is a lean, JIT firm that relies on small frequent orders. In fact, this customer accounted for 30 percent of the Family A orders. How should Moss deal with this customer?
5. One of Moss’s goals is to reduce costs so that a competitive advantage might be created. Describe how the management of Moss might use this outcome to help create a competitive advantage.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFE CYCLE COST MANAGEMENT
Jolene Askew, manager of Feagan Company, has committed her company to a strategically sound cost reduction program. Emphasizing life cycle cost management is a major part of this effort. Jolene is convinced that production costs can be reduced by paying more attention to the relationships between design and manufacturing. Design engineers need to know what causes manufacturing costs. She instructed her controller to develop a manufacturing cost formula for a newly proposed product. Marketing had already projected sales of 25,000 units for the new product. (The life cycle was estimated to be 18 months. The company expected to have 50 percent of the market and priced their product to achieve this goal.) The projected selling price was $20 per unit. The following cost formula was developed:
Y = $200,000 = $10X1
where
X1 = Machine hours (The product is expected to use one machine hour for every unit produced.)
Upon seeing the cost formula, Jolene quickly calculated the projected gross profit to be $50,000. This produced a gross profit of $2 per unit, well below the targeted gross profit of $4 per unit. Jolene then sent a memo to the engineering department, instructing them to search for a new design that would lower the costs of production by at least $50,000 so that the target profit could be met.
Within two days, the engineering department proposed a new design that would reduce unit variable cost from $10 per machine hour to $8 per machine hour (Design Z). The chief engineer, upon reviewing the design, questioned the validity of the controller’s cost formula. He suggested a more careful assessment of the proposed design’s effect on activities other than machining. Based on this suggestion, the following revised cost formula was developed. This cost formula reflected the cost relationships of the most recent design (Design Z).
Y = $140,000 + $8X1 + $5,000X2 + $2,000X3
where
X1 = Units sold
X2 = Number of batches
X3 = Number of engineering change orders
Based on scheduling and inventory considerations, the product would be produced in batches of 1,000; thus, 25 batches would be needed over the product’s life cycle. Furthermore, based on past experience, the product would likely generate about 20 engineering change orders.
This new insight into the linkage of the product with its underlying activities led to a different design (Design W). This second design also lowered the unit level cost by $2 per unit but decreased the number of design support requirements from 20 orders to 10 orders. Attention was also given to the setup activity, and the design engineer assigned to the product created a design that reduced setup time and lowered variable setup costs from $5,000 to $3,000 per setup. Furthermore, Design W also creates excess activity capacity for the setup activity, and resource spending for setup activity capacity can be decreased by $40,000, reducing the fixed cost component in the equation by this amount.
Design W was recommended and accepted. As prototypes of the design were tested, an additional benefit emerged. Based on test results, the post purchase costs dropped from an estimated $0.70 per unit sold to $0.40 per unit sold. Using this information, the marketing department revised the projected market share upward from 50 percent to 60 percent (with no price decrease).
Required:
1. Calculate the expected gross profit per unit for Design Z using the controller’s original cost formula. According to this outcome, does Design Z reach the targeted unit profit? Repeat, using the engineer’s revised cost formula. Explain why Design Z failed to meet the targeted profit. What does this say about the use of functional based costing for life cycle cost management?
2. Calculate the expected profit per unit using Design W. Comment on the value of activity information for life cycle cost management.
3. The benefit of the post purchase cost reduction of Design W was discovered in testing. What direct benefit did it create for Feagan Company (in dollars)? Reducing post purchase costs was not a specific design objective. Should it have been? Are there any other design objectives that should have been considered?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JIT, TRACEABILITY OF COSTS, PRODUCT COSTING ACCURACY, JIT EFFECTS ON COST ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS
Homer Manufacturing produces different models of 22 calibre rifles. The manufacturing costs assigned to its economy model rifle before and after installing JIT are given in the following table. Cell workers do all maintenance and are also responsible for moving materials, cell janitorial work, and inspecting products. Janitorial work outside the cells is still handled by the janitorial department.
In both the pre and post JIT setting, 10,000 units of the economy model are manufactured. In the JIT setting, manufacturing cells are used to produce each product. The management of Homer Manufacturing reported a significant decrease in manufacturing costs for all of its rifles after JIT was installed. It also reported less inventoryrelated costs and a significant decrease in lead times. Accounting costs also decreased because Homer switched from a job order costing system to a process costing system.
|
|
Before
|
After
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 60,000
|
$ 55,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
40,000
|
50,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
|
Inspection
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
|
Rework
|
60,000
|
9,000
|
|
Power
|
10,000
|
6,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
12,500
|
10,000
|
|
Materials handling
|
8,000
|
2,000
|
|
Engineering
|
80,000
|
50,000*
|
|
Setups
|
15,000
|
0
|
|
Janitorial
|
40,000
|
20,000
|
|
Building and grounds
|
11,800
|
12,400
|
|
Supplies
|
4,000
|
3,000
|
|
Supervision (plant)
|
10,000
|
8,000
|
|
Cell supervision
|
—
|
35,000
|
|
Cost accounting
|
40,000
|
25,000
|
|
Departmental supervision Total
|
18,000 $489,300
|
— $325,400
|
Required:
1. Compute the unit cost of the product before and after JIT.
2. Explain why the JIT unit cost is more accurate. Also explain what JIT features may have produced a decrease in production costs. Use as many specific cost items as possible to illustrate your explanation.
3. Explain why Homer Manufacturing switched from a job order costing system to a process costing system after JIT was implemented.
4. Classify the costs in the JIT environment according to how they are assigned to the cell: direct tracing, driver tracing, or allocation. Which cost assignment method is most common? What does this imply regarding product costing accuracy?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JIT AND PRODUCT COSTING
Mott Company recently implemented a JIT manufacturing system. After one year of operation, Heidi Burrows, president of the company, wanted to compare product cost under the JIT system with product cost under the old system. Mott’s two products are weed eaters and lawn edgers. The unit prime costs under the old system are as follows:
|
|
Eaters
|
Edgers
|
|
Direct materials
|
$12
|
$45
|
|
Direct labor
|
4
|
30
|
Under the old manufacturing system, the company operated three service centers and two production departments. Overhead was applied using departmental overhead rates. The direct overhead costs associated with each department for the year preceding the installation of JIT are as follows:
|
Maintenance
|
$110,000
|
|
Materials handling
|
90,000
|
|
Building and grounds
|
150,000
|
|
Machining
|
280,000
|
|
Assembly
|
175,000
|
|
Total
|
$805,000
|
Under the old system, the overhead costs of the service departments were allocated directly to the producing departments and then to the products passing through them. (Both products passed through each producing department.) The overhead rate for the machining department was based on machine hours, and the overhead rate for assembly was based on direct labor hours. During the last year of operations for the old system, the machining department used 80,000 machine hours, and the assembly department used 20,000 direct labor hours. Each weed eater required one machine hour in machining and 0.25 direct labor hour in assembly. Each lawn edger required two machine hours in machining and 0.5 hour in assembly. Bases for allocation of the service costs are as follows:
| |
Machine Hours
|
Number of Material Moves
|
Square Feet of Space
|
|
Machining
|
80,000
|
90,000
|
80,000
|
|
Assembly
|
20,000
|
60,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total
|
100,000
|
150,000
|
120,000
|
Upon implementing JIT, a manufacturing cell for each product was created to replace the departmental structure. Each cell occupied 40,000 square feet. Maintenance and materials handling were both decentralized to the cell level. Essentially, cell workers were trained to operate the machines in each cell, assemble the components, maintain the machines, and move the partially completed units from one point to the next within the cell. During the first year of the JIT system, the company produced and sold 20,000 weed eaters and 30,000 lawn edgers. This output was identical to that for the last year of operations under the old system. The following costs have been assigned to the manufacturing cells:
|
|
Eater Cell
|
Edger Cell
|
|
Direct materials
|
$185,000
|
$1,140,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
66,000
|
660,000
|
|
Direct overhead
|
99,000
|
350,500
|
|
Allocated overhead
|
75,000
|
75,000
|
|
Total
|
$425,000
|
$2,225,500
|
Required:
1. Compute the unit cost for each product under the old manufacturing system.
2. Compute the unit cost for each product under the JIT system.
3. Which of the unit costs is more accurate? Explain. Include in your explanation a discussion of how the computational approaches differ.
4. Calculate the decrease in overhead costs under JIT, and provide some possible reasons that explain the decrease.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reddy Heaters, Inc., produces insert heaters that can be used for various applications, ranging from coffeepots to submarines. Because of the wide variety of insert heaters produced, Reddy uses a job order costing system. Product lines are differentiated by the size of the heater. In the early stages of the company’s history, sales were strong and profits steadily increased. In recent years, however, profits have been declining, and the company has been losing market share. Alarmed by the deteriorating financial position of the company, President Doug Young requested a special study to identify the problems. Sheri Butler, the head of the internal audit department, was put in charge of the study. After two months of investigation, Sheri was ready to report her findings.
SHERI: Doug, I think we have some real concerns that need to be addressed. Production is down, employee morale is low, and the number of defective units that we have to scrap is way up. In fact, over the past several years, our scrap rate has increased from 9 percent to 15 percent of total production. And scrap is expensive. We don’t detect defective units until the end of the process. By that time, we lose everything. The nature of the product simply doesn’t permit rework.
DOUG: I have a feeling that the increased scrap rate is related to the morale problem you’ve encountered. Do you have any feel for why morale is low?
SHERI: I get the feeling that boredom is a factor. Many employees don’t feel challenged by their work. Also, with the decline in performance, they are receiving more pressure from their supervisors, which simply aggravates the problem.
DOUG: What other problems have you detected?
SHERI: Well, much of our market share has been lost to foreign competitors. The time it takes us to process an order, from time of receipt to delivery, has increased from 20 to 30 days. Some of the customers we have lost have switched to Japanese suppliers, from whom they receive heaters in less than 15 days. Added to this delay in our delivery is an increase in the number of complaints about poorly performing heaters. Our quality has definitely taken a nosedive over the past several years.
DOUG: It’s amazing that it has taken us this long to spot these problems. It’s incredible to me that the Japanese can deliver a part faster than we can, even in our more efficient days. I wonder what their secret is.
SHERI: I investigated that very issue. It appears that they can produce and deliver their heaters rapidly because they use a JIT purchasing and manufacturing system.
DOUG: Can we use this system to increase our competitive ability?
SHERI: I think so, but we’ll need to hire a consultant to tell us how to do it. Also, it might be a good idea to try it out on only one of our major product lines. I suggest the small heater line. It is having the most problems and has been showing a loss for the past two years. If JIT can restore this line to a competitive mode, then it’ll work for the other lines as well.
Within a week, Reddy Heaters hired the services of a large CPA firm. The firm sent Kim Burnham, one of its managers, to do the initial background work. After spending some time at the plant, Kim wrote up the following description of the small heater production process:
The various departments are scattered throughout the factory. Labor is specialized and trained to operate the machines in the respective departments. Additionally, the company has a centralized stores area that provides the raw materials for production, a centralized maintenance department that has responsibility for maintaining all production equipment, and a group of laborers responsible for moving the partially completed units from department to department.
Under the current method of production, small heaters pass through several departments, where each department has a collection of similar machines. The first department cuts a metal pipe into one of three lengths: three, four, or five inches long. The cut pipe is then taken to the laser department, where the part number is printed on the pipe. In a second department, ceramic cylinders—cut to smaller lengths than the pipe—are wrapped with a fine wire (using a wrapping machine).
The pipe and the wrapped ceramic cylinders are then taken to the welding department, where the wrapped ceramic cylinders are placed inside the pipe, centered, and filled with a substance that prevents electricity from reaching the metal pipe. Finally, the ends of the pipe are welded shut with two wire leads protruding from one end. This completed heater is then transferred to the testing department, which uses special equipment to see if the heater functions properly.
The small heaters are produced in batches of 300. It takes 50 hours to cut 300 metal pipes and prepare 300 ceramic cylinders (1/6 hr. per unit, both processes occurring at the same time). After 50 hours of production time, the 300 metal pipes are transported to the laser department (20 minutes transport time), and the 300 ceramic cylinders are transported to the welding department (20 minutes trans port time). In the laser department, it takes 50 hours to imprint the part number (1/6 hr. per pipe). The 300 metal pipes are then transported to the welding department. In the welding department, the ceramic and metal pipes are joined and welded. The welding process takes 50 hours (1/6 hr. per pipe). Finally, the 300 units are transported (20 minutes) to the testing department. Each unit requires 1/6 hour for testing, or a total of 50 hours for the 300 units. From start to finish, the total production time for the 300 units is as follows:
|
Cutting and ceramic
|
50 hrs.
|
|
Laser
|
50
|
|
Welding
|
50
|
|
Testing
|
50
|
|
Moving
|
1
|
|
Total time
|
201 hrs.
|
Notice that laser must wait 50 hours before it can begin imprinting. Similarly, welding must wait 100 hours before it can begin working on the batch, and finally, testing must wait 150 hours before it can begin working on the batch.
Based on the information gathered, Kim estimated that the production time for 300 units could be cut from 201 hours to about 50 hours by creating a small heater manufacturing cell.
Required:
1. One of the first actions taken by Reddy Heaters was to organize a manufacturing cell for the small heater line. Describe how you would organize the manufacturing cell. How does it differ from the traditional arrangement? Will any training costs be associated with the transition to JIT? Explain.
2. Explain, with computational support, how the production time for 300 units can be reduced to about 50 hours. If this is a true reduction in production time, what implications does it have for Reddy’s competitive position?
3. Describe the organizational and operational activities that must be managed to bring about the reduction in production time. What are the cost drivers associated with these activities? For operational drivers, indicate the expected effect on activity costs.
4. Initially, the employees resented the change to JIT. After a small period of time, however, morale improved significantly. Explain why the change to JIT increased employee morale.
5. Within a few months, Reddy was able to offer a lower price for its small heaters. Additionally, the number of complaints about the performance of the small heaters declined sharply. By the end of the second year, the product line was reporting profits greater than had ever been achieved. Discuss the JIT features that may have made the lower price and higher profits possible.
6. Within a year of the JIT installation, Reddy’s controller remarked, “We have a much better idea than ever before of what it is costing us to produce these small insert heaters.” Offer some justification for the controller’s statement.
7. Discuss the impact that JIT has on other management accounting practices.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINANCIAL BASED RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING VERSUS ACTIVITY BASED RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING
The labor standard for a company is two hours per unit produced, which includes setup time. At the beginning of the last quarter, 20,000 units had been produced and 44,000 hours used. The production manager was concerned about the prospect of reporting an unfavorable labor efficiency variance at the end of the year. Any unfavorable variance over 9 to 10 percent of the standard usually meant a negative performance rating. Bonuses were adversely affected by negative ratings. Accordingly, for the last quarter, the production manager decided to reduce the number of setups and use longer production runs. He knew that his production workers usually were within 5 percent of the standard. The real problem was with setup times. By reducing the setups, the actual hours used would be within 7 to 8 percent of the standard hours allowed.
Required:
1. Explain why the behavior of the production manager is unacceptable for a continuous improvement environment.
2. Explain how an activity based responsibility accounting approach would discourage the kind of behavior described.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY VOLUME VARIANCE, UNUSED ACTIVITY CAPACITY, VALUE AND NON VALUE ADDED COST REPORTS, KAIZEN STANDARDS
Pollard Manufacturing has developed value added standards for its activities including material usage, purchasing, and inspecting. The value added output levels for each of the activities, their actual levels achieved, and the standard prices are as follows:
|
Activity
|
Activity Driver
|
SQ
|
AQ
|
SP
|
|
Using lumber
|
Board feet
|
24,000
|
30,000
|
$10
|
|
Purchasing
|
Purchase orders
|
800
|
1,000
|
50
|
|
Inspecting
|
Inspection hours
|
0
|
4,000
|
12
|
Assume that material usage and purchasing costs correspond to flexible resources (acquired as needed) and that inspection uses resources that are acquired in blocks or steps of 2,000 hours. The actual prices paid for the inputs equal the standard prices.
Required:
1. Assume that continuous improvement efforts reduce the demand for inspection by 30 percent during the year (actual activity usage drops by 30 percent). Calculate the volume and unused capacity variances for the inspection activity. Explain their meaning. Also, explain why there is no volume or unused capacity variance for the other two activities.
2. Prepare a cost report that details value and non value added costs.
3. Suppose that the company wants to reduce all non value added costs by 30 percentin the coming year. Prepare kaizen standards that can be used to evaluate the company’s progress toward this goal. How much will these measures save in resource spending?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PARTICIPATIVE VERSUS IMPOSED BUDGETING An effective budget converts the goals and objectives of an organization into data. The budget serves as a blueprint for management’s plans. The budget is also the basis for control. Management performance can be evaluated by comparing actual results with the budget.
Thus, creating the budget is essential for the successful operation of an organization. Finding the resources to implement the budget—that is, moving from a starting point to the ultimate goal—requires the extensive use of human resources. How managers perceive their roles in the process of budgeting is important to the successful use of the budget as an effective tool for planning, communicating, and controlling.
Required:
1. Discuss the behavioral implications of planning and control when a company’s management employs:
a. An imposed budgetary approach
b. A participative budgetary approach
2. Communications plays an important role in the budgetary process whether a participative or an imposed budgetary approach is used.
a. Discuss the differences between communication flows in these two budgetary approaches.
b. Discuss the behavioral implications associated with the communication process for each of the budgetary approaches.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
INFORMATION FOR BUDGETING, ETHICS Norton Company, a manufacturer of infant furniture and carriages, is in the initial stages of preparing the annual budget for 2007. Scott Ford has recently joined Norton’s accounting staff and is interested in learning as much as possible about the company’s budgeting process. During a recent lunch with Marge Atkins, sales manager, and Pete Granger, production manager, Scott initiated the following conversation.
SCOTT: Since I’m new around here and am going to be involved with the preparation of the annual budget, I’d be interested in learning how the two of you estimate sales and production numbers.
MARGE: We start out very methodically by looking at recent history, discussing what we know about current accounts, potential customers, and the general state of consumer spending. Then, we add that usual dose of intuition to come up with the best forecast we can.
PETE: I usually take the sales projections as the basis for my projections. Of course, we have to make an estimate of what this year’s closing inventories will be, which is sometimes difficult.
SCOTT: Why does that present a problem? There must have been an estimate of closing inventories in the budget for the current year.
PETE: Those numbers aren’t always reliable since Marge makes some adjustments to the sales numbers before passing them on to me.
SCOTT: What kind of adjustments?
MARGE: Well, we don’t want to fall short of the sales projections so we generally give ourselves a little breathing room by lowering the initial sales projection anywhere from 5 to 10 percent.
PETE: So, you can see why this year’s budget is not a very reliable starting point. We always have to adjust the projected production rates as the year progresses, and of course, this changes the ending inventory estimates. By the way, we make similar adjustments to expenses by adding at least 10 percent to the estimates; I think everyone around here does the same thing.
Required:
1. Marge Atkins and Pete Granger have described the use of budgetary slack.
a. Explain why Marge and Pete behave in this manner, and describe the benefits they expect to realize from the use of budgetary slack.
b. Explain how the use of budgetary slack can adversely affect Marge and Pete.
2. As a management accountant, Scott Ford believes that the behavior described by Marge and Pete may be unethical and that he may have an obligation not to support this behavior. By citing the specific standards of competence, confidentiality, integrity, and/or objectivity from the “Standards of Ethical Conduct for Management Accountants” (in Chapter 1), explain why the use of budgetary slack may be unethical.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING
The Components Division produces a part that is used by the Goods Division. The cost of manufacturing the part is as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$10
|
|
Direct labor
|
2
|
|
Variable overhead
|
3
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
5
|
|
Total cost
|
$20
|
Other costs incurred by the Components Division are as follows:
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
$500,000
|
|
Variable selling
|
$1 per unit
|
The part usually sells for between $28 and $30 in the external market. Currently, the Components Division is selling it to external customers for $29. The division is capable of producing 200,000 units of the part per year; however, because of a weak economy, only 150,000 parts are expected to be sold during the coming year. The variable selling expenses are avoidable if the part is sold internally.
The Goods Division has been buying the same part from an external supplier for $28. It expects to use 50,000 units of the part during the coming year. The manager of the Goods Division has offered to buy 50,000 units from the Components Division for $18 per unit.
Required:
1. Determine the minimum transfer price that the Components Division would accept.
2. Determine the maximum transfer price that the manager of the Goods Division would pay.
3. Should an internal transfer take place? Why or why not? If you were the manager of the Components Division, would you sell the 50,000 components for $18 each? Explain.
4. Suppose that the average operating assets of the Components Division total $10 million. Compute the ROI for the coming year, assuming that the 50,000 units are transferred to the Goods Division for $21 each.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EVA
Surfit Company, which manufactures surfboards, has been in business for six years. Sam Foster, owner of Surfit, is pleased with the firm’s profit picture and is considering taking the company public (i.e., selling stock in Surfit on the NASDAQ exchange). Data for the past year are as follows:
|
After tax operating income
|
$ 250,000
|
|
Total capital employed
|
1,060,000
|
|
Long term debt (interest at 9%)
|
100,000
|
|
Owner’s equity
|
900,000
|
Surfit Company pays taxes at the rate of 35 percent.
Required:
1. Calculate the weighted average cost of capital, assuming that owner’s equity is valued at the average cost of common stock of 12 percent. Calculate the total cost of capital for Surfit Company last year.
2. Calculate EVA for Surfit Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CURRENCY EXCHANGE, TRANSFER PRICING
Golo, Inc., has two manufacturing plants, one in Singapore and the other in San Antonio. The San Antonio plant is located in a foreign trade zone. On March 1, Golo received a large order from a Japanese customer. The order is for ¥10,000,000 to be paid on receipt of the goods, scheduled for June 1. The goods are to be delivered by Golo to the Japanese company’s Los Angeles division. Golo assigned this order to the San Antonio plant; however, one necessary component for the order is to be manufactured by the Singapore plant. The component will be transferred to San Antonio on April 1 using a cost plus transfer price of $10,000 (U.S. dollars). Typically, two percent of the Singapore parts are defective. U.S. tariff on the component parts is 30 percent. Carrying cost for Golo is 15 percent per year. The spot rates for $1 U.S. are as follows:
|
|
Exchange Rates of $1 for
|
|
|
Yen
|
Singapore Dollars
|
|
March 1
|
107.00
|
1.60
|
|
April 1
|
107.50
|
1.55
|
|
June 1
|
107.60
|
1.50
|
Required:
1. What is the total cost of the imported parts from Singapore to the San Antonio plant in U.S. dollars?
2. If the San Antonio plant was not located in a foreign trade zone, what would be the total cost of the imported parts from Singapore?
3. How much does Golo expect to receive from the Japanese customer in U.S. dollars using the spot rate at the time of the order?
4. How much does Golo expect to receive from the Japanese customer in U.S. dollars using the spot rate at the time of payment?
5. Suppose that on March 1, the forward rate for June 1 delivery of $1 for yen is 107.20. If Golo’s policy is to hedge foreign currency transactions, what is the amount Golo expects to receive on June 1 in U.S. dollars?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ROI AND INVESTMENT DECISIONS
At the end of Year 2, the manager of the Camping Division is concerned about the division’s performance. As a result, he is considering the opportunity to invest in two independent projects. The first is called the “Ever Tent”; it is a small 2 person tent capable of withstanding the high winds at the top of Mt. Everest. While the market for actual Everest climbers is small, the manager expects that well to do weekend campers will buy it due to the cachet of the name and its light weight. The second is a “KiddieKamp” kit which includes a child sized sleeping bag and a colorful pup tent that can be set up easily in one’s back yard. Without the investments, the division expects that Year 2 data will remain unchanged. The expected operating incomes and the outlay required for each investment are as follows:
Sporting Goods Division:
| |
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Sales
|
$70,000,000
|
$75,000,000
|
|
Operating income
|
2,800,000
|
3,000,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
20,000,000
|
20,000,000
|
Camping Division:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Sales
|
$24,000,000
|
$25,000,000
|
|
Operating income
|
1,200,000
|
1,000,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
10,000,000
|
10,000,000
|
| |
Ever Tent
|
KiddieKamp
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 55,000
|
$ 38,000
|
|
Outlay
|
500,000
|
400,000
|
Gilliam’s corporate headquarters has made available up to $1 million of capital for this division. Any funds not invested by the division will be retained by headquarters and invested to earn the company’s minimum required rate of return, 9 percent.
Required:
1. Compute the ROI for each investment.
2. Compute the divisional ROI for each of the following four alternatives:
a. The Ever Tent is added.
b. The KiddieKamp is added.
c. Both investments are added.
d. Neither investment is made; the status quo is maintained.
Assuming that divisional managers are evaluated and rewarded on the basis of ROI performance, which alternative do you think the divisional manager will choose?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CALCULATING EVA
Brewster Company manufactures elderberry wine. Last year, Brewster earned operating income of $210,000 after income taxes. Capital employed equaled $2 million. Brewster is 50 percent equity and 50 percent 10 year bonds paying 6 percent interest. Brewster’s marginal tax rate is 35 percent. The company is considered a fairly risky investment and probably commands a 12 point premium above the 6 percent rate on long term Treasury bonds.Mortimerrewster’s aunts, Abby and Martha, have just retired, and Mortimer is the new CEO of Brewster Company. He would like to improve EVA for the company Compute EVA under each of the following independent scenarios that Mortimer is considering. (Use a spreadsheet to perform your calculations.)
Required:
1. No changes are made; calculate EVA using the original data.
2. Sugar will be used to replace another natural ingredient (arsenic) in the elderberry wine. This should not affect costs but will begin to affect the market assessment of Brewster Company, bringing the premium above long term Treasury bills to 9 percent the first year and 6 percent the second year. Calculate revised EVA for both years.
3. Brewster is considering expanding but needs additional capital. The company could borrow money, but it is considering selling more common stock, which would increase equity to 80 percent of total financing. Total capital employed would be $3,000,000. The new after tax operating income would be $450,000.
Using the original data, calculate EVA. Then, recalculate EVA assuming the materials substitution described in Requirement 2. New after tax income will be $450,000, and in Year 1, the premium will be 9 percent above the long term Treasury rate. In Year 2, it will be 6 percent above the long term Treasury rate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OPERATING INCOME FOR SEGMENTS
Whirlmore, Inc., manufactures and sells washers and dryers through three divisions: Home Supreme, Apartment, and International. Each division is evaluated as a profit center. Data for each division for last year are as follows (numbers in thousands).
|
|
Home Supreme
|
Apartment
|
International
|
|
Sales
|
$2,700
|
$2,400
|
$1,300
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,770
|
1,870
|
1,040
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
640
|
180
|
100
|
The income tax rate for Whirlmore, Inc., is 30 percent. Whirlmore, Inc., has two sources of financing: bonds paying 8 percent interest, which account for 20 percent of total investment, and equity accounting for the remaining 80 percent of total investment. Whirlmore, Inc., has been in business for over 15 years and is considered a relatively stable stock, despite its link to the cyclical construction industry. As a result, Whirlmore stock has an opportunity cost of 5 percent over the 6 percent long term government bond rate. Whirlmore’s total capital employed is $3 million ($2,100,000 for the Home Supreme Division, $500,000 for the Apartment Division, and the remainder for the International Division).
Required:
1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Whirlmore, Inc., for last year.
2. Calculate Whirlmore’s weighted average cost of capital.
3. Calculate EVA for each division and for Whirlmore, Inc.
4. Comment on the performance of each of the divisions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING, IDLE CAPACITY
VSOP, Inc., has a number of divisions that produce liquors, malt beverages, and glassware. The Glassware Division manufactures a variety of bottles which can be sold externally (to soft drink and juice bottlers) or internally to VSOP’s Malt Beverage Division. Sales and cost data on a case of 24 basic 12 ounce bottles are as follows:
|
Unit selling price
|
$2.80
|
|
Unit variable cost
|
$1.15
|
|
Unit product fixed cost
|
$0.70
|
|
Practical capacity in cases
|
500,000
|
During the coming year, the Glassware Division expects to sell 390,000 cases of this bottle. The Malt Beverage Division currently plans to buy 100,000 cases on the outside market for $2.80 each. Jill Von Holstein, manager of the Glassware Division, approached Eric Alman, manager of the Malt Beverage Division, and offered to sell the 100,000 cases for $2.75 each. Jill explained to Eric that she can avoid selling costs of $0.10 per case by selling internally and that she would split the savings by offering a $0.05 discount on the usual price.
Required:
1. What is the minimum transfer price that the Glassware Division would be willing to accept? What is the maximum transfer price that the Malt Beverage Division would be willing to pay? Should an internal transfer take place? What would be the benefit (or loss) to the firm as a whole if the internal transfer takes place?
2. Suppose Eric knows that the Glassware Division has idle capacity. Do you think that he would agree to the transfer price of $2.75? Suppose he counters with an offer to pay $2.40. If you were Jill, would you be interested in this price? Explain with supporting computations.
3. Suppose that VSOP’s policy is that all internal transfers take place at full manufacturing cost. What would the transfer price be? Would the transfer take place?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING AND SECTION 482
Auto Lite Manufacturing, Inc., has a division in the United States that produces a variety of headlamps and interior light packages for automobiles. One type of headlamp for compact cars is transferred to a Manufacturing Division in Italy. The headlamps can be (and are) sold externally in the United States for $25 each. It costs $0.75 per headlamp for shipping and $2.00 per headlamp for import duties. When the headlamps are sold externally, Auto Lite Manufacturing spends $2.50 per headlamp for commissions and an average of $0.30 per headlamp for advertising.
Required:
1. Which Section 482 method should be used to calculate the allowable transfer price?
2. Using the appropriate Section 482 method, calculate the transfer price.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING AND SECTION 482
Perrex, Inc., has a division in Honduras that makes a powder used to coat wire, and another division in the United States that manufactures wire. The Powder Division incurs manufacturing costs of $0.83 for one pound of powder.
The Wire Division currently buys its powder coating from an outside supplier for $0.95 per pound. If the Wire Division purchases the powder from the Honduran division, the shipping costs will be $0.05 per pound, but sales commissions of $0.06 per pound will be avoided with an internal transfer.
Required:
1. Which Section 482 method should be used to calculate the allowable transfer price? Calculate the appropriate transfer price per pound.
2. Assume that the Wire Division cannot buy this type of powder externally since it has an unusual formula that prevents electrical conductance. Which Section 48 method should be used to calculate the allowable transfer price? Calculate the appropriate transfer price per pound.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ROI AND RESIDUAL INCOME
A multinational corporation has a number of divisions, two of which are the Pacific Rim Division and the European Division. Data on the two divisions are as follows:
|
|
Pacific Rim
|
European
|
|
Average operating assets
|
900,000
|
9,000,000
|
|
Operating income
|
126,000
|
1,350,000
|
|
Minimum required return
|
12%
|
12%
|
Required:
1. Compute residual income for each division. By comparing residual income, is it possible to make a useful comparison of divisional performance? Explain.
2. Compute the residual rate of return by dividing the residual income by the average operating assets. Is it possible now to say that one division outperformed the other? Explain.
3. Compute the return on investment for each division. Can we make meaningful comparisons of divisional performance? Explain.
4. Add the residual rate of return computed in Requirement 2 to the required rate of return. Compare these rates with the ROI computed in Requirement 3. Will this relationship always be the same?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ROI, RESIDUAL INCOME
The following selected data pertain to the Silverthorne Division for last year:
|
Sales
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
$600,000
|
|
Traceable fixed costs
|
$100,000
|
|
Average invested capital
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Imputed interest rate
|
15%
|
Required:
1. How much is the residual income?
2. How much is the return on investment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
STOCK OPTIONS
Roselle, Inc., has acquired two new companies, one in consumer products and the other in financial services. Roselle’s top management believes that the executives of the two newly acquired companies can be most quickly assimilated into the parent company if they own shares of Roselle stock. Accordingly, on April 1, Roselle approved a stock option plan whereby each of the top four executives of the new companies could purchase up to 20,000 shares of Roselle stock at $15 per share. The option will expire in five years.
Required:
1. If Roselle stock rises to $34 per share by December 1, what is the value of the option to each executive?
2. Discuss some of the advantages and disadvantages of the Roselle stock option plan.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING
Truman Industries is a vertically integrated firm with several divisions that operate as decentralized profit centers. Truman’s Systems Division manufactures scientific in struments and uses the products of two of Truman’s other divisions. The Board Division manufactures printed circuit boards (PCBs). One PCB model is made exclusively for the Systems Division using proprietary designs, while less complex models are sold in outside markets. The products of the Transistor Division are sold in a welldeveloped competitive market; however, one transistor model is also used by the Systems Division. The costs per unit of the products used by the Systems Division are as follows:
|
|
PCB
|
Transistor
|
|
Direct materials
|
$2.00
|
$0.40
|
|
Direct labor
|
4.00
|
1.00
|
|
Variable overhead
|
2.35
|
0.50
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
0.80
|
0.75
|
|
Total cost
|
$9.15
|
$2.65
|
The Board Division sells its commercial product at full cost plus a 34 percent markup and believes the proprietary board made for the Systems Division would sell for $12.25 per unit on the open market. The market price of the transistor used by the Systems Division is $3.40 per unit.
Required:
1. What is the minimum transfer price for the Transistor Division? What is the maximum transfer price of the transistor for the Systems Division?
2. Assume the Systems Division is able to purchase a large quantity of transistors from an outside source at $2.90 per unit. Further assume that the Transistor Division has excess capacity. Can the Transistor Division meet this price?
3. The Board and Systems divisions have negotiated a transfer price of $11 per printed circuit board. Discuss the impact this transfer price will have on each division.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SETTING TRANSFER PRICES—MARKET PRICE VERSUS FULL COST
Macalester, Inc., manufactures heating and air conditioning units in its six divisions. One division, the Components Division, produces electronic components that can be used by the other five. All the components produced by this division can be sold to outside customers; however, from the beginning, about 70 percent of its output has been used internally. The current policy requires that all internal transfers of components be transferred at full cost.
Recently, Loren Ferguson, the new chief executive officer of Macalester, decided to investigate the transfer pricing policy. He was concerned that the current method of pricing internal transfers might force decisions by divisional managers that would be suboptimal for the firm. As part of his inquiry, he gathered some information concerning Part 4CM, used by the Small AC Division in its production of a window air conditioner, Model 7AC.
The Small AC Division sells 100,000 units of Model 7AC each year at a unit price of $55. Given current market conditions, this is the maximum price that the division can charge for Model 7AC. The cost of manufacturing the air conditioner is computed as follows:
|
Part 4CM
|
$ 7
|
|
Direct materials
|
20
|
|
Direct labor
|
16
|
|
Variable overhead
|
3
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
6
|
|
Total unit cost
|
$52
|
The window unit is produced efficiently, and no further reduction in manufacturing costs is possible.
The manager of the Components Division indicated that she could sell 10,000 units (the division’s capacity for this part) of Part 4CM to outside buyers at $12 per unit. The Small AC Division could also buy the part for $12 from external suppliers. She supplied the following detail on the manufacturing cost of the component:
|
Direct materials
|
$3.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.50
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1.50
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
2.00
|
|
Total unit cost
|
$7.00
|
Required:
1. Compute the firmwide contribution margin associated with Part 4CM and Model 7AC. Also, compute the contribution margin earned by each division.
2. Suppose that Loren Ferguson abolishes the current transfer pricing policy and gives divisions autonomy in setting transfer prices. Can you predict what transfer price the manager of the Components Division will set? What should be the minimum transfer price for this part? The maximum transfer price?
3. Given the new transfer pricing policy, predict how this will affect the production decision for Model 7AC of the manager of the Small AC Division. How many units of Part 4CM will the manager of the Small AC Division purchase, either internally or externally?
4. Given the new transfer price set by the Components Division and your answer to
Requirement 3, how many units of 4CM will be sold externally?
5. Given your answers to Requirements 3 and 4, compute the firmwide contribution margin. What has happened? Was Loren’s decision to grant additional decentralization good or bad?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING: VARIOUS COMPUTATIONS
Owens Company has a decentralized organization with a divisional structure. Two of these divisions are the Appliance Division and the Manufactured Housing Division. Each divisional manager is evaluated on the basis of ROI.
The Appliance Division produces a small automatic dishwasher that the Manufactured Housing Division can use in one of its models. Appliance can produce up to 10,000 of these dishwashers per year. The variable costs of manufacturing the dishwashers are $44. The Manufactured Housing Division inserts the model house and then sells the manufactured house to outside customers for $23,000 each. The division’s capacity is 2,000 units. The variable costs of the manufactured house (in addition to the cost of the dishwasher itself) are $12,600.
Required:
Assume each part is independent, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Assume that all of the dishwashers produced can be sold to external customers for $120 each. The Manufactured Housing Division wants to buy 2,000 dishwashers per year. What should the transfer price be?
2. Refer to Requirement 1. Assume $12 of avoidable distribution costs. Identify the maximum and minimum transfer prices. Identify the actual transfer price, assuming that negotiation splits the difference.
3. Assume that the Appliance Division is operating at 75 percent capacity. The Manufactured Housing Division is currently buying 2,000 dishwashers from an outside supplier for $90 each. Assume that any joint benefit will be split evenly between the two divisions. What is the expected transfer price? How much will the profits of the firm increase under this arrangement? How much will the profits of the Appliance Division increase, assuming that it sells the extra 2,000 dishwashers internally?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MANAGERIAL PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Greg Peterson has recently been appointed vice president of operations for Webster Corporation. Greg has a manufacturing background and previously served as operations manager of Webster’s Tractor Division. The business segments of Webster include the manufacture of heavy equipment, food processing, and financial services.
In a recent conversation with Carol Andrews, Webster’s chief financial officer, Greg suggested that segment managers be evaluated on the basis of the segment data appearingin Webster’s annual financial report. This report presents revenues, earnings, identifiable assets, and depreciation for each segment for a 5 year period. Greg believes that evaluating segment managers by criteria similar to that used in evaluating the company’s top management would be appropriate. Carol has expressed her reservations about using segment information from the annual financial report for this purpose and has suggested that Greg consider other ways to evaluate the performance of segment managers.
Required:
1. Explain why the segment information prepared for public reporting purposes may not be appropriate for the evaluation of segment management performance.
2. Describe the possible behavioral impact of Webster Corporation’s segment managers if their performance is evaluated on the basis of the information in the annual financial report.
3. Identify and describe several types of financial information that would be more appropriate for Greg to review when evaluating the performance of segment managers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
MANAGEMENT COMPENSATION
Renslen, Inc., a truck manufacturing conglomerate, has recently purchased two divisions: Meyers Service Company and Wellington Products, Inc. Meyers provides maintenance service on large truck cabs for 10 wheeler trucks, and Wellington produces air brakes for the 10 wheeler trucks.
The employees at Meyers take pride in their work, as Meyers is proclaimed to offer the best maintenance as a group, has received additional compensation from a 10 percent bonus pool based on income before income taxes and bonus. Renslen plans to continue to compensate the Meyers management team on this basis as it is the same incentive plan used for all other Renslen divisions, except for the Wellington division.
Wellington offers a high quality product to the trucking industry and is the premium choice even when compared to foreign competition. The management team at Wellington strives for zero defects and minimal scrap costs; current scrap levels are at 2 percent. The incentive compensation plan for Wellington management has been a 1 percent bonus based on gross margin. Renslen plans to continue to compensate the Wellington management team on this basis.
The following condensed income statements are for both divisions for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2007:
|
Renslen, Inc.
|
|
|
|
Divisional Income Statements
|
|
|
|
For the Year Ended May 31, 2007
|
|
|
|
|
Meyers Service
|
Wellington
|
|
|
Company
|
Products, Inc.
|
|
Revenues
|
$4,000,000
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Cost of product
|
$ 75,000
|
$ 4,950,000
|
|
Salaries
|
2,200,000
|
2,150,000
|
|
Fixed selling expenses
|
1,000,000
|
2,500,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
30,000
|
65,000
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
278,000
|
134,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
$3,583,000
|
$ 9,799,000
|
|
Income before income taxes and bonus
|
$ 417,000
|
$ 201,000
|
Renslen has invited the management teams of all its divisions to an off site managementworkshop in July where the bonus checks will be presented. Renslen is concerned that the different bonus plans at the two divisions may cause some heated discussion.
Required:
1. Determine the 2007 bonus pool available for the management team at:
a. Meyers Service Company
b. Wellington Products, Inc.
2. Identify at least two advantages and disadvantages to Renslen, Inc., of the bonus pool incentive plan at:
a. Meyers Service Company
b. Wellington Products, Inc.
3. Having two different types of incentive plans for two operating divisions of the same corporation can create problems.
a. Discuss the behavioral problems that could arise within management for Meyers Service Company and Wellington Products, Inc., by having different types of incentive plans.
b. Present arguments that Renslen, Inc., can give to the management teams of both Meyers and Wellington to justify having two different incentive plans.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TRANSFER PRICING IN THE MNC
Carnover, Inc., manufactures a broad line of industrial and consumer products. One of its plants is located in Madrid, Spain, and another in Singapore. The Madrid plant is operating at 85 percent capacity. Its main product, electric motors, has experienced softness in the market, which has led to predictions of further softening of the market and predictions of a decline in production to 65 percent capacity. If that happens, workers will have to be laid off and one wing of the factory closed. The Singapore plant manufactures heavy duty industrial mixers that use the motors manufactured by the Madrid plant as an integral component. Demand for the mixers is strong. Price and cost information for the mixers are as follows:
|
Price
|
$2,200
|
|
Direct materials
|
630
|
|
Direct labor
|
125
|
|
Variable overhead
|
250
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
100
|
Fixed overhead is based on an annual budgeted amount of $3,500,000 and budgeted production of 35,000 mixers. The direct materials cost includes the cost of the motor at $200 (market price).
The Madrid plant capacity is 20,000 motors per year. Cost data are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$ 75
|
|
Direct labor
|
60
|
|
Variable overhead
|
60
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
100
|
Fixed overhead is based on budgeted fixed overhead of $2,000,000.
Required:
1. What is the maximum transfer price the Singapore plant would accept?
2. What is the minimum transfer price the Madrid plant would accept?
3. Consider the following environmental factors:
|
Madrid Plant
|
Singapore Plant
|
|
Full employment is very important.
|
Cheap labor is plentiful.
|
|
Local government prohibits layoffs without permission (which is rarely granted).
|
Accounting is based on British American model, oriented toward decision making needs of creditors and investors.
|
|
Accounting is legalistic and conservative, designed to ensure compliance with government objectives.
|
|
How might these environmental factors impact the transfer pricing decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE USING A HOSPITAL SETTING, ALLOCATION METHODS, UNIT COST DETERMINATION AND PRICING DECISIONS Paula Barneck, the newly appointed director of the Lambert Medical Center (LMC), a large metropolitan hospital, was reviewing the financial report for the most recent quarter. The hospital had again shown a loss. For the past several years, it had been struggling financially. The financial problems had begun with the introduction of the federal government’s new diagnostic related group (DRG) reimbursement system. Under this system, the government mandated fixed fees for specific treatments or illnesses. The fixed fees were supposed to represent what the procedures should cost and differed from the traditional cost objective of the patient day of prior years. Although no formal assessment had been made, the general feeling of hospital management was that the DRG reimbursement was hurting LMC’s financial state. The increasing popularity of health maintenance organizations (HMOs) and physician provider organizations (PPOs) was also harming the hospital’s financial well being. In HMOs, physicians, who are employed full time, are usually located in a clinic owned by the HMO, and subscribers must use these physicians. In PPOs, hospitals provide contracts with a group of physicians in private practice. These physicians usually serve non PPO patients as well as PPO patients. The PPO patient can select any physician from the list of physicians under contract with the particular PPO. The PPO approach usually offers a greater selection of physicians and tends to preserve the patient’s traditional freedom of choice. More and more of the hospital’s potential patients were joining HMOs and PPOs, and, unfortunately, LMC was not capturing its fair share of the HMO and PPO business. HMOs and PPOs routinely asked for bids on hospital services and provided their business to the lowest bidder. In too many cases, LMC had not won that work. Paula had accepted the position of hospital administrator knowing that she was expected to produce dramatic improvements in LMC’s financial state. She was convinced that she needed more information about the hospital’s product costing methods. Only by having accurate cost information for the various procedures offered by the hospital could she evaluate the effects of DRG reimbursement and the hospital’s bidding strategy. Paula requested a meeting with Eric Rose, the hospital’s controller. Their conversation follows:
PAULA: Eric, as you know, we recently lost a bid on some laboratory tests that would be performed on a regular basis for a local HMO. In fact, I was told by the director of the HMO that we had the highest bid of the three submitted. I know the identity of the other two hospitals that submitted bids, and I have a hard time believing that their costs for these tests are any lower than ours. Describe exactly how we determine the cost of these lab procedures.
ERIC: First, we classify all departments as either revenue producing centers or service centers. Next, the costs of the service centers are allocated to the revenue producing centers. The costs directly traceable to the revenue producing centers are then added to the allocated costs to obtain the total cost of operating the revenue producing center. This total cost is divided by the total revenues of the revenue producing center to obtain a cost to charges ratio. Finally, the cost of a particular procedure is computed by multiplying the charge for that procedure by the cost tocharges ratio.
PAULA: Let me see if I understand. The costs of laundry, housekeeping, maintenance, and other service departments are allocated to all of the revenue producing departments. Let’s assume that the lab receives $100,000 as its share of these allocated costs. The $100,000 is then added to the direct costs—let’s assume these are also $100,000—to obtain total operating costs of $200,000. If the laboratory earns revenues of $250,000, the cost to charges ratio is 0.80 ($200,000/$250,000). Finally, if I want to know the cost of a particular lab procedure, say a blood test for which we normally charge $20, then all I do is multiply the cost to charges ratio of 0.8 by $20 to obtain the cost of $16. Am I right?
ERIC: Absolutely. In the laboratory testing bid that we just lost, our bid was at cost, as computed using our cost to charges formula. Perhaps the other hospitals are bidding below their cost to capture the business.
PAULA: Eric, I don’t agree. The cost to charges ratio is a traditional approach for costing hospital products, but I’m afraid that it is no longer useful. Given the new environment in which we’re operating, we need more accurate product costing information. We need accuracy to improve our bidding, to help us assess and deal with the new DRG reimbursement system, and to evaluate the mix of services we offer. The cost to charges ratio approach backs into the product cost. It is indirect and inaccurate. Some procedures require more labor, more materials, and more expensive equipment than others. The cost to charges approach doesn’t reflect these potential differences.
ERIC: Well, I’m willing to change the cost accounting system so that it meets our needs. Do you have any suggestions?
PAULA: Yes. I’m in favor of a more direct computation of product costs. Allocating support service costs to the revenue producing departments is only the first stage in product costing. We do need to allocate these support service costs to the producing departments—but we need to be certain that we are allocating them in the right way. We also need to go a step further and assign the costs accumulated in the revenue producing departments to individual products. The costs directly traceable to each product should be identified and assigned directly to those products; indirect costs can be assigned through one or more overhead rates. The base for assigning the overhead costs should be associated with their incurrence. If at all possible, allocations should reflect the usage of support services by the revenue producing departments; moreover, the same criterion should govern the assignment of overhead costs to the products within the department.
ERIC: Sounds like an interesting challenge. With over 30,000 products, a job order costing system would be too burdensome and costly. I think some system can be developed, however, that will do essentially what you want.
PAULA: Good. Listen, for our next meeting, come prepared to brief me on why and how you allocate these service department costs to the revenue producing departments. I think this is a critical step in accurate product costing. I also want to know how you propose to assign the costs accumulated in each revenue producing department to that department’s products. As Eric mentally reviewed his meeting with Paula, he realized that the failure of bids could be attributable to inaccurate cost assignments. Because of this possibility, Eric decided to do some additional investigation to see if the cost to charges ratio method of costing services was responsible. Eric pulled the current year’s budgeted data from his files. He found the following data. The number of departments and the budget have been reduced for purposes of simplification.
|
|
Support Departments
|
Revenue Departments
|
|
|
Administrative
|
Laundry Janitorial Laboratory
|
Nursing
|
|
Overhead
|
$20,000
|
$75,000
|
$50,000
|
$43,000
|
$150,000
|
|
Employees
|
1
|
4
|
7
|
8
|
20
|
|
Pounds of laundry
|
50
|
200
|
400
|
1,000
|
4,000
|
|
Square feet
|
1,000
|
1,200
|
500
|
5,000
|
20,000
|
Support department costs are allocated using the direct method. Eric decided to compute the costs of three different lab tests using the cost to charges ratio and then recompute them using a more direct method, as suggested by Paula. By comparing the unit costs under each approach, he could evaluate the cost estimating ability of the cost to charges ratio. The three tests selected for study were the blood count test (Test B), cholesterol test (Test C), and a chemical blood analysis (Test CB). After careful observation of the three tests, Eric concluded that the consumption of the resources of the laboratory could be associated with the relative amount of time taken by each test. Based on the amount of time needed to perform each test, Eric developed relative value units (RVUs) and associated the consumption of materials and labor with these units. The RVUs for each test and the cost per RVU for materials and labor are as follows:
|
|
|
Material
|
Labor
|
|
Test
|
RVUs
|
per RVU
|
per RVU
|
|
B
|
1
|
$2.00
|
$2.00
|
|
C
|
2
|
2.50
|
2.00
|
|
CB
|
3
|
1.00
|
2.00
|
Eric also concluded that the pool of overhead costs collected within the laboratory should be applied using RVUs. (He was convinced that RVU was a good activity driver for overhead.) The laboratory’s expected RVUs for the year were 22,500. The laboratory usually performs an equal number of the three tests over a year. This year was no exception.
Eric also noted that the hospital usually priced its services so that revenues exceeded costs by a specified percentage. Based on the past total costs of the laboratory, this pricing strategy had led to the following fees for the three blood tests:
|
|
Test B
|
Test C
|
Test CB
|
|
Fees charged
|
$5.00
|
$19.33
|
$22.00
|
Required:
1. Allocate the costs of the support departments to the two revenue producing departments using the direct method.
2. Assuming that the three blood tests are the only tests performed in the laboratory, compute the cost to charges ratio (total costs of the laboratory divided by the laboratory’s total revenues).
3. Using the cost to charges ratio computed in Requirement 2, estimate the cost per test for each blood test.
4. Compute the cost per test for each test using RVUs.
5. Which unit cost—the one using the cost to charges ratio or the one using RVUs—do you think is the most accurate? Explain.
6. Assume that Lambert Medical Center has been requested by an HMO to bid on Test CB. Using a 5 percent markup, prepare the bid using the cost computed in Requirement 3. Repeat, using the cost prepared in Requirement 4. Suppose that anyone who bids $20 or less will win the bid. Discuss the implications of costing accuracy on the hospital’s problems with its bidding practices.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SALES, PRODUCTION, DIRECT MATERIALS, AND DIRECT LABOR BUDGETS Young Products produces coat racks. The projected sales for the first quarter of the coming year and the beginning and ending inventory data are as follows:
|
Sales
|
100,000 units
|
|
Unit price
|
$15
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
8,000 units
|
|
Targeted ending inventory
|
12,000 units
|
The coat racks are molded and then painted. Each rack requires four pounds of metal, which cost $2.50 per pound. The beginning inventory of materials is 4,000 pounds. Young Products wants to have 6,000 pounds of metal in inventory at the end of the quarter. Each rack produced requires 30 minutes of direct labor time, which is billed at $9 per hour.
Required:
1. Prepare a sales budget for the first quarter.
2. Prepare a production budget for the first quarter.
3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for the first quarter.
4. Prepare a direct labor budget for the first quarter.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FLEXIBLE BUDGETING Archer Company manufactures backpacks, messenger bags, and rolling duffel bags.
Archer’s accountant has estimated the following cost formulas for overhead:
Indirect labor cost = $90,000 + $0.50 per direct labor hour
Maintenance = $45,000 + $0.40 per machine hour
Power = $0.15 per machine hour
Depreciation = $150,000
Other = $63,000 + $1.30 per direct labor hour
In the coming year, Archer is considering three budgeting scenarios: conservative (assumes increased competition from other companies), expected, and optimistic (assumes a particularly robust economy). Anticipated quantities sold of each type of product appear in the following table:
|
Product
|
Conservative
|
Expected
|
Optimistic
|
|
Backpacks
|
50,000
|
100,000
|
150,000
|
|
Messenger bags
|
20,000
|
40,000
|
80,000
|
|
Rolling duffel bags
|
15,000
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
The standard amounts for one unit of each type of product are as follows:
|
|
Backpacks
|
Messenger Bags
|
Rolling Duffel Bags
|
|
Direct materials
|
$5.00
|
$4.00
|
$8.00
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
1.2 hours
|
1.0 hour
|
2.5 hours
|
|
Machine hours
|
1.0 hour
|
0.75 hour
|
2.0 hours
|
Direct labor costs $8 per hour.
Required:
1. Prepare an overhead budget for the three potential scenarios.
2. Now, suppose that the actual level of activity for the year was 120,000 backpacks, 45,000 messenger bags, and 40,000 rolling duffel bags. Actual overhead costs were as follows:
|
Indirect labor
|
$230,400
|
|
Maintenance
|
145,500
|
|
Power
|
38,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
150,000
|
|
Other
|
435,350
|
Prepare a performance report for overhead costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DIRECT MATERIALS PURCHASES BUDGET, DIRECT LABOR BUDGET APO Company produces stuffed toy animals; one of these is “Elliebelle the Cow.” Each elliebelle takes 0.20 yard of fabric (white with irregular black splotches) and eight ounces of poly fiberfill. Material costs $3.50 per yard, and poly fiberfill is $0.05 per ounce. APO has budgeted production of ellie belles for the next four months as follows:
|
|
Units
|
|
October
|
42,000
|
|
November
|
90,000
|
|
December
|
50,000
|
|
January
|
40,000
|
Inventory policy requires that sufficient fabric be in ending monthly inventory to satisfy 20 percent of the following month’s production needs and sufficient polyfiberfill be in inventory to satisfy 40 percent of the following month’s production needs. Inventory of fabric and polyfiberfill at the beginning of October equals exactly the amount needed to satisfy the inventory policy.
Each elliebelle produced requires (on average) 0.1 direct labor hour. The average cost of direct labor is $15 per hour.
Required:
1. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget of material for the last quarter of the year showing purchases in units and in dollars for each month and for the quarter in total.
2. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget of polyfiberfill for the last quarter of the year showing purchases in units and in dollars for each month and for the quarter in total.
3. Prepare a direct labor budget for the last quarter of the year showing the hours needed and the direct labor cost for each month and for the quarter in total.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PURCHASES BUDGET Central Drug Store carries a variety of health and beauty aids, including elastic ankle braces. The sales budget for ankle braces for the first six months of the year is as follows:
|
|
Unit Sales
|
Dollar Sales
|
|
January
|
150
|
$1,200
|
|
February
|
140
|
1,120
|
|
March
|
145
|
1,160
|
|
April
|
160
|
1,280
|
|
May
|
200
|
1,600
|
|
June
|
260
|
2,080
|
The owner of Central Drug believes that ending inventories should be sufficient to cover 20 percent of the next month’s projected sales. On January 1, there were 84 ankle braces in inventory.
Required:
1. Prepare a merchandise purchases budget in units of ankle braces for as many months as you can.
2. If ankle braces are priced at cost plus 60 percent, what is the dollar cost of purchases for each month of your purchases budget?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SCHEDULE OF CASH RECEIPTS Rick Moreno owns The Steak Place in Orlando, Florida. The Steak Place is an affordable restaurant near International Drive—a tourist mecca. Rick accepts cash and checks. Checks are deposited immediately. The bank charges $0.50 per check; the amount per check averages $75. “Bad” checks that Rick cannot collect make up 2 percent of check revenue. During a typical month, The Steak Place has sales of $75,000. About 75 percent are cash sales. Estimated sales for the next three months are as follows:
|
April
|
$60,000
|
|
May
|
75,000
|
|
June
|
80,000
|
Required:
Prepare a schedule of cash receipts for May and June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASH BUDGET Crash Dobson, former all state high school football player, owns a retail store that sells new and used sporting equipment. Crash has requested a cash budget for October. After examining the records of the company, you find the following:
a. Cash balance on October 1 is $1,980.
b. Actual sales for August and September are as follows:
|
|
August
|
September
|
|
Cash sales
|
$15,000
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Credit sales
|
80,000
|
90,000
|
|
Total sales
|
$95,000
|
$110,000
|
c. Credit sales are collected over a 3 month period: 50 percent in the month of sale, 30 percent in the second month, and 15 percent in the third month. The remaining sales are uncollectible.
d. Inventory purchases average 70 percent of a month’s total sales. Of those purchases, 40 percent are paid for in the month of purchase. The remaining 60 percent are paid for in the following month.
e. Salaries and wages total $2,000 per month.
f. Rent is $2,700 per month.
g. Taxes to be paid in October are $5,000.
h. Crash usually withdraws $4,000 each month as his salary.
i. Advertising is $500 per month.
j. Other operating expenses total $800 per month.
Crash tells you that he expects cash sales of $10,000 and credit sales of $65,000 for October. He likes to have $2,000 on hand at the end of the month and is concerned about the potential October ending balance.
Required:
1. Prepare a cash budget for October. Include supporting schedules for cash collections and cash payments.
2. Did the business meet Crash’s desired ending cash balance for October? Assuming that the owner has no hope of establishing a line of credit for the business, what recommendations would you give the owner for meeting the desired cash balance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BUDGETED CASH COLLECTIONS, BUDGETED CASH PAYMENTS Historically, Pine Hill Wood Products has had no significant bad debt experience with its customers. There are no cash sales, all sales are made on credit. Payments for credit sales have been received as follows:
40 percent of credit sales in the month of the sale.
30 percent of credit sales in the first subsequent month.
25 percent of credit sales in the second subsequent month.
5 percent of credit sales in the third subsequent month.
The forecast for both cash and credit sales is as follows.
|
January
|
$95,000
|
|
February
|
65,000
|
|
March
|
70,000
|
|
April
|
80,000
|
|
May
|
85,000
|
Required:
1. What is the forecasted cash inflow for Pine Hill Wood Products for May?
2. Due to deteriorating economic conditions, Pine Hill Wood Products has now decided that its cash forecast should include a bad debt adjustment of 2 percent of credit sales, beginning with sales for the month of April. Because of this policy change, what will happen to the total expected cash inflow related to sales made in April?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASH DISBURSEMENTS SCHEDULE David Campbell’s purchases clothing evenly throughout the month. All purchases are on account. On the first of every month, Moira Campbell, David’s wife, pays for all of the previous month’s purchases. Terms are 2/10, n/30 (i.e., a 2 percent discount can be taken if the bill is paid within 10 days; otherwise, the entire amount is due within 30 days). The forecast purchases for the months of May through September are as follows:
|
May
|
$48,000
|
|
June
|
25,000
|
|
July
|
35,000
|
|
August
|
40,000
|
|
September
|
50,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare a cash disbursements schedule for the months of August and September.
2. Now, suppose that David wants to see what difference it would make to have someone pay for any purchases that have been made three times per month, on the 1st, the 11th, and the 21st. Prepare a cash disbursements schedule for the months of July and August assuming this new payment schedule.
3. Suppose that Moira (who works full time as a school teacher and is the mother of two small children) does not have time to make payments on two extra days per month and that a temporary employee is hired on the 11th and 21st at $22 per hour, for four hours each of those two days. Is this a good decision? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTION, PURCHASES, AND DIRECT LABOR BUDGETS Rokat Corporation is a manufacturer of tables sold to schools, restaurants, hotels, and other institutions. The table tops are manufactured by Rokat, but the table legs are purchased from an outside supplier. The assembly department takes a manufactured table top and attaches the four purchased table legs. It takes 18 minutes of labor to assemble a table. The company follows a policy of producing enough tables to ensure that 40 percent of next month’s sales are in the finished goods inventory. Rokat also purchases sufficient materials to ensure that materials inventory is 60 percent of the following month’s scheduled production. Rokat’s sales budget in units for the next quarter is as follows:
|
July
|
2,300
|
|
August
|
2,500
|
|
September
|
2,100
|
Rokat’s ending inventories in units for June 30, 2007, are as follows:
|
Finished goods
|
1,900
|
|
Materials (legs)
|
4,000
|
Required:
1. Calculate the number of tables to be produced during August 2007.
2. Disregarding your response to Requirement 1, assume the required production units for August and September are 1,600 and 1,800, respectively, and the July 31, 2007, materials inventory is 4,200 units. Compute the number of table legs to be purchased in August.
3. Assume that Rokat Corporation will produce 1,800 units in September 2007. How many employees will be required for the assembly department in September? (Fractional employees are acceptable since employees can be hired on a parttime basis. Assume a 40 hour week and a 4 week month.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FLEXIBLE BUDGET At the end of the year, Zebro Products actually produced 550,000 rolls of counter wipes and 500,000 of floor wipes. The actual overhead costs incurred were:
|
Maintenance
|
$15,600
|
|
Power
|
17,250
|
|
Indirect labor
|
89,000
|
|
Rent
|
24,000
|
Required:
Prepare a performance report for the period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SALES FORECAST AND FLEXIBLE BUDGET Sandman, Inc., manufactures three models of mattresses: the sleepeze, the plushette, and the ultima. Forecast sales for 2007 are 15,000 for the sleepeze, 12,000 for the plushette, and 5,000 for the ultima. Gene Dixon, vice president of sales, has provided the following information:
a. Salaries for his office (including himself at $65,000, a marketing research assistant at $40,000, and an administrative assistant at $25,000) are budgeted for $130,000 next year.
b. Depreciation on the offices and equipment is $20,000 per year.
c. Office supplies and other expenses total $21,000 per year.
d. Advertising has been steady at $20,000 per year. However, the ultima is a new product and will require extensive advertising to educate consumers on the unique features of this high end mattress. Gene believes the company should spend 15 percent of first year ultima sales for a print and television campaign.
e. Commissions on the sleepeze and plushette lines are 5 percent of sales. These commissions are paid to independent jobbers who sell the mattresses to retail stores.
f. Last year, shipping for the sleepeze and plushette lines averaged $50 per unit sold. Gene expects the ultima line to ship for $75 per unit sold since this model features a larger mattress.
Required:
1. Suppose that Gene is considering three sales scenarios as follows:
|
|
Pessimistic
|
Expected
|
Optimistic
|
|
|
|
Price
|
Quantity
|
Price
|
Quantity
|
Price
|
Quantity
|
|
Sleepeze
|
$180
|
12,500
|
$ 200
|
15,000
|
$ 200
|
18,000
|
|
Plushette
|
300
|
10,000
|
350
|
12,000
|
360
|
14,000
|
|
Ultima
|
900
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
5,000
|
1,200
|
5,000
|
Prepare a revenue budget for the sales division for the coming year for each scenario.
2. Prepare a flexible expense budget for the sales division for the three scenarios above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY BASED BUDGET Suppose Gene determines that next year’s sales division activities include the following: Research—researching current and future conditions in the industry Shipping—arranging for shipping of mattresses and handling calls from purchasing agents at retail stores to trace shipments and correct errors Jobbers—coordinating the efforts of the independent jobbers who sell the mattresses Basic ads—placing print and television ads for the sleepeze and plushette lines Ultima ads—choosing and working with the advertising agency on the ultima account Office management—operating the sales division office The percentage of time spent by each employee of the sales division on each of the above activities is given in the following table:
|
|
Gene
|
Research Assistant
|
Administrative Assistant
|
|
Research
|
—%
|
75%
|
—%
|
|
Shipping
|
30%
|
—%
|
20%
|
|
Jobbers
|
15%
|
10
|
20%
|
|
Basic ads
|
—%
|
15%
|
40%
|
|
Ultima ads
|
30%
|
—%
|
5%
|
|
Office management
|
25%
|
—%
|
15%
|
Additional information is as follows:
a. Depreciation on the office equipment belongs to the office management activity.
b. Of the $21,000 for office supplies and other, $5,000 can be assigned to telephone costs, which can be split evenly between the shipping and jobbers’ activities. An additional $2,400 per year is attributable to Internet connections and fees, and the bulk of these costs (80 percent) are assignable to research. The remainder is a cost of office management. All other office supplies and costs are assigned to the office management activity.
Required:
1. Prepare an activity based budget for next year by activity. Use the expected level of sales activity.
2. On the basis of the budget prepared in Requirement 1, advise Gene regarding actions that might be taken to reduce expenses.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OPERATING BUDGET, COMPREHENSIVE ANALYSIS Leitner Manufacturing, Inc., produces control valves used in the production of oil field equipment. The control valves are sold to various gas and oil engineering companies throughout the United States. Projected sales in units for the coming four months are as follows:
|
January
|
20,000
|
|
February
|
25,000
|
|
March
|
30,000
|
|
April
|
30,000
|
The following data pertain to production policies and manufacturing specifications followed by Leitner:
a. Finished goods inventory on January 1 is 13,000 units. The desired ending inventory for each month is 70 percent of the next month’s sales.
b. The data on materials used are as follows:
|
Direct Material
|
Per Unit Usage
|
Unit Cost
|
|
Part 714
|
5
|
$4
|
|
Part 502
|
3
|
3
|
Inventory policy dictates that sufficient materials be on hand at the beginning of the month to produce 50 percent of that month’s estimated sales. This is exactly the amount of material on hand on January 1.
c. The direct labor used per unit of output is two hours. The average direct labor cost per hour is $15.
d. Overhead each month is estimated using a flexible budget formula. (Activity is measured in direct labor hours.)
|
|
Fixed Cost
|
Variable Cost
|
|
|
Component
|
Component
|
|
Supplies
|
$ —
|
$1.00
|
|
Power
|
—
|
0.20
|
|
Maintenance
|
28,000
|
1.10
|
|
Supervision
|
14,000
|
—
|
|
Depreciation
|
100,000
|
—
|
|
Taxes
|
7,000
|
—
|
|
Other
|
56,000
|
1.60
|
e. Monthly selling and administrative expenses are also estimated using a flexible budgeting formula. (Activity is measured in units sold.)
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
Variable Costs
|
|
Salaries
|
$30,000
|
—
|
|
Commissions
|
—
|
$0.75
|
|
Depreciation
|
5,000
|
—
|
|
Shipping
|
—
|
2.60
|
|
Other
|
10,000
|
0.40
|
f. The unit selling price of the control valve is $90.
g. In February, the company plans to purchase land for future expansion. The land costs $90,000.
h. All sales and purchases are for cash. Cash balance on January 1 equals $162,900. If the firm develops cash shortage by the end of the month, sufficient cash is borrowed to cover the shortage. Any cash borrowed is repaid one month later, as is the interest due. The interest rate is 12 percent per annum.
Required:
Prepare a monthly operating budget for the first quarter with the following schedules:
1. Sales budget
2. Production budget
3. Direct materials purchases budget
4. Direct labor budget
5. Overhead budget
6. Selling and administrative expense budget
7. Ending finished goods inventory budget
8. Cost of goods sold budget
9. Budgeted income statement (ignore income taxes)
10. Cash budget
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASH BUDGET, PRO FORMA BALANCE SHEET Bernard Creighton is the controller for Creighton Hardware Store. In putting together the cash budget for the fourth quarter of the year, he has assembled the following data:
|
a.
|
Sales
|
|
|
|
July (actual)
|
$100,000
|
|
|
August (actual)
|
120,000
|
|
|
September (estimated)
|
90,000
|
|
|
October (estimated)
|
100,000
|
|
|
November (estimated)
|
135,000
|
|
|
December (estimated)
|
150,000
|
b. Each month, 20 percent of sales are for cash, and 80 percent are on credit. The collection pattern for credit sales is 20 percent in the month of sale, 50 percent in the following month, and 30 percent in the second month following the sale.
c. Each month, the ending inventory exactly equals 40 percent of the cost of next month’s sales. The markup on goods is 33.33 percent of cost.
d. Inventory purchases are paid for in the month following purchase.
e. Recurring monthly expenses are as follows:
|
Salaries and wages
|
$10,000
|
|
Depreciation on plant and equipment
|
4,000
|
|
Utilities
|
1,000
|
|
Other
|
1,700
|
f. Property taxes of $15,000 are due and payable on September 15.
g. Advertising fees of $6,000 must be paid on October 20.
h. A lease on a new storage facility is scheduled to begin on November 2. Monthly payments are $5,000.
i. The company has a policy to maintain a minimum cash balance of $10,000. If necessary, it will borrow to meet its short term needs. All borrowing is done at the beginning of the month. All payments on principal and interest are made at the end of the month. The annual interest rate is 9 percent. The company must borrow in multiples of $1,000.
j. A partially completed balance sheet as of August 31 follows. (Accounts payable is for inventory purchases only.)
|
|
|
Liabilities &
|
|
|
Assets
|
Owners’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$ ?
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
?
|
|
|
Inventory
|
?
|
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
431,750
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$ ?
|
|
Common stock
|
|
220,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
268,750
|
|
Total
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
Required:
1. Complete the balance sheet given in part (j).
2. Bernard wants to see how the company is doing prior to starting the month of December. Prepare a cash budget for the months of September, October, and November and for the 3 month period in total (the period begins on September
1). Provide a supporting schedule of cash collections.
3. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet as of November 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTION, DIRECT LABOR, DIRECT MATERIALS, SALES BUDGETS, BUDGETED CONTRIBUTION MARGIN Bullen & Company makes and sells high quality glare filters for microcomputer monitors. John Crave, controller, is responsible for preparing Bullen’s master budget and has assembled the following data for 2007. The direct labor rate includes wages, all employee related benefits, and the employer’s share of FICA. Labor saving machinery will be fully operational by March. Also, as of March 1, the company’s union contract calls for an increase in direct labor wages that is included in the direct labor rate. Bullen expects to have 10,000 glare filters in inventory at December 31, 2006, and has a policy of carrying 50 percent of the following month’s projected sales in inventory.
|
|
2007
|
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
April
|
|
Estimated unit sales
|
20,000
|
24,000
|
16,000
|
18,000
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
$80
|
$80
|
$75
|
$75
|
|
Direct labor hours per unit
|
4.0
|
4.0
|
3.5
|
3.5
|
|
Direct labor hourly rate
|
$15
|
$15
|
$16
|
$16
|
|
Direct materials cost per unit
|
$10
|
$10
|
$10
|
$10
|
Required:
1. Prepare the following monthly budgets for Bullen & Company for the first quarter of 2007. Be sure to show supporting calculations.
a. Production budget in units
b. Direct labor budget in hours
c. Direct materials cost budget
d. Sales budget
2. Calculate the total budgeted contributions margin for Bullen & Company for the first quarter of 2007. Be sure to show supporting calculations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASH BUDGET Friendly Freddie’s is an independently owned major appliance and electronics discount chain with seven stores located in a Midwest metropolitan area. Rapid expansion has created the need for careful planning of cash requirements to ensure that the chain is able to replenish stock adequately and meet payment schedules to creditors. Fred Ferguson, founder of the chain, has established a banking relationship that provides a $200,000 line of credit to Friendly Freddie’s. The bank requires that a minimum balance of $8,200 be kept in the chain’s checking account at the end of each month. When the balance goes below $8,200, the bank automatically extends the line of credit in multiples of $1,000 so that the checking account balance is at least $8,200 at month end. Friendly Freddie’s attempts to borrow as little as possible and repays the loans quickly in multiples of $1,000 plus 2 percent monthly interest on the entire loan balance. Interest payments and any principal payments are paid at the end of the month following the loan. The chain currently has no outstanding loans. The following cash receipts and disbursements data apply to the fourth quarter of the current calendar year:
|
Estimated beginning cash balance Estimated cash sales:
|
$ 8,800
|
|
October
|
$ 14,000
|
|
November
|
29,000
|
|
December
|
44,000
|
|
Sales on account:
|
|
|
July (actual)
|
$130,000
|
|
August (actual)
|
104,000
|
|
September (actual)
|
128,000
|
|
October (estimated)
|
135,000
|
|
November (estimated)
|
142,000
|
|
December (estimated)
|
188,000
|
Projected cash collection of sales on account is estimated to be 70 percent in the month following the sale, 20 percent in the second month following the sale, and 6 percent in the third month following the sale. The 4 percent beyond the third month following the sale is determined to be uncollectible. In addition, the chain is scheduled to receive $13,000 cash on a note receivable in October.
All inventory purchases are made on account as the chain has excellent credit with all vendors because of a strong payment history. The following information regarding inventory purchases is available:
|
Inventory Purchases
|
|
September (actual)
|
$120,000
|
|
October (estimated)
|
112,000
|
|
November (estimated)
|
128,000
|
|
December (estimated)
|
95,000
|
Cash disbursements for inventory are made in the month following purchase using an average cash discount of 3 percent for timely payment. Monthly cash disbursements for operating expenses during October, November, and December are estimated to be $38,000, $41,000, and $46,000, respectively.
Required:
Prepare Friendly Freddie’s cash budget for the months of October, November, and December showing all receipts, disbursements, and credit line activity, where applicable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FLEXIBLE BUDGET The controller for Muir Company’s Salem plant is analyzing overhead in order to determine appropriate drivers for use in flexible budgeting. She decided to concentrate on the past 12 months since that time period was one in which there was little important change in technology, product lines, and so on. Data on overhead costs, number of machine hours, number of setups, and number of purchase orders are given in the following table:
|
|
Overhead
|
Number of
|
Number
|
Number of
|
|
Month
|
Costs
|
Machine Hours
|
of Setups
|
Purchase Orders
|
|
January
|
$ 32,296
|
1,000
|
20
|
216
|
|
February
|
31,550
|
930
|
18
|
250
|
|
March
|
36,280
|
1,100
|
21
|
300
|
|
April
|
36,867
|
1,050
|
23
|
270
|
|
May
|
36,790
|
1,170
|
22
|
285
|
|
June
|
37,800
|
1,200
|
25
|
240
|
|
July
|
40,024
|
1,235
|
27
|
237
|
|
August
|
39,256
|
1,190
|
24
|
303
|
|
September
|
33,800
|
1,070
|
20
|
255
|
|
October
|
33,779
|
1,210
|
22
|
195
|
|
November
|
37,225
|
1,207
|
23
|
270
|
|
December
|
27,500
|
1,084
|
15
|
150
|
|
Total
|
$423,167
|
13,446
|
260
|
2,971
|
Required:
1. Calculate an overhead rate based on machine hours using the total overhead cost and total machine hours. (Round the overhead rate to the nearest cent and predicted overhead to the nearest dollar.) Use this rate to predict overhead for each of the 12 months.
2. Run a regression equation using only machine hours as the independent variable. Prepare a flexible budget for overhead for the 12 months using the results of this regression equation. (Round the intercept and x coefficient to the nearest cent and predicted overhead to the nearest dollar.) Is this flexible budget better than the budget in Requirement 1? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FLEXIBLE BUDGET FOR A SERVICE FIRM Dorian Dermatology Associates consists of a medical suite of offices with two MDs, one office manager, two medical assistants, and one receptionist. The office manager provided the following information on Dorian’s operations:
a. Rent for the office suite is $1,200 per month.
b. Depreciation on furnishings and equipment is $1,000 per month.
c. When a patient calls for an appointment, the receptionist determines how long the appointment should take and allots one, two, three, or four 15 minute time slots. (For example, an initial visit is allotted 30 minutes, or two 15 minute time slots, but a followup visit might take only one 15 minute time slot.)
d. The office manager estimates that each patient seen during the month costs about $10 for office supplies. The estimate for medical supplies is a bit more complex. One of the medical assistants feels that patients with longer appointments use more medical supplies than patients who need only a shorter appointment. After much discussion, she thinks that each patient uses about $5 of medical supplies for every 15 minute time slot. (That is, a patient who requires only a brief visit of 15 minutes would use about $5 in supplies, and one who requires a 1 hour visit would average $20 of medical supplies.)
e. The office manager earns a yearly salary of $25,000, each medical assistant earns $18,000, and the receptionist’s salary is $15,000.
f. Utilities run about $500 per month.
g. A janitorial service cleans the offices twice a week for $250 per month.
h. Accounting and financial services cost $28,800 on average for the year.
i. Insurance runs about $36,000 per year.
j. Other expenses (magazine subscriptions, plants, and the like) are about $700 per month.
For the coming month, it is estimated that the doctors will see 800 patients, who will use a total of 1,200 15 minute time slots.
Required:
1. Categorize each cost as fixed or variable, and give its driver.
2. Prepare an overhead budget for May. Since the doctors split the profit from the practice, do not worry about the doctors’ salaries and consider all other expenses of the practice as overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY BASED BUDGET FOR A SERVICE FIRM Suppose that the accountant for the practice, Sally Bains, decides to prepare an activity based budget for Dorian Dermatology Associates. Her interviews with the office manager, receptionist, and medical assistants provided the following information:
a. There are essentially six activities for the medical practice: scheduling appointments, initial patient screening, assisting the doctors, filing insurance, handling disputed insurance claims, and providing facilities.
b. Scheduling appointments is done by the receptionist. It takes about half of her time and requires a special software package. The number of phone calls to the office is the driver for this activity. The cost per unit of driver is $1 per call.
c. The initial screening requires the medical assistant to call each patient from the waiting room to an examining room. The assistant then takes a brief medical history and determines the nature of the complaint. If it is a repeat appointment, the assistant can occasionally handle it. The driver is the number of patients seen, and the cost per unit of driver is $7.25.
d. The activity of assisting doctors is performed by the medical assistants. After the initial screening, the doctor examines the patient and determines the diagnosis and course of treatment. Occasionally, the treatment requires assistance with a procedure (e.g., minor surgery). The driver for the activity is the number of procedures, and the cost per unit of driver is $7.25.
e. Filing insurance claims is handled by the office manager and receptionist. This takes about 60 percent of the office manager’s time and the remaining half of the receptionist’s time. Office supplies and computer programs are also required.
The driver is the number of claims filed, and the cost is $9.27 per claim filed.
f. Sometimes, insurance claims are disputed by the insurance companies. When this occurs, considerable more time and effort are required by the office manager. She also needs help from the medical assistants to check for errors in charts and clarify diagnoses. Supplies and office machinery (fax machine and long distance calls) are also required. The driver is the number of disputed claims, and the cost is $123.50 per disputed claim.
g. The final activity is providing facilities. These costs total $8,550 per month and include rent, noncomputer depreciation, utilities, janitorial services, accounting and financial services, insurance, and other expenses.
For the month of May, the following amounts of each driver are estimated: 875 phone calls for appointments, 800 patients to be seen, 400 procedures to be performed, 650 insurance claims to be filed, and 40 disputed claims.
Required:
1. Prepare an activity based overhead budget for the month of May.
2. Based on the given information, what managerial advice would you give to Dorian Dermatology Associates?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NORMAL AND ABNORMAL SPOILAGE Larkin Company produces leather strips for western belts using three processes: cutting, design and coloring, and punching. The weighted average method is used for all three departments. The following information pertains to the design and coloring department for the month of June.
a. There was no beginning work in process.
b. There were 400,000 units transferred in from cutting.
c. Ending work in process, June 30: 50,000 strips, 80 percent complete with respect to conversion costs.
d. Units completed and transferred out: 330,000 strips. The following costs were added during the month:
|
Transferred in
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
600,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
780,000
|
e. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process.
f. Inspection takes place at the end of the process. All spoilage is considered normal.
Required:
1. Calculate equivalent units of production for transferred in materials, direct materials added, and conversion costs.
2. Calculate unit costs for the three categories of Requirement 1.
3. What is the total cost of units transferred out? What is the cost of ending workin process inventory? How is the cost of spoilage treated?
4. Assume that all spoilage is considered abnormal. Now, how is spoilage treated?
Give the journal entry to account for the cost of the spoiled units. Some companies view all spoilage as abnormal. Explain why.
5. Assume that 80 percent of the units spoiled are abnormal and 20 percent are normal spoilage. Show the spoilage treatment for this scenario.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROCESS COSTING Novel Toys, Inc., manufactures plastic water guns. Each gun’s left and right frames are produced in the molding department. The left and right frames are then transferred to the assembly department where the trigger mechanism is inserted and the halves are glued together. (The left and right halves together define the unit of output for the molding department.) In June, the molding department reported the following data:
a. In the molding department, all direct materials are added at the beginning of the process.
b. Beginning work in process consisted of 3,000 units, 20 percent complete with respect to direct labor and overhead. Costs in beginning inventory included direct materials, $450; and conversion costs, $138.
c. Costs added to production during the month were direct materials, $950; and conversion costs, $2,174.50.
d. Inspection takes place at the end of the process. Malformed units are discarded. All spoilage is considered abnormal.
e. During the month, 7,000 units were started, and 8,000 good units were transferred out to finishing. All other units finished were malformed and discarded. There were 1,000 units that remained in ending work in process, 25 percent complete.
Required:
1. Prepare a physical flow schedule.
2. Calculate equivalent units of production using the weighted average method.
3. Calculate the unit cost.
4. What is the cost of goods transferred out? Ending work in process? Loss due to spoilage?
5. Prepare the journal entry to remove spoilage from the molding department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
NORMAL AND ABNORMAL SPOILAGE IN PROCESS COSTING, CHANGES IN OUTPUT MEASURES, MULTIPLE DEPARTMENTS Grayson Company produces an industrial chemical used for cleaning and lubricating machinery. In the mixing department, liquid and dry chemicals are blended to form slurry. Output is measured in gallons. In the baking department, the slurry is subjected to high heat, and the residue appears in irregular lumps. Output is measured in pounds. In the grinding department, the irregular lumps are ground into a owder, and this powder is placed in 50 pound bags. Output is measured in bags produced. In April, the company reported the following data:
a. The mixing department transferred 50,000 gallons to the baking department, costing $250,000. Each gallon of slurry weighs two pounds.
b. The baking department transferred 100,000 pounds (irregular lumps) to the grinding department. At the beginning of the month, there were 5,000 gallons of slurry in process, 25 percent complete, costing $35,000 (transferred in cost of $25,000 plus conversion cost of $10,000). No additional direct materials are added in the baking department. At the end of April, there was no ending work in process. Conversion costs for the month totaled $205,000. Normal loss during baking is 5 percent of good output. All transferred in materials are lost, but since loss occurs uniformly throughout the process, only 50 percent of the conversion units are assumed to be lost.
c. The grinding department transferred 2,500 bags of chemicals to its finished goods warehouse. Beginning work in process for this department was 25,000 pounds, 40 percent complete with the following costs: transferred in cost, $132,500 and conversion cost, $15,000. Bags are used at the end of the process and cost $1.50 each. During bagging, normally one out of every 11 bags is torn and must be discarded. No powder is lost (the tearing occurs when the bag is being attached to a funnel). Conversion costs for the month’s production are $172,500. There is no ending work in process.
Required:
1. Calculate the cost per bag of chemicals transferred to the finished goods warehouse. Show all work necessary for the calculation.
2. Prepare the journal entries needed to remove spoilage from the baking and grinding departments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ALLOCATION: DIRECT, SEQUENTIAL, AND RECIPROCAL METHODS Antioch Manufacturing produces machine parts on a job order basis. Most business is obtained through bidding. Most firms competing with Antioch bid full cost plus a 20 percent markup. Recently, with the expectation of gaining more sales, Antioch reduced its markup from 25 percent to 20 percent. The company operates two service departments and two producing departments. The budgeted costs and the normal activity levels for each department are as follows:
|
|
Service Departments
|
Producing Departments
|
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
|
Overhead costs
|
$100,000
|
$200,000
|
$100,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Number of employees
|
8
|
7
|
30
|
30
|
|
Maintenance hours
|
2,000
|
200
|
6,400
|
1,600
|
|
Machine hours
|
—
|
—
|
10,000
|
1,000
|
|
Labor hours
|
—
|
—
|
1,000
|
10,000
|
The direct costs of department A are allocated on the basis of employees; those of department B are allocated on the basis of maintenance hours. Departmental overhead rates are used to assign costs to products. Department C uses machine hours, and department D uses labor hours.
The firm is preparing to bid on a job (Job K) that requires three machine hours per unit produced in department C and no time in department D. The expected prime costs per unit are $67.
Required:
1. Allocate the service costs to the producing departments using the direct method.
2. What will the bid be for Job K if the direct method of allocation is used?
3. Allocate the service costs to the producing departments using the sequential method.
4. What will the bid be for Job K if the sequential method is used?
5. Allocate the service costs to the producing departments using the reciprocal method.
6. What will the bid be for Job K if the reciprocal method is used?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOINT COST ALLOCATION, FURTHER PROCESSING Sanders Pharmaceutical Company purchases a material which is then processed to yield three chemicals: anarol, estyl, and betryl. In June, Sanders purchased 10,000 gallons of the material at a cost of $250,000, and the company incurred joint conversion costs of $70,000. June sales and production information are as follows:
|
Gallons
|
Price at
|
Further Processing
|
Eventual
|
|
Produced
|
Split Off
|
Cost per Gallon
|
Sales Price
|
|
Anarol
|
2,000
|
$55
|
—
|
—
|
|
Estyl
|
3,000
|
40
|
—
|
—
|
|
Betryl
|
5,000
|
30
|
$5
|
$60
|
Anarol and estyl are sold to other pharmaceutical companies at the split off point. Betryl can be sold at the split off point or processed further and packaged for sale as an asthma medication.
Required:
1. Allocate the joint costs to the three products using the physical units method, the sales value at split off method, the net realizable value method, and the constant gross margin percentage method.
2. Suppose that half of June’s production of estyl could be purified and mixed with all of the anarol to produce a veterinary grade anesthetic. All further processing costs amount to $35,000. The selling price for the veterinary grade anarol is $112 per gallon. Should Sanders further process the estyl into the anarol anesthetic?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OBJECTIVES OF COST ALLOCATION Dr. Fred Poston, “Dermatologist to the Stars,” has a practice in southern California. The practice includes three dermatologists, three medical assistants, an office manager, and a receptionist. The office space, which is rented for $5,000 per month, is large enough to accommodate four dermatologists, but Dr. Poston has not yet found the right physician to fill the fourth spot. Dr. Poston developed a skin cleanser for his patients that is nongreasy and does not irritate skin that is still recovering from the effects of chemical peels and dermabrasion. The cleanser requires $0.50 worth of ingredients per 8 ounce bottle. A medical assistant mixes up several bottles at a time during lulls in her schedule. She waits until she has about 15 minutes free and then mixes 10 bottles of cleanser. She is paid $2,250 per month. Dr. Poston charges $5.00 per bottle and sells approximately 5,000 bottles annually. His accountant is considering various ways of costing the skin cleanser.
Required:
1. Give two reasons for allocating overhead cost to the cleanser. How should the cost of the office space and the medical assistant’s salary be allocated to the cleanser? Explain.
2. Suppose that Healthy You magazine runs an article on Dr. Poston and his skin cleanser, which causes demand to skyrocket. Consumers across the country buy the cleanser via phone or mail order. Now, Dr. Poston believes that he can sell about 40,000 bottles annually. He can hire someone part time, for $1,000 per month, to mix and bottle the cleanser and to handle the financial business of the cleanser. An unused office and examining room can be dedicated to the production of the cleanser. Would your allocation choice for Requirement 1 change in this case? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTUAL VERSUS BUDGETED COSTS Kumar, Inc., evaluates managers of producing departments on their ability to control costs. In addition to the costs directly traceable to their departments, each production manager is held responsible for a share of the costs of a support center, the human resources (HR) department. The total costs of HR are allocated on the basis of actual direct labor hours used. The total costs of HR and the actual direct labor hours worked by each producing department are as follows:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Direct labor hours worked:
|
|
|
|
Department A
|
24,000
|
25,000
|
|
Department B
|
36,000
|
25,000
|
|
Total hours
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
|
Actual HR cost
|
$120,000
|
$120,000
|
|
Budgeted HR cost
|
115,000*
|
112,500*
|
*$0.25 per direct labor hour plus $100,000.
Required:
1. Allocate the HR costs to each producing department for Year 1 and Year 2 using the direct method with actual direct labor hours and actual HR costs.
2. Discuss the following statement: “The costs of human resource related matters increased by 25 percent for department A and decreased by over 16 percent for department B. Thus, the manager of department B must be controlling HR costs better than the manager of department A.”
3. Can you think of a way to allocate HR costs so that a more reasonable and fair assessment of cost control can be made? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
RECIPROCAL METHOD Stubing Company has two producing departments and two support centers. The following budgeted data pertain to these four departments:
|
|
Support Departments
|
Producing Departments
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
Personnel
|
Assembly
|
Painting
|
|
Overhead
|
$200,000
|
$60,000
|
$43,000
|
$74,000
|
|
Square footage
|
—
|
2,700
|
5,400
|
5,400
|
|
Number of employees
|
30
|
—
|
72
|
198
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
—
|
—
|
25,000
|
40,000
|
Required:
1. Allocate the overhead costs of the support departments to the producing departments using the reciprocal method.
2. Using direct labor hours, compute departmental overhead rates.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PHYSICAL UNITS METHOD Alomar Company manufactures four products from a joint production process: andol, incol, ordol, and exsol. The joint costs for one batch are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$56,300
|
|
Direct labor
|
28,000
|
|
Overhead
|
15,700
|
At the split off point, a batch yields 1,000 andol, 1,500 incol, 2,500 ordol, and 3,000 exsol. All products are sold at the split off point: andol sells for $20 per unit; incol sells for $75 per unit; ordol sells for $64 per unit, and exsol sells for $22.50 per unit.
Required:
1. Allocate the joint costs using the physical units method.
2. Suppose that the products are weighted as follows:
|
Andol
|
3.0
|
|
Incol
|
2.0
|
|
Ordol
|
0.4
|
|
Exsol
|
1.0
|
Allocate the joint costs using the weighted average method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ALLOCATION: FIXED AND VARIABLE COSTS, BUDGETED FIXED AND VARIABLE COSTS Biotechtron, Inc., has two research laboratories in the Midwest, one in Tulsa, Oklahoma, and one in Ames, Iowa. The owner of Biotechtron centralized the legal services function in the Tulsa office and had both laboratories send any legal questions or issues to the Tulsa office. The legal services support center has budgeted fixed costs of $60,000 per year and a budgeted variable rate of $40 per hour of professional time. The normal usage of the legal services center is 1,625 hours per year for the Tulsa office and 875 hours per year for the Ames office. This corresponds to the expected usage for the coming year.
Required:
1. Determine the amount of legal services support center costs that should be assigned to each office.
2. Since the offices produce services, not tangible products, what purpose is served by allocating the budgeted costs?
3. Now, assume that during the year, the legal services center incurred actual fixed costs of $59,000 and actual variable costs of $91,500. It delivered 2,300 hours of professional time—1,200 hours to Tulsa and 1,100 hours to Ames. Determine the amount of the legal services center’s costs that should be allocated to each office. Explain the purposes of this allocation.
4. Did the costs allocated differ from the costs incurred by the legal services center? If so, why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DIRECT METHOD, VARIABLE VERSUS FIXED, COSTING AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AirBorne is a small airline operating out of Boise, Idaho. Its three flights travel to Salt Lake City, Reno, and Portland. The owner of the airline wants to assess the full cost of operating each flight. As part of this assessment, the costs of two support departments (maintenance and baggage) must be allocated to the three flights. The two support departments that support all three flights are located in Boise (any maintenance or baggage costs at the destination airports are directly traceable to the individual flights). Budgeted and actual data for the year are as follows for the support departments and the three flights:
|
|
Support Centers
|
|
Flights
|
|
|
|
|
Salt Lake
|
|
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
Baggage
|
City
|
Reno
|
Portland
|
|
Budgeted data:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$240,000
|
$150,000
|
$20,000
|
$18,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$30,000
|
$64,000
|
$5,000
|
$10,000
|
$6,000
|
|
Hours of flight time*
|
—
|
—
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Number of passengers*
|
—
|
—
|
10,000
|
15,000
|
5,000
|
|
Actual data:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$235,000
|
$156,000
|
$22,000
|
$17,000
|
$29,500
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$80,000
|
$33,000
|
$6,200
|
$11,000
|
$5,800
|
|
Hours of flight time
|
—
|
—
|
1,800
|
4,200
|
2,500
|
|
Number of passengers
|
—
|
—
|
8,000
|
16,000
|
6,000
|
Normal activity levels.
Required:
1. Using the direct method, allocate the support service costs to each flight, assuming that the objective is to determine the cost of operating each flight.
2. Using the direct method, allocate the support service costs to each flight, assuming that the objective is to evaluate performance. Do any costs remain in the two support departments after the allocation? If so, how much? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COMPARISON OF METHODS OF ALLOCATION Homestead Pottery, Inc., is divided into two operating divisions: pottery and retail. The company allocates power and human resources department costs to each operating division. Power costs are allocated on the basis of the number of machine hours and human resources costs on the basis of the number of employees. No effort is made to separate fixed and variable costs; however, only budgeted costs are allocated. Allocations for the coming year are based on the following data:
|
|
Support Departments
|
Operating Divisions
|
|
|
Power
|
Human Resources
|
Pottery
|
Retail
|
|
Overhead costs
|
$100,000
|
$205,000
|
$80,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
5,000
|
|
Number of employees
|
20
|
60
|
60
|
80
|
Required:
1. Allocate the support service costs using the direct method.
2. Allocate the support service costs using the sequential method.
3. Allocate the support service costs using the reciprocal method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DIRECT METHOD, RECIPROCAL METHOD, OVERHEAD RATES Barrylou Corporation is developing departmental overhead rates based on direct labor hours for its two production departments—molding and assembly. The molding department employs 20 people, and the assembly department employs 80 people. Each person in these two departments works 2,000 hours per year. The production related overhead costs for the molding department are budgeted at $200,000, and the assembly department costs are budgeted at $320,000. Two support departments—repair and power—directly support the two production departments and have budgeted costs of $48,000 and $250,000, respectively. The production departments’ overhead rates cannot be determined until the support departments’ costs are properly allocated. The following schedule reflects the use of the repair department’s and power department’s output by the various departments.
|
|
Repair
|
Power
|
Molding
|
Assembly
|
|
Repair hours
|
—
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
8,000
|
|
Kilowatt hours
|
240,000
|
—
|
840,000
|
120,000
|
Required:
1. Calculate the overhead rates per direct labor hour for the molding department and the assembly department using the direct allocation method to charge the production departments for support department costs.
2. Calculate the overhead rates per direct labor hour for the molding department and the assembly department using the reciprocal method to charge support department costs to each other and to the production departments.
3. Explain the difference between the methods, and indicate the arguments generally presented to support the reciprocal method over the direct allocation method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PHYSICAL UNITS METHOD, RELATIVE SALES VALUE METHOD Petro Chem, Inc., is a small company that acquires high grade crude oil from low volume production wells owned by individuals and small partnerships. The crude oil is processed in a single refinery into Two Oil, Six Oil, and impure distillates. Petro Chem does not have the technology or capacity to process these products further and sells most of its output each month to major refineries. There were no beginning finished goods or work in process inventories on November 1. The production costs and output of Petro Chem for November are as follows:
|
Crude oil acquired and placed into production
|
$5,000,000
|
|
Direct labor and related costs
|
2,000,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
3,000,000
|
Production and sales:
Two Oil, 300,000 barrels produced; 80,000 barrels sold at $20 each.
Six Oil, 240,000 barrels produced; 120,000 barrels sold at $30 each.
Distillates, 120,000 barrels produced and sold at $15 per barrel.
Required:
1. Calculate the amount of joint production cost that Petro Chem would allocate to each of the three joint products by using the physical units method. (Carry out the ratio calculation to four decimal places.)
2. Calculate the amount of joint production cost that Petro Chem would allocate to each of the three joint products by using the relative sales value method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PHYSICAL UNITS METHOD, RELATIVE SALESVALUE AT SPLIT OFF METHOD, NET REALIZABLE VALUE METHOD, DECISION MAKING Sonimad Sawmill, Inc., (SSI) purchases logs from independent timber contractors and processes them into the following three types of lumber products.
1. Studs for residential construction (e.g., walls and ceilings)
2. Decorative pieces (e.g., fireplace mantels and beams for cathedral ceilings)
3. Posts used as support braces (e.g., mine support braces and braces for exterior fences around ranch properties) These products are the result of a joint sawmill process that involves removing bark from the logs, cutting the logs into a workable size (ranging from 8 to 16 feet in length), and then cutting the individual products from the logs, depending upon the type of wood (pine, oak, walnut, or maple) and the size (diameter) of the log. The joint process results in the following costs and output of products during a typical month:
|
Joint production costs
|
|
|
Materials (rough timber logs)
|
$ 500,000
|
|
Debarking (labor and overhead)
|
50,000
|
|
Sizing (labor and overhead)
|
200,000
|
|
Product cutting (labor and overhead)
|
250,000
|
|
Total joint costs
|
$1,000,000
|
Product yield and average sales value on a per unit basis from the joint process are as follows:
|
|
Monthly
|
Fully Processed
|
|
Product
|
Output
|
Sales Price
|
|
Studs
|
75,000
|
$ 8
|
|
Decorative pieces
|
5,000
|
100
|
|
Posts
|
20,000
|
20
|
The studs are sold as rough cut lumber after emerging from the sawmill operation without further processing by SSI. Also, the posts require no further processing. The decorative pieces must be planed and further sized after emerging from the SSI sawmill. This additional processing costs SSI $100,000 per month and normally results in a loss of 10 percent of the units entering the process. Without this planing and sizing process, there is still an active intermediate market for the unfinished decorative pieces where the sales price averages $60 per unit.
Required:
1. Based on the information given for Sonimad Sawmill, Inc., allocate the joint processing costs of $1,000,000 to each of the three product lines using the:
a. Relative sales value at split off method
b. Physical units method at split off
c. Estimated net realizable value method
2. Prepare an analysis for Sonimad Sawmill, Inc., to compare processing the decorative pieces further as it presently does, with selling the rough cut product immediately at split off. Be sure to provide all calculations.
3. Assume Sonimad Sawmill, Inc., announced that in six months it will sell the rough cut product at split off due to increasing competitive pressure. Identify at least three types of likely behavior that will be demonstrated by the skilled labor in the planing and sizing process as a result of this announcement. Explain how this behavior could be improved by management.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, SINGLE DEPARTMENT ANALYSIS, UNIFORM COSTS Stewart Company produces a product that passes through three processes: fabrication, assembly, and finishing. All manufacturing costs are added uniformly for both processes.The following information was obtained for the assembly department for May 2007:
a. Work in process, May 1, had 10,000 units (40 percent completed) and the following costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$12,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
18,000
|
|
Overhead
|
6,000
|
b. During the month of May, 30,000 units were completed and transferred to the finishing department, and the following costs were added to production:
|
Direct materials
|
$36,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
24,000
|
|
Overhead
|
18,000
|
c. On May 30, there were 7,500 partially completed units in process. These units were 80 percent complete.
Required:
Prepare a cost of production report for the assembly department for May using the weighted average method of costing. The report should disclose the physical flow of units, equivalent units, and unit costs and should track the disposition of manufacturing costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
SERVICE ORGANIZATION WITH WORK IN PROCESSINVENTORIES, MULTIPLE DEPARTMENTS, FIFO METHOD,UNIT COST Granger Credit Corporation is a wholly owned subsidiary of a large manufacturer of computers. Granger is in the business of financing computers, software, and other services that the parent corporation sells. Granger has two departments that are involve din financing services: the credit department and the business practices department. The credit department receives requests for financing from field sales representatives, records customer information on a preprinted form, and then enters the information into the computer system to check the creditworthiness of the customer. (Other actions may betaken if the customer is not in the database.) Once creditworthiness information is known, a printout is produced with this information plus other customer specific information. The completed form is transferred to the business practices department. The business practices department modifies the standard loan covenant as needed(in response to customer request or customer risk profile). When this activity is completed, the loan is priced. This is done by keying information from the partially processed form into a personal computer spreadsheet program. The program provides a recommended interest rate for the loan. Finally, a form specifying the loan terms is attached to the transferred in document. A copy of the loan term form is sent to the sales representative and serves as the quote letter.The following cost and service activity data for the business practices department
are provided for the month of May:
|
Transferred in applications
|
2,800
|
|
Applications in process, May 1, 40% complete*
|
500
|
|
Applications in process, May 31, 25% complete*
|
800
|
*All materials and supplies are used at the end of the process.
|
|
|
Direct
|
Conversion
|
|
|
Transferred In
|
Materials
|
Costs
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning work in process
|
$ 4,500
|
—
|
$ 2,800
|
|
Costs added
|
28,000
|
$1,250
|
37,500
|
Required:
1. How would you define the output of the business practices department?
2. Using the FIFO method, prepare the following for the business practices department:
a. A physical flow schedule
b. An equivalent units schedule
c. Calculation of unit costs
d. Cost of ending work in process and cost of units transferred out
e. A cost reconciliation
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, JOURNAL ENTRIES Muskoge Company uses a process costing system. The company manufactures a product that is processed in two departments: molding and assembly. In the molding department, direct materials are added at the beginning of the process; in the assembly department, additional direct materials are added at the end of the process. In both departments, conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. As work is completed, it is transferred out. The following table summarizes the production activity and costs for February:
|
|
Molding
|
Assembly
|
|
Beginning inventories:
|
|
|
|
Physical units
|
10,000
|
8,000
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Transferred in
|
—
|
$45,200
|
|
Direct materials
|
$22,000
|
—
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$13,800
|
$16,800
|
|
Current production:
|
|
|
|
Units started
|
25,000
|
?
|
|
Units transferred out
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Transferred in
|
—
|
?
|
|
Direct materials
|
$56,250
|
$39,550
|
|
Conversion costs
|
$103,500
|
$136,500
|
|
Percentage of completion:
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
40%
|
50%
|
|
Ending inventory
|
80%
|
50%
|
Required:
1. Using the weighted average method, prepare the following for the molding department:
a. A physical flow schedule
b. An equivalent units calculation
c. Calculation of unit costs
d. Cost of ending work in process and cost of goods transferred out e. A cost reconciliation
2. Prepare journal entries that show the flow of manufacturing costs for the molding department.
3. Repeat Requirements 1 and 2 for the assembly department.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, TWO DEPARTMENTANALYSIS, CHANGE IN OUTPUT MEASURE Healthway uses a process costing system to compute the unit costs of the minerals that it produces. It has three departments: mixing, tableting, and bottling. In mixing, the ingredients for the minerals are measured, sifted, and blended together. The mix is transferred out in gallon containers. The tableting department takes the powdered mix and places it in capsules. One gallon of powdered mix converts to 1,600 capsules. After the capsules are filled and polished, they are transferred to bottling where they are placed in bottles, which are then affixed with a safety seal and a lid and labeled. Each bottle receives 50 capsules During July, the following results are available for the first two departments (direct materials are added at the beginning in both departments):
|
|
Mixing
|
Tableting
|
|
Beginning inventories:
|
|
|
|
Physical units
|
5 gallons
|
4,000 capsules
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$120
|
$32
|
|
Direct labor
|
$128
|
$20
|
|
Overhead
|
?
|
?
|
|
Transferred in
|
—
|
$140
|
|
Current production:
|
|
|
|
Transferred out
|
125 gallons
|
198,000 capsules
|
|
Ending inventory
|
6 gallons
|
6,000 capsules
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3,144
|
$1,584
|
|
Transferred in
|
—
|
?
|
|
Direct labor
|
$4,096
|
$1,944
|
|
Overhead
|
?
|
?
|
|
Percentage of completion:
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
40%
|
50%
|
|
Ending inventory
|
50%
|
40%
|
Overhead in both departments is applied as a percentage of direct labor costs. In the mixing department, overhead is 200 percent of direct labor. In the tableting department, the overhead rate is 150 percent of direct labor.
Required:
1. Prepare a production report for the mixing department using the weighted average method. Follow the five steps outlined in the chapter.
2. Prepare a production report for the tableting department. Follow the five steps outlined in the chapter.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OPERATION COSTING: UNIT COSTS AND JOURNAL ENTRIES Jacson Company produces two brands of a popular pain medication: regular strength and extra strength. Regular strength is produced in tablet form, and extra strength is produced in capsule form. All direct materials needed for each batch are requisitioned at the start. The work orders for two batches of the products follow, along with some associated cost information:
|
|
Work Order 121
|
Work Order 122
|
|
|
(Regular Strength)
|
(Extra Strength)
|
|
Direct materials (actual costs):
|
$9,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Applied conversion costs:
|
|
|
|
Mixing
|
?
|
?
|
|
Tableting
|
$5,000
|
—
|
|
Encapsulating
|
—
|
$6,000
|
|
Bottling
|
?
|
?
|
|
Batch size (bottles of 100 units)
|
12,000
|
18,000
|
In the mixing department, conversion costs are applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Budgeted conversion costs for the department for the year were $60,000 for direct labor and $190,000 for overhead. Budgeted direct labor hours were 5,000. It takes one minute of labor time to mix the ingredients needed for a 100 unit bottle (for either product).
In the bottling department, conversion costs are applied on the basis of machine hours. Budgeted conversion costs for the department for the year were $400,000. Budgeted machine hours were 20,000. It takes one half minute of machine time to fill a bottle of 100 units.
Required:
1. What are the conversion costs applied in the mixing department for each batch? The bottling department?
2. Calculate the cost per bottle for the regular and extra strength pain medications.
3. Prepare the journal entries that record the costs of the 12,000 regular strength batch as it moves through the various operations.
4. Suppose that the direct materials are requisitioned by each department as needed for a batch. For the 12,000 regular strength batch, direct materials are requisitioned for the mixing and bottling departments. Assume that the amount of cost is split evenly between the two departments. How will this change the journal entries made in Requirement 3?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE ON PROCESS COSTING, OPERATION COSTING, IMPACT ON RESOURCE ALLOCATION DECISION Golding Manufacturing, a division of Farnsworth Sporting, Inc., produces two different models of bows and eight models of knives. The bow manufacturing process involves the production of two major subassemblies: the limbs and the handle. The limbs pass through four sequential processes before reaching final assembly: lay up, molding, fabricating, and finishing. In the lay up department, limbs are created by laminating layers of wood. In molding, the limbs are heat treated, under pressure, to form a strong resilient limb. In the fabricating department, any protruding glue or other processing residue is removed. Finally, in finishing, the limbs are cleaned with acetone, dried, and sprayed with the final finishes. The handles pass through two processes before reaching final assembly: pattern and finishing. In the pattern department, blocks of wood are fed into a machine that is set to shape the handles. Different patterns are possible, depending on the machine’s setting. After coming out of the machine, the handles are cleaned and smoothed. They then pass to the finishing department where they are sprayed with the final finishes. In final assembly, the limbs and handles are assembled into different models using purchased parts such as pulley assemblies, weight adjustment bolts, side plates, and string. Golding, since its inception, has been using process costing to assign product costs. A predetermined overhead rate is used based on direct labor dollars (80 percent of direct labor dollars). Recently, Golding has hired a new controller, Karen Jenkins. After reviewing the product costing procedures, Karen requested a meeting with the divisional manager, Aaron Suhr. The following is a transcript of their conversation:
KAREN: Aaron, I have some concerns about our cost accounting system. We make two different models of bows and are treating them as if they were the same product. Now I know that the only real difference between the models is the handle. The processing of the handles is the same, but the handles differ significantly in the amount and quality of wood used. Our current costing does not reflect this difference in direct materials input.
AARON: Your predecessor is responsible. He believed that tracking the difference in direct materials cost wasn’t worth the effort. He simply didn’t believe that it would make much difference in the unit cost of either model.
KAREN: Well, he may have been right, but I have my doubts. If there is a significant difference, it could affect our views of which model is more important to the company. The additional bookkeeping isn’t very stringent. All we have to worry about is the pattern department. The other departments fit what I view as a process costing pattern.
AARON: Why don’t you look into it? If there is a significant difference, go ahead and adjust the costing system. After the meeting, Karen decided to collect cost data on the two models: the deluxe model and the Econo model. She decided to track the costs for one week. At the end of the week, she had collected the following data from the pattern department: a. There were a total of 2,500 bows completed: 1,000 Deluxe models and 1,500 Econo models. b. There was no beginning work in process; however, there were 300 units in ending work in process: 200 Deluxe and 100 Econo models. Both models were 80 percent complete with respect to conversion costs and 100 percent complete with respect to direct materials.
c. The pattern department experienced the following costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$114,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
45,667
|
d. On an experimental basis, the requisition forms for direct materials were modified to identify the dollar value of the direct materials used by the Econo and Deluxe models:
|
Econo model
|
$30,000
|
|
Deluxe model
|
84,000
|
Required:
1. Compute the unit cost for the handles produced by the pattern department assuming that process costing is totally appropriate.
2. Compute the unit cost of each handle using the separate cost information provided on materials.
3. Compare the unit costs computed in Requirements 1 and 2. Is Karen justified in her belief that a pure process costing relationship is not appropriate? Describe the costing system that you would recommend.
4. In the past, the marketing manager has requested more money for advertising the Econo line. Aaron has repeatedly refused to grant any increase in this product’s advertising budget because its per unit profit (selling price less manufacturing cost) is so low. Given the results in Requirements 1 through 3, was Aaron justified in his position?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST OF SPOILED UNITS Garvey Company is a specialty print shop. Usually, printing jobs are priced at standard cost plus 50 percent. Job 95 301 involved printing 500 wedding invitations with the following standard costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$200
|
|
Direct labor
|
20
|
|
Overhead
|
30
|
|
Total
|
$250
|
Normally, the invitations would be taken from the machine, the top one inspected for correct wording, spelling, and quality of print, and all of the invitations wrapped in plastic and stored on shelves designated for completed jobs. In this case, however, the technician decided to go to lunch before inspecting and wrapping the job. He stacked the unwrapped invitations beside the printing press and left. One hour later, he returned and found the invitations had fallen on the floor and been stepped on. It turned out that about 100 invitations were ruined and had to be discarded. An additional 100 invitations were then printed to complete the job.
Required:
1. `
2. What is the price of Job 95 301?
3. Suppose that another job, 95 442, also required 500 wedding invitations. The standard costs are identical to those of Job 95 301. However, Job 95 442 required an unusual color of ink which could only be obtained in a formula which was difficult to use. Garvey printers know from experience that getting this ink color to print correctly requires trial and error. In the case of Job 95 442, the first 100 invitations had to be discarded due to inconsistencies in the color of ink. What is the cost of the spoilage, and how would it be treated?
4. What is the price of Job 95 442?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
COST OF REWORKED UNITS Jackson’s Sporting Goods Store sells a variety of sporting goods and clothing. In a back room, Jackson’s has set up heat transfer equipment to personalize T shirts for Little League teams. Typically, each team has the name of the individual player put on the back of the T shirt. Last week, Taffy Barnhart, coach of the Stingers, brought in a list of names for her team. Her team consisted of 12 players with the following names: Freda, Cara, Katie, Tara, Heather, Sarah, Kim, Jennifer, Mary Beth, Elizabeth, Kyle, and Wendy. Taffy was quoted a price of $0.50 per letter. Chip Russell, Jackson’s newest employee, was assigned to Taffy’s job. He selected the appropriate letters, arranged the letters in each name carefully on a shirt, and heat pressed them on. When Taffy returned, she was appalled to see that the names were on the front of the shirts. Jim Jackson, owner of the sporting goods store, assured Taffy that the letters could easily be removed by applying more heat and lifting them off.
This process ruins the old letters, so new letters must then be placed correctly on the shirt backs. He promised to correct the job immediately and have it ready in an hour and a half.
Costs for heat transferring are as follows:
|
Letters (each)
|
$0.15
|
|
Direct labor (per hour)
|
8.00
|
|
Overhead (per direct labor hour)
|
4.00
|
Taffy’s job originally took one hour of direct labor time. The removal process goes more quickly and should take only 15 minutes.
Required:
1. What was the original cost of Taffy’s job?
2. What is the cost of rework on Taffy’s job? How should the rework cost be treated?
3. How much did Jim Jackson charge Taffy?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOB ORDER COSTING, HOUSING Sutton Construction, Inc., is a privately held, family founded corporation that builds single and multiple unit housing. Most projects Sutton Construction undertakes involve the construction of multiple units. Sutton Construction has adopted a job order costing system for determining the cost of each unit. The costing system is fully computerized.
Each project’s costs are divided into the following five categories:
1. General conditions, including construction site utilities, project insurance permits and licenses, architect’s fees, decorating, field office salaries, and cleanup costs.
2. Hard costs, such as subcontractors, direct materials, and direct labor.
3. Finance costs, including title and recording fees, inspection fees, and taxes and discounts on mortgages.
4. Land costs, which refer to the purchase price of the construction site.
5. Marketing costs, such as advertising, sales commissions, and appraisal fees. Recently, Sutton Construction purchased land for the purpose of developing 20 new single family houses. The cost of the land was $250,000. Lot sizes vary from 1/4 to 1/2 acre. The 20 lots occupy a total of eight acres. General conditions costs for the project totaled $120,000. This $120,000 is common to all 20 units that were constructed on the building site.
Job 3, the third house built in the project, occupied a 1/4 acre lot and had the following hard costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
6,000
|
|
Subcontractor
|
14,000
|
For Job 3, finance costs totaled $4,765 and marketing costs, $800. General conditions costs are allocated on the basis of units produced. Each unit’s selling price is determined by adding 40 percent to the total of all costs.
Required:
1. Identify all production costs that are directly traceable to Job 3. Are all remaining production costs equivalent to overhead found in a manufacturing firm? Are there nonproduction costs that are directly traceable to the housing unit? Which ones?
2. Develop a job order cost sheet for Job 3. What is the cost of building this house? Did you include finance and marketing costs in computing the unit cost? Why or why not? How did you determine the cost of land for Job 3?
3. Which of the five cost categories corresponds to overhead? Do you agree with the way in which this cost is allocated to individual housing units? Can you suggest a different allocation method?
4. Calculate the selling price of Job 3. Calculate the profit made on the sale of this unit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
DENTAL PRACTICE Dr. Sherry Bird is employed by Dental Associates. Dental Associates recently installed a computerized job order costing system to help monitor the cost of its services. Each patient is treated as a job and assigned a job number when he or she checks in with the receptionist. The receptionist bookkeeper notes the time the patient enters the treatment area and when the patient leaves the area. This difference between the entry and exit times is the number of patient hours used and the direct labor time assigned to the dental assistant. (A dental assistant is constantly with the patient.) The direct labor time assigned to the dentist is 50 percent of the patient hours. (The dentist typically splits her time between two patients.)
The chart filled out by the dental assistant provides additional data that are entered into the computer. For example, the chart contains service codes that identify the nature of the treatment, such as whether the patient received a crown, a filling, or a root canal. The chart not only identifies the type of service but its level as well. For example, if a patient receives a filling, the dental assistant indicates (by a service level code) whether the filling was one, two, three, or four surfaces. The service and service level codes are used to determine the rate to be charged to the patient. The costs of providing different services and their levels also vary.
Costs assignable to a patient consist of materials, labor, and overhead. The types of materials used—and the quantity—are identified by the assistant and entered into the computer by the bookkeeper. Material prices are kept on file and accessed to provide the necessary cost information. Overhead is applied on the basis of patient hours. The rate used by Dental Associates is $20 per patient hour. Direct labor cost is also computed using patient hours and the wage rates of the direct laborers. Dr. Bird is paid an average of $36 per hour for her services. Dental assistants are paid an average of $6 per hour. Given the treatment time, the software program calculates and assigns the labor cost for the dentist and her assistant; overhead cost is also assigned using the treatment time and the overhead rate.
The overhead rate does not include a charge for any X rays. The X ray department is separate from dental services; X rays are billed and costed separately. The cost of an X ray is $3.50 per film; the patient is charged $5 per film. If cleaning services are required, cleaning labor costs $9 per patient hour.
Glen Johnson, a patient (Job 267), spent 30 minutes in the treatment area and had a 2 surface filling. He received two Novocain shots and used three ampules of amalgam. The cost of the shots was $1. The cost of the amalgam was $3. Other direct materials used are insignificant in amount and are included in the overhead rate. The rate charged to the patient for a 2 surface filling is $45. One X ray was taken.
Required:
1. Prepare a job order cost sheet for Glen Johnson. What is the cost for providing a
2 surface filling? What is the gross profit earned? Is the X ray a direct cost of the service? Why are the X rays costed separately from the overhead cost assignment?
2. Suppose that the patient time and associated patient charges are given for the following fillings:
|
|
1 Surface
|
2 Surface
|
3 Surface
|
4 Surface
|
|
Time
|
20 minutes
|
30 minutes
|
40 minutes
|
50 minutes
|
|
Charge
|
$35
|
$45
|
$55
|
$65
|
Compute the cost for each filling and the gross profit for each type of filling. Assume that the cost of Novocain is $1 for all fillings. Ampules of amalgam start at two and increase by one for each additional surface. Assume also that only one X ray film is needed for all four cases. Does the increase in billing rate appear to be fair to the patient? Is it fair to the dental corporation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE ON JOB ORDER COSTING AND PRICING DECISIONS Nutratask, Inc., is a pharmaceutical manufacturer of amino acid chelated minerals and vitamin supplements. The company was founded in 1974 and is capable of performing all manufacturing functions, including packaging and laboratory functions. Currently, the company markets its products in the United States, Canada, Australia, Japan, and Belgium. Mineral chelation enhances the mineral’s availability to the body, making the mineral a more effective supplement. Most of the chelates supplied by Nutratask are in powder form, but the company has the capability to make tablets or capsules.
The production of all chelates follows a similar pattern. Upon receiving an order, the company’s chemist prepares a load sheet (a bill of materials that specifies the product, the theoretical yield, and the quantities of materials that should be used). Once the load sheet is received by production, the materials are requisitioned and sent to the blending room. The chemicals and minerals are added in the order specified and blended together for two to eight hours, depending on the product. After blending, the mix is put on long trays and sent to the drying room, where it is allowed to dry until the moisture content is 7 to 9 percent. Drying time for most products is from one to three days. After the product is dry, several small samples are taken and sent to a laboratory to be checked for bacterial level and to determine whether the product meets customer specifications. If the product is not fit for human consumption or if it fails to meet customer specifications, additional materials are added under the direction of the chemist to bring the product up to standard. Once the product passes inspection, it is ground into a powder of different meshes (particle sizes) according to customer specifications. The powder is then placed in heavy cardboard drums and shipped to the customer (or, if requested, put in tablet or capsule form and then shipped). Since each order is customized to meet the special needs of its customers, Nutratask uses a job order costing system. Recently, Nutratask received a request for a 300 kilogram order of potassium aspartate. The customer offered to pay $8.80 per kilogram. Upon receiving the request and the customer’s specifications, Lanny Smith, the marketing manager, requested a load sheet from the company’s chemist. The load sheet prepared showed the following material requirements:
|
Material
|
Amount Required
|
|
Aspartic acid
|
195.00 kg
|
|
Citric acid
|
15.00
|
|
K2CO3 (50%)
|
121.50
|
|
Rice
|
30.00
|
The theoretical yield is 300 kg.
Lanny also reviewed past jobs that were similar to the requested order and discovered that the expected direct labor time was 16 hours. The production workers at Nutratask earn an average of $6.50 per hour plus $6 per hour for taxes, insurance, and additional benefits.
Purchasing sent Lanny a list of prices for the materials needed for the job.
|
|
Material Price
per Kilogram
|
|
|
|
Aspartic acid
|
$5.75
|
|
Citric acid
|
2.02
|
|
K2CO3
|
4.64
|
|
Rice
|
0.43
|
Overhead is applied using a companywide rate based on direct labor dollars. The rate for the current period is 110 percent of direct labor dollars. Whenever a customer requests a bid, Nutratask usually estimates the manufacturing costs of the job and then adds a markup of 30 percent. This markup varies depending on the competition and general economic conditions. Currently, the industry is thriving, and Nutratask is operating at capacity.
Required:
1. Prepare a job order cost sheet for the proposed job. What is the expected perunit cost? Should Nutratask accept the price offered by the prospective customer? Why or why not?
2. Suppose Nutratask and the prospective customer agree on a price of cost plus 30 percent. What is the gross profit that Nutratask expects to earn on the job?
3. Suppose that the actual costs of producing 300 kg of potassium aspartate were as follows:
|
Direct materials:
|
|
|
Aspartic acid
|
$1,170.00
|
|
Citric acid
|
30.00
|
|
K2CO3
|
577.00
|
|
Rice
|
13.00
|
|
Total materials cost
|
$1,790.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
$ 225.00
|
|
Overhead
|
247.50
|
What is the actual per unit cost? The bid price is based on expected costs. How much did Nutratask gain (or lose) because of the actual costs differing from the expected costs? Suggest some possible reasons why the actual costs differed from the projected costs.
4. Assume that the customer had agreed to pay actual manufacturing costs plus 30 percent. Suppose the actual costs are as described in Requirement 3 with one addition: an underapplied overhead variance is allocated to Cost of Goods Sold and spread across all jobs sold in proportion to their total cost (unadjusted cost of goods sold). Assume that the underapplied overhead cost added to the job in question is $30. Upon seeing the addition of the underapplied overhead in the itemized bill, the customer calls and complains about having to pay for Nutratask’s inefficient use of overhead costs. If you were assigned to deal with this customer, what kind of response would you prepare? How would you explain and justify the addition of the underapplied overhead cost to the customer’s bill?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
RESEARCH ASSIGNMENT Interview an accountant who works for a service organization that uses job order costing. For a small firm, you may need to talk to an owner/manager. Examples are a fu neral home, insurance firm, repair shop, medical clinic, and dental clinic. Write a paper that describes the job order costing system used by the firm. Some of the questions that the paper should address are:
a. What service(s) does the firm offer?
b. What document or procedure do you use to collect the costs of the services performed for each customer?
c. How do you assign the cost of direct labor to each job?
d. How do you assign overhead to individual jobs?
e. How do you assign the cost of direct materials to each job?
f. How do you determine what to charge each customer?
g. How do you account for a completed job?
As you write the paper, state how the service firm you investigated adapted the job order accounting procedures described in this chapter to its particular circumstances. Were the differences justified? If so, explain why. Also, offer any suggestions you might have for improving the approach that you observed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PHYSICAL FLOW, EQUIVALENT UNITS Payson Company produces a product that passes through two departments: mixing and cooking. Both departments use the weighted average method. In the mixing department, all direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. All other manufacturing inputs are added uniformly. The following information pertains to the mixing department for February:
a. Beginning work in process (BWIP), February 1: 100,000 pounds, 100 percent complete with respect to direct materials and 40 percent complete with respect to conversion costs. The costs assigned to this work are as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$20,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
10,000
|
|
Overhead
|
30,000
|
b. Ending work in process (EWIP), February 28: 50,000 pounds, 100 percent complete with respect to direct materials and 60 percent complete with respect to conversion costs.
c. Units completed and transferred out: 370,000 pounds. The following costs were added during the month:
|
Direct materials
|
$211,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
100,000
|
|
Overhead
|
270,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare a physical flow schedule.
2. Prepare a schedule of equivalent units.
3. Compute the cost per equivalent unit.
4. Compute the cost of goods transferred out and the cost of ending work in process.
5. Prepare a cost reconciliation.
6. Repeat Requirements 2–4 using the FIFO method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOURNAL ENTRIES Lawson Company has three process departments: mixing, encapsulating, and bottling. At the beginning of the fiscal year (July 1), there were no work in process or finished goods inventories. The following data are available for the month of July:
|
Department
|
Manufacturing Costs Added*
|
Ending Work in Process
|
|
Mixing
|
$540,000
|
$135,000
|
|
Encapsulating
|
495,000
|
112,500
|
|
Bottling
|
450,000
|
22,500
|
*Includes only the direct materials, direct labor, and the overhead used to process the partially finished goods received from the prior department. The transferred in cost is not included.
Required:
1. Prepare journal entries that show the transfer of costs from one department to the next (including the entry to transfer the costs of the final department).
2. Prepare T accounts for the entries made in Requirement 1. Use arrows to show the flow of costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROCESS COSTING, SERVICE ORGANIZATION A local barbershop cuts the hair of 1,000 customers per month. The clients are men, and the barbers offer no special styling. During the month of March, 1,000 customers were serviced. The cost of haircuts includes the following:
|
Direct labor
|
$ 7,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
1,000
|
|
Overhead
|
2,000
|
|
Total
|
$10,000
|
Required:
1. Explain why process costing is appropriate for this haircutting operation.
2. Calculate the cost per haircut.
3. Can you identify some possible direct materials used for this haircutting service? Is the usage of direct materials typical of services? If so, provide examples of services that use direct materials. Can you think of some services that would not use direct materials?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JIT MANUFACTURING AND PROCESS COSTING, ABC Manzer Company uses JIT manufacturing. Several manufacturing cells are set up within one of its factories. One of the cells makes speakers for computers. The cost of production for the month of April is as follows:
|
Cell labor
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
200,000
|
|
Overhead
|
160,000
|
|
Total
|
$440,000
|
During April, 10,000 sets of speakers were produced and sold.
Required:
1. Explain why process costing can be used for computing the cost of production for the speakers.
2. Calculate the cost per unit for a speaker.
3. Explain how activity based costing can be used to determine the overhead assigned to the cell.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRODUCTION REPORT, NO BEGINNING INVENTORY Deercreek Company manufactures insect repellant. The mixing department, the first process department, mixes the chemicals required for the repellant. The following data are for 2007:
|
Work in process, January 1, 2007
|
—
|
|
Gallons started
|
300,000
|
|
Gallons transferred out
|
25,000
|
|
Direct materials cost
|
$300,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$595,200
|
|
Overhead applied
|
$892,800
|
Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Ending inventory is 95 percent complete with respect to direct labor and overhead.
Required:
Prepare a production report for the mixing department for 2007.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, FIFO METHOD, PHYSICAL FLOW, EQUIVALENT UNITS Darim Company manufactures a product that passes through two processes: fabrication and assembly. The following information was obtained for the fabrication department for June:
a. All materials are added at the beginning of the process.
b. Beginning work in process had 60,000 units, 30 percent complete with respect to conversion costs.
c. Ending work in process had 12,000 units, 25 percent complete with respect to conversion costs.
d. Started in process, 75,000 units.
Required:
1. Prepare a physical flow schedule.
2. Compute equivalent units using the weighted average method.
3. Compute equivalent units using the FIFO method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FIFO METHOD, VALUATION OF GOODS TRANSFERRED OUT AND ENDING WORK IN PROCESS Alden Company uses the FIFO method to account for the costs of production. For crushing, the first processing department, the following equivalent units schedule has been prepared:
|
|
Direct
|
Conversion
|
|
|
Materials
|
Costs
|
|
Units started and completed
|
22,000
|
22,000
|
|
Units, beginning work in process:
|
|
|
|
10,000 * 0%
|
—
|
—
|
|
10,000 * 40%
|
—
|
4,000
|
|
Units, ending work in process:
|
|
|
|
6,000 * 100%
|
6,000
|
—
|
|
6,000 * 75%
|
—
|
4,500
|
|
Equivalent units of output
|
28,000
|
30,500
|
The cost per equivalent unit for the period was as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
$3.00
|
|
Conversion costs
|
5.00
|
|
Total
|
$8.00
|
The cost of beginning work in process was direct materials, $30,000; conversion costs, $25,000.
Required:
1. Determine the cost of ending work in process and the cost of goods transferred out.
2. Prepare a physical flow schedule.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
EQUIVALENT UNITS—WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD The following data are for four independent process costing departments. Inputs are added continuously.
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
3,000
|
2,000
|
—
|
25,000
|
|
Percent completion
|
30%
|
75%
|
—
|
60%
|
|
Units started
|
19,000
|
20,000
|
48,000
|
35,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
4,000
|
—
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
Percent completion
|
20%
|
—
|
25%
|
10%
|
Required:
Compute the equivalent units of production for each of the preceding departments using the weighted average method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, UNIT COST, VALUATION OF GOODS TRANSFERRED OUT AND ENDING WORK IN PROCESS Watson Products, Inc., produces plastic cases used for video cameras. The product passes through three departments. For May, the following equivalent units schedule was prepared for the first department:
|
|
Direct
|
Conversion
|
|
|
Materials
|
Costs
|
|
Units completed
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
|
Units, ending work in
|
|
|
|
process * Percentage complete:
|
|
|
|
6,000 * 100%
|
6,000
|
—
|
|
6,000 * 50%
|
—
|
3,000
|
|
Equivalent units of output
|
11,000
|
8,000
|
Costs assigned to beginning work in process: direct materials, $30,000; conversion costs, $5,000. Manufacturing costs incurred during May: direct materials, $25,000; conversion costs, $65,000. Watson uses the weighted average method.
Required:
1. Compute the unit cost for May.
2. Determine the cost of ending work in process and the cost of goods transferred out.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FIFO METHOD, UNIT COST, VALUATION OF GOODS TRANSFERRED OUT AND ENDING WORK IN PROCESS Dama Company produces women’s blouses and uses the FIFO method to account for its manufacturing costs. The product Dama makes passes through two processes: cutting and sewing. During April, Dama’s controller prepared the following equivalent units schedule for the cutting department:
|
|
Direct
|
Conversion
|
|
|
Materials
|
Costs
|
|
Units started and completed
|
40,000
|
40,000
|
|
Units, beginning work in process:
|
|
|
|
10,000 * 0%
|
—
|
—
|
|
10,000 * 50%
|
—
|
5,000
|
|
Units, ending work in process:
|
|
|
|
20,000 * 100%
|
20,000
|
—
|
|
20,000 * 25%
|
—
|
5,000
|
|
Equivalent units of output
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
Costs in beginning work in process were direct materials, $20,000; conversion costs, $80,000. Manufacturing costs incurred during April were direct materials, $240,000; conversion costs, $320,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a physical flow schedule for April.
2. Compute the cost per equivalent unit for April.
3. Determine the cost of ending work in process and the cost of goods transferred out.
4. Prepare the journal entry that transfers the costs from cutting to sewing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, EQUIVALENT UNITS, UNIT COST, MULTIPLE DEPARTMENTS Fordman Company has a product that passes through two processes: grinding and polishing. During December, the grinding department transferred 20,000 units to the polishing department. The cost of the units transferred into the second department was $40,000. Direct materials are added uniformly in the second process. Units are measured the same way in both departments. The second department (polishing) had the following physical flow schedule for December:
|
Units to account for:
|
|
|
Units, beginning work in process Units started
|
4,000 (40% complete) ?
|
|
Total units to account for
|
?
|
|
Units accounted for:
|
|
|
Units, ending work in process Units completed
|
8,000 (50% complete) ?
|
|
Units accounted for
|
?
|
Costs in beginning work in process for the polishing department were direct materials, $5,000; conversion costs, $6,000; and transferred in, $8,000. Costs added during the month: materials, $32,000; conversion costs, $50,000; and transferred in, $40,000.
Required:
1. Assuming the use of the weighted average method, prepare a schedule of equivalent units.
2. Compute the unit cost for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOURNAL ENTRIES, COST OF ENDING INVENTORIES Baxter Company has two processing departments: assembly and finishing. A predetermined overhead rate of $10 per direct labor hour is used to assign overhead to production. The company experienced the following operating activity for April:
a. Issued materials to assembly, $24,000.
b. Incurred direct labor cost: assembly, 500 hours at $9.20 per hour; finishing, 400 hours at $8 per hour.
c. Applied overhead to production.
d. Transferred goods to finishing, $32,500.
e. Transferred goods to finished goods warehouse, $20,500.
f. Incurred actual overhead, $10,000.
Required:
1. Prepare the required journal entries for the preceding transactions.
2. Assuming assembly and finishing have no beginning work in process inventories, determine the cost of each department’s ending work in process inventories.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OPERATION COSTING: BREAD MANUFACTURING Tasty Bread makes and supplies bread throughout the state of Kansas. Three types of bread are produced: loaves, rolls, and buns. Seven operations describe the production process.
a. Mixing: Flour, milk, yeast, salt, butter, and so on, are mixed in a large vat.
b. Shaping: A conveyor belt transfers the dough to a machine that weighs it and shapes it into loaves, rolls, or buns, depending on the type being produced.
c. Rising: The individually shaped dough is allowed to sit and rise.
d. Baking: The dough is moved to a 100 foot long funnel oven. (The dough enters the oven on racks and spends 20 minutes moving slowly through the oven.)
e. Cooling: The bread is removed from the oven and allowed to cool.
f. Slicing: For loaves and buns (hamburger and hot dog), the bread is sliced.
g. Packaging: The bread is wrapped (packaged). Tasty produces its products in batches. The size of the batch depends on the individual orders that must be filled (orders come from retail grocers throughout the state). Usually, as soon as one batch is mixed, a second batch begins the mixing operation.
Required:
1. Identify the conditions that must be present for operation costing to be used in this setting. If these conditions are not met, explain how process costing would be used. If process costing is used, would you recommend the weighted average method or the FIFO method? Explain.
2. Assume that operation costing is the best approach for this bread manufacturer. Describe in detail how you would use operation costing. Use a batch of dinner rolls (consisting of 1,000 packages of 12 rolls) and a batch of whole wheat loaves (consisting of 5,000, 24 oz. sliced loaves) as examples.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEIGHTED AVERAGE METHOD, PHYSICAL FLOW, EQUIVALENT UNITS, UNIT COSTS, COST ASSIGNMENT, ABC Norton Parts, Inc., manufactures bumpers (plastic or metal, depending on the plant) for automobiles. Each bumper passes through three processes: molding, drilling, and painting. In August, the molding department of the Oklahoma City plant reported the following data:
a. In molding, all direct materials are added at the beginning of the process.
b. Beginning work in process consisted of 27,000 units, 20 percent complete with respect to direct labor and overhead. Costs in beginning inventory included direct materials, $810,000; direct labor, $148,400; and applied overhead, $100,000.
c. Costs added to production during the month were direct materials, $1,710,000 and direct labor, $2,314,100. Overhead was assigned using the following activity information:
|
Activity
|
Rate
|
Actual Driver Usage
|
|
Inspection
|
$100 per inspection hour
|
4,000 inspection hours
|
|
Maintenance
|
$500 per maintenance hour
|
1,600 maintenance hours
|
|
Receiving
|
$200 per receiving order
|
2,000 receiving orders
|
d. At the end of the month, 81,000 units were transferred out to drilling, leaving 9,000 units in ending work in process, 25 percent complete.
Required:
1. Prepare a physical flow schedule.
2. Calculate equivalent units of production for direct materials and conversion costs.
3. Compute unit cost.
4. Calculate the cost of goods transferred to drilling at the end of the month. Calculate the cost of ending inventory.
5. Prepare the journal entry that transfers the goods from molding to drilling.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are available for a manufacturing company for a yearly period.
|
Particulars
|
Rs. in Lakhs
|
|
FIXED EXPENSES
|
|
|
Wages and Salaries
|
9.5
|
|
Rent, Rates and Taxes
|
6.6
|
|
Depreciation
|
7.4
|
|
Sundry Administrative Expenses
|
6.5
|
|
SEMI VARIABLE EXPENSES
|
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs
|
3.5
|
|
Indirect Labor
|
7.9
|
|
Sales Department’s Salaries
|
3.8
|
|
Particulars
|
Rs. in Lakhs
|
|
Sundry Administrative Expenses
|
2.8
|
|
VARIABLE EXPENSES [ AT 50% CAPACITY]
|
|
|
Materials
|
21.7
|
|
Labor
|
20.4
|
|
Other Expenses
|
7.9
|
|
Total
|
98.0
|
Assume that the fixed expenses remain constant at all levels of production. Semi variable expenses remain constant between 45% and 65% capacity, increasing by 10% between 65% and 80% capacity and by 20% between 80% and 100% capacity.
Sales at various levels are,
At 50% Rs.100 lakhs
At 60% Rs.120 lakhs
At 75% Rs.150 lakhs
At 90% Rs.180 lakhs
At 100% Rs.200 lakhs
Prepare a fl exible budget for the year at 60% and 90% capacity utilizations and calculate the profits/losses at those levels
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The monthly budget for manufacturing overheads of a manufacturing company is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Capacity 60%
|
Capacity 100%
|
|
Budgeted Production
|
600 units
|
800 units
|
|
Wages
|
Rs.1200
|
Rs.2000
|
|
Consumable Stores
|
900
|
1500
|
|
Maintenance
|
1100
|
1500
|
|
Power and Fuel
|
1600
|
2000
|
|
Depreciation
|
4000
|
4000
|
|
Insurance
|
1000
|
1000
|
|
Total
|
9800
|
12, 000
|
You are required to,
v Indicate which of the items are fixed, variable and semi variable
v Prepare a budget for 80% capacity
v Show the total cost, both fixed and variable per unit of output at 60%, 80% and 100% capacity levels.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
S.M. Ltd. produces two products, A and B. The budget for these products [at 60% level of activity] for the year 2008 09 gives the following information.
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Raw Material Per Unit
|
Rs.7.50
|
Rs.3.50
|
|
Direct Labor Per Unit
|
Rs.4.00
|
Rs.3.00
|
|
Variable Overheads Per Unit
|
Rs.2.00
|
Rs.1.50
|
|
Fixed Overheads Per Unit
|
Rs.6.00
|
Rs.4.50
|
|
Selling Price Per Unit
|
Rs.20.00
|
Rs.15.00
|
|
Production and Sales [Units]
|
4,000
|
6,000
|
The Managing Director, not being satisfied, with the projected results presented above, referred the budget to the Marketing Director for his observations regarding performance improvement. The Marketing Director suggested that the sales [ in quantity] of both the products A and B could be increased by 50% provided the selling price were reduced by 5% and 10% for the products A and B respectively. The price reduction should be made applicable to the entire sales [in quantity] of both the products A and B. You are required to prepare a statement of overall profitability on the basis of original budget and the revised budget.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures two products, X and Y. The product X is a low volume and its sales are only Rs.5,000 p.a. Product Y is high volume and labor intensive, its sales are 25,000 units pa. Product X takes 6 labor hours to make one unit but Y requires 8 hours per unit.
Details of costs for materials and labor for each product are as follows.
|
Particulars
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
|
Direct Materials – Rs.
|
200
|
100
|
|
Direct Labor @ Rs.10 per hour
|
60
|
80
|
|
Total
|
260
|
180
|
The company works 1,00,000 direct labor hours p.a. Total manufacturing overhead costs are Rs.17,50,000 p.a.
You are required to compute per unit cost of each product using,
I. Direct labor hour rate method for absorption of overhead costs and
II. Activity Based Costing technique for absorption of overhead costs
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information relates to budgeted operations of Division X of a manufacturing company.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in rupees
|
|
Sales – 50,000 units @ Rest. 8
|
4,00,000
|
|
Less : Variable Costs @ Rest. 6 per unit
|
3,00,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
1,00,000
|
|
Less : Fixed Costs
|
75,000
|
|
Divisional Profits
|
25,000
|
The amount of divisional investment is Rs. 1,50,000 and the minimum desired rate of return on the investment is the cost of capital of 20%
Calculate
I] Divisional expected ROI and ii] Divisional expected RI
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has two division, A and B. Division A manufactures a component which is used by Division B to produce a finished product. For the next period, output and costs have been budgeted as follows.
|
Particulars
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Component units
|
50,000
|
|
|
Finished units
|
|
50,000
|
|
Total variable costs Rupees
|
2,50,000
|
6,00,000
|
|
Fixed Costs Rupees
|
1,50,000
|
2,00,000
|
The fixed costs are separable for each division. You are required to advise on the transfer price to be fixed for Division A’s component under the following circumstances.
A. Division A can sell the component in a competitive market for Rs. 10 per unit. Division B can also purchase the component from the open market at that price.
B. As per the situation mentioned in (A) above, and further assume that Division B currently buys the component from an external supplier at the market price of Rs. 10 and there is reciprocal agreement between the external supplier and another Division C, within the same group. Under this agreement, the external supplier agrees to buy one product unit from Division C at a profit of Rs. 4 per unit to that division, for every component which Division B buys from the sup
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company fixes the inter divisional transfer prices for its products on the basis of cost plus an estimated return on investment in its divisions. The relevant portion of the budget for the Division A for the year 2006 07 is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in Rupees
|
|
Fixed Assets
|
5,00,000
|
|
Current Assets (other than debtors)
|
3,00,000
|
|
Debtors
|
2,00,000
|
|
Annual fixed cost for the division
|
8,00,000
|
|
Variable cost per unit of product
|
10
|
|
Budgeted volume of production per year (units )
|
4,00,000
|
|
Desired Return on Investment
|
28%
|
You are required to determine the transfer price for Division A.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has two divisions, Division A and Division B. Division A has a budget of selling 20,000 number of a particular component X to fetch a return of 20% on the average assets employed. The following particulars of Division A are also known.
|
Particulars
|
Amount in Rupees
|
|
Fixed Overheads
|
5,00,000
|
|
Variable Cost
|
Re. 1 per unit
|
|
Average Assets – Debtors
|
2,00,000
|
|
Inventories
|
5,00,000
|
|
Plant
|
5,00,000
|
However there is a constraint in marketing and only 1,50,000 units of the component X can be directly sold to the market at the proposed price.
It has been gathered that Division B can take up the balance 50,000 units of component X. A wants a price of Rs. 4 per unit but B is prepared to pay Rs. 2 per unit of X.
Division A has another option on hand, which is to produce only 1,50,000 units of component X. This will reduce the holding of assets by Rs. 2,00,000 and fixed overheads by Rs. 25,000. You are required to advise the most profitable course of action for Division A.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transferor Ltd. have two processes – Preparing and Finishing. The normal output per week is 7,500 units [completed] at a capacity of 75%. Transferee Ltd. Had production problems in preparing and require 2,000 units per week of prepared material for their finishing process. The existing cost structure of one prepared unit of Transferor Ltd. at the existing capacity is as follows.
Material: Rs. 2.00 [variable 100%]
Labor: Rs. 2.00 [variable 50%]
Overheads: Rs. 4.00 [variable 25%]
The sale price of a completed unit of Transferor Ltd. is Rs. 16 with a profit of Rs. 4 per unit. Contrast the effect on the profits of Transferor Ltd. for 6 months [25 weeks] of supplying units to Transferor Ltd. with the following alternative transfer prices per unit. I] Marginal Cost II] Marginal Cost + 25% III] Marginal Cost + 15% return on capital employed. [ Assume capital employed Rs. 20 lakhs] IV] Existing Cost V] Existing Cost + a portion of profit on the basis of preparing cost/total cost X unit profit. VI] At an agreed market price of Rs. 8.50 Assume no increase in the fixed costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company is organized into two divisions namely A and B. A produces three products, K, L and M. The relevant data per unit is given below.
|
Particulars
|
K
|
L
|
M
|
|
Market price
|
Rs. 120
|
Rs. 115
|
Rs. 100
|
|
Variable costs
|
84
|
60
|
70
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
4
|
5
|
3
|
|
Maximum sales potential units
|
1600
|
1000
|
600
|
Division B has a demand for 600 units of product L for its use. If division A cannot supply the requirements, division B can buy a similar product from market at Rs.112 per unit. What should be the transfer price of 600 units of L for division B, if the total direct labor hours available in division A are restricted to 15,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOB COSTS, ENDING WORK IN PROCESS During March, Molson Company worked on three jobs. Data relating to these three jobs follow:
|
Job 62
|
Job 63
|
Job 64
|
|
Units in each order
|
110
|
200
|
165
|
|
Units sold
|
—
|
200
|
—
|
|
Materials requisitioned
|
$560
|
$740
|
$1,600
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
260
|
300
|
500
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$3,120
|
$3,600
|
$6,000
|
Overhead is assigned on the basis of direct labor hours at a rate of $7 per direct labor hour. During March, Jobs 62 and 63 were completed and transferred to finished goods inventory. Job 63 was sold by the end of the month. Job 64 was the only unfinished job at the end of the month.
Required:
1. Calculate the per unit cost of Jobs 62 and 63.
2. Compute the ending balance in the work in process inventory account.
3. Prepare the journal entries reflecting the completion of Jobs 62 and 63 and the sale of Job 63. The selling price is 140 percent of cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE, APPLICATION OF OVERHEAD TO JOBS, JOB COST On April 1, Kurena Company had the following balances in its inventory accounts:
|
Materials Inventory
|
$16,350
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
21,232
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
15,200
|
Work in process inventory is made up of three jobs with the following costs:
|
Job 30
|
Job 31
|
Job 32
|
|
Direct materials
|
$2,650
|
$1,900
|
$3,650
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,900
|
1,340
|
4,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
1,520
|
1,072
|
3,200
|
During April, Kurena experienced the following transactions:
a. Purchases materials on account for $21,000.
b. Requisitioned materials: Job 30, $12,500; Job 31, $11,200; and Job 32, $5,500.
c. Collected and summarized job tickets: Job 30, 250 hours at $12 per hour; Job 31, 275 hours at $15 per hour; and Job 32, 140 hours at $20 per hour.
d. Applied overhead on the basis of direct labor cost.
e. Actual overhead was $8,718.
f. Completed and transferred Job 31 to the finished goods warehouse.
g. Shipped Job 31 and billed the customer for 130 percent of the cost.
Required:
1. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost.
2. Calculate the ending balance for each job as of April 30.
3. Calculate the ending balance of Work in Process as of April 30.
4. Calculate the cost of goods sold for April.
5. Assuming that Kurena prices its jobs at cost plus 30 percent, calculate the price of the one job that was sold during April. (Round to the nearest dollar.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE, APPLICATION OF OVERHEAD TO JOBS, JOB COST, UNIT COST On June 1, Dabo Company’s work in process inventory consisted of three jobs with the following costs:
|
Job 70
|
Job 71
|
Job 72
|
|
Direct materials
|
$1,600
|
$2,000
|
$850
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,900
|
1,300
|
900
|
|
Applied overhead
|
1,425
|
975
|
675
|
During June, four more jobs were started. Information on costs added to the seven jobs during June is as follows:
|
|
Job 70
|
Job 71
|
Job 72
|
Job 73
|
Job 74
|
Job 75
|
Job 76
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 800
|
$1,235
|
$3,550
|
$5,000
|
$300
|
$560
|
$ 80
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,000
|
1,400
|
2,200
|
1,800
|
600
|
860
|
172
|
Before the end of June, Jobs 70, 72, 73, and 75 were completed. On June 30, Jobs 72 and 75 were sold.
Required:
1. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost.
2. Calculate the ending balance for each job as of June 30.
3. Calculate the ending balance in Work in Process Inventory as of June 30.
4. Calculate the cost of goods sold for June.
5. Assuming that Dabo prices its jobs at cost plus 20 percent, calculate Dabo’s sales revenue for June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOURNAL ENTRIES, T ACCOUNTS Kaycee, Inc., manufactures brown paper grocery bags. During the month of May, the following occurred:
a. Purchased materials on account for $23,175.
b. Requisitioned materials totaling $19,000 for use in production.
c. Incurred direct labor payroll for the month of $17,850, with an average wage of $8.50 per hour.
d. Incurred and paid actual overhead of $15,500.
e. Charged manufacturing overhead to production at the rate of $7 per direct labor hour.
f. Transferred completed units costing $36,085 to finished goods.
g. Sold bags costing $30,000 on account for $36,000. Beginning balances as of May 1 were:
|
Materials
|
$ 5,170
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
11,200
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
2,630
|
Required:
1. Prepare the journal entries for the preceding events.
2. Calculate the ending balances of:
a. Materials Inventory
b. Work in Process Inventory
c. Overhead Control
d. Finished Goods Inventory
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
UNIT COST, ENDING WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY, JOURNAL ENTRIES During October, Molson Company worked on three jobs. Data relating to these three jobs follow:
|
Job 43
|
Job 44
|
Job 45
|
|
Units in each order
|
120
|
200
|
165
|
|
Units sold
|
—
|
200
|
—
|
|
Materials requisitioned
|
$744
|
$640
|
$600
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
360
|
400
|
200
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$1,980
|
$2,480
|
$1,240
|
Overhead is assigned on the basis of direct labor hours at a rate of $5.30 per direct labor hour. During October, Jobs 43 and 44 were completed and transferred to finished goods inventory. Job 44 was sold by the end of the month. Job 45 was the only unfinished job at the end of the month.
Required:
1. Calculate the per unit cost of Jobs 43 and 44.
2. Compute the ending balance in the work in process inventory account.
3. Prepare the journal entries reflecting the completion of Jobs 43 and 44 and the sale of Job 44. The selling price is 140 percent of cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING, UNIT COST, ENDING WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY, JOURNAL ENTRIES Smeyak Company uses an ABC system to apply overhead. There are three activity rates:
|
Purchasing
|
$30 per purchase order
|
|
Machining
|
$5 per machine hour
|
|
Other overhead
|
60% of direct labor cost
|
During August, Smeyak worked on three jobs. Data relating to these jobs follow:
|
Job 80
|
Job 81
|
Job 82
|
|
Units in each order
|
110
|
400
|
100
|
|
Units sold
|
—
|
200
|
—
|
|
Materials requisitioned
|
$1,730
|
$3,000
|
$1,200
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
$2,000
|
$4,600
|
$800
|
|
Machine hours
|
60
|
40
|
20
|
|
Purchase orders
|
20
|
16
|
25
|
During August, Jobs 80 and 82 were completed and transferred to finished goods inventory. Job 80 was sold by the end of the month. Job 81 was the only unfinished job at the end of the month.
Required:
1. Calculate the per unit cost of Jobs 80 and 82.
2. Compute the ending balance in the work in process inventory account.
3. Prepare the journal entries reflecting the completion of Jobs 80 and 82 and the sale of Job 80. The selling price is 140 percent of cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING, UNIT COST, ENDING WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY Zavner Company is a job order costing firm that uses activity based costing to apply overhead to jobs. Zavner identified three overhead activities and related drivers. Budgeted information for the year is as follows:
|
Activity
|
Cost
|
Driver
|
Amount of Driver
|
|
Engineering design
|
$120,000
|
Engineering hours
|
3,000
|
|
Purchasing
|
80,000
|
Number of parts
|
10,000
|
|
Other overhead
|
250,000
|
Direct labor hours
|
40,000
|
Zavner worked on five jobs in July. Data are as follows:
|
Job 60
|
Job 61
|
Job 62
|
Job 63
|
Job 64
|
|
Balance, July 1
|
$32,450
|
$40,770
|
$29,090
|
$0
|
$0
|
|
Direct materials
|
$26,000
|
$37,900
|
$25,350
|
$11,000
|
$13,560
|
|
Direct labor
|
$40,000
|
$38,500
|
$43,000
|
$20,900
|
$18,000
|
|
Engineering hours
|
20
|
10
|
15
|
100
|
200
|
|
Number of parts
|
150
|
180
|
200
|
500
|
300
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
2,500
|
2,400
|
2,600
|
1,200
|
1,100
|
By July 31, Jobs 60 and 62 were completed and sold. The remaining jobs were in process.
Required:
1. Calculate the activity rates for each of the three overhead activities.
2. Prepare job order cost sheets for each job showing all costs through July 31.
3. Calculate the balance in Work in Process on July 31.
4. Calculate cost of goods sold for July.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JOURNAL ENTRIES, T ACCOUNTS, COST OF GOODS MANUFACTURED AND SOLD During May, the following transactions were completed and reported by Perlmutter Products, Inc.:
a. Purchased materials on account for $50,100.
b. Issued materials to production to fill job order requisitions: direct materials, $30,000; indirect materials, $15,000.
c. Accumulated payroll for the month: direct labor, $70,000; indirect labor, $32,000; administrative, $18,000; sales, $9,900.
d. Accrued depreciation on factory plant and equipment of $13,400.
e. Accrued property taxes during the month for $1,450 (on factory).
f. Recorded expired insurance with a credit to the prepaid insurance account of $6,200.
g. Incurred factory utilities costs of $6,000.
h. Paid advertising costs of $7,200.
i. Accrued depreciation: office equipment, $1,500; sales vehicles, $650.
j. Paid legal fees for preparation of lease agreements of $750.
k. Charged overhead to production at a rate of $9 per direct labor hour. Recorded 8,000 direct labor hours during the month.
l. Incurred cost of jobs completed during the month of $158,000. The company also reported the following beginning balances in its inventory accounts:
|
Materials Inventory
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Work in Process Inventory
|
30,000
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
60,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions occurring in May.
2. Prepare T accounts for Materials Inventory, Overhead Control, Work in Process Inventory, and Finished Goods Inventory. Post all relevant entries to these accounts.
3. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured.
4. If the overhead variance is all allocated to Cost of Goods Sold, by how much will Cost of Goods Sold decrease or increase?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
OVERHEAD APPLICATION, ACTIVITY BASED COSTING, BID PRICES Karanth Company manufactures specialty tools to customer order. Budgeted overhead for the coming year is as follows:
|
Purchasing
|
$30,000
|
|
Setups
|
35,000
|
|
Engineering
|
15,000
|
|
Other
|
10,000
|
Previously, Sharon Benetton, Karanth Company’s controller, had applied overhead on the basis of machine hours. Expected machine hours for the coming year are 10,000. Sharon has been reading about activity based costing, and she wonders whether or not it might offer some advantages to her company. She decided that appropriate drivers for overhead activities are purchase orders for purchasing, number of setups for setup cost, engineering hours for engineering cost, and machine hours for other. Budgeted amounts for these drivers are 5,000 purchase orders, 500 setups, and 500 engineering hours. Sharon has been asked to prepare bids for two jobs with the following information:
|
Job 1
|
Job 2
|
|
Direct materials
|
$3,700
|
$8,900
|
|
Direct labor
|
$1,000
|
$2,000
|
|
Number of setups
|
2
|
3
|
|
Number of purchase orders
|
15
|
20
|
|
Number of engineering hours
|
25
|
10
|
|
Number of machine hours
|
200
|
200
|
The typical bid price includes a 30 percent markup over full manufacturing cost.
Required:
1. Calculate a plantwide rate for Karanth Company based on machine hours. What is the bid price of each job using this rate?
2. Calculate activity rates for the four overhead activities. What is the bid price of each job using these rates?
3. Which bids are more accurate? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLANTWIDE OVERHEAD RATE VERSUS DEPARTMENTAL RATES, EFFECTS ON PRICING DECISIONS Cherise Ortega, marketing manager for Romer Company, was puzzled by the outcome of two recent bids. The company’s policy was to bid 150 percent of the full manufacturing cost. One job (labeled Job 97 28) had been turned down by a prospective customer, who had indicated that the proposed price was $3 per unit higher than the winning bid. A second job (Job 97 35) had been accepted by a customer, who was amazed that Romer could offer such favorable terms. This customer revealed that Romer’s price was $43 per unit lower than the next lowest bid. Cherise has been informed that the company was more than competitive in terms of cost control. Accordingly, she began to suspect that the problem was related to cost assignment procedures. Upon investigating, Cherise was told that the company uses a Plant wide overhead rate based on direct labor hours. The rate is computed at the beginning of the year using budgeted data. Selected budgeted data are as follows:
|
Department A
|
Department B
|
Total
|
|
Overhead
|
$500,000
|
$2,000,000
|
$2,500,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
200,000
|
50,000
|
250,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
20,000
|
120,000
|
140,000
|
Cherise also discovered that the overhead costs in department B were higher than those in department A because B has more equipment, higher maintenance, higher power consumption, higher depreciation, and higher setup costs. In addition to the general procedures for assigning overhead costs, Cherise was supplied with the following specific manufacturing data on Jobs 97 28 and 97 35:
|
|
Job 97 28
|
|
|
|
|
Department A
|
Department B
|
Total
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
5,000
|
1,000
|
6,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
200
|
500
|
700
|
|
Prime costs
|
$100,000
|
$20,000
|
$120,000
|
|
Units produced
|
14,400
|
14,400
|
14,400
|
|
Job 97 35
|
|
|
Department A
|
Department B
|
Total
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
400
|
600
|
1,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
200
|
3,000
|
3,200
|
|
Prime costs
|
$10,000
|
$40,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Units produced
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
Required:
1. Using a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor hours, develop the bid prices for Jobs 97 28 and 97 35 (express the bid prices on a per unit basis).
2. Using departmental overhead rates (use direct labor hours for department A and machine hours for department B), develop per unit bid prices for Jobs 97 28 and 97 35.
3. Compute the difference in gross profit that would have been earned had the company used departmental rates in its bids instead of the plantwide rate.
4. Explain why the use of departmental rates in this case provides a more accurate product cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures a single product with a capacity of 1 50 000 units per annum. The summarized profitability statement for a year is as under:
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Sales: 1 00 000 units @ Rs.15 per unit
|
|
15, 00,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Sales
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
3, 00,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
2, 00,000
|
|
|
Production overheads – variable
|
60,000
|
|
|
Production overheads – fixed
|
3,00,000
|
|
|
Administrative overheads – fixed
|
1, 50,000
|
|
|
Selling and distribution overheads variable
|
90, 000
|
|
|
Selling and distribution overheads fixed
|
1, 50,000
|
|
|
Total cost of sales
|
|
12, 50,000
|
|
Profit
|
|
2, 50,000
|
You are required to evaluate the following options:
1) What will be the amount of sales required to earn a target profit of 25% on sales, if the packing is improved at a cost of Re.1 per unit?
2) There is an offer from a large retailer for purchasing 30 000 units per annum subject to providing a packing with a different brand name at a cost of Rs.2 per unit. However, in this case there will be no selling and distribution expenses. Also this will not in any way affect the company’s existing business. What will be the breakeven price for this additional offer?
3) If an expenditure of Rs.3, 00,000 is made on advertising, the sales would increase from the present level of 1 00 000 units to 1 20 000 units at a price of Rs.18 per unit. Will that expenditure be justified?
4) If the selling price is reduced by Rs.2 per unit, there will be 100% capacity utilization. Will the reduction in selling price be justified?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XY Ltd. is manufacturing three household products, A, B and C and selling them in a competitive market. Details of current demand, selling price and cost structure are given below.
|
Particulars
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
|
Expected Demand [units]
|
10, 000
|
12, 000
|
20, 000
|
|
Selling price per unit Rs.
|
20
|
16
|
10
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials Rs.10 per kg
|
6
|
4
|
2
|
|
Direct labour Rs.1.5 per hour
|
3
|
3
|
1.50
|
|
Variable overheads
|
2
|
1
|
1.0
|
|
Fixed overheads per unit
|
Rs.5
|
Rs.4
|
Rs.2
|
The company is frequently affected by acute scarcity of raw material and high labor turnover. During the next period, it is expected to have one of the following situations:
I] Raw material available will be only 12 100 kg
II] Direct labour hours available will be only 5000 hrs.
III] It may be possible to increase sales of any one product by 25% without any additional fixed costs but by spending Rs.20, 000 on advertisement. There will be no shortage of materials or labor.
Suggest the best production plan in each case and the resultant profit that the company would earn according to your suggestion.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has compiled the following data for the preparation of its budget for the year 2008 09
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Sale per month units
|
8, 000
|
4, 000
|
6, 000
|
|
Selling Price
|
Rs.40 per unit
|
Rs.80 per unit
|
Rs.100 per unit
|
|
Direct Materials
|
Rs.20 per unit
|
Rs.48 per unit
|
Rs.40 per unit
|
|
Direct Labour:
|
|
|
|
|
Department 1 Rs.5 per hour
|
5
|
10
|
20
|
|
Department 2 Rs.4 per hour
|
8
|
4
|
12
|
|
Variable Overheads
|
Rs.3 per unit
|
Rs.3 per unit
|
Rs.7 per unit
|
|
Fixed Overheads:
|
|
|
|
|
Rs.1, 50, 000 per month
|
|
|
|
After the budget was discussed, the following action plan was approved for improving the profitability of the company.
I] Direct labour in department 1, which is in short supply should be increased by 15, 000 hours by spending fixed overheads of Rs.8, 000 per month.
II] To boost sales, an advertisement program should be launched at a cost of Rs.10, 000 per month.
III] The selling price should be reduced by: A: 2.5%, B: 8.75%, C: 1%
IV] The sales target have been increased and the sales department has confirmed that the company will be able to achieve the following quantities of sales. A: 12, 000 units, B: 6, 000 units, C: 10, 000 units
Required:
1. Present the original budget for the year 2008 09
2. Set an optimal product mix after taking into the action plan into consideration and determine the monthly profit.
3. In case the requirement of direct labour hour of department 2 in excess of 40, 000 hours is to be met by overtime working involving double the normal rate, what will be the effect of so working overtime on the optimum profit as computed in 2 above?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vinak Ltd. is operating at 75% level of activity produces and sells two products A and B. The cost sheet of the two products is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
|
Units produced and sold
|
600
|
400
|
|
Direct materials
|
Rs.2.00
|
Rs.4.00
|
|
Direct labour
|
Rs.4.00
|
Rs.4.00
|
|
Factory overheads [40% fixed]
|
Rs.5.00
|
Rs.3.00
|
|
Selling and administration overheads 60% fixed
|
Rs.8.00
|
Rs.5.00
|
|
Total cost per unit
|
Rs.19.00
|
Rs.16.00
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
Rs.23.00
|
Rs.19.00
|
Factory overheads are absorbed on the basis of machine hours, which is the limiting [key] factor. The machine hour rate is Rs.2 per hour.
The company receives an offer from Canada for the purchase of product A at a price of Rs.17.50 per unit.
Alternatively, the company has another offer from the Middle East for the purchase of product B at a price of Rs.15.50 per unit. In both the cases, a special packing charge of 50 p per unit has to be borne by the company.
The company can accept either of the two export orders and in either case the company can supply such quantities as may be possible to be produced by utilizing the balance of 25% of its capacity. You are required to prepare,
I] A statement showing the economics of the two export proposals giving your recommendations as to which proposal should be accepted.
II] A statement showing the overall profitability of the company after incorporating the export proposal recommended by you.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sterling Industries Ltd. manufactures product Z by making and assembling three components, A, B and C. The components are made in a machine shop using three identical machines each of which can make any of the three components. However, the total capacity of the three machines is only 12, 000 machine hours per month and is just sufficient to meet the current demand. Labour for assembling is available according to requirements. Further details are given below.
|
Component
|
Machine Hours Per Unit
|
Variable Cost Per Unit
|
Market Price at which the Component can be purchased
|
|
A
|
4
|
Rs.48
|
Rs.64
|
|
B
|
5
|
Rs.60
|
Rs.75
|
|
C
|
6
|
Rs.80
|
Rs.110
|
|
Assembling [per unit of Z]
|
—
|
Rs.30
|
—
|
Fixed cost per month amounts to Rs.50, 000. Product Z is sold at Rs.300 per unit. From next month onwards the company expects the demand for Z to rise by 25%. As the machine capacity is limited, the company wants to meet the increase in demand by buying such numbers of A, B or C which is more profitable.
You are asked to find out the following:
I] Current demand and profits made by the company.
II] Which component and how many units of the same should be bought from the market to meet the increase in demand?
III] Profit made by the company is suggestion in I is accepted?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company produces 30, 000 units of product A and 20, 000 units of product B per annum. The sales value and costs of the two products are as follows:
Sales value Rs.7, 60, 000
Factory overheads: Rs.1, 90, 000
Direct material: Rs.1, 40, 000
Administrative and selling overheads: Rs.1, 20, 000
Direct labour: Rs1, 90, 000
50% of the factory overheads are variable and 50% of the administrative and selling overheads are fixed. The selling price of A is Rs.12 per unit and Rs.20 per unit for B. The direct material and labour ratio for product A is 2:3 and for B is 4:5. For both the products, the selling price is 400% of direct labour. The factory overheads are charged in the ratio of direct labour and administrative and selling overheads are recovered at a fl at rate of Rs.2 per unit for A and Rs.3 per unit for B. Due to fall in demand, of the above products, the company has a plan to diversify and make product C using 40% capacity. It has been estimated that for C direct material and direct labour will be Rs.2.50 and Rs.3 per unit respectively. Other variable costs will be the same as applicable to the product A. The selling price of product C is Rs.14 per unit and production will be 30 000 units.
Assuming 60% capacity is used for manufacture of A and B, calculate,
I] Present cost and profit
II] Cost and profit after diversification
III] Give your recommendations as to whether to diversify or not.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The annual budget of ABC Ltd. at 60% and 80% level of performance is as under. [Rs. In thousands]
|
Particulars
|
60% capacity
|
80% capacity
|
|
Direct material
|
360
|
480
|
|
Direct labour
|
480
|
640
|
|
Production overheads
|
252
|
276
|
|
Administrative overheads
|
124
|
132
|
|
Selling and distribution overheads
|
136
|
148
|
|
Total
|
1, 352
|
1, 676
|
The company is experiencing difficulties in selling its products and is presently operating at 50% capacity.
The sales revenue for the year is estimated at Rs.9,00,000. The directors are seriously considering suspending operations till the market picks up. Market research undertaken by the company reveals that in about 12 months time, the sales will pick up and the company can comfortably operate at 75% level of performance and earn a sales income of Rs.18,00,000 in that year.
The sales personnel of the company do not want to suspend operations for fear of adverse reactions in the market but the directors want to decide the issue purely on financial considerations.
If the manufacturing and other operations of the company are suspended for a year, it is estimated that,
1) The present fixed cost could be reduced to Rs.2, 20, 000 per annum.
2) The settlement cost of personnel not required would amount to Rs.1, 50, 000.
3) The maintenance of plant has to go on and that would cost Rs.20, 000 per annum
4) On resuming operations, the expenditure connected with reopening after shut down would amount to Rs.80, 000.
Submit a report to the directors and indicate therein, based on purely financial considerations, whether it would be advisable to suspend the company’s operations in the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
State whether the following statements are True or False:
1. Marginal cost includes prime cost plus fixed overheads.
2. Contribution is the difference between the selling price and the total costs.
3. An increase in the volume of the production will result in reduction in unit variable cost.
4. The amount of profit under absorption costing and marginal costing is one and the same.
5. All variable costs are included in the marginal cost.
6. Margin of safety is the difference between actual sales and the sales and the breakeven point.
7. The difference between the budgeted output and the actual output is known as margin of safety.
8. The breakeven point will be lower if the selling price is increased but the amount of cost does not change.
9. At breakeven point margin of safety is nil.
10. When fixed cost is deducted from total cost, we get marginal cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures two products, A and B. Its sales department has three area divisions, North, East and South. Preliminary sales budgets for the year ending 31st March 2007, based on the assessment of the divisional managers were as follows.
Product A: North 2,00,000 units, South 5,50,000 units and East 1,00,000 units
Product B: North 3,00,000 units, South 4,00,000 units and East Nil
Sale price: A Rs.4 and B Rs.3 in all areas.
Arrangements are made for the extensive advertising of Products A and B and it is estimated that the North division sales will increase by 1,00,000 units. Arrangements are also made to advertise and distribute product in Eastern area in the second half of the year 2006 07 when sales are expected to be 5,00,000 units.
Prepare a revised sales budget for the year ended 31st March after taking into consideration the above mentioned adjustments.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
AB Ltd. manufactures two products, A and B and sells them through two divisions, north and south. For the purpose of submission of Sales Budget to the budget committee the following information is available. Budgeted Sales for the current year were,
Product A: north 4,000 units @ Rs.9 each, south 6,000 units @ Rs.9 each
Product B: north 3,000 units @ Rs.21 each, south 5,000 @ Rs.21 each Actual sales for the current year were,
|
Particulars
|
North
|
South
|
|
Product A
|
5,000 units @ Rs.9 each
|
7,000 units @ Rs.9 each
|
|
Product B
|
2,000 units @ Rs.21 each
|
4,000 units @ Rs.21 each
|
Adequate market studies reveal that Product A is popular but under priced. It is observed that if the price of A is increased by Re.1 it will still find a ready market. On the other hand, B is overpriced to customers and the market could absorb more if sales price of B is reduced by Re.1. The management has agreed to give effect to the above price changes.
From the information based on these price changes and reports from salesmen, the following estimates have been prepared by divisional managers.
Percentage increase in sales over current budget is,
|
Particulars
|
North
|
South
|
|
Product A
|
+ 10%
|
+ 5%
|
|
Product B
|
+ 20%
|
+ 10%
|
With the help of an intensive advertisement campaign, the following additional sales over the estimated sales of divisional managers are possible.
Additional sales above the estimated sales of divisional managers
|
Particulars
|
North
|
South
|
|
Product A
|
600
|
700
|
|
Product B
|
400
|
500
|
You are required to prepare a budget for sales incorporating the above estimates and also show the budgeted sales and actual sales for the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare Production Budget from the following details for XYZ Ltd.
|
Product
|
Estimated Inventory
|
Estimated Inventory
|
Sales Forecast as per
|
|
|
1st April 2008
|
31st March 2009
|
Sales Budget
|
|
X
|
2,500 units
|
3,000 units
|
15000 units
|
|
Y
|
3,500 units
|
4,000 units
|
20000 units
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Co. wished to arrange overdraft facilities with its bankers during the period April 2008 to June 2008 when it will be manufacturing mostly for the stock. Prepare a Cash Budget for the above period from the following data, indicating the extent of the bank facilities the company will require at the end of each month.
|
Particulars
|
Sales
|
Purchases
|
Wages
|
|
February 2008
|
Rs.1, 80,000
|
Rs.1, 24,800
|
Rs.12, 000
|
|
March
|
1, 92,000
|
1, 44,000
|
14, 000
|
|
April
|
1, 08,000
|
2, 43,000
|
11, 000
|
|
May
|
1, 74,000
|
2, 46,000
|
10, 000
|
|
June
|
1, 26,000
|
2, 68,000
|
15, 000
|
Additional Information:
1. 50% of the credit sales are realized in the month following the sales and remaining 50% in the second month following. Creditors are paid in the month following the month of purchases. There are no cash sales or cash purchases
2. Cash at bank [overdraft] estimated on 1st April 2008 is Rs.25, 000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures two products, X and Y. A forecast of units to be sold in the first four months of the year is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Product X [units]
|
Product Y [units]
|
|
January
|
1, 000
|
2, 800
|
|
February
|
1, 200
|
2, 800
|
|
March
|
1, 600
|
2, 400
|
|
April
|
2, 000
|
2, 000
|
|
May
|
2, 400
|
1, 600
|
Other information is given below.
|
Particulars
|
Product X –
|
Product Y
|
|
|
Rs. Per Unit
|
Rs. Per Unit
|
|
Direct material
|
12.50
|
19.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
4.50
|
7.00
|
|
Factory overheads per unit
|
3.00
|
4.00
|
There will be no opening and closing work in progress [WIP] at the end of any month and finished product [in units] equal to half of the budgeted sale of the next month should be in stock at the end of each month. [including previous year December]
You are required to prepare,
A] Production budget for January to April and
B] Summarized production cost budget
[ ICWAI Inter December 2006, Management Accounting – Performance Management]
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Ltd. manufactures a single product P with a single grade of labor. The sales budget and finished goods stock budget for the 1st Quarter ending on 30th June 2008 are as follows.
Sales: 1,400 units
Opening finished units: 100 units
Closing finished units: 140 units
The goods are imported only when production work is complete and it is budgeted that 10% of finished work will be scrapped.
The standard direct labor content of the product P is 3 hours. The budgeted productivity ratio for direct labor is 80% only.
The company employs 36 direct operatives who are expected to average 144 working hours each in the 1st quarter.
You are required to prepare,
I] Production Budget II] Direct Labor Budget and III] Comment on the problem that your direct labor budget reveals and suggest how this problem might be overcome.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data, prepare a Production Budget for XYZ Ltd for a period of 6 months ending 30th June.
|
Product
|
Opening Stock 1st January 2008 units
|
Closing Stock 30th June 2008 Units
|
Sales Forecast Units
|
Normal Loss in Production [%]
|
|
A
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
60,000
|
4
|
|
B
|
9,000
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
2
|
|
C
|
12,000
|
14,000
|
80,000
|
6
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A newly started company wishes to prepare Cash Budget from January 2008. Prepare a Cash Budget for the first six months from the following estimated receipts and expenditures.
|
Month
|
Total Sales Rs.
|
Materials Rs.
|
Wages Rs.
|
Production Overheads
|
Selling & Distribution
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rs.
|
Overheads
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rs.
|
|
January
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
4,000
|
3,200
|
800
|
|
February
|
22,000
|
14,000
|
4,400
|
3,300
|
900
|
|
March
|
24,000
|
14,000
|
4,600
|
3,300
|
800
|
|
April
|
26,000
|
12,000
|
4,600
|
3,400
|
900
|
|
May
|
28,000
|
12,000
|
4,800
|
3,500
|
900
|
|
June
|
30,000
|
16,000
|
4,800
|
3,600
|
1,000
|
Cash balance on 1st January was Rs.10, 000. A new machine is to be installed at Rs.30, 000 on credit to be repaid by two equal installments in March and April. Sales commission @ 5% on total sales is to be paid within the month following actual sales. Rs.10, 000 being the amount of 2nd call on shares may be received in March. Share premium amounting to Rs.2, 000 is also receivable with 2nd call. Credit allowed by suppliers is 2 months, credit allowed to customers is 1 month, delay in payment of overheads is 1 month, and delay in payment in wages is ½ month.
Assume cash sales to be 50% of total sales.
|
Cash Budget
|
|
|
|
|
January – June 2008
|
|
|
|
Rs.
|
|
|
Particulars
|
Jan.
|
Feb
|
March
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
|
A] Opening Balance
|
10,000
|
18,000
|
29,800
|
20,000
|
6,100
|
8,800
|
|
|
B] Expected Receipts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I] Cash Sales [50% of total sales]
|
10,000
|
11,000
|
12,000
|
13,000
|
14,000
|
15,000
|
|
|
II] Collections from Debtors [1 month credit]
|
|
10,000
|
11,000
|
12,000
|
13,000
|
14,000
|
|
|
III] Share 2nd Call
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
IV] Share Premium
|
|
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
C] Total Expected
|
10,000
|
21,000
|
35,000
|
25,000
|
27,000
|
29,000
|
|
Receipts [I+II+III+IV]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
D]
Total Cash Available [A + C]
|
20,000
|
39,000
|
64,800
|
45,000
|
33,100
|
37,800
|
|
E]
Expected Payments
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I]
Payment for Purchases [2 months credit]
|
|
|
20,000
|
14,000
|
14,000
|
12,000
|
|
II]
Production overheads [1 month delay]
|
|
3,200
|
3,300
|
3,300
|
3,400
|
3,500
|
|
IV] S & D overheads 1 month delay]
|
|
800
|
900
|
800
|
900
|
900
|
|
V]
Wages *
|
2,000
|
4,200
|
4,500
|
4,600
|
4,700
|
4,800
|
|
VI] Sales Commission
|
|
1,000
|
1,100
|
1,200
|
1,300
|
1,400
|
|
VII] Machine Purchase
|
|
|
15,000
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
F]
Total Payments
|
2,000
|
9,200
|
44,800
|
38,900
|
24,300
|
22,600
|
|
G]
Cl. Balance [D –F]
|
18,000
|
29,800
|
20,000
|
6,100
|
8,800
|
15,200
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is a delay in payment of wages by ½ month; hence 50% of current month and 50% of previous month is paid in the current month. The payment made in each month is show below.
|
Particulars
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
|
Wages
|
2,000
|
2,000 Jan 2,200 Feb
|
2,200 Feb 2,300 Mar
|
2,300 M 2,300 A
|
2,300 A 2,400 M
|
2,400 M 2,400 J
|
|
|
|
4,200 (Total)
|
4,500 (Total)
|
4,600 (Total)
|
4,700 (Total)
|
4,800 (Total)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Summarized below are the Income and Expenditure forecasts for the month March to August 2008
|
Month
|
Credit
|
Credit
|
Wages
|
Mfg.
|
Office
|
Selling
|
|
|
Sales
|
Purchases
|
Rs.
|
Expenses
|
Expenses
|
Expenses
|
|
|
Rs.
|
Rs.
|
|
Rs.
|
Rs.
|
Rs.
|
|
March
|
60,000
|
36,000
|
9,000
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
|
April
|
62,000
|
38,000
|
8,000
|
3,000
|
1,500
|
5,000
|
|
May
|
64,000
|
33,000
|
10,000
|
4,500
|
2,500
|
4,500
|
|
June
|
58,000
|
35,000
|
8,500
|
3,500
|
2,000
|
3,500
|
|
July
|
56,000
|
39,000
|
9,000
|
4,000
|
1,000
|
4,500
|
|
August
|
60,000
|
34,000
|
8,000
|
3,000
|
1,500
|
4,500
|
You are given the following further information
v Plant costing Rs.16, 000 due for delivery in June. 10% on delivery and balance after three months.
v Advance tax Rs.8, 000 is payable in March and June
v Period of credit allowed, Suppliers 2 months and customers 1 month
v Lag in payment of manufacturing expenses half month
v Lag in payment of all other expenses one month
v Cash balance on 1st May 2008 is Rs.8, 000
Prepare Cash Budget for three months starting from 1st May 2008
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a Cash Budget in respect of six months from July to December from the following information.
|
Month
|
Sales Rs.000
|
Mat. Rs.000
|
Wages Rs.000
|
Production O/H Rs.000
|
Admn O/H Rs.
|
Selling O/H Rs
|
Dist. O/H Rs
|
R & D O/H Rs
|
|
April
|
100
|
40
|
10.0
|
4.4
|
3,000
|
1,600
|
800
|
1,000
|
|
May
|
120
|
60
|
11.2
|
4.8
|
2,900
|
1,700
|
900
|
1,000
|
|
June
|
80
|
40
|
8.0
|
5.0
|
3,040
|
1,500
|
700
|
1,200
|
|
July
|
100
|
60
|
8.4
|
4.6
|
2,960
|
1,700
|
900
|
1,200
|
|
Aug.
|
120
|
70
|
9.2
|
5.2
|
3,020
|
1,900
|
1,100
|
1,400
|
|
Sept
|
140
|
80
|
10.0
|
5.4
|
3,080
|
2,000
|
1,200
|
1,400
|
|
Oct
|
160
|
90
|
10.4
|
5.8
|
3,120
|
2,050
|
1,250
|
1,600
|
|
Nov
|
180
|
100
|
10.8
|
6.0
|
3,140
|
2,150
|
1,350
|
1,600
|
|
Dec
|
200
|
110
|
11.6
|
6.4
|
3,200
|
2,300
|
1,500
|
1,600
|
The cash balance as on 1st July was expected Rs.1, 50, 000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a Cash Budget from the following information for ABC Ltd.
|
Particulars
|
1st Quarter [Rs.]
|
IInd Quarter
|
IIIrd Quarter
|
IVth Quarter
|
|
|
|
|
[Rs.]
|
[Rs.]
|
[Rs.]
|
|
|
Opening Cash
|
10, 000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Collections from
|
1,25, 000
|
1,50, 000
|
1,60, 000
|
2,21, 000
|
|
|
customers
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Payments:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Purchase of Materials
|
20, 000
|
35, 000
|
35, 000
|
54, 200
|
|
|
Other expenses
|
25, 000
|
20, 000
|
20, 000
|
17, 000
|
|
|
Salaries and wages
|
90, 000
|
95, 000
|
95, 000
|
1,09, 200
|
|
|
Particulars
|
1st Quarter [Rs.]
|
IInd Quarter
|
IIIrd Quarter
|
IVth Quarter
|
|
|
|
[Rs.]
|
[Rs.]
|
[Rs.]
|
|
Income tax
|
5, 000
|
|
|
|
|
Machinery Purchase
|
|
|
|
20, 000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The company desires to maintain a cash balance of Rs.15, 000 at the end of each quarter. Cash can be borrowed or repaid in multiples of Rs.500 at an interest rate of 10% p.a. Management does not want to borrow cash more than what is necessary and wants to repay as early as possible. In any event, loans cannot be extended beyond a quarter. Interest is computed and paid when principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing takes place at the beginning and repayments are made at the end of the quarter.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company is currently working at 50% capacity and produces 10, 000 units at a cost of Rs.180 per unit as per the following details.
|
Materials:
|
Rs.100
|
|
Labor:
|
Rs.30
|
Factory Overheads: Rs.30 [40% fixed]
Administrative Overheads: Rs.20 [50% fixed]
Total Cost Per Unit: Rs.180
The selling price per unit at present is Rs.200. At 60% working, material cost per unit increases by 2% and selling price per unit falls by 2%. At 80% working, material cost per unit increases by 5% and selling price per unit falls by 5%.
Prepare a Flexible Budget to show the profits/losses at 50%, 60% and 80% capacity utilization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the course of manufacture of the main product ‘P’, A and B also emerge. The joint expenses of manufacture amount to Rs.1, 19, 550. All the products are processed further after separation and sold as per details given below.
|
Particulars
|
Main Product P
|
By Product A
|
By – Product B
|
|
|
Rs.
|
Rs.
|
Rs.
|
|
Sales
|
90,000
|
60,000
|
40,000
|
|
Cost beyond split off point
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
4,000
|
|
Profit as percentage of sales
|
25%
|
20%
|
15%
|
Selling and administration overheads are absorbed as a percentage of cost of sales. Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of joint cost to the main product and by products. Also prepare main product ‘P’ account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
JB Ltd. produces four joint products, A, B, C and D, all of which emerge from the processing of one raw material. The following are the relevant data:
Production for the period:
|
Joint Product
|
Number of Units
|
Selling Price per Unit Rs
|
|
A
|
500
|
18.00
|
|
B
|
900
|
8.00
|
|
C
|
400
|
4.00
|
|
D
|
200
|
11.00
|
The company budgets for a profit of 10% on sales value. The other estimated costs are:
Carriage inwards: Rs.1, 000
Direct wages: Rs.3, 000
Manufacturing overheads: Rs.2, 000
Administration overheads: 10% of the sales value
You are required to,
I] Calculate the maximum price that may be paid for the raw material
II] Prepare a comprehensive cost statement for each of the products allocating the materials and other costs based up on: Number of units and Sales value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company purchases raw materials worth Rs.11.04 lakhs and processes them into four products, P, Q, R and S, which have a unit sales value of Rs.3, Rs.9, Rs.16 and Rs.60 respectively at split off point, as they could be sold as such to other processors. However, during a year, the company decided to further process and sell products P, Q and S while R was not be processed further but sold at split off point to other processors. The processing of raw materials into the four products cost Rs.28 lakhs to the company. The other data for the year were as under:
|
Product
|
Output Units
|
Sales Rs. in lakhs
|
Additional processing costs after split off [All variable costs] Rs. in lakhs
|
|
P
|
10,00,000
|
46.00
|
12.00
|
|
Q
|
20,000
|
4.00
|
2.40
|
|
R
|
10,000
|
1.60
|
|
|
S
|
18,000
|
12.00
|
.40
|
You are required to work out the following information for managerial decision making.
I] If the joint costs are allocated amongst the four products on the basis of ‘Net Realizable Value’ at split off point, what would be the company’s annual income?
II] If the company had sold off all other three products at split off stage, identify the increase/ decrease in the company’s annual income as compared to I above.
III] What sales strategy could the company have planned to maximize its profit in the year?
IV] Identify the net increase in income if the strategy at III is adopted, as compared to I above?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Ltd. is maintaining separate set of books for financial accounts and cost accounts. You are required to prepare accounts in cost books and trial balance for the year ended 31st March 2006.
Information Available From Financial Accounts:
v Sales: Rs.6, 30, 000
v Indirect wages: Production Rs.38, 000, Administration Rs.22, 000, Sales and distribution Rs. 30, 000
v Materials purchased: Rs.1, 50, 000
v Direct factory wages: Rs.2, 30, 000
v Production overheads: Rs.70, 000
v Selling and distribution overheads: Rs.60, 000
v Administration overheads: Rs.48, 000
The data available from cost accounts for the period include the following:
v Raw materials issued to production as indirect material Rs.20, 000
v Stores issued to production as direct materials Rs.1, 15, 000
v Raw materials of finished production Rs.4, 05, 000
v Cost of goods sold at finished goods stock valuation Rs.4, 00, 000
v Standard rate of production overhead absorption Re.0.50 per operating hour
v Rate of administration overhead absorption 20% of cost of production
v Rate of sales and distribution overhead absorption 10% of sales
v Actual operating hours worked 2, 40, 000
There is no balance of stock on 1 4 2005
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Profit and Loss Accounts is shown in the financial books of a company for the year ended 30th September, 2002 together with a statement of reconciliation between the profit as per financial and cost accounts is given below.
|
Profit and Loss Account for the Year Ended 30/9/2002
|
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Opening Stock –R.M.
|
90, 000
|
Sales
|
15, 00, 000
|
|
Opening Stock WIP
|
50, 000
|
Closing Stock – R.M.
|
98, 000
|
|
Opening Stock FG
|
70, 000
|
Closing Stock WIP
|
53, 000
|
|
Raw material purchases
|
5, 00, 000
|
Closing Stock – F.G.
|
72, 000
|
|
Direct wages
|
2, 00, 000
|
Miscellaneous receipts
|
45, 000
|
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Factory overheads
|
2, 00, 000
|
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
1, 70, 000
|
|
|
|
Selling and Distribution expenses
|
2, 20, 000
|
|
|
|
Preliminary expenses written off
|
75, 000
|
|
|
|
Debenture interest
|
30, 000
|
|
|
|
Net profit
|
1, 63, 000
|
|
|
|
Total
|
17, 68, 000
|
Total
|
17, 68, 000
|
Statement of Reconciliation of Profit as per Financial and Cost Accounts
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Profit as per financial accounts
|
|
1, 63, 000
|
|
I] Difference in valuation of stock
|
|
|
|
Add: Raw materials –closing stock
|
1, 200
|
|
|
Work in progress –opening stock
|
1, 300
|
|
|
Finished goods – opening stock
|
2, 000
|
|
|
Closing stock
|
1, 500
|
|
|
Total [A]
|
5, 500
|
|
|
Less: Raw materials – opening stock
|
1, 650
|
|
|
Work – in –progress –closing stock
|
750
|
|
|
Total [B]
|
2, 400
|
|
|
A B
|
|
3, 100
|
|
II] Other items
|
|
|
|
Add: Preliminary expenses written off
|
75, 000
|
|
|
Debenture interest
|
30, 000
|
|
|
Less: Miscellaneous receipts
|
45, 000
|
60, 000
|
|
Profit as per Cost Accounts
|
|
2, 26, 100
|
You are required to prepare the following accounts as they would appear in the Costing Ledger
i. Raw Material Control A/c
ii. Work –in – progress Control A/c
iii. Finished Goods Control A/c
iv. Cost of Sales A/c
v. Costing Profit and Loss A/c
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are the extracts of balances of X Co Ltd. in its integrated ledgers as on 1st January 2007.
|
Particulars
|
Debit – Rs.
|
Credit – Rs.
|
|
Stores Control A/c
|
36,000
|
|
|
Work in progress A/c
|
34,000
|
|
|
Finished goods A/c
|
26,000
|
|
|
Cash at bank
|
20,000
|
|
|
Creditors Control A/c
|
|
16,000
|
|
Fixed Assets A/c
|
1,10,000
|
|
|
Debtors Control A/c
|
24,000
|
|
|
Share Capital A/c
|
|
1,60,000
|
|
Depreciation Provision A/c
|
|
10,000
|
|
Profit & Loss A/c
|
|
64,000
|
|
Total
|
2,50,000
|
2,50,000
|
Transactions for the twelve months ended on 31st December 2007 were as follows:
v Direct wages: Rs.1, 74, 000
v Indirect wages: Rs.10, 000
v Stores purchased on credit: Rs.2, 00, 000
v Stores issued to repair order: Rs.4, 000
v Stores issued to production: Rs.2, 20, 000
v Goods finished during the period at cost: Rs.4, 30, 000
v Goods sold at sales value [on credit]: Rs.6, 00, 000
v Goods sold at cost: Rs.4, 40, 000
v Production overhead recovered: Rs.96, 000 #
v Production overheads: Rs.80, 000 #
v Administration overheads: Rs.24, 000 #
v Selling and Distribution overheads: Rs.28, 000 #
v Depreciation [works]: Rs.2, 600
v Payment to suppliers: Rs.2, 02, 000 paid by cheque
v Payments by customers: Rs.5, 80, 000 paid by cheque
v Rates prepaid included in production overheads incurred: Rs.600
v Purchases of fixed assets: Rs.4, 000 #
v Charitable donation: Rs.2, 000 #
v Fines paid: Rs.1, 000 #
v Interest on bank loan: Rs.200 #
v Income Tax: Rs.40, 000 # [Note # indicates paid by cheque]
You are required to write up the accounts in the integral ledger and make out a trial balance. The administration overhead is written off to the Profit and Loss A/c
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a Reconciliation Statement from the following particulars:
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
|
Profit as per cost accounts
|
2, 91, 000
|
|
Works overheads under recovered
|
19, 000
|
|
Administration overheads under recovered
|
45, 500
|
|
Selling overheads over recovered
|
39, 000
|
|
Overvaluation of opening stock in cost accounts
|
30, 000
|
|
Overvaluation of closing stock in cost accounts
|
15, 000
|
|
Interest earned during the year
|
7, 500
|
|
Rent received during the year
|
54, 000
|
|
Bad debts written off during the year
|
18, 000
|
|
Preliminary expenses written off during the year
|
36, 000
|
|
Profit as per financial accounts
|
2,88,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available from the financial books of a company having a normal production capacity of 60, 000 units for the year ended 31st March 2007.
a) Sales Rs.10, 00, 000 [50, 000 units]
b) There was no opening and closing of finished units.
c) Direct material and direct wages cost were Rs.5, 00, 000 and Rs.2, 50, 000 respectively
d) Actual factory expenses were Rs.1, 50, 000 of which 60% are fixed
e) Actual administration expenses were Rs.45, 000, which are completely fixed
f) Actual selling and distribution expenses were Rs.30, 000 out of which, 40% are fixed
g) Interest and dividends received Rs.15, 000.
You are required to,
A. Find out profits as per financial books for the year ended 31st March 2007.
B. Prepare cost sheet and ascertain the profit as per the cost accounts for the year ended 31st March 2007.
C. Prepare a statement reconciling profits shown by financial and cost books.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars, prepare
a] A statement of cost of manufacture for the year,
b] A statement of profit as per cost accounts
c] Profit and Loss Accounts in financial books and,
d] Reconciliation of the difference in the profits as shown by b] and c] above,
|
Opening stock of raw materials:
|
Rs.1, 00, 000
|
|
Closing stock of raw materials:
|
Rs.1, 50, 000
|
|
Opening stock of finished product:
|
Rs.2, 00, 000
|
|
Closing stock of finished product:
|
Rs.50, 000
|
|
Purchases of raw materials:
|
Rs.6, 00, 000
|
|
Wages:
|
Rs.2, 50, 000
|
Charge factory overhead at 25% on prime cost. Office overheads will be levied at 75% on factory overheads. Actual works expenditure amounted to Rs.1, 93, 750 and actual office expenses amounted to Rs.1, 52, 500. The selling price was fixed at 25% above cost price.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following Profit and Loss A/c, prepare a Memorandum Reconciliation Account, showing the profit as per the Cost Accounts.
|
|
Profit And Loss A/c
|
|
|
Debit
|
|
Credit
|
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
|
To office salaries
|
11, 282
|
By gross profit
|
54, 648
|
|
To office expenses
|
6, 514
|
By dividends received
|
400
|
|
To salesmen’s salaries
|
4, 922
|
By interest received
|
150
|
|
To sales expenses
|
9, 304
|
|
|
|
To distribution expenses
|
2, 990
|
|
|
|
To loss on sale of machinery
|
1, 950
|
|
|
|
To fines
|
200
|
|
|
|
To discount on debentures
|
100
|
|
|
|
To net profit
|
17, 936
|
|
|
|
Total
|
55, 198
|
Total
|
55, 198
|
|
To income tax
|
8, 000
|
By net profit
|
17, 936
|
|
To reserve
|
1, 000
|
|
|
|
To dividend
|
4, 000
|
|
|
|
To balance c/d
|
4, 936
|
|
|
|
Total
|
17, 936
|
Total
|
17, 936
|
The Cost Accountant of the company has ascertained a profit of Rs.19, 636 as per his books.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the year ended, 31st March 2007, the profit of a company as per financial Profit and Loss A/c was Rs.33, 248 as given below. Prepare a reconciliation statement and arrive at a profit as per cost accounts using the additional information given.
|
|
Profit and Loss Account
|
|
|
Debit
|
|
Credit
|
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs.
|
|
To opening stock
|
4, 94, 358
|
By sales
|
6, 93, 000
|
|
To purchases
|
1, 64, 308
|
By sundry income
|
632
|
|
Less: Closing stock
|
1, 50, 242
|
|
|
|
|
5, 08, 424
|
|
|
|
To direct wages
|
46, 266
|
|
|
|
To factory overheads
|
41, 652
|
|
|
|
To administrative overheads
|
19, 690
|
|
|
|
To selling expenses
|
44, 352
|
|
|
|
To net profit
|
33, 248
|
|
|
|
Total
|
6, 93, 632
|
Total
|
6, 93, 632
|
The costing records show:
A. Closing stock Rs.1, 56, 394
B. Direct wages absorbed Rs.49, 734
C. Factory overheads absorbed Rs.39, 428
D. Administration expenses calculated @ 3% of sales
E. Selling expenses absorbed @ 5% of sales
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A lodging home is being run in a small hill station with 50 single rooms. The home offers concessional rates during six off season months in a year. During this period, half of the full room rent is charged. The management’s profit margin is targeted at 20% of the room rent. The following are the cost estimates and other details for the year ending on 31st March 2006. [Assume a month to be of 30 days].
I] Occupancy during the season is 80% while in the off season it is 40% only.
II] Expenses:
- Staff salary [Excluding room attendants] Rs.2, 75, 000
- Repairs to building Rs.1, 30, 500
- Laundry and linen: Rs.40, 000
- Interior and tapestry: Rs.87, 500
- Sundry expenses: Rs.95, 400
III] Annual depreciation is to be provided for buildings @ 5% and on furniture and equipments @ 15% on straight line basis.
IV] Room attendants are paid Rs.5 per room day on the basis of occupancy of the rooms in a month.
V] Monthly lighting charges are Rs.120 per room, except in four months in winter when it is Rs.30 per room and this cost is on the basis of full occupancy for a month.
VI] Total investment in the home is Rs.100 lakhs of which Rs.80 lakhs relate to buildings and balance for furniture and equipments. You are required to work out the room rent chargeable per day both during the season and the off season months on the basis of the foregoing information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A transport service company is running five buses between two towns, which are 50 kilometers apart. Seating capacity of each bus is 50 passengers. The following particulars are obtained from their books for April 2007.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Wage of drivers, conductors and cleaners
|
2, 40, 000
|
|
Salaries of office staff
|
1, 00, 000
|
|
Diesel oil and other oil
|
3, 50, 000
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
80, 000
|
|
Taxation, insurance etc.
|
1, 60, 000
|
|
Depreciation
|
2, 60, 000
|
|
Interest and other expenses
|
2, 00, 000
|
|
Total
|
13, 90, 000
|
Actually, passengers carried were 75% of seating capacity. All buses ran on all day of the month. Each bus made one round trip per day.
Find out the cost per passenger kilometer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Transport Company has given a route 40 kilometers long to run bus. The bus costs the company a sum of Rs.1, 00,000. It has been insured at 3% p.a. and the annual tax will amount to Rs.2, 000. Garage rent is Rs.200 per month. Annual repairs will be Rs.2, 000 and the bus is likely to last for 5 years. The driver’s salary will be Rs.300 per month and the conductor’s salary will be Rs.200 per month in addition to 10% of takings as commission [To be shared by the driver and conductor equally].
Cost of stationery will be Rs.100 per month. Manager cum accountant’s salary is Rs.700 per month. Petrol and oil will be Rs.50 per 100 kilometers. The bus will make 3 up and down trips carrying on an average 40 passengers on each trip. Assuming 15% profit on takings, calculate the bus fare to be charged from each passenger. The bus will run on an average 25 days in a month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Viveka Elementary School has a total of 150 students consisting of 5 sections with 30 students per section. The school plans for a picnic around the city during the weekend to places such as zoo, the amusement park, the planetarium etc. A private transport operator has come forward to lease out the buses for taking the students. Each bus will have a maximum capacity of 50 [excluding 2 seats reserved for the teachers accompanying the students]. The school will employ two teachers for each bus, paying them an allowance of Rs.50 per teacher. It will also lease out the required number of buses. The following are the other cost estimates:
Breakfast: Rs.5 per student
Lunch: Rs.10 per student
Tea: Rs.3 per student
Entrance fee at zoo: Rs.2 per student
Rent: Rs.650 per bus
Special permit fees Rs.50 per bus
Block entrance fees at the planetarium Rs.250
Prizes to students for games: Rs.250
No costs are incurred in respect of accompanying teachers. [Except the allowance of Rs.50 per teacher] You are required to prepare a statement showing the total cost and also average cost per student for the levels of 30,60,90,120 and 150 students.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company X is producing 1 00 000 units. The variable cost per unit is Rs.5 and the fixed costs are Rs.5, 00,000. If we work out the total cost per unit, it will be variable cost + fixed cost per unit [at present level of production] that means, the total cost will be Rs.5 + Rs.5 = Rs.10. But as per the technique of marginal costing, the variable cost only i.e. Rs.5, will be charged to the production while the fixed cost of Rs.5, 00, 000 will not be charged to the cost of production, it will be charged to the Costing Profit and Loss Account. Thus the selling price of the product will be fixed on the basis of variable costs of Rs.5 per unit. This may result in charging the price below the total cost but producing and selling a large volume of the product will cover the fixed costs. Suppose, in the above example, selling price is Rs.9, which covers the variable cost but not the total cost, efforts of the company will be to maximize the volume of sales and through the margin between the selling price and variable cost, cover the fixed cost. The difference between the selling price of Rs.10 per unit and the variable cost of Rs.5 per units is the margin, which is called as ‘Contribution”. The contribution margin in this case is Rs.5 per unit. If the company is able to produce and sell, say, 1 50 000 units it will earn a total contribution of Rs.5 ×1 50 000 units = Rs.7, 50, 000 which will cover the fixed costs and earn profit. However if the company is not able to sell sufficient number of units, it will incur a loss. The concept of break even point which is discussed in detail later in this chapter is based on the same calculation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following data compute the profit under a] Marginal costing and b] Absorption costing and reconcile the difference in profits.
|
Selling price per unit:
|
Rs.8
|
|
Variable cost per unit:
|
Rs.4
|
|
Fixed cost per unit:
|
Rs.2
|
Normal volume of production is 26 000 units per quarter.
The opening and closing stocks consisting of both finished goods and equivalent units of work in progress are as follows:
|
Particulars
|
Quarter I
|
Quarter II
|
Quarter III
|
Quarter IV
|
Total
|
|
Opening stock [Units]
|
—
|
—
|
6,000
|
2,000
|
—
|
|
Production [Units]
|
26, 000
|
30, 000
|
24, 000
|
30, 000
|
1, 10,000
|
|
Sales [Units]
|
26, 000
|
24, 000
|
28, 000
|
32, 000
|
1, 10,000
|
|
Closing stock [Units]
|
—
|
6, 000
|
2, 000
|
—
|
—
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Ltd. is manufacturing three products, A, B and C. All the products use the same raw material which is available to the extent of 61 000 kg only. The following information is available from the books and records of the company.
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
Rs.100
|
Rs.140
|
Rs.90
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
Rs.75
|
Rs.110
|
Rs.65
|
|
Raw material requirement per unit [kg]
|
5
|
8
|
6
|
|
Market demand units
|
5000
|
3000
|
4000
|
Advise the company about the most profitable product mix and also compute the amount of profit resulting from such product mix if the fixed costs are Rs.1, 50,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A retail dealer in garments is currently selling 24, 000 shirts annually. He supplies the following details for the year ended 31st March 2007.
Selling price per shirt: Rs.800
Variable cost per shirt: Rs.600
Fixed Cost:
Staff salaries: Rs.24, 00, 000
General Office Cost: Rs.8, 00, 000
Advertising Cost: Rs.8, 00, 000
As a Cost Accountant, you are required to answer the following each part independently:
1. Calculate Break Even Point and margin of safety in sales revenue and number of shirts sold.
2. Assume that 30, 000 shirts were sold during the year, find out the net profit of the firm.
3. Assuming that in the coming year, an additional staff salary of Rs.10, 00, 000 is anticipated, and price of shirt is likely to be increased by 15%, what should be the breakeven point in number of shirts and sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A company sells its products at Rs.15 per unit. In a period, if it produces and sells 8000 units, it incurs a loss of Rs.5 per unit. If the volume is raised to 20 000 units, it earns a profit of Rs.4 per unit. Calculate Break Even Point both in terms of rupees as well as units.
2. A company wants to buy a new machine to replace one, which is having frequent breakdown. It received offers for two models, M1 and M2. Further details regarding these two models are given below
|
Particulars
|
M1
|
M2
|
|
Installed Capacity [Units]
|
10, 000
|
10, 000
|
|
Fixed overheads per annum
|
Rs.2, 40,000
|
Rs.1, 00,000
|
|
Estimated profit at the above capacity
|
Rs.1, 60,000
|
Rs.1, 00,000
|
The product manufactured using this type of machine, M1 or M2, is sold at Rs.100 per unit. You are required to determine,
1. Break Even level of sales for each model.
2. The level of sales at which both the models will earn the same profit.
3. The model suitable for different levels of demand for the product.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute a conservative estimate of profit on a contract [80% complete] from the following particulars. Illustrate at least four methods of computing the profit.
|
Particulars
|
Amount [Rs.]
|
|
Total expenditure to date
|
1, 02,000
|
|
Estimated further expenditure to complete the contract
|
20, 400
|
|
[including contingencies]
|
|
|
Contract price
|
1, 83,600
|
|
Work certified
|
1, 20,000
|
|
Work uncertified
|
10, 200
|
|
Cash received
|
97, 920
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
M/s New Century Builders have entered into a contract to build an office building complex for Rs.480 lakhs. The work started in April 1997 and it is estimated that the contract will take 15 months to be completed. Work has progressed as per schedule and the actual costs charged till March 1998 was as follows.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.in lakhs
|
|
Materials
|
112.20
|
|
Labor
|
162.00
|
|
Hire charges for equipment and other expenses
|
36.00
|
|
Establishment charges
|
32.40
|
The following information are available:
|
Particulars
|
Amount – Rs. in lakhs
|
|
Material in hand 31st March 1998
|
10.50
|
|
Work certified [of which Rs.324 lakhs have been paid] as on 31st March 1998
|
400.00
|
|
Work not certified as on 31st March 1998
|
7.50
|
As per Management estimates, the following further expenditure will be incurred to complete the work.
Materials: Rs.10.50 lakhs
Labor: Rs.16.00 lakhs
Sub contractor: Rs.20.00 lakhs
Equipments hire and other charges: Rs.3.00 lakhs
Establishment charges: Rs.6.90 lakhs
You are required to compute the value of work in progress as on March 31st, 1998 after considering a reasonable margin of profit and show the appropriate accounts. Make a provision for contingencies amounting to 5% of the total costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Deluxe Ltd. undertook a contract for Rs.5,00,000 as on 1st July 2006. On 30th June 2007, when the accounts were closed, the following details about the contract were gathered.
|
Particulars
|
Amount
|
|
|
Rs.’000s
|
|
Materials purchased
|
100
|
|
Wages paid
|
45
|
|
General expenses
|
10
|
|
Plant purchased
|
50
|
|
Materials on hand on 30th June 2007
|
25
|
|
Wages accrued on 30th June 2007
|
5
|
|
Work certified
|
200
|
|
Cash received
|
150
|
|
Work uncertified
|
15
|
|
Depreciation of plant
|
5
|
The above contract contained an escalation clause which read as follows.
‘In the event of materials and rates of wages increase by more than 5% the contract price would be increased accordingly by 25% of the rise in the cost of materials and wages beyond 5% in each case’.
It was found that since the date of signing the agreement, the prices of materials and wage rates increased by 25%. The value of work certified does not take into account the effects of the above clause. Prepare Contract Account. Working should form part of your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Construction Ltd. is engaged in two contracts, A and B during the year. Following information is available at the year end.
|
Particulars
|
Contract A Rs.
|
Contract B Rs.
|
|
Date of commencement
|
April 1st
|
September 1st
|
|
Contract price
|
6,00,000
|
5,00,000
|
|
Materials delivered direct to site
|
1,20,000
|
50,000
|
|
Materials issued from store
|
40,000
|
10,000
|
|
Materials returned to store
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Material on site on December 31st
|
22,000
|
8,000
|
|
Direct labor payments
|
1,40,000
|
35,000
|
|
Direct expenses
|
60,000
|
30,000
|
|
Architect’s fees
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Establishment charges
|
25,000
|
7,000
|
|
Plant installed at cost
|
80,000
|
70,000
|
|
Value of plant on 31st December
|
65,000
|
64,000
|
|
Accrued wages 31st December
|
10,000
|
7,000
|
|
Accrued expenses 31st December
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
Cost of contract not certified by architect
|
23,000
|
10,000
|
|
Value of contract certified by architect
|
4,20,000
|
1,35,000
|
|
Cash received from contractor
|
3,78,000
|
1,25,000
|
During the period, materials amounting to Rs.9, 000 have been transferred from contract A to contract B. You are required to show,
[a] Contract A/c, Contractee A/c and
[b] Extract from the Balance Sheet as on 31st December showing the calculation of WIP
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company undertook a contract for construction of a large building complex. The construction work commenced on 1st April 2005 and the following data are available for the year ended on 31st March 2006.
|
Particulars
|
Amount
|
|
|
Rs.000s
|
|
Contract price
|
35,000
|
|
Work certified
|
20,000
|
|
Progress payment received
|
15,000
|
|
Materials issued to site
|
7,500
|
|
Planning and estimating costs
|
1,000
|
|
Direct wages paid
|
4,000
|
|
Materials returned from site
|
250
|
|
Plant hire charges
|
1,750
|
|
Wages related costs
|
500
|
|
Site office costs
|
678
|
|
Head office expenses apportioned
|
375
|
|
Direct expenses incurred
|
902
|
|
Work not certified
|
149
|
| |
|
|
The contractors own a plant which originally cost Rs.20 lakhs has been continuously in use in this contract throughout the year. The residual value of the plant after 5 years of life is expected to be Rs.5 lakhs. Straight line method of depreciation is in use. As on 31st March 2006, the direct wages due and payable amounted to Rs.2, 70, 000 and the materials at site were estimated at Rs.2, 00,000.
Required:
[a] Prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st March 2006
[b] Show the calculation of profits to be taken to the Profit and Loss A/c of the year
[c] Show the relevant Balance Sheet entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prabhu Builders Ltd. commenced work on 1st April 2005 on a contract of which the agreed price was Rs. 5 lakhs. The following expenditure was incurred during the year up to 31st March 2006.
|
Particulars
|
Amount Rs.
|
|
Wages
|
1, 40, 000
|
|
Plant
|
35, 000
|
|
Materials
|
1, 05, 000
|
|
Head office expenses
|
12, 500
|
Materials costing Rs.10, 000 proved unsuitable and were sold for Rs.11, 500 and a part of plant was scrapped and sold for Rs.1, 700. Of the contract price Rs.2, 40, 000 representing 80% of work certified had been received by 31st March 2006 and on that date the value of the plant on the job was Rs.8, 000 and the value of materials was Rs. 3, 000. The cost of work done but not certified was Rs.25, 000. It was decided to [a] Estimate what further expenditure would be incurred in completing the contract.
[b] Compute from the estimate and the expenditure already incurred, the total profit that would be made on the contract and [c] Ascertain the amount of profit to be taken to the credit of Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on 31st March 2006. While taking profit to the credit of Profit and Loss A/c, that portion of the total profit should be taken which the value of work certified bears to the contract price. Details of the estimates are given below.
i. That the contract would be completed by 30th September 2006
ii. The wages to complete would amount Rs.84, 750
iii. That materials in addition to those in stock on 31st March 2006 would cost Rs.50, 000
iv. That further Rs.15, 000 would have to be spent on plant and the residual value of the plant on 30th September 2006 would be Rs.6, 000
v. The head office expenses to the contract would be at the same annual rate as in 2005 06.
vi. That claims, temporary maintenance and contingencies would require Rs.9, 000
Prepare contract account for the year ended 31st March 2006 and show your calculations of the sum to be credited to Profit and Loss A/c for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product A is a product produced after three distinct processes. The following information is obtained from the accounts of the company for a particular period.
|
Particulars
|
Total Amount Rs.
|
Process I Rs
|
Process II Rs
|
Process III Rs
|
|
Direct Material
|
2,200
|
1,800
|
300
|
100
|
|
Direct Labor
|
400
|
100
|
200
|
100
|
|
Direct Expenses
|
500
|
300
|
––
|
200
|
Production overheads are incurred Rs.800 and is recovered at 200% of direct wages. Production during the period was 100 kg. There was no opening or closing stock. Prepare Process Accounts assuming that there is no process loss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product B is obtained after it passes through three distinct processes. The following information is obtained from the accounts for the week ending on 31st March 2006
|
Particulars
|
Total Amount
|
Process I
|
Process II
|
Process III
|
|
Direct material
|
Rs. 7,542
|
Rs. 2,600
|
Rs. 1,980
|
Rs. 2,962
|
|
Direct wages
|
Rs. 9,000
|
Rs. 2,000
|
Rs. 3,000
|
Rs. 4,000
|
|
Production overheads
|
Rs.9,000
|
|
|
|
1,000 units @ Rs. 3 each were introduced in Process I. There was no stock of materials or work in progress at the beginning or at the end of the period. The output of each process passes direct to next process and finally to finished store. Production overheads are recovered on 100% of direct wages. The following additional data are obtained.
|
Particulars
|
Output during the week
|
% of normal loss to input
|
Value of scrap per unit
|
|
Process I
|
950 units
|
5%
|
Rs. 2
|
|
Process II
|
840 units
|
10%
|
Rs. 4
|
|
Process III
|
750 units
|
15%
|
Rs. 5
|
Prepare Process Cost Accounts and Abnormal Loss and Abnormal Gain Account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A product passes through two processes A and B. Prepare the process accounts from the following details.
|
Particulars
|
Process A
|
Process B
|
|
10, 000 units introduced at a cost Rs.
|
20,000
|
—
|
|
Materials consumed Rs.
|
24,000
|
12,000
|
|
Direct labor Rs.
|
28,000
|
16,000
|
|
Manufacturing expenses Rs.
|
8,000
|
8,566
|
|
Normal wastages on input
|
5%
|
10%
|
|
Scrap value of normal wastage Rs. Per 100 units
|
40
|
50
|
|
Output [units]
|
9,400
|
8,500
|
Also prepare the abnormal wastage/effective account as the case may be with each process account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A material used for building is produced in three grades. The following information is available.
|
Particulars
|
Process I – Rs.
|
Process II – Rs.
|
Process III – Rs.
|
|
Raw material used [1000 tons]
|
1, 00, 000
|
—
|
—
|
|
Wages
|
87, 500
|
39, 500
|
10, 710
|
|
Weight lost [% of input]
|
5%
|
10%
|
20%
|
|
Scrap [sales price of Rs.50 per ton]
|
50 tons
|
30 tons
|
51 tons
|
|
Sale price per ton of finished goods
|
Rs.350
|
Rs.500
|
Rs.800
|
Management expenses were Rs.17,500 and selling expenses Rs.10,000. 2/3rd of output of process I and 50% of the output of process II is passed to the next process and remaining is sold. The entire output of process III is sold. Prepare Process Accounts and Statement of Profit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare necessary accounts from the following details.
|
Particulars
|
Process I
|
Process II
|
|
Materials – Rs.
|
30,000
|
3,000
|
|
Labor – Rs.
|
10,000
|
12,000
|
|
Overheads – Rs.
|
7,000
|
8,600
|
|
Input [Units]
|
20,000
|
—
|
|
Transfer from Process I [Units]
|
|
17,500
|
|
Normal loss
|
10%
|
4%
|
|
Sales value of wastage per unit – Rs.
|
Re.1
|
Rs.2
|
There was no opening or closing stock or work in progress
The final output from Process II was 17, 000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
AB Ltd is engaged in the process engineering industry. During the month, October 2007, 2000 units were introduced in process ‘X’. The normal loss is estimated at 5% of input. At the end of the month, 1400 units had been produced and transferred to process ‘Y’, 460 were incomplete units, and 140 units had to be scrapped at the end of the process. The incomplete units reached the following degree of completion:
Material: 75%, Labor: 50%, overheads: 50%
Following are the further details regarding process X.
Cost of 2000 units introduced: Rs. 58,000
Additional material consumed Rs. 14,400
Direct labor: Rs. 33,400
Allocated overheads: Rs. 16,700
Note: The scrapped units fetched Rs.10 each.
Required: [As per First In First Out Method]
A] Statement of equivalent production
B] Statement of cost
C] Statement of evaluation
D] Process ‘X’ Account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars, prepare the following in the books of X Ltd.
I] Statement of equivalent production
II] Statement of apportionment of cost
III] Process Account
A] Opening stock as on 1st August: 200 units @ Rs. 4 per unit
B] Degree of completion: Materials 100%, Labor and Overheads: 40%
C] Units introduced during August: 1,050 units
D] Output transferred to the next process: 1,100 units
E] Closing stock: 150 units
F] Degree of completion: Materials 100%, Labor and Overheads: 70%
G] Other relevant information regarding the process,
|
Materials:
|
Rs.3,150
|
|
Labor:
|
Rs.4,500
|
|
Overheads:
|
Rs.2,250
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vinal Ltd. produces Article B from a material, which passes through two processes, namely P and Q. The details relating to a month are as under,
|
Particulars
|
Process P
|
Process Q
|
|
Materials introduced units
|
10,000
|
|
|
Transferred to next process
|
9,000
|
|
|
Work in progress: At the beginning of the
|
|
|
|
month – units
|
|
600
|
|
At the end of the month units
|
|
400
|
|
Expenses: Work in progress – beginning of the month
|
|
|
|
Materials introduced at the beginning of the month
|
Rs. 1,20,000
|
Rs. 9,400
|
|
Labor and overheads:
|
Rs. 27,600
|
Rs. 18,200
|
Stage of completion of work in progress:
Process P: Closing work in progress 20% complete in respect of labor and overheads
Process Q: Opening work in progress 331/3% complete in respect of labor and overheads
Closing work in progress 25% complete in respect of labor and overheads
The finished output B, emerging out of Process Q is sold for Rs. 20 per unit
The management is considering an alternative by which the finished output B could be further processed by installing a new machine at a capital cost of Rs. 8 lakhs. In such an event, the final product known as article N produced by this operation could be sold at Rs. 25 per unit. The operating expenses of the aforesaid further treatment are estimated at Rs. 23, 000. The company desires a return on investment of 25%
Required:
I] Prepare the process cost accounts for Process P and Q [Show the working of equivalent units and cost per equivalent unit in each process according to FIFO method]
II] Prepare a statement of profitability of Product B as it emerges from Process Q
III] Advise the management whether further treatment of Product B by installing the new machine should be taken up or not.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following information is available regarding Process A for the month of August 2007
Production Record:
v Units in process as on 1st August: 4,000 [All materials used, 25% complete for labor and overheads]
v New units introduced: 16, 000
v Units completed: 14, 000
v Units in process as on 31st August 2007: 6,000 [All materials used, 331/3% complete for labor and overheads]
Cost Records:
v Work in process as on 1st August 2007
v Materials: Rs.6,000
v Labor: Rs.1,000
v Overheads: Rs.1,000
Cost during the month:
v Materials: Rs. 25, 600
v Labor: Rs.15, 000
v Overheads: Rs.15, 000
Presuming that Average Method of inventory is used, prepare,
I] Statement of equivalent production
II] Statement showing cost for each element
III] Statement of apportionment of cost
IV] Process Account
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is given in respect of Process No.3 for the month of January 2001.
|
Opening stock: 2000 units made of,
|
|
Direct Material I:
|
Rs.12, 350
|
|
Direct Material II:
|
Rs.13, 200
|
|
Direct Labor:
|
Rs.17, 500
|
|
Overheads:
|
Rs.11, 000
|
Transferred from Process No.2: 20, 000 units @ Rs.6 per unit
Transferred to Process No.4: 17, 000 units
Expenditure incurred in Process No.3:
Direct Materials: Rs.30, 000
Direct Labor: Rs.60, 000
Overheads: Rs.60, 000
Scrap: 1, 000 units: Degree of completion: Direct Materials. 100%, Direct Labor: 60%, Overheads. 40%, normal loss 10% of production
Scrapped units realized @ Rs. 4 per unit.
Closing stock: 4,000 units, degree of completion: Direct Materials 80%, Direct Labor 60% and overheads 40%
Prepare Process 3 A/c using average price method, along with necessary supporting statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following are the details in respect of Process X and Process Y of a processing factory.
|
Particulars
|
Process X Rs.
|
Process Y Rs.
|
|
Material
|
10, 000
|
|
|
Labor
|
10, 000
|
14, 000
|
|
Overheads
|
4, 000
|
10, 000
|
The output of Process X is transferred to Process Y at a price calculated to give a profit of 20% on the transfer price and the output of Process Y is charged to finished stock at a profit of 25% on the transfer price. The finished department realized Rs.1, 00, 000 for the finished goods received from Process Y.You are required to prepare Process Account and show the total profits assuming that there was no opening and no closing work in progress.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A certain product passes through three processes before it is completed. The output of each process is charged to next process at a price calculated to give a profit of 20% on transfer price.[i.e. 25% on the cost price] The output of Process III is charged to finished goods stock account on a similar basis. There was no work in progress at the beginning of the year and overheads had been ignored. Stocks in each process have been valued at prime cost of the processes.
The following data are obtained at the end of December 2007
|
Particulars
|
Process I Rs.
|
Process II Rs.
|
Process III Rs.
|
Finished Stock Rs
|
|
Direct Material
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
40,000
|
|
|
Direct Wages
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
|
|
Stock as on 31st December
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
30,000
|
|
Sales during the year
|
—
|
—
|
—
|
1,70,000
|
From the above information prepare,
[a] Process cost accounts showing the profit element at each stage
[b] Actual realized profit
[c] Stock valuation as would appear in the Balance Sheet
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Process cost system is not applicable to paper mills and textile mills.
2. In process costing, cost unit is a process.
3. Normal loss in a process is not avoidable.
4. Normally normal loss in a process is borne by good units while abnormal loss is valued and is shown in the process accounts.
5. In process costing, costs are compiled process wise.
6. Process costing is generally used in small scale industries.
7. Normal loss is finally transferred to the Costing Profit and Loss Account.
8. Equivalent units are computed when some units remain incomplete at the end of a particular period.
9. Waste does not have any realizable market value.
10. In process costing, cost per unit is the average cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
X Ltd. manufactures Product A, which yields two by products B and C. The actual joint expenses of manufacture for a period were Rs.8, 000. It was estimated that the profits on each product as a percentage of sales would be 30%, 25% and 15% respectively. Subsequent expenses were as follows:
|
Particulars
|
Product A
|
Product B
|
Product C
|
|
Materials
|
Rs.100
|
Rs.75
|
Rs.25
|
|
Direct wages
|
200
|
125
|
50
|
|
Overheads
|
150
|
125
|
75
|
|
Total
|
450
|
325
|
150
|
|
Sales
|
Rs. 6,000
|
Rs. 4,000
|
Rs. 2,500
|
Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of the joint expenses of manufacture over the different products. Also presume that selling expenses are apportioned over the products as a percentage to sales.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are selling two goods, 1 and 2, to a market consisting of three consumers with reservation prices as follows:
|
Reservation Price($)
|
|
Consumer
|
For 1
|
For 2
|
|
A
|
20
|
100
|
|
B
|
60
|
60
|
|
C
|
100
|
20
|
The unit cost of each product is $30.
a. Compute the optimal prices and profits for (i) selling the goods separately, (ii) pure bundling, and (iii) mixed bundling.
b. Which strategy would be most profitable? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your firm produces two products, the demands for which are independent. Both products are produced at zero marginal cost. You face four consumers (or groups of consumers) with the following reservation prices:
|
Consumer
|
Good1($)
|
Good2($)
|
|
A
|
25
|
100
|
|
B
|
40
|
80
|
|
C
|
80
|
40
|
|
D
|
100
|
25
|
a. Consider three alternative pricing strategies:
(i) selling the goods separately;
(ii) pure bundling;
(ill) mixed bundling. For each strategy, determine the
optimal prices to be charged and the resulting profits.
Which strategy would be best? b. Now suppose that the production of each good entails a marginal cost of $30. How does this information change your answers to (a)? Why is the optimal strategy now different?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ajax Computer makes a computer for climate control in office buildings. The company uses a microprocessor produced by its upstream division, along with other parts bought in outside competitive markets. The microprocessor is produced at a constant marginal cost of $500, and the marginal cost of assembling the computer (including the cost of the other parts) by the downstream division is a constant $700. The firm has been selling the computer for $2000, and until now there has been no outside market for the microprocessor.
a. Suppose an outside market for the microprocessor develops and that Ajax has monopoly power in that market, selling microprocessors for $1000 each. Assuming that demand for the microprocessor is unrelated to the demand for the Ajax computer, what transfer price should Ajax apply to the microprocessor for its use by the downstream computer division? Should production of computers be increased, decreased, or left unchanged? Explain briefly.
b. How would your answer to (a) change if the demands for the computer and the microprocessors were competitive; i.e., if some of the people who buy the microprocessors use them to make climate control systems of their own?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reebok produces and sells running shoes. It faces a market demand schedule P = 11 1.5Qs” where Qs is the number of pairs of shoes sold and P is the price in dollars per pair of shoes. Production of each pair of shoes requires 1 square yard of leather. The leather is shaped and cut by the Form Division of Reebok. The cost function for leather is
TLc=1+QL+0.5Q2L
where QL is the quantity of leather (in square yards) produced. Excluding leather, the cost function for running shoes is
a. What is the optimal transfer price?
b. Leather can be bought and sold in a competitive market at the price of PF = 1.5. In this case, how much leather should the Form Division supply internally? How much should it supply to the outside market? Will Reebok buy any leather in the outside market? Find the optimal transfer price.
c. Now suppose the leather is unique and of extremely high quality. Therefore, the Form Division may act as a monopoly supplier to the outside market as well as a supplier to the downstream division. Suppose the outside demand for leather is given by P = 32 QL. What is the optimal transfer price for the use of leather by the downstream division? At what price, if any, should leather be sold to the outside market? What quantity, if any, will be sold to the outside market?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The House Products Division of Acme Corporation manufactures and sells digital clock radios. A major component is supplied by the electronics division of Acme. The cost functions for the radio and the electronic component divisions are, respectively,
TCr = 30 + 2Qr
TCe = 70 + 6Qc+ Qc2
Note that TCr does not include the cost of the component. Manufacture of one radio set requires the use of one electronic component. Market studies show that the firm”s demand curve for the digital clock radio is given by
Pr= 108 Qr
b. If other firms are willing to purchase in the outside market the component manufactured by the electronics division (which is the only supplier of this product), what is the optimal transfer price? Why? What price should be charged in the outside market? Why? How many units will the electronics division supply internally and to the outside market? Why? (Note: The demand for components in the outside market is Pc=72 1.5Qc)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
From the following particulars in respect of a material, compute the Economic Ordering Quantity by preparing a table.
|
Ordering Quantities
|
Price Per Kg. [Rs.]
|
|
Less than 250
|
6.00
|
|
250 and less than 800
|
5.90
|
|
800 and less than 2000
|
5.80
|
|
2000 and less than 4000
|
5.70
|
|
4000 and above
|
5.60
|
The annual demand for the material is 4000 kg. Stock holding costs are 20% of the material cost per annum. The ordering and receiving costs are Rs.10 per order.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is the summary of the receipts and issues of material in a factory during December 2007. Prepare Store Ledger according to First In First Out Method.
December 2007
1. Opening balance 500 units @ Rs.25 per unit
3. Issue 70 units
4. Issue 100 units
8. Issue 80 units
13. Received from supplier 200 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit
14. Returned to store 15 units @ Rs.24 per unit
16. Issue 180 units.
20. Received from supplier 240 units @ Rs.24.75 per unit
24. Issue 304 units.
25. Received from supplier 320 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit
26. Issue 112 units
27. Returned to store 12 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit
28. Received from supplier 100 units @ Rs.25 per unit
It was revealed that on 15th there was a shortage of five units and another on 27th of 8 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following transactions in respect of Material Y occurred during the six months ended 30th June 2007.
|
Month
|
Purchased [Units]
|
Price Per Unit Rs.
|
Issued [Units]
|
|
January
|
200
|
25
|
Nil
|
|
February
|
300
|
24
|
250
|
|
March
|
425
|
26
|
300
|
|
April
|
475
|
23
|
550
|
|
May
|
500
|
25
|
800
|
|
June
|
600
|
20
|
400
|
Required: The Chief Accountant argues that the value of closing stock remains the same, no matter which method of pricing of material issues is used. Do you agree? Why or why not? Detailed Stores Ledgers are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC Ltd. provides you the following information. Calculate the cost of goods sold and ending inventory applying the Last In First Out method of pricing raw materials under the Perpetual Inventory and Periodic Inventory Control System.
|
Date
|
Particulars
|
Units
|
Per Unit Cost Rs.
|
|
January 1
|
Opening Stock
|
200
|
10
|
|
January 10
|
Purchases
|
400
|
12
|
|
January 12
|
Withdrawals
|
500
|
|
|
January 16
|
Purchases
|
300
|
11
|
|
January 19
|
Issues
|
200
|
|
|
January 30
|
Receipts
|
100
|
15
|
Also explain the difference in profits if any.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of XYZ Ltd. is worried about the increasing labor turnover in the factory and before analyzing the causes and taking remedial steps, they want to have an idea of the profit foregone as a result of labor turnover during the last year.
Last years sales amounted to Rs.83, 03, 300 and the profit/volume ratio was 20%. The total number of actual hours worked by the direct labor force was 4.45 lakhs. As a result of the delays by the Personnel department in filling vacancies due to labor turnover, 1, 00, 000 potentially productive hours were lost. The actual direct labor hours included 30, 000 hours attributable to training new recruits, out of which, half of the hours were unproductive.
The cost incurred consequent on labor turnover revealed, on analysis the following.
Settlement cost due to leaving: Rs.43, 820
Recruitment costs: Rs.26, 740
Selection costs: Rs.12, 750
Training costs: Rs.30, 490
Assuming that the potential production lost as a consequence of labor turnover could have been sold at prevailing prices, find the profit foregone last year on account of labor turnover.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculate the normal and overtime wages payable to a workman from the following data.
|
Days
|
Hours Worked
|
|
Monday
|
08
|
|
Tuesday
|
10
|
|
Wednesday
|
9
|
|
Thursday
|
11
|
|
Friday
|
9
|
|
Saturday
|
4
|
|
Total
|
51
|
Normal working hours – 8 hours per day
Normal rate per hour – Rs.20.
Overtime rate: up to 9 hours in a day at single rate and over 9 hours at double rate or up to 48 hours in a week at single rate and over 48 hours at double rate whichever is more beneficial to the workman.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.A worker takes 6 hours to complete a job under a scheme of payment by results. The standard time allowed for the job is 9 hours. His wage rate is Rs.15 per hour. Material cost of the job is Rs.120 and the overheads are recovered at 15% of the total direct wages. Calculate the factory cost of job under A] Rowan and B] Halsey system of incentive system.
2. Calculate the earnings of workers A, B and C under the Straight Piece Rate System and Merrick’s Differential Piece Rate System from the following particulars.
Normal rate per hour: Rs.5.40
Standard time per unit: 1 minute
Output per day is as follows.
Worker A – 390 units
Worker B – 450 units
Worker C – 600 units.
Working hours per day are 8
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The standard hours for job X is 100 hours. The job has been completed by Amar in 60 hours, Akbar in 70 hours and Anthony in 95 hours. The bonus system applicable to the job is as follows.
|
Percentage of time saved to time allowed
|
Bonus
|
|
Saving up to 10%
|
10% of time saved
|
|
From 11% to 20%
|
15% of time saved
|
|
From 21% to 40%
|
20% of time saved
|
|
From 41% to 100%
|
25% of time saved
|
The rate of pay is Rs.10 per hour. Calculate the total earnings of each worker and also the rate of earnings per hour.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The existing incentive system of a certain factory is,
Normal working week: 5 days of 9 hours each plus 3 late shifts of 3 hours each
Rate of payment: Day work – Rs.10 per hour, late shift – Rs.15 per hour
Additional hours payable: Rs.25 per day shift, Rs.15 per late shift
Average output per operative for 54 hours week, i.e. including 3 late shifts: 120 articles In order to increase output and eliminate overtime it was decided to switch on to a system of payment by results. The following information is obtained.
Time rate [as usual] Rs.10 per hour
Basic time allowed for 15 articles: 5 hours
Piecework rate: Add 20% to price
Premium bonus: Add 50% to time
You are required to work out,
[I] Hours worked
[II] Weekly earnings
[III] Number of articles produced and
[IV] Labor cost per article for an operative under the following systems
v Existing time rate
v Straight piece rate
v Rowan plan
Halsey plan
Assume that 135 articles are produced in a 45 hours week under straight piece rate, Rowan plan and Halsey plan. The additional bonus under the existing system will be discontinued in the proposed incentive scheme.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Ltd. has introduced a Scanlon plan of incentive bonus for its employees from the year 2006 07. The relevant information for three previous years is as follows.
|
Year
|
Sales Revenue Rs.
|
Total Salaries and Wages Rs
|
|
2003 04
|
2, 40, 000
|
72, 000
|
|
2004 05
|
2, 50, 000
|
70, 000
|
|
2005 06
|
2, 70, 000
|
86, 400
|
For the year 2006 07, the sales revenue has been Rs.3, 25, 000 and the total salaries and wages paid Rs.90, 000. What is the amount due to employees under Scanlon Plan? If 50% is set aside in the bonus equalization reserve fund, how much money is to be paid out for 2006 07 as Scanlon Bonus?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company uses an old method of machining a part manufactured for sale. The estimates of operating details for the year 2005 06 are given below.
Number of parts to be manufactured and sold: 30, 000
Raw materials required per part: 10 kg @ Rs.2 per kg
Average wage rate per worker: Rs.40 per day of 8 hours
Average labor efficiency: 60%
Standard time required to manufacture one part: 2 hours
Overhead rate: Rs.10 per clock hour
Material handling expenses: 2% of the value of raw material.
The company has a suggestion box scheme and an award equivalent to three months saving in labor cost is passed on to the employee whose suggestion is accepted. In response to this scheme suggestion has been received from an employee to use a special Jig in the manufacture of the aforesaid part. The cost of the Jig, which has life of one year is Rs.30, 000 and the use of the Jig will reduce the standard time by 12 minutes.
Required:
[a] Compute the amount of award payable to the employee who has given the suggestion.
[b] Prepare a statement showing the annual cost of production before and after the implementation of the suggestion to use the Jig and indicate the annual saving.
[c] State the assumptions on which your calculations are based.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Management of a manufacturing unit is considering extensive modernization of the factory through progressive mechanization, which would result in improved productivity and reduced strength. Through negotiations with the union, it was agreed that for every 1% increase in productivity, workers would be paid 0.5% incentive wages. It was also agreed that through voluntary retirement the staff strength would be reduced to 300 from the present level of 400. The following further comparative data are available before and after the proposed mechanization.
|
Particulars
|
Before mechanization
|
After mechanization
|
|
Number of articles produced per month
|
50, 000
|
48, 000
|
|
Fringe benefits: 50% of wages
|
|
|
|
Wages paid per month: Rs.4, 00, 000
|
|
|
|
Sales per month: [value] Rs.24, 00, 000
|
|
|
|
Profit/volume ratio: 25%
|
|
|
Based on the above data, you are required to work out the annual financial implications of the proposal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Indicate whether the following statements are True or False.
1. Incentive systems benefit only workers
2. There is no difference between direct and indirect labor.
3. Under Halsey plan, the benefit of time saved is given equally to workers and the management.
4. Under the high wages plan, workers are paid normal wages plus bonus.
5. Normally overtime wages are paid at the double rate as compared to normal rate.
6. Taylor’s differential piece rate plan assures minimum wages to workers.
7. Time keeping and time booking are one and the same.
8. Time booking is not necessary in case of piece workers.
9. Cost of idle time due to labor strike should be treated as overheads.
10. Time booking is done by the time keeper at the factory gate.
11. The purpose of work measurement is to determine the standard time for doing a task.
12. Cost of normal idle time should be treated as overheads.
13. Payroll sheets are prepared by Payroll Department.
14. Time booking means recording of attendance time.
15. Earnings under Halsey and Rowan Plan are the same.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A factory uses a job costing system. The following data are available from the books at the year ending on 31st March 2007.
|
Particulars
|
Amount [Rs]
|
|
Direct Materials
|
180,0000
|
|
Direct Wages
|
150,0000
|
|
Profit
|
121,8000
|
|
Selling and Distribution Overheads
|
105,0000
|
|
Administrative Overheads
|
84,0000
|
|
Factory Overheads
|
90,0000
|
Required:
A. Prepare a job cost sheet showing the prime cost, works cost, production cost, cost of sales and sales value.
B. In the year 2007 08, the factory has received an order for a number of jobs. It is estimated that the direct materials would be Rs.240,0000 and direct labor would cost Rs.150,0000. What would be the price for these jobs if the factory intends to earn the same rate of profit on sales, assuming that the selling and distribution overheads have gone up by 15%. The factory recovers factory overhead as a percentage of direct wages and administrative and selling and distribution overhead as a percentage of works cost, based on the cost rates prevalent in the previous year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information for the year ended on 31st March 2007 is obtained from the books and records of a manufacturing company
|
Particulars
|
Completed Jobs Rs.
|
Work In Progress Rs
|
|
Raw material supplied from stores
|
88,000
|
32,000
|
|
Wages
|
1,00,000
|
40,000
|
|
Chargeable expenses
|
10,000
|
4,000
|
|
Material returned to stores
|
1,000
|
|
Factory overheads are 80% of wages. Office overheads are 25% of factory cost and selling and distribution overheads are 10% of cost of production. The completed jobs realized Rs.4, 10,000.
Prepare: Work in Progress Ledger Control Account, Completed Job Ledger Control Account and Cost of Sales Account
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Home Decor Company’s management is trying to decide whether to eliminate Department 200, which has produced losses or low profits for several years. The company’s 2011 departmental income statement shows the following.
|
HOME DECOR COMPANY
Departmental Income Statements
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
|
Dept. 100
|
Dept. 200
|
Combined
|
|
Sales
|
$872,000
|
$580,000
|
$1,452,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
524,000
|
414,000
|
938,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
348,000
|
166,000
|
514,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Direct expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising
|
34,000
|
24,000
|
58,000
|
|
Store supplies used
|
8,000
|
7,600
|
15,600
|
|
Depreciation—Store equipment
|
10,000
|
6,600
|
16,600
|
|
Total direct expenses
|
52,000
|
38,200
|
90,200
|
|
Allocated expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Sales salaries
|
130,000
|
78,000
|
208,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
18,880
|
9,440
|
28,320
|
|
Bad debts expense
|
19,800
|
16,200
|
36,000
|
|
Office salary
|
37,440
|
24,960
|
62,400
|
|
Insurance expense
|
4,000
|
2,200
|
6,200
|
|
Miscellaneous office expenses
|
4,800
|
3,200
|
8,000
|
|
Total allocated expenses
|
214,920
|
134,000
|
348,920
|
|
Total expenses
|
266,920
|
172,200
|
439,120
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
$ 81,080
|
$ (6,200)
|
$ 74,880
|
In analyzing whether to eliminate Department 200, management considers the following:
a. The company has one office worker who earns $1,200 per week, or $62,400 per year, and four salesclerks who each earn $1,000 per week, or $52,000 per year.
b. The full salaries of two salesclerks are charged to Department 100. The full salary of one salesclerk is charged to Department 200. The salary of the fourth clerk, who works half time in both departments, is divided evenly between the two departments.
c. Eliminating Department 200 would avoid the sales salaries and the office salary currently allocated to it. However, management prefers another plan. Two salesclerks have indicated that they will be quitting soon. Management believes that their work can be done by the other two clerks if the one office worker works in sales half time. Eliminating Department 200 will allow this shift of duties. If this change is implemented, half the office worker’s salary would be reported as sales salaries and half would be reported as office salary.
d. The store building is rented under a long term lease that cannot be changed. Therefore, Department 100 will use the space and equipment currently used by Department 200.
e. Closing Department 200 will eliminate its expenses for advertising, bad debts, and store supplies; 70% of the insurance expense allocated to it to cover its merchandise inventory; and 25% of the miscellaneous office expenses presently allocated to it.
Required
1. Prepare a three column report that lists items and amounts for (a) the company’s total expenses (including cost of goods sold) — in column 1, (b) the expenses that would be eliminated by closing Department 200 — in column 2, and (c) the expenses that will continue — in column 3.
2. Prepare a forecasted annual income statement for the company reflecting the elimination of Department 200 assuming that it will not affect Department 100’s sales and gross profit. The statement should reflect the reassignment of the office worker to one half time as a salesclerk.
3. Reconcile the company’s combined net income with the forecasted net income assuming that Department 200 is eliminated (list both items and amounts). Analyze the reconciliation and explain why you think the department should or should not be eliminated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Concorde Company is planning to add a new product to its line. To manufacture this product, the company needs to buy a new machine at a $100,000 cost with an expected five year life and a $25,000 salvage value. All sales are for cash and all costs are out of pocket, except for depreciation on the new machine. Additional information includes the following.
|
Expected annual sales of new product
|
$350,000
|
|
Expected annual costs of new product
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
150,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
50,000
|
|
Overhead excluding straight line depreciation on new machine
|
100,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
23,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
20%
|
Required
1. Compute straight line depreciation for each year of this new machine’s life. (Round depreciation amounts to the nearest dollar.)
2. Determine expected net income and net cash flow for each year of this machine’s life. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
3. Compute this machine’s payback period, assuming that cash flows occur evenly throughout each year.
(Round the payback period to two decimals.)
4. Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return, assuming that income is earned evenly throughout each year. (Round the percentage return to two decimals.)
5. Compute the net present value for this machine using a discount rate of 12% and assuming that cash flows occur at each year end.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Micelli Company has an opportunity to invest in one of two projects. Project A requires a $480,000 investment for new machinery with a three year life and no salvage value. Project B also requires a $480,000 investment for new machinery with a four year life and no salvage value. The two projects yield the following predicted annual results. The company uses straight line depreciation, and cash flows occur evenly throughout each year.
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
Sales
|
$750,000
|
$800,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
125,000
|
250,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
130,000
|
80,000
|
|
Overhead including depreciation
|
330,000
|
276,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
120,000
|
120,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
705,000
|
726,000
|
|
Pretax income
|
45,000
|
74,000
|
|
Income taxes (30%)
|
13,500
|
22,200
|
|
Net income
|
$ 31,500
|
$ 51,800
|
Required
1. Compute each project’s annual expected net cash flows. (Round net cash flows to the nearest dollar.)
2. Determine each project’s payback period. (Round the payback period to two decimals.)
3. Compute each project’s accounting rate of return. (Round the percentage return to one decimal.)
4. Determine each project’s net present value using 10% as the discount rate. For part 4 only, assume that cash flows occur at each year end. (Round net present values to the nearest dollar.)
5. Identify the project you would recommend to management and explain your choice.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cologne Corporation is considering a new project requiring a $25,000 investment in an asset having no salvage value. The project would produce $15,000 of pretax income before depreciation at the end of each of the next six years. The company’s income tax rate is 30%. In compiling its tax return and computing its income tax payments, the company can choose between two alternative depreciation schedules as shown in the table.
|
|
Straight Line
Depreciation
|
MACRS
Depreciation*
|
|
Year 1
|
$ 2,500
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Year 2
|
5,000
|
8,000
|
|
Year 3
|
5,000
|
4,800
|
|
Year 4
|
5,000
|
2,880
|
|
Year 5
|
5,000
|
2,880
|
|
Year 6
|
2,500
|
1,440
|
|
Totals
|
$25,000
|
$25,000
|
Required
1. Prepare a five column table that reports amounts (assuming use of straight line depreciation) for each of the following items for each of the six years: (a) pretax income before depreciation, (b) straight line depreciation expense, (c) taxable income, (d) income taxes, and (e) net cash flow. Net cash flow equals the amount of income before depreciation minus the income taxes. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
2. Prepare a five column table that reports amounts (assuming use of MACRS depreciation) for each of the following items for each of the six years: (a) income before depreciation, (b) MACRS depreciation expense, (c) taxable income, (d) income taxes, and (e) net cash flow. Net cash flow equals the amount of income before depreciation minus the income taxes. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
3. Compute the net present value of the investment if straight line depreciation is used. Use 15% as the discount rate. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.)
4. Compute the net present value of the investment if MACRS depreciation is used. Use 15% as the discount rate. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.)
5. Explain why the MACRS depreciation method increases the net present value of this project.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Windtrax Company manufactures and sells to local wholesalers approximately 200,000 units per month at a sales price of $1 per unit. Monthly costs for the production and sale of this quantity follow.
|
Direct materials
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
12,000
|
|
Overhead
|
50,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
7,500
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
31,500
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
$131,000
|
A new out of state distributor has offered to buy 20,000 units next month for $0.80 each. These units would be marketed in other states and would not affect Windtrax’s sales through its normal channels. A study of the costs of this new business reveals the following:
? Direct materials costs are 100% variable.
? Per unit direct labor costs for the additional units would be 100% higher than normal because their production would require double overtime pay to meet the distributor’s deadline.
? Eighty percent of the normal annual overhead costs are fixed at any production level from 120,000 to 300,000 units. The remaining 20% is variable with volume.
? Accepting the new business would involve no additional selling expenses.
? Accepting the new business would increase administrative expenses by a $750 fixed amount.
Required
Prepare a three column comparative income statement that shows the following:
1. Monthly operating income without the special order (column 1).
2. Monthly operating income received from the new business only (column 2).
3. Combined monthly operating income from normal business and the new business (column 3).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Digits Company is able to produce two products, 22 and 44, with the same machine in its factory. The following information is available.
|
Selling price per unit
|
$175
|
|
Variable costs per unit
|
100
|
|
Contribution margin per unit
|
$ 75
|
|
Machine hours to produce 1 unit
|
0.8 hours
|
|
Maximum unit sales per month
|
525 units
|
The company presently operates the machine for a single eight hour shift for 23 working days each month.
Management is thinking about operating the machine for two shifts, which will increase its productivity by another eight hours per day for 23 days per month. This change would require $5,000 additional fixed costs per month.
Required
1. Determine the contribution margin per machine hour that each product generates.
2. How many units of Product 22 and Product 44 should the company produce if it continues to operate with only one shift? How much total contribution margin does this mix produce each month?
3. If the company adds another shift, how many units of Product 22 and Product 44 should it produce? How much total contribution margin would this mix produce each month? Should the company add the new shift? Explain.
4. Suppose that the company determines that it can increase Product 44’s maximum sales to 500 units per month by spending $500 per month in marketing efforts. Should the company pursue this strategy and the double shift? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Turftime Company’s management is trying to decide whether to eliminate Department Z, which has produced low profits or losses for several years. The company’s 2011 departmental income statement shows the following.
|
TURFTIME COMPANY
Departmental Income Statements
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
|
Dept. A
Dept. Z
|
|
Combined
|
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
$87,500
|
$437,500
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
230,650
|
62,550
|
293,200
|
|
Gross profit
|
119,350
|
24,950
|
144,300
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Direct expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising
|
13,500
|
1,500
|
15,000
|
|
Store supplies used
|
2,800
|
700
|
3,500
|
|
Depreciation—Store equipment
|
7,000
|
3,500
|
10,500
|
|
Total direct expenses
|
23,300
|
5,700
|
29,000
|
|
Allocated expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Sales salaries
|
35,100
|
11,700
|
46,800
|
|
Rent expense
|
11,040
|
2,760
|
13,800
|
|
Bad debts expense
|
10,500
|
2,000
|
12,500
|
|
Office salary
|
10,400
|
2,600
|
13,000
|
|
Insurance expense
|
2,100
|
700
|
2,800
|
|
Miscellaneous office expenses
|
850
|
1,250
|
2,100
|
|
Total allocated expenses
|
69,990
|
21,010
|
91,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
93,290
|
26,710
|
120,000
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
$ 26,060
|
$ (1,760)
|
$ 24,300
|
In analyzing whether to eliminate Department Z, management considers the following items:
a. The company has one office worker who earns $250 per week or $13,000 per year and four salesclerks who each earn $225 per week or $11,700 per year.
b. The full salaries of three salesclerks are charged to Department A. The full salary of one salesclerk is charged to Department Z.
c. Eliminating Department Z would avoid the sales salaries and the office salary currently allocated to it. However, management prefers another plan. Two salesclerks have indicated that they will be quitting soon. Management believes that their work can be done by the two remaining clerks if the one office worker works in sales half time. Eliminating Department Z will allow this shift of duties. If this change is implemented, half the office worker’s salary would be reported as sales salaries and half would be reported as office salary.
d. The store building is rented under a long term lease that cannot be changed. Therefore, Department A will use the space and equipment currently used by Department Z.
e. Closing Department Z will eliminate its expenses for advertising, bad debts, and store supplies; 65% of the insurance expense allocated to it to cover its merchandise inventory; and 30% of the miscellaneous office expenses presently allocated to it.
Required
1. Prepare a three column report that lists items and amounts for (a) the company’s total expenses (including cost of goods sold) — in column 1, (b) the expenses that would be eliminated by closing Department Z — in column 2, and (c) the expenses that will continue — in column 3.
2. Prepare a forecasted annual income statement for the company reflecting the elimination of Department Z assuming that it will not affect Department A’s sales and gross profit. The statement should reflect the reassignment of the office worker to one half time as a salesclerk.
3. Reconcile the company’s combined net income with the forecasted net income assuming that Department Z is eliminated (list both items and amounts). Analyze the reconciliation and explain why you think the department should or should not be eliminated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey is considering the purchase of equipment for Business Solutions that would allow the company to add a new product to its computer furniture line. The equipment is expected to cost $300,000 and to have a six year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight line basis. Business Solutions expects to sell 100 units of the equipment’s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows.
|
Sales
|
$375,000
|
|
Costs
|
|
|
Materials, labor, and overhead (except depreciation)
|
200,000
|
|
Depreciation on new equipment
|
50,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
37,500
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
287,500
|
|
Pretax income
|
87,500
|
|
Income taxes (30%)
|
26,250
|
|
Net income
|
$ 61,250
|
Required
Compute the (1) payback period and (2) accounting rate of return for this equipment. (Record answers as percents, rounded to one decimal.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume Research In Motion invested $834 million to expand its manufacturing capacity. Assume that these assets have a seven year life, and that Research In Motion requires a 12% internal rate of return on these assets.
Required
1. What is the amount of annual cash flows that Research In Motion must earn from these projects to have a 12% internal rate of return? (Hint: Identify the seven period, 12% factor from the present value of an annuity table, and then divide $834 million by this factor to get the annual cash flows necessary.)
2. Access RIM’s financial statements for fiscal years ended after February 27, 2010, from its the SEC’s.
a. Determine the amount that RIM invested in capital assets for the most recent year. (Hint: Refer to the statement of cash flows.)
b. Assume a seven year life and a 12% internal rate of return. What is the amount of cash flows that RIM must earn on these new projects?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Research In Motion, Apple, and Palm sell several different products; most are profitable but some are not. Teams of employees in each company make advertising, investment, and product mix decisions. A certain portion of advertising for both companies is on a local basis to a target audience.
Required
1. Find one major advertisement of a product or group of products for each company in your local newspaper. Contact the newspaper and ask the approximate cost of this ad space (for example, cost of one page or one half page of advertising).
2. Estimate how many products this advertisement must sell to justify its cost. Begin by taking the product’s sales price advertised for each company and assume a 20% contribution margin.
3. Prepare a one half page memorandum explaining the importance of effective advertising when making a product mix decision. Be prepared to present your ideas in class.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A consultant commented that “too often the numbers look good but feel bad.” This comment often stems from estimation error common to capital budgeting proposals that relate to future cash flows. Three reasons for this error often exist. First, reliably predicting cash flows several years into the future is very difficult. Second, the present value of cash flows many years into the future (say, beyond 10 years) is often very small. Third, it is difficult for personal biases and expectations not to unduly influence present value computations.
Required
1. Compute the present value of $100 to be received in 10 years assuming a 12% discount rate.
2. Why is understanding the three reasons mentioned for estimation errors important when evaluating investment projects? Link this response to your answer for part 1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Payback period, accounting rate of return, net present value, and internal rate of return are common methods to evaluate capital investment opportunities. Assume that your manager asks you to identify the type of measurement basis and unit that each method offers and to list the advantages and disadvantages of each. Present your response in memorandum format of less than one page.
2. Many companies must determine whether to internally produce their component parts or to outsource them. Further, some companies now outsource key components or business processes to international providers. Access the review the available information on outsourcing—especially as it relates to both the advantages and the negative effects of outsourcing.
Required
a. What does Bizbrim identify as the major advantages and the major disadvantages of outsourcing?
b. Does it seem that Bizbrim is generally in favor of or opposed to outsourcing? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Visit or call a local auto dealership and inquire about leasing a car. Ask about the down payment and the required monthly payments. You will likely find the salesperson does not discuss the cost to purchase this car but focuses on the affordability of the monthly payments. This chapter gives you the tools to compute the cost of this car using the lease payment schedule in present dollars and to estimate the profit from leasing for an auto dealership.
Required
1. Compare the cost of leasing the car to buying it in present dollars using the information from the dealership you contact. (Assume you will make a final payment at the end of the lease and then own the car.)
2. Is it more costly to lease or buy the car? Support your answer with computations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
How to Price a Best Selling Novel
Publishing both hardbound and paperback editions of a book allows publishers to price discriminate. As they do with most goods, consumers differ considerably in their willingness to pay for books. For example, some consumers want to buy a new bestseller as soon as it is released, even if the price is $25. Other consumers, however, will wait a year until the book is available in paperback for $10. But how does a publisher decide that $25 is the right price for the new hardbound edition and $10 is the right price for the paperback edition? And how long should it wait before bringing out the paperback edition?
The key is to divide consumers into two groups, so that those who are willing to pay a high price do so and only those unwilling to pay a high price wait and buy the paperback. This means that significant time must be allowed to pass before the paperback is released. If consumers know that the paperback will be available within a few months, they will have little incentive to buy the hardbound edition.? On the other hand, if the publisher waits too long to bring out the paperback edition, interest will wane and the market will dry up. As a result, publishers typically wait 12 to 18 months before releasing paperback editions.
What about price? Setting the price of the hardbound edition is difficult: Except for a few authors whose books always seem to sell, publishers have little data with which to estimate demand for a book that is about to be published. Often, they can judge only from the past sales of similar books. But usually only aggregate data are available for each category of book. Most new novels, therefore, are released at similar prices. It is clear, however, that those consumers willing to wait for the paperback edition have demands that are far more elastic than those of bibliophiles. It is not surprising, then, that paperback editions sell for so much less than hardbacks.”!
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Polaroid Cameras
In 1971, Polaroid introduced its SX 70 camera. This camera was sold, not leased, to consumers. Nevertheless, because film was sold separately, Polaroid could apply a two part tariff to the pricing of the SX 70. Let”s see how this pricing strategy gave Polaroid greater profits than would have been possible if its camera had used ordinary roll film, and how Polaroid might have determined the optimal prices for each part of its two part tariff.
Why did the pricing of Polaroid”s cameras and film involve a two part tariff? Because Polaroid had a monopoly on both its camera and the film, only Polaroid film could be used in the camera. Consumers bought the camera and film to take instant pictures: The camera was the “entry fee” that provided access to the consumption of instant pictures, which was what consumers ultimately demanded In this sense, the price of the camera was like the entry fee at an amusement park. However, while the marginal cost of allowing someone entry into the park is close to zero, the marginal cost of producing a camera is significantly above zero, and thus had to be taken into account when designing the two part tariff.
It was important that Polaroid have a monopoly on the film as well as the camera. If the camera had used ordinary roll film, competitive forces would have pushed the price of film close to its marginal cost. If all consumers had identical demands, Polaroid could still have captured all the consumer surplus by setting a high price for the camera (equal to the surplus of each consumer). But in practice, consumers were heterogeneous, and the optimal two part tariff required a price for the film well above marginal cost.
How should Polaroid have selected its prices for the camera and film? It could have begun with some analytical spadework. Its profit is given by
π = PQ + nT C1(Q) C2(n)
where P is the price of the film, T the price of the camera, Q the quantity of film sold, n the number of cameras sold, and C1(Q) and C2(n) the costs of producing film and cameras, respectively.
Polaroid wanted to maximize its profit n, taking into account that Q and n depend on P and T. Given a heterogeneous base of potential consumers, managers might initially have guessed at this dependence on P and T, drawing on knowledge of related products. Later, they may have gotten a better understanding of demand and of how Q and n depend on P and T as they accumulated data from the firm”s sales experience. They may have found knowledge of C1 and C2 easier to come by, perhaps from engineering and statistical studies (as discussed in Chapter 7).
Given some initial guesses or estimates for Q(P), «r:C1(Q), and C2(n), Polaroid could have calculated the profit maximizing prices P and T. It could also have determined how sensitive these prices were to uncertainty over demand and cost. This knowledge could have provided a guideline for trial and error pricing experiments. Over time these experiments would also have told Polaroid more about demand and cost, so that it could refine its two part tariff accordingly.
In 1999, Polaroid introduced its I Zone camera and film, which takes matchbook size pictures. The camera was priced at $25 and the film at $7 per pack. In 2003, Polaroid”s One Step cameras sold for $30 to $50 and used Polaroid 600 film, which was priced at about $14 per pack of 10 pictures. Polaroid”s higher end Spectra cameras sold for $60 to over $100 and used Spectra film, priced at about $13 per pack. These film prices were well above marginal cost, reflecting the considerable heterogeneity of consumer demands.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.we saw how producers of processed foods and related consumer goods use coupons as a means of price discrimination. Although coupons are widely used in the United States, that is not the case in other countries. In Germany, coupons are illegal.
a. Does prohibiting the use of coupons in Germany make German consumers better off or worse off?
b. Does prohibiting the use of coupons make German producers better off or worse off?
2. Suppose that BMW can produce any quantity of cars at a constant marginal cost equal to $20,000and a fixed cost of $10 billion. You are asked to advise the CEO as to what prices and quantities BMW should set for sales in Europe and in the United States. The demand for BMWsin each market is given by
QE = 4,000,000 100PE and
Qu = 1,000,000 20Pu
where the subscript E denotes Europe, the subscript U denotes the United States. Assume that BMW can restrict U.S. sales to authorized BMWdealers only.
a. What quantity of BMWs should the firm sell in each market, and what should the price be in each market? What should the total profit be?
b. If BMW were forced to charge the same price in each market, what would be the quantity sold in each market, the equilibrium price, and the company”s profit?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elizabeth Airlines (EA) flies only one route: Chicago Honolulu. The demand for each flight is Q = 500 P. ENs cost of running each flight is $30,000 plus $100 per passenger.
a. What is the profit maximizing price that EA will charge? How many people will be on each flight? What is ENs profit for each flight?
b. EA learns that the fixed costs per flight are in fact $41,000 instead of $30,000.Will the airline stay in business for long? Illustrate your answer using a graph of the demand curve that EA faces, EA”s average cost curve when fixed costs are $30,000, and EA”s average cost curve when fixed costs are $41,000.
c. Wait! EA finds out that two different types of people fly to Honolulu. Type A consists of business people with a demand of QA = 260 0.4P. Type B consists of students whose total demand is QB = 240 0.6P. Because the students are easy to spot, EA decides to charge them different prices. Graph each of these demand curves and their horizontal sum. What price does EA charge the students? What price does it charge other customers? How many of each type are on each flight? d. What would ENs profit be for each flight? Would the airline stay in business? Calculate the consumer surplus of each consumer group. What is the total consumer surplus? e. Before EA started price discriminating, how much consumer surplus was the Type A demand getting from air travel to Honolulu? Type B? Why did total consumer surplus decline with price discrimination, even though total quantity sold remained unchanged?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are an executive for Super Computer, Inc. (SC), which rents out super computers. SC receives a fixed rental payment per time period in exchange for the right to unlimited computing at a rate of P cents per second. SC has two types of potential customers of equal number l0 businesses and 10 academic institutions. Each business customer has the demand function Q = 10 P, where Q is in millions of seconds per month; each academic institution has the demand
Q = 8 P. The marginal cost to SC of additional computing is 2 cents per second, regardless of volume.
a. Suppose that you could separate business and academic customers. What rental fee and usage fee would you charge each group? What would be your profits?
b. Suppose you were unable to keep the two types of customers separate and charged a zero rental fee. What usage fee would maximize your profits? What would be your profits?
c. Suppose you set up one two part tariff that is, you set one rental and one usage fee that both business and academic customers pay. What usage and rental fees would you set? What would be your profits? Explain why price would not be equal to marginal cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As the owner of the only tennis club in an isolated wealthy community, you must decide on membership dues and fees for court time. There are two types of tennis players. “Serious” players have demand where Q1 is court hours per week and P is the fee per hour for each individual player. There are also “occasional” players with demand
Q2 = 4 0.25P
Assume that there are 1000 players of each type. Because you have plenty of courts, the marginal cost of court time is zero. You have fixed costs of $10,000 per week. Serious and occasional players look alike, so you must charge them the same prices.
a. Suppose that to maintain a “professional” atmosphere, you want to limit membership to serious players. How should you set the annual membership dues and court fees (assume 52 weeks per year) to maximize profits, keeping in mind the constraint that only serious players choose to join? What would profits be (per week)?
b. A friend tells you that you could make greater profits by encouraging both types of players to join. Is your friend right? What annual dues and court fees would maximize weekly profits? What would these profits be?
c. Suppose that over the years, young, upwardly mobile professionals move to your community, all of whom are serious players. You believe there are now 3000 serious players and 1000 occasional players. Would it still be profitable to cater to the occasional player? What would be the profit maximizing annual dues and court fees? What would profits be per week?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Some years ago, an article appeared in the New York Times about IBM”s pricing policy. The previous day, IBM had announced major price cuts on most of its small and medium sized computers. The article said: IBM probably has no choice but to cut prices periodically to get its customers to purchase more and lease less. If they succeed, this could make life more difficult for IBM”s major competitors. Outright purchases of computers are needed for ever larger IBM revenues and profits, says Morgan Stanley”s Ulric Weil in his new book, Information Systems in the “80”s. Mr. Weil declares that IBM cannot revert to an emphasis on leasing.
a. Provide a brief but clear argument in support of the claim that IBM should try “to get its customers to purchase more and lease less.”
b. Provide a brief but clear argument against this claim.
c. What factors determine whether leasing or selling is preferable for a company like IBM? Explain briefly.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Setting materials, labor, and overhead standards is challenging. If standards are set too low, companies might purchase inferior products and employees might not work to their full potential. If standards are set too high, companies could be unable to offer a quality product at a profitable rate and employees could be overworked. The ethical challenge is to set a high but reasonable standard. Assume that as a manager, you are asked to set the standard materials price and quantity for the new 1,000 CKB Mega Max chip, a technically advanced product. To properly set the price and quantity standards, you assemble a team of specialists to provide input.
Required
Identify four types of specialists that you would assemble to provide information to help set the materials price and quantity standards. Briefly explain why you chose each individual.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The reason we use the words favorable and unfavorable when evaluating variances is made clear when we look at the closing of accounts. To see this, consider that (1) all variance accounts are closed at the end of each period (temporary accounts), (2) a favorable variance is always a credit balance, and (3) an unfavorable variance is always a debit balance. Write a one half page memorandum to your instructor with three parts that answer the three following requirements. (Assume that variance accounts are closed to Cost of Goods Sold.) Required
1. Does Cost of Goods Sold increase or decrease when closing a favorable variance? Does gross margin increase or decrease when a favorable variance is closed to Cost of Goods Sold? Explain.
2. Does Cost of Goods Sold increase or decrease when closing an unfavorable variance? Does gross margin increase or decrease when an unfavorable variance is closed to Cost of Goods Sold? Explain.
3. Explain the meaning of a favorable variance and an unfavorable variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. If depreciation is an expense, why is it added back to an investment’s net income to compute the net cash flow from that investment?
2. If two investments have the same payback period, are they equally desirable? Explain.
3. The following data relate to a company’s decision on whether to purchase a machine:
|
Cost
|
$180,000
|
|
Salvage value
|
15,000
|
|
Annual after tax net income
|
40,000
|
The machine’s accounting rate of return, assuming the even receipt of its net cash flows during the year and use of straight line depreciation, is (a) 22%, (b) 41%, or (c) 21%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Is a 15% accounting rate of return for a machine a good rate?
2. A company can invest in only one of two projects, A or B. Each project requires a $20,000 investment and is expected to generate end of period, annual cash flows as follows:
| |
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
Total
|
|
Project A
|
$12,000
|
$8,500
|
$4,000
|
$24,500
|
|
Project B
|
4,500
|
8,500
|
13,000
|
26,000
|
Assuming a discount rate of 10%, which project has the higher net present value?
3. Two investment alternatives are expected to generate annual cash flows with the same net present value (assuming the same discount rate applied to each). Using this information, can you conclude that the two alternatives are equally desirable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. When two investment alternatives have the same total expected cash flows but differ in the timing of those flows, which method of evaluating those investments is superior, (a) accounting rate of return or (b) net present value?
2. A company receives a special order for 200 units that requires stamping the buyer’s name on each unit, yielding an additional fixed cost of $400 to its normal costs. Without the order, the company is operating at 75% of capacity and produces 7,500 units of product at the following costs:
|
irect materials
|
$37,500
|
|
Direct labor
|
60,000
|
|
Overhead (30% variable)
|
20,000
|
|
Selling expenses (60% variable)
|
25,000
|
The special order will not affect normal unit sales and will not increase fixed overhead and selling expenses. Variable selling expenses on the special order are reduced to one half the normal amount. The price per unit necessary to earn $1,000 on this order is (a) $14.80, (b) $15.80, (c) $19.80, (d) $20.80, or (e) $21.80.
3. What are the incremental costs of accepting additional business?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A company has already incurred a $1,000 cost in partially producing its four products. Their selling prices when partially and fully processed follow with additional costs necessary to finish these partially processed units:
|
Product
|
Unfinished Selling Price
|
Finished Selling Price
|
Further Processing Costs
|
|
Alpha
|
$300
|
$600
|
$150
|
|
Beta
|
450
|
900
|
300
|
|
Gamma
|
275
|
425
|
125
|
|
Delta
|
150
|
210
|
75
|
Which product(s) should not be processed further, (a) Alpha, (b) Beta, (c) Gamma, or (d) Delta?
2. Under what conditions is a sunk cost relevant to decision making?
3. What is the difference between avoidable and unavoidable expenses?
4. A segment is a candidate for elimination if (a) its revenues are less than its avoidable expenses, (b) it has a net loss, (c) its unavoidable expenses are higher than its revenues.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the appropriate action in each of the following managerial decision situations.
1. Packer Company is operating at 80% of its manufacturing capacity of 100,000 product units per year. A chain store has offered to buy an additional 10,000 units at $22 each and sell them to customers so as not to compete with Packer Company. The following data are available.
|
Costs at 80% Capacity
|
Per Unit
|
Total
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 8.00
|
$ 640,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
7.00
|
560,000
|
|
Overhead (fixed and variable)
|
12.50
|
1,000,000
|
|
Totals
|
$27.50
|
$2,200,000
|
In producing 10,000 additional units, fixed overhead costs would remain at their current level but incremental variable overhead costs of $3 per unit would be incurred. Should the company accept or reject this order?
2. Green Company uses Part JR3 in manufacturing its products. It has always purchased this part from a supplier for $40 each. It recently upgraded its own manufacturing capabilities and has enough excess capacity (including trained workers) to begin manufacturing Part JR3 instead of buying it. The company prepares the following cost projections of making the part, assuming that overhead is allocated to the part at the normal predetermined rate of 200% of direct labor cost.
|
Direct materials
|
$11
|
|
Direct labor
|
15
|
|
Overhead (fixed and variable) (200% of direct labor)
|
30
|
|
Total
|
$56
|
The required volume of output to produce the part will not require any incremental fixed overhead. Incremental variable overhead cost will be $17 per unit. Should the company make or buy this part?
3. Gold Company’s manufacturing process causes a relatively large number of defective parts to be produced. The defective parts can be (a) sold for scrap, (b) melted to recover the recycled metal for reuse, or (c) reworked to be good units. Reworking defective parts reduces the output of other good units because no excess capacity exists. Each unit reworked means that one new unit cannot be produced. The following information reflects 500 defective parts currently available.
|
Proceeds of selling as scrap
|
$2,500
|
|
Additional cost of melting down defective parts
|
400
|
|
Cost of purchases avoided by using recycled metal from defects
|
4,800
|
|
Cost to rework 500 defective parts
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
0
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,500
|
|
Incremental overhead
|
1,750
|
|
Cost to produce 500 new parts
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
6,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
5,000
|
|
Incremental overhead
|
3,200
|
|
Selling price per good unit
|
40
|
Should the company melt the parts, sell them as scrap, or rework them?
4. White Company can invest in one of two projects, TD1 or TD2. Each project requires an initial investment of $100,000 and produces the year-end cash inflows shown in the following table. Use net present values to determine which project, if any, should be chosen. Assume that the company requires a 10% return from its investments.
|
|
Net Cash Flows
|
|
|
TD1
|
TD2
|
|
Year 1
|
$ 20,000
|
$ 40,000
|
|
Year 2
|
30,000
|
40,000
|
|
Year 3
|
70,000
|
40,000
|
|
Totals
|
$120,000
|
$120,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A guitar manufacturer is considering eliminating its electric guitar division because its $76,000 expenses are higher than its $72,000 sales. The company reports the following expenses for this division. Should the division be eliminated?
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$55,000
|
|
|
Direct expenses
|
6,250
|
$2,250
|
|
Indirect expenses
|
470
|
3,600
|
|
Service department costs
|
7,000
|
1,430
|
Tak Company has a machine with a book value of $50,000 and a remaining five year useful life. A new machine is available at a cost of $75,000, and Tak can also receive $40,000 for trading in its old machine. The new machine will reduce variable manufacturing costs by $12,000 per year over its five year useful life. Should the machine be replaced?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Soles, a shoe manufacturer, is evaluating the costs and benefits of new equipment that would custom fit each pair of athletic shoes. The customer would have his or her foot scanned by digital computer equipment; this information would be used to cut the raw materials to provide the customer a perfect fit. The new equipment costs $100,000 and is expected to generate an additional $35,000 in cash flows for five years. A bank will make a $100,000 loan to the company at a 10% interest rate for this equipment’s purchase. Use the following table to determine the break even time for this equipment. (Round the present value of cash flows to the nearest dollar.)
|
Year
|
Cash Flows*
|
Present Value of 1 at 10%
|
Present Value of Cash Flows
|
Cumulative Present Value of Cash Flows
|
|
0
|
($100,000)
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
35,000
|
0.9091
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
35,000
|
0.8264
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
35,000
|
0.7513
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
35,000
|
0.683
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
35,000
|
0.6209
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A machine can be purchased for $300,000 and used for 5 years, yielding the following net incomes. In projecting net incomes, double declining balance depreciation is applied, using a 5 year life and a $50,000 salvage value. Compute the machine’s payback period (ignore taxes). (Round the payback period to two decimals.)
| |
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
Year 4
|
Year 5
|
|
Net cash flows
|
$20,000
|
$50,000
|
$100,000
|
$75,000
|
$200,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A machine costs $500,000 and is expected to yield an after tax net income of $15,000 each year. Management predicts this machine has a 10 year service life and a $100,000 salvage value, and it uses straight line depreciation. Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return.
2. K2B Co. is considering the purchase of equipment that would allow the company to add a new product to its line. The equipment is expected to cost $240,000 with a 12 year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight line basis. The company expects to sell 96,000 units of the equipment’s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows. Compute the (1) payback period and (2) accounting rate of return for this equipment.
|
Sales
|
$150,000
|
|
Costs
|
|
|
Materials, labor, and overhead (except depreciation)
|
80,000
|
|
Depreciation on new equipment
|
20,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
15,000
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
115,000
|
|
Pretax income
|
35,000
|
|
Income taxes (30%)
|
10,500
|
|
Net income
|
$ 24,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is information on two alternative investments being considered by Jin Company. The company requires a 10% return from its investments.
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
Initial investment
|
$(175,000)
|
$(145,000)
|
|
Expected net cash flows in year:
|
|
|
|
1
|
40,000
|
32,000
|
|
2
|
56,000
|
50,000
|
|
3
|
80,295
|
66,000
|
|
4
|
90,400
|
72,000
|
|
5
|
55,000
|
29,000
|
For each alternative project compute the (a) net present value, and (b) profitability index. If the company can only select one project, which should it choose? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Following is information on two alternative investments being considered by Jin Company. The company requires a 10% return from its investments.
|
|
Project A
|
Project B
|
|
Initial investment
|
$(175,000)
|
$(145,000)
|
|
Expected net cash flows in year:
|
|
|
|
1
|
40,000
|
32,000
|
|
2
|
56,000
|
50,000
|
|
3
|
80,295
|
66,000
|
|
4
|
90,400
|
72,000
|
|
5
|
55,000
|
29,000
|
For each alternative project compute the (a) net present value, and (b) profitability index. If the company can only select one project, which should it choose? Explain.
2. Create an Excel spreadsheet to compute the internal rate of return for each of the projects. Round the percentage return to two decimals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Xu Company is considering replacing one of its manufacturing machines. The machine has a book value of $45,000 and a remaining useful life of 4 years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. It has a current market value of $55,000. Variable manufacturing costs are $34,000 per year for this machine. Information on two alternative replacement machines follows. Should Xu keep or replace its manufacturing machine? If the machine should be replaced, which alternative new machine should Xu purchase?
|
|
Alternative A
|
Alternative B
|
|
Cost
|
$115,000
|
$125,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs per year
|
22,000
|
12,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Feist Co. expects to sell 200,000 units of its product in the next period with the following results.
|
Sales (200,000 units)
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
400,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
800,000
|
|
Overhead
|
200,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
514,000
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
2,214,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 786,000
|
The company has an opportunity to sell 20,000 additional units at $12 per unit. The additional sales would not affect its current expected sales. Direct materials and labor costs per unit would be the same for the additional units as they are for the regular units. However, the additional volume would create the following incremental costs: (1) total overhead would increase by 15% and (2) administrative expenses would increase by $86,000. Prepare an analysis to determine whether the company should accept or reject the offer to sell additional units at the reduced price of $12 per unit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bethel Company owns a machine that can produce two specialized products. Production time for Product TLX is two units per hour and for Product MTV is five units per hour. The machine’s capacity is 2,200 hours per year. Both products are sold to a single customer who has agreed to buy all of the company’s output up to a maximum of 3,750 units of Product TLX and 2,000 units of Product MTV. Selling prices and variable costs per unit to produce the products follow. Determine (1) the company’s most profitable sales mix and (2) the contribution margin that results from that sales mix.
|
|
Product TLX
|
Product MTV
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$12.50
|
$7.50
|
|
Variable costs per unit
|
3.75
|
4.50
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elite Company is planning to add a new product to its line. To manufacture this product, the company needs to buy a new machine at a $300,000 cost with an expected four year life and a $20,000 salvage value. All sales are for cash, and all costs are out of pocket except for depreciation on the new machine. Additional information includes the following.
|
Expected annual sales of new product
|
$1,150,000
|
|
Expected annual costs of new product
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
300,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
420,000
|
|
Overhead excluding straight line depreciation on new machine
|
210,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
100,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
30%
|
Required
1. Compute straight line depreciation for each year of this new machine’s life. (Round depreciation amounts to the nearest dollar.)
2. Determine expected net income and net cash flow for each year of this machine’s life. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
3. Compute this machine’s payback period, assuming that cash flows occur evenly throughout each year. (Round the payback period to two decimals.)
4. Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return, assuming that income is earned evenly throughout each year. (Round the percentage return to two decimals.)
5. Compute the net present value for this machine using a discount rate of 7% and assuming that cash flows occur at each year end.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pleasant Company has an opportunity to invest in one of two new projects. Project Y requires a $700,000 investment for new machinery with a four year life and no salvage value. Project Z requires a $700,000 investment for new machinery with a three year life and no salvage value. The two projects yield the following predicted annual results. The company uses straight line depreciation, and cash flows occur evenly throughout each year.
|
|
Project Y
|
Project Z
|
|
Sales
|
$700,000
|
$560,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
98,000
|
70,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
140,000
|
84,000
|
|
Overhead including depreciation
|
252,000
|
252,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
540,000
|
456,000
|
|
Pretax income
|
160,000
|
104,000
|
|
Income taxes (30%)
|
48,000
|
31,200
|
|
Net income
|
$112,000
|
$ 72,800
|
Required
1. Compute each project’s annual expected net cash flows. (Round the net cash flows to the nearest dollar.)
2. Determine each project’s payback period. (Round the payback period to two decimals.)
3. Compute each project’s accounting rate of return. (Round the percentage return to one decimal.)
4. Determine each project’s net present value using 8% as the discount rate. For part 4 only, assume that cash flows occur at each year end. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.)
5. Identify the project you would recommend to management and explain your choice.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Angiletta Corporation is considering a new project requiring a $30,000 investment in test equipment with no salvage value. The project would produce $12,000 of pretax income before depreciation at the end of each of the next six years. The company’s income tax rate is 40%. In compiling its tax return and computing its income tax payments, the company can choose between the two alternative depreciation schedules shown in the table.
|
|
Straight Line
Depreciation
|
MACRS
Depreciation*
|
|
Year 1
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 6,000
|
|
Year 2
|
6,000
|
9,600
|
|
Year 3
|
6,000
|
5,760
|
|
Year 4
|
6,000
|
3,456
|
|
Year 5
|
6,000
|
3,456
|
|
Year 6
|
3,000
|
1,728
|
|
Totals
|
$30,000
|
$30,000
|
Required
1. Prepare a five column table that reports amounts (assuming use of straight line depreciation) for each of the following for each of the six years: (a) pretax income before depreciation, (b) straight line depreciation expense, (c) taxable income, (d) income taxes, and (e) net cash flow. Net cash flow equals the amount of income before depreciation minus the income taxes. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
2. Prepare a five column table that reports amounts (assuming use of MACRS depreciation) for each of the following for each of the six years: (a) pretax income before depreciation, (b) MACRS depreciation expense, (c) taxable income, (d) income taxes, and (e) net cash flow. Net cash flow equals the income amount before depreciation minus the income taxes. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)
3. Compute the net present value of the investment if straight line depreciation is used. Use 10% as the discount rate. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.)
4. Compute the net present value of the investment if MACRS depreciation is used. Use 10% as the discount rate. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.)
5. Explain why the MACRS depreciation method increases this project’s net present value.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cayman Products manufactures and sells to wholesalers approximately 300,000 packages per year of underwater markers at $4 per package. Annual costs for the production and sale of this quantity are shown in the table.
|
Direct materials
|
$384,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
96,000
|
|
Overhead
|
288,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
120,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
80,000
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
$968,000
|
A new wholesaler has offered to buy 50,000 packages for $3.44 each. These markers would be marketed under the wholesaler’s name and would not affect Cayman Products’ sales through its normal channels.
A study of the costs of this additional business reveals the following:
? Direct materials costs are 100% variable.
? Per unit direct labor costs for the additional units would be 50% higher than normal because their production would require overtime pay at one and one half times the usual labor rate.
? 25% of the normal annual overhead costs are fixed at any production level from 250,000 to 400,000 units. The remaining 75% of the annual overhead cost is variable with volume.
? Accepting the new business would involve no additional selling expenses.
? Accepting the new business would increase administrative expenses by a $4,000 fixed amount.
Required
Prepare a three column comparative income statement that shows the following:
1. Annual operating income without the special order (column 1).
2. Annual operating income received from the new business only (column 2).
3. Combined annual operating income from normal business and the new business (column 3).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sonic Company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product for 2011.
|
Direct material (20 Ibs. @ $2.50 per Ib.)
|
$50.00
|
|
Direct labor (15 hrs. @ $8.00 per hr.)
|
120
|
|
Factory variable overhead (15 hrs. @ $2.50 per hr.)
|
37.5
|
|
Factory fixed overhead (15 hrs. @ $0.50 per hr.)
|
7.5
|
|
Standard cost
|
$215.00
|
The $3.00 ($2.50 + $0.50) total overhead rate per direct labor hour is based on an expected operating level equal to 75% of the factory’s capacity of 50,000 units per month. The following monthly flexible budget information is also available.
| |
Operating Levels (% of capacity)
|
| |
70%
|
75%
|
80%
|
|
Budgeted output (units)
|
35,000
|
37,500
|
40,000
|
|
Budgeted labor (standard hours)
|
525,000
|
562,500
|
600,000
|
|
Budgeted overhead (dollars)
|
|
|
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$1,312,500
|
$1,406,250
|
$1,500,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
281,250
|
281,250
|
281,250
|
|
Total overhead
|
$1,593,750
|
$1,687,500
|
$1,781,250
|
During the current month, the company operated at 70% of capacity, employees worked 500,000 hours, and the following actual overhead costs were incurred.
|
Variable overhead costs
|
$1,267,500
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
285,000
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
$1,552,500
|
(1) Show how the company computed its predetermined overhead application rate per hour for total overhead, variable overhead, and fixed overhead. (2) Compute the variable and fixed overhead variances.
2. Compute and interpret the following.
a. Variable overhead spending and efficiency variances.
b. Fixed overhead spending and volume variances.
c. Controllable variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Comp Wiz sells computers. During May 2011, it sold 500 computers at a $900 average price each. The May 2011 fixed budget included sales of 550 computers at an average price of $850 each. (1) Compute the sales price variance and the sales volume variance for May 2011. (2) Interpret the findings.
2. Match the terms a–e with their correct definition 1–5.
a. Standard cost
b. Practical standard
c. Standard cost card
d. Ideal standard
e. Management by exception
1. Record that accumulates standard cost information.
2. Quantity of input required if a production process is 100% efficient.
3. Managing by focusing on large differences from standard costs.
4. Quantity of input required under normal conditions.
5. Preset cost for delivering a product or service under normal conditions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are terms preceded by letters a through j and a list of definitions 1 through 10. Enter the letter of the term with the definition, using the space preceding the definition.
a. Cost variance
b. Volume variance
c. Price variance
d. Quantity variance
e. Standard costs
f. Controllable variance
g. Fixed budget
h. Flexible budget
i. Variance analysis
j. Management by exception
1. The difference between the total budgeted overhead cost and the overhead cost that was allocated to products using the predetermined fixed overhead rate.
2. A planning budget based on a single predicted amount of sales or production volume; unsuitable for evaluations if the actual volume differs from the predicted volume.
3. Preset costs for delivering a product, component, or service under normal conditions.
4. A process of examining the differences between actual and budgeted sales or costs and describing them in terms of the amounts that resulted from price and quantity differences.
5. The difference between actual and budgeted sales or cost caused by the difference between the actual price per unit and the budgeted price per unit.
6. A budget prepared based on predicted amounts of revenues and expenses corresponding to the actual level of output.
7. The difference between actual and budgeted cost caused by the difference between the actual quantity and the budgeted quantity.
8. The combination of both overhead spending variances (variable and fixed) and the variable overhead efficiency variance.
9. A management process to focus on significant variances and give less attention to areas where performance is close to the standard.
10. The difference between actual cost and standard cost, made up of a price variance and a quantity variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dee Daw Co. provides the following results of April’s operations: F indicates favorable and U indicates unfavorable. Applying the management by exception approach, which of the variances are of greatest concern? Why?
|
Direct materials price variance
|
$ 400 F
|
|
Direct materials quantity variance
|
2,000 U
|
|
Direct labor rate variance
|
100 U
|
|
Direct labor efficiency variance
|
1,200 F
|
|
Controllable overhead variance
|
400 U
|
|
Fixed overhead volume variance
|
600 F
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information describes production activities of Truzor Manufacturing for the year:
|
Actual raw materials used
|
16,000 lbs. at $4.05 per lb.
|
|
Actual factory payroll
|
5,545 hours for a total of $72,085
|
|
Actual units produced
|
30,000
|
Budgeted standards for each unit produced are 0.50 pounds of raw material at $4.15 per pound and 10 minutes of direct labor at $12.50 per hour. (1) Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances. Round to the nearest whole dollar. (2) Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances. Indicate whether each variance is favorable or unfavorable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.
|
Direct materials (25 Ibs @ $4 per Ib)
|
$100.00
|
|
Direct labor (6 hrs @ $8 per hr)
|
48.00
|
|
Factory overhead—variable (6 hrs @ $5 per hr)
|
30.00
|
|
Factory overhead—fixed (6 hrs @ $7 per hr)
|
42.00
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$220.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.
|
|
Operating Levels
|
|
|
70%
|
80%
|
90%
|
|
Production in units
|
42,000
|
48,000
|
54,000
|
|
Standard direct labor hours
|
252,000
|
288,000
|
324,000
|
|
Budgeted overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$2,016,000
|
$2,016,000
|
$2,016,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$1,260,000
|
$1,440,000
|
$1,620,000
|
During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:
|
Direct materials (1,050,000 Ibs @ $4 per Ib)
|
$4,200,000
|
|
Direct labor (252,000 hrs @ $8 per hr)
|
2,016,000
|
|
Factory overhead (252,000 hrs @ $12 per hr)
|
3,024,000
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$9,240,000
|
Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:
|
Direct materials (1,000,000 Ibs @ $425)
|
$4,250,000
|
|
Direct labor (250,000 hrs @ $775)
|
1,937,500
|
|
Fixed factory overhead costs
|
1,960,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead costs
|
1,200,000
|
|
Total actual costs
|
$9,347,500
|
Required
1. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.
2. Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.
3. Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.
|
Direct materials (25 Ibs @ $4 per Ib)
|
$100.00
|
|
Direct labor (6 hrs @ $8 per hr)
|
48.00
|
|
Factory overhead—variable (6 hrs @ $5 per hr)
|
30.00
|
|
Factory overhead—fixed (6 hrs @ $7 per hr)
|
42.00
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$220.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.
|
|
Operating Levels
|
|
|
70%
|
80%
|
90%
|
|
Production in units
|
42,000
|
48,000
|
54,000
|
|
Standard direct labor hours
|
252,000
|
288,000
|
324,000
|
|
Budgeted overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$2,016,000
|
$2,016,000
|
$2,016,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$1,260,000
|
$1,440,000
|
$1,620,000
|
During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:
|
Direct materials (1,050,000 Ibs @ $4 per Ib)
|
$4,200,000
|
|
Direct labor (252,000 hrs @ $8 per hr)
|
2,016,000
|
|
Factory overhead (252,000 hrs @ $12 per hr)
|
3,024,000
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$9,240,000
|
Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:
|
Direct materials (1,000,000 Ibs @ $425)
|
$4,250,000
|
|
Direct labor (250,000 hrs @ $775)
|
1,937,500
|
|
Fixed factory overhead costs
|
1,960,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead costs
|
1,200,000
|
|
Total actual costs
|
$9,347,500
|
2. Refer to information in Problem 24 1A.
Required
Compute these variances: (a) variable overhead spending and efficiency, (b) fixed overhead spending and volume, and (c) total overhead controllable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the information in Problem 24 3A. Pebco Company’s actual income statement for 2011 follows.
|
PEBCO COMPANY
Statement of Income from Operations
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
Sales (24,000 units)
|
|
$3,648,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$1,400,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
360,000
|
|
|
Machinery repairs (variable cost)
|
60,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—plant equipment
|
250,000
|
|
|
Utilities (fixed cost is $154,000)
|
218,000
|
|
|
Plant management salaries
|
155,000
|
2,443,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
1,205,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
|
|
Packaging
|
90,000
|
|
|
Shipping
|
124,000
|
|
|
Sales salary (annual)
|
162,000
|
376,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
104,000
|
|
|
Salaries
|
232,000
|
|
|
Entertainment expense
|
100,000
|
436,000
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
$ 393,000
|
Required
1. Prepare a flexible budget performance report for 2011.
2. Analyze and interpret both the (a) sales variance and (b) direct materials variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kwikeze Company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product.
|
Direct materials (45 Ibs @ $6 per Ib)
|
$27.00
|
|
Direct labor (15 hrs @ $12 per hr)
|
18.00
|
|
Overhead (15 hrs @ $16 per hr)
|
24.00
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$69.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate ($16 per direct labor hour) is based on an expected volume of 75% of the factory’s capacity of 20,000 units per month. Following are the company’s budgeted overhead costs per month at the 75% level.
|
Overhead Budget (75% Capacity)
|
|
Variable overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$22,500
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
90,000
|
|
|
Power
|
22,500
|
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
45,000
|
|
|
Total variable overhead costs
|
|
$180,000
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Depreciation—building
|
24,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
72,000
|
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
18,000
|
|
|
Supervision
|
66,000
|
|
|
Total fixed overhead costs
|
|
180,000
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
|
$360,000
|
The company incurred the following actual costs when it operated at 75% of capacity in October.
|
Direct materials (69,000 Ibs @ $610 per lb)
|
|
$ 420,900
|
|
Direct labor (22,800 hrs @ $1230 per hr)
|
|
280,440
|
|
Overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$21,600
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
82,260
|
|
|
Power
|
23,100
|
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
46,800
|
|
|
Depreciation—building
|
24,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
75,000
|
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
16,500
|
|
|
Supervision
|
66,000
|
355,260
|
|
Total costs
|
|
$1,056,600
|
Required
1. Examine the monthly overhead budget to (a) determine the costs per unit for each variable overhead item and its total per unit costs, and (b) identify the total fixed costs per month.
2. Prepare flexible overhead budgets (as in Exhibit 24.12) for October showing the amounts of each variable and fixed cost at the 65%, 75%, and 85% capacity levels.
3. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.
4. Compute the direct labor cost variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.
5. Prepare a detailed overhead variance report (as in Exhibit 24.15) that shows the variances for individual items of overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kudos Company has set the following standard costs per unit for the product it manufactures.
|
Direct materials (10 Ibs @ $3 per Ib)
|
$30.00
|
|
Direct labor (4 hrs @ $6 per hr)
|
24.00
|
|
Overhead (4 hrs @ $250 per hr)
|
10.00
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$64.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 10,000 units per month. The following flexible budget information is available.
|
Operating Levels
|
|
|
70%
|
80%
|
90%
|
|
Production in units
|
7,000
|
8,000
|
9,000
|
|
Standard direct labor hours
|
28,000
|
32,000
|
36,000
|
|
Budgeted overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Variable overhead costs
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$ 8,750
|
$ 10,000
|
$11,250
|
|
Indirect labor
|
14,000
|
16,000
|
18,000
|
|
Power
|
3,500
|
4,000
|
4,500
|
|
Maintenance
|
1,750
|
2,000
|
2,250
|
|
Total variable costs
|
28,000
|
32,000
|
36,000
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
|
|
|
|
Rent of factory building
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
16,000
|
16,000
|
16,000
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
48,000
|
48,000
|
48,000
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
$76,000
|
$80,000
|
$84,000
|
During May, the company operated at 90% of capacity and produced 9,000 units, incurring the following actual costs.
|
Direct materials (92,000 Ibs @ $295 per Ib)
|
|
$271,400
|
|
Direct labor (37,600 hrs @ $605 per hr)
|
|
227,480
|
|
Overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
16,000
|
|
|
Power
|
4,500
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
3,000
|
|
|
Rent of factory building
|
12,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
19,200
|
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
17,000
|
81,700
|
|
Total costs
|
|
$580,580
|
Required
1. Compute the direct materials variance, including its price and quantity variances.
2. Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.
3. Compute these variances: (a) variable overhead spending and efficiency, (b) fixed overhead spending and volume, and (c) total overhead controllable.
4. Prepare a detailed overhead variance report (as in Exhibit 24.15) that shows the variances for individual items of overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Loretto Company’s standard cost accounting system recorded this information from its December operations.
|
Standard direct materials cost
|
$130,000
|
|
Direct materials quantity variance (unfavorable)
|
5,000
|
|
Direct materials price variance (favorable)
|
1,500
|
|
Actual direct labor cost
|
65,000
|
|
Direct labor efficiency variance (favorable)
|
7,000
|
|
Direct labor rate variance (unfavorable)
|
500
|
|
Actual overhead cost
|
250,000
|
|
Volume variance (unfavorable)
|
12,000
|
|
Controllable variance (unfavorable)
|
8,000
|
Required
1. Prepare December 31 journal entries to record the company’s costs and variances for the month. (Do not prepare the journal entry to close the variances.)
2. Identify the areas that would attract the attention of a manager who uses management by exception. Explain what action(s) the manager should consider.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sabates Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.
|
Direct materials (5 Ibs. @ $10 per Ib.)
|
$50.00
|
|
Direct labor (3 hrs. @ $15 per hr.)
|
45
|
|
Factory overhead—variable (3 hrs. @ $5 per hr.)
|
15
|
|
Factory overhead—fixed (3 hrs. @ $3 per hr.)
|
9
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$119.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 90% of the productive capacity of 100,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.
|
|
Operating Levels
|
|
|
80%
|
90%
|
100%
|
|
Production in units
|
32,000
|
36,000
|
40,000
|
|
Standard direct labor hours
|
96,000
|
108,000
|
120,000
|
|
Budgeted overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$324,000
|
$324,000
|
$324,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
480,000
|
540,000
|
600,000
|
During the current quarter, the company operated at 80% of capacity and produced 32,000 units of product; direct labor hours worked were 100,000. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:
|
Direct materials (160,000 Ibs. @ $10 per Ib.)
|
$1,600,000
|
|
Direct labor (96,000 hrs. @ $15 per hr.)
|
1,440,000
|
|
Factory overhead (96,000 hrs. @ $8 per hr.)
|
768,000
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$3,808,000
|
Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:
|
Direct materials (155,000 Ibs. @ $10.20)
|
$1,581,000
|
|
Direct labor (100,000 hrs. @ $14)
|
1,400,000
|
|
Fixed factory overhead costs
|
370,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead costs
|
480,000
|
|
Total actual costs
|
$3,831,000
|
Required
1. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.
2. Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.
3. Compute the total overhead controllable and volume variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sabates Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.
|
Direct materials (5 Ibs. @ $10 per Ib.)
|
$50.00
|
|
Direct labor (3 hrs. @ $15 per hr.)
|
45
|
|
Factory overhead—variable (3 hrs. @ $5 per hr.)
|
15
|
|
Factory overhead—fixed (3 hrs. @ $3 per hr.)
|
9
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$119.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 90% of the productive capacity of 100,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.
|
|
Operating Levels
|
|
|
80%
|
90%
|
100%
|
|
Production in units
|
32,000
|
36,000
|
40,000
|
|
Standard direct labor hours
|
96,000
|
108,000
|
120,000
|
|
Budgeted overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$324,000
|
$324,000
|
$324,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
480,000
|
540,000
|
600,000
|
During the current quarter, the company operated at 80% of capacity and produced 32,000 units of product; direct labor hours worked were 100,000. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:
|
Direct materials (160,000 Ibs. @ $10 per Ib.)
|
$1,600,000
|
|
Direct labor (96,000 hrs. @ $15 per hr.)
|
1,440,000
|
|
Factory overhead (96,000 hrs. @ $8 per hr.)
|
768,000
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$3,808,000
|
Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:
|
Direct materials (155,000 Ibs. @ $10.20)
|
$1,581,000
|
|
Direct labor (100,000 hrs. @ $14)
|
1,400,000
|
|
Fixed factory overhead costs
|
370,000
|
|
Variable factory overhead costs
|
480,000
|
|
Total actual costs
|
$3,831,000
|
Refer to information in Problem 24 1B.
Required
Compute these variances: (a) variable overhead spending and efficiency, (b) fixed overhead spending and volume, and (c) total overhead controllable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Razorback Company’s 2011 master budget included the following fixed budget report. It is based on an expected production and sales volume of 10,000 units.
|
RAZORBACK COMPANY
Fixed Budget Report
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
Sales
|
|
$250,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$100,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
20,000
|
|
|
Machinery repairs (variable cost)
|
3,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
11,920
|
|
|
Utilities (80% is variable cost)
|
8,000
|
|
|
Plant manager salaries
|
6,000
|
148,920
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
101,080
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
|
|
Packaging
|
9,000
|
|
|
Shipping
|
30,000
|
|
|
Sales salary (fixed annual amount)
|
18,000
|
57,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
Advertising
|
4,000
|
|
|
Salaries
|
9,360
|
|
|
Entertainment expense
|
10,000
|
23,360
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
$ 20,720
|
Required
1. Classify all items listed in the fixed budget as variable or fixed. Also determine their amounts per unit or their amounts for the year, as appropriate.
2. Prepare flexible budgets (see Exhibit 24.3) for the company at sales volumes of 8,000 and 12,000 units.
3. The company’s business conditions are improving. One possible result is a sales volume of approximately 14,400 units. The company president is confident that this volume is within the relevant range of existing capacity. How much would operating income increase over the 2011 budgeted amount of $20,720 if this level is reached without increasing capacity?
4. An unfavorable change in business is remotely possible; in this case, production and sales volume for 2011 could fall to 5,000 units. How much income (or loss) from operations would occur if sales volume falls to this level?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
RAZORBACK COMPANY
Statement of Income from Operations
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
Sales (12,000 units)
|
|
$288,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$95,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
16,000
|
|
|
Machinery repairs (variable cost)
|
3,300
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
11,920
|
|
|
Utilities (variable cost, $7,160)
|
8,520
|
|
|
Plant manager salaries
|
6,720
|
141,460
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
146,540
|
|
Selling expenses
|
|
|
|
Packaging
|
10,800
|
|
|
Shipping
|
37,200
|
|
|
Sales salary (annual)
|
19,200
|
67,200
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
4,200
|
|
|
Salaries
|
9,360
|
|
|
Entertainment expense
|
10,000
|
23,560
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
$ 55,780
|
Required
1. Prepare a flexible budget performance report for 2011.
2. Analyze and interpret both the (a) sales variance and (b) direct materials variance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sunburst Company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product.
|
Direct materials (48 kgs. @ $4 per kg.)
|
$192.00
|
|
Direct labor (12 hrs. @ $9 per hr.)
|
108
|
|
Overhead (12 hrs. @ $4.50 per hr.)
|
54
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$354.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate ($4.50 per direct labor hour) is based on an expected volume of 50% of the factory’s capacity of 10,000 units per month. Following are the company’s budgeted overhead costs per month at the 50% level.
|
Overhead Budget (50% Capacity)
|
|
Variable overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$40,000
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
80,000
|
|
|
Power
|
20,000
|
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
30,000
|
|
|
Total variable overhead costs
|
|
$170,000
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Depreciation—building
|
20,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
30,000
|
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
10,000
|
|
|
Supervision
|
40,000
|
|
|
Total fixed overhead costs
|
|
100,000
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
|
$270,000
|
The company incurred the following actual costs when it operated at 40% of capacity in December.
|
Direct materials (196,000 kgs. @ $4.00)
|
|
$ 784,000
|
|
Direct labor (46,000 hrs. @ $9.15)
|
|
420,900
|
|
Overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$30,000
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
66,000
|
|
|
Power
|
15,600
|
|
|
Repairs and maintenance
|
21,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—building
|
20,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
30,000
|
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
9,600
|
|
|
Supervision
|
39,600
|
231,800
|
|
Total costs
|
|
$1,436,700
|
Required
1. Examine the monthly overhead budget to (a) determine the costs per unit for each variable overhead item and its total per unit costs, and (b) identify the total fixed costs per month.
2. Prepare flexible overhead budgets (as in Exhibit 24.12) for December showing the amounts of each variable and fixed cost at the 40%, 50%, and 60% capacity levels.
3. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.
4. Compute the direct labor cost variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.
5. Prepare a detailed overhead variance report (as in Exhibit 24.15) that shows the variances for individual items of overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carlsbad Company has set the following standard costs per unit for the product it manufactures.
|
Direct materials (40 oz. @ $0.75 per oz.)
|
$ 30.00
|
|
Direct labor (2 hr. @ $20 per hr.)
|
40.00
|
|
Overhead (2 hr. @ $53.50 per hr.)
|
107.00
|
|
Total standard cost
|
$177.00
|
The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 60% of the productive capacity of 3,000 units per month. The following flexible budget information is available.
|
|
Operating Levels
|
|
|
50%
|
60%
|
70%
|
|
Production in units
|
1,500
|
1,800
|
2,100
|
|
Standard direct labor hours
|
3,000
|
3,600
|
4,200
|
|
Budgeted overhead
|
|
|
|
|
Variable overhead costs
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$ 18,000
|
$21,600
|
$25,200
|
|
Indirect labor
|
10,500
|
12,600
|
14,700
|
|
Power
|
7,500
|
9,000
|
10,500
|
|
Maintenance
|
4,500
|
5,400
|
6,300
|
|
Total variable costs
|
40,500
|
48,600
|
56,700
|
|
Fixed overhead costs
|
|
|
|
|
Rent of factory building
|
48,000
|
48,000
|
48,000
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
44,000
|
44,000
|
44,000
|
|
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
32,000
|
32,000
|
32,000
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
144,000
|
144,000
|
144,000
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
$184,500
|
$192,600
|
$200,700
|
During March, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 2,100 units, incurring the following actual costs.
|
Direct materials (88,000 oz. @ $0.70 per oz.)
|
|
$ 61,600
|
|
Direct labor (4,000 hrs. @ $19.50 per hr.)
|
|
78,000
|
|
Overhead costs
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
$23,600
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
14,800
|
|
|
Power
|
10,000
|
|
|
Maintenance
|
3,200
|
|
|
Rent of factory building
|
48,000
|
|
|
Depreciation—machinery
|
44,000
|
|
|
Taxes and insurance
|
24,000
|
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
31,600
|
199,200
|
|
Total costs
|
|
$338,800
|
Required
1. Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.
2. Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.
3. Compute these variances: (a) variable overhead spending and efficiency, (b) fixed overhead spending and volume, and (c) total overhead controllable.
4. Prepare a detailed overhead variance report (as in Exhibit 24.15) that shows the variances for individual items of overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kincaid Company’s standard cost accounting system recorded this information from its June operations.
|
Standard direct materials cost
|
$220,500
|
|
Direct materials quantity variance (favorable)
|
20,250
|
|
Direct materials price variance (favorable)
|
14,500
|
|
Actual direct labor cost
|
335,000
|
|
Direct labor efficiency variance (favorable)
|
26,700
|
|
Direct labor rate variance (unfavorable)
|
3,500
|
|
Actual overhead cost
|
359,000
|
|
Volume variance (unfavorable)
|
1,650
|
|
Controllable variance (unfavorable)
|
32,500
|
Required
1. Prepare journal entries dated June 30 to record the company’s costs and variances for the month. (Do not prepare the journal entry to close the variances.)
2. Identify the areas that would attract the attention of a manager who uses management by exception. Describe what action(s) the manager should consider.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Solutions’ second quarter 2012 fixed budget performance report for its computer furniture operations follows. The $156,000 budgeted expenses include $108,000 in variable expenses for desks and $18,000 in variable expenses for chairs, as well as $30,000 fixed expenses. The actual expenses include $31,000 fixed expenses. Prepare a flexible budget performance report that shows any variances between budgeted results and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately.
|
|
Fixed Budget
|
Actual Results
|
Variances
|
|
Desk sales (in units)
|
144
|
150
|
|
|
Chair sales (in units)
|
72
|
80
|
|
|
Desk sales (in dollars)
|
$180,000
|
$186,000
|
$6,000 F
|
|
Chair sales (in dollars)
|
$ 36,000
|
$ 41,200
|
$5,200 F
|
|
Total expenses
|
$156,000
|
$163,880
|
$7,880 U
|
|
Income from operations
|
$ 60,000
|
$ 63,320
|
$3,320 F
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of flexible budgets and standard costs emphasizes the importance of a similar unit of measure for meaningful comparisons and evaluations. When Research In Motion compiles its financial reports in compliance with GAAP, it applies the same unit of measurement, U.S. dollars, for most mea sures of business operations. One issue for Research In Motion is how best to adjust account values for its subsidiaries that compile financial reports in currencies other than the U.S. dollar.
Required
1. Read Research In Motion’s Note 1 in Appendix A and identify the financial statement where it reports the annual adjustment (remeasurement) for foreign currency translation.
2. Translating financial statements requires the use of a currency exchange rate. For each of the following three financial statement items, explain the exchange rate the company would apply to translate into U.S. dollars.
a. Cash
b. Sales revenue
c. Property, plant and equipment
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Near the end of 2011, the management of Simid Sports Co., a merchandising company, prepared the following estimated balance sheet for December 31, 2011.
|
SIMID SPORTS COMPANY
Estimated Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 18,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
262,500
|
|
Inventory
|
|
75,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
355,500
|
|
Equipment
|
$270,000
|
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
33,750
|
236,250
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$591,750
|
|
Liabilities and Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$180,000
|
|
|
Bank loan payable
|
7,500
|
|
|
Taxes payable (due 3/15/2012)
|
45,000
|
|
|
Total liabilities
|
|
$232,500
|
|
Common stock
|
236,250
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
123,000
|
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
359,250
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
|
$591,750
|
To prepare a master budget for January, February, and March of 2012, management gathers the following information.
a. Simid Sports’ single product is purchased for $30 per unit and resold for $55 per unit. The expected inventory level of 2,500 units on December 31, 2011, is more than management’s desired level for 2012, which is 20% of the next month’s expected sales (in units). Expected sales are: January, 3,500 units; February, 4,500 units; March, 5,500 units; and April, 5,000 units.
b. Cash sales and credit sales represent 25% and 75%, respectively, of total sales. Of the credit sales, 60% is collected in the first month after the month of sale and 40% in the second month after the month of sale. For the December 31, 2011, accounts receivable balance, $62,500 is collected in January and the remaining $200,000 is collected in February.
c. Merchandise purchases are paid for as follows: 20% in the first month after the month of purchase and 80% in the second month after the month of purchase. For the December 31, 2011, accounts payable balance, $40,000 is paid in January and the remaining $140,000 is paid in February.
d. Sales commissions equal to 20% of sales are paid each month. Sales salaries (excluding commissions) are $30,000 per year.
e. General and administrative salaries are $72,000 per year. Maintenance expense equals $1,000 per month and is paid in cash.
f. Equipment reported in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet was purchased in January 2011. It is being depreciated over eight years under the straight line method with no salvage value. The following amounts for new equipment purchases are planned in the coming quarter: January, $18,000; February, $48,000; and March, $14,400. This equipment will be depreciated under the straight line method over eight years with no salvage value. A full month’s depreciation is taken for the month in which equipment is purchased.
g. The company plans to acquire land at the end of March at a cost of $75,000, which will be paid with cash on the last day of the month.
h. Simid Sports has a working arrangement with its bank to obtain additional loans as needed. The interest rate is 12% per year, and interest is paid at each month end based on the beginning balance. Partial or full payments on these loans can be made on the last day of the month. The company has agreed to maintain a minimum ending cash balance of $12,500 in each month.
i. The income tax rate for the company is 40%. Income taxes on the first quarter’s income will not be paid until April 15.
Required
Prepare a master budget for each of the first three months of 2012; include the following component budgets (show supporting calculations as needed, and round amounts to the nearest dollar):
1. Monthly sales budgets (showing both budgeted unit sales and dollar sales).
2. Monthly merchandise purchases budgets.
3. Monthly selling expense budgets.
4. Monthly general and administrative expense budgets.
5. Monthly capital expenditures budgets.
6. Monthly cash budgets.
7. Budgeted income statement for the entire first quarter (not for each month).
8. Budgeted balance sheet as of March 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
H20 Company is a merchandiser of three different products. The company’s March 31 inventories are water skis, 40,000 units; tow ropes, 90,000 units; and life jackets, 250,000 units. Management believes that excessive inventories have accumulated for all three products. As a result, a new policy dictates that ending inventory in any month should equal 10% of the expected unit sales for the following month. Expected sales in units for April, May, June, and July follow.
|
|
Budgeted Sales in Units
|
|
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
July
|
|
Water skis
|
70,000
|
90,000
|
130,000
|
140,000
|
|
Tow ropes
|
100,000
|
90,000
|
110,000
|
100,000
|
|
Life jackets
|
300,000
|
260,000
|
310,000
|
260,000
|
Required
1. Prepare a merchandise purchases budget (in units) for each product for each of the months of April, May, and June.
2. The purchases budgets in part 1 should reflect fewer purchases of all three products in April compared to those in May and June. What factor caused fewer purchases to be planned? Suggest business conditions that would cause this factor to both occur and affect the company as it has.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
LaRocca Company sells its product for $20 per unit. Its actual and projected sales follow.
|
|
Units
|
Dollars
|
|
January (actual)
|
18,000
|
$360,000
|
|
February (actual)
|
27,000
|
540,000
|
|
March (budgeted)
|
15,000
|
300,000
|
|
April (budgeted)
|
27,000
|
540,000
|
|
May (budgeted)
|
33,000
|
660,000
|
All sales are on credit. Recent experience shows that 40% of credit sales is collected in the month of the sale, 30% in the month after the sale, 25% in the second month after the sale, and 5% proves to be uncollectible. The product’s purchase price is $12 per unit. All purchases are payable within 21 days. Thus, 30% of purchases made in a month is paid in that month and the other 70% is paid in the next month. The company has a policy to maintain an ending monthly inventory of 30% of the next month’s unit sales plus a safety stock of 300 units. The January 31 and February 28 actual inventory levels are consistent with this policy. Selling and administrative expenses for the year are $1,440,000 and are paid evenly throughout the year in cash. The company’s minimum cash balance for month end is $45,000. This minimum is maintained, if necessary, by borrowing cash from the bank. If the balance exceeds $45,000, the company repays as much of the loan as it can without going below the minimum. This type of loan carries an annual 12% interest rate. At February 28, the loan balance is $12,000, and the company’s cash balance is $45,000.
Required
1. Prepare a table that shows the computation of cash collections of its credit sales (accounts receivable) in each of the months of March and April.
2. Prepare a table showing the computations of budgeted ending inventories (units) for January, February, March, and April.
3. Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for February, March, and April. Report calculations in units and then show the dollar amount of purchases for each month.
4. Prepare a table showing the computation of cash payments on product purchases for March and April.
5. Prepare a cash budget for March and April, including any loan activity and interest expense. Compute the loan balance at the end of each month.
6. Refer to your answer to part 5. LaRocca’s cash budget indicates whether the company must borrow additional funds at the end of March. Suggest some reasons that knowing the loan needs in advance would be helpful to management.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Near the end of 2011, the management of Oasis Corp., a merchandising company, prepared the following estimated balance sheet for December 31, 2011.
|
OASIS CORPORATION
Estimated Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 160,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
400,000
|
|
Inventory
|
|
180,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
740,000
|
|
Equipment
|
$1,200,000
|
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
120,000
|
1,080,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$1,820,000
|
|
Liabilities and Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 300,000
|
|
|
Bank loan payable
|
20,000
|
|
|
Taxes payable (due 3/15/2012)
|
200,000
|
|
|
Total liabilities
|
|
$ 520,000
|
|
Common stock
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
(200,000)
|
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
|
1,300,000
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
|
$1,820,000
|
To prepare a master budget for January, February, and March of 2012, management gathers the following information.
a. Oasis Corp.’s single product is purchased for $10 per unit and resold for $24 per unit. The expected inventory level of 18,000 units on December 31, 2011, is more than management’s desired level for 2012, which is 40% of the next month’s expected sales (in units). Expected sales are: January, 30,000 units; February, 24,000 units; March, 40,000 units; and April, 50,000 units.
b. Cash sales and credit sales represent 40% and 60%, respectively, of total sales. Of the credit sales, 70% is collected in the first month after the month of sale and 30% in the second month after the month of sale. For the $400,000 accounts receivable balance at December 31, 2011, $280,000 is collected in January 2012 and the remaining $120,000 is collected in February 2012.
c. Merchandise purchases are paid for as follows: 80% in the first month after the month of purchase and 20% in the second month after the month of purchase. For the $300,000 accounts payable balance at December 31, 2011, $240,000 is paid in January 2012 and the remaining $60,000 is paid in February 2012.
d. Sales commissions equal to 10% of sales are paid each month. Sales salaries (excluding commissions) are $288,000 per year.
e. General and administrative salaries are $336,000 per year. Maintenance expense equals $6,000 per month and is paid in cash.
f. Equipment reported in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet was purchased in January 2011. It is being depreciated over 10 years under the straight line method with no salvage value. The following amounts for new equipment purchases are planned in the coming quarter: January, $240,000; February, $120,000; and March, $96,000. This equipment will be depreciated using the straight line method over 10 years with no salvage value. A full month’s depreciation is taken for the month in which equipment is purchased.
g. The company plans to acquire land at the end of March at a cost of $232,000, which will be paid with cash on the last day of the month.
h. Oasis Corp. has a working arrangement with its bank to obtain additional loans as needed. The interest rate is 12% per year, and interest is paid at each month end based on the beginning balance. Partial or full payments on these loans can be made on the last day of the month. Oasis has agreed to maintain a minimum ending cash balance of $160,000 in each month.
i. The income tax rate for the company is 30%. Income taxes on the first quarter’s income will not be paid until April 15.
Required
Prepare a master budget for each of the first three months of 2012; include the following component budgets (show supporting calculations as needed, and round amounts to the nearest dollar):
1. Monthly sales budgets (showing both budgeted unit sales and dollar sales).
2. Monthly merchandise purchases budgets.
3. Monthly selling expense budgets.
4. Monthly general and administrative expense budgets.
5. Monthly capital expenditures budgets.
6. Monthly cash budgets.
7. Budgeted income statement for the entire first quarter (not for each month).
8. Budgeted balance sheet as of March 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey expects second quarter 2012 sales of her new line of computer furniture to be the same as the first quarter’s sales (reported below) without any changes in strategy. Monthly sales averaged 40 desk units (sales price of $1,250) and 20 chairs (sales price of $500).
|
BUSINESS SOLUTIONS
Segment Income Statement*
For Quarter Ended March 31, 2012
|
|
Sales†
|
$180,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold‡
|
115,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
65,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
Sales commissions (10%)
|
18,000
|
|
Advertising expenses
|
9,000
|
|
Other fixed expenses
|
18,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
45,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 20,000
|
Santana Rey believes that sales will increase each month for the next three months (April, 48 desks, 32 chairs; May, 52 desks, 35 chairs; June, 56 desks, 38 chairs) if selling prices are reduced to $1,150 for desks and $450 for chairs, and advertising expenses are increased by 10% and remain at that level for all three months. The products’ variable cost will remain at $750 for desks and $250 for chairs. The sales staff will continue to earn a 10% commission, the fixed manufacturing costs per month will remain at $10,000 and other fixed expenses will remain at $6,000 per month.
Required
1. Prepare budgeted income statements for each of the months of April, May, and June that show the expected results from implementing the proposed changes. Use a three column format, with one column for each month.
2. Use the budgeted income statements from part 1 to recommend whether Santana Rey should implement the proposed changes. Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial statements often serve as a starting point in formulating budgets. Review Research In Motion’s financial statements to determine its cash paid for acquisitions of property, plant and equipment in the current year and the budgeted cash needed for such acquisitions in the next year.
Required
1. Which financial statement reports the amount of cash paid for acquisitions of property, plant, and equipment? Explain where on the statement this information is reported.
2. Indicate the amount of cash (a) paid for acquisitions of property, plant, and equipment in the year ended February 27, 2010, and (b) to be paid (budgeted for) next year under the assumption that annual acquisitions of property, plant and equipment equal 60% of the prior year’s net income.
3. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements for a year ending after February 27, 2010, from either its the SEC’s EDGAR database. Compare your answer for part 2 with actual cash paid for acquisitions of property, plant and equipment for that fiscal year. Compute the error, if any, in your estimate. Speculate as to why cash paid for acquisitions of property, plant and equipment was higher or lower than your estimate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
One source of cash savings for a company is improved management of inventory. To illustrate, assume that Research In Motion and Apple both have $200,000 per month in sales of one model of handheld devices in Canada, and both forecast this level of sales per month for the next 24 months. Also assume that both Research In Motion and Apple have a 20% contribution margin and equal fixed costs, and that cost of goods sold is the only variable cost. Assume that the main difference between Research In Motion and Apple is the distribution system. Research In Motion uses a just in time system and requires ending inventory of only 10% of next month’s sales in inventory at each month end. However, Apple is building an improved distribution system and currently requires 40% of next month’s sales in inventory at each month end.
Required
1. Compute the amount by which Apple can reduce its inventory level if it can match Research In Motion’s system of maintaining an inventory equal to 10% of next month’s sales.
2. Explain how the analysis in part 1 that shows ending inventory levels for both the 40% and 10% required inventory policies can help justify a just in time inventory system. You can assume a 15% interest cost for resources that are tied up in ending inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Both the budget process and budgets themselves can impact management actions, both positively and negatively. For instance, a common practice among not for profit organizations and government agencies is for management to spend any amounts remaining in a budget at the end of the budget period, a practice often called “use it or lose it.’’ The view is that if a department manager does not spend the budgeted amount, top management will reduce next year’s budget by the amount not spent. To avoid losing budget dollars, department managers often spend all budgeted amounts regardless of the value added to products or services. All of us pay for the costs associated with this budget system.
Required
Write a one half page report to a local not for profit organization or government agency offering a solution to the “use it or lose it” budgeting problem.